JP2025116119A - gaming machines - Google Patents

Abstract

[Problem] To provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of gaming.
[Solution] When the supply of operating power is started, main processing is executed, and a setting value update process is executed during the main processing. The main MPU sets a suggested operation flag 154 to "1" based on the operation of the left stop button and the operation of the start lever during the setting value update process. After the main processing ends and processing for progressing the game begins, the main MPU executes at least one of stopping play and automatic settlement based on the occurrence of a predetermined start trigger when the suggested operation flag 154 is set to "1." When at least one of stopping play and automatic settlement is executed when the suggested operation flag 154 is set to "1," the main MPU clears the suggested operation flag 154 to "0."
[Selected figure] Figure 48

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, pachinko machines have a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores gaming balls awarded to players. The gaming balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a gaming ball launcher and launched toward the gaming area in response to the player's launch operation. When a gaming ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the gaming ball is paid out from a payout device to the tray storage section. In addition, pachinko machines are also known that have a configuration in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section. In this case, gaming balls stored in the upper tray storage section are guided to the gaming ball launcher, and surplus gaming balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

In addition, in slot machines, when medals have been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. When the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control, causing the reels to start spinning. If the stop button is operated while the reels are spinning, the control means executes rotation stop control, causing the reels to stop spinning. If the reels stop spinning after stopping, and the result corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2015-047286 A

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, processing needs to be carried out appropriately, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention was made in consideration of the circumstances exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can perform processing optimally.

In order to solve the above problem, the present invention provides a control means for executing various processes,
a predetermined storage means for temporarily storing information when the various processes are executed by the control means;
Equipped with
The control means
a first predetermined process execution means for executing a first predetermined process among the various processes;
a second predetermined process execution means for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes;
Equipped with
The predetermined storage means
a first corresponding storage area into which information is written when the first predetermined process is being executed, but into which information is not written when the second predetermined process is being executed;
a second corresponding storage area into which information is written when the second predetermined process is being executed, but into which information is not written when the first predetermined process is being executed;
a predetermined save area in which predetermined save correspondence information used to execute the first predetermined process is saved when a situation in which the first predetermined process is being executed changes to a situation in which the second predetermined process is being executed;
Equipped with
The first predetermined process is executed when a process at the start of supply of operating power is started, the process being executed when the supply of operating power is started;
the second predetermined processing execution means includes an abnormality identification execution means that executes, as the second predetermined processing in the processing at the start of supply, an abnormality identification processing for identifying whether or not the content of information in a specific target area in the specific storage means that does not include the specific save area has changed from the content at the time of the previous stop of supply of operating power, and identifying that an information abnormality has occurred if the content has changed;
the predetermined save area is set as a storage area of a first address in the predetermined storage means, or as a storage area of a predetermined range of consecutive addresses from the first address so as to include the first address,
the specific target area is set as a storage area of a specific range of consecutive addresses from the next address to the final address of the specific save area in the specific storage means,
the predetermined storage means includes a predetermined corresponding storage area that is used in the abnormality identification process to identify whether the content of the information in the identified target area has changed from the content at the previous time when the supply of operating power was stopped,
The specific target area does not include the predetermined corresponding storage area.

The present invention enables processing to be carried out efficiently.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a slot machine according to a first embodiment. 1 is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front door open. FIG. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the symbols visible through the display window and the combination lines. FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and the benefits to be awarded. 10A is a front view of the common display area, and FIG. 10B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of information corresponding to the stop order displayed on the common display section. 10A and 10B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the relationship between the notification content of the stop order in the image display device and the display content of the stop order in the multi-purpose display unit. FIG. FIG. 2 is an electrical configuration diagram of the slot machine. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a setting mode of programs and data in a main ROM. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of a main RAM. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the setting manner of each area in the main RAM. 10 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by a main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by a main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing the lottery process for determining a role executed by the main MPU. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a lottery table for a normal mode. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the stopping order of the reels and the winning patterns that are achieved when the lottery table for the normal mode is selected. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the lottery table for the first RT mode. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the reel stopping order and the winning patterns that are achieved when the lottery table for the first RT mode is selected. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the lottery table for the second RT mode. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the stopping order of the reels and the winning patterns that are achieved when the lottery table for the second RT mode is selected. An explanatory diagram for explaining the lottery table for the internal RT state. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the reel stopping order and the winning patterns that are achieved when the lottery table for the internal RT state is selected. 1 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the game states and game zones that exist in a slot machine. FIG. A flowchart showing the first control processing of the game area executed by the main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing the response process executed by the main MPU when a game ends. A flowchart showing the second control processing of the game area executed by the main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing an ending handling process executed by the main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a preparation state process executed by the main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing the ART state processing executed by the main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a bonus process executed by the main MPU. A flowchart showing the bonus state processing executed by the main MPU. This is a flowchart showing the advantageous termination processing executed by the main MPU. This is a flowchart showing the initialization process of the favorable zone executed by the main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a management process executed by a main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a management execution process executed by a main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a process executed by the main MPU during a power outage. 10 is a flowchart showing a power restoration process executed by the main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a backup abnormality confirmation process executed by the main MPU. 10A to 10H are time charts showing how data in the leading area and data in registers other than the program counter in the main MPU are saved, and how this data is restored. 10 is a flowchart showing an all-clear processing executed by the main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a clearing process for non-specific control executed by the main MPU; 10A to 10F are time charts showing how the backup abnormality flag and the error state flag are released from a state in which they are set to "1." 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the types and combinations of bet notification sounds that are output in response to an increase in the number of gaming media bets. FIG. (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the production side ROM for controlling the output of bet alarm sounds, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the production side RAM for controlling the output of bet alarm sounds. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a work area for specific control for executing various processes. 10 is a flowchart showing a start waiting process executed by the main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a bet response process executed by the main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a bet command transmission process executed by the main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a bet notification sound setting process executed by a performance-side MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing the process of receiving and responding to a third bet command executed by the production side MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a bet notification sound output process executed by the production side MPU. FIG. 10A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display modes of the left and right segment displays in the setting confirmation display, and FIG. 10B is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation process executed by the main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a display unit control process executed by a main MPU. 10A to 10F are time charts showing how the setting confirmation display is performed. 10 is a flowchart showing a reel control process executed by the main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a notification control process executed by a main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a stepping motor control process executed by a main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a motor control process executed by a main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a stop order corresponding display start process executed by the main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a step-out monitoring process executed by the main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a step-out response process executed by the main MPU; 10A to 10J are time charts showing how stop order-based displays are made on the dual-purpose display unit. 10 is a flowchart showing a lottery table selection process executed by the main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a lottery mode control process executed by the main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a partial clear process executed by the main MPU. 10A to 10F are time charts showing transitions to the internal RT state. (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining the display mode of the credit display section when the setting value is being updated, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining the display mode of the dual-purpose display section when the display for setting suggested actions is being performed. 10 is a flowchart showing a setting value update process executed by the main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for setting the start of a blinking display executed by the main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing an update process executed by the main MPU. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the winning probability of the suggested action in the first to third suggested action lottery tables. 10 is a flowchart showing a first suggested operation process executed by the main MPU. 10A is a flowchart showing the automatic settlement process executed by the main MPU, and FIG. 10B is a flowchart showing the stop process executed by the main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a second suggested operation process executed by the main MPU. (a) to (g) are time charts showing how stopping is performed as a suggestive action at the end of the BB state. (a) to (h) are time charts showing how a suggested action is performed at the end of a favorable zone when the setting is "5" or higher and at least one of the first ending flag and the second ending flag is set to "1." FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a configuration for outputting various signals from a main MPU to a data counter. 10 is a flowchart showing a setting process at the start executed by the main MPU; 10 is a flowchart showing a data output process executed by a main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a medium providing process executed by the main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a dispensing signal control process executed by the main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing an external output setting process executed by the main MPU. 10 is a time chart showing how signals rise and fall during states (a) to (g). FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a setting mode of each area of a main RAM in the second embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a process executed by the main MPU during a power outage. 10 is a flowchart showing a backup abnormality confirmation process executed by the main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a power recovery process executed by a main MPU in the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of a main RAM in a fourth embodiment. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the setting manner of each area in the main RAM. 10A is a flowchart showing processing executed by the main MPU during a power outage, and FIG. 10B is a flowchart showing processing for checksum executed by the main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a checksum calculation process executed by the main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a backup abnormality confirmation process executed by the main MPU. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of a main RAM in a fifth embodiment. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the setting manner of each area in the main RAM. 10 is a flowchart showing a checksum process executed by the main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a specific checksum calculation process executed by the main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a non-specific checksum calculation process executed by the main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a backup abnormality confirmation process executed by the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process executed by a main MPU in the sixth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process executed by a main MPU in the seventh embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a partial clear process executed by a main MPU in the eighth embodiment. 10A to 10F are time charts showing transitions to the internal RT state. 13 is a flowchart showing a second suggested operation process executed by the main MPU in the ninth embodiment. (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a work area for non-specific control for displaying setting values in the 10th embodiment, (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining the display mode of the ratio display when a setting confirmation display is being executed, and (c) an explanatory diagram for explaining the display mode of the ratio display when a setting value update display is being executed. 10 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process executed by the main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for setting the start of a blinking display executed by the main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing an update process executed by the main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a management execution process executed by a main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a setting value display process executed by the main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a ratio display process executed by the main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a ratio data output process executed by the main MPU. 23 is a flowchart showing a setting process at the start executed by the main MPU in the eleventh embodiment. 10A to 10E are time charts showing how output control of the in-state signal and the closing signal is performed. 20 is a flowchart showing a dispensing signal control process executed by the main MPU in the twelfth embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing an external output setting process executed by the main MPU. 10A to 10F are time charts showing how the end timing of a game in which output control of a payout signal is performed is delayed. FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a second calculation target area in the thirteenth embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a setting process at the start executed by the main MPU; 10 is a flowchart showing a data output process executed by a main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a standby setting process executed by a main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for a signal during a state executed by the main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by a main MPU. (a) to (i) are time charts showing how output control of the payout signal, the deposit signal, and the first state signal is performed in a situation where the bonus state ends. (a) to (i) are time charts showing how output control of the payout signal, the deposit signal, and the first state signal is performed in a situation where the bonus state is started.

First Embodiment
A first embodiment of the present invention applied to a slot machine 10, which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. Fig. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, Fig. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and Fig. 3 is a front view of the cabinet 11.

As shown in Figures 2 and 3, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 that forms its outer shell. The housing 11 is formed by fixing multiple wooden panels together, giving it an overall box-like shape that is open to the front.

As shown in Figures 1 and 2, a front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11. The front door 12 is supported by the housing 11 around a pivot 15 on the left side of the housing 11, allowing the interior space of the housing 11 to be opened and closed. The front door 12 is locked so that it cannot be opened by a locking device 13 on the back side of the front door 12, and this locked state can be released by unlocking the key cylinder 14 with a specified key.

As shown in Figure 1, a gaming panel 20 is provided near the upper center of the front door 12. The gaming panel 20 has three vertically elongated display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R arranged side by side. The display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R are made of a transparent or translucent material, and the interior of the slot machine 10 can be seen through each of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R.

As shown in Figures 2 and 3, the interior of the housing 11 is divided into two sections, upper and lower, by a partition plate 11a, and a reel unit 31 is attached to the top of the partition plate 11a. The reel unit 31 includes a cylindrical left reel 32L, a center reel 32M, and a right reel 32R. Each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is rotatably supported so that its central axis coincides with the axis of rotation of the corresponding reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. The axes of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R are arranged on the same axis extending approximately horizontally, and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponds one-to-one with each display window 21L, 21M, and 21R. Therefore, a portion of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is visible through the corresponding display window 21L, 21M, and 21R. Furthermore, when reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed through display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R as if they are moving from top to bottom.

As shown in Figure 1, a start lever 41 is provided on the lower left side of the gaming panel 20, which is operated to start the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. When this start lever 41 is operated when a predetermined number or more of gaming media, either medals or virtual medals, have been bet, each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R begins to spin simultaneously.

Stop buttons 42, 43, and 44 are provided to the right of the start lever 41 and can be operated to individually stop each of the spinning reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Each stop button 42, 43, and 44 is located directly below the display window 21L, 21M, and 21R corresponding to the reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to be stopped. Each stop button 42, 43, and 44 becomes capable of stopping the left reel 32L once a predetermined time has elapsed since the reel began spinning.

One game (play) is played from the time when the start lever 41 is operated to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, until the time when the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped by the operation of each stop button 42, 43, 44, and the time when various processes such as the awarding of gaming media and management of the game status are completed.

A medal insertion slot 45 for inserting medals is provided below and to the right of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R. As shown in Figure 2, medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 45 are guided by a selector 52 provided on the back of the front door 12 to a hopper device 53 if acceptance is permitted, or to a medal tray 59 via a medal ejection slot 58 provided at the bottom front of the front door 12 if acceptance is prohibited (see Figure 1).

The hopper device 53 has the function of paying out medals stored in the storage tank to a medal tray 59 through a medal discharge port 58 when a winning combination corresponding to the award of game media is achieved on the main line ML (described below). The hopper device 53 is equipped with a payout device for dispensing medals stored in the storage tank toward the medal discharge port 58, and a payout detection sensor for detecting medals paid out from the payout device. When medals need to be paid out, the payout device is driven and controlled to dispense the medals, and the dispensed medals are detected by the payout detection sensor. When the number of medals detected by the payout detection sensor reaches the number of medals to be dispensed, the payout of medals from the payout device is stopped. As shown in FIG. 1, a return button 46 is provided below the medal insertion port 45, which is pressed when medals inserted into the medal insertion port 45 become stuck in the selector 52.

A credit insertion button 47 is provided below and to the left of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R, for inserting the maximum number of credited virtual medals that can be bet at one time. In this slot machine 10, the specified number of gaming media (medals or virtual medals) that can be bet (i.e., bet setting) at one time is "3."

When the credit insertion button 47 is operated when the current number of bets is "0" and three or more virtual medals have been stored, the number of virtual medals will decrease by three and the number of bets will become "3." When the credit insertion button 47 is operated when the current number of bets is "1" and two or more virtual medals have been stored, the number of virtual medals will decrease by two and the number of bets will become "3." When the credit insertion button 47 is operated when the current number of bets is "2" and one or more virtual medals have been stored, the number of bets will decrease by one virtual medal and the number of bets will become "3."

If the credit insertion button 47 is operated when the number of stored virtual medals is less than the difference between the number of available bets (specifically, "3") and the current number of bets, the number of bets will increase by the number of virtual medals, and the number of virtual medals will become 0.

A settlement button 51 is provided to the left of the start lever 41. This slot machine 10 has a credit function that stores and stores, as virtual medals, any surplus medals inserted up to a predetermined maximum value (50 medals) and medals paid out when a prize is won. If the settlement button 51 is operated while virtual medals are stored and stored, the virtual medals are paid out as real medals from the medal outlet 58.

As shown in Figures 2 and 3, a power supply unit 54 is provided inside the cabinet 11 to the left of the hopper unit 53. The power supply unit 54 is provided with a power switch 55 that is operated when powering on or off, a reset button 56 for resetting various states of the slot machine 10, and a setting key insertion hole 57 into which a setting key held by the amusement hall manager is inserted and operated to change the setting value of the slot machine 10 within the range of "1" to "6."

Next, we will explain the symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Figure 4 shows the arrangement of symbols on the left reel 32L, center reel 32M, and right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a row on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Furthermore, numbers ranging from "0" to "20" are assigned to correspond to each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, these numbers are used by the main control device 70 (described below) to identify the symbols visible through the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R, and are not actually assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, these numbers will be used in the following explanation.

There are seven types of symbols: "Bell" (e.g., position 20 on left reel 32L), "Replay" (e.g., position 19 on left reel 32L), "Watermelon" (e.g., position 18 on left reel 32L), "Red 7" (e.g., position 15 on left reel 32L), "BAR" (e.g., position 10 on left reel 32L), "Cherry" (e.g., position 9 on left reel 32L), and "White 7" (e.g., position 5 on left reel 32L). The number and arrangement order of each symbol differs on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Figure 5 is a front view of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R. Each display window 21L, 21M, and 21R is formed so that three of the 21 symbols on the corresponding reel 32L, 32M, and 32R are visible in their entirety. Therefore, when each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped, 3 x 3 = 9 symbols are visible through the display window 21L, 21M, and 21R.

In this slot machine 10, a single main line ML is set to connect the positions where the symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R are visible. The main line ML is a line connecting the middle symbols on the left reel 32L, the middle symbols on the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbols on the right reel 32R. When the specified number of gaming media have been bet, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R begin to spin, and if a winning combination is achieved on the main line ML, the player is awarded one of the following benefits: gaming media, a replay, or a change in gaming state.

In other words, in this slot machine 10, only one main line ML is set as a line on which a win can be achieved. This main line ML is set as a line that extends in a straight line. Therefore, even if a winning combination of symbols is achieved on a line that extends in a straight line, such as subline SL1 connecting the upper symbol on the left reel 32L, the middle symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the lower symbol on the right reel 32R; subline SL2 connecting the upper symbol on the left reel 32L, the upper symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the upper symbol on the right reel 32R; subline SL3 connecting the lower symbol on the left reel 32L, the lower symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the lower symbol on the right reel 32R; and subline SL4 connecting the lower symbol on the left reel 32L, the middle symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the upper symbol on the right reel 32R, no winning combination will be achieved.

The following explains the relationship between winning symbol combinations and the benefits awarded when a prize is awarded, with reference to Figure 6. Figure 6 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the relationship between winning symbol combinations and the benefits awarded when a prize is awarded.

The minor winning combinations that award gaming media include the first supplementary winning combination, the second supplementary winning combination, the third supplementary winning combination, the first bell winning combination, the second bell winning combination, the first watermelon winning combination, the second watermelon winning combination, and the cherry winning combination. Specifically, a first supplementary winning combination occurs when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "watermelon" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol. A second supplementary winning combination occurs when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "watermelon" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol. If the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L along the main line ML is a "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the center reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, the third supplementary win will occur. If any of the first to third supplementary wins occurs, the number of gaming media to be awarded will be "1".

If the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, a first bell win will occur. If the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "replay" symbol, a second bell win will occur. If either the first or second bell win occurs, the number of gaming media to be awarded will be "11".

If the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "watermelon" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "watermelon" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "watermelon" symbol, a first watermelon win is awarded. If the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "watermelon" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "watermelon" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "BAR" symbol, a second watermelon win is awarded. If either the first or second watermelon win is awarded, the number of game media to be awarded will be "5". If the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "cherry" symbol, a cherry win is awarded regardless of the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R. If a cherry win is awarded, the number of game media to be awarded will be "2".

Winnings that grant the privilege of replay, which allows you to play the next game without betting gaming media, include the regular replay winnings, the first RT replay winnings, the second RT replay winnings, the first fall replay winnings, and the second fall replay winnings. In more detail, a normal replay win occurs when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "replay" symbol; when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol; or when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "watermelon" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol.

If the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "replay" symbol, a first RT replay win will be awarded. If the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "watermelon" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "replay" symbol, a second RT replay win will be awarded.

If the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "replay" symbol, the first fall replay win will be awarded. If the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, the second fall replay win will be awarded.

If any of the above replay wins are achieved, a replay bonus will be awarded, which allows you to play the next game without having to bet any gaming media. Specifically, if any of the replay wins are achieved in a game where you bet "3" gaming media, you will be able to start playing the next game with "3" gaming media betted, without having to bet any gaming media.

The first RT replay win, second RT replay win, first fall replay win, and second fall replay win not only trigger the awarding of the replay win bonus, but also trigger a transition to a lottery mode. In this slot machine 10, multiple lottery modes are set in the role lottery process (Figure 17) so that the types of roles to be drawn and the winning probability of each role differ, and a transition between these lottery modes occurs when a replay win, which triggers a transition to a lottery mode, is achieved. The contents of each lottery mode and the conditions for transitioning to each lottery mode will be explained in detail later.

State transition wins, which only result in a transition in game state, include the 1st BB win, 2nd BB win, 3rd BB win, 4th BB win, 1st RB win, and 2nd RB win. Specifically, if the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "red 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the center reel 32M is a "red 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "red 7" symbol, a 1st BB win is achieved. If the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "white 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the center reel 32M is a "white 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "white 7" symbol, a 2nd BB win is achieved. If the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "red 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the center reel 32M is a "red 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "white 7" symbol on the main line ML, a third BB is won. If the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "white 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the center reel 32M is a "white 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "red 7" symbol on the main line ML, a first RB is won. If the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "white 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the center reel 32M is a "white 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "BAR" symbol, the second RB wins.

When a first BB win, second BB win, third BB win, or fourth BB win is achieved, the game state transitions to the BB state. Furthermore, when a first RB win or second RB win is achieved, the game state transitions to the RB state. Both the BB state and the RB state are considered bonus states. The bonus state is a game state in which the expected number of game media awarded per unit number of games is higher than in game states other than the bonus state. Specifically, a combination that enables the first bell win is won with a higher probability (e.g., approximately 1/1.5) than in other game states, and when such a combination is won, the first bell win is achieved regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the timing of the stop operation of the stop buttons 42-44 relative to the rotation positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Meanwhile, the number of game media required to start one game in the bonus state is the same as in other game states. Therefore, in the bonus state, the expected net increase in gaming media per unit number of games is higher than in gaming states other than the bonus state. Note that the number of gaming media required to start one game in the bonus state may be configured to be fewer than in other gaming states, and if the expected net increase in gaming media per unit number of games is higher in the bonus state than in gaming states other than the bonus state, the number of gaming media required to start one game in the bonus state may be configured to be greater than in other gaming states.

Of the bonus states, the BB state continues over multiple games and ends when an end condition is met based on the occurrence of an event corresponding to the game's execution. The end condition can be any, but in this slot machine 10, the end condition is set to be that the total number of gaming media awarded since the BB state began is equal to or greater than the BB end reference number (specifically, "350"). Alternatively, the end condition may be met when the number of games played in the BB state reaches the BB end reference number.

Of the bonus states, the RB state continues across multiple games and ends when an end condition is met based on the occurrence of an event corresponding to the game's execution. The end condition can be set arbitrarily, but in this slot machine 10, the end condition is set when the total number of gaming media awarded since the RB state began is equal to or greater than the RB end reference number (specifically, 150). This RB end reference number is smaller than the BB end reference number. Therefore, the BB state is a more advantageous gaming state for the player than the RB state. Alternatively, the end condition may be met when the number of games played in the RB state reaches the RB end reference number. In this case, by setting the RB end reference number to a number smaller than the BB end reference number, the BB state can be made a more advantageous gaming state for the player than the RB state.

Next, we will explain the devices used to perform various notifications and effects.

As shown in FIG. 1, an upper lamp 61 and a speaker 62 are provided at the top of the front door 12, as well as an image display device 63. If an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, the upper lamp 61 is controlled to emit light in a manner corresponding to the abnormality, and is also controlled to emit light in a manner corresponding to the winning result. The upper lamp 61 is also controlled to emit light so that a light effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 63 is produced. The speakers 62 are provided as a pair on the left and right, and are controlled to output sound or audio corresponding to the abnormality if an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, and are also controlled to output sound or audio corresponding to the winning result. The speakers 62 are also controlled to output sound so that a sound effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 63 is produced.

The image display device 63 has a display surface and is configured as a liquid crystal display device with a liquid crystal display, but is not limited to a liquid crystal display device and may be another display device with a display surface such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, or may be a dot matrix display. If an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, the display is controlled so that an image corresponding to the abnormality is displayed on the display surface. The image display device 63 is also controlled so that images corresponding to the winning combination results in the internal lottery and the winning results in each game are displayed on the display surface. In other words, the image display device 63 executes display effects.

The gaming panel 20 of the front door 12 is provided with a credit display unit 65 below the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R. The credit display unit 65 displays the number of stored virtual medals and also displays the slot machine 10's setting value when the setting value is updated or confirmed; a dual-purpose display unit 66 displays the number of gaming media awarded when a small winning combination is achieved and, when the image display device 63 notifies the user of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, displays a corresponding display; and a favorable zone display unit 67 displays a display indicating whether the gaming zone is a favorable zone. The credit display unit 65 includes a left-side segment display 65a and a right-side segment display 65b arranged horizontally. Each of the segment displays 65a and 65b is a 7-segment display, and each segment of these segment displays 65a and 65b uses a single-color LED, such as green.

Figure 7(a) is a front view of the common display area 68 in which the combined display unit 66 and advantageous zone display unit 67 are provided. The common display area 68 combines the combined display unit 66, which consists of a left-side segment display 66a and a right-side segment display 66b, which are seven-segment displays, arranged side by side in the horizontal direction, as shown in Figure 7(a), and the advantageous zone display unit 67, which consists of a single light-emitting element.

If any of the small prize winnings (first to third supplementary prize winnings, first bell prize winning, second bell prize winning, first watermelon prize winning, second watermelon prize winning, or cherry prize winning) corresponding to the awarding of game media is achieved, the number of game media awarded corresponding to that small prize winning will be displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66 at the end of the game in which that small prize winning was achieved. Specifically, if any of the first to third supplementary prize winnings is achieved, the left segment display 66a will become invisible and the right segment display 66b will display "1," indicating that "1" game media has been awarded. If either the first bell winning or the second bell winning is achieved, the left segment display 66a and the right segment display 66b will display "1," indicating that "11" game media have been awarded. Furthermore, if either the first watermelon win or the second watermelon win is achieved, the left segment display 66a will go dark and the right segment display 66b will display "5", indicating that "5" gaming media have been awarded. Furthermore, if a cherry win is achieved, the left segment display 66a will go dark and the right segment display 66b will display "2", indicating that "2" gaming media have been awarded.

On the other hand, even if a win that does not award gaming media occurs, such as any of the replay wins, any of the BB wins, and any of the RB wins, the display corresponding to that win will not be made on the dual-purpose display unit 66, and in this case, each of the segment indicators 66a, 66b will remain in a hidden state. The display of the number of gaming media awarded on the dual-purpose display unit 66 will end at the start of the game following the game in which that display was made, and each of the segment indicators 66a, 66b will return to a hidden state at the start of that next game.

When the image display device 63 displays a stop order notification to notify the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, a stop order corresponding display is displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66. In the stop order corresponding display, information corresponding to the stop order notified on the image display device 63 is displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66. Figure 7(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the information corresponding to the stop order displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66. As shown in FIG. 7(b), in this slot machine 10, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R notified by the image display device 63 includes a stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the center reel 32M, and the third stop is the right reel 32R; a stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the center reel 32M; a stop order in which the first stop is the center reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R; and a stop order in which the first stop is the center reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. There are stop orders in which the second stop is on the right reel 32R and the third stop is on the left reel 32L, stop orders in which the first stop is on the right reel 32R, the second stop is on the left reel 32L and the third stop is on the center reel 32M, stop orders in which the first stop is on the right reel 32R, the second stop is on the center reel 32M and the third stop is on the left reel 32L, stop orders in which the first stop is on the left reel 32L and the rest are optional, stop orders in which the first stop is on the center reel 32M and the rest are optional, and stop orders in which the first stop is on the right reel 32R and the rest are optional.

The stop order notification on the image display device 63 can be executed when a role including the first bell winning data is won in the role lottery process, when a role including the first RT replay winning data is won, when a role including the second RT replay winning data is won, when a role including the first fall replay winning data is won, or when a role including the second fall replay winning data is won. Specifically, when a role including the first bell winning data is won, a first bell win is achieved if reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop in the stop order corresponding to the current winning role from among the above stop orders. Then, when a first bell win is achieved, the gaming medium "11" is awarded to the player, as already explained.

If a winning combination containing first RT replay winning data is achieved, a first RT replay winning combination will occur if reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop in the stopping order corresponding to the current winning combination from among the above-mentioned stop orders. If a first RT replay winning combination is achieved, the lottery mode will transition to first RT mode, in which it is easier to win a combination containing any replay winning data (i.e., it is easier to win any replay winning combination) than in normal mode. If a winning combination containing second RT replay winning data is achieved, a second RT replay winning combination will occur if reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop in the stopping order corresponding to the current winning combination from among the above-mentioned stop orders. If a second RT replay winning combination is achieved, the lottery mode will transition to second RT mode, in which it is easier to win a combination containing any replay winning data (i.e., it is easier to win any replay winning combination) than in first RT mode.

If a winning combination including first fall replay winning data is achieved, the first fall replay winning will be avoided if reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop in the stopping order corresponding to the current winning combination from among the above-mentioned stop sequences. If the first fall replay winning combination is achieved, the lottery mode will transition from first RT mode to normal mode, but this transition to normal mode can be avoided by avoiding the first fall replay winning combination. Also, if a winning combination including second fall replay winning data is achieved, the second fall replay winning will be avoided if reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop in the stopping order corresponding to the current winning combination from among the above-mentioned stop sequences. If the second fall replay winning combination is achieved, the lottery mode will transition from second RT mode to first RT mode, but this transition to first RT mode can be avoided by avoiding the second fall replay winning combination.

When any of the above stop orders is notified by the image display device 63, the left segment display 66a of the dual-purpose display unit 66 remains in a non-display state, while the right segment display 66b displays the stop order corresponding to the stop order of the notified item. This display content is as shown in Figure 7(b), and the stop order display content of the dual-purpose display unit 66 is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the stop order notification content of the image display device 63. However, this is not limited to this, and multiple types of display content of the dual-purpose display unit 66 may be set to correspond to some or all of the stop order notification content of the image display device 63.

The display content of the stop order on the dual-purpose display unit 66 differs from the display content that is displayed when the dual-purpose display unit 66 displays a display corresponding to the awarding of gaming media. This makes it easier to distinguish whether the content displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66 corresponds to the number of gaming media awarded or the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Figures 8(a) and 8(b) are explanatory diagrams illustrating the relationship between the notification content of the stop order on the image display device 63 and the display content of the stop order on the dual-purpose display unit 66.

When the image display device 63 notifies the stop order, as shown in Figure 8(a), the image display device 63 displays the same number of unit display images G1-G3 as the number of stop operations required to end the game, and each unit display image G1-G3 displays an image corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Specifically, a left unit display image G1 corresponding to the left reel 32L, a middle unit display image G2 corresponding to the center reel 32M, and a right unit display image G3 corresponding to the right reel 32R are displayed. FIG. 8(a) shows the notification of the stop order when the first stop is on the center reel 32M, the second stop is on the left reel 32L, and the third stop is on the right reel 32R, so the left unit display image G1 displays an image of "2" corresponding to the stop order of the left reel 32L, the middle unit display image G2 displays an image of "1" corresponding to the stop order of the middle reel 32M, and the right unit display image G3 displays an image of "3" corresponding to the stop order of the right reel 32R.

As described above, the image display device 63 displays an image notifying the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, whereas the combined display unit 66 displays an "L" corresponding to the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, as shown in FIG. 8(b). In other words, the image display device 63 displays unit display images G1-G3 corresponding to the number of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and displays an image corresponding to the stop order of the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in each unit display image G1-G3, whereas the combined display unit 66 displays an image unrelated to the number of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. This allows the player to focus on the display content on the image display device 63, even if the combined display unit 66 displays a display corresponding to the notification of the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

The display range of the dual-purpose display unit 66 is narrower than that of the image display unit 63. This also makes it possible to reduce the player's attention to the dual-purpose display unit 66 compared to the image display unit 63. Furthermore, the dual-purpose display unit 66 is located on the opposite side of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R, which allow the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be viewed, from the image display unit 63. This means that the dual-purpose display unit 66 is positioned at a distance from the image display unit 63, which also makes it possible to reduce the player's attention to the dual-purpose display unit 66.

When the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is announced, the image display device 63 starts announcing the stop order after a win/loss determination has been made. Then, when the stop operation for reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is enabled, the stop order corresponding display on the combined display unit 66 starts. The stop order announcements on the image display device 63 and the stop order corresponding display on the combined display unit 66 end when a stop command is issued for all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game for which the stop order announcement and stop order corresponding display are executed. Note that the stop order announcements on the image display device 63 and the stop order corresponding display on the combined display unit 66 may start simultaneously or nearly simultaneously, and the order in which the stop order announcements and stop order corresponding display start may be reversed.

The dual-purpose display unit 66 is located in the center of the common display area 68, while the advantageous zone display unit 67 is located in a corner of the common display area 68. The advantageous zone display unit 67 is a display unit for notifying that the gaming zone is an advantageous zone between the normal zone and the advantageous zone. An advantageous zone is either a zone in which the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified, which allows for the achievement of an advantageous win for the player when different winning combinations are achieved depending on the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, or a zone in which the probability of transitioning to an ART state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is higher than in a normal zone. On the other hand, the normal interval is an interval in which the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not announced, which allows for a winning combination advantageous to the player when different winning combinations are achieved depending on the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and is an interval in which the probability of transitioning to the ART state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is lower than in the advantageous interval, or a transition to the ART state does not occur.

When the conditions for transitioning to the advantageous zone are met in the normal zone and a transition to the advantageous zone occurs, the advantageous zone display unit 67 lights up, thereby initiating notification that the zone is now advantageous. Furthermore, when the conditions for transitioning to the normal zone are met in the advantageous zone and a transition to the normal zone occurs, the advantageous zone display unit 67 turns off, thereby ending notification that the zone is now advantageous. This makes it possible to notify the amusement hall manager or other person that the zone is now advantageous. Furthermore, the dual-purpose display unit 66, which is integrated into the common display area 68, lights up when a gaming medium is awarded and turns off when the next game begins. It also lights up when the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is displayed on the image display device 63 and turns off when a stop command is issued for all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in that game. Therefore, by locating the advantageous zone display unit 67 within the common display area 68, it is possible to prevent it from being too conspicuous to players, and it is possible to actively create a situation in which only the advantageous zone display unit 67 is lit in the common display area 68 when the advantageous zone is in operation, making it easier for the gaming hall manager to check the advantageous zone display unit 67.

Instead of maintaining the favorable zone display unit 67 lit during favorable zones, the favorable zone display unit 67 may be configured to flash at a predetermined interval during favorable zones. Furthermore, other displays, such as liquid crystal displays, may be used as the combined display unit 66 and the favorable zone display unit 67.

The slot machine 10 is equipped with various control devices. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, a main control device 70 is provided above the reel unit 31. The main control device 70 is attached to the back panel 11b, which forms the back surface of the cabinet 11. The main control device 70 is configured by housing a main control board 71 in a board box 81. An MPU 72 and a ratio display 85, which displays information to notify game history management results, are mounted on one of the board surfaces of the main control board 71. The board box 81 is transparent so that the MPU 72 and ratio display 85 housed therein can be viewed from outside the board box 81. Note that while the board box 81 is colorless and transparent, it may also be colored and transparent as long as the MPU 72 and ratio display 85 housed therein can be viewed from outside the board box 81. The main control device 70 is mounted on the back panel 11b of the cabinet 11 so that the opposing wall 82 of the board box 81 that faces the element mounting surface of the main control board 71 faces the front of the slot machine 10. Therefore, by opening the front door 12 toward the front of the slot machine 10 relative to the cabinet 11 and exposing the internal space of the cabinet 11, it becomes possible to visually observe the opposing wall 82 of the board box 81, and also to visually observe the MPU 72 and ratio display 85 through the opposing wall 82.

Figure 9 is a front view of the ratio display 85. As shown in Figure 9, the identifier display section 86 and the ratio display section 87 are arranged horizontally on the display surface of the ratio display 85. The identifier display section 86 includes a left segment display 86a and a right segment display 86b, which are seven-segment displays, and an auxiliary display section 86c for the identifier. The ratio display section 87 includes a left segment display 87a and a right segment display 87b, which are seven-segment displays, and an auxiliary display section 87c for the ratio. Each of the segment displays 86a, 86b, 87a, and 87b displays not only the numbers "0" through "9" but also various characters, including alphabetic characters. The slot machine 10 uses the ratio display 85 to notify the results of game history management; the content of this notification will be described in detail later. The display of the game history management results on the display surface of the ratio display 85 is visible through the opposing wall 82 of the base box 81. The ratio display 85 may be a liquid crystal display device or an organic EL display.

As shown in FIG. 3 , the board box 81 is formed by combining multiple case bodies, one behind the other. These multiple case bodies are provided with connecting portions 83 that prevent separation of the case bodies and leave a mark when the case bodies are separated. Multiple connecting portions 83 are arranged side by side along one side of the roughly rectangular board box 81. As a result, even if some connecting portions 83 are used to prevent separation of the case bodies and some of the case bodies are separated by destroying those connecting portions 83, separation of the case bodies can be prevented again by subsequently connecting other connecting portions 83. Furthermore, since the connecting portions 83 are destroyed when the case bodies are separated, leaving a mark, it is possible to visually check the connecting portions 83 to determine whether the case bodies have been separated fraudulently. Furthermore, a sealing sticker 84 is affixed to another side of the board box 81, other than the side along which the connecting portions 83 are arranged, spanning the boundary between the case bodies. When the sealing sticker 84 is peeled off, an adhesive layer remains on the case body. This makes it possible to leave a trace if the sealing seal 84 is peeled off when the case body is separated.

As shown in FIG. 2, the slot machine 10 is equipped with a performance control device 90 in addition to the main control device 70. The performance control device 90 is placed on the front door 12, stacked behind the image display device 63. The performance control device 90 controls the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 based on commands received from the main control device 70. Like the main control device 70, the performance control device 90 is configured by housing a control board in a board box.

Next, the electrical configuration of this slot machine 10 will be explained based on the block diagram in Figure 10.

As already explained, the main control board 71 of the main control device 70 is equipped with an MPU 72. The MPU 72 is equipped with a ROM 73 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 72, a RAM 74 that is memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 73, a random number circuit 75 that sequentially updates random numbers within a predetermined numerical range based on a clock signal output from a clock circuit, and a clock circuit that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency. The MPU 72 also incorporates an interrupt circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like. It is not essential that the ROM 73 and RAM 74 be integrated into a single chip for the MPU 72; they may each be integrated into separate chips.

The MPU 72 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 72 is connected to various sensors, including the reel unit 31, a start detection sensor 41a that detects operation of the start lever 41, stop detection sensors 42a, 43a, and 44a that individually detect operation of each stop button 42, 43, and 44, an inserted medal detection sensor 45a that detects medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 45, a credit insertion detection sensor 47a that individually detects operation of the credit insertion button 47, a door open detection sensor 48a that detects the open state of the front door 12, a settlement detection sensor 51a that detects operation of the settlement button 51, a payout detection sensor for the hopper device 53, a reset detection sensor that detects operation of the reset button 56 provided on the power supply device 54, and a setting key detection sensor that detects insertion of a setting key into the setting key insertion hole 57. Signals from each of these sensors are input to the MPU 72.

The output side of the MPU 72 is connected to the reel unit 31, the selector drive unit 52a provided on the selector 52, the payout motor of the hopper device 53, the credit display unit 65, the dual-purpose display unit 66, the advantageous zone display unit 67, the presentation control device 90, and other components. In each game, the MPU 72 controls the rotation and drive of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R of the reel unit 31. The selector 52 has the function of detecting medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 45 with the inserted medal detection sensor 45a and then guiding them to the hopper device 53 if acceptance is permitted, or discharging them into the medal tray 59 without detection by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a if acceptance is prohibited. The selector drive unit 52a has the function of switching the state of the selector 52 between an acceptance permitted state and an acceptance prohibited state, specifically by operating the path switching piece provided on the selector 52 between an acceptance permitted position and an acceptance prohibited position. The MPU 72 switches the state of the selector 52 between an acceptance permission state and an acceptance prohibition state by switching between the output state and the stop state of the drive signal to the selector drive unit 52a.

When a small winning combination is achieved and medals are paid out, the MPU 72 controls the operation of the hopper device 53. The MPU 72 also controls the display of the credit display unit 65 to display the number of stored virtual medals. When a setting value of the slot machine 10 is updated or confirmed, the MPU 72 also controls the display of the credit display unit 65 to display the setting value. When game media are awarded, the MPU 72 also controls the display of the dual-purpose display unit 66 to display the number of game media that have been awarded. The MPU 72 also controls the display of the advantageous zone display unit 67 to notify players that the game is in an advantageous zone when a notification start trigger occurs. The MPU 72 also sends commands to the performance control device 90 at each timing of each game, and when sending a command to the performance control device 90 to notify the image display device 63 of the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the MPU 72 controls the display of the dual-purpose display unit 66 to display the content of the notification. In this case, direct display control of the image display device 63 is performed by the presentation control device 90, while direct display control of the dual-purpose display unit 66 is performed by the MPU 72. In other words, direct display control is performed by the presentation control device 90 for the image display device 63, which is the target of relatively complex display control, and direct display control is performed by the MPU 72 for the dual-purpose display unit 66, which is the target of relatively simple display control. This reduces the processing load on the MPU 72, while making it possible to perform both displays that emphasize increasing attention to the presentation and displays that emphasize reliability. The MPU 72 controls the display of the ratio display 85 so that a display corresponding to the game management results is performed.

An external terminal board 95 is connected to the output side of the MPU 72, which relays signal output from the MPU 72 to an external device, the data counter DC. The MPU 72 outputs information regarding the number of gaming media inserted, the number of gaming media awarded, the gaming status, and the gaming section to the data counter DC via the external terminal board 95.

A power outage monitoring circuit (not shown) provided in the power supply 54 is connected to the input side of the MPU 72. The power supply 54 is equipped with a power supply unit and a power outage monitoring circuit that supply drive power to the main control unit 70 and other electronic devices in the slot machine 10. The power outage monitoring circuit monitors the voltage applied to the power supply unit from an external power source and outputs a power outage signal to the MPU 72 if the voltage drops below a reference voltage. The MPU 72 executes power outage processing upon receiving the power outage signal and enables the system to return to the processing state before the power outage after power is restored. The power supply 54 also has a power outage power supply unit that supplies backup power to the RAM 74 as power during power outage when the supply of operating power from the external power source is cut off. As a result, even when the supply of operating power from the external power source is cut off, data is stored and maintained in the RAM 74 as long as the power outage power supply unit can supply backup power (for example, for one or two days).

The performance control device 90 is equipped with a performance control board 91 for controlling the execution of various notifications and performances. The performance control board 91 is equipped with an MPU 92. The MPU 92 contains a ROM 93 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 92, and a RAM 94 that temporarily stores various data when the control programs stored in the ROM 93 are executed. It also contains a clock circuit that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an interrupt circuit, a data input/output circuit, a random number generation circuit, and other circuits.

It is not essential that the ROM 93 and RAM 94 be integrated into a single chip for the MPU 92; they may each be integrated into a separate chip. Furthermore, while backup power is not supplied to the RAM 94 from the power-off power supply unit of the power supply device 54 when the supply of operating power from the external power source is cut off, backup power may be supplied to the RAM 94.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. As already explained, the MPU 72 of the main control unit 70 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92, and various commands are received from the MPU 72. The upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92. Based on commands received from the MPU 72 of the main control unit 70, the MPU 92 controls the light emission of the upper lamp 61, the sound output of the speaker 62, and the display of the image display device 63, thereby enabling various notifications and performances to be performed.

The performance control board 91 is equipped with a video display processor (VDP), character ROM, video RAM, and other components, not shown, in addition to the MPU 92. The VDP is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device that serves as an LCD display driver incorporated in the image display device 63. The VDP is involved in the reading and writing of data from the video RAM, and reads image data stored in the video RAM from the character ROM at predetermined times to display on the image display device 63. The character ROM serves as an image data library for storing character data such as designs to be displayed on the image display device 63. This character ROM stores bitmap image data of various display designs, a color palette table that is referenced when determining the color to be displayed for each dot in the bitmap image, and other data. The video RAM is memory for storing display data to be displayed on the image display device 63. When the MPU 92 determines the execution content of the performance based on commands received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, it outputs a drawing list to the VDP that specifies the image content corresponding to each update timing in accordance with the determined execution content of the performance. The VDP reads image data from the character ROM in accordance with the drawing list, and creates display data in the video RAM using the read image data. The VDP then outputs an image signal corresponding to the created display data to the image display device 63, causing the image display device 63 to display an image corresponding to the display data.

For the sake of convenience, in the following explanation, the MPU 72, ROM 73, and RAM 74 of the main control device 70 will be referred to as the main MPU 72, main ROM 73, and main RAM 74, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the performance control device 90 will be referred to as the performance MPU 92, performance ROM 93, and performance RAM 94, respectively.

Next, before explaining the processing executed by the main MPU 72, we will explain the specific and non-specific controls executed by the main MPU 72. The main MPU 72 executes various controls, distinguishing between specific and non-specific controls. Specifically, non-specific controls include controls related to managing game history, controls for checking for abnormalities in data stored in the main RAM 74 after power is turned on, and controls for initializing areas in the main RAM 74 where data for executing non-specific controls is stored. Controls other than non-specific controls, including controls for progressing the game based on game operations by the player, are considered specific controls.

Figure 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating how programs and data are set in the main ROM 73. In accordance with the distinction between specific control and non-specific control executed by the main MPU 72, as shown in Figure 11, the addresses of the areas in the main ROM 73 where programs and data for specific control are stored are clearly distinguished from those where programs and data for non-specific control are stored.

Specific control programs are collectively stored in the area of consecutive addresses within the range of addresses X(1) to X(k+2). Addresses X(k+3) to X(k+5), which are consecutive to addresses X(1) to X(k+2), are unused addresses where no data is stored, and specific control data are collectively stored in the area of consecutive addresses within the range of addresses X(k+6) to X(m+2). Addresses X(m+3) to X(m+5), which are consecutive to addresses X(k+6) to X(m+2), are unused addresses where no data is stored, and non-specific control programs are collectively stored in the area of consecutive addresses within the range of addresses X(m+6) to X(n+2). Additionally, addresses X(n+3) to X(n+5), which are consecutive to addresses X(m+6) to X(n+2), are unused area addresses where no data is stored, and non-specific control data is collectively stored in each consecutive address area within the range of addresses X(n+6) to X(p+2). Note that the relationship between the above programs and data and addresses is set both in the physical addresses in the main ROM 73 and in the logical addresses on the memory map recognized by the main MPU 72.

As described above, programs and data for specific control and programs and data for non-specific control are stored in different address ranges, regardless of the execution order of the processes for executing the corresponding controls. Therefore, for example, when checking only programs and data for specific control, it is sufficient to check only the address range area where these programs and data for specific control are stored. Similarly, when checking only programs and data for non-specific control, it is sufficient to check only the address range area where these programs and data for non-specific control are stored. This makes it possible to efficiently check programs and data for specific and non-specific control separately. This also makes it possible to efficiently modify programs and data for specific and non-specific control separately.

By setting an address range for an unused area where no data is stored between the address range of the area where specific control programs and specific control data are stored and the address range of the area where non-specific control programs and non-specific control data are stored, it becomes easier to grasp the boundary between the address range for specific control and the address range for non-specific control when checking.

In the address ranges for specific control and the address ranges for non-specific control, programs and data are stored in different address ranges, regardless of the execution order of the processes for executing the corresponding controls. This allows for efficient work when checking programs and data separately. Furthermore, an address range for an unused area where no data is stored is set between the address range of the area where programs are stored and the address range of the area where data is stored, making it easier to grasp the boundary between the address range of the program and the address range of the data when checking.

Figure 12 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of the main RAM 74. As shown in Figure 12, the main RAM 74 is provided with a stack area 101 for specific control, a work area 102 for non-specific control, a work area 103 for specific control, and a stack area 104 for non-specific control.

Figure 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the setting of each area in the main RAM 74. In accordance with the distinction between specific control and non-specific control executed by the main MPU 72, as shown in Figure 13, the address range of the stack area 101 for specific control, the address range of the work area 103 for specific control, the address range of the work area 102 for non-specific control, and the address range of the stack area 104 for non-specific control are also clearly distinguished in the main RAM 74.

Specifically, the area of consecutive addresses within the range of addresses Y(1) to Y(r+1) is set as the stack area 101 for specific control. Furthermore, addresses Y(r+2) to Y(r+4) consecutive to addresses Y(1) to Y(r+1) are addresses in the unused first unused area 105, and the area of consecutive addresses following this within the range of addresses Y(r+5) to Y(s+1) is set as the work area 102 for non-specific control. Furthermore, addresses Y(s+2) to Y(s+4) consecutive to addresses Y(r+5) to Y(s+1) are addresses in the unused second unused area 106, and the area of consecutive addresses following this within the range of addresses Y(s+5) to Y(t+3) is set as the work area 103 for specific control. Additionally, addresses Y(t+4) to Y(t+6), which are consecutive to addresses Y(s+5) to Y(t+3), are addresses in the unused third unused area 107, and the areas of consecutive addresses within the range of addresses Y(t+7) to Y(u+1) are set as the non-specific control stack area 104. The areas corresponding to each address Y(1) to Y(u+1) are memory areas consisting of 1 byte. The relationship between each area and address as described above is set both as a physical address in the primary RAM 74 and as a logical address on the memory map recognized by the primary MPU 72.

As described above, by separately setting the work area 103 for specific control and the work area 102 for non-specific control, different areas of the main RAM 74 are used when performing various calculations, etc., when the main MPU 72 executes specific control and when it executes non-specific control. This makes it less likely that information in the main RAM 74 required for specific control or non-specific control will be erased when the other is executed. Incidentally, the main MPU 72 issues a load command when writing information to each work area 102, 103 and reading information from each work area 102, 103.

By separately defining the stack area 101 for specific control and the stack area 104 for non-specific control, different areas of the main RAM 74 are used when saving information stored in the registers of the main MPU 72 and when storing program return address information, depending on whether the main MPU 72 is executing specific control or non-specific control. This makes it less likely that information used in the other control will be erased when saving information stored in the registers of the main MPU 72 or when storing program return address information while one of the specific and non-specific controls is being executed. Incidentally, when writing information to each stack area 101, 104, the main MPU 72 issues a push command, and when reading information from each stack area 101, 104, the main MPU 72 issues a pop command. Furthermore, when reading information from each stack area 101, 104, the order in which information is written to the stack area 101, 104 is such that the last information is read first.

Here, when the main MPU 72 executes processing corresponding to specific control, the main MPU 72 can write information to the specific control work area 103 and the specific control stack area 101, and can read information from the specific control work area 103 and the specific control stack area 101. On the other hand, when the main MPU 72 executes processing corresponding to specific control, the main MPU 72 can read information from the non-specific control work area 102 and the non-specific control stack area 104, but cannot write information to the non-specific control work area 102 and the non-specific control stack area 104. This makes it possible to prevent information used in processing corresponding to non-specific control from being accidentally erased when processing corresponding to specific control is being executed.

Furthermore, when the main MPU 72 executes processing corresponding to non-specific control, the main MPU 72 can write information to the non-specific control work area 102 and the non-specific control stack area 104, and can read information from the non-specific control work area 102 and the non-specific control stack area 104. On the other hand, when the main MPU 72 executes processing corresponding to non-specific control, the main MPU 72 can read information from the specific control work area 103 and the specific control stack area 101, but cannot write information to the specific control work area 103 and the specific control stack area 101. This makes it possible to prevent information used in processing corresponding to specific control from being accidentally erased when processing corresponding to non-specific control is being executed.

Note that backup power will continue to be supplied to the main RAM 74 even after the slot machine 10 is powered off, and this backup power will be supplied to all of the specific control work area 103, the specific control stack area 101, the non-specific control work area 102, and the non-specific control stack area 104. As a result, the information stored in the specific control work area 103, the specific control stack area 101, the non-specific control work area 102, and the non-specific control stack area 104 will be retained as long as backup power is being supplied, even after the slot machine 10 is powered off.

As shown in FIG. 12, the stack area 101 for specific control in the main RAM 74 has a leading area 108 that is excluded from the calculation range of the checksum calculated before power is cut off and after power is restored, and a first calculation target area 109 that is included in the calculation range of the checksum. As shown in FIG. 13, the leading area 108 is a storage area of 3 consecutive bytes (the first 3 bytes) from the leading address (Y(1)) in the stack area 101 for specific control. Also, as shown in FIG. 12, the work area 103 for specific control has a second calculation target area 111 that is included in the calculation range of the checksum, and a second non-calculation target area 112 that is excluded from the calculation range of the checksum. Details of the leading area 108, first calculation target area 109, second calculation target area 111, and second non-calculation target area 112 will be described later.

Next, the processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described. First, the main processing executed by the main MPU 72 when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is initiated will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 14. Note that in the main processing (Figure 14), processing other than the power recovery processing (step S103) is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control. Furthermore, processing within the power recovery processing (step S103) other than the backup abnormality confirmation processing (Figure 41) described below is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control, while the backup abnormality confirmation processing (Figure 41) is executed using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

The main processing begins with an initialization process (step S101). This initialization process involves various initial settings for the registers and I/O devices within the main MPU 72. It is then determined whether the power is on with the setting key inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57 and turned on (step S102). If the setting key has not been turned on (step S102: NO), a power restoration process is executed (step S103) that enables the processing state to be restored to before the power outage. Details of the power restoration process will be described later.

If the power is turned on after the setting key is pressed during main processing (step S102: YES), the main MPU 72 determines whether the error state flag in the second calculation target area 111 in the specific control work area 103 is set to "1" (step S104). The error state flag enables the main MPU 72 to determine whether one or more of the following error states have occurred: an error state in which a checksum calculated after power-on using a portion of the storage area in the main RAM 74 as the calculation target range does not match the checksum calculated and stored for the same calculation target range before power-off; an error state in which the setting value of the slot machine 10 is outside the normal setting value range ("Setting 1" to "Setting 6"); or an error state corresponding to the failure of the power outage processing (FIG. 39) described below to be performed normally before power-off. As will be described in more detail below, the error state flag is set to "1" if the occurrence of any of the above three error states is identified during the power recovery processing (FIG. 40) in step S103.

If the error state flag in the second calculation target area 111 is not set to "1" (step S104: NO), it is determined whether the reset button 56 was pressed when the power was turned on (step S105). If a negative determination is made in step S105, a partial clear process (step S106) is executed to initialize some of the storage areas in the main RAM 74. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S104 or if a positive determination is made in step S105, a full clear process (step S107) is executed to initialize all of the storage areas in the main RAM 74. Details of the partial clear process (step S106) and the full clear process (step S107) will be described later.

If the partial clear process is executed in step S106, or if the full clear process is executed in step S107, an interrupt permission process is executed to permit an interrupt by the timer interrupt process (step S108). Then, a setting value update process is executed to update the setting value of the slot machine 10 (step S109). The setting value update process will be described in detail later. Then, the process proceeds to normal processing (step S110). The normal processing will be described in detail later.

Next, the timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 15. The timer interrupt processing is initiated, for example, every 1.49 milliseconds when interrupts by the timer interrupt processing are permitted. Of the various types of processing in the timer interrupt processing, processing other than the management processing (step S214) is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control. Furthermore, processing other than the management execution processing (Figure 38) described below is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control, while the management execution processing (Figure 38) is executed using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

In the timer interrupt process, register save processing is first executed (step S201). In the register save processing, information from the various registers provided in the main MPU 72, except for the program counter, is saved to the second calculation target area 111 in the specific control work area 103 of the main RAM 74. The program counter is a register for storing address information in the main ROM 73 where instructions to be executed by the main MPU 72 are stored. The program counter stores two bytes of address information. In the register save processing, information from the various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers provided in the main MPU 72 is saved to the second calculation target area 111. Details of the register save processing (step S201) will be described later.

Then, it is determined whether the power outage flag is set to "1" (step S202). The power outage flag is set when a power outage signal is input to the main MPU 72 from the power outage monitoring circuit of the power supply device 54. If the power outage flag is set to "1" (step S202: YES), it is determined whether command transmission has finished (step S203). If command transmission has not finished (step S203: NO), command transmission is finished by executing the processing from step S205 onwards. On the other hand, if command transmission has finished (step S203: YES), the power outage processing described below is executed (step S204).

If it is determined in step S202 that the power outage flag is not set to "1," or if it is determined in step S203 that command transmission has not ended, various processes from step S205 onwards are carried out. In step S205, a watchdog timer clear process is carried out to initialize the value of the watchdog timer, which monitors for malfunctions. In step S206, an interrupt end declaration process is carried out, which enables the main MPU 72 itself to set the next timer interrupt. In step S207, a stepping motor control process is carried out to drive the stepping motors provided on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to spin these reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Details of the stepping motor control process will be described later.

In step S208, a sensor monitoring process is performed to read the status of various sensors connected to the input port and monitor whether the read results are normal. In step S209, a timer decrement process is performed to decrement the values of each counter and timer. In step S210, a display control process is performed to control the display of the credit display unit 65 and the dual-purpose display unit 66. In step S211, a data output process is performed to output the count results of the number of medals bet and the number of medals paid out to the outside. Details of the display control process (step S210) and the data output process (step S211) will be described later. In step S212, a command output process is performed to send various commands to the presentation-side MPU 92. In step S213, a port output process is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port. In step S214, a management process is performed to manage the game history and display details corresponding to the management results on the ratio display 85. Details of the management process will be described later.

In step S215, the values of each register that were saved in the second calculation target area 111 of the specific control work area 103 in the previous step S201 are restored to the corresponding register in the main MPU 72. This returns all registers in the main MPU 72 to the state they were in before the start of the current timer interrupt process (Figure 15), allowing a return to normal processing, which will be described later. Details of the register restoration process (step S215) will be described later. Thereafter, in step S216, an interrupt permission process is performed to permit the next timer interrupt, and this series of timer interrupt processes is terminated.

Next, the normal processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be explained based on the flowchart in Figure 16. Note that the normal processing is executed using a program and data for specific control.

In normal processing, first, an interrupt permission process is performed to permit the next timer interrupt (step S301). Then, a start wait process is performed (step S302), and a setting confirmation process is performed (step S303). Details of the start wait process (step S302) and the setting confirmation process (step S303) will be described later.

Then, it is determined whether the number of gaming media bets has reached a specified number (specifically, "3") (step S304), and if the number of bets has not reached the specified number (step S304: NO), the process returns to the start waiting process (step S302). If the number of bets has reached the specified number (step S304: YES), it is determined whether the start lever 41 has been operated and a start command has been issued (step S305), and if a start command has not been issued (step S305: NO), the process returns to the start waiting process (step S302).

On the other hand, if a start command is issued (step S305: YES), the main line ML is activated and then the acceptance prohibition process is executed (step S306). By executing the acceptance prohibition process, even if a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 45, the medal will be ejected into the medal tray 59 without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a.

Then, in step S307, a start-up setting process is executed to perform various settings when the game is started. Details will be described later, but in the start-up setting process (step S307), the in-game flag provided in the second calculation target area 111 in the work area 103 for specific control is set to "1". The in-game flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to know that a game is being played. The in-game flag is cleared to "0" in step S313, which will be described later. Details of the start-up setting process (step S307) will be described later.

Then, in step S308, a role lottery process is executed to draw the role for the current game. Then, in step S309, a reel control process is executed to drive and control each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in a manner corresponding to the result of the role lottery process, and in step S310, a medium awarding process is executed. In the medium awarding process, if a small role win or a replay win has been achieved in the current game, a process corresponding to the achievement of the small role win or replay win is executed. Details of the role lottery process (step S308), reel control process (step S309), and medium awarding process (step S310) will be described later.

After that, a response process at the end of play is executed to enable the setting of the game state and game zone corresponding to the result of this game (step S311). Then, an external output setting process is executed (step S312). In the external output setting process, a process is executed to output a first state signal indicating that the game state is a bonus state, a second state signal indicating that the game zone is a favorable zone, and a third state signal indicating that the game state is an ART state to the data counter DC, which is an external device. In addition, in the external output setting process, a process is executed to output information regarding the state of the slot machine 10 to the gaming hall's management computer, which is an external device. Details of the response process at the end of play (step S311) and the external output setting process (step S312) will be described later.

Then, the value of the game-in-progress flag in the second calculation target area 111 is cleared to "0" (step S313). This allows the main MPU 72 to know that the game has ended. Then, the acceptance permission process is executed (step S314). In the acceptance permission process, the number of stored virtual medals is determined based on the value of the credit counter provided in the second calculation target area 111, and it is determined whether the determined number of stored virtual medals is the maximum number of stored medals (specifically, "50"). If the number of stored virtual medals is less than the maximum number of stored virtual medals, the selector 52 is switched to the acceptance permission state. The credit counter is a counter that allows the main MPU 72 to know the number of stored virtual medals. The credit counter is set to any value between "0" and "50." By switching the selector 52 to the acceptance permission state, medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 45 are detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a and then collected by the hopper device 53. In the acceptance permission process in step S314, if the number of stored virtual medals is the maximum number (specifically, "50"), the replay occurrence flag in the second calculation target area 111 is checked to determine whether a replay win occurred in the currently completed game. If a replay win has not occurred, the selector 52 is switched to the acceptance permission state. On the other hand, if the number of stored virtual medals is the maximum number and a replay win occurred in the currently completed game, the acceptance prohibition state is maintained. The replay occurrence flag is a flag that enables the main MPU 72 to determine that a bet on gaming media should be automatically placed without reducing the number of gaming media owned by the player in the start waiting process (step S302), which is performed first after a replay win occurs. If a replay win occurs, the replay occurrence flag is set to "1" in the reel control process (step S309).

Next, the winning combination lottery process executed in step S308 of the normal processing (Figure 16) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 17. Note that the winning combination lottery process is executed using a program and data for specific control.

In step S401, a random number is obtained to be used when determining whether a winning combination has been achieved. In this slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the random number at that time is latched from the random number circuit 75 (Figure 10) in the main MPU 72. The random number circuit 75 generates random numbers between "0" and "65535," and when the main MPU 72 confirms operation of the start lever 41, it stores the value latched in the random number circuit 75 in the main RAM 74. This configuration makes it possible to quickly obtain a random number when the start lever 41 is operated, thereby avoiding problems such as synchronization. The random number circuit 75 is configured to latch the value of the free-running counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, the lottery table selection process is executed (step S402). In the lottery table selection process, a lottery table for determining whether a winning combination is successful is read from the main ROM 73. The slot machine 10 is pre-programmed with six winning probabilities, from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6." By inserting a setting key into the setting key insertion hole 57, turning it ON, and performing a predetermined operation, the player can select which winning probability the winning combination will be used for the lottery process. "Setting n+1" offers a more favorable winning probability to the player than "Setting n." Specifically, "Setting n+1" offers a higher winning probability for the combination that triggers a transition to the BB state than "Setting n." Furthermore, even if the setting value is the same, there are three lottery modes in the main MPU 72: normal mode, first RT mode, and second RT mode. These modes have different lottery tables. In addition to these lottery mode states, there are also the internal RT state and bonus state (BB state and RB state) described below as game states. In the lottery table selection process in step S402, a lottery table corresponding to the combination of the current setting value, current lottery mode, and current game state is selected.

Using "Setting 3" as an example, we will explain the lottery tables corresponding to normal mode, first RT mode, and second RT mode in non-internal RT and non-bonus states. First, we will explain the normal mode lottery table selected in normal mode. Figure 18 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the normal mode lottery table. Note that the following explanation will refer to the explanatory diagram in Figure 19 as appropriate.

As shown in Figure 18, the normal mode lottery table has index values IV set, and each index value IV is associated with a winning role and a point value PV. The point value PV determines the winning probability of the corresponding lottery role in relation to the maximum value of the free run counter (65535).

Specifically, the index value IV=1 is set with the first bell winning data and the first supplementary winning data. When a win occurs with index value IV=1, as shown in FIG. 19, if the first stop (the reel on which the stop command was first issued) is the left reel 32L, the first bell winning will occur regardless of the type of the second and third stop targets (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) or the operation timing of each stop button 42-44; in all other cases, the first supplementary winning will occur.

In this slot machine 10, reel control is performed on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, allowing up to four symbols to slide after the stop buttons 42-44 are operated. In other words, reel control is performed on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, allowing the reels to stop within a specified time (190 milliseconds) after the stop buttons 42-44 are operated. This reel control makes it easier to achieve a winning combination corresponding to a winning symbol and prevents the achievement of a winning combination corresponding to a non-winning symbol. However, because the amount of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R that can slide is limited as described above, if there are five or more symbols among the symbols that make up a winning combination on one reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, depending on the timing of the operation of the corresponding stop button 42-44, the symbols may not stop on the main line ML (this is also known as a "missed win"). The first to third supplementary wins, first bell win, second bell win, and various replay wins are win patterns that will not result in a missed win if reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the corresponding order, while the first watermelon win, second watermelon win, cherry win, first BB win, second BB win, third BB win, fourth BB win, first RB win, and second RB win are win patterns that may result in a missed win depending on the timing of the stop operation of stop buttons 42-44 relative to the rotational position of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

As shown in Figure 18, index value IV = 2 is set with first bell winning data and second supplementary winning data. When a win occurs with index value IV = 2, as shown in Figure 19, if the first stop is the center reel 32M, the first bell winning is guaranteed to occur regardless of the types of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are the second and third stop targets and the operation timing of each stop button 42-44; in all other cases, the second supplementary winning is guaranteed to occur.

As shown in Figure 18, the index value IV = 3 is set with the first bell winning data and the third supplementary winning data. When a win occurs with index value IV = 3, as shown in Figure 19, if the first stop is the right reel 32R, the first bell winning is guaranteed to occur regardless of the type of the second and third stop targets (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) or the operation timing of each stop button 42-44; in all other cases, the third supplementary winning is guaranteed to occur.

As shown in FIG. 18, only the first bell winning data is set for index value IV=4. If a win occurs with index value IV=4, as shown in FIG. 19, the first bell winning will occur regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the timing of operation of each stop button 42-44. As shown in FIG. 18, only the second bell winning data is set for index value IV=16. If a win occurs with index value IV=16, as shown in FIG. 19, the second bell winning will occur regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the timing of operation of each stop button 42-44.

As shown in FIG. 18, only the first watermelon winning data is set for index value IV=5. If a win occurs with index value IV=5, the first watermelon winning can be achieved regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, as shown in FIG. 19. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, there is a possibility that the first watermelon winning will not be achieved. As shown in FIG. 18, only the second watermelon winning data is set for index value IV=17. If a win occurs with index value IV=17, the second watermelon winning can be achieved regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, as shown in FIG. 19. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, there is a possibility that the second watermelon winning will not be achieved.

As shown in Figure 18, only cherry winning data is set for index value IV = 6. If a win occurs with index value IV = 6, a cherry winning can occur regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, as shown in Figure 19. However, depending on the timing of operation of the left stop button 42 relative to the rotation position of left reel 32L, a cherry winning may not occur.

As shown in FIG. 18, only the third BB winning data is set for index value IV=7. If a win occurs with index value IV=7, the third BB winning can occur regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, as shown in FIG. 19. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, the third BB winning may not occur. Also, as shown in FIG. 18, only the fourth BB winning data is set for index value IV=8. If a win occurs with index value IV=8, the fourth BB winning may occur regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, as shown in FIG. 19. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, the fourth BB winning may not occur. Also, as shown in FIG. 18, only the first RB winning data is set for index value IV=9. If a win occurs with index value IV = 9, as shown in Figure 19, the first RB win can be achieved regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, the first RB win may not be achieved.

As shown in FIG. 18, only the first BB winning data is set for index value IV=18. If a win occurs with index value IV=18, the first BB winning can occur regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, as shown in FIG. 19. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, the first BB winning may not occur. Also, as shown in FIG. 18, only the second BB winning data is set for index value IV=19. If a win occurs with index value IV=19, the second BB winning may occur regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, as shown in FIG. 19. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, the second BB winning may not occur. Also, as shown in FIG. 18, only the second RB winning data is set for index value IV=20. If a win occurs with index value IV = 20, as shown in Figure 19, the second RB win can be achieved regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, the second RB win may not be achieved.

Here, winning data other than the bonus winning data, including the 1st to 4th BB winning data and the 1st to 2nd RB winning data, is erased in the game in which a win occurs, regardless of whether a win is achieved, and is not carried over to games following the winning game. In contrast, the bonus winning data is stored and held until a corresponding bonus win is achieved, even in games following the winning game, except when the all-clear process (step S107 of the main process (FIG. 14)) is performed. In this case, in games in which bonus winning data is carried over, index values IV corresponding to all bonus winning data are excluded from the lottery. This makes it possible to prevent new bonus winning data from being stored when bonus winning data is already stored and to prevent multiple bonus winning data from being accumulated and stored.

Regular replay winning data and 1st RT replay winning data are set for index values IV = 10 to 15, as shown in Figure 18. In this case, if a win occurs with index value IV = 10, as shown in Figure 19, if the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop (the reel on which the second stop command was issued) is the center reel 32M, and the third stop (the reel on which the last stop command was issued) is the right reel 32R, a 1st RT replay winning is reliably achieved regardless of the timing of operation of each stop button 42 to 44; in all other cases, a regular replay winning is reliably achieved regardless of the timing of operation of each stop button 42 to 44. Furthermore, if a win occurs with index value IV = 11, and the first stop is on the left reel 32L, the second stop is on the right reel 32R, and the third stop is on the center reel 32M, then the first RT replay win is surely achieved regardless of the timing of operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in all other cases, the regular replay win is surely achieved regardless of the timing of operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Furthermore, if a win occurs with index value IV = 12, and the first stop is on the center reel 32M, the second stop is on the left reel 32L, and the third stop is on the right reel 32R, then the first RT replay win is surely achieved regardless of the timing of operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in all other cases, the regular replay win is surely achieved regardless of the timing of operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Furthermore, if a win occurs with index value IV = 13, and the first stop is on the center reel 32M, the second stop is on the right reel 32R, and the third stop is on the left reel 32L, then the first RT replay win is surely achieved regardless of the timing of operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in all other cases, the regular replay win is surely achieved regardless of the timing of operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Furthermore, if a win occurs with index value IV = 14, and the first stop is on the right reel 32R, the second stop is on the left reel 32L, and the third stop is on the center reel 32M, then the first RT replay win is surely achieved regardless of the timing of operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in all other cases, the regular replay win is surely achieved regardless of the timing of operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Furthermore, if a win occurs with index value IV = 15, and the first stop is on the right reel 32R, the second stop is on the center reel 32M, and the third stop is on the left reel 32L, then the first RT replay win will be achieved regardless of the timing of operation of each stop button 42-44; in all other cases, a regular replay win will be achieved regardless of the timing of operation of each stop button 42-44.

When the normal mode lottery table in Figure 18 is selected, the probability of winning when index value IV = 1, the probability of winning when index value IV = 2, and the probability of winning when index value IV = 3 are each approximately 1/6.6. The probability of winning when index value IV = 4 is approximately 1/13.1. The probability of winning when index value IV = 5 is approximately 1/164. The probability of winning when index value IV = 6 is approximately 1/423. The probability of winning when index value IV = 7 and the probability of winning when index value IV = 8 are each approximately 1/437. The probability of winning when index value IV = 9 is approximately 1/328. Furthermore, the probability of winning when index value IV = 10, the probability of winning when index value IV = 11, the probability of winning when index value IV = 12, the probability of winning when index value IV = 13, the probability of winning when index value IV = 14, and the probability of winning when index value IV = 15 are each approximately 1/41. Furthermore, the probability of winning when index value IV = 16 is approximately 1/16.4. Furthermore, the probability of winning when index value IV = 17 is approximately 1/146. Furthermore, the probability of winning when index value IV = 18 and the probability of winning when index value IV = 19 are each approximately 1/437. Furthermore, the probability of winning when index value IV = 20 is approximately 1/328.

As already explained, the normal mode lottery table includes first RT replay winning data in addition to normal replay winning data as winning data for index values IV = 10 to 15. The probability of winning any of these index values IV = 10 to 15 is approximately 1/41. If a win occurs with any of index values IV = 10 to 15, and the stop order of the first, second, and third stops of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponds to the winning combination, a first RT replay win is achieved, and the lottery mode transitions from normal mode to first RT mode. When the lottery mode transitions to first RT mode, the lottery table referenced in the combination lottery process (Figure 17) becomes the first RT mode lottery table.

Next, we will explain the lottery table for the first RT mode that is selected when "Setting 3" is selected and the first RT mode is selected. Figures 20 and 21 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the lottery table for the first RT mode.

In the lottery table for the first RT mode, as shown in FIG. 20, the winning data set for each index value IV = 1 to 9 and the winning probabilities for each index value IV are the same as those in the lottery table for the normal mode (FIG. 18). In addition, the winning data set for each index value IV = 22 to 26 in the lottery table for the first RT mode and the winning probabilities for each index value IV are the same as those for index values IV = 16 to 20 in the lottery table for the normal mode.

In this case, the index values IV = 1-6, 22-23 are set to roles that can award game media, and the winning data and winning probabilities set for each of these index values IV = 1-6, 22-23 are the same as those for index values IV = 1-6, 16-17 in the normal mode lottery table, so the types of roles that can award game media and the winning probabilities for those roles are the same in both normal mode and first RT mode.

In addition, bonus winning data is set for index values IV = 7-9, 24-26 in the lottery table for first RT mode, just like index values IV = 7-9, 18-20 in the lottery table for normal mode, and the winning probability is the same as in the lottery table for normal mode. In other words, the probability of winning each bonus role is the same in normal mode and first RT mode.

The winning data set for index values IV = 10 to 21 differs from that in normal mode. In particular, in the lottery table for the first RT mode, as shown in Figure 20, second RT replay winning data is set as winning data for index values IV = 10 to 15 in addition to normal replay winning data. The probability of winning any of these index values IV = 10 to 15 is approximately 1 in 6.8.

When a win occurs with index value IV = 10, as shown in Figure 21, if the first stop is on the left reel 32L, the second stop is on the center reel 32M, and the third stop is on the right reel 32R, a second RT replay win is guaranteed regardless of the timing of operation of the stop buttons 42-44. In all other cases, a regular replay win is guaranteed regardless of the timing of operation of the stop buttons 42-44. Also, when a win occurs with index value IV = 11, if the first stop is on the left reel 32L, the second stop is on the right reel 32R, and the third stop is on the center reel 32M, a second RT replay win is guaranteed regardless of the timing of operation of the stop buttons 42-44. In all other cases, a regular replay win is guaranteed regardless of the timing of operation of the stop buttons 42-44. Furthermore, if a win occurs with index value IV = 12, and the first stop is the center reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, then the second RT replay win is surely achieved regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in all other cases, the regular replay win is surely achieved regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Furthermore, if a win occurs with index value IV = 13, and the first stop is the center reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, then the second RT replay win is surely achieved regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in all other cases, the regular replay win is surely achieved regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Furthermore, if a win occurs with index value IV = 14, and the first stop is on the right reel 32R, the second stop is on the left reel 32L, and the third stop is on the center reel 32M, a second RT replay win is guaranteed regardless of the timing of operation of the stop buttons 42-44; in all other cases, a regular replay win is guaranteed regardless of the timing of operation of the stop buttons 42-44. Furthermore, if a win occurs with index value IV = 15, and the first stop is on the right reel 32R, the second stop is on the center reel 32M, and the third stop is on the left reel 32L, a second RT replay win is guaranteed regardless of the timing of operation of the stop buttons 42-44; in all other cases, a regular replay win is guaranteed regardless of the timing of operation of the stop buttons 42-44.

In the first RT mode, if a win occurs with index value IV = 10 to 15 and the first, second, and third stops on reels 32L, 32M, and 32R occur in the order corresponding to the winning combination, a second RT replay win is achieved and the lottery mode transitions from the first RT mode to the second RT mode. When transitioning to the second RT mode, the lottery table referenced in the combination lottery process (Figure 17) becomes the lottery table for the second RT mode.

As shown in Figure 20, the lottery table for the first RT mode includes, in addition to regular replay winning data, first fall replay winning data as winning data for index values IV = 16 to 21. The probability of winning any of these index values IV = 16 to 21 is approximately 1 in 10.9.

When a win occurs with index value IV = 16 in the lottery table for the first RT mode, as shown in Figure 21, if the first stop is on the left reel 32L, the second stop is on the center reel 32M, and the third stop is on the right reel 32R, a normal replay win is guaranteed to occur regardless of the timing of operation of each stop button 42-44; in all other cases, a first fall replay win is guaranteed to occur regardless of the timing of operation of each stop button 42-44. Also, when a win occurs with index value IV = 17, if the first stop is on the left reel 32L, the second stop is on the right reel 32R, and the third stop is on the center reel 32M, a normal replay win is guaranteed to occur regardless of the timing of operation of each stop button 42-44; in all other cases, a first fall replay win is guaranteed to occur regardless of the timing of operation of each stop button 42-44. Furthermore, if a win occurs with index value IV = 18, and the first stop is the center reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, a normal replay win will definitely occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in any other cases, a first fall replay win will definitely occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. Furthermore, if a win occurs with index value IV = 19, and the first stop is the center reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, a normal replay win will definitely occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in any other cases, a first fall replay win will definitely occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. Furthermore, if a win occurs with an index value IV = 20, and the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the center reel 32M, a normal replay win is guaranteed regardless of the timing of operation of the stop buttons 42-44. In other cases, a first fall replay win is guaranteed regardless of the timing of operation of the stop buttons 42-44. Furthermore, if a win occurs with an index value IV = 21, and the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the center reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, a normal replay win is guaranteed regardless of the timing of operation of the stop buttons 42-44. In other cases, a first fall replay win is guaranteed regardless of the timing of operation of the stop buttons 42-44. When a first fall replay win is achieved, the lottery mode transitions to normal mode. When transitioning to normal mode, the lottery table referenced in the role lottery process ( FIG. 17 ) becomes the normal mode lottery table.

In the lottery table for the first RT mode, combinations that make it possible to achieve a replay win are set for index values IV = 10 to 21. The winning probabilities for these combinations are set to the probabilities already explained, so the winning probability of combinations that make it possible to achieve a replay win in the first RT mode (hereinafter also referred to as the replay probability) is approximately 1/4.2. In contrast, the replay probability in normal mode is approximately 1/6.8. In other words, the first RT mode is a lottery mode with a higher replay probability than normal mode.

Next, we will explain the lottery table for the second RT mode that is selected when "Setting 3" is selected and the second RT mode is selected. Figures 22 and 23 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the lottery table for the second RT mode.

In the lottery table for the second RT mode, as shown in FIG. 22, the winning data set for each index value IV = 1 to 9 and the winning probability for each index value IV are the same as those in the lottery table for the normal mode (FIG. 18) and the lottery table for the first RT mode (FIG. 20). Furthermore, the winning data set for each index value IV = 17 to 21 in the lottery table for the second RT mode and the winning probability for each index value IV are the same as those for index values IV = 16 to 20 in the lottery table for the normal mode and index values IV = 22 to 26 in the lottery table for the second RT mode.

In this case, the index values IV = 1-6, 17-18 are set to roles that can award game media, and the winning data and winning probabilities set for each of these index values IV = 1-6, 17-18 are the same as those for index values IV = 1-6, 16-17 in the normal mode lottery table, and are also the same as those for index values IV = 1-6, 22-23 in the first RT mode lottery table. As a result, the types of roles that can award game media and the winning probabilities for those roles are the same in normal mode, first RT mode, and second RT mode.

In addition, bonus winning data is set for index values IV = 7-9, 19-21 in the lottery table for second RT mode, just like index values IV = 7-9, 18-20 in the lottery table for normal mode and index values IV = 7-9, 24-26 in the lottery table for first RT mode, and the winning probability is the same as in the lottery table for normal mode and the lottery table for first RT mode. In other words, the probability of winning each bonus role is the same in normal mode, first RT mode, and second RT mode.

The winning data set for index values IV = 10 to 15 differs from that in normal mode and first RT mode. In particular, in the lottery table for second RT mode, as shown in FIG. 22, in addition to normal replay winning data, second fall replay winning data is set as winning data for index values IV = 10 to 15. The probability of winning any of these index values IV = 10 to 15 is approximately 1 in 6.8.

When a win is made with index value IV = 10 in the lottery table for the second RT mode, as shown in Figure 23, if the first stop is on the left reel 32L, the second stop is on the center reel 32M, and the third stop is on the right reel 32R, a normal replay win is guaranteed to occur regardless of the timing of operation of each stop button 42-44; in all other cases, a second fall replay win is guaranteed to occur regardless of the timing of operation of each stop button 42-44. Also, when a win is made with index value IV = 11, if the first stop is on the left reel 32L, the second stop is on the right reel 32R, and the third stop is on the center reel 32M, a normal replay win is guaranteed to occur regardless of the timing of operation of each stop button 42-44; in all other cases, a second fall replay win is guaranteed to occur regardless of the timing of operation of each stop button 42-44. Furthermore, when a win occurs with index value IV = 12, if the first stop is the center reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, a normal replay win is sure to occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in all other cases, a second fall replay win is sure to occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. Furthermore, when a win occurs with index value IV = 13, if the first stop is the center reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, a normal replay win is sure to occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in all other cases, a second fall replay win is sure to occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. Furthermore, if a win occurs with an index value IV = 14, and the first stop is on the right reel 32R, the second stop is on the left reel 32L, and the third stop is on the center reel 32M, a normal replay win is guaranteed to occur regardless of the timing of operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44; otherwise, a second fall replay win is guaranteed to occur regardless of the timing of operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Furthermore, if a win occurs with an index value IV = 15, and the first stop is on the right reel 32R, the second stop is on the center reel 32M, and the third stop is on the left reel 32L, a normal replay win is guaranteed to occur regardless of the timing of operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44; otherwise, a second fall replay win is guaranteed to occur regardless of the timing of operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44. If a second fall replay win is achieved, the lottery mode transitions to the first RT mode. When transitioning to the first RT mode, the lottery table referenced in the role lottery process (Figure 17) becomes the lottery table for the first RT mode.

Only normal replay winning data is set for index value IV=16 in the lottery table for the second RT mode. The probability of winning at index value IV=16 is set higher than the probability of winning other roles, specifically, approximately 1 in 5.5. If a win occurs at index value IV=16, a normal replay win will be achieved regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R or the operation timing of each stop button 42-44.

In the lottery table for the second RT mode, roles that enable a replay win are set for index values IV = 10 to 16. Because the winning probabilities for these roles are set as already explained, the winning probability of a role that enables a replay win in the second RT mode (hereinafter also referred to as the replay probability) is approximately 1/3.0. In contrast, the replay probability in normal mode is approximately 1/6.8, and the replay probability in first RT mode is approximately 1/4.2. Therefore, the second RT mode is a lottery mode with a higher replay probability than normal mode and first RT mode. However, this is not limited to this, and the replay probability may be the same in the first RT mode and the second RT mode, or may be approximately the same but slightly different in the first RT mode and the second RT mode.

In addition to the normal mode lottery table (Figure 18), the first RT mode lottery table (Figure 20), and the second RT mode lottery table (Figure 22), the main ROM 73 also stores a bonus lottery table that is referenced in the role lottery process (Figure 17) when in BB or RB state, as well as an internal RT state lottery table that is referenced in the role lottery process (Figure 17) when a bonus role is won but the corresponding bonus win is not achieved.

On the bonus lottery table, the chance of winning a combination that allows the first bell win is approximately 1/1.5, and if this combination is won, the first bell win will be achieved regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R or the timing of stopping buttons 42-44 relative to the rotational positions of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Also, on the bonus lottery table, the chance of winning a combination that allows the first watermelon win is approximately 1/6.6, and the chance of winning a combination that allows the cherry win is approximately 1/7.8. The first watermelon win and cherry win will not be achieved depending on the timing of stopping buttons 42-44 relative to the rotational positions of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. With the bonus lottery table set as described above, in each game in the BB or RB state, the first bell win generally results in the award of "11" gaming media. However, the first watermelon or cherry win may also occur. The first watermelon win results in the award of "5" gaming media, and the cherry win results in the award of "2" gaming media. The BB state ends when the total number of gaming media awarded since the start of the BB state reaches or exceeds the BB termination threshold (e.g., "350"), and the RB state ends when the total number of gaming media awarded since the start of the RB state reaches or exceeds the RB termination threshold (e.g., "150"). Therefore, the number of games required to end the BB or RB state varies depending on the results of the role lottery process ( FIG. 17 ) and whether or not a miss occurs. The bonus lottery table is common across the setting values "1" to "6" that vary the advantage of the slot machine 10.

Next, we will explain the internal RT state lottery table that is selected when the game state is the internal RT state. Figures 24 and 25 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the internal RT state lottery table. Note that, as will be explained in detail later, in the internal RT state, the internal RT state lottery table is selected regardless of whether the lottery mode is the normal mode, the first RT mode, or the second RT mode.

In the internal RT state lottery table, as shown in FIG. 24, the winning data set for each index value IV = 1-6, 8-9 and the winning probability for each index value IV are the same as those for index values IV = 1-6, 16-17 in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 18), index values IV = 1-6, 22-23 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 20), and index values IV = 1-6, 17-18 in the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 22).

In the internal RT state lottery table, only normal replay winning data is set for index value IV = 7. The probability of winning at index value IV = 7 is set to the sum of the winning probabilities for index values IV = 10 to 16 in the second RT mode lottery table, specifically, approximately 1/3.0. If a win occurs at index value IV = 7, a normal replay win occurs regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. Therefore, when the internal RT state is active, the winning combinations that allow the award of game media and the winning probabilities of those combinations are the same as in the normal mode, first RT mode, and second RT mode, and the replay probability is higher than in the normal mode and first RT mode and the same as in the second RT mode. Furthermore, when the internal RT state is active, bonus combinations cannot be won, and combinations that trigger transitions to the normal mode, first RT mode, and second RT mode cannot be won. Details of the lottery table selection process (step S402) will be described later.

Returning to the explanation of the role lottery process (Figure 17), after the lottery table selection process is executed in step S402, the index value IV is set to "1" (step S403), and a judgment value DV used when determining whether the role is a hit or miss is set (step S404). In this judgment value setting process, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the current judgment value DV to set a new judgment value DV. Note that in the initial judgment value setting process, the value of the random number obtained in step S401 is set as the current judgment value DV, and the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV (index value IV = 1) is added to this random number value to set a new judgment value DV.

Then, a win/loss determination is made for the combination corresponding to the index value IV (step S405). In this combination determination, a determination is made as to whether the determination value DV exceeds "65535." If it exceeds "65535" (step S405: YES), a winning data acquisition process is executed (step S406) to set the winning data corresponding to the index value IV at that time in the second calculation target area 111 in the specific control work area 103. If any bonus win occurs, the bonus winning data is set in the second calculation target area 111 in the winning data acquisition process (step S406). The bonus winning data set in the second calculation target area 111 is stored and retained until the corresponding bonus win is achieved, even in games following the game in which the winning bonus occurred, except when the all-clear process (step S107 of the main process (FIG. 14)) is performed. Meanwhile, winning data other than the bonus winning data set in the second calculation target area 111 is cleared in the game end response process (FIG. 28) in step S311 of the normal process (FIG. 16).

If the judgment value DV does not exceed "65535" (step S405: NO), this means that the hand corresponding to the index value IV has not been achieved. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 (step S407), and then a determination is made as to whether or not there is a hand corresponding to the index value IV, i.e., whether or not there is a target for which a win/loss determination must be made (step S408). Specifically, a determination is made as to whether or not the index value IV incremented by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a target for which a win/loss determination must be made, the process returns to step S404, and the determination of the win/loss of the hand continues. At this time, in step S404, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used to determine the win/loss of the previous hand (i.e., the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, and in step S405, the win/loss of the hand is determined based on this judgment value DV.

When the processing of step S406 is executed, or when a negative judgment is made in step S408, this means that the judgment of whether the winning combination has been achieved or not has been completed. In this case, in step S409, a first stop information setting process is performed to set stop information for reel stop control in the second calculation target area 111 in the work area 103 for specific control. Then, in step S410, a presentation content determination process is performed. In the presentation content determination process, processing is performed to determine the general content of the presentation to be executed in the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 in this game.

Then, in step S411, the first control process for the game area, which will be described later, is executed, in step S412, the add-on process is executed, and in step S413, the notification control process is executed. In the notification control process, when the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is to be notified, processing is executed to ensure that the notification of the stop order to be notified is executed on the image display device 63, and processing is executed to set information that enables stop order corresponding display to be executed on the dual-purpose display unit 66.

Then, the process of transmitting a game start command is executed (step S414), and the lottery process for the main role is terminated. In the process of transmitting the game start command, information corresponding to the current game state and information corresponding to the processing results of steps S410 to S412 are set in the game start command, and this game start command is sent to the production side MPU 92. If any role is won in the current role lottery process (Figure 17), in addition to this information, information corresponding to the winning role is also set in the game start command. The game start command is a command that makes the production side MPU 92 aware that a new game has started, and is a command that makes the production side MPU 92 aware of various information determined by the main side MPU 72.

When the production side MPU 92 receives a game start command, it ascertains various information about the current game from the game start command. The production side MPU 92 then determines the content of the presentation in accordance with the various information it has ascertained. Based on the determined content of the presentation, it then controls the illumination of the upper lamp 61, the sound output of the speaker 62, and the display of the image display device 63.

<About game status and game zone>
Next, the gaming states and gaming intervals will be explained. Figure 26 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the gaming states and gaming intervals that exist in the slot machine 10.

The slot machine 10 has four gaming states: a normal gaming state ST1, an internal RT state ST2, a BB state ST3, an RB state ST4, a preparation state ST5, and an ART state ST6. These gaming states ST1 to ST6 do not overlap with one another.

Normal gaming state ST1 is a gaming state that is entered by executing the all-clear process in step S107 of the main process (Figure 14). Furthermore, if a transition to the ready state ST5 does not occur when the BB state ST3 ends, if a transition to the ready state ST5 does not occur when the RB state ST4 ends, or if the ART state ST6 ends without being triggered by a transition to the BB state ST3 or RB state ST4, the gaming state becomes normal gaming state ST1. In terms of the expected value of gaming media awarded per game, normal gaming state ST1 is a gaming state with a lower advantage than the internal RT state ST2, BB state ST3, RB state ST4, ready state ST5, and ART state ST6. As already explained, there are three lottery modes: normal mode, first RT mode, and second RT mode. In normal gaming state ST1, any of these lottery modes can be entered. Note that when the all-clear process (step S107) is executed, the normal gaming state ST1 is entered, which is normal mode.

The internal RT state ST2 is a game state in which a game in which any bonus winning data is set in the second calculation target area 111 in the work area 103 for specific control remains if a bonus win corresponding to that bonus winning data is not achieved, and is a game state that ends if a bonus win corresponding to that bonus winning data is achieved. As already explained, in the internal RT state ST2, the internal RT state lottery table is referenced in the role lottery process (Figure 17). In this case, since the internal RT state lottery table does not contain a role (i.e., index value IV) that transitions to the lottery mode, a transition to the lottery mode does not occur in the internal RT state ST2. The replay probability in the internal RT state ST2 is the same as when the second RT mode lottery table (Figure 22) is referenced. However, without being limited to this, the replay probability in internal RT state ST2 may be configured to be lower than in second RT mode, for example, may be configured to be the same as the replay probability in first RT mode, or may be configured to be a replay probability between normal mode and first RT mode. Also, the replay probability in internal RT state ST2 may be configured to be higher than in second RT mode.

The contents of BB state ST3 and RB state ST4 have already been explained. In BB state ST3 and RB state ST4, a transition to lottery mode does not occur.

The preparation state ST5 is a game state that is entered prior to transitioning to the ART state ST6. It can be entered from the normal game state ST1, the BB state ST3, and the RB state ST4. As previously explained, there are three lottery modes: normal mode, first RT mode, and second RT mode. In the preparation state ST5, any of these lottery modes can be entered. In the preparation state ST5, if winning data for index values IV = 1-3 is set in the normal mode lottery table (Figure 18), the first RT mode lottery table (Figure 20), and the second RT mode lottery table (Figure 22), the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows for the first bell win is announced. Then, when the first bell win is achieved, "11" game media is awarded. This increases the expected number of game media awarded in one game in the preparation state ST5. Furthermore, in the preparation state ST5, if winning data of index value IV = 10 to 15 in the lottery table for the normal mode (Fig. 18) is set, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that will allow the first RT replay win is announced, if winning data of index value IV = 10 to 15 in the lottery table for the first RT mode (Fig. 20) is set, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that will allow the second RT replay win is announced, and if winning data of index value IV = 16 to 21 in the lottery table for the first RT mode (Fig. 20) is set, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that will prevent the first fall replay win is announced. When a second RT replay win is achieved in the preparation state ST5 and the lottery mode transitions to the second RT mode, the gaming state transitions to the ART state ST6. Note that a transition to the preparation state ST5 may occur when the lottery mode is the second RT mode; in this case, the lottery mode will transition to the first RT mode, and if a transition to the second RT mode occurs after that, it will transition to the ART state ST6.

As mentioned above, the ART state ST6 is a gaming state to which a player enters when a second RT replay win is achieved in the preparation state ST5. The ART state ST6 ends when the number of remaining games to be played in the ART state ST6 becomes "0". In this case, the gaming state returns to the normal gaming state ST1. Furthermore, if a bonus is won during the ART state ST6, the gaming state will transition to the internal RT state ST2, BB state ST3, or RB state ST4. In this case, the gaming state will transition to the preparation state ST5 after the BB state ST3 or RB state ST4 ends, and will ultimately return to the ART state ST6.

As already explained, there are three lottery modes: normal mode, first RT mode, and second RT mode. In ART state ST6, any of these lottery modes can be selected. In ART state ST6, if winning data for index values IV = 1 to 3 is set in the normal mode lottery table (Figure 18), first RT mode lottery table (Figure 20), and second RT mode lottery table (Figure 22), the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that will result in a first bell win is announced. Then, when a first bell win is achieved, 11 game media are awarded. This increases the expected number of game media awarded in one game in ART state ST6. In addition, in the ART state ST6, if winning data of index value IV = 10 to 15 in the lottery table for the normal mode (FIG. 18) is set, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first RT replay winning to be achieved is announced, and if winning data of index value IV = 10 to 15 in the lottery table for the first RT mode (FIG. 20) is set, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the second RT replay winning to be achieved is announced. When the winning data for the index value IV = 16 to 21 in the lottery table for the first RT mode (FIG. 20) is set, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that can prevent the first drop replay win is announced, and when the winning data for the index value IV = 10 to 15 in the lottery table for the second RT mode (FIG. 22) is set, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that can prevent the second drop replay win is announced. As a result, in the ART state ST6, the lottery mode is basically maintained in the second RT mode. The second RT mode is a mode in which the replay probability is higher than in the normal mode and the first RT mode. In other words, the ART state ST6 is a gaming state in which the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that can prevent the first bell win is announced, and is a gaming state in which the replay probability is basically maintained high. This makes it possible to increase the expected net increase in gaming media in ART state ST6. Note that even if the lottery mode transitions from the second RT mode to the first RT mode or from the first RT mode to the normal mode in ART state ST6, the number of remaining continuing games in ART state ST6 will be subtracted even if ART state ST6 is maintained and the game is not in the second RT mode.

In a configuration in which various game states ST1 to ST6 exist as described above, a game zone is set in addition to these game states ST1 to ST6. A normal zone SC1 and a favorable zone SC2 are set as game zones. In other words, in this slot machine 10, the factors that determine the game situation are the setting values "1" to "6," the lottery modes of normal mode, first RT mode, and second RT mode, the various game states ST1 to ST6, and the game zones of the normal zone SC1 and favorable zone SC2.

Normal section SC1 is a section in which the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which allows for advantageous winnings for the player when different winning combinations are achieved depending on the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, is not announced, and is a section in which the probability of achieving the conditions for transitioning to ART state ST6, a gaming state advantageous to the player, is lower than in advantageous section SC2. More specifically, in normal section SC1, the conditions for transitioning to ART state ST6 are not achieved. When the all-clear process (step S107) is executed in the main process (Figure 14), the normal gaming state ST1 and normal mode are reached, and the normal section SC1 is entered. Furthermore, when the initialization process for advantageous section SC2 is executed in advantageous section SC2, the normal section SC1 also occurs. Normal section SC1 ends when an opportunity to transition to advantageous section SC2 occurs, and the player transitions to advantageous section SC2.

Advantageous section SC2 is a section in which the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is announced, allowing for a winning combination that is advantageous to the player when different winning combinations are achieved depending on the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and is at least one of the following sections: a section in which the probability of transitioning to ART state ST6, a game state that is advantageous to the player, is higher than in normal section SC1.

The advantageous zone SC2 can end when the ART state ST6 ends and there is a transition to the normal gaming state ST1. When the advantageous zone SC2 ends, there is a transition to the normal zone SC1. Furthermore, the ending conditions for the advantageous zone SC2 are set such that either the total number of games played reaches the upper limit number of games (specifically, 1,500 games) as the advantageous zone SC2 continues without a transition to the normal zone SC1, or the limited total net increase in the number of gaming media reaches the upper limit net increase number (specifically, 2,400) as the advantageous zone SC2 continues without a transition to the normal zone SC1. The limited total net increase in gaming media refers to the increase in the predetermined difference from the predetermined reference value, where the minimum value of the predetermined difference is the predetermined reference value, and the difference is calculated by subtracting the total number of gaming media consumed to play games while advantageous zone SC2 is continuing (0 when no games are being played) from the total number of gaming media awarded through games played while advantageous zone SC2 is continuing (0 when no gaming media are awarded).

In other words, if the advantageous section SC2 continues and the limited total net increase in gaming media since the start of the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit net increase, the advantageous section SC2 ends and the game transitions to the normal section SC1. Furthermore, if the advantageous section SC2 continues and the number of games played since the start of the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, the advantageous section SC2 ends and the game transitions to the normal section SC1. If either of these ending conditions is met, even if the game is in the middle of the preparation state ST5 or ART state ST6, the preparation state ST5 or ART state ST6 ends in the game where the ending condition was met, and the advantageous section SC2 ends, resulting in a transition to the normal section SC1 and the normal game state ST1. This makes it possible to prevent the advantageous section SC2 from continuing excessively.

As shown in Figure 26, the normal game state ST1, internal RT state ST2, BB state ST3, and RB state ST4 can occur in either the normal section SC1 or the advantageous section SC2. On the other hand, the preparation state ST5 and ART state ST6 are never present in the normal section SC1, but only in the advantageous section SC2.

Next, we will explain the specific processing configuration that enables the setting of the game states ST1 to ST6 and game zones SC1 and SC2 as described above. Figure 27 is a flowchart showing the first control processing of the game zone executed by the main MPU 72. The first control processing of the game zone is executed in step S411 of the winning combination lottery processing (Figure 17). This step S411 processing is executed at the start of the game after the winning combination has been determined. Note that the first control processing of the game zone is executed using a specific control program and specific control data.

In the first control process for the gaming section, it is first determined whether the current gaming state is the internal RT state ST2, the bonus state (BB state ST3, RB state ST4), the preparation state ST5, or the ART state ST6 (step S501). If a negative determination is made in step S501, the processing from step S502 onwards is executed.

In step S502, it is determined whether the advantageous zone flag provided in the second calculation target area 111 of the work area 103 for specific control is set to "1". The advantageous zone flag is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to determine whether the gaming zone is an advantageous zone SC2 or not; when the advantageous zone flag is set to "1", it is an advantageous zone SC2, and when the advantageous zone flag value is "0", it is a normal zone SC1.

If the gaming area is the normal area SC1 (step S502: NO), it is determined whether winning data that is the target of the advantageous transition lottery has been set in the lottery process for the current role (Figure 17) (step S503). In step S503, a positive determination is made if winning data with index value IV = 4 to 6 in the normal mode lottery table (Figure 18), first RT mode lottery table (Figure 20), or second RT mode lottery table (Figure 22) has been set in the second calculation target area 111. If a positive determination is made in step S503, an advantageous transition lottery process is executed to determine whether a transition to the advantageous area SC2 will occur (step S504).

In the advantageous transition lottery process (step S504), first, the advantageous transition table corresponding to the winning data set in the current role lottery process (Figure 17) is read from the main ROM 73. In this case, the advantageous transition table is set so that winning data with a lower probability of winning has a higher probability of winning a transition to advantageous zone SC2. Incidentally, this advantageous transition table is common regardless of the setting value of "1" to "6." This fact that the table is common regardless of the setting value applies to all lottery processes other than the role lottery process (Figure 17). After that, the numerical information of the random number counter, which is periodically updated in the second calculation target area 111, is read, and the read numerical information is compared against the read advantageous transition table. This determines whether or not a transition to advantageous zone SC2 has been won.

If a win has been made to transition to advantageous zone SC2 (step S505: YES), the advantageous transition win flag provided in the second calculation target area 111 (Figure 12) is set to "1" (step S506), and the first control process for this gaming zone is terminated. The advantageous transition win flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to determine that a win has been made to transition to advantageous zone SC2 in the advantageous transition lottery process (step S504). By setting the advantageous transition win flag to "1", a process to transition the gaming zone to advantageous zone SC2 is executed in the second control process for the gaming zone (Figure 29) described below.

If a positive determination is made in step S502, it is determined whether winning data that will be the subject of the ART transition lottery has been set in the lottery process for this role (Figure 17) (step S507). In step S507, a positive determination is made if winning data with index value IV = 4 to 6 in the lottery table for normal mode (Figure 18), the lottery table for first RT mode (Figure 20), or the lottery table for second RT mode (Figure 22) has been set in the second calculation target area 111. If a positive determination is made in step S507, an ART transition lottery process is executed to determine whether a transition to ART state ST6 will occur (step S508).

In the ART transition lottery process (step S508), first, the ART transition table corresponding to the winning data set in the lottery process for this role (Figure 17) is read from the main ROM 73. In this case, the advantageous transition table is set so that winning data with a lower probability of winning has a higher probability of winning the transition to ART state ST6. Furthermore, this ART transition table is common regardless of the setting value of "1" to "6". After that, the numerical information of the random number counter, which is periodically updated in the second calculation target area 111, is read, and the read numerical information is compared with the read ART transition table. This determines whether or not the transition to ART state ST6 has been won.

If a transition to ART state ST6 is successful (step S509: YES), the ART win flag provided in the second calculation target area 111 (Figure 12) is set to "1" (step S510), and the first control process for this gaming section is terminated. The ART win flag is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to identify the need to transition to ready state ST5. By setting the ART win flag to "1", processing to transition the gaming state to ready state ST5 is executed in the normal processing described below (step S605 in the response processing at the end of gaming (Figure 28)).

Next, the response processing at the end of game, which is executed by the main MPU 72, will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 28. The response processing at the end of game is executed in step S311 of the normal processing (Figure 16). This step S311 processing is executed after the reel control processing (step S309), and is therefore executed after all rotations of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in one game have stopped. Note that the response processing at the end of game is executed using a program and data for specific control.

In the response process at the end of gameplay, first, bonus processing is executed to control the transition and progression of BB state ST3 or RB state ST4 (step S601). The bonus processing will be explained in detail later. Then, on the condition that the state is not the internal RT state ST2, BB state ST3, or RB state ST4 (step S602: NO), lottery mode control processing is executed (step S603). In the lottery mode control processing, processing to transition to lottery mode is executed if any RT replay win or any fall replay win is achieved. Also, in a game in which bonus winning data is set in the second calculation target area 111 of the work area 103 for specific control, processing to transition the game state to internal RT state ST2 is executed if a bonus winning corresponding to the bonus winning data is not achieved. The lottery mode control processing will be explained in detail later.

Then, the process jumps to the processing corresponding to the current gaming state (step S604). In step S604, if the gaming state is normal gaming state ST1, normal processing is executed (step S605). In normal processing (step S605), if the number of games continuously played in normal gaming state ST1 in the advantageous zone SC2 reaches the normal gaming upper limit number of games (specifically, "1000"), or if a win for transition to ART state ST6 occurs in the ART transition lottery processing (step S508 of the first control processing of the gaming zone (Figure 27)), processing is executed to transition to ready state ST5 as a preliminary step to transition to ART state ST6. In step S604, if the gaming state is ready state ST5, ready state processing is executed (step S606), and if the gaming state is ART state ST6, ART state processing is executed (step S607). Details of the normal processing (step S605), preparation state processing (step S606), and ART state processing (step S607) will be described later.

If a positive judgment is made in step S602, or if any of the processes in steps S605 to S607 has been executed, the second control process for the game area is executed (step S608). The second control process for the game area is also executed (step S608) after the process in step S1210 of the bonus state process (FIG. 34) described below has been executed. In the second control process for the game area, processing for transitioning the game area is executed. Thereafter, a winning data clearing process is executed (step S609), and the corresponding process at the end of this game is terminated. In the winning data clearing process (step S609), all winning data set in the second calculation target area 111 other than the bonus winning data is cleared.

Figure 29 is a flowchart showing the second control process for the play area. As described above, the response process at the end of play is executed after all rotations of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in one game have stopped, and therefore the second control process for the play area is also executed after all rotations of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in one game have stopped. Note that the second control process for the play area is executed using a specific control program and specific control data.

In the second control process for the gaming area, if the advantageous transition winning flag for the second calculation target area 111 in the specific control work area 103 is set to "1" (step S701: YES), the advantageous zone flag for the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1", and the advantageous continuation counter and total winnings counter provided in the second calculation target area 111 are cleared to "0" (step S702). By setting the advantageous zone flag to "1", the gaming area transitions to advantageous zone SC2. In this way, if a transition to advantageous zone SC2 is won in the advantageous transition lottery process, the gaming area transitions to advantageous zone SC2 at the end of the game in which the transition winning occurred.

The advantageous continuation counter is a counter that allows the main MPU 72 to determine the number of games played from the start of the advantageous section SC2 when the advantageous section SC2 continues without an intervening normal section SC1. If the value of the advantageous continuation counter in the advantageous section SC2 reaches a value corresponding to the upper limit number of games (specifically, 1,500 games), the advantageous section SC2 ends with the game that was reached, even if the game is in the middle of the preparation state ST5 or ART state ST6, and the game transitions to the normal section SC1 and normal game state ST1.

The total acquisition counter is a counter used by the main MPU 72 to determine the limited total net increase in gaming media from the start of the advantageous zone SC2 when the advantageous zone SC2 continues without an intervening normal zone SC1. As already explained, the limited total net increase in gaming media is the increase in the predetermined difference from the predetermined reference value, where the minimum value of the predetermined difference is the predetermined reference value, and the difference is calculated by subtracting the total number of gaming media consumed to play games when the advantageous zone SC2 continues (0 when no games are being played) from the total number of gaming media awarded through games played when the advantageous zone SC2 continues (0 when no gaming media are awarded). If the value of the total winnings counter reaches a value corresponding to the upper limit of net increase (specifically, 2,400 coins) in the advantageous zone SC2, even if the game is in the middle of the preparation state ST5 or ART state ST6, the advantageous zone SC2 ends and the game transitions to the normal zone SC1 and normal game state ST1.

Then, the second start-up preparation flag provided in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S703). The second start-up preparation flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to understand that the system is waiting to process the second state signal output to the external device, data counter DC, from LOW to HIGH. As already explained, the second state signal is a signal that indicates that the gaming zone is the advantageous zone SC2. Details of the second state signal will be described later. The advantageous transition win flag is then cleared to "0" (step S704), and the second control process for this gaming zone is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step S701, it is determined whether the advantageous zone flag of the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" to determine whether the gaming zone is an advantageous zone SC2 (step S705). If the advantageous zone flag is set to "1" (step S705: YES), the value of the advantageous continuation counter of the second calculation target area 111 is incremented by 1 (step S706), and it is determined whether the value of the advantageous continuation counter after the increment is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of games of "1500" (step S707).

If a negative judgment is made in step S707, it is determined whether any of the following replay wins has been achieved in the current game: first RT replay win, second RT replay win, first fall replay win, or second fall replay win (step S708). If none of the replay wins has been achieved (step S708: NO), the number of bets for the current game (specifically, "3") is subtracted from the total win counter in the second calculation target area 111 (step S709).

Then, it is determined whether any of the minor winning combinations (first to third supplementary winning combinations, first bell winning combination, second bell winning combination, first watermelon winning combination, second watermelon winning combination, and cherry winning combination) that result in the awarding of gaming media in the current game has occurred (step S710). If a positive determination is made in step S710, the number of gaming media awarded in the current game is added to the total winnings counter in the second calculation area 111 (step S711).

If a negative judgment is made in step S710, or if the processing of step S711 is executed, it is determined whether the value of the total acquisition number counter for the second calculation target area 111 is 0 or greater (step S712). If the value of the total acquisition number counter is less than 0 (step S712: NO), the total acquisition number counter is cleared to "0" (step S713).

As described above, the number of bets for this game is subtracted from the total wins counter in step S709. Therefore, if, for example, no small wins are achieved in a game in normal game state ST1 immediately after transitioning to advantageous zone SC2, the value of the total wins counter will be less than 0. In this case, a negative judgment is made in step S712, and the total wins counter is cleared to "0" in step S713. As a result, if the predetermined difference is calculated by subtracting the "total number of gaming media consumed to play games while advantageous zone SC2 is continuing ("0" when no games are being played)" from the "total number of gaming media awarded by games played while advantageous zone SC2 is continuing ("0" when no gaming media are awarded)," the minimum value of this predetermined difference can be used as a predetermined reference value, and the total wins counter can be used to measure the limited total net increase in gaming media, which is the increase in the predetermined difference from the predetermined reference value.

If a positive judgment is made in step S708, if a positive judgment is made in step S712, or if the processing of step S713 is performed, it is determined whether the value of the total acquisition counter in the second calculation target area 111 is equal to or greater than the upper limit net increase of 2400 (step S714). If the value of the total acquisition counter is equal to or greater than 2400 (step S714: YES), this means that the ending conditions of the advantageous zone SC2 have been met. Also, if a judgment is made in step S707 that the value of the advantageous continuation counter in the second calculation target area 111 is equal to or greater than the upper limit game number of 1500, this also means that the ending conditions of the advantageous zone SC2 have been met. If a positive judgment is made in step S707 or if a positive judgment is made in step S714, processing to end the advantageous zone SC2 (processing of steps S715 and S716) is executed. Specifically, the advantageous termination process described below is executed (step S715), the initialization process for the advantageous section SC2 described below is executed (step S716), and the second control process for this gaming section is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S714, ending support processing is executed (step S717). Figure 30 is a flowchart showing the ending support processing. Note that the ending support processing is executed using a specific control program and specific control data.

The ending response process first determines whether the first ending flag provided in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S801). The first ending flag is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to identify whether the number of games played in the advantageous zone SC2, measured using the advantageous continuation counter, is likely to reach the upper limit number of games.

If the first ending flag is not set to "1" (step S801: NO), it is determined whether the sum of the value of the advantageous continuation counter in the second calculation target area 111 and the value of the ART game number counter provided in the second calculation target area 111 is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of games in the advantageous zone SC2 (step S802). The ART game number counter is a counter used by the main MPU 72 to determine the remaining number of continuing games in the ART state ST6. As already explained, the upper limit number of games in the advantageous zone SC2 is set to 1500 games. Note that the upper limit number of games in the advantageous zone SC2 is not limited to 1500 games, and may be less than 1500 games or more than 1500 games.

If a positive judgment is made in step S802, the first ending flag is set to "1" (step S803). When the first ending flag is set to "1", as will be described in detail below, the number of remaining games to be played in ART state ST6 will not be added in the preparation state ST5 and ART state ST6, and when the preparation state ST5 or ART state ST6 ends and the game transitions to the normal game state ST1, the advantageous zone SC2 will end and the game will transition to the normal zone SC1. This makes it possible to prevent the number of remaining games to be played in ART state ST6 from being added in a further way in a situation where the ending conditions for the advantageous zone SC2 are met.

In the bonus state (BB state ST3 and RB state ST4) in this embodiment, no additional lottery or the like is conducted to increase the remaining number of continuing games in ART state ST6, and the first ending flag is not referenced to determine whether or not to conduct such additional lottery or the like. Therefore, the conditions for setting the first ending flag to "1" do not include the remaining number of continuing games in the bonus state. In step S802, without adding the remaining number of continuing games in the bonus state, it is determined whether the sum of the number of games continuously played in the advantageous zone SC2 and the remaining number of continuing games in ART state ST6 is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of games in the advantageous zone SC2, thereby determining whether or not there is a high possibility that the number of games played in the advantageous zone SC2 will reach the upper limit number of games. In the bonus state in the advantageous section SC2, the value of the advantageous continuation counter is incremented by 1 each time a game is played, and if the sum of the advantageous continuation counter value after the increment and the ART game number counter value is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section SC2, a positive judgment is made in step S802 and the first ending flag is set to "1" in step S803.

Then, a first ending command is sent to the production side MPU92 (step S804). The first ending command includes information on the number of games required until the ending conditions of the advantageous zone SC2 are met, i.e., information corresponding to the difference between the value of the advantageous continuation counter and the upper limit number of games in the advantageous zone SC2.

By receiving the first ending command, the presentation-side MPU 92 is able to determine that the first ending flag has been set to "1" in the main-side MPU 72. If the presentation-side MPU 92 receives the first ending command when the presentation has not yet begun in the execution mode corresponding to the ending period, and if the game state at that time is ART state ST6, the presentation-side MPU 92 will use the reception of the first ending command as a trigger to change the execution mode of the presentation on the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 to the execution mode corresponding to the ending period. On the other hand, if the presentation-side MPU 92 receives the first ending command when the presentation has not yet begun in the execution mode corresponding to the ending period and the game state is not ART state ST6, when the presentation-side MPU 92 transitions to ART state ST6, the presentation-side MPU 92 will change the execution mode of the presentation on the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 to the execution mode corresponding to the ending period. The first ending flag is set to "1" when the value of the ART game number counter is 1 or greater, and the situation is either ART state ST6, a bonus state that occurs during ART state ST6 (BB state ST3 or RB state ST4), or preparation state ST5 after the bonus state that occurs during ART state ST6 has ended.

If a positive judgment is made in step S801, a negative judgment is made in step S802, or the processing of step S804 is executed, it is determined whether the second ending flag provided in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S805). The second ending flag is a flag that the main MPU 72 uses to identify that there is a high possibility that the limited total net increase in the number of gaming media measured using the total acquisition counter in the second calculation target area 111 will reach the upper limit net increase.

If the second ending flag is not set to "1" (step S805: NO), it is determined whether the result of multiplying the value of the ART game count counter by the expected acquisition value of gaming media in ART state ST6 and adding the result to the value of the total acquisition counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit net increase in the advantageous zone SC2 (step S806). As already explained, the upper limit net increase in the advantageous zone SC2 is set to "2400". Note that the upper limit net increase in the advantageous zone SC2 is not limited to "2400", and may be a number less than "2400" or more than "2400".

If a positive judgment is made in step S806, the second ending flag is set to "1" (step S807). When the second ending flag is set to "1", as will be described in detail below, the number of remaining games to be played in ART state ST6 will not be added in the preparation state ST5 and ART state ST6, and when the preparation state ST5 or ART state ST6 ends and the game transitions to the normal game state ST1, the advantageous zone SC2 will end and the game will transition to the normal zone SC1. This makes it possible to prevent the number of remaining games to be played in ART state ST6 from being further added in a situation where the ending conditions for the advantageous zone SC2 are met.

In the bonus state (BB state ST3 and RB state ST4) in this embodiment, no additional lottery or the like is conducted to increase the remaining number of continuing games in ART state ST6, and the second ending flag is not referenced to determine whether or not to conduct such additional lottery or the like. Therefore, the conditions for setting the second ending flag to "1" do not include the remaining number of continuing games in the bonus state. In step S806, without considering the remaining number of games in the bonus state, the value of the ART game number counter is multiplied by the expected acquisition value of gaming media in ART state ST6, and the resultant value is added to the value of the total acquisition counter to determine whether it is equal to or greater than the upper limit net increase of the advantageous zone SC2, thereby determining whether or not there is a high probability that the limited total net increase of gaming media measured using the total acquisition counter will reach the upper limit net increase. In the bonus state in the advantageous section SC2, each time a small win is achieved, the number of gaming media awarded corresponding to that small win is added to the value of the total number of wins counter, and if the result of multiplying the value of the ART game number counter by the expected value of gaming media won in the ART state ST6 and adding the result to the value of the total number of wins counter after said addition is equal to or greater than the upper limit net increase number for the advantageous section SC2, a positive judgment is made in step S806 and the second ending flag is set to "1" in step S807.

Then, a second ending command is sent to the production side MPU92 (step S808), and this ending response process is terminated. The second ending command includes information on the limited total net increase in the number of gaming media required until the ending conditions of the advantageous zone SC2 are met, i.e., information corresponding to the difference between the value of the total acquisition counter and the upper limit net increase in the advantageous zone SC2.

By receiving the second ending command, the presentation-side MPU 92 is able to determine that the second ending flag has been set to "1" in the main-side MPU 72. If the presentation-side MPU 92 receives the second ending command when the presentation has not yet begun in the execution mode corresponding to the ending period, and if the game state at that time is ART state ST6, the presentation-side MPU 92 will use the reception of the first ending command as a trigger to change the execution mode of the presentation on the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 to the execution mode corresponding to the ending period. On the other hand, if the presentation-side MPU 92 receives the second ending command when the presentation has not yet begun in the execution mode corresponding to the ending period and the game state is not ART state ST6, when the presentation-side MPU 92 transitions to ART state ST6, the presentation-side MPU 92 will change the execution mode of the presentation on the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 to the execution mode corresponding to the ending period. The second ending flag is set to "1" when the value of the ART game number counter is 1 or greater, and the situation is either ART state ST6, a bonus state that occurs during ART state ST6 (BB state ST3 or RB state ST4), or preparation state ST5 after the bonus state that occurs during ART state ST6 has ended.

Returning to the explanation of the second control process for the gaming zone (Figure 29), after executing the ending response process in step S717, it is determined whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state ST1 and the value of the advantage maintenance counter provided in the second calculation target area 111 is "0" (step S718). The advantage maintenance counter is a counter used by the main MPU 72 to determine the number of remaining games in the advantage maintenance game count when the ART state ST6 ends and the gaming state transitions to the normal gaming state ST1, and the advantage maintenance game count is maintained for the advantage maintenance game count even after transitioning to the normal gaming state ST1. The advantage maintenance counter is set to "10" if the advantage maintenance lottery held at the end of the ART state ST6 results in an advantage maintenance win. Details of the advantage maintenance lottery will be described later.

If a negative judgment is made in step S718, the second control process for this gaming area is terminated. On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step S718, the initialization process for the advantageous area described below is executed (step S719), as in step S716, and the second control process for this gaming area is terminated.

As described above, if any replay win is achieved, a positive determination is made in step S708, and steps S709 to S713 are not executed. In a game in which a replay win is achieved, the gaming media owned by the player at the start of the game are used to set the bet, but as a benefit from the replay win, the player can replay a new game with the same number of bets as the number of bets made in the game in which the replay win was achieved. In other words, the number of gaming media owned by the player does not change in a game in which a replay win is achieved. In this case, by not executing steps S708 to S713 in a game in which a replay win is achieved, it is possible to omit the execution of the process to change the value of the total win counter in games in which the number of gaming media owned by the player does not change, thereby eliminating the execution of unnecessary process.

On the other hand, even in a game in which a replay win is achieved, step S714 determines whether the value of the total wins counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit net increase of 2400. This means that even if the value of the total wins counter has already reached the upper limit net increase of 2400 in a game prior to the game in which a replay win is achieved, but the initialization process for the advantageous section SC2 has not been performed due to noise or other reasons, it is possible to determine that the value of the total wins counter has reached the upper limit net increase of 2400 in the subsequent game in which a replay win is achieved, and it becomes possible to perform the initialization process for the advantageous section SC2.

Next, we will explain the normal processing executed in step S605 of the response processing at the end of game play (Figure 28). Note that the normal processing is executed using a program and data for specific control.

In normal processing, when the current gaming zone is the advantageous zone SC2, the value of the normal gaming game count counter provided in the second calculation target area 111 is incremented by 1, and it is determined whether the value of the normal gaming game count counter after the increment has reached the upper limit of normal gaming games (specifically, "1000"). The normal gaming game count counter is a counter that allows the main MPU 72 to grasp the number of games that have been continuously played in the advantageous zone SC2 in normal gaming state ST1. Numerical information in the range of "0" to "1000" is set to the normal gaming game count counter. The upper limit of normal gaming games is the same for each setting value of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6". If the value of the normal gaming game count counter has reached the upper limit of normal gaming games (specifically, "1000"), the value of the normal gaming game count counter is cleared to "0". In the normal processing, when it is determined that the value of the normal game game number counter has reached the normal game upper limit number (specifically, "1000") and the value of the normal game game number counter is cleared to "0," or when the ART win flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1," the number of continued games in the ART state ST6 is set to "50," and the ART win flag is cleared to "0." As already explained, the ART win flag is set to "1" when a win for transition to the ART state ST6 occurs in the ART transition lottery processing (step S508 of the first control processing for the game section (FIG. 27)). Thereafter, information is set in the second calculation target area 111 to transition the game state to the ready state ST5, and the game state is transitioned to the ready state ST5. As a result, the ready state processing of step S606 is executed in the next or subsequent processing in the response processing at the end of game (FIG. 28). Thereafter, a preparation start command is transmitted to the production-side MPU 92. The preparation start command is a command that causes the presentation side MPU 92 to recognize that preparation state ST5 has begun. When the presentation side MPU 92 receives the preparation start command, it causes the presentation corresponding to preparation state ST5 to begin. Furthermore, in normal processing, if the value of the advantage maintenance counter in the second calculation target area 111 is "1" or greater, the value of the advantage maintenance counter is decremented by 1.

In this way, if a transition to ART state ST6 is selected in the ART transition lottery process (step S508 of the first control process for the gaming area (FIG. 27)), the game will transition to the preparation state ST5 as a preliminary step before transitioning to the ART state ST6. Also, if the number of games continuously played in the normal gaming state ST1 in the advantageous area SC2 reaches the upper limit number of normal gaming games (specifically, "1000"), the game will transition to the preparation state ST5 as a preliminary step before transitioning to the ART state ST6. This makes it possible to compensate for the normal gaming state ST1 continuing in the advantageous area SC2 until the upper limit number of normal gaming games is reached. Furthermore, by making the upper limit number of normal gaming games the same for each setting value from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6," it is possible to prevent any advantage or disadvantage arising from the setting value regarding the upper limit number of normal gaming games.

Next, before explaining the preparation state processing (Figure 31) executed in step S606 of the response processing at the end of game play (Figure 28), we will explain the additional processing executed in step S412 of the winning combination lottery processing (Figure 17). Note that the additional processing is executed using a program and data for specific control.

In the add-on processing, if the game state is in the ready state ST5 or the ART state ST6 and winning data that is the target of the add-on processing is set in the lottery processing for the current role (Figure 17), the add-on processing is executed on the condition that the first ending flag and the second ending flag in the second calculation target area 111 are not set to "1." The winning data that is the target of the add-on processing is winning data with index values IV = 4-6, 16-17 in the normal mode lottery table (Figure 18), winning data with index values IV = 4-6, 22-23 in the first RT mode lottery table (Figure 20), and winning data with index values IV = 4-6, 17-18 in the second RT mode lottery table (Figure 22).

In the add-on lottery process, first, the add-on table corresponding to the winning data set in the lottery process for this role (Figure 17) is read from the main ROM 73. Then, the numerical information of the random number counter, which is periodically updated in the second calculation target area 111, is read, and the read numerical information is compared against the read add-on table. This determines whether an add-on win has occurred. If an add-on win has occurred, it is determined whether the game state is in ART state ST6. If the game state is in ART state ST6, "50" is added to the ART game number counter in the second calculation target area 111. As already explained, the ART game number counter is a counter used by the main MPU 72 to determine the remaining number of continued games in ART state ST6. Then, the ART add-on flag provided in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1", and this add-on process is terminated. The ART add-on flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to identify that an add-on win has occurred in the ART state ST6. On the other hand, if it is determined that the gaming state is not the ART state ST6, this means that the gaming state is in the preparation state ST5, so "50" is added to the ART game number counter in the second calculation target area 111. After that, the preparation add-on flag provided in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1", and this add-on processing is terminated. The preparation add-on flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to identify that an add-on win has occurred in the preparation state ST5.

As described above, the additional lottery process is executed on the condition that the first ending flag and the second ending flag in the second calculation target area 111 are not set to "1." This makes it possible to prevent the remaining number of continuing games in ART state ST6 from being further added on in a situation where the ending conditions for advantageous zone SC2 are met.

Next, the preparation state processing executed in step S606 of the response processing at the end of game play (Figure 28) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 31. Note that the preparation state processing is executed using a program and data for specific control.

In the preparation state processing, first, the preparation addition response processing is executed (step S901). In the preparation addition response processing, if the preparation addition flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1", a preparation addition command is sent to the presentation side MPU 92 and the preparation addition flag is cleared to "0". The preparation addition command is a command indicating that the number of continued games in the ART state ST6 has been added in the preparation state ST5. When the presentation side MPU 92 receives the preparation addition command, it executes an addition effect indicating that the current number of added games set in the preparation addition command has been granted. As already explained, if at least one of the first ending flag and the second ending flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1", an addition win that adds to the number of continued games in the ART state ST6 will not occur. Therefore, in situations where the number of games played in the advantageous zone SC2 is likely to reach the upper limit of the number of games, or where the total limited net increase in the number of gaming media is likely to reach the upper limit of the net increase, the number of remaining games to be played in ART state ST6 will not increase.

If a second RT replay win is subsequently achieved in the current game (step S902: YES), this means that an opportunity to transition from the preparation state ST5 to the ART state ST6 has occurred, and ART start processing is executed (step S903). In the ART start processing, information is set in the second calculation target area 111 to transition the gaming state to the ART state ST6, and the gaming state is transitioned to the ART state ST6. As a result, the ART state processing of step S607 will be executed in the next and subsequent processing times of the response processing at the end of gaming (Figure 28).

In addition, in the ART start processing (step S903), if the gaming state before the start of the preparation state ST5 is the bonus state and the gaming state immediately before that bonus state is the ART state ST6, this means that a return to the ART state ST6 has occurred, and settings are made to return to the gaming situation in the ART state ST6 immediately before the transition to the bonus state. In addition, if an additional win has occurred in the preparation state ST5 for the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST6, the ART state ST6 will be started with the number of continued games awarded as a result of that additional win added. In the ART start processing (step S903), an ART start command indicating that a transition to the ART state ST6 has occurred is sent to the production side MPU 92. The ART start command contains information indicating whether or not the transition to the ART state ST6 this time corresponds to a return to the ART state ST6, and if it does not correspond to a return to the ART state ST6, it contains information indicating that 50 games have been awarded as the starting number of games for the ART state ST6.

Then, the third start-up preparation flag provided in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S904), and this preparation state processing is terminated. The third start-up preparation flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to understand that the processing is waiting to change the third state signal output to the external device, the data counter DC, from a LOW state to a HIGH state. As already explained, the third state signal is a signal that indicates that the gaming state is the ART state ST6. Details of the third state signal will be provided later.

Next, the ART state processing executed in step S607 of the response processing at the end of game play (Figure 28) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 32. Note that the ART state processing is executed using a program and data for specific control.

In the ART state processing, first, the ART addition response processing is executed (step S1001). In the ART addition response processing, if the ART addition flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1", an ART addition command is sent to the presentation side MPU 92, and the ART addition flag is cleared to "0". The ART addition command is a command indicating that the number of continued games in ART state ST6 has been added in ART state ST6. When the presentation side MPU 92 receives the ART addition command, it executes an addition effect indicating that the current number of added games set in the ART addition command has been granted. As already explained, if at least one of the first ending flag and the second ending flag is set to "1", an addition win that adds to the number of continued games in ART state ST6 will not occur. Therefore, in situations where the number of games played in the advantageous zone SC2 is likely to reach the upper limit of the number of games, or where the total limited net increase in the number of gaming media is likely to reach the upper limit of the net increase, the number of remaining games to be played in ART state ST6 will not increase.

Then, the value of the ART game number counter in the second calculation target area 111 is decremented by 1 (step S1002), and if the value of the ART game number counter after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S1003: YES), termination processing of the ART state ST6 is executed (step S1004). In this termination processing, information is set in the second calculation target area 111 to transition the gaming state from the ART state ST6 to the normal gaming state ST1, and the gaming state is transitioned to the normal gaming state ST1. As a result, the normal processing of step S605 is executed in the next and subsequent processing times of, for example, the response processing at the end of gaming (Figure 28).

Then, the third drop preparation flag provided in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S1005). The third drop preparation flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to understand that the third state signal being output to the external device, the data counter DC, is waiting to be dropped from HI to LOW. As already explained, the third state signal is a signal that indicates that the gaming state is ART state ST6. Details of the third state signal will be provided later.

After that, if neither the first ending flag nor the second ending flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S1006: NO), an advantage maintenance lottery process is executed (step S1007). In the advantage maintenance lottery process, the advantage maintenance lottery table is first read from the main ROM 73. The advantage maintenance lottery table contains the winning value corresponding to an advantage maintenance win. Then, the numerical information of the random number counter, which is periodically updated in the second calculation target area 111, is read, and the read numerical information is compared against the read advantage maintenance lottery table to determine whether or not an advantage maintenance win has occurred.

If an advantage maintenance win is obtained (step S1008: YES), the advantage maintenance counter in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "10," which is the number of advantage maintenance games (step S1009). As a result, even after the ART state ST6 ends, the gaming zone is maintained in the advantage maintenance zone SC2 until the advantage maintenance number of games is played. After that, an advantage maintenance command is sent to the presentation side MPU 92 (step S1010), and this ART state processing ends. The advantage maintenance command is a command that causes the presentation side MPU 92 to recognize that the ART state ST6 has ended and that the advantage maintenance zone will continue for 10 games even after the end of the ART state ST6 due to the occurrence of an advantage maintenance win. By receiving the advantage maintenance command, the presentation side MPU 92 executes a presentation corresponding to the end of the ART state ST6, and executes presentations corresponding to the normal gaming state ST1 and the advantage maintenance zone SC2 after the presentation ends.

If the ART state ST6 ends with at least one of the first ending flag and the second ending flag in the second calculation target area 111 set to "1" (step S1006: YES), or if the advantageous maintenance lottery process (step S1007) results in a loss (step S1008: NO), an ART end command is sent to the presentation side MPU 92 (step S1011). The ART end command is a command that causes the presentation side MPU 92 to recognize that the ART state ST6 has ended. By receiving the ART end command, the presentation side MPU 92 executes a presentation corresponding to the end of the ART state ST6, and after the end of the presentation, executes a presentation corresponding to the normal game state ST1 and the normal section SC1. Thereafter, initialization processing for the advantageous section SC2 is executed to end the advantageous section SC2 (step S1012), and this ART state processing ends. In this way, when the ART state ST6 ends with at least one of the first ending flag and the second ending flag in the second calculation target area 111 set to "1" (step S1006: YES), the advantageous zone SC2 initialization process (step S1012) is executed without executing the advantageous maintenance lottery process (step S1007). Details of the advantageous zone SC2 initialization process will be described later.

Next, the bonus processing executed in step S601 of the response processing at the end of game play (Figure 28) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 33. Note that the bonus processing is executed using a specific control program and specific control data.

In the bonus processing, if a BB win occurs corresponding to the BB winning data stored in the second calculation target area 111 (Figure 12) in the specific control work area 103 (step S1101: YES), the BB flag provided in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S1102). The BB flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to identify that the game is in the BB state ST3.

If the currently established BB win is a third BB win or a fourth BB win (step S1103: YES), advantageous zone start processing is executed (step S1104). In advantageous zone start processing, the advantageous zone flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" to transition the gaming zone to advantageous zone SC2, and an advantageous zone start command is sent to the presentation side MPU 92. The advantageous zone start command is a command that causes the presentation side MPU 92 to recognize that a transition to advantageous zone SC2 has occurred. In addition, in advantageous zone start processing (step S1104), lighting processing of the advantageous zone display unit 67 is executed. In this lighting processing, the advantageous zone display unit 67 is switched from an off state to an on state.

In this way, when a third or fourth BB win is achieved, even if the game zone before the BB state ST3 was entered was the normal zone SC1, it will be set to the advantageous zone SC2. Therefore, the BB state ST3 corresponding to the third and fourth BB roles can be made a more advantageous BB state ST3 than the BB state ST3 corresponding to the first and second BB roles.

Then, the second start-up preparation flag for the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S1105). As already explained, the second state signal is a signal indicating that the gaming zone is the advantageous zone SC2, and the second start-up preparation flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to understand that the second state signal being output to the external device, the data counter DC, is waiting to be raised from a LOW state to a HIGH state. Details of the second state signal will be provided later.

On the other hand, if an RB win occurs corresponding to the RB win data stored in the second calculation target area 111 (step S1101: NO, step S1106: YES), the RB flag provided in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S1107). The RB flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to identify that the RB state ST4 is in effect.

Furthermore, if the RB winning that has occurred this time is the first RB winning (step S1108: YES), similar to step S1104, advantageous zone start processing is executed (step S1109). As already explained, in advantageous zone start processing, the advantageous zone flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" to transition the gaming zone to advantageous zone SC2, and an advantageous zone start command is sent to the presentation side MPU 92. The advantageous zone start command is a command that causes the presentation side MPU 92 to recognize that a transition to advantageous zone SC2 has occurred. Furthermore, in advantageous zone start processing (step S1109), lighting processing of the advantageous zone display unit 67 is executed. In this lighting processing, the advantageous zone display unit 67 is switched from an off state to an on state.

In this way, when the first RB win is achieved, even if the gaming zone before the RB state ST4 was set to the normal zone SC1, it will be set to the advantageous zone SC2. Therefore, the RB state ST4 corresponding to the first RB role can be set to a more advantageous RB state ST4 than the RB state ST4 corresponding to the second RB role. Then, as in step S1105, the second start-up preparation flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S1110). This allows the main MPU 72 to determine that the second state signal being output to the external device, the data counter DC, is waiting to be raised from a LOW state to a HIGH state. As already explained, the second state signal is a signal indicating that the gaming zone is in the advantageous zone SC2. Details of the second state signal will be provided later.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1103, if the processing of step S1105 is performed, if a negative judgment is made in step S1108, or if the processing of step S1110 is performed, the bonus winning data set in the second calculation target area 111 is cleared (step S1111). In this way, the bonus winning data set in the second calculation target area 111 is cleared when a bonus win corresponding to the bonus winning data is achieved. Then, the first start-up preparation flag provided in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S1112). The first start-up preparation flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to determine that it is waiting for processing to change the first state signal output to the data counter DC, which is an external device, from a LOW state to a HIGH state. As already explained, the first state signal is a signal that indicates that the gaming state is a bonus state. Details of the first state signal will be described later.

Then, the value of the total payout counter provided in the second calculation target area 111 is cleared to "0" (step S1113). The total payout counter is a counter that allows the main MPU 72 to grasp the total number of gaming media awarded in the bonus state. Then, a bonus start command is sent to the presentation MPU 92 (step S1114), and the bonus processing is terminated. The bonus start command contains information indicating the type of bonus state that will be started this time (1st BB win, 2nd BB win, 3rd BB win, 4th BB win, 1st RB win, or 2nd RB win). When the presentation MPU 92 receives the bonus start command, it executes a presentation that corresponds to the type of bonus state that will be started.

If a negative determination is made in step S1106, it is determined whether the BB flag or RB flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S1115). If a positive determination is made in step S1115, bonus state processing is executed to control the progress of the BB state ST3 or RB state ST4 (step S1116), and this bonus processing is terminated. Figure 34 is a flowchart showing the bonus state processing. Note that the bonus state processing is executed using a specific control program and specific control data.

In the bonus state processing, if gaming media have been awarded in the current game (step S1201: YES), a total payout counter increment process is executed (step S1202). In the total payout counter increment process, a value corresponding to the number of gaming media awarded this time is added to the total payout counter in the second calculation target area 111. Then, it is determined whether the value of the total payout counter after the increment process (step S1202) is equal to or greater than the termination reference number corresponding to the current bonus state (step S1203). Specifically, if the current bonus state is BB state ST3, it is determined whether the value is equal to or greater than the BB termination reference number (e.g., "350"); and if the current bonus state is RB state ST4, it is determined whether the value is equal to or greater than the RB termination reference number (e.g., "150").

If a positive determination is made in step S1203, it is determined whether the game state at the time the bonus role that triggered the current bonus state was won was in the ready state ST5 or the ART state ST6 (step S1204). If a positive determination is made in step S1204, a setting process for the ready state ST5 is executed (step S1205). In this setting process, information is set in the second calculation target area 111 to transition the game state to the ready state ST5, and the game state is transitioned to the ready state ST5. As a result, the ready state processing of step S606 will be executed in the next and subsequent processing times of the response process at the end of game play (Figure 28).

If a negative determination is made in step S1204, the normal gaming state ST1 setting process is executed (step S1206). In this setting process, information is set in the second calculation target area 111 to transition the gaming state to the normal gaming state ST1, and the gaming state is transitioned to the normal gaming state ST1. As a result, the normal processing of step S605 will be executed in the next and subsequent processing times of the response process at the end of gaming (Figure 28).

When the processing of step S1205 or step S1206 is executed, a bonus end command indicating the end of the bonus state is sent to the presentation-side MPU 92 (step S1207). This bonus end command contains information indicating whether the game state after the bonus state ends will be the normal game state ST1 or the preparation state ST5. By receiving the bonus end command, the presentation-side MPU 92 starts a presentation indicating the end of the bonus state, and after the presentation ends, starts a presentation corresponding to the game state after the bonus state ends.

Then, the bonus end initialization flag provided in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S1208), and the first suggested action process described below is executed (step S1209). The bonus end initialization flag is a flag that allows the master MPU 72 to recognize that the first suggested action process (step S1209) is being executed at the end of the bonus. The first drop preparation flag provided in the second calculation target area 111 is then set to "1" (step S1210), and the process proceeds to step S608 of the game end setting process (Figure 28), where steps S608 to S609 are executed. The first drop preparation flag is a flag that allows the master MPU 72 to recognize that the first state signal output to the external data counter DC is waiting to be dropped from a HIGH state to a LOW state. As already explained, the first state signal is a signal indicating that the game state is a bonus state. Details of the first state signal will be described later.

Next, the advantageous end processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 35. The advantageous end processing is executed in step S715 when one of the ending conditions is met in the second control processing (Figure 29) of the gaming area (when a positive judgment is made in step S707 or when a positive judgment is made in step S714). Note that the advantageous end processing is executed using a specific control program and specific control data.

In the advantageous end processing, first, it is determined whether the BB state flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" to determine whether the game state is in BB state ST3 (step S1301).

If a positive judgment is made in step S1301, it is determined whether the total number of gaming media awarded in BB state ST3 is less than the mid-game termination reference number for BB state ST3 (step S1302). In step S1302, the total number of gaming media awarded in BB state ST3 is determined based on the value of the total payout counter in the second calculation target area 111. As already explained, the BB termination reference number is "350". In contrast, the mid-game termination reference number for BB state ST3 is set to "200". If a positive judgment is made in step S1302, the bonus continuation flag set in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S1303), and the advantageous end processing is terminated. On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S1302, the advantageous end processing is terminated without setting the bonus continuation flag to "1". The bonus continuation flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to determine whether, when the ending conditions for the advantageous section SC2 are met during the bonus state, the advantageous section SC2 will end in the game in which the ending conditions are met, while the bonus state will continue.

If the ending conditions for the advantageous section SC2 are met when the total number of gaming media awarded in BB state ST3 is less than 200, the termination threshold for BB state ST3, the advantageous section SC2 ends in the game where the ending conditions were met, while the BB state ST3 continues even after the advantageous section SC2 ends until the total number of gaming media awarded reaches or exceeds the BB termination threshold of 350. This prevents the BB state ST3 from ending before the total number of gaming media awarded to the player in BB state ST3 meets the termination threshold. On the other hand, if the ending conditions for the advantageous section SC2 are met when the total number of gaming media awarded in BB state ST3 is greater than or equal to 200, the termination threshold for BB state ST3, the advantageous section SC2 ends in the game where the ending conditions were met, and the BB state ST3 also ends.

If it is determined in step S1301 that the gaming state is not BB state ST3, it is determined whether the gaming state is RB state ST4 (step S1304). If the gaming state is RB state ST4 (step S1304: YES), it is determined whether the total number of gaming media awarded in the RB state ST4 is less than the mid-game termination reference number for RB state ST4 (step S1305). In step S1305, the total number of gaming media awarded in RB state ST4 is determined based on the value of the total payout counter in the second calculation target area 111. As already explained, the RB termination reference number is "150." In contrast, the mid-game termination reference number for RB state ST4 is set to "100." If a positive determination is made in step S1305, the bonus continuation flag provided in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S1303), and the advantageous termination processing is terminated. On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S1305, the advantageous end process ends without setting the bonus continuation flag to "1".

If the ending conditions for the advantageous section SC2 are met when the total number of gaming media awarded in RB state ST4 is less than 100, the RB state ST4 termination threshold, the advantageous section SC2 ends in the game where the ending conditions were met, while the RB state ST4 continues even after the advantageous section SC2 ends until the total number of gaming media awarded reaches or exceeds 150, the RB state termination threshold. This prevents the RB state ST4 from ending before the total number of gaming media awarded to the player in RB state ST4 meets the termination threshold. On the other hand, if the ending conditions for the advantageous section SC2 are met when the total number of gaming media awarded in RB state ST4 is greater than or equal to 100, the RB state ST4 termination threshold, the advantageous section SC2 ends in the game where the ending conditions were met, and the RB state ST4 also ends.

Next, the initialization process for the advantageous section SC2 executed by the main MPU 72 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 36. The initialization process for the advantageous section SC2 is executed in step S716 when any of the ending conditions is met in the second control process for the gaming section (Figure 29), and is also executed in step S719 when the value of the advantageous maintenance counter becomes "0" in the normal gaming state ST1. Note that the initialization process for the advantageous section SC2 is executed using a program and data for specific control.

In the initialization process for the advantageous zone SC2, the advantageous zone flag in the second calculation target area 111 is cleared to "0" (step S1401). This causes the game zone to transition from the advantageous zone SC2 to the normal zone SC1. After that, the advantageous zone display unit 67 is switched from a lit state to an unlit state (step S1402). This ends the notification in the advantageous zone display unit 67 that it is in the advantageous zone SC2. After that, a advantageous zone end command is sent to the presentation side MPU 92 (step S1403). The advantageous zone end command is a command that causes the presentation side MPU 92 to recognize that the advantageous zone SC2 has ended.

Then, the second drop preparation flag provided in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S1404). The second drop preparation flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to understand that the second state signal being output to the external device, the data counter DC, is waiting to be dropped from HI to LOW. As already explained, the second state signal is a signal that indicates that the gaming zone is the advantageous zone SC2. Details of the second state signal will be provided later.

Then, the advantageous end initialization flag provided in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S1405), and the first suggested operation process described below is executed (step S1406). The advantageous end initialization flag is a flag that enables the main MPU 72 to recognize that the first suggested operation process (step S1406) is being executed at the end of the advantageous section SC2.

Then, it is determined whether at least one of the first ending flag and the second ending flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S1407). If a positive determination is made in step S1407, it is determined whether the gaming state is in ART state ST6 (step S1408), and if it is in ART state ST6 (step S1408: YES), the third drop preparation flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S1409). As already explained, the third state signal is a signal indicating that the gaming state is in ART state ST6, and the third drop preparation flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to determine that the third state signal output to the external device, the data counter DC, is waiting to be dropped from HI to LOW. In this way, if the ending conditions for the advantageous section SC2 are met and the ART state ST6 also ends when the advantageous section SC2 ends, the third drop preparation flag is set to "1". Details of the third state signal will be described later.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1407, if a negative judgment is made in step S1408, or if the processing of step S1409 is performed, it is determined whether the bonus continuation flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S1410). If the bonus continuation flag is not set to "1" (step S1410: NO), it is determined whether the gaming state is a bonus state (step S1411). If the gaming state is a bonus state (step S1411: YES), the first drop preparation flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S1412). As already explained, the first state signal is a signal indicating that the gaming state is a bonus state, and the first drop preparation flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to determine that the first state signal output to the external device, the data counter DC, is waiting to be dropped from a HI state to a LOW state. In this way, if the ending conditions for advantageous section SC2 are met and the bonus state ends when advantageous section SC2 ends, the first termination preparation flag is set to "1." Details of the first state signal will be provided later.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1411, or if the processing of step S1412 is performed, a clear process for ending the bonus is executed (step S1413). In the clear process for ending the bonus, even if the player is in the bonus state, various data indicating the bonus state, including the total payout counter in the second calculation target area 111, are cleared. Also, even if the player is in either the ready state ST5 or the ART state ST6, various data indicating the game state (the ready state ST5 or the ART state ST6), including the counter for storing the number of games continued in that game state (the ready state ST5 or the ART state ST6), are cleared, and the game state is transitioned to the normal game state ST1.

On the other hand, if the bonus continuation flag is set to "1" (step S1410: YES), a clear process for bonus continuation is executed (step S1414). In the clear process for bonus continuation, even if the player is in either the preparation state ST5 or the ART state ST6, various data indicating that the player is in that game state (preparation state ST5 or ART state ST6), including the counter that stores the number of games continued in that game state (preparation state ST5 or ART state ST6), are cleared. In the clear process for bonus continuation (step S1414), various data indicating that the player is in the bonus state, including the total payout counter in the second calculation target area 111, are not cleared. Therefore, the bonus state continues even after the advantageous zone SC2 ends, and when the bonus state ends, the game state transitions to the normal game state ST1.

If the processing of step S1413 has been performed or if the processing of step S1414 has been performed, the ending flag is cleared (step S1415), and the initialization processing of this advantageous zone SC2 is terminated. In the ending flag clearing processing (step S1415), the first ending flag and the second ending flag in the second calculation target area 111 are cleared to "0".

Next, the management processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 37. The management processing is executed in step S214 of the timer interrupt processing (Figure 15). Of the management processing, all processing other than the management execution processing (step S1503) is executed using a program and data for specific control, while the management execution processing (step S1503) is executed using a program and data for non-specific control.

In the management process, first, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (Figure 15) (step S1501). This makes it possible to prevent the timer interrupt processing (Figure 15), which is processing corresponding to specific control, from interrupting and being started in the middle of the management execution processing (described below), which is processing corresponding to non-specific control.

Then, a push command is issued to save the information in the flag register of the main MPU 72 to the stack area 101 for specific control (step S1502). The flag register includes a carry flag, zero flag, P/V flag, sign flag, and half carry flag, and the information in the flag register changes depending on the execution results of arithmetic instructions, rotate instructions, and input/output instructions. By saving this flag register information before the program of the subroutine corresponding to the management execution process is started, it is possible to save the flag register information in the state before it changes after the subroutine is called or started to the stack area 101 for specific control. The information capacity of the flag register is 1 byte.

Then, a call command is used to read out a subroutine program corresponding to the management execution process set in the non-specific control program, thereby starting the management execution process (step S1503). In this case, a push command is used to write information to the specific control stack area 101 to identify the return address of the management process after the management execution process is executed. The return address information written to the specific control stack area 101 is the address information of the program corresponding to the process next to the process executed immediately before the management execution process was read out by the call command (the process of step S1504). When the management execution process is completed, a pop command is used to read out the information to identify the return address, and the program is returned to the management process indicated by the return address.

When returning to the management processing program after the management execution process is executed, the flag register information saved in the stack area 101 for specific control in step S1502 is restored to the flag register of the main MPU 72 by a pop command (step S1504). This restores the flag register information of the main MPU 72 to the information at the time step S1502 was executed. In other words, the flag register information of the main MPU 72 is restored to the information for executing specific control.

Then, the interrupt permission process is executed (step S1505), and this management process is terminated. The interrupt permission process switches from a state in which the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (Figure 15) is prohibited to a state in which it is permitted. This allows a new execution of timer interrupt processing.

Next, the management execution process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 38. The management execution process is executed in step S1503 of the management process (Figure 37). Note that the management execution process is executed using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

In the management execution process, the stack pointer data stored in the primary MPU 72 is first saved to a non-specific stack pointer save area provided in the non-specific control work area 102 by a load command (step S1601). The non-specific stack pointer save area is a two-byte storage area used to save the stack pointer data of the primary MPU 72 when non-specific control begins. The stack pointer is an area where address information is set to identify the storage area in stack areas 101 and 104 to which information is to be written in response to a push command. Each time a push command is executed in the primary MPU 72, the stack pointer information is updated to the address information of the storage area to be written to next, and each time a pop command is executed, the stack pointer information is updated to the address information of the storage area to be written to the previous. When the stack area 101 for specific control is used, the information to be stored is stored starting from the storage area of the last address (Y(r+1)) in the stack area 101 for specific control. Each time new information to be stored is added, the storage area for the storage destination is changed toward the first address (Y(1)) in the stack area 101 for specific control. Similarly, when the stack area 104 for non-specific control is used, the information to be stored is stored starting from the storage area of the last address (Y(u+1)) in the stack area 104 for non-specific control. Each time new information to be stored is added, the storage area for the storage destination is changed toward the first address (Y(t+7)) in the stack area 104 for non-specific control. By saving the stack pointer data at the start of non-specific control, it is possible to restore the data to the stack pointer after executing steps S1601 to S1618, thereby restoring the stack pointer data to the data at the start of non-specific control.

Incidentally, for both the specific control stack area 101 and the non-specific control stack area 104, if an additional push command is executed even though information has been set in all storage areas, all areas of the main RAM 74 are cleared to "0" as an abnormality has occurred in the storage process. This makes it possible to prevent the game from continuing even though an abnormality has occurred in the storage process.

After executing the processing of step S1601, a load command is executed to set the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 to Y(u+1), the last address in the stack area 104 for non-specific control, as a fixed address at the start of non-specific control (step S1602). Then, processing is executed to save the information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register, which are some of the various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers provided by the main MPU 72, to the stack area 104 for non-specific control (step S1603). The information capacity of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register is each 2 bytes.

In step S1603, a push command is first used to save the information in the WA register of the primary MPU 72 to a storage area in the non-specific control stack area 104 corresponding to the information in the current stack pointer of the primary MPU 72, and the information in the stack pointer of the primary MPU 72 is updated to the information in the address of the storage area to be written to next. In this case, in step S1602, the information in the WA register is written to the storage area corresponding to the fixed address (Y(u+1)) set in the stack pointer of the primary MPU 72 and the address next to that fixed address (Y(u)), and the information in the address set in the stack pointer is updated to Y(u-1). Then, a push command is used to save the information in the BC register of the primary MPU 72 to a storage area in the non-specific control stack area 104 corresponding to the information in the current stack pointer of the primary MPU 72, and the information in the stack pointer of the primary MPU 72 is updated to the information in the address of the storage area to be written to next. Thereafter, a push command is issued to save the information in the DE register of the primary MPU 72 to a storage area in the non-specific control stack area 104 that corresponds to the information in the current stack pointer of the primary MPU 72, and to update the information in the stack pointer of the primary MPU 72 to information on the address of the storage area to be written to next. Thereafter, a push command is issued to save the information in the HL register of the primary MPU 72 to a storage area in the non-specific control stack area 104 that corresponds to the information in the current stack pointer of the primary MPU 72, and to update the information in the stack pointer of the primary MPU 72 to information on the address of the storage area to be written to next. Thereafter, a push command is issued to save the information in the IX register of the primary MPU 72 to a storage area in the non-specific control stack area 104 that corresponds to the information in the current stack pointer of the primary MPU 72, and to update the information in the stack pointer of the primary MPU 72 to information on the address of the storage area to be written to next. Then, using a push command, the information in the IY register of the main MPU 72 is saved to a storage area in the non-specific control stack area 104 that corresponds to the current stack pointer information of the main MPU 72, and the stack pointer information of the main MPU 72 is updated to the address information of the storage area to be written to next.

The WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are registers used in the processing of steps S1604 to S1617. By saving the information set in these registers to the stack area 104 for non-specific control prior to the processing of steps S1604 to S1617, it is possible to save the information in these registers used during specific control before the non-specific control is started. Therefore, even if these registers are overwritten during non-specific control, by restoring the information saved in the stack area 104 for non-specific control to these registers when the non-specific control is terminated, it is possible to restore the state of these registers to the state corresponding to specific control before the non-specific control was executed.

In addition, rather than saving all information from the various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers to the non-specific control stack area 104, the information from the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register to be used in the processing of steps S1604 to S1617 is selectively saved to the non-specific control stack area 104. This reduces the capacity required to save register information in the non-specific control stack area 104. This makes it possible to save the above-mentioned register information while ensuring a large capacity for the non-specific control stack area 104 that is available for the processing of steps S1604 to S1617. Naturally, for the various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in the main MPU 72 other than the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register, the information set before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started is stored and held until the processing corresponding to the non-specific control ends and the processing corresponding to the specific control resumes.

Then, it is determined whether the game execution grasp flag provided in the work area 102 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S1604). The game execution grasp flag is a flag that enables the master MPU 72 to grasp that one game has ended in the processing for non-specific control. In step S1609 (described later), the master MPU 72 sets the game execution grasp flag to a value equal to the value of the in-game flag in the second calculation target area 111 in the work area 103 for specific control. As already explained, the value of the in-game flag is "1" when a game is being executed, and "0" when a game is not being executed. If one game ends between the end of the previous processing round of the management execution processing (Figure 38) and the end of the current processing round, the value of the game execution grasp flag will be "1" and the value of the game execution flag will be "0". When this state occurs, the master MPU 72 grasps that one game has been executed.

If the game execution grasp flag is set to "1" (step S1604: YES), it is determined whether the value of the game in progress flag is "0" (step S1605). A positive determination in step S1605 means that one game has ended. In this case, the value of the total game number counter provided in the non-specific control work area 102 is incremented by 1 (step S1606). The total game number counter is a counter used to measure the number of games played regardless of the game status or game period. The total game number counter consists of 3 bytes and can measure the number of games up to a maximum value of 256 cubed minus 1. Furthermore, the value of the total game number counter will not be cleared to "0" unless the all clear process of step S107 is executed in the main process (Figure 14). Therefore, it is possible to measure the cumulative number of games played at an amusement hall over multiple business days.

Then, it is determined whether the gaming zone is the advantageous zone SC2 based on the state of the advantageous zone flag in the second calculation target area 111 of the work area 103 for specific control (step S1607). In step S1607, if the advantageous zone flag is set to "1," it is determined that it is the advantageous zone SC2. If it is the advantageous zone SC2 (step S1607: YES), not only is the value of the total game number counter incremented by 1, but the value of the advantageous game number counter provided in the work area 102 for non-specific control is also incremented by 1 (step S1608). The advantageous game number counter is a counter that allows the main MPU 72 to determine the cumulative number of games played in the advantageous zone SC2. The advantageous game number counter is provided separately from the advantageous continuation counter in the main RAM 74, and the advantageous game number counter is not cleared to "0" even if the initialization process for the advantageous zone SC2 (Figure 36) is executed. Therefore, if advantageous periods SC2 occur multiple times with normal periods SC1 in between, the total number of games played in those multiple advantageous periods SC2 can be measured using the advantageous game number counter. The advantageous game number counter consists of 3 bytes and can measure the number of games up to a maximum value of 256 cubed minus 1. Furthermore, the value of the advantageous game number counter will not be cleared to "0" unless the all-clear process of step S107 is executed in the main process (Figure 14). Therefore, it is possible to measure the cumulative number of games played in advantageous periods SC2 over multiple business days at an amusement hall.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1604, if a negative judgment is made in step S1605, if a negative judgment is made in step S1607, or if the processing of step S1608 is performed, the value of the in-game flag in the second calculation target area 111 of the work area 103 for specific control is determined, and the determined value is set to the game execution determination flag in the work area 102 for non-specific control (step S1609). In step S1609, if the value of the in-game flag is "1", the game execution determination flag is set to "1", and if the value of the in-game flag is "0", the game execution determination flag is cleared to "0". This makes it possible for the main MPU 72, which is in the middle of executing processing for non-specific control, to determine that the game has ended.

Then, it is determined whether the management display flag provided in the work area 102 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S1610). The management display flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to recognize that a display instruction has been issued to display the gaming history management results on the ratio display 85. If the management display flag is not set to "1" (step S1610: NO), it is determined whether a display instruction has been issued to display the gaming history management results (step S1611). Specifically, when operating power is being supplied to the slot machine 10 and the setting value update process (FIG. 71) in step S109 of the main process (FIG. 14) is not being executed, it is determined whether the front door 12 is open and the reset button 56 provided on the power supply unit 54 has been pressed continuously for three seconds or more. As already explained, if the supply of operating power to the slot machine 10 is initiated while the setting key insertion hole 57 is turned ON and the reset button 56 is pressed, the all clear process of step S107 of the main process (FIG. 14) is executed. Also, as will be described in detail later, in the setting value update process (FIG. 71) of step S109 of the main process (FIG. 14), the reset button 56 is operated to update the setting values of the slot machine 10. Furthermore, when a play stop state notification (described below) is being performed, the reset button 56 is operated to cancel that state. In this slot machine 10, if the reset button 56 is pressed continuously for three seconds or more while the slot machine 10 is receiving operating power and the setting value update process (FIG. 71) is not being executed, an instruction to display the game history management results is generated.

If it is determined that an instruction to display the gaming history management results has occurred (step S1611: YES), the ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter to the value of the total game number counter is calculated (step S1612). In other words, the calculation is performed so that the calculation result = "value of advantageous game number counter" / "value of total game number counter".

Then, a management display start process is executed (step S1613). In the management display start process, the display of the calculation result of step S1612 on the ratio display 85 (Figure 9) is initiated. In this case, the identifier "7U.", indicating that the value displayed on the ratio display unit 87 is the favorable zone stay ratio, is displayed on the identifier display unit 86. Specifically, the display of the identifier display unit 86 is controlled so that "7" is displayed on the left segment display 86a of the identifier display unit 86, "U" is displayed on the right segment display 86b of the identifier display unit 86, and the auxiliary display unit 86c for the identifier is illuminated. Furthermore, the display of the ratio display unit 87 is controlled so that the tens digit of the value obtained by multiplying the calculation result of step S1612 by 100 is displayed on the left segment display 87a of the ratio display unit 87, and the ones digit is displayed on the right segment display 87b. The calculation result is reported as a percentage. Specifically, if the result of the above calculation is multiplied by 100 to get "35", the left segment indicator 87a of the ratio display unit 87 will display "3", and the right segment indicator 87b will display "5".

However, if the ratio display unit 87 uses only the two segment indicators 87a and 87b to display the result, the display content on the ratio display unit 87 will be the same whether the result of the calculation multiplied by 100 is "100" or "0." Therefore, if the result of the calculation multiplied by 100 is "100," not only will "0" be displayed on each of the left and right segment indicators 87a and 87b in the ratio display unit 87, but the auxiliary display unit 87c will also be turned on. If the result of the calculation multiplied by 100 is "0," not only will "0" be displayed on each of the left and right segment indicators 87a and 87b in the ratio display unit 87, but the auxiliary display unit 87c will also be turned off. The management display flag in the non-specific control work area 102 is then set to "1" (step S1614).

If it is determined that the management display flag is set to "1" (step S1610: YES), a management display process is executed to continue displaying the calculation result of step S1612 on the ratio display 85 (Figure 9) (step S1615). It is then determined whether an end operation has been performed to end the display of the management result (step S1616). Specifically, it is determined whether an ON signal has been received from any of the start detection sensor 41a, stop detection sensors 42a-44a, inserted medal detection sensor 45a, inserted credit detection sensor 47a, and settlement detection sensor 51a. If it is determined that an ON signal has been received from any of the detection sensors 41a-45a, 47a, it is determined that an end operation has been performed. An affirmative determination is made in step S1616 if an ON signal indicating that the start lever 41 has been pressed is received from the start detection sensor 41a, an ON signal indicating that one of the stop buttons 42-44 has been pressed is received from one of the stop detection sensors 42a-44a, an ON signal indicating that a medal has been inserted is received from the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, an ON signal indicating that the credit insertion button 47 has been pressed is received from the credit insertion detection sensor 47a, or an ON signal indicating that the settlement button 51 has been pressed is received from the settlement detection sensor 51a. In these cases, an affirmative determination is made in step S1616 regardless of whether each ON signal occurred during the valid period.

In other words, a positive determination is made in step S1616 regardless of whether the receipt of an ON signal from the start detection sensor 41a triggers the start of rotation of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. A positive determination is also made in step S1616 regardless of whether the receipt of an ON signal from stop detection sensors 42a-44a triggers the stop of rotation of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. A positive determination is also made in step S1616 regardless of whether the receipt of an ON signal from the inserted medal detection sensor 45a triggers bet setting or credit increase. A positive determination is also made in step S1616 regardless of whether the receipt of an ON signal from the credit inserted detection sensor 47a triggers bet setting. A positive determination is also made in step S1616 regardless of whether the receipt of an ON signal from the settlement detection sensor 51a triggers the settlement of credited virtual medals.

If a positive judgment is made in step S1616, the management display flag is cleared to "0" (step S1617). By clearing the management display flag to "0", a negative judgment will be made in step S1610 in the next and subsequent processing iterations of the management execution process (Figure 38), and the display of the advantageous zone stay ratio (the result of the above calculation) on the ratio display 85 will cease.

If a negative determination is made in step S1611, if the processing of step S1614 is performed, if a negative determination is made in step S1616, or if the processing of step S1617 is performed, the data saved in the non-specific control stack area 104 in step S1603 is restored to the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main MPU 72 in the reverse order (IY register → IX register → HL register → DE register → BC register → WA register) of the order in step S1603 (WA register → BC register → DE register → HL register → IX register → IY register) (step S1618).

In step S1618, a pop command is used to overwrite the IY register of the main MPU 72 with information saved in a storage area corresponding to the previous information in the stack area 104 for non-specific control relative to the current stack pointer information of the main MPU 72, and the stack pointer information of the main MPU 72 is updated to the address information of the storage area to be written in the previous order. Then, a pop command is used to overwrite the IX register of the main MPU 72 with information saved in a storage area corresponding to the previous information in the stack area 104 for non-specific control relative to the current stack pointer information of the main MPU 72, and the stack pointer information of the main MPU 72 is updated to the address information of the storage area to be written in the previous order. Thereafter, a pop instruction is used to overwrite the HL register of the main MPU 72 with information saved in a storage area corresponding to the information of the previous order relative to the current stack pointer information of the main MPU 72 in the stack area 104 for non-specific control, and to update the stack pointer information of the main MPU 72 to information on the address of the storage area to be written in the previous order. Thereafter, a pop instruction is used to overwrite the DE register of the main MPU 72 with information saved in a storage area corresponding to the information of the previous order relative to the current stack pointer information of the main MPU 72 in the stack area 104 for non-specific control, and to update the stack pointer information of the main MPU 72 to information on the address of the storage area to be written in the previous order. Thereafter, a pop instruction is used to overwrite the BC register of the main MPU 72 with information saved in a storage area corresponding to the information of the previous order relative to the current stack pointer information of the main MPU 72 in the stack area 104 for non-specific control, and to update the stack pointer information of the main MPU 72 to information on the address of the storage area to be written in the previous order. Thereafter, a pop command is used to overwrite the WA register of the main MPU 72 with the information saved in the storage area corresponding to the previous information in the stack area 104 for non-specific control relative to the current stack pointer information of the main MPU 72, and update the stack pointer information of the main MPU 72 to the address information of the storage area to be written in the previous order. By executing the processing of step S1618, it is possible to restore the information in the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main MPU 72 to the information corresponding to specific control that was in effect immediately before processing corresponding to non-specific control was started.

Then, the data saved in the non-specific stack pointer save area in the work area 102 for non-specific control in step S1601 is restored to the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 (step S1619), and this management execution process ends. By restoring the data saved in the non-specific stack pointer save area in step S1601 to the stack pointer of the main MPU 72, the data in the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 can be restored to the data at the start of non-specific control. As a result, the return address information (address information for returning to the processing of step S1504) written to the stack area 101 for specific control by the push command in step S1503 of the management process (Figure 37) can be read by the pop command, and the program for the management process (Figure 37) indicated by the return address can be returned to.

<Configuration for checking data for abnormalities after power recovery>
Next, a configuration for checking for abnormalities in data stored in a storage area of the main RAM 74 after power is restored will be described.

When the main MPU 72 determines that a power outage has occurred, it executes power outage processing in step S204 of the timer interrupt processing (Figure 15). In the power outage processing, a checksum is calculated for data stored in some storage areas in the main RAM 74. As shown in Figure 13, the range of checksum calculations is the first calculation target area 109 in the stack area 101 for specific control, the work area 102 for non-specific control, the second calculation target area 111 in the work area 103 for specific control, the first unused area 105, and the second unused area 106.

The first calculation target area 109 is used to save register information of the main MPU 72 and to store return address information in the program corresponding to specific control. By including the first calculation target area 109 in the checksum calculation target range, it is possible to prevent gameplay from proceeding while an abnormality exists in the register information of the main MPU 72 saved in the first calculation target area 109 or the return address information in the program corresponding to specific control stored in the first calculation target area 109. As already explained, the work area 102 for non-specific control is provided with a total game number counter, an advantageous game number counter, etc., and gaming machine management information is stored in the work area 102 for non-specific control. By including the work area 102 for non-specific control in the checksum calculation target range, it is possible to prevent gameplay from proceeding while an abnormality exists in the gaming machine management information stored in the work area 102 for non-specific control. The second calculation target area 111 stores information necessary for gameplay to proceed. By including the second calculation target area 111 in the checksum calculation range, it is possible to prevent the game from continuing while an abnormality has occurred in the information stored in the second calculation target area 111 that is necessary to progress the game.

As shown in Figure 13, the address range of the storage area in the main RAM 74 that is the target of checksum calculation is the consecutive address range Y(4) to Y(t+1). This simplifies the process for specifying the address range of the storage area that is the target of checksum calculation in the processing configuration for calculating the checksum. As already explained, in the main RAM 74, the address range (Y(r+2) to Y(r+4)) of the first unused area 105 exists between the address range (Y(4) to Y(r+1)) of the first calculation target area 109 and the address range (Y(r+5) to Y(s+1)) of the work area 102 for non-specific control, and the address range (Y(s+2) to Y(s+4)) of the second unused area 106 exists between the address range (Y(r+5) to Y(s+1)) of the work area 102 for non-specific control and the address range (Y(s+5) to Y(t+1)) of the second calculation target area 111. By including the first unused area 105 and the second unused area 106 in the range to be calculated for the checksum, the address range of the storage areas to be calculated for the checksum in the main RAM 74 can be made a continuous address range. On the other hand, the address range of the third unused area 107 (Y(t+4) to Y(t+6)) is not contiguous with the first calculation target area 109, the work area 102 for non-specific control, or the second calculation target area 111. Therefore, by excluding the third unused area 107 from the range of checksum calculation, it is possible to prevent the address range of the storage area in the main RAM 74 that is the target of checksum calculation from being dispersed. As already explained, the third unused area 107 is an area that is not used in either specific control or non-specific control, and a checksum is not calculated for the third unused area 107.

If the supply of operating power starts without the setting key insertion hole 57 being turned ON, the power recovery process (step S103) is executed in the main process (Figure 14). Details will be described later, but in the power recovery process (step S103), a checksum is calculated for the same calculation range as the checksum calculated before the power was shut off in the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 41) in step S1804, which will be described later. If the checksum calculated after power is restored for the same calculation range in the main RAM 74 matches the checksum calculated before the power was shut off, the main MPU 72 verifies that no abnormalities have occurred in the data stored in that calculation range.

The checksum can be calculated by any method, including adding all the values in the storage areas included in the checksum calculation range. Specifically, the master MPU 72 first allocates a BC register for the checksum calculation and clears it to "0." As previously explained, the BC register consists of two bytes. As shown in Figure 13, the checksum calculation range includes storage areas corresponding to addresses Y(4) through Y(t+1). As previously explained, these storage areas consist of one byte. To calculate the checksum, the 1-byte storage area corresponding to Y(4), the start address of the calculation range, is first set as the sum area. The data stored in the sum area is then added to the BC register as one byte of numerical information, and the current address of the sum area (Y(4)) is updated to Y(5) by adding "1." This updates the sum area to a one-byte storage area corresponding to the address Y(5). In the checksum calculation, one byte of numerical information stored in the area to be added is added to the BC register, and the address of the area to be added is updated by incrementing it by one, repeatedly until the address of the area to be added reaches Y(t+2), the end address of the calculation. During each addition, if a carryover occurs that causes the result of the addition to exceed the most significant bit of the BC register, the carryover is ignored. As a result, the BC register contains the sum of the one-byte numerical information stored in the memory areas corresponding to all addresses included in the range to be calculated for the checksum (Y(4) to Y(t+1)). This sum is two bytes of numerical information. In this embodiment, the sum calculated in the BC register is used as the checksum value, and the checksum value calculated after power is restored is checked to see if it matches the checksum value calculated and stored before power was shut off. The checksum is calculated using the same method when the checksum is calculated during power outage processing (step S204 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 15)) before power is cut off, and when the checksum is calculated during the backup abnormality confirmation processing (FIG. 41) described below after power is restored. Note that the register reserved in the main MPU 72 for calculating the checksum is not limited to the BC register, and may be the DE register or the HL register.

As shown in FIG. 12 , in the work area 103 for specific control, the second non-calculation area 112, which is provided separately from the second calculation target area 111, includes a checksum area 114 for storing a 2-byte checksum calculated before power is cut off. The checksum area 114 consists of 2 bytes. In a configuration in which a checksum is calculated for the same calculation target range in the main RAM 74 before power is cut off and after power is restored, the checksum calculated before power is cut off is stored in a memory area in the main RAM 74 that is excluded from the calculation target range. This allows the checksum calculated before power is cut off to be stored in the work area 103 for specific control while preventing changes to the data stored in the calculation target range. When the main MPU 72 determines that a power outage has occurred, it calculates a checksum and stores the calculated checksum in the checksum area 114. This allows the power to be cut off while checksums corresponding to the data stored in the first calculation target area 109, the non-specific control work area 102, the second calculation target area 111, the first unused area 105, and the second unused area 106 are stored in the checksum area 114.

The stack area 101 for specific control has a leading area 108. As shown in Figure 13, the leading area 108 is a 3-byte storage area corresponding to addresses Y(1) to Y(3) in the stack area 101 for specific control. The leading area 108 is excluded from the range of checksum calculations.

As already explained, in the main processing (FIG. 14), all processing other than the power recovery processing (step S103) is executed using specific control programs and specific control data. Furthermore, all processing within the power recovery processing (step S103) other than the backup abnormality confirmation processing (FIG. 41), described below, is executed using specific control programs and specific control data, while the backup abnormality confirmation processing (FIG. 41) is executed using non-specific control programs and non-specific control data. The leading area 108 in the specific control stack area 101 is used to save data (1 byte) from the flag register of the primary MPU 72 when the backup abnormality confirmation processing (FIG. 41), a non-specific control processing, is started while specific control processing is being executed. It is also used to store return address information (2 bytes) for returning to the power recovery processing (FIG. 40) after the backup abnormality confirmation processing (FIG. 41) is completed.

For this reason, if the start area 108 were included in the range covered by the checksum calculation, the data stored in the start area 108 would be rewritten before the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 41) was executed after power was restored, causing the checksum to not always match. In contrast, by excluding the start area 108 from the range covered by the checksum calculation, the checksum value is prevented from differing from the value before the power was shut off due to the data stored in the start area 108 being rewritten in order to execute the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 41).

When the power restoration process (FIG. 40), a process for specific control, is being executed and the backup abnormality confirmation process (FIG. 41), a process for non-specific control, is started, return address information is stored in the leading area 108. This allows a return to the power restoration process (FIG. 40) based on the return address information when the backup abnormality confirmation process (FIG. 41) is completed. When the power restoration process (FIG. 40), a process for specific control, is being executed and the backup abnormality confirmation process (FIG. 41), a process for non-specific control, is started, the data (1 byte) in the flag register of the primary MPU 72 is saved in the leading area 108. This allows the data saved in the leading area 108 to be restored to the flag register of the primary MPU 72 when the backup abnormality confirmation process (FIG. 41) is completed. This returns the flag register of the primary MPU 72 to the state it was in when the backup abnormality confirmation process (FIG. 41), a process for non-specific control, was started, allowing a return to the power restoration process (FIG. 40), a process for specific control.

As will be described in detail later, at the start of the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 41), a process is executed to save data from some registers in the primary MPU 72 to the stack area 104 for non-specific control. As shown in Figure 13, the stack area 104 for non-specific control is excluded from the range of checksum calculations. This makes it possible to save data from some registers in the primary MPU 72 to the stack area 104 for non-specific control while preventing changes to the data stored in the calculation range after power is restored and before the checksum is calculated for the same calculation range as before the power was shut off. At the end of the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 41), a process is executed to restore the data saved in the stack area 104 for non-specific control to the registers in the primary MPU 72. This makes it possible to use the registers in the primary MPU 72 in the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 41), which is a non-specific control process, while restoring the data in the registers to the data at the start of the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 41) and returning to the specific control process. Additionally, by excluding the non-specific control stack area 104 from the range of checksum calculations, the range of checksum calculations is reduced. This reduces the amount of processing that must be performed from the time a power outage is identified until the power is cut off and operation of the main MPU 72 stops.

By configuring the backup abnormality confirmation process to be executed using a non-specific control program and non-specific control data, it is possible to provide more storage capacity for the storage area in the main ROM 73 that stores the specific control program and specific control data, compared to a configuration in which the backup abnormality confirmation process is executed using a specific control program and specific control data.

Next, before explaining the power outage processing (Figure 39) executed in step S204 of the timer interrupt processing (Figure 15), we will explain how information is transferred from various registers in the main MPU 72 at the start, during, and end of the timer interrupt processing (Figure 15).

First, we will explain the start of the timer interrupt processing (Figure 15). When a specific control process is being executed by the main MPU 72 and the timing arrives for an interrupt due to the timer interrupt processing (Figure 15), address information corresponding to the process following the process being executed by the main MPU 72 is saved as 2-byte return address information in the stack area 101 for specific control by a push command. The most significant byte of the return address information is saved in a storage area in the stack area 101 for specific control corresponding to the current stack pointer information of the main MPU 72, and the least significant byte of the return address information is saved in a storage area in the stack area 101 for specific control corresponding to the information in the next order following the current stack pointer information of the main MPU 72. The stack pointer information of the main MPU 72 is also updated by subtracting "2". As a result, when the timer interrupt processing (Figure 15) ends, the pop command reads the return address information saved in the specific control stack area 101, making it possible to return to the processing following the processing that was being executed immediately before the start of the timer interrupt processing (Figure 15).

Next, the register save process (step S201) will be described. In the register save process, a load instruction is issued to save the stack pointer information of the main MPU 72 to the stack pointer save area 116 provided in the second calculation target area 111. As a result, the stack pointer information at the start of the timer interrupt process (Figure 15) is saved in the stack pointer save area 116. The stack pointer save area 116 is a storage area provided in the second calculation target area 111 for saving the stack pointer data of the main MPU 72. In the register save process, after saving the stack pointer information of the main MPU 72, the information of the various registers provided in the main MPU 72 other than the program counter and stack pointer is saved to the register save area 117 provided in the second calculation target area 111. The register save area 117 is a storage area for saving the information of the various registers provided in the main MPU 72 other than the program counter and stack pointer. Register save area 117 is provided with register save buffers such as a WA register save buffer, a BC register save buffer, a DE register save buffer, an IX register save buffer, and an IY register save buffer, which correspond one-to-one to each of the registers, such as the WA register, BC register, DE register, IX register, and IY register. Information in each register, such as the WA register, BC register, DE register, IX register, and IY register, is saved to the corresponding register save buffer by a load instruction. As a result, the information in these registers is saved in register save area 117 at the start of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 15).

Next, the register restore process (step S215) will be described. In the register restore process, the information stored in each register save buffer in the register save area 117 is restored to the register corresponding to that register save buffer in the main MPU 72. The information stored in each register save buffer is restored to the corresponding register by executing a load command for that register save buffer. In the register restore process, the information stored in each register save buffer in the register save area 117 is restored to the corresponding register in the main MPU 72, and then the information stored in the stack pointer save area 116 is restored to the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 by a load command. This allows the various registers in the main MPU 72, excluding the program counter, to be restored to the state they were in at the start of the timer interrupt process (Figure 15).

Next, we will explain what happens when the timer interrupt processing (Figure 15) ends. After restoring the various registers of the main MPU 72, except for the program counter, to the state they were in when the timer interrupt processing (Figure 15) started, at the end of the timer interrupt processing (Figure 15), a pop instruction is used to set the information saved in the specific control stack area 101 to the program counter of the main MPU 72. This ends the timer interrupt processing (Figure 15) and makes it possible to return to the processing following the processing that was being executed immediately before the interrupt due to the timer interrupt processing (Figure 15) occurred.

In this way, various registers of the main MPU 72 are available during execution of the timer interrupt process (Figure 15), and after the timer interrupt process (Figure 15) is completed, all registers of the main MPU 72, including the program counter, are restored to the state they were in when the timer interrupt process (Figure 15) began, allowing the process following the process that was being executed immediately before the timer interrupt process (Figure 15) occurred to be started.

Next, the power outage processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 39. As already explained, the power outage processing is executed in step S204 when it is determined in the timer interrupt processing (Figure 15) that the power outage flag is set to "1" (step S202: YES) and when it is determined that command transmission has ended (step S203: YES). Note that the power outage processing is executed using a specific control program and specific control data.

In the power outage processing, the data stored in the head area 108 in the stack area 101 for specific control is first stored in the head save area 115 provided in the second calculation target area 111 in the work area 103 for specific control (step S1701). The head save area 115 is a storage area provided in the second calculation target area 111 for saving the data in the head area 108. By saving the data stored in the head area 108 to the head save area 115 in step S1701, the head area 108 can be used to execute the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 41), a process for non-specific control, after power is restored. Furthermore, if it is confirmed that no abnormality has occurred in the data stored in the checksum calculation target range, the data stored in the head save area 115 can be restored to the head area 108. This restores the data in the head area 108 to the data stored in the head area 108 at the start of the power outage processing (Figure 39), restoring the processing state prior to the power outage. Furthermore, by configuring the system so that the checksum before power is cut off and the checksum after power is restored are calculated while the data in the head area 108 is being saved to the head save area 115, it is possible to confirm that no abnormalities have occurred in the data saved to the head save area 115 by confirming that the checksum calculated after power is restored matches the checksum stored before power was cut off.

Then, the output status of the output port of the main MPU 72 is cleared (step S1702), and all actuators (not shown) are turned off (step S1703). Then, when the power outage is resolved, a checksum is calculated to determine whether the data in the main RAM 74 is normal, and the calculated checksum is stored in the checksum area 114 of the second calculation target area 111 (steps S1704 to S1711). In the checksum storage process, the checksum area 114 of the second non-calculation target area 112 in the specific control work area 103 is first cleared to "0" (step S1704). Then, the BC register of the main MPU 72 is reserved for checksum calculation, and the BC register is cleared to "0" (step S1705). As previously explained, the BC register is a 2-byte storage area.

Then, "Y(4)", the start address of the calculation range, is set as the address of the area to be added for the checksum (step S1706). The data stored in the memory area corresponding to the address of the area to be added in the main RAM 74 is then read (step S1707), and the read data is added as 1-byte numerical information to the BC register reserved for checksum calculation in the main MPU 72 (step S1708). In step S1708, if a carry occurs that causes the result of the addition to exceed the most significant bit of the BC register, the carry is ignored. Then, "1" is added to the address of the area to be added, updating the address of the area to be added (step S1709). In step S1709, the address of the area to be added is updated in the following order: Y(4) → Y(5) → Y(6) → ... → Y(t+1) → Y(t+2).

Then, it is determined whether the address of the area to be added is Y(t+2), which is the end address of the checksum calculation (step S1710). If a negative determination is made in step S1710, processing returns to step S1707, and steps S1707 to S1710 are repeatedly executed until a positive determination is made in step S1710. As a result, the BC register reserved for checksum calculation in the main MPU 72 contains the sum of the one-byte numerical information stored in the storage area corresponding to the checksum calculation range (Y(4) to Y(t+1)) in the main RAM 74 as the checksum calculation result. As explained above, this sum is two bytes of numerical information. The checksum calculated in the BC register is then stored in the checksum area 114 of the second non-calculation area 112 (step S1711).

In step S1711, the checksum calculated before power was cut off is stored in the checksum area 114, and then access to the main RAM 74 is prohibited (step S1712). After the above processing is performed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the possibility that power will be completely cut off and processing will no longer be possible.

The power outage processing (Figure 39) is executed in step S204 after the register save processing in step S201 is executed in the timer interrupt processing (Figure 15). When the power outage processing (Figure 39) is executed, the power is cut off without executing the register restore processing in step S215. At the time when the power is cut off and the operation of the main MPU 72 stops, the data stored in the specific control stack area 101 at the start of the processing round of the timer interrupt processing (Figure 15) in which the power outage was identified is stored in the first calculation target area 109 of the specific control stack area 101 and the leading save area 115 of the second calculation target area 111, including return address information corresponding to the next process of the process being executed immediately before the interrupt by the timer interrupt processing (Figure 15) occurred. Furthermore, when power is cut off and the operation of the main MPU 72 stops, the data stored in registers other than the program counter in the main MPU 72 at the start of the processing round of the timer interrupt processing ( FIG. 15 ) in which the power outage was identified is stored in the stack pointer save area 116 and the register save area 117 in the second calculation target area 111. In this way, power is cut off while information for restoring the processing state to the state immediately before the start of the processing round of the timer interrupt processing ( FIG. 15 ) in which the power outage was identified is stored in the first calculation target area 109 and the second calculation target area 111. Therefore, after power is restored, the information stored in the first calculation target area 109 and the second calculation target area 111 can be used to restore the processing state to the state immediately before the start of the processing round of the timer interrupt processing ( FIG. 15 ) in which the power outage was identified.

At the time the power is cut off, the first calculation target area 109 and second calculation target area 111, which store information for restoring the processing state to the state immediately before the start of the processing round of the timer interrupt processing (Figure 15) in which the power outage was identified, are included in the checksum calculation range. Therefore, before restoring the processing state to the state immediately before the start of the processing round of the timer interrupt processing (Figure 15) in which the power outage was identified after the power is restored, it is possible to confirm that no abnormalities have occurred in the information for restoring the processing state to the state immediately before the start of the processing round of the timer interrupt processing (Figure 15) in which the power outage was identified. This prevents the processing state from being restored based on data in which an abnormality has occurred.

Next, the power recovery process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 40. The power recovery process is executed in step S103 of the main process (Figure 14) when the supply of operating power begins without the setting key insertion hole 57 being turned ON. Note that, in the power recovery process, all processes other than the backup abnormality confirmation process (step S1804) are executed using a program and data for specific control, while the backup abnormality confirmation process (step S1804) is executed using a program and data for non-specific control.

The power recovery process first determines whether the error state flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S1801). As previously explained, the error state flag is a flag that enables the main MPU 72 to determine the occurrence of one or more of the following error states: an error state in which a checksum calculated after power is turned on using a portion of the storage area in the main RAM 74 as the calculation target range does not match the checksum calculated and stored for the same calculation target range before power is turned off; an error state in which the setting value of the slot machine 10 is outside the normal setting value range ("Setting 1" to "Setting 6"); and an error state in which the power outage processing (Figure 39) was not performed normally before power is turned off. The error state flag is set to "1" in step S1819, which will be described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S1801, a load command is issued to set the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 to "Y(3)", which is address information corresponding to the last storage area of the leading area 108 in the stack area 101 for specific control, as a fixed address at the start of the power recovery process (Figure 40) (step S1802). As a result, the last storage area of the leading area 108 is set as the storage area to which information is written in response to a push command in the stack area 101 for specific control.

Then, a push command is issued to save the flag register information of the primary MPU 72 to a storage area in the specific control stack area 101 corresponding to the primary MPU 72's current stack pointer information ("Y(3)"), and update the primary MPU 72's stack pointer information to the address information of the storage area to be written to next ("Y(2)") (step S1803). As previously explained, the flag register includes a carry flag, zero flag, P/V flag, sign flag, and half carry flag, and the flag register information changes depending on the execution results of arithmetic instructions, rotate instructions, input/output instructions, and the like. By saving this flag register information before the subroutine program corresponding to the backup abnormality confirmation process (step S1804) is started, it is possible to save the flag register information in its previous state before the subroutine is called or after the subroutine is started in the head area 108. The flag register information capacity of the primary MPU 72 is 1 byte. As previously explained, the head area 108 is a storage area capable of storing 3 bytes of information.

Then, a call instruction is issued to read a subroutine program corresponding to the backup abnormality confirmation process set in the non-specific control program, thereby starting the backup abnormality confirmation process (step S1804). In this case, information (2 bytes) for specifying a return address for returning to the process of step S1805 after the backup abnormality confirmation process is completed is saved as return address information in the specific control stack area 101 by a push instruction. The most significant byte of the return address information is stored in the storage area for specific control stack area 101 corresponding to the current stack pointer information ("Y(2)") of the primary MPU 72, and the least significant byte of the return address information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the next stack pointer information ("Y(1)"). The stack pointer information of the primary MPU 72 is then updated to the address information ("Y(0)") of the storage area to be written to next. The leading area 108 now contains the flag register information (1 byte) of the primary MPU 72 and the return address information (2 bytes).

Figure 41 is a flowchart showing the backup abnormality confirmation process. The backup abnormality confirmation process is executed using a program and data for non-specific control. The backup abnormality confirmation process is performed after the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 has started, but before an interrupt by the timer interrupt process (Figure 15) is permitted. This prevents the timer interrupt process (Figure 15), which is a process corresponding to specific control, from interrupting and being started in the middle of the backup abnormality confirmation process, which is a process corresponding to non-specific control.

In the backup abnormality confirmation process, steps S1901 and S1902 are the same as steps S1602 and S1603 of the management execution process (Figure 38). Specifically, a load command is first used to set the stack pointer of the primary MPU 72 to "Y(u+1)," the last address in the non-specific control stack area 104, as a fixed address at the start of the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 41) (step S1901). Then, the primary MPU 72 executes a process to save the information in the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register, which are some of the various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers, to the non-specific control stack area 104 (step S1902). As previously explained, the information capacity of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register is 2 bytes each.

In step S1902, a push command is first used to save the information in the WA register of the primary MPU 72 to a storage area in the non-specific control stack area 104 corresponding to the information in the current stack pointer of the primary MPU 72, and the stack pointer information in the primary MPU 72 is updated to the address information of the storage area to be written to next. Then, a push command is used to save the information in the BC register of the primary MPU 72 to a storage area in the non-specific control stack area 104 corresponding to the information in the current stack pointer of the primary MPU 72, and the stack pointer information in the primary MPU 72 is updated to the address information of the storage area to be written to next. Then, a push command is used to save the information in the DE register of the primary MPU 72 to a storage area in the non-specific control stack area 104 corresponding to the information in the current stack pointer of the primary MPU 72, and the stack pointer information in the primary MPU 72 is updated to the address information of the storage area to be written to next. Then, a push command is issued to save the information in the HL register of the main MPU 72 to a storage area in the non-specific control stack area 104 that corresponds to the information in the current stack pointer of the main MPU 72, and to update the information in the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 to information on the address of the storage area to be written to next. Then, a push command is issued to save the information in the IX register of the main MPU 72 to a storage area in the non-specific control stack area 104 that corresponds to the information in the current stack pointer of the main MPU 72, and to update the information in the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 to information on the address of the storage area to be written to next. Then, a push command is issued to save the information in the IY register of the main MPU 72 to a storage area in the non-specific control stack area 104 that corresponds to the information in the current stack pointer of the main MPU 72, and to update the information in the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 to information on the address of the storage area to be written to next.

The WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are registers used in the processing of steps S1903 to S1910. By saving the information set in these registers to the stack area 104 for non-specific control prior to the processing of steps S1903 to S1910, it is possible to save the information in these registers used during specific control before the non-specific control is started. Therefore, even if these registers are overwritten during non-specific control, by restoring the information saved in the stack area 104 for non-specific control to these registers when the non-specific control is terminated, it is possible to restore the state of these registers to the state corresponding to specific control before the non-specific control was executed.

As already explained, the non-specific control stack area 104, which saves the information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register, is excluded from the range of the checksum calculation. Therefore, after power is restored but before the checksum is calculated, the information of these registers can be saved to the non-specific control stack area 104 while preventing the data stored in the range of the checksum calculation from changing.

Rather than saving all information from the various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers to the non-specific control stack area 104, the information from the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register to be used in the processing of steps S1903 to S1910 is selectively saved to the non-specific control stack area 104. This reduces the capacity required to save register information in the non-specific control stack area 104. This makes it possible to save the above-mentioned register information while ensuring a large capacity for the non-specific control stack area 104 available for the processing of steps S1903 to S1910. Naturally, for the various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in the main MPU 72 other than the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register, the information set before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started is stored and maintained until the processing corresponding to the non-specific control ends and the processing corresponding to the specific control resumes.

After processing step S1902, the master MPU 72 reserves a BC register for the checksum calculation and clears the BC register to "0" (step S1903). Then, "Y(4)", the start address of the calculation range, is set as the address of the area to be added for the checksum (step S1904). Then, the data stored in the memory area corresponding to the address of the area to be added in the master RAM 74 is read (step S1905), and the read data is added as 1-byte numerical information to the BC register reserved for the checksum calculation in the master MPU 72 (step S1906). In step S1906, if a carry occurs that causes the result of the addition to exceed the most significant bit of the BC register, the carry is ignored. Then, "1" is added to the address of the area to be added, updating the address of the area to be added (step S1907). In step S1907, the addresses of the addition area are updated in the order Y(4) → Y(5) → Y(6) → ... → Y(t+1) → Y(t+2).

Then, it is determined whether the address of the area to be added is Y(t+2), which is the end address of the checksum calculation (step S1908). If a negative determination is made in step S1908, the process returns to step S1905, and steps S1905 to S1908 are repeatedly executed until a positive determination is made in step S1908. As a result, the BC register reserved for checksum calculation in the main MPU 72 contains the sum of the one-byte numerical information stored in the storage area in the main RAM 74 corresponding to the checksum calculation range (Y(4) to Y(t+1)) as the checksum calculation result. As already explained, this sum is two bytes of numerical information.

If a positive judgment is made in step S1908, the main MPU 72 determines whether the checksum stored in the BC register reserved for checksum calculation, i.e., the checksum calculated after power is restored, matches the checksum calculated before power is shut off and stored in the checksum area 114 of the second non-calculation area 112 (step S1909). If the checksum calculated after power is restored does not match the checksum stored before power is shut off (step S1909: NO), the backup abnormality flag 113 provided in the work area 102 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S1910). The backup abnormality flag 113 is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to detect an abnormality in which the checksum calculated after power is turned on does not match the checksum calculated before power is turned off for the same calculation target range, with the first calculation target area 109 in the specific control stack area 101, the first unused area 105, the non-specific control work area 102, the second unused area 106, and the second calculation target area 111 in the specific control work area 103 as the calculation target range. By setting the backup abnormality flag 113 to "1", the main MPU 72 can detect an abnormality in the data stored in the checksum calculation target range.

If a positive determination is made in step S1909, or if the processing of step S1910 is performed, processing similar to step S1618 of the management execution processing (Figure 38) is performed in step S1911. Specifically, processing is performed to restore the data saved in the non-specific control stack area 104 in step S1902 to the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main MPU 72 in the reverse order (IY register → IX register → HL register → DE register → BC register → WA register) of the order in step S1902 (WA register → BC register → DE register → HL register → IX register → IY register) (step S1911).

In step S1911, a pop command is used to overwrite the IY register of the main MPU 72 with information saved in a storage area corresponding to the previous information in the stack area 104 for non-specific control relative to the current stack pointer information of the main MPU 72, and the stack pointer information of the main MPU 72 is updated to the address information of the storage area to be written in the previous order. Then, a pop command is used to overwrite the IX register of the main MPU 72 with information saved in a storage area corresponding to the previous information in the stack area 104 for non-specific control relative to the current stack pointer information of the main MPU 72, and the stack pointer information of the main MPU 72 is updated to the address information of the storage area to be written in the previous order. Thereafter, a pop instruction is used to overwrite the HL register of the main MPU 72 with information saved in a storage area corresponding to the information of the previous order relative to the current stack pointer information of the main MPU 72 in the stack area 104 for non-specific control, and to update the stack pointer information of the main MPU 72 to information on the address of the storage area to be written in the previous order. Thereafter, a pop instruction is used to overwrite the DE register of the main MPU 72 with information saved in a storage area corresponding to the information of the previous order relative to the current stack pointer information of the main MPU 72 in the stack area 104 for non-specific control, and to update the stack pointer information of the main MPU 72 to information on the address of the storage area to be written in the previous order. Thereafter, a pop instruction is used to overwrite the BC register of the main MPU 72 with information saved in a storage area corresponding to the information of the previous order relative to the current stack pointer information of the main MPU 72 in the stack area 104 for non-specific control, and to update the stack pointer information of the main MPU 72 to information on the address of the storage area to be written in the previous order. Thereafter, a pop command is used to overwrite the WA register of the main MPU 72 with the information saved in the storage area corresponding to the previous information in the stack area 104 for non-specific control relative to the current stack pointer information of the main MPU 72, and to update the stack pointer information of the main MPU 72 to the address information of the storage area to be written in the previous order. By executing the process of step S1911, it is possible to restore the information in the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main MPU 72 to the information corresponding to specific control at the start of the backup abnormality confirmation process (FIG. 41), which is a process corresponding to non-specific control.

Then, the fixed address "Y(0)" is set in the stack pointer of the primary MPU 72 (step S1912), and this backup abnormality confirmation process ends. By setting the fixed address information in the stack pointer in this way, the stack pointer information is restored to the information immediately before the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 41) was started. This eliminates the need to save the stack pointer information of the primary MPU 72 corresponding to specific control to the work area 102 for non-specific control before starting the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 41). This allows all storage areas in the work area 102 for non-specific control to be included in the range of checksum calculations, and reduces the processing load on the primary MPU 72.

When the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 41) is terminated, a pop command is used to read the information saved in the memory area corresponding to the information one order earlier ("Y(1)") and the information two orders earlier ("Y(2)") relative to the current stack pointer information ("Y(0)") of the main MPU 72 in the stack area 101 for specific control, i.e., the return address information saved in the top area 108 of the stack area 101 for specific control, and set this in the program counter of the main MPU 72. The stack pointer information of the main MPU 72 is also updated to the address information ("Y(3)") of the memory area to which the two orders earlier are to be written. This allows the process to return to step S1805 of the power recovery process (Figure 40).

In this way, some registers in the main MPU 72 (specifically, the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register) are available during the execution of the backup abnormality confirmation process (FIG. 41), which is a process for non-specific control. After the backup abnormality confirmation process (FIG. 41) is completed, these registers are restored to the state they were in at the start of the backup abnormality confirmation process (FIG. 41), and the next process of the backup abnormality confirmation process (FIG. 41) can be started in step S1804 of the power recovery process (FIG. 40).

Returning to the explanation of the power recovery process (Figure 40), after the backup abnormality confirmation process is executed in step S1804, the information saved in the memory area corresponding to the address information of Y(3) in the leading area 108 in step S1803 is restored to the flag register of the primary MPU 72 by a pop command (step S1805). This allows the flag register of the primary MPU 72 to be returned to the state it was in before the subroutine program corresponding to the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 41), which is set in the non-specific control program by a call command, was read.

Then, it is determined whether the backup abnormality flag 113 in the work area 102 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S1806). If the backup abnormality flag 113 is not set to "1" (step S1806: NO), it is determined whether the setting value of the slot machine 10 is normal (step S1807). In step S1807, if the value of the setting value counter provided in the second calculation target area 111 in the work area 103 for specific control is any value between "1" and "6", it is determined to be normal, and if it is "0" or "7" or greater, it is determined to be abnormal. The setting value counter is a counter that allows the main MPU 72 to grasp the current setting value of the slot machine 10.

If it is determined that the setting value is normal (step S1807: YES), it is determined whether the power outage flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S1808). If the power outage flag is set to "1" (step S1808: YES), this means that the power outage processing (Figure 39) was executed normally when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 was stopped, and processing proceeds to step S1809. In step S1809, the power outage flag is cleared. Then, a power restoration command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S1810). The power restoration command is a command that causes the production side MPU 92 to recognize the execution of the recovery processing (steps S1809 to S1817) to restore the processing state before the power was shut off during the power restoration processing (Figure 40).

Then, it is determined whether any of the stop order flags provided in the second calculation target area 111 in the work area 103 for specific control are set to "1" (step S1811). In step S1811, a positive determination is made if any of the first stop order flag, second stop order flag, and third stop order flag described below are set to "1." The first stop order flag is a flag that enables the main MPU 72 to recognize that the combined display unit 66 should display a stop order corresponding display that enables the first bell win. The second stop order flag is a flag that enables the main MPU 72 to recognize that the combined display unit 66 should display a stop order corresponding display that enables the first RT replay win or the second RT replay win. The third stop order flag is a flag that enables the main MPU 72 to recognize that the combined display unit 66 should display a stop order corresponding display that prevents the first fall replay win or the second fall replay win.

If a positive determination is made in step S1811, the display resume flag provided in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S1812). The display resume flag is a flag that enables the main MPU 72 to recognize that the stop order corresponding display that was being executed on the dual-purpose display unit 66 before the power was shut off should be resumed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1811, or if the processing of step S1812 is performed, the data stored in the leading save area 115 of the second calculation target area 111 is restored to the leading area 108 in the specific control stack area 101 (step S1813). As already explained, when a power outage is identified, the data stored in the leading area 108 is saved to the leading save area 115 in step S1701 of the power outage processing (Figure 39). Therefore, the leading save area 115 stores the data that was stored in the leading area 108 at the start of the power outage processing (Figure 39). By restoring the data stored in the leading save area 115 to the leading area 108 in step S1813, the data stored in the leading area 108 can be restored to the data that was stored in the leading area 108 at the start of the power outage processing (Figure 39). The data stored in the specific control stack area 101 does not change between the time the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 15) starts and the time the power outage processing (FIG. 39) starts in step S204. Therefore, by restoring the data stored in the leading area 108 to the data that was stored in the leading area 108 at the start of the power outage processing (FIG. 39), the specific control stack area 101 can be returned to the state it was in at the start of the processing round of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 15) in which the occurrence of a power outage was identified.

Then, processing is performed (steps S1814 and S1815) to restore the information stored in each register save buffer in the register save area 117 in the second calculation target area 111 to the registers corresponding to the register save buffers in the main MPU 72. As already explained, in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 15) processing round in which the occurrence of a power outage is identified, in the register save processing (step S201) performed before the power outage processing (FIG. 39) in step S204 is executed, the stack pointer information of the main MPU 72 at the start of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 15) is saved to the stack pointer save area 116, and the information of the various registers provided by the main MPU 72 other than the program counter and stack pointer is saved to the corresponding register save buffers in the register save area 117 in the second calculation target area 111. In step S1814, the data stored in the stack pointer save area 116 of the second calculation target area 111 is restored to the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 using a load command. This allows the data stored in the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 to be restored to the data stored in that stack pointer at the start of the processing round of the timer interrupt process (Figure 15) in which the occurrence of the power outage was identified.

Then, in step S1815, the data stored in each register save buffer in the register save area 117 in the second calculation target area 111 is restored to each register in the main MPU 72 corresponding to that register save buffer using a load command. By executing the processes of steps S1814 and S1815, the various registers in the main MPU 72, excluding the program counter, can be restored to the state they were in at the start of the timer interrupt process (Figure 15) in which the occurrence of the power outage was identified.

Then, an interrupt permission process is executed to permit interrupts by the timer interrupt process (Figure 15) (step S1816). This allows interrupts by the timer interrupt process (Figure 15) to occur at intervals of 1.49 milliseconds.

Then, a pop instruction is used to overwrite the program counter of the main MPU 72 with the information saved in the storage area corresponding to the previous information in the specific control stack area 101, and the stack pointer information of the main MPU 72 is updated to the address information of the storage area to which the previous information is to be written (step S1817). As a result, the program counter of the main MPU 72 is overwritten with the address information of the program corresponding to the process subsequent to the process being executed immediately before the timer interrupt process (FIG. 15) in which the power outage was identified was started, and the main MPU 72 returns to the process subsequent to the process being executed immediately before the timer interrupt process (FIG. 15) in which the power outage was identified was started. For example, if an interrupt due to the timer interrupt process (FIG. 15) occurs while normal process (FIG. 16) is being executed, and a power outage is identified during the timer interrupt process (FIG. 15), at the end of the power recovery process (FIG. 40) executed after power is restored, normal process (FIG. 16) returns to the process subsequent to the process being executed immediately before the timer interrupt process (FIG. 15) in which the power outage was identified was started.

In this way, the stack area 101 for specific control is restored to the state it was in at the start of the processing round of the timer interrupt processing (Figure 15) in which the occurrence of a power outage was identified, and with the registers other than the program counter in the main MPU 72 restored to the state they were in at the start of the processing round of the timer interrupt processing (Figure 15) in which the occurrence of a power outage was identified, a pop instruction is executed to overwrite the program counter of the main MPU 72 with the information saved in the memory area corresponding to the information in the previous order relative to the information in the stack pointer of the main MPU 72, thereby restoring the processing state to the state it was in immediately before the start of the processing round of the timer interrupt processing (Figure 15) in which the occurrence of a power outage was identified.

As described above, interrupts by the timer interrupt process (Figure 15) are permitted by the interrupt permission process being executed in step S1816, and therefore, after returning to the processing state immediately before the start of the timer interrupt process (Figure 15) in which the occurrence of a power outage was identified, the timer interrupt process (Figure 15) is executed each time an interrupt timing occurs, which occurs every 1.49 milliseconds. As described above, because the power outage flag was cleared to "0" in step S1809, a negative determination is made in step S202 of the timer interrupt process (Figure 15) until a power outage occurs.

If a positive judgment is made in step S1801, a positive judgment is made in step S1806, a negative judgment is made in step S1807, or a negative judgment is made in step S1808, operation prohibition processing (processing of steps S1818 to S1820) is executed. In operation prohibition processing, all output ports of the main MPU 72 are first cleared to "0" to turn off all actuators connected to those output ports (step S1818).

Then, the error state flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S1819). This enables the main MPU 72 to determine that one or more of the following error states have occurred: an error state in which the checksum calculated after power-on using a portion of the storage area in the main RAM 74 as the calculation target range does not match the checksum calculated and stored for the same calculation target range before power-off; an error state in which the setting value of the slot machine 10 is outside the normal setting value range ("1" to "6"); or an error state in which power outage processing (Figure 39) was not performed normally before power-off.

Then, an error notification process is executed to notify the amusement hall manager or the like of the occurrence of an error state (step S1820). The process then enters an infinite loop. In the error notification process (step S1820), an error notification command is sent to the production-side MPU 92. When the production-side MPU 92 receives the error notification command, it controls the light emission of the upper lamp 61, the sound output of the speaker 62, and the display on the image display device 63 in a manner that notifies the occurrence of an error state. In the error notification, content explaining the error recovery operation, which involves turning on the power to the slot machine 10 while turning on the setting key insertion hole 57, is displayed on the image display device 63. This makes it possible to prompt the amusement hall manager to perform the error recovery operation.

When the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped, the error notification being executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 is terminated, but the error status flag in the second calculation target area 111 remains set to "1" and the backup abnormality flag 113 in the non-specific control work area 102 remains set to "1." If the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started without turning on the setting key insertion hole 57 and the error status flag in the second calculation target area 111 remains set to "1," a positive determination is made in step S1801 of the power recovery process (Figure 40), and error notification will again be started by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63.

The state in which the error status flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" is cleared by executing the all clear process (FIG. 43) in step S107 of the main processing (FIG. 14). If the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started while the setting key insertion hole 57 is being turned ON after the error status flag is set to "1," positive determinations are made in steps S102 and S104 of the main processing (FIG. 14), and the all clear process (FIG. 43), described below, is executed in step S107.

As will be described in detail later, the all-clear process (FIG. 43) clears the error status flag in the second calculation target area 111 to "0." As a result, if the supply of operating power to the master MPU 72 is initiated while the setting key insertion hole 57 is being turned ON, a negative judgment is made in step S104 of the main process (FIG. 14). The all-clear process (FIG. 43) clears the backup abnormality flag 113 in the non-specific control work area 102 to "0." As already explained, in the main process (FIG. 14), after the all-clear process (step S107) is executed, an interrupt by the timer interrupt process (FIG. 15) is permitted, and the setting value update process (step S109) performed thereafter updates the setting value of the slot machine 10 to a setting value within the normal range ("1" to "6"). By permitting an interrupt by the timer interrupt process (FIG. 15), it becomes possible to stop operation of the master MPU 72 with the power outage flag set to "1" in the event of a power outage. For this reason, if the all-clear process (step S107) is executed after an error is reported, and then a power outage occurs and the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 begins without the setting key insertion hole 57 being turned ON, a negative determination will be made in step S1806 of the power recovery process (FIG. 40) and positive determinations will be made in steps S1807 and S1808, unless a new error state occurs.

Next, referring to the time chart in Figure 42, we will explain how the data in the leading area 108 and the data in registers other than the program counter in the main MPU 72 are saved, and how this data is restored. Figure 42(a) shows the period during which data in the top area 108 in the stack area 101 for specific control is saved to the top save area 115 in the work area 103 for specific control, Figure 42(b) shows the period during which data in registers other than the program counter in the main MPU 72 is saved to the stack pointer save area 116 and the register save area 117 in the second calculation target area 111, Figure 42(c) shows the timing at which the checksum is stored in the checksum area 114 in the second non-calculation target area 112, Figure 42(d) shows the timing at which it is confirmed that the checksum calculated after power is restored matches the checksum stored before power was restored, Figure 42(e) shows the timing at which the main MPU 72 returns to the processing state before power was cut off, Figure 42(f) shows the timing at which an interrupt occurs due to timer interrupt processing (Figure 15), Figure 42(g) shows the timing at which the occurrence of a power outage is identified, and Figure 42(h) shows the state of supply of operating power to the main MPU 72.

As shown in Figure 42 (f), an interrupt occurs due to the timer interrupt process (Figure 15) at timing t1. As already explained, in step S201 of the timer interrupt process (Figure 15), register save processing is executed. Therefore, as shown in Figure 42 (b), at timing t1, data in registers other than the program counter in the main MPU 72 is saved to the stack pointer save area 116 and register save area 117 in the second calculation target area 111.

Then, as shown in Figure 42 (g), the occurrence of a power outage is identified at timing t2. Specifically, a positive determination is made in step S202 of the timer interrupt processing (Figure 15). Then, as shown in Figure 42 (a), the power outage processing (Figure 39) starts at timing t3, and in step S1701 of the power outage processing (Figure 39), the data in the top area 108 in the stack area 101 for specific control is saved to the second calculation target area 111 in the work area 103 for specific control.

Then, as shown in Figure 42(c), at timing t4, a checksum is calculated for the first calculation target area 109, the non-specific control work area 102, the second calculation target area 111, the first unused area 105, and the second unused area 106 as the calculation target range, and the calculated checksum is stored in the checksum area 114 of the second non-calculation target area 112. Then, as shown in Figure 42(h), at timing t5, the power is turned off and operation of the main MPU 72 stops.

Then, as shown in Figure 42(h), at timing t6, the supply of operating power begins without the setting key insertion hole 57 being turned ON. Then, as shown in Figure 42(d), at timing t7, the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 41) is executed, and it is confirmed that the checksum calculated after power restoration matches the checksum stored before power restoration.

After that, at timing t8, the data that was saved in the leading save area 115 of the second calculation target area 111 is restored to the leading area 108, as shown in FIG. 42(a). This allows the stack area 101 for specific control to be returned to the state it was in at the start of the processing round of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 15) in which the occurrence of a power outage was identified. At timing t8, the data that was saved in the stack pointer save area 116 and register save area 117 in the second calculation target area 111 is restored to each register other than the program counter in the main MPU 72, as shown in FIG. 42(b). This allows the registers other than the program counter in the main MPU 72 to be returned to the state they were in at the start of the processing round of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 15) in which the occurrence of a power outage was identified.

Then, at timing t9, as shown in Figure 42 (e), a pop instruction is used to write the return address information saved in the specific control stack area 101 to the program counter in the main MPU 72, thereby restoring the processing state to the start of the processing round of the timer interrupt processing (Figure 15) in which the occurrence of the power outage was identified.

As described above, the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 41) is executed using a non-specific control program and non-specific control data. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the backup abnormality confirmation process is executed using a specific control program and specific control data, the storage area in the main ROM 73 can have more storage capacity for storing the specific control program and specific control data.

If the supply of operating power begins without the setting key insertion hole 57 being turned on, the processing state before power is restored is restored, provided that one of the conditions is that the checksum calculated after power is restored matches the checksum calculated and stored for the same calculation range as the checksum before power is shut off. The checksum calculation range includes the first calculation target area 109, the non-specific control work area 102, the second calculation target area 111, the first unused area 105, and the second unused area 106. Therefore, if an abnormality occurs after power is restored in which the data stored in the first calculation target area 109, the non-specific control work area 102, the second calculation target area 111, the first unused area 105, and the second unused area 106 differs from the data stored before power was shut off, it is possible to prevent gameplay from proceeding after power is restored based on the abnormal data.

In the power recovery process (Figure 40), when the backup abnormality confirmation process (step S1804) is executed as a process corresponding to non-specific control, return address information for returning to the process next after the backup abnormality confirmation process (step S1804) is written to the top area 108 in the stack area 101 for specific control after the backup abnormality confirmation process (step S1804) is completed. The top area 108 where the return address information is stored at the start of the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 41) is excluded from the range of checksum calculation. This makes it possible to execute the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 41) as a process corresponding to non-specific control after power recovery, while preventing changes to the data stored in the first calculation target area 109, which is the range of checksum calculation in the stack area 101 for specific control.

The checksum area 114 in the specific control work area 103, where the checksum calculated before the power was shut off is stored, is excluded from the range of checksum calculations. This prevents changes to data stored in storage areas included in the range of checksum calculations in the main RAM 74, while allowing the checksum calculated before the power was shut off to be stored in the checksum area 114.

When the power supply is cut off and the operation of the main MPU 72 stops, the data stored in the specific control stack area 101 at the start of the processing round of the timer interrupt processing (Figure 15) in which the power outage was identified is stored in the first calculation target area 109 of the specific control stack area 101 and the top save area 115 of the second calculation target area 111, including return address information corresponding to the process following the process being executed immediately before the interrupt by the timer interrupt processing (Figure 15). Furthermore, when the power supply is cut off and the operation of the main MPU 72 stops, the data stored in registers other than the program counter in the main MPU 72 at the start of the processing round of the timer interrupt processing (Figure 15) in which the power outage was identified is stored in the stack pointer save area 116 and the register save area 117 in the second calculation target area 111. In this way, the power is cut off while the information for restoring the processing state to the state immediately before the start of the processing round of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 15) in which the occurrence of a power outage was identified is stored in the first calculation target area 109 and the second calculation target area 111. Therefore, after the power is restored, the information stored in the first calculation target area 109 and the second calculation target area 111 can be used to restore the processing state to the state immediately before the start of the processing round of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 15) in which the occurrence of a power outage was identified.

At the time the power is cut off, the first calculation target area 109 and second calculation target area 111, which store information for restoring the processing state to the state immediately before the start of the processing round of the timer interrupt processing (Figure 15) in which the power outage was identified, are included in the checksum calculation range. Therefore, before restoring the processing state to the state immediately before the start of the processing round of the timer interrupt processing (Figure 15) in which the power outage was identified after the power is restored, it is possible to confirm that no abnormalities have occurred in the information for restoring the processing state to the state immediately before the start of the processing round of the timer interrupt processing (Figure 15) in which the power outage was identified. This prevents the processing state from being restored based on data in which an abnormality has occurred.

The process for identifying the occurrence of a power outage (the process of step S202 in the timer interrupt process (Figure 15)) is a process corresponding to specific control, and the power outage process (Figure 39) executed when the occurrence of a power outage is identified is also a process corresponding to specific control. If a configuration were adopted in which processing corresponding to non-specific control was included from the time the occurrence of a power outage was identified until the time the power outage process was executed and the infinite loop was entered, processing would be required to save information from the registers of the main MPU 72 when transitioning from processing corresponding to specific control to processing corresponding to non-specific control, and processing would be required to restore the saved register information to the registers of the main MPU 72 when returning from processing corresponding to non-specific control to processing corresponding to specific control. In contrast, a configuration in which the series of processes from identifying the occurrence of a power outage until the time the power outage process (Figure 39) was executed and the infinite loop was entered is executed using only processing corresponding to specific control can shorten the processing executed during the period from identifying the occurrence of a power outage to operation of the main MPU 72 stopping.

In the power recovery process (Figure 40), an interrupt by the timer interrupt process (Figure 15) is permitted after the backup abnormality confirmation process (step S1804) is executed. This prevents the data stored in the second calculation target area 111 from being changed if an interrupt by the timer interrupt process occurs before the backup abnormality confirmation process is executed and information from the register of the main MPU 72 is written to the second calculation target area 111.

The range of checksum calculations includes the work area 102 for non-specific control, which stores management information for the slot machine 10 (information for displaying the advantageous zone stay ratio on the ratio display 85). The power restoration process (Figure 40) executes processing to return to the processing state immediately before the start of the processing round of the timer interrupt process (Figure 15) in which the power outage was identified, with one of the conditions being that the checksum calculated after power is restored matches the checksum calculated and stored before the power was cut off. This prevents gameplay from continuing while an abnormality exists in the management information for the slot machine 10 stored in the work area 102 for non-specific control.

The non-specific control stack area 104 is excluded from the scope of checksum calculation. Therefore, after power is restored, when the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 41), a non-specific control process, is started while the power recovery process (Figure 40), a specific control process, is being executed, data from some registers in the primary MPU 72 can be saved to the non-specific control stack area 104 without changing the data stored in the scope of checksum calculation. At the end of the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 41), the data saved in the non-specific control stack area 104 can be restored to those registers in the primary MPU 72. This allows those registers in the primary MPU 72 to be used in the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 41), while the data in those registers can be restored to the data at the start of the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 41), allowing the power recovery process (Figure 40), a specific control process, to be resumed. Furthermore, because the non-specific control stack area 104 is excluded from the scope of checksum calculation, the scope of checksum calculation is reduced. This reduces the amount of processing that must be performed from the time a power outage is detected until the power supply is shut off and operation of the main MPU 72 stops.

Next, we will explain the clear all process executed in step S107 of the main process (Figure 14).

As already explained, the state in which the backup abnormality flag 113 in the non-specific control work area 102 is set to "1" and the state in which the error state flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" are cleared by executing the all clear process (step S107).

As already explained with reference to FIG. 14, in the main processing, if the power is turned on while the setting key insertion hole 57 is turned on (step S102: YES), and the error status flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S104: YES) or the reset button 56 is pressed (step S105: YES), a full clear processing is executed (step S107). Also, if the power is turned on while the setting key insertion hole 57 is turned on (step S102: YES), and the error status flag in the second calculation target area 111 is not set to "1" (step S104: NO) and the reset button 56 is not pressed (step S105: NO), a partial clear processing is executed (step S106).

In the all clear process (step S107), all storage areas in the specific control stack area 101 are cleared and initial settings are performed for all of these storage areas. Therefore, if an abnormality occurs in the data stored in the specific control stack area 101, the data abnormality can be resolved by executing the all clear process (step S107).

In the all-clear process (step S107), all memory areas in the specific control work area 103 are cleared, and the cleared memory areas are initialized. Therefore, if an abnormality occurs in the data stored in the specific control work area 103, the data abnormality can be resolved by executing the all-clear process (step S107). In the all-clear process (step S107), all information stored in the specific control work area 103 is cleared, including information for determining the current setting value of the slot machine 10, information for determining the current game state, information for determining the current game zone, information for determining the current lottery mode, and information indicating that a bonus win has occurred but the corresponding bonus win has not yet been achieved (bonus win data set in the second calculation target area 111). When the all-clear process (step S107) is executed, the current setting value of the slot machine 10 is set to "1," and the current game state becomes the normal game state ST1. Additionally, the current game zone becomes the normal zone SC1, and the current lottery mode becomes the normal mode. Furthermore, the second calculation target area 111 becomes a state in which no winning data for any role, including bonus winning data, is set.

In the all clear process, all storage areas in the stack area 104 for non-specific control are cleared except for the storage areas in which information from the various registers of the main MPU 72 used in the processing corresponding to specific control is saved, and the cleared storage areas are initialized. By not erasing the storage areas in which information from the various registers of the main MPU 72 used in the processing corresponding to specific control is saved, it is possible to restore the information used in the processing corresponding to specific control to the various registers of the main MPU 72 when the processing corresponding to non-specific control ends and returns to the processing corresponding to specific control.

In the all clear process (step S107), all memory areas in the work area 102 for non-specific control, except for the non-specific stack pointer save area, are cleared, and the cleared memory areas are initialized. By not clearing the non-specific stack pointer save area, it is possible to prevent the information on the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 saved in the non-specific stack pointer save area from being erased. By executing the all clear process (step S107), the management information for the slot machine 10 stored in the work area 102 for non-specific control (information for displaying the advantageous zone stay ratio on the ratio display 85) is cleared. If an abnormality occurs in the data stored in the work area 102 for non-specific control, the abnormality in the data can be resolved by executing the all clear process (step S107).

As already explained, if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is initiated while the setting key insertion hole 57 is turned ON, either the full clear process (step S107) or the partial clear process (step S106) is executed in the main process (FIG. 14). As already explained, the partial clear process (step S106) is executed on the condition that the error state flag in the second calculation target area 111 is not set to "1" (step S104: NO) and the reset button 56 has not been pressed (step S105: NO).

As will be described in detail later, the partial clear process (step S106) clears all information stored in the main RAM 74, excluding information for determining the current setting values of the slot machine 10, information for determining the current game state, information for determining the current game zone, information for determining the current lottery mode, information on the number of stored virtual medals, and information indicating that a bonus win has occurred but the corresponding bonus win has not yet been achieved (bonus win data set in the second calculation target area 111). In the partial clear process, all win data stored in the second calculation target area 111 other than the bonus win data is cleared, while the bonus win data remains untouched. Furthermore, in the partial clear process (step S106), similar to the full clear process, all storage areas in the specific control stack area 101 are cleared, and the cleared storage areas are initialized. In the partial clear process (step S106), the storage areas in the non-specific control work area 102 and the non-specific control stack area 104 are not cleared.

The partial clear process (step S106) allows gameplay to begin while maintaining the game state, game zone, and lottery mode prior to the power outage. If the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped while rotation control of one or more reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is being performed, and then the supply of operating power is resumed and the partial clear process is executed, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that were spinning at the time of the power outage will not resume rotation. By placing a bet on gaming media and operating the start lever 41, the player can start a new game while maintaining the game state, game zone, and lottery mode prior to the power outage. If bonus winning data was set in the second calculation target area 111 at the time of the power outage, the game can be started with the bonus winning data stored and retained. On the other hand, if the power recovery process (Figure 40) is executed after the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is resumed and the processing state before the power was cut off is restored, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that were spinning at the time of the power outage will resume spinning, and the game that was running at the time of the power outage will resume.

Next, the all clear process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 43. Note that in the all clear process, processes other than the clear process for non-specific control (step S2006) are executed using a program and data for specific control, while the clear process for non-specific control (step S2006) is executed using a program and data for non-specific control.

The all-clear process first executes a clear process for the specific control work area 103 (step S2001). This clear process clears all memory areas in the specific control work area 103 to "0." This clears the error status flag in the second calculation target area 111 to "0." Execution of the specific control work area 103 clear process (step S2001) also clears information for determining the current setting values of the slot machine 10, the current game status, the current game zone, the current lottery mode, the number of stored virtual medals, and winning data, including bonus winning data. Furthermore, information for displaying the stop order correspondence on the dual-purpose display unit 66 is also cleared. Therefore, even if the stop order correspondence display was being performed on the dual-purpose display unit 66 before the power was shut off, the stop order correspondence display will not resume on the dual-purpose display unit 66 if the all-clear process (FIG. 43) is executed after the power is restored. Then, an initial setting process for the specific control work area 103 is executed (step S2002). In this initial setting process, the specific control work area 103 that was cleared in step S2001 is initialized.

Then, a clearing process is performed on the stack area 101 for specific control (step S2003). In this clearing process, the stack area 101 for specific control is cleared to "0". Then, an initial setting process is performed on the stack area 101 for specific control (step S2004). In this initial setting process, the stack area 101 for specific control cleared in step S2003 is initialized, and the stack pointer information of the main MPU 72 is set so that the memory area to be written to is the memory area corresponding to the final address (Y(r+1)) of the stack area 101 for specific control.

Then, a push command is issued to save the information in the flag register of the main MPU 72 to the stack area 101 for specific control (step S2005). As already explained, the flag register includes a carry flag, zero flag, P/V flag, sign flag, and half carry flag, and the information in the flag register changes depending on the execution results of arithmetic instructions, rotate instructions, and input/output instructions. By saving this flag register information before the program for the subroutine corresponding to the clear process for non-specific control (step S2006) is started, it is possible to save the flag register information in the state before it changes after the subroutine is called or started to the stack area 101 for specific control. The amount of information in the flag register is 1 byte.

Then, a call instruction is used to read out a subroutine program corresponding to the non-specific control clear processing (Figure 44) set in the non-specific control program, thereby starting the non-specific control clear processing (step S2006). In this case, information for specifying the return address for the all clear processing (Figure 43) after the non-specific control clear processing is executed (address information for returning to step S2007) is written into the specific control stack area 101 by a push instruction. Then, when the non-specific control clear processing (Figure 44) is completed, information for specifying the return address is read out by a pop instruction, and processing returns to the all clear processing (Figure 43) program indicated by the return address.

When returning to the program for the all clear process (Figure 43) after executing the clear process for non-specific control (Figure 44), the flag register information saved in the stack area 101 for specific control in step S2005 is restored to the flag register of the main MPU 72 by a pop command (step S2007). This restores the information in the flag register of the main MPU 72 to the information at the time step S2005 was executed. In other words, the information in the flag register of the main MPU 72 is restored to the information required to execute specific control.

Then, an all clear command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S2008). The all clear command is a command that causes the production side MPU 92 to recognize that the all clear process (Figure 43) has been executed. Then, an all clear signal output control process is executed (step S2009), which controls the output of a signal to the external device, the data counter DC, in a manner that indicates that the all clear process (Figure 43) has been executed, and the all clear process ends. Details of the all clear signal output control process (step S2009) will be described later.

Next, the clearing process for non-specific control executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 44. The clearing process for non-specific control is executed in step S2006 of the all clearing process (Figure 43). The clearing process for non-specific control is executed using the non-specific control program and non-specific control data. The clearing process for non-specific control is executed after the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 has started, but before an interrupt is permitted to occur by the timer interrupt process (Figure 15). This prevents the timer interrupt process (Figure 15), which is a process corresponding to specific control, from interrupting and being started in the middle of the clearing process for non-specific control, which is a process corresponding to non-specific control.

In the non-specific control clearing process, step S2101 executes the same process as step S1601 in the management execution process (Figure 38). Specifically, a load command is used to save the stack pointer data of the main MPU 72 to a non-specific stack pointer save area in the non-specific control work area 102 (step S2101). The stack pointer data at the start of the non-specific control clearing process (Figure 44), which is a non-specific control process, is saved to the non-specific stack pointer save area. By preventing the saved data from being erased in steps S2101 to S2107, after steps S2101 to S2107 are executed, the data can be restored to the stack pointer, restoring the stack pointer data to the data at the start of the non-specific control clearing process (Figure 44).

Then, in steps S2102 and S2103, processing similar to steps S1602 and S1603 of the management execution process (FIG. 38) and steps S1901 and S1902 of the backup abnormality confirmation process (FIG. 41) is executed. Specifically, a load command is used to set the stack pointer of the primary MPU 72 to "Y(u+1)," the last address information in the non-specific control stack area 104, as a fixed address at the start of the non-specific control clear process (FIG. 44) (step S2102). Then, a push command is used to save the information in the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register, which are some of the various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers provided by the primary MPU 72, to the non-specific control stack area 104 in the following order: WA register → BC register → DE register → HL register → IX register → IY register (step S2103). As already explained, the information capacity of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register is all 2 bytes. The processing content in step S2103 is the same as step S1603 in the management execution processing (FIG. 38) and step S1902 in the backup abnormality confirmation processing (FIG. 41).

The WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are registers used in the processing of steps S2104 to S2107. By saving the information set in these registers to the stack area 104 for non-specific control prior to the execution of the processing of steps S2104 to S2107, it is possible to save the information in these registers used during specific control before the processing of steps S2104 to S2107 begins. Therefore, even if these registers are overwritten during non-specific control, by restoring the information saved in the work area 102 for non-specific control to these registers when the non-specific control is terminated, it is possible to restore the state of these registers to the state corresponding to specific control before the non-specific control was executed.

Then, a clearing process is executed for the stack area 104 for non-specific control (step S2104). In this clearing process, all storage areas in the stack area 104 for non-specific control are cleared to "0" except for the storage areas in which the information of the various registers of the main MPU 72 used in the processing corresponding to the specific control is saved. By not clearing to "0" the storage areas in which the information of the various registers of the main MPU 72 used in the processing corresponding to the specific control is saved, it is possible to restore the information used in the processing corresponding to the specific control to the various registers of the main MPU 72 when the processing corresponding to the non-specific control ends and returns to the processing corresponding to the specific control. Then, an initial setting process is executed for the stack area 104 for non-specific control (step S2105). In this initial setting process, the storage areas of the stack area 104 for non-specific control that were cleared in step S2104 are initialized.

After that, a process for clearing the work area 102 for non-specific control is executed (step S2106). In this process, all storage areas of the work area 102 for non-specific control, except for the non-specific stack pointer save area, are cleared to "0." By not clearing the non-specific stack pointer save area to "0," the information saved in the non-specific stack pointer save area in step S2101 can be restored to the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 after the processes of steps S2101 to S2108 have been executed.

By executing the process of clearing the work area 102 for non-specific control (step S2106), the backup abnormality flag 113 is cleared to "0." Furthermore, by executing the process of clearing the work area 102 for non-specific control (step S2106), the total game count counter, advantageous game count counter, game execution grasp flag, and management display flag are cleared to "0." This clears the management information for the slot machine 10. If an abnormality occurs in the information stored in the work area 102 for non-specific control, by executing the process of clearing the work area 102 for non-specific control (step S2106), it is possible to resolve the information abnormality.

After that, the initialization process for the non-specific control work area 102 is executed (step S2107). In this initialization process, the memory areas in the non-specific control work area 102 that were cleared to "0" in step S2106 are initialized.

Then, in steps S2108 and S2109, the same processing as steps S1618 and S1619 of the management execution process (Figure 38) is performed. Specifically, the data saved in the non-specific control stack area 104 in step S2103 is restored to the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the primary MPU 72 in the reverse order of step S2103 (IY register → IX register → HL register → DE register → BC register → WA register) (step S2108). The processing content of step S2108 is the same as step S1618 of the management execution process (Figure 38) and step S1911 of the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 41). By executing the processing of step S2108, the information in the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main MPU 72 can be restored to the information corresponding to specific control at the start of the clear processing for non-specific control (FIG. 44), which is processing corresponding to non-specific control.

Then, the data saved in the non-specific stack pointer save area in the non-specific control work area 102 in step S2101 is restored to the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 (step S2109), and the non-specific control clear process is terminated. By restoring the data saved in the non-specific stack pointer save area in step S2101 to the stack pointer of the main MPU 72, the data in the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 can be restored to the data at the start of non-specific control. As a result, the return address information (address information for returning to the process of step S2007) written to the stack area 101 for specific control by the push command in step S2006 of the all clear process (Figure 43) can be read by the pop command, and the process can return to the program for the all clear process (Figure 43) indicated by the return address.

In this way, some registers in the main MPU 72 (specifically, the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register) remain available during the execution of the non-specific control clear process (Figure 44), which is a process for non-specific control. After the non-specific control clear process (Figure 44) is completed, the registers are restored to the state they were in at the start of the non-specific control clear process (Figure 44), and the next process after the non-specific control clear process (Figure 44) in step S2006 of the all clear process (Figure 43) can be started.

Next, referring to the time chart in Figure 45, we will explain how the backup abnormality flag 113 and error status flag are cleared from their "1" state. Figure 45(a) shows the state of the backup abnormality flag 113 in the non-specific control work area 102, Figure 45(b) shows the state of the error status flag in the second calculation target area 111, Figure 45(c) shows the execution period of the error notification, Figure 45(d) shows the timing when the all clear process (Figure 43) is executed, Figure 45(e) shows the timing when the power outage process (Figure 39) is executed, and Figure 45(f) shows the state of the operating power supply to the main MPU 72.

When a power outage is identified at time t1, power outage processing (Figure 39) is executed, as shown in Figure 45(e). In power outage processing, a checksum is calculated using a portion of the storage area in the main RAM 74 as the calculation range, and the calculated checksum is stored in the checksum area 114 of the second non-calculation area 112. Thereafter, as shown in Figure 45(f), the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped at time t2, and the operation of the main MPU 72 is stopped.

Thereafter, as shown in Fig. 45(f), power is restored at timing t3 without the setting key insertion hole 57 being turned ON, and the power restoration process (Fig. 40) is executed in step S103 of the main process (Fig. 14). Thereafter, if the checksum calculated in the backup abnormality confirmation process (Fig. 41) does not match the checksum stored before the power was shut off, at timing t4, as shown in Fig. 45(a), the backup abnormality flag 113 in the non-specific control work area 102 is set to "1," and as shown in Fig. 45(b), the error state flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1." Then, as shown in Fig. 45(c), at timing t4, the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 start to notify an error.

After that, at timing t5, when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped as shown in Figure 45(f), the error notification ends as shown in Figure 45(c), but the backup abnormality flag 113 in the work area 102 for non-specific control remains set to "1" as shown in Figure 45(a), and the error status flag in the second calculation target area 111 remains set to "1" as shown in Figure 45(b).

Thereafter, as shown in Figure 45(f), at timing t6, while the setting key insertion hole 57 is being turned ON, the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 begins. As shown in Figure 45(b), the error status flag in the second calculation target area 111 remains set to "1" at timing t6, so the all-clear process (Figure 43) is executed at timing t7, as shown in Figure 45(d). As a result, at timing t7, the backup abnormality flag 113 in the non-specific control work area 102 is cleared to "0" as shown in Figure 45(a), and the error status flag in the second calculation target area 111 is cleared to "0" as shown in Figure 45(b).

As described above, if the checksum calculated after power is restored does not match the checksum stored before power was cut off, i.e., if an abnormality occurs in the data stored in a memory area included in the checksum calculation range, the backup abnormality flag 113 in the non-specific control work area 102 is set to "1," and the error status flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1." An error notification is then issued by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63. This allows the amusement hall manager to know that an abnormality has occurred in the data stored in a memory area included in the checksum calculation range.

If the error state flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" and the supply of operating power is started while the setting key insertion hole 57 is turned ON, the all clear process (Figure 43) is executed, regardless of whether the reset button 56 is pressed, to clear the error state flag in the second calculation target area 111 to "0" and to clear the backup abnormality flag 113 in the work area 102 for non-specific control to "0." Furthermore, by executing the all clear process (Figure 43), the memory area in which an abnormality occurred in the stored data is cleared to "0." This prevents the game from proceeding based on the abnormal data while the data stored in the checksum calculation target range remains in an abnormal state.

After the error status flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1," if the supply of operating power is started while the setting key insertion hole 57 is turned ON, the all-clear process (Figure 43) is executed without pressing the reset button 56. This makes it easy for the amusement hall manager to understand how to clear the error status flag when it is set to "1."

<Configuration for outputting bet notification sound>
Next, a configuration for outputting a bet notification sound from the speaker 62 to notify the player that a bet on gaming media has been placed will be described.

As already explained, a credit insertion button 47 is provided below and to the left of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R for inserting the maximum number of credited virtual medals that can be bet at one time. Figure 46 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the types and combinations of bet notification sounds that are output as the number of gaming media bets increases.

First, we will explain the case where the number of gaming media bets increases by "1" per processing iteration of the start waiting process (FIG. 49) in step S302 of the normal processing (FIG. 16). As will be described in detail later, if a setting confirmation display is displayed during the setting confirmation process (FIG. 55(b)) in step S303 of the normal processing (FIG. 16) that allows the setting value to be confirmed, the selector 52 switches to a non-acceptance state when the setting confirmation display begins, and switches to an acceptance state when the setting confirmation display ends. The number of gaming media bets does not increase with the insertion of medals while the setting confirmation display is being executed. Furthermore, if the setting confirmation display is not displayed, the interval between executions of the start waiting process (step S302) is shorter than the interval between detection of multiple medals inserted consecutively through the medal insertion slot 45 by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a. Therefore, even if medals are inserted consecutively, the number of gaming media bets increases by "1" per processing iteration of the start waiting process (step S302).

If the number of gaming media bets is "0" and one medal inserted through the medal insertion slot 45 is detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, the number of gaming media bets increases from "0" to "1" in one processing run of the start waiting process (step S302). Also, if the credit insertion button 47 is operated when the number of gaming media bets is "0" and the number of virtual medals stored is "1," the number of gaming media bets increases from "0" to "1" in one processing run of the start waiting process (step S302). As shown in FIG. 46, if the number of gaming media bets increases from "0" to "1" in one processing run of the start waiting process (step S302), a first bet alert sound is output from the speaker 62. The first bet alert sound is an alert sound for notifying the user that the number of gaming media bets has increased from "0" to "1." By hearing the first bet notification sound, the player can confirm that the number of gaming media bets has increased from "0" to "1."

If the number of gaming media bets is "1" and one medal inserted through the medal insertion slot 45 is detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, the number of gaming media bets increases from "1" to "2" in one processing run of the start waiting process (step S302). Also, if the credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of gaming media bets is "1" and the number of virtual medals stored is "1," the number of gaming media bets also increases from "1" to "2" in one processing run of the start waiting process (step S302). As shown in FIG. 46, if the number of gaming media bets increases from "1" to "2" in one processing run of the start waiting process (step S302), a second bet alert sound is output from the speaker 62. The second bet alert sound is an alert sound for notifying the user that the number of gaming media bets has increased from "1" to "2." By hearing the second bet notification sound, the player can confirm that the number of gaming media bets has increased from "1" to "2."

If the number of gaming media bets is "2" and one medal inserted through the medal insertion slot 45 is detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, the number of gaming media bets increases from "2" to "3" in one processing run of the start waiting process (step S302). Also, if the credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of gaming media bets is "2" and the number of stored virtual medals is "1" or more, the number of gaming media bets increases from "2" to "3" in one processing run of the start waiting process (step S302). As shown in FIG. 46, if the number of gaming media bets increases from "2" to "3" in one processing run of the start waiting process (step S302), a third bet alert sound is output from the speaker 62. The third bet alert sound is an alert sound for notifying the user that the number of gaming media bets has increased from "2" to "3." By hearing the third bet notification sound, the player can confirm that the number of gaming media bets has increased from "2" to "3."

Next, we will explain the case where the number of gaming media bets increased by "2" in one processing of the start waiting process (step S302).

If the credit insertion button 47 is operated when the number of gaming media bets is "0" and the number of virtual medals stored is "2," the number of gaming media bets increases from "0" to "2" in one processing run of the start waiting process (step S302). As shown in FIG. 46, when the number of gaming media bets increases from "0" to "2" in one processing run of the start waiting process (step S302), two bet alert sounds are output consecutively from the speaker 62 in the order of a first bet alert sound and then a second bet alert sound. By hearing the first bet alert sound and second bet alert sound output consecutively, the player can confirm that the number of gaming media bets has increased from "0" to "2."

If the credit insertion button 47 is operated when the number of gaming media bets is "1" and the number of stored virtual medals is "2" or more, the number of gaming media bets increases from "1" to "3" in one processing run of the start waiting process (step S302). As shown in FIG. 46, when the number of gaming media bets increases from "1" to "3" in one processing run of the start waiting process (step S302), two bet alert sounds are output consecutively from the speaker 62 in the order of a second bet alert sound and then a third bet alert sound. By hearing the second bet alert sound and the third bet alert sound output consecutively, the player can confirm that the number of gaming media bets has increased from "1" to "3".

Next, we will explain the case where the number of gaming media bets that increases in one processing iteration of the start waiting process (step S302) is "3".

If the credit insertion button 47 is operated when the number of gaming media bets is "0" and the number of stored virtual medals is "3" or more, the number of gaming media bets increases from "0" to "3" in one processing run of the start waiting process (step S302). Also, even if the start waiting process (step S302) is executed for the first time after the end of a game in which a replay win has been achieved, the number of gaming media bets increases from "0" to "3" in one processing run of the start waiting process (step S302). As shown in FIG. 46, when the number of gaming media bets increases from "0" to "3" in one processing run of the start waiting process (step S302), three bet alert sounds are output consecutively from the speaker 62 in the order of first bet alert sound → second bet alert sound → third bet alert sound. By hearing the first bet alert sound, second bet alert sound, and third bet alert sound output in succession based on the operation of the credit insertion button 47, the player can confirm that the number of gaming media bets has increased from "0" to "3." Furthermore, if the first bet alert sound, second bet alert sound, and third bet alert sound are output in succession after the end of a game in which a replay win has been achieved, the player can confirm that they are now in a state where they can start the game without having to bet gaming media.

Figure 47(a) is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of the presentation-side ROM 93 for controlling the output of bet notification sounds, and Figure 47(b) is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of the presentation-side RAM 94 for controlling the output of bet notification sounds.

As shown in Figure 47 (a), the production-side ROM 93 has a sound table storage area 121 in which bet alarm sound tables for outputting the first to third bet alarm sounds from the speaker 62 are stored. The sound table storage area 121 stores a first bet alarm sound table for outputting the first bet alarm sound, a second bet alarm sound table for outputting the second bet alarm sound, and a third bet alarm sound table for outputting the third bet alarm sound. In these bet alarm sound tables, numerical information from "0" to "14" is arranged consecutively as pointer information, and sound data is set for all of the pointer information.

As shown in Figure 47 (b), the presentation-side RAM 94 has an output target area 122 for reading out a bet alarm sound table corresponding to the bet alarm sound to be output. The presentation-side MPU 92 reads out the bet alarm sound table into the output target area 122. Thereafter, the pointer information for the bet alarm sound table is updated by incrementing it by 1 every 40 milliseconds, and the sound data set in the updated pointer information is output to the speaker 62. When sound output control of the speaker 62 is performed according to the first bet alarm sound table, the first bet alarm sound is output for 0.6 seconds, and when sound output control of the speaker 62 is performed according to the second bet alarm sound table, the second bet alarm sound is output for 0.6 seconds. When sound output control of the speaker 62 is performed according to the third bet alarm sound table, the third bet alarm sound is output for 0.6 seconds.

The presentation-side RAM 94 is provided with a second read standby flag 123 and a third read standby flag 124. The second read standby flag 123 is a flag that allows the presentation-side MPU 92 to know that the reading of the second bet alarm sound table is on standby, and the third read standby flag 124 is a flag that allows the presentation-side MPU 92 to know that the reading of the third bet alarm sound table is on standby.

If the presentation side MPU 92 receives a command from the main side MPU 72 indicating that the number of gaming media bets has reached "2" or more (the second bet command and third bet command described below) while controlling the output of the first bet alarm sound, or if the presentation side MPU 92 receives a command from the main side MPU 72 indicating that the number of gaming media bets has reached "2" or more and starts controlling the output of the first bet alarm sound while the first bet alarm sound has not yet been output, the reading of the second bet alarm sound table will be put on hold. If the presentation side MPU 92 receives a command from the main side MPU 72 indicating that the number of gaming media bets has reached "3" (the third bet command described below) while controlling the output of the first bet alarm sound or the second bet alarm sound, the reading of the third bet alarm sound table will be put on hold. Furthermore, if the second bet alarm sound has not yet been output and the presentation-side MPU 92 receives a command from the main-side MPU 72 indicating that the number of gaming media bets has reached "3," and output control of the first bet alarm sound or the second bet alarm sound begins, the system will enter a standby state where it is ready to read the third bet alarm sound table.

When the second read standby flag 123 is set to "1" and the output of the first bet alert sound has finished, the production side MPU 92 reads the second bet alert sound table into the output target area 122 and starts outputting the second bet alert sound. Also, when the third read standby flag 124 is set to "1" and the output of the second bet alert sound has finished, the production side MPU 92 reads the third bet alert sound table into the output target area 122 and starts outputting the third bet alert sound. As a result, before the start of each game, three types of bet alert sound tables are sequentially read into the output target area 122 in the order of first bet alert sound table → second bet alert sound table → third bet alert sound, and the three types of bet alert sounds are sequentially output from the speaker 62 in the order of first bet alert sound → second bet alert sound → third bet alert sound.

The first bet alarm sound table, the second bet alarm sound table, and the third bet alarm sound table are stored in the presentation-side ROM 93, and the first bet alarm sound table, the second bet alarm sound table, and the third bet alarm sound table are read out in order into the output target area 122 to output three types of bet alarm sounds in the order of first bet alarm sound → second bet alarm sound → third bet alarm sound. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which a bet alarm sound table for outputting a combination of two or more bet alarm sounds is pre-stored in addition to these first to third bet alarm sound tables, the capacity required to store the bet alarm sound tables in the presentation-side ROM 93 can be reduced. A bet alert sound table for outputting a combination of two or more bet alert sounds refers to one bet alert sound table for consecutively outputting the first and second bet alert sounds in the order of first bet alert sound → second bet alert sound, one bet alert sound table for consecutively outputting the second and third bet alert sounds in the order of second bet alert sound → third bet alert sound, and one bet alert sound table for consecutively outputting the first, second, and third bet alert sounds in the order of first bet alert sound → second bet alert sound → third bet alert sound.

Figure 48 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of the work area 103 for specific control used to execute various processes. As already explained, the work area 103 for specific control is provided in the main RAM 74. As shown in Figure 48, the second calculation target area 111 in the work area 103 for specific control is provided with a bet number counter 125 and a bet number addition flag 126. The bet number counter 125 is a counter that allows the main MPU 72 to grasp the current number of bets on gaming media. Numerical information of any one of "0" to "3" is set in the bet number counter 125. The value of the bet number counter 125 is cleared to "0" at the start of the game during the start setting process (Figure 81) in step S307 of the normal process (Figure 16). The bet number addition flag 126 is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to determine whether a value of 1 or more has been added to the value of the bet number counter 125, increasing the number of gaming media bets, and whether bet commands (first to third bet commands, described below) corresponding to the increased number of bets have not yet been sent.

When the main MPU 72 increases the number of bets on gaming media by adding one or more values to the value of the bet number counter 125 during one processing cycle of the start waiting process (step S302), it sends one of the first bet command, second bet command, or third bet command corresponding to the increased number of bets to the presentation MPU 92. The first bet command is a command for making the presentation MPU 92 recognize that the increased number of bets on gaming media is "1," the second bet command is a command for making the presentation MPU 92 recognize that the increased number of bets on gaming media is "2," and the third bet command is a command for making the presentation MPU 92 recognize that the increased number of bets on gaming media is "3."

As shown in Figure 47 (b), the presentation side RAM 94 is provided with a first sound set flag 127 and a second sound set flag 128. The first sound set flag 127 is a flag that allows the presentation side MPU 92 to know that the first bet alarm sound table has been read into the output target area 122. When the presentation side MPU 92 reads the first bet alarm sound table into the output target area 122 based on receiving a first bet command or a second bet command, it sets the first sound set flag 127 to "1". This prevents the first bet alarm sound from being output twice if a second bet command or a third bet command is subsequently received.

When the first bet alarm sound table is read into the output target area 122 based on the receipt of a third bet command, there will be no bet commands received before the game starts, and there is no possibility of the first bet alarm sound being output twice, except in cases where gaming media are bet again after the settlement button 51 is operated. For this reason, when the first bet alarm sound table is read into the output target area 122 based on the receipt of a third bet command, the process of setting the first sound set flag 127 to "1" is omitted. This simplifies the processing configuration for outputting bet alarm sounds.

The second sound set flag 128 is a flag that allows the presentation-side MPU 92 to know that the second bet alarm sound table has been read into the output target area 122, or that the second read standby flag 123 has been set to "1." When the presentation-side MPU 92 receives a second bet command, if the first bet alarm sound is being output, it sets the second read standby flag 123 and the second sound set flag 128 to "1," and if the output of the first bet alarm sound has finished, it reads the second bet alarm sound table into the output target area 122 and sets the second sound set flag 128 to "1." This prevents the second bet alarm sound from being output twice if a third bet command is subsequently received.

When the second bet alarm sound table is read into the output target area 122 based on the receipt of a third bet command, or when the second read standby flag 123 is set to "1," there will be no bet commands received before the game starts, and there is no possibility of the second bet alarm sound being output twice, except in cases where gaming media are bet again after the settlement button 51 is operated. For this reason, when the second bet alarm sound table is read into the output target area 122 based on the receipt of a third bet command, or when the second read standby flag 123 is set to "1," the process of setting the second sound set flag 128 to "1" is omitted. This simplifies the processing configuration for outputting bet alarm sounds.

Next, the start waiting process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 49. The start waiting process is executed in step S302 of the normal process (Figure 16). Note that the start waiting process is executed using a program and data for specific control.

The start wait process first determines whether the replay bet completion flag provided in the second calculation target area 111 of the specific control work area 103 is set to "1" (step S2201). The replay bet completion flag is a flag that the master MPU 72 uses to determine whether the same number of bets as the previous bet have already been placed when a replay win has been achieved in the previous game.

If a negative determination is made in step S2201, the process determines whether the replay occurrence flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S2202). As already explained, the replay occurrence flag is a flag that enables the host MPU 72 to determine whether a bet on gaming media should be automatically placed without reducing the number of gaming media owned by the player during the start waiting process (FIG. 49) that is first performed after a replay win occurs. The replay occurrence flag is set to "1" during the reel control process (FIG. 58) in step S309 of the normal process (FIG. 16) when a replay win occurs. Furthermore, the replay occurrence flag is cleared to "0" during the start setting process (FIG. 81) in step S307 of the normal process (FIG. 16) at the start of the game following the game in which the replay win occurred. If a positive determination is made in step S2202, this means that a replay win occurred in the previous game. In this case, the replay occurrence flag in the second calculation target area 111 is cleared to "0" (step S2203), and the bet number counter 125 in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "3", which is the specified number of gaming media (step S2204).

Then, the replay bet completion flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S2205). As a result, a positive determination is made in step S2201 from the next processing iteration of the start waiting process (FIG. 49). Then, the bet number addition flag 126 in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S2206). As a result, a value of 1 or more has been added to the value of the bet number counter 125, increasing the number of bets on gaming media, and the main MPU 72 is able to determine that a bet command (any of the first to third bet commands) corresponding to the increased bet number has not been sent.

If a positive judgment is made in step S2201, if a negative judgment is made in step S2202, or if the processing of step S2206 is executed, bet response processing is executed (step S2207). Figure 50 is a flowchart showing the bet response processing. Note that the bet response processing is executed using a program and data for specific control.

The bet processing first determines whether the setting confirmation display flag provided in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S2301). The setting confirmation display flag is a flag that allows the master MPU 72 to recognize that a setting confirmation display is being displayed on the credit display unit 65 to enable confirmation of the setting value of the slot machine 10. Details of the setting confirmation display will be described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S2301, the process determines whether the value of the bet number counter 125 in the second calculation target area 111 is equal to or greater than the upper limit bet number (specifically, the specified number of "3") (step S2302). If the value of the bet number counter 125 is not equal to or greater than the upper limit bet number (step S2302: NO), the process references the credit counter in the second calculation target area 111 to determine whether the number of stored virtual medals is equal to or greater than "1" (step S2303). If the number of stored virtual medals is equal to or greater than "1" (step S2303: YES), the process determines whether the credit insertion button 47 has been operated (step S2304). If operation of the credit insertion button 47 is detected (step S2304: YES), the process executes a bet setting process (step S2305). In this way, the bet setting process is executed on the condition that the number of stored virtual medals is equal to or greater than "1" (step S2303: YES).

In the bet setting process in step S2305, if operation of the credit insertion button 47 is detected when the value of the bet number counter 125 is "0," and the number of stored virtual medals is "3" or greater, "3" is added to the value of the bet number counter 125 and "3" is subtracted from the value of the credit counter. On the other hand, if the number of stored virtual medals is "2" or less in this case, the number of virtual medals is added to the value of the bet number counter 125 and the value of the credit counter is set to "0." Furthermore, if operation of the credit insertion button 47 is detected when the value of the bet number counter 125 is "1," and the number of stored virtual medals is "2" or greater, "2" is added to the value of the bet number counter 125 and "2" is subtracted from the value of the credit counter. On the other hand, if the number of stored virtual medals is "1," "1" is added to the value of the bet number counter 125 and the value of the credit counter is set to "0." Furthermore, if operation of the credit insertion button 47 is detected when the value of the bet number counter 125 is "2", "1" is added to the value of the bet number counter 125 and "1" is subtracted from the value of the credit counter.

If the bet setting process is executed in step S2305, the bet number addition flag 126 in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S2306). This allows the main MPU 72 to recognize that a value of 1 or more has been added to the value of the bet number counter 125, increasing the number of gaming media bets, and that a bet command (any of the first to third bet commands) corresponding to the increased bet number has not been sent.

If the setting confirmation display flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S2301: YES), the process proceeds to step S2307 without executing steps S2302 to S2306. In this way, when the setting confirmation display is being displayed in the credit display unit 65, operation of the credit insertion button 47 is disabled.

If a positive judgment is made in step S2301, a positive judgment is made in step S2302, a negative judgment is made in step S2303, a negative judgment is made in step S2304, or the processing of step S2306 is performed, it is determined whether a medal has been inserted into the medal insertion slot 45 and one medal has been detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a (step S2307).

If a positive judgment is made in step S2307, and the value of the bet number counter 125 in the second calculation target area 111 is less than the upper bet limit of "3" (step S2308: NO), the value of the bet number counter 125 is incremented by 1 (step S2309). This increases the number of gaming media bets by 1. Then, the bet number addition flag 126 in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S2310). This allows the main MPU 72 to determine that a value of 1 or more has been added to the value of the bet number counter 125, increasing the number of gaming media bets, and that a bet command (any of the first to third bet commands) corresponding to the increased number of bets has not yet been sent.

On the other hand, if the value of the bet number counter 125 is equal to or greater than the bet upper limit (step S2308: YES), the value of the credit counter in the second calculation target area 111 is incremented by 1 (step S2311). In this case, the process of setting the bet number increment flag 126 to "1" is not performed.

When the processing of step S2310 or step S2311 is executed, if the value of the bet number counter 125 is equal to or greater than the upper limit of bets, "3," and the value of the credit counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit of accumulated memory, "50" (step S2312: YES), an acceptance prohibition process is executed to place the selector 52 in an acceptance prohibition state (step S2313). As a result, even if a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 45, the medal will be ejected into the medal tray 59 without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2307, if a negative judgment is made in step S2312, or if the processing of step S2313 is performed, it is determined whether the bet number addition flag 126 in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S2314). If the bet number addition flag 126 is not set to "1" (step S2314: NO), the main bet processing ends without sending a bet command. On the other hand, if the bet number addition flag 126 is set to "1" (step S2314: YES), the bet command sending processing is executed (step S2315), and the main bet processing ends.

Figure 51 is a flowchart showing the bet command transmission process. Note that the bet command transmission process is executed using a specific control program and specific control data.

In the bet command transmission process, it is determined whether the value of the bet number counter 125 in the second calculation target area 111 is "1" (step S2401), and if the value of the bet number counter 125 is "1" (step S2401: YES), the first bet command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2402).

If a negative judgment is made in step S2401, it is determined whether the value of the bet number counter 125 in the second calculation target area 111 is "2" (step S2403), and if the value of the bet number counter 125 is "2" (step S2403: YES), a second bet command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S2404).

If a negative determination is made in steps S2401 and S2403, a third bet command is sent to the production-side MPU 92 (step S2405). The bet command sending process (FIG. 51) is executed on the condition that the bet number addition flag 126 in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1", so if a negative determination is made in steps S2401 and S2403, this means that the value of the bet number counter 125 is "3". The third bet command is sent to the production-side MPU 92 when the value of the bet number counter 125 is "3".

If the processing of step S2402, step S2404, or step S2405 has been performed, the bet number addition flag 126 in the second calculation target area 111 is cleared to "0" (step S2406), and this bet command transmission process is terminated. Clearing the bet number addition flag 126 to "0" prevents the same bet command from being sent multiple times even though the value of the bet number counter 125 has not changed.

As already explained, when the credit insertion button 47 is operated, the value of the bet number counter 125 may increase by two or more in one processing run of the start waiting process (step S302). However, even if the value of the bet number counter 125 increases by two or more in that one processing run, only one of the first through third bet commands is sent to the presentation side MPU 92. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which a number of bet commands corresponding to the increase in the bet number counter 125 are sent to the presentation side MPU 92, it is possible to reduce the number of bet number commands sent from the main side MPU 72 to the presentation side MPU 92 in one processing run of the start waiting process (step S302). This reduces the processing load on the main side MPU 72 and the presentation side MPU 92.

This configuration sends a bet command corresponding to the current value of the bet number counter 125 to the production side MPU 92 regardless of the increment of the bet number counter 125. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the increment of the bet number counter 125 is stored and a bet command of the type corresponding to that increment is sent to the production side MPU 92, the processing configuration for sending bet commands to the production side MPU 92 can be simplified.

Returning to the explanation of the start waiting process (Figure 49), after the bet processing is executed in step S2207, it is determined whether the settlement button 51 has been operated (step S2208). If the settlement button 51 has been operated (step S2208: YES), the settlement process (processing of steps S2209 to S2215) is executed. Specifically, if the replay bet completion flag in the second calculation target area 111 is not set to "1" (step S2209: NO), the sum of the value of the bet number counter 125 and the value of the credit counter in the second calculation target area 111 is set in the payout number counter provided in the second calculation target area 111 (step S2210). The payout number counter is a flag that enables the main MPU 72 to determine the number of medals to be paid out to the medal tray 59 by driving the hopper device 53.

Then, the values of the bet number counter 125 and credit counter in the second calculation target area 111 are cleared to "0" (step S2211), and a settlement operation command is sent to the presentation-side MPU 92 (step S2212). The settlement operation command is a command that enables the presentation-side MPU 92 to recognize that the settlement button 51 has been operated and the value of the bet number counter 125 has been cleared to "0." By enabling the presentation-side MPU 92 to recognize that the settlement button 51 has been operated and the value of the bet number counter 125 has been cleared to "0," it becomes possible to execute processing to output a bet notification sound corresponding to the number of gaming media bets from the speaker 62 when medals are inserted after the settlement button 51 has been operated.

On the other hand, if the replay bet completion flag in the second calculation object area 111 is set to "1" (step S2209: YES), the number of stored virtual medals is determined by referencing the credit counter in the second calculation object area 111, and the determined number of stored virtual medals is set in the payout number counter in the second calculation object area 111 (step S2213). After that, the value of the credit counter in the second calculation object area 111 is cleared to "0" (step S2214).

If step S2212 or step S2214 has been performed, drive control processing for the hopper device 53 is executed (step S2215), and this start wait processing is terminated. In the drive control processing for the hopper device 53 (step S2215), the hopper device 53 is driven and controlled so that the number of medals corresponding to the value of the payout number counter in the second calculation target area 111 is discharged into the medal tray 59, and the value of the payout number counter is set to "0" when this drive control is terminated.

In this way, in the start waiting process (Figure 49) that is performed after any replay win is achieved, the bet number counter 125 is set to the specified number "3" without consuming any gaming media owned by the player. If the bet number counter 125 is set to "3" due to the realization of a replay win, a settlement operation is performed and the number of medals corresponding to the value of the credit counter is paid out, while the value of the bet number counter 125 is maintained. On the other hand, if the value of the bet number counter 125 is set to 1 or greater due to the insertion of medals or the operation of the credit insertion button 47, a settlement operation is performed and the number of medals corresponding to the sum of the value of the bet number counter 125 and the value of the credit counter is paid out.

Next, the bet alarm sound setting process executed by the presentation-side MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 52. The bet alarm sound setting process is repeatedly executed by the presentation-side MPU 92 at relatively short intervals (e.g., every 4 milliseconds).

The bet alarm sound setting process first determines whether a first bet command has been received from the master MPU 72 (step S2501). If a first bet command has been received (step S2501: YES), the first bet alarm sound table is read from the sound table storage area 121 in the presentation ROM 93 to the output target area 122 in the presentation RAM 94 (step S2502). The sound output flag in the presentation RAM 94 is then set to "1" (step S2503). The sound output flag is a flag that allows the presentation MPU 92 to determine whether sound output control of the speaker 62 is being performed to output one of the bet alarm sounds.

Then, the first sound setting flag 127 in the presentation-side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2504). This allows the presentation-side MPU 92 to recognize that the first bet alarm sound table has been read into the output target area 122, and prevents the first bet alarm sound from being output twice when a second bet command or a third bet command is received.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2501, it is determined whether a second bet command has been received from the master MPU 72 (step S2505). If a second bet command has been received (step S2505: YES), it is determined whether the first sound setting flag 127 in the presentation RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2506). If the first sound setting flag 127 is not set to "1" (step S2506: NO), steps S2507 to S2509 perform the same processing as steps S2502 to S2504. Specifically, the first bet notification sound table is read from the sound table storage area 121 in the presentation ROM 93 to the output target area 122 of the presentation RAM 94 (step S2507), and the sound output in progress flag in the presentation RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2508). This allows the production-side MPU 92 to recognize that sound output control of the speaker 62 is being performed to output a bet alarm sound. After that, the first sound setting flag 127 in the production-side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2509). This allows the production-side MPU 92 to recognize that the first bet alarm sound table has been read into the output target area 122, and prevents the first bet alarm sound from being output twice if a third bet command is received.

Then, the second read standby flag 123 in the presentation-side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2510). This makes it possible to start outputting the second bet alarm sound when the output of the first bet alarm sound has finished. Then, the second sound set flag 128 in the presentation-side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2511). This allows the presentation-side MPU 92 to know that the second bet alarm sound table has been read into the output target area 122, or that the second read standby flag 123 has been set to "1". By setting the second sound set flag 128 to "1" in step S2511, it is possible to prevent the second bet alarm sound from being output twice when a third bet command is received.

If the second bet command is received while the first sound setting flag 127 is set to "1" (step S2505: YES, step S2506: YES), it is determined whether the sound output flag in the presentation RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2512). If a positive determination is made in step S2512, the process proceeds to step S2510, where the second read standby flag 123 in the presentation RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2510). This makes it possible to start outputting the second bet alarm sound when the output of the first bet alarm sound has ended. Then, the second sound setting flag 128 in the presentation RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2511). This allows the presentation MPU 92 to know that the second bet alarm sound table has been read into the output target area 122, or that the second read standby flag 123 has been set to "1." By setting the second sound setting flag 128 to "1" in step S2511, it is possible to prevent the second bet alarm sound from being output twice when a third bet command is received. In this way, if the second bet command is received while the first bet alarm sound is being output, the reading of the second bet alarm sound table is put into a standby state.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2512, the second bet alarm sound table is read from the sound table storage area 121 in the presentation-side ROM 93 to the output target area 122 of the presentation-side RAM 94 (step S2513). This allows sound output control of the speaker 62 to output the second bet alarm sound to begin. Then, the sound output in progress flag in the presentation-side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2514). This allows the presentation-side MPU 92 to recognize that sound output control of the speaker 62 is being performed to output the bet alarm sound. Then, the second sound set flag 128 in the presentation-side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2515). This allows the presentation-side MPU 92 to recognize that the second bet alarm sound table has been read into the output target area 122, or that the second read standby flag 123 has been set to "1." By setting the second sound setting flag 128 to "1" in step S2515, it is possible to prevent the second bet notification sound from being output twice when a third bet command is received.

If a negative determination is made in step S2505, it is determined whether a third bet command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2516), and if a third bet notification command has been received (step S2516: YES), processing to respond to reception of the third bet command is executed (step S2517). Figure 53 is a flowchart showing the processing to respond to reception of the third bet command.

When receiving a third bet command, the process first determines whether the first sound set flag 127 in the presentation side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2601). If the first sound set flag 127 is not set to "1" (step S2601: NO), the first bet alarm sound table is read from the sound table storage area 121 in the presentation side ROM 93 to the output target area 122 in the presentation side RAM 94 (step S2602). This allows sound output control of the speaker 62 to output the first bet alarm sound to begin. Then, the sound output in progress flag in the presentation side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2603). This allows the presentation side MPU 92 to determine that sound output control of the speaker 62 to output the bet alarm sound is being performed.

Then, the second read standby flag 123 in the presentation-side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2604), the third read standby flag 124 in the presentation-side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2605), and the process for receiving the third bet command is terminated. By setting the second read standby flag 123 and the third read standby flag 124 to "1", the reading of the second bet alarm sound table and the third bet alarm sound table can be put into a standby state.

In this way, if a third bet command is received without the first and second bet commands having been received, the first bet alarm sound table is read out, and the second and third bet alarm sound tables are put into a standby state for reading out.

If a positive determination is made in step S2601, it is determined whether the second sound setting flag 128 in the presentation side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2606). If the second sound setting flag 128 is not set to "1" (step S2606: NO), it is determined whether the sound output flag in the presentation side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2607). If a negative determination is made in step S2607, the second bet alarm sound table is read from the sound table storage area 121 in the presentation side ROM 93 to the output target area 122 of the presentation side RAM 94 (step S2608). This allows sound output control of the speaker 62 to output the second bet alarm sound to begin. Then, the sound output flag in the presentation side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2609). This allows the presentation side MPU 92 to determine that sound output control of the speaker 62 to output the bet alarm sound is being performed.

Then, the third read standby flag 124 in the presentation-side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2610), and the process for receiving the third bet command is terminated. By setting the third read standby flag 124 to "1," the system is placed in a state where it is waiting for the third bet notification sound table to be read.

In this way, if a third bet command is received while a first bet command has been received but a second bet command has not, and if the output of the first bet alarm sound has finished, the second bet alarm sound table will be read out and the system will wait for the third bet alarm sound table to be read out.

If the second sound setting completed flag 128 is not set to "1" and the sound outputting flag is set to "1" (step S2606: NO, step S2607: YES), steps S2611 and S2612 execute the same processing as steps S2604 and S2605. Specifically, the second read standby flag 123 in the presentation side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2611), the third read standby flag 124 in the presentation side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2612), and the reception response processing for this third bet command is terminated. By setting the second read standby flag 123 and the third read standby flag 124 to "1", the reading of the second bet alarm sound table and the third bet alarm sound table can be put into a standby state.

In this way, if a third bet command is received while a first bet command has been received but a second bet command has not, and the first bet alarm sound is being output, the reading of the second bet alarm sound table and the third bet alarm sound table will be put into a standby state.

If a positive determination is made in step S2606, it is determined whether the sound output in progress flag in the presentation side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2613). If a negative determination is made in step S2613, the third bet alarm sound table is read from the sound table storage area 121 in the presentation side ROM 93 to the output target area 122 of the presentation side RAM 94 (step S2614). This makes it possible to start sound output control of the speaker 62 to output the third bet alarm sound. Then, the sound output in progress flag in the presentation side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2615). This allows the presentation side MPU 92 to recognize that sound output control of the speaker 62 is being performed to output the bet alarm sound.

In this way, if a third bet command is received while a second bet command is being received, and the output of the second bet alarm sound has already ended, the third bet alarm sound table will be read out.

If a positive determination is made in step S2613, the third read standby flag 124 in the presentation-side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2616), and the process for receiving the third bet command is terminated. By setting the third read standby flag 124 to "1," the system is placed in a state where the reading of the third bet alarm sound table is on standby.

In this way, if a third bet command is received while a second bet command is being received, and the second bet notification sound is being output, the reading of the third bet notification sound table will be put into a standby state.

As already explained, when a third bet command is received, unless gaming media is bet again after the settlement button 51 is operated, no other bet commands will be received before the game starts, and there is no possibility that the first bet alert sound and the second bet alert sound will be output at the same time. Therefore, when a third bet command is received, the process of setting the first sound setting flag 127 to "1" and the process of setting the second sound setting flag 128 to "1" can be omitted. This simplifies the processing configuration for outputting the bet alert sound from the speaker 62.

Returning to the explanation of the bet alarm sound setting process (Figure 52), if the processing of step S2504 has been performed, if the processing of step S2511 has been performed, if the processing of step S2515 has been performed, if a negative judgment has been made in step S2516, or if the processing of step S2517 has been performed, the bet alarm sound output processing is executed (step S2518), and the bet alarm sound setting process ends.

Next, the bet alarm sound output process executed by the production-side MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 54. The bet alarm sound output process is executed in step S2518 of the bet alarm sound setting process (Figure 52).

The bet alarm sound output process first determines whether the sound output flag in the presentation RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2701). If the sound output flag is set to "1" (step S2701: YES), it determines whether it is time to output sound data (step S2702). Sound data output timing occurs at 40 millisecond intervals when the bet alarm sound table has been read into the output target area 122 of the presentation RAM 94. If a positive determination is made in step S2702, sound data output process is executed (step S2703). In the sound data output process, sound data set in the bet alarm sound table read into the output target area 122 corresponding to the current pointer information is output to the speaker 62.

Then, the pointer information of the bet alarm sound table read into the output target area 122 is updated (step S2704), and it is determined whether sound output based on the bet alarm sound table has ended (step S2705). In step S2705, a positive determination is made if the pointer information updated in step S2704 corresponds to the final pointer in the bet alarm sound table.

If a positive determination is made in step S2705, the output target area 122 is cleared (step S2706), and it is determined whether the second read standby flag 123 in the presentation-side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2707). If a positive determination is made in step S2707, the second bet alarm sound table is read from the sound table storage area 121 in the presentation-side ROM 93 to the output target area 122 in the presentation-side RAM 94 (step S2708). This allows sound output control of the speaker 62 to output the second bet alarm sound to begin. Thereafter, the second read standby flag 123 is cleared to "0" (step S2709). This allows the presentation-side MPU 92 to know that reading of the second bet alarm sound table has finished.

If a negative determination is made in step S2707, it is determined whether the third read standby flag 124 in the presentation side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2710). If a positive determination is made in step S2710, the third bet alarm sound table is read from the sound table storage area 121 in the presentation side ROM 93 to the output target area 122 of the presentation side RAM 94 (step S2711). This allows sound output control of the speaker 62 to output the third bet alarm sound to begin. Thereafter, the third read standby flag 124 is cleared to "0" (step S2712). This allows the presentation side MPU 92 to know that reading of the third bet alarm sound table has finished.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2710, the sound output flag in the presentation-side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S2713). This allows the presentation-side MPU 92 to know that the state in which sound output control of the speaker 62 is being performed to output the bet notification sound has ended.

In this way, when the output of the bet alarm sound according to the bet alarm sound table read into the output target area 122 has ended, if the second read standby flag 123 is set to "1", the second bet alarm sound table is read and the output of the second bet alarm sound begins. Furthermore, if the second read standby flag 123 is not set to "1" and the third read standby flag 124 is set to "1", the third bet alarm sound table is read and the output of the third bet alarm sound begins. Furthermore, if the second read standby flag 123 and the third read standby flag 124 are not set to "1", the output of the bet alarm sound ends.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2701, if a negative judgment is made in step S2702, if a negative judgment is made in step S2705, if the processing of step S2709 is performed, if the processing of step S2712 is performed, or if the processing of step S2713 is performed, it is determined whether or not a settlement operation command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2714). If a settlement operation command has been received (step S2714: YES), the sound output in progress flag in the presentation RAM 94 is cleared to "0", and the output target area 122 is cleared (step S2715). This allows the output of the bet alarm sound to be terminated if a settlement operation command is received while the bet alarm sound is being output.

Then, a process for clearing the read standby flags 123 and 124 is executed (step S2716). In this clearing process, the second read standby flag 123 and the third read standby flag 124 in the presentation-side RAM 94 are cleared to "0." This prevents the second bet alarm sound table and the third bet alarm sound table from being read after the settlement operation command is received, based on a bet command received from the main-side MPU 72 before the settlement operation command is received.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2714, it is determined whether a game start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2717), and if a game start command has not been received (step S2717: NO), the bet notification sound output process is terminated.

If the processing of step S2716 is performed, or if a positive judgment is made in step S2717, the sound setting completion flags 127 and 128 are cleared (step S2718), and the bet alarm sound output processing is terminated. In the sound setting completion flags 127 and 128 clearing processing (step S2718), the first sound setting completion flag 127 and the second sound setting completion flag 128 in the presentation side RAM 94 are cleared to "0." By clearing the first sound setting completion flag 127 and the second sound setting completion flag 128 to "0" based on the reception of a settlement operation command, even if the first bet alarm sound and the second bet alarm sound were output before the reception of the settlement operation command, the first bet alarm sound and the second bet alarm sound can be output based on the reception of a bet command from the main side MPU 72 after the reception of the settlement operation command. Furthermore, by clearing the first sound setting flag 127 and the second sound setting flag 128 to "0" upon receiving a game start command, if the number of gaming media bets increases after the current game ends, it becomes possible to output a bet notification sound corresponding to the number of gaming media bets.

As described above, during the processing of the start waiting process (step S302) in which the value of the bet number counter 125 has been incremented by "1" or more, the main MPU 72 transmits to the presentation MPU 92 one bet command corresponding to the final value of the bet number counter 125 during that processing. Even when the credit insertion button 47 is operated to increase the number of gaming media bets by "2" or more at one time, the number of bet commands transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the presentation MPU 92 can be limited to one. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which multiple bet commands equal to the increase in the number of gaming media bets is transmitted when the increase in the number of gaming media is "2" or more, the processing load for transmitting bet commands from the main MPU 72 to the presentation MPU 92 can be reduced.

If the main MPU 72 is configured to send commands to the presentation MPU 92 that enable it to determine the number of gaming media bets in the previous processing run of the start waiting process (step S302) and the number of gaming media bets in the current processing run, there are six possible combinations of "number of gaming media bets in the previous processing run" → "number of gaming media bets in the current processing run": "0" → "1," "0" → "2," "0" → "3," "1" → "2," "1" → "3," and "2" → "3." Therefore, six types of bet commands must be stored in the main ROM 73. Furthermore, a memory area must be provided in the second calculation target area 111 to store the number of gaming media bets in the previous processing run of the start waiting process (step S302). In contrast, this embodiment is configured to send a bet command indicating only the increased number of gaming media bets (three possibilities: "1" to "3") for the current round of the start waiting process (step S302), which reduces the number of bet commands stored in the main ROM 73 and simplifies the configuration of the main RAM 74.

When the credit insertion button 47 is operated, the bet number may increase by "1," "2," or "3." The main MPU 72 sends only one bet command corresponding to the increased bet number to the presentation MPU 92, regardless of the number of gaming media bets before the credit insertion button 47 was operated. This eliminates the need for a dedicated bet command to have the presentation MPU 92 recognize that the credit insertion button 47 has been operated, while maintaining a configuration in which, when the credit insertion button 47 is operated and the bet number increases by "2" or more, multiple bet alarm sounds corresponding to the combination of the gaming media bet numbers before and after the increase are output in sequence. Because there is no need to pre-store in the main ROM 73 a dedicated bet command to have the presentation MPU 92 recognize that the credit insertion button 47 has been operated, the number of bet commands stored in the main ROM 73 can be reduced.

During the first wait-to-start process (step S302) executed after the end of a game in which a replay win has been achieved, the main MPU 72 sets the bet number counter 125 to "3" and sends a third bet command to the presentation MPU 92. This allows the first to third bet alert sounds to be output from the speaker 62 even when the number of gaming media bets reaches "3" based on the achievement of a replay win. Compared to a configuration in which dedicated bet commands indicating that gaming media have been bet upon the achievement of a replay win are stored in the main ROM 73, this reduces the number of bet commands stored in the main ROM 73 and prevents the main MPU 72 from having to process the bet command to send to the presentation MPU 92 with increased complexity.

The presentation-side RAM 94 is provided with a first sound set flag 127 and a second sound set flag 128, which enable the type of bet command already received from the main MPU 72 to be determined. The presentation-side MPU 92 determines the number of gaming media bets before the increase based on the state of the first sound set flag 127 and the second sound set flag 128, and determines the number of gaming media bets after the increase based on the bet command received from the main MPU 72. Therefore, even if the only information that the presentation-side MPU 92 can determine based on the bet command received from the main MPU 72 is the number of gaming media bets after the increase in the current processing round of the start waiting process (step S302), it can output a bet alert sound from the speaker 62 in a manner corresponding to the combination of the number of gaming media bets before and after the increase.

The presentation-side ROM 93 stores a number (specifically, "3") of bet alarm sound tables for outputting bet alarm sounds that notify players that the number of bets on gaming media has increased by 1, the number corresponding to the type of bet number (specifically, "1" to "3") after the increase by 1. Specifically, a first bet alarm sound table that notifies players that the number of bets has increased from "0" to "1," a second bet alarm sound table that notifies players that the number of bets has increased from "1" to "2," and a third bet alarm sound table that notifies players that the number of bets has increased from "2" to "3" are stored. Based on the bet command received from the main MPU 72, the presentation MPU 92 loads the bet sound alarm tables into the output target area 122 in the following order: first bet sound alarm table → second bet sound alarm table → third bet sound alarm table. The presentation MPU 92 controls the sound output of the speaker 62 based on these bet sound alarm tables so that the bet sound alarms are output from the speaker 62 in the following order: first bet sound → second bet sound → third bet sound. Furthermore, when the presentation MPU 92 determines that the number of gaming media bets has increased by two or more based on the bet command received from the main MPU 72, it controls the output of bet sound alarms of two or more corresponding to the combination of the number of gaming media bets before and after the increase. This reduces the capacity of the bet sound alarm tables stored in the presentation ROM 93 compared to a configuration in which bet sound alarm tables corresponding to combinations of two or more bet sounds are pre-stored in the presentation ROM 93 in addition to the first to third bet sound alarm tables.

When one or more gaming media have been bet, if the settlement button 51 is operated and the number of gaming media bets becomes "0," the main MPU 72 sends a settlement operation command to the presentation MPU 92. When the presentation MPU 92 receives the settlement operation command, it clears the first sound setting flag 127 and the second sound setting flag 128 to "0." This prevents the correspondence between the number of gaming media bets and the bet notification sound output from the speaker 62 from becoming misaligned, even if the settlement button 51 is operated.

<Configuration for displaying setting confirmation>
Next, a configuration for displaying the current setting value of the slot machine 10 on the credit display section 65 for setting confirmation will be described.

The setting confirmation display is initiated when no game is being played, no gaming media of "1" or more have been bet, the gaming state is not a bonus state, the front door 12 is open, and the setting key insertion hole 57 has been turned ON using the setting key. When no game is being played, no gaming media of "1" or more have been bet, and the gaming state is not a bonus state, the amusement hall manager can initiate the setting confirmation display by opening the front door 12 and turning ON the setting key insertion hole 57. By displaying the setting confirmation display, the current setting value of the slot machine 10 can be ascertained based on the display in the credit display section 65.

As already explained, when a replay win is achieved, the bet number counter 125 in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "3," the specified number of gaming media, during the start waiting process (FIG. 49) that is performed first after the replay win is achieved, and a state is reached in which "1" or more gaming media have been bet. Also, as already explained, if the bet number counter 125 is set to "3" based on the achievement of a replay win and the settlement button 51 is operated, medals corresponding to the number of virtual medals stored in the credit counter in the second calculation target area 111 will be paid out, but medals corresponding to the number of gaming media bets will not be paid out. For this reason, the setting confirmation display will not be displayed during the period from the achievement of a replay win to the start of the next game.

As already explained with reference to Figure 1, the credit display unit 65 has a left segment display 65a and a right segment display 65b arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. Figure 55(a) is an explanatory diagram illustrating the display modes of the left segment display 65a and the right segment display 65b during the setting confirmation display.

As shown in FIG. 55(a), when the setting confirmation display is displayed on the credit display unit 65, the letter "P" is displayed on the left segment display 65a as an identification character indicating that the setting confirmation display is being displayed, and one of the numbers "1" to "6" indicating the setting value is displayed on the right segment display 65b. In addition to the setting confirmation display, the credit display unit 65 also displays a stored memory count display to enable the user to ascertain the number of stored virtual medals and a setting value update display to update the setting value of the slot machine 10. However, when the credit display unit 65 is displaying anything other than the setting confirmation display, the identification character "P" is not displayed on the left segment display 65a. Therefore, the amusement hall manager can determine that the setting confirmation display is being displayed on the credit display unit 65 by confirming that the identification character "P" is displayed on the left segment display 65a.

As shown in FIG. 48, the second calculation target area 111 in the work area 103 for specific control is provided with a left credit display counter 129 and a right credit display counter 131. Each credit display counter 129, 131 consists of one byte, with one byte of display data corresponding to the left segment indicator 65a set in the left credit display counter 129 and one byte of display data corresponding to the right segment indicator 65b set in the right credit display counter 131.

In the setting confirmation display, setting identification display data, which is display data corresponding to the identification character "P", is set in the left credit display counter 129, and display data corresponding to the value of the setting value counter in the second calculation target area 111 is set in the right credit display counter 131. The display data set in each credit display counter 129, 131 is output to the credit display unit 65 in the display unit control process (Fig. 56) in step S210 of the timer interrupt process (Fig. 15). As a result, the identification character "P" is displayed on the left segment indicator 65a of the credit display unit 65, and a number indicating the setting value is displayed on the right segment indicator 65b.

Next, the setting confirmation process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 55 (b). The setting confirmation process is executed in step S303 of the normal process (Figure 16). The setting confirmation process is executed when no game is being played. Note that the setting confirmation process is executed using a program and data for specific control.

The setting confirmation process first determines whether the setting confirmation display flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S2801). As already explained, the setting confirmation display flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to understand that a setting confirmation display is being performed on the credit display unit 65. The setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" in step S2810, which will be described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S2801, it is determined whether the in-game flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S2802). As already explained, the in-game flag is set to "1" in the start setting process (FIG. 81) in step S307 of the normal processing (FIG. 16), and is cleared to "0" in step S313 of the normal processing (FIG. 16). If a negative determination is made in step S2802, it is determined whether the value of the bet number counter 125 in the second calculation target area 111 is "1" or greater (step S2803). If a negative determination is made in step S2803, it is determined whether or not a bonus state is in effect (step S2804). In step S2804, a positive determination is made if either the BB flag or the RB flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1," and a negative determination is made if neither the BB flag nor the RB flag is set to "1." If a game is being executed (step S2802: YES), if the number of gaming media bets is "1" or more (step S2803: YES), or if the gaming state is a bonus state (step S2804: YES), this setting confirmation process ends without starting the setting confirmation display.

If a negative determination is made in step S2804, it is determined whether the front door 12 is open (step S2805). In step S2805, a positive determination is made if the main MPU 72 receives an open detection signal from the door open detection sensor 48a provided on the front of the housing 11, and a negative determination is made if the main MPU 72 receives a closed detection signal from the door open detection sensor 48a. If a positive determination is made in step S2805, it is determined whether the setting key insertion hole 57 has been turned ON using the setting key (step S2806). If the front door 12 is closed (step S2805: NO) or if the setting key insertion hole 57 has not been turned ON (step S2806: NO), the setting confirmation display is not started and the setting confirmation process is terminated.

If a positive determination is made in step S2806, the setting confirmation display start process (steps S2807 to S2811) is executed to start the setting confirmation display on the credit display unit 65. The setting confirmation display start process is executed under the following conditions: the setting confirmation display is not being displayed on the credit display unit 65 (step S2801: NO), no game is being executed (step S2802: NO), the number of gaming media bets is not "1" or more (step S2803: NO), the bonus state is not being reached (step S2804: NO), the front door 12 is open (step S2805: YES), and the setting key insertion hole 57 has been turned ON (step S2806: YES).

The setting confirmation display start process (steps S2807 to S2811) first executes an acceptance prohibition process that places the selector 52 in an acceptance prohibition state (step S2807). As a result, medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 45 are directed from the medal ejection slot 58 to the medal tray 59. Setting identification display data corresponding to the identification character "P" is then set in the left-side credit display counter 129 in the second calculation target area 111 (step S2808). The current setting value of the slot machine 10 is then determined by referencing the setting value counter in the second calculation target area 111, and display data corresponding to this setting value is set in the right-side credit display counter 131 (step S2809). By setting the setting identification display data in the left-side credit display counter 129, the identification character "P" is displayed on the left-side segment indicator 65a of the credit display unit 65, making it possible to determine that the setting confirmation display is being performed. When display data corresponding to the set value is set in the right-side credit display counter 131, a number indicating the current set value of the slot machine 10 is displayed on the right-side segment indicator 65b of the credit display unit 65. This makes it possible to check the current set value of the slot machine 10 based on the display in the credit display unit 65.

Then, the setting confirmation display flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S2810). This allows display data for the setting confirmation display to be output to the credit display unit 65 in the display unit control process (FIG. 56) in step S210 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 15). Then, a confirmation start command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S2811), and this setting confirmation process ends. The confirmation start command is a command that causes the production side MPU 92 to recognize that the display of the setting value will begin in the credit display unit 65. When the production side MPU 92 receives the confirmation start command, it controls the display of the image display device 63 so that a display is displayed in the credit display unit 65 indicating that the setting confirmation display is being executed.

If the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" (step S2801: YES), it is determined whether the setting key insertion hole 57 is in the OFF state (step S2812). If a negative determination is made in step S2812, it is determined whether the front door 12 is closed (step S2813). If the setting key insertion hole 57 is turned OFF while the setting confirmation display is being displayed (step S2801: YES, step S2812: YES), or if the front door 12 is closed while the setting confirmation display is being displayed (step S2801: YES, step S2813: YES), the setting confirmation display termination process (processing of steps S2814 to S2817) is executed.

The setting confirmation display termination process first clears the setting confirmation display flag in the second calculation target area 111 to "0" (step S2814), and then executes a clear process for the credit display counters 129, 131 (step S2815). In this clear process, the left credit display counter 129 and the right credit display counter 131 in the second calculation target area 111 are cleared to "0". This ends the setting confirmation display that was being displayed in the credit display unit 65. The credit display unit 65 then executes the display unit control process (FIG. 56) described below, thereby displaying the number of gaming media stored.

Then, a confirmation end command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S2816). The confirmation end command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that the display of the setting value in the credit display unit 65 has ended. When the production side MPU 92 receives the confirmation end command, it controls the display of the image display device 63 so that the display in the credit display unit 65 notifying that the setting confirmation display is being executed ends. Then, it executes an acceptance permission process that sets the selector 52 to an acceptance permission state (step S2817), and ends this setting confirmation process. By executing the acceptance permission process, medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 45 will be guided to the hopper device 53.

In this way, the setting confirmation display start process (steps S2807 to S2811) is executed under the conditions that a game is not being executed and the number of gaming media bets is not equal to or greater than "1." Furthermore, when the setting confirmation display starts, the selector 52 is set to a non-acceptance state, and, as already explained, operation of the credit insertion button 47 is disabled while the setting confirmation display is being executed. Therefore, the number of gaming media bets does not increase while the setting confirmation display is being executed, and a game does not start while the setting confirmation display is being executed because the number of gaming media bets has not reached the specified number. As a result, if the setting key insertion hole 57 is turned OFF or the front door 12 is closed while the setting confirmation display is being executed, the acceptance process (step S2817) can be executed without performing processes to confirm that a game is not being executed and to confirm that the value of the bet number counter 125 is not the maximum value (specifically, "3"). This simplifies the processing configuration for the setting confirmation display termination process (steps S2814 to S2817).

The setting confirmation display ends when the front door 12 is closed. Therefore, if the amusement hall manager forgets to switch the setting key insertion hole 57 to the OFF state while the setting confirmation display is on and closes the front door 12, the setting confirmation display on the credit display unit 65 can be prevented from continuing.

When a game is being played, when the number of gaming media bets is "1" or more, or when the gaming state is bonus state, the setting confirmation display will not be initiated even if the front door 12 is open and the setting key insertion hole 57 is turned ON. Therefore, if the amusement hall manager closes the front door 12 while the setting key insertion hole 57 is turned ON, even if someone attempts to fraudulently check the setting values of the slot machine 10 and opens the front door 12 while a game is being played, when the number of gaming media bets is "1" or more, or when the gaming state is bonus state, the opening of the front door 12 can be prevented from initiating the setting confirmation display on the credit display unit 65.

In this embodiment, the main MPU 72 monitors the current state of the setting key insertion hole 57, but does not monitor whether the setting key insertion hole 57 has switched from an OFF state to an ON state, or whether the setting key insertion hole 57 has switched from an ON state to an OFF state. If the main MPU 72 were configured to monitor the state of the setting key insertion hole 57, it would be necessary to provide a process for storing the state of the setting key insertion hole 57 in the previous processing run of the setting confirmation process (Figure 55(b)), and it would be necessary to provide a storage area in the main RAM 74 for storing the state of the setting key insertion hole 57 in the previous processing run. In contrast, by monitoring only the current state of the setting key insertion hole 57, the processing load on the main MPU 72 is reduced and the configuration of the main RAM 74 is simplified.

Next, the display unit control process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 56. The display unit control process is executed in step S210 of the timer interrupt process (Figure 15). Note that the display unit control process is executed using a specific control program and specific control data.

The display unit control process first determines whether the blinking display flag 137 provided in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S2901). The blinking display flag 137 is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to determine when the credit display unit 65 and the dual-purpose display unit 66 should display a blinking display. The blinking display flag 137 is set to "1" in step S4110 of the blinking display start setting process (FIG. 72) described below. The blinking display in the credit display unit 65 and the dual-purpose display unit 66 alternates between a lighting period in which the credit display unit 65 and the dual-purpose display unit 66 are lit for 0.5 seconds and a lighting period in which the credit display unit 65 and the dual-purpose display unit 66 are turned off for 0.5 seconds.

If the blinking display flag 137 is set to "1" (step S2901: YES), it is determined whether it is time to output display data to the credit display unit 65 and the dual-purpose display unit 66 (step S2902). In step S2902, if the lighting period is 0.5 seconds, a positive determination is made, and if the lighting period is 0.5 seconds, a negative determination is made. If a negative determination is made in step S2902, this display unit control process is terminated without outputting display data to the credit display unit 65 and the dual-purpose display unit 66. As a result, the credit display unit 65 and the dual-purpose display unit 66 are turned off.

If a negative determination is made in step S2901 or a positive determination is made in step S2902, it is determined whether the setting confirmation display flag in the second calculation target area 111 or the setting value updating flag provided in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S2903). The setting value updating flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to know that a setting value update display is being performed in the credit display unit 65. The setting value updating flag is set to "1" in step S4001 of the setting value update process (FIG. 71) described below.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2903, a display data setting process for displaying the number of stored memories is executed (step S2904). In this display data setting process, the number of stored memories of virtual medals (an integer between "0" and "50") is determined by referencing the credit counter in the second calculation target area 111. Thereafter, if the determined number of stored memories is two digits in decimal notation (specifically, "11"), display data corresponding to the tens digit in the decimal notation of the number of stored memories (specifically, the digit "1") is set in the counter 129 for the left credit display unit, and display data corresponding to the ones digit in the decimal notation of the number of stored memories (specifically, the digit "1") is set in the counter for the right credit display unit. As a result, the left segment indicator 65a of the credit display unit 65 displays the tens digit of the decimal notation of the stored memory number, and the right segment indicator 65b displays the ones digit of the decimal notation of the stored memory number. Furthermore, if the grasped stored memory number is a single digit in decimal notation (specifically, "1," "2," or "5"), display data of all "0"s (display data for turning off the light) is set in the left credit display counter 129, and display data corresponding to the ones digit of the decimal notation of the stored memory number (specifically, the numbers "1," "2," or "5") is set in the right credit display counter. As a result, the left segment indicator 65a of the credit display unit 65 is turned off, and the right segment indicator 65b displays the ones digit of the decimal notation of the stored memory number. In this way, when the setting confirmation display and setting value update display are not displayed, the credit display unit 65 displays the number of stored virtual medals, allowing the player to check the number of stored virtual medals.

If a positive determination is made in step S2903, or if the processing of step S2904 is performed, the display data set in each credit display counter 129, 131 is output to the credit display unit 65 (step S2905). As a result, a display corresponding to the display data set in the left credit display counter 129 is displayed on the left segment display 65a of the credit display unit 65, and a display corresponding to the display data set in the right credit display counter 131 is displayed on the right segment display 65b of the credit display unit 65.

When the setting confirmation display and setting value update display are not being displayed, the credit display unit 65 displays a display that allows the user to check the number of virtual medals stored. Furthermore, when the setting value is being confirmed, a setting confirmation display is displayed, and when the setting value is being updated, a setting value update display is displayed.

After processing step S2905, it is determined whether the stop order corresponding display in progress flag 138 provided in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S2906). The stop order corresponding display in progress flag 138 is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to know that stop order corresponding display is being performed on the dual-purpose display unit 66. The stop order corresponding display in progress flag 138 is set to "1" in step S3417 of the stop order corresponding display start processing (FIG. 62) described below. In addition, the stop order corresponding display in progress flag 138 is cleared to "0" in step S3021 of the reel control processing (FIG. 58) described below. If a positive determination is made in step S2906, it is determined whether the display resume flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S2907). As already explained, the display resume flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to know that the stop order display that was being executed by the dual-purpose display unit 66 before the power was cut off should be resumed. The display resume flag is set to "1" in step S1812 if it is determined in step S1811 of the power recovery process (FIG. 40) that any of the first to third stop order flags in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1."

If a negative determination is made in step S2906, it is determined whether the award number display flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S2908). The award number display flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to determine whether the award number display, which displays the number of awards of gaming media corresponding to a small winning combination on the dual-purpose display unit 66 when a small winning combination is achieved, is being executed. The award number display flag is set to "1" in step S4903 of the media awarding process (FIG. 83) described below. In addition, the award number display flag is cleared to "0" in step S4702 of the start-up setting process (FIG. 81) described below.

If a negative determination is made in step S2908, it is determined whether the setting value update in progress flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S2909). As will be described in detail later, in the setting value update process (FIG. 71) in step S109 of the main process (FIG. 14), while a setting value update display is being displayed in the credit display unit 65, a suggested action setting display is displayed in the dual-purpose display unit 66 to set information regarding suggested actions that suggest the setting value of the slot machine 10. If a negative determination is made in steps S2906, S2908, and S2909, i.e., when the dual-purpose display unit 66 is not displaying any of the stop order corresponding display, the number of awards display, or the suggested action setting display, the display unit control process is terminated without outputting display data to the dual-purpose display unit 66. This causes the dual-purpose display unit 66 to turn off. Furthermore, even if the stop order corresponding display in progress flag 138 in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S2906: YES), if the display resume flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S2907: YES), this means that processing to start the stop order corresponding display after power is restored (the stop order corresponding display start processing (FIG. 62) described below) has not been performed, and therefore the display unit control processing is terminated without outputting display data to the dual-purpose display unit 66. As a result, the dual-purpose display unit 66 is turned off.

If a negative determination is made in step S2907, a positive determination is made in step S2908, or a positive determination is made in step S2909, the display data set in the left-side dual-purpose display counter 135 and the right-side dual-purpose display counter 136 provided in the second calculation target area 111 is output to the dual-purpose display unit 66 (step S2910), and the display unit control process ends. Each dual-purpose display counter 135, 136 consists of one byte. One byte of display data corresponding to the left segment display 66a in the dual-purpose display unit 66 is set in the left-side dual-purpose display counter 135, and one byte of display data corresponding to the right segment display 66b in the dual-purpose display unit 66 is set in the right-side dual-purpose display counter 136. By outputting the display data set in each dual-purpose display counter 135, 136 to the dual-purpose display unit 66, a display corresponding to the display data is displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66.

The dual-purpose display unit 66 displays the number of gaming media awarded when a small winning combination is achieved, and also displays the stop order corresponding to the notified content when the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified on the image display device 63. Furthermore, when a situation arises in which a suggested action suggesting a setting value for the slot machine 10 is to be set during the setting value update process (FIG. 71) executed in step S109 of the main process (FIG. 14), the dual-purpose display unit 66 displays a suggested action setting display for setting the suggested action. Details of the suggested action will be given later.

Next, we will explain how the setting confirmation display is displayed, with reference to the time chart in Figure 57. Figure 57(a) shows the period during which the setting confirmation display is displayed on the credit display unit 65, Figure 57(b) shows the state of the front door 12, Figure 57(c) shows the period during which the setting key insertion hole 57 is turned ON using the setting key, Figure 57(d) shows the period during which the game is being played, Figure 57(e) shows the period during which the value of the bet number counter 125 is "1" or greater, and Figure 57(f) shows the duration of the bonus state.

At time t1, as shown in FIG. 57(d), a game is not being executed. Also, as shown in FIG. 57(e), the value of the bet number counter 125 is not equal to or greater than "1." Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 57(f), the gaming state is not a bonus state. At time t1, as shown in FIG. 57(b), the front door 12 opens. Then, at time t2, the setting key insertion hole 57 is turned ON as shown in FIG. 57(c), causing the credit display unit 65 to display a setting confirmation as shown in FIG. 57(a). This allows the current setting value of the slot machine 10 to be confirmed based on the display in the credit display unit 65. Then, at time t3, the setting key insertion hole 57 is switched OFF as shown in FIG. 57(c), causing the setting confirmation display in the credit display unit 65 to end as shown in FIG. 57(a).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 57(a), if the front door 12 is closed at timing t4 while the setting confirmation display is being displayed on the credit display unit 65 as shown in Figure 57(b), the setting confirmation display will end as shown in Figure 57(a) even if the setting key insertion hole 57 continues to be turned ON as shown in Figure 57(c).

At timing t5 when a game is being played as shown in Figure 57(d), even if the front door 12 is opened as shown in Figure 57(b) and the setting key insertion hole 57 is turned ON at timing t6 as shown in Figure 57(c), the setting confirmation display will not be initiated in the credit display unit 65 as shown in Figure 57(a). In this way, the setting confirmation display will not be initiated while a game is being played.

As shown in Figure 57(e), at timing t7 when the value of the bet number counter 125 in the second calculation target area 111 is "1" or greater, even if the front door 12 is opened as shown in Figure 57(b) and the setting key insertion hole 57 is turned ON at timing t8 as shown in Figure 57(c), the setting confirmation display will not be initiated in the credit display unit 65 as shown in Figure 57(a). In this way, the setting confirmation display will not be initiated when one or more gaming media have been bet.

As shown in Figure 57(f), at timing t9 when the gaming state is one of the bonus states, even if the front door 12 is opened as shown in Figure 57(b) and the setting key insertion hole 57 is turned ON at timing t10 as shown in Figure 57(c), the setting confirmation display will not be initiated in the credit display unit 65 as shown in Figure 57(a). In this way, the setting confirmation display will not be initiated in the bonus state.

As described above, the setting confirmation display start process (setting confirmation process (steps S2807 to S2811 in Figure 55 (b)) is executed under the conditions that a game is not being executed and the number of gaming media bets is not "1" or greater. In addition, when the setting confirmation display starts, the selector 52 is placed in an acceptance-prohibited state, and as already explained, operation of the credit insertion button 47 is disabled while the setting confirmation display is being executed. For this reason, the number of gaming media bets will not increase while the setting confirmation display is being executed, and a game will not start while the setting confirmation display is being executed because the number of gaming media bets has not reached the specified number. As a result, if the setting key insertion hole 57 is turned OFF or the front door 12 is closed while the setting confirmation display is being displayed, the acceptance permission process (step S2817) can be executed without performing the process to confirm that a game is not being executed or the process to confirm that the value of the bet number counter 125 is not at its maximum value (specifically, "3"). This simplifies the processing configuration for the setting confirmation display termination process (steps S2814 to S2817 of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 55(b))), and reduces the amount of data in the program used to execute the setting confirmation display termination process.

By preventing the start of a game while the setting confirmation display is being displayed, it is possible to prevent a player from starting a game if the gaming parlor manager leaves the slot machine 10 without properly closing the front door 12 while the setting confirmation display is being displayed, for example, to deal with a problem with another gaming machine.

The setting confirmation display ends when the front door 12 is closed. Therefore, if the amusement hall manager forgets to switch the setting key insertion hole 57 to the OFF state while the setting confirmation display is on and closes the front door 12, the setting confirmation display on the credit display unit 65 can be prevented from continuing.

When a game is being played, when the number of gaming media bets is "1" or more, or when the gaming state is bonus state, the setting confirmation display will not be initiated even if the front door 12 is open and the setting key insertion hole 57 is turned ON. Therefore, if the amusement hall manager closes the front door 12 while the setting key insertion hole 57 is turned ON, even if someone attempts to fraudulently check the setting values of the slot machine 10 and opens the front door 12 while a game is being played, when the number of gaming media bets is "1" or more, or when the gaming state is bonus state, the opening of the front door 12 can be prevented from initiating the setting confirmation display on the credit display unit 65.

The setting confirmation display start process (steps S2807 to S2811) is executed only when a game is not being played, and is not executed when a game is being played. This reduces the processing load on the main MPU 72 while a game is being played, compared to a configuration in which the setting confirmation display start process can be executed even when a game is being played.

When the gaming state is in the bonus state, if no game is being played and the number of gaming media bets is less than "1," the setting confirmation display will not be initiated even if the front door 12 is opened and the setting key insertion hole 57 is turned ON. This prevents the setting confirmation process from being executed during the bonus state, thereby preventing the bonus state, which is advantageous to the player, from being interrupted.

The main MPU 72 monitors only the current state of the setting key insertion hole 57. If the configuration were to monitor the change in state of the setting key insertion hole 57, it would be necessary to provide a process for storing the state of the setting key insertion hole 57 in the previous processing run of the setting confirmation process (Figure 55 (b)), and it would be necessary to provide a storage area in the main RAM 74 for storing the state of the setting key insertion hole 57 in the previous processing run. In contrast, by monitoring only the current state of the setting key insertion hole 57, the processing load on the main MPU 72 is reduced and the configuration of the main RAM 74 is simplified.

Next, before explaining the configuration for notifying the stop order on the image display device 63 and the configuration for displaying the stop order on the dual-purpose display unit 66, we will explain the rotation control of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In each game, when the start lever 41 is operated to start the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, an acceleration period occurs during which the rotation speed of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R accelerates to a predetermined rotation speed, followed by a constant rotation period during which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate at the predetermined constant rotation speed. After that, when a valid operation of a stop button 42-44 is performed, the reel 32L, 32M, or 32R corresponding to the operated stop button 42-44 is controlled to stop.

The left reel 32L, center reel 32M, and right reel 32R are provided with motor drivers (not shown) that drive these reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. A motor driver is provided in one-to-one correspondence with each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The motor drivers drive the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R based on excitation data received from the main MPU 72. As shown in FIG. 48, the second calculation target area 111 is provided with a left excitation data area 132, a center excitation data area 133, and a right excitation data area 134 for setting excitation data to be output to the motor drivers corresponding to the left reel 32L, center reel 32M, and right reel 32R.

The main ROM 73 stores an acceleration control table containing information for switching excitation data during acceleration periods, a constant speed rotation table containing information for switching excitation data during constant speed rotation periods, and a stop table containing information for excitation data output to stop reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The main MPU 72 reads these tables into the second calculation target area 111 for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and switches the excitation data output to the motor drivers for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R according to the read tables. Switching the excitation data according to the acceleration control table results in an acceleration period for reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and switching the excitation data according to the constant speed rotation table results in a constant speed rotation period for reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition, the excitation data is switched according to the stop table, resulting in a stop control period for reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

The left reel 32L, center reel 32M, and right reel 32R are each equipped with a reel index sensor (not shown) that detects when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have completed one rotation. A reel index sensor is provided in one-to-one correspondence with each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The reel index sensors are electrically connected to the main MPU 72, and the detection signal received by the main MPU 72 from the reel index sensor rises from a low state to a high state each time the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R complete one rotation. While the main MPU 72 is controlling the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, it monitors whether the cycle at which the detection signal received from the reel index sensor rises is normal. If the cycle at which the detection signal received from the reel index sensor rises deviates from the normal cycle, it determines that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have lost synchronization.

Next, the reel control processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 58. The reel control processing is executed in step S309 of the normal processing (Figure 16). Note that the reel control processing is executed using a program and data for specific control.

The reel control process first executes a spin start process to initiate the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R (step S3001). The spin start process checks whether a predetermined wait time (e.g., 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the start of rotation of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the previous game. If the wait time has not elapsed, the process waits until the wait time has elapsed. If the wait time has elapsed, the wait time for the next game is reset. Next, an acceleration control table for controlling the acceleration of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is read from the main ROM 73 into the second calculation target area 111 in the specific control work area 103. Next, the acceleration flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1," and the control required flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1." The acceleration flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to determine whether the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are currently accelerating. The control required flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to identify the need to perform drive control on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The control required flag is cleared to "0" in step S3214 of the stepping motor control process (FIG. 60), described below, when stop control based on the stop table has been completed for all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Then, it is determined whether the acceleration period for reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has ended (step S3002). In step S3002, a positive determination is made if the value of the acceleration flag in the second calculation target area 111 is "0." As described above, the acceleration flag is set to "1" in the spin start process (step S3001). Furthermore, when the acceleration period has ended, the acceleration flag is cleared to "0" in the acceleration setting process in step S3302 of the motor control process (Figure 61), which will be described later.

If the acceleration period has not ended (step S3002: NO), the determination process of step S3002 is repeated until the acceleration period ends. If the acceleration period has ended (step S3002: YES), the acceleration end flag provided in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S3003). The acceleration end flag is a flag that enables the main MPU 72 to determine that the acceleration of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has ended and that the stop order corresponding display start process (step S3005) described below has not been executed. The acceleration end flag is cleared to "0" when the stop order corresponding display start process (step S3005) is executed while the acceleration end flag is set to "1."

Then, an operation validation notification process is executed (step S3004). In the operation validation notification process, a lamp (not shown) corresponding to each of the stop buttons 42-44 is illuminated to notify the player that operation of the stop buttons 42-44 has been validated. The lamps corresponding to the stop buttons 42-44 are extinguished during the period in which operation of the stop buttons 42-44 is disabled, including the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Operation of the stop buttons 42-44 is validated when the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R ends and the process from step S3005 onward is executed. By illuminating the lamps corresponding to the stop buttons 42-44 in the operation validation notification process (step S3004), the player can be notified that operation of the stop buttons 42-44 has been validated. Each lamp is extinguished when the corresponding stop button 42-44 is operated validly. Of the three lamps, the lamps corresponding to the stop buttons 42-44 for which a valid stop operation has been performed are turned off, while the lamps corresponding to the stop buttons 42-44 for which a valid stop operation has not yet been performed remain lit. Therefore, the player can identify the stop buttons 42-44 for which a valid stop operation has not yet been performed by checking the lamp status.

After that, a stop order corresponding display start process is executed to start a stop order corresponding display on the dual-purpose display unit 66 (step S3005). After that, a step-out response process is executed to stop and control reels 32L, 32M, and 32R so that acceleration can be resumed if step-out occurs on reels 32L, 32M, and 32R (step S3006). Details of the stop order corresponding display start process (step S3005) and the step-out response process (step S3006) will be described later.

Then, it is determined whether all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped (step S3007). If one or more reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spinning (step S3007: NO), it is determined whether any of the stop buttons 42-44 have been operated (step S3008). Because the determination process of step S3008 is not executed until the acceleration period for reels 32L, 32M, and 32R ends, even if a stop button 42-44 is operated during the acceleration period, the corresponding reel 32L, 32M, and 32R will not stop based on that operation. As described above, the operation of the stop buttons 42-44 becomes effective when the acceleration period ends.

If any of the stop buttons 42-44 has been operated (step S3008: YES), it is determined whether the operation of that stop button 42-44 is a valid operation (step S3009). Specifically, it is determined to be a valid operation if the operation of the stop button 42-44 detected in step S3008 was performed on the spinning reels 32L, 32M, 32R and triggers the issuance of a stop command.

If it is determined in step S3009 that the operation of the stop buttons 42-44 is valid, steps S3010 through S3015 are performed for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the validly operated stop buttons 42-44. Specifically, first, an operation invalidation notification process is executed (step S3010). In the operation invalidation notification process, of the three lamps (not shown) corresponding to the stop buttons 42-44 for which it is determined in step S3009 that a valid operation has been performed, only the lamp corresponding to the stop button 42-44 is switched to an extinguished state. This notifies the player that the operation of the stop buttons 42-44 for which it is determined in step S3009 that a valid operation has been performed has been invalidated. By executing the operation invalidation notification process (step S3010), the lamps corresponding to the stop buttons 42-44 for which a valid stop operation has already been performed are switched to an extinguished state, while the lamps corresponding to the stop buttons 42-44 for which a valid stop operation has not yet been performed remain lit. Based on the status of the lamps, the player can determine which stop buttons 42-44 have not yet been activated to stop the game.

Then, the braking target flag provided in the second calculation target area 111 of the specific control work area 103 is set to "1" (step S3011). The braking target flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to identify that a valid operation has been detected on the stop buttons 42-44 corresponding to the spinning reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and is provided in one-to-one correspondence with each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Then, a stop command is set as a command to be sent to the production-side MPU 92 (step S3012). The stop command command is a command sent to the production-side MPU 92 to identify the type of stop button 42-44 for which a valid operation has been detected.

Then, the symbol number of the reaching symbol that has reached the base position at the time the stop buttons 42-44 are operated is determined (step S3013), and a slip count determination process is executed to determine the number of slips based on the stop information stored in the second calculation target area 111 (step S3014). The stop information is read from the main ROM 73 to the second calculation target area 111 in the stop information first setting process (step S409) in the role lottery process (Figure 17), and is changed as appropriate depending on the stop state of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the stop information second setting process (step S3018) described below. In the slip count determination process, the slip count is specified as one of values "0" to "4." Then, based on the number of slips identified in the slip count determination process (step S3014) and the reached pattern number, the pattern number of the target pattern to actually stop at the base position is determined, and that pattern number data is set in the second calculation target area 111 (step S3015).

If a negative determination is made in step S3008, if a negative determination is made in step S3009, or if step S3015 is performed, it is determined whether the stop information update flag provided in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S3016). The stop information update flag is a flag that enables the main MPU 72 to determine whether the slide table stored in the main RAM 74 should be updated in the stop information first setting process (step S409 of the role lottery process (FIG. 17)) or the previous stop information second setting process (step S3018), depending on the symbol that stops at the base position due to the current stop control of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The stop information update flag is set to "1" in step S3308 of the motor control process (FIG. 61), which will be described later.

If the stop information update flag is not set to "1" (step S3016: NO), the process returns to step S3005. On the other hand, if the stop information update flag is set to "1" (step S3016: YES), the stop information update flag is cleared to "0" (step S3017), the stop information second setting process is executed (step S3018), and the process returns to step S3005. In the stop information second setting process, the slide table stored in the main RAM 74 in the stop information first setting process (step S409 of the role lottery process (Figure 17)) or the previous stop information second setting process (step S3018) is updated according to the symbol that stops at the base position due to the current stop control of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. As a result, in the next slip count determination process (step S3014), it becomes possible to calculate the slip count based on the set winning data, the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the slip table corresponding to the stop symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. Note that the configuration for calculating the slip count is not limited to a configuration that uses a slip table, and it may also be a configuration in which slip count data corresponding to each lottery result and the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is derived while reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spinning.

If step S3007 determines that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, a win determination process is executed (step S3019). In the win determination process, the type of symbol stopped at the base position of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is determined. If the combination of symbols displayed on the main line ML on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponds to a winning combination in the current combination lottery process, a winning combination is established, and a win response process is executed. In the win response process, a win flag setting process is executed to set a win flag corresponding to the currently established win. The second calculation target area 111 in the specific control work area 103 contains a win flag that corresponds one-to-one with each win, enabling the type of currently established win to be determined. In the win flag setting process, the win flag corresponding to the currently established win is set to "1." This allows the main MPU 72 to grasp the currently established winning combination. In the winning process, if the currently established winning combination is a small winning combination, the number of gaming media to be awarded is set in a winning combination counter provided in the second calculation target area 111. The winning combination counter is a counter that allows the main MPU 72 to grasp the number of gaming media to be awarded to the player. In the winning process, if the currently established winning combination is a replay winning combination, the replay occurrence flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1." As already explained, the replay occurrence flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to grasp that a gaming media bet should be automatically placed without reducing the number of gaming media owned by the player in the next start waiting process (step S302 of the normal processing (FIG. 16)). The replay occurrence flag is cleared to "0" after a gaming media bet is automatically placed in the next start waiting process (step S302 of the normal processing (FIG. 16)).

Then, a winning result command is set as a target for transmission to the production-side MPU 92 (step S3020). The winning result command contains data indicating whether or not a win has been achieved this time, and if a win has been achieved, contains data indicating the type of win. Then, the stop order corresponding display termination process is executed (step S3021), and the reel control process is terminated. In the stop order corresponding display termination process, the stop order corresponding display in progress flag 138, left-side dual-purpose display counter 135, and right-side dual-purpose display counter 136 in the second calculation target area 111 are cleared to "0," thereby terminating the stop order corresponding display in the dual-purpose display section 66. Details of the stop order corresponding display will be described later.

<Configuration for performing stop order notification and stop order corresponding display>
Next, a configuration for notifying the stop order on the image display device 63 and a configuration for displaying the stop order on the multi-purpose display unit 66 will be described.

First, we will explain the configuration for performing stop order notification on the image display device 63. As already explained, the stop order notification on the image display device 63, which notifies the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, can be performed when the gaming zone is the advantageous zone SC2, but is not performed when the gaming zone is the normal zone SC1. As already explained, in order to perform stop order notification, the main MPU 72 executes notification control processing in step S413 of the role lottery processing (Figure 17).

Here, the notification control process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 59. Note that the notification control process is executed using a specific control program and specific control data.

In the notification control process, it is first determined whether the advantageous zone flag of the second calculation target area 111 in the work area 103 for specific control is set to "1" (step S3101). If the advantageous zone flag is set to "1" (step S3101: YES), it is determined whether winning data corresponding to the first stop order notification has been set in the second calculation target area 111 in the role lottery process (Figure 17) (step S3102). The winning data corresponding to the first stop order notification is winning data with index value IV = 1 to 3 in the normal mode lottery table (Figure 18), first RT mode lottery table (Figure 20), or second RT mode lottery table (Figure 22). If a positive determination is made in step S3102, it is determined whether the game state is in the ready state ST5 or the ART state ST6 (step S3103).

If a positive determination is made in step S3103, processing is executed to notify the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that will result in the first bell winning and to display the corresponding stop order (processing in steps S3104 and S3105). Specifically, a bell winning command is first sent to the presentation-side MPU 92 (step S3104). This bell winning command contains information that enables the presentation-side MPU 92 to identify the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that will result in the first bell winning in the current game.

Then, the first stop order flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S3105), and the notification control process is terminated. As already explained, the first stop order flag is a flag that enables the main MPU 72 to understand that a stop order corresponding display that allows the first bell to be won should be executed on the dual-purpose display unit 66. By setting the first stop order flag to "1", processing is executed to start a stop order corresponding display that allows the first bell to be won in the stop order corresponding display start process (Figure 62) described below.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3102, it is determined whether winning data corresponding to the second stop order notification has been set in the role lottery process (Figure 17) (step S3106). The winning data corresponding to the second stop order notification is winning data with index values IV = 10 to 15 in the normal mode lottery table (Figure 18) and the first RT mode lottery table (Figure 20). If a positive judgment is made in step S3106, provided that the game state is in the ready state ST5 or the ART state ST6 (step S3107: YES), processing is executed to notify the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and display the corresponding stop order, which allows for the establishment of a first RT replay win or a second RT replay win (processing in steps S3108 to S3109). Specifically, a promotion replay command is first sent to the production-side MPU 92 (step S3108). The promotion replay command contains information that enables the production side MPU 92 to determine the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that will result in a first RT replay win or a second RT replay win in the current game.

Then, the second stop order flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S3109), and this notification control process is terminated. As already explained, the second stop order flag is a flag that enables the main MPU 72 to understand that a stop order corresponding display that allows a first RT replay win or a second RT replay win should be executed on the dual-purpose display unit 66. By setting the second stop order flag to "1", processing is executed in the stop order corresponding display start process (FIG. 62) described below to start a stop order corresponding display that allows a first RT replay win or a second RT replay win.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3106, it is determined whether winning data corresponding to the third stop order notification has been set in the role lottery process (Figure 17) (step S3110). The winning data corresponding to the third stop order notification is any of the winning data with index values IV = 16 to 21 in the first RT mode lottery table (Figure 20) and index values IV = 10 to 15 in the second RT mode lottery table (Figure 22). If a positive judgment is made in step S3110, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the ART state ST6 (step S3111). If a negative judgment is made in step S3111, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the ready state ST5 (step S3112), and if it is in the ready state ST5 (step S3112: YES), it is determined whether winning data for the first fall replay role has been set in the second calculation target area 111.

If a positive determination is made in step S3111 or if a positive determination is made in step S3113, processing is executed (processing in steps S3114 to S3115) to notify the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and display the corresponding stop order, which will prevent a fall replay win from occurring. Specifically, a fall replay avoidance command is first sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S3114). This fall replay avoidance command contains information that enables the production side MPU 92 to identify the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which will prevent a first fall replay win or a second fall replay win from occurring in the current game.

Then, the third stop order flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S3115), and this notification control process is terminated. As already explained, the third stop order flag is a flag that enables the main MPU 72 to understand that a stop order corresponding display that can prevent the first fall replay win or the second fall replay win should be executed on the dual-purpose display unit 66. By setting the third stop order flag to "1", processing is executed in the stop order corresponding display start process (Figure 62) described below to start a stop order corresponding display that can prevent the first fall replay win or the second fall replay win.

In this way, when the winning data for any of the index values IV = 16 to 21 in the lottery table for the first RT mode (Figure 20) is set in the lottery process for the winning combination (Figure 17) while in the advantageous zone SC2 and ART state ST6, or when the winning data for any of the index values IV = 10 to 15 in the lottery table for the second RT mode (Figure 22) is set, processing is executed to notify the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that will prevent the first fall replay win or the second fall replay win. Furthermore, when the winning data for any of the index values IV = 16 to 21 in the lottery table for the first RT mode (Figure 20) is set in the lottery process for the winning combination (Figure 17) while in the advantageous zone SC2 and preparation state ST5, processing is executed to notify the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that will prevent the first fall replay win. On the other hand, even if a winning number with index values IV = 10 to 15 in the second RT mode lottery table (Figure 22) is set in the role lottery process (Figure 17) when in the advantageous zone SC2 and the ready state ST5, the stopping sequence of reels 32L, 32M, 32R that would prevent the second fall replay win from being achieved is not announced. Because the condition for transitioning from the ready state ST5 to the ART state ST6 is the achievement of a second RT replay win, if a transition to the ready state ST5 occurs in the second RT mode, the second fall replay win is not prevented from being achieved, so it is possible to fall back to the first RT mode and provide an opportunity for the second RT replay win to be achieved.

When the production-side MPU 92 receives a bell winning command, a promotion replay command, or a fall replay avoidance command from the main-side MPU 72, it reads into the production-side RAM 94 the display table for notifying the stop order that corresponds to the received command. Then, based on the read display table for notifying the stop order, it controls the display of the image display device 63 so that the stop order is notified.

Next, we will explain the configuration of the work area 103 for specific control to deal with step-out of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In this slot machine 10, if a loss of synchronism occurs on a rotating reel 32L, 32M, or 32R, stop control is performed on all rotating reels 32L, 32M, or 32R, including the reel 32L, 32M, or 32R on which the loss of synchronism occurred. If a loss of synchronism occurs on any of the reels 32L, 32M, or 32R, including the reel 32L, 32M, or 32R on which the stop command was issued, during the period from when a stop command is issued for any of the reels 32L, 32M, or 32R to when stop control is initiated, stop control is initiated for all rotating reels 32L, 32M, or 32R, including the reels 32L, 32M, or 32R on which a stop command has been issued but stop control has not been initiated. Thereafter, acceleration control is performed on the reels 32L, 32M, or 32R that were spinning when the loss of synchronism occurred, and constant speed rotation control is performed after the acceleration control is completed.

If a step-out occurs during the acceleration period of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, operation of stop buttons 42-44 is enabled when the acceleration period of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R ends and the constant speed rotation period begins after the step-out occurs. In a game in which winning data that is the subject of stop order display in the role lottery process (Figure 17) is set in the second calculation target area 111, if a step-out occurs during the acceleration period of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, stop order display begins on the dual-purpose display unit 66 when the acceleration period of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R ends and the constant speed rotation period begins after the step-out occurs.

If a step-out occurs during the constant speed rotation period of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, steps S3008 to S3018 of the reel control process (Figure 58) will not be executed until the acceleration period of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R ends and the constant speed rotation period begins. This disables operation of stop buttons 42-44. Then, after a step-out occurs, operation of stop buttons 42-44 corresponding to reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that were spinning when the step-out occurred is enabled when the acceleration period ends and the constant speed rotation period begins.

If power is cut off while all or some of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spinning, and power is restored without the setting key insertion hole 57 being turned on, restoring the processing state to that before the power was cut off, rotation control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that were spinning before the power was cut off is resumed without the need to perform a game start operation (operation of the start lever 41). This prevents unnecessary consumption of gaming media when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R resumes. If a step-out occurs for one or more reels 32L, 32M, and 32R after the spin control is resumed, stop control, acceleration control, and constant speed rotation control are performed for all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that were spinning when the step-out occurred.

On the other hand, if power is cut off while all or some of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spinning, and the setting key insertion hole 57 is turned ON when power is restored and a partial clear process (step S106) or full clear process (step S107) is executed in the main process (Figure 14), the information stored in the second calculation target area 111 for controlling the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will be erased. Therefore, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will not be controlled until the start lever 41 is validly operated after power is restored. When power is restored, the amusement hall manager can choose between resuming the game that was playing before the power was cut off or leaving the game in its completed state.

As shown in FIG. 48, the second calculation target area 111 in the work area 103 for specific control is provided with a step-out response flag 141 and a step-out response completed flag 142. The step-out response flag 141 is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to determine that stop control is being performed to re-accelerate the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that were spinning when the step-out occurred.

The out-of-step response flag 141 is provided in one-to-one correspondence with each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The out-of-step response flag 142 is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to determine that the stop control for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that were rotating when the out-of-step occurred has ended and they are now able to accelerate again. The out-of-step response flag 142 is provided in one-to-one correspondence with each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Next, the stepping motor control process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 60. The stepping motor control process is executed in step S207 of the timer interrupt process (Figure 15). Note that the motor control process is executed using a specific control program and specific control data.

The stepping motor control process first determines whether the control required flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S3201). As previously explained, the control required flag is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to identify the need for drive control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The control required flag is set to "1" during the spin start process (step S3001) of the reel control process (Figure 58). If a positive determination is made in step S3201, the left reel 32L is selected as the reel to be controlled (step S3202), and steps S3203 to S3210 are performed for the reel to be controlled (left reel 32L). The reel to be controlled is updated in step S3211, described below, and steps S3203 to S3210 are also performed for the center reel 32M and right reel 32R.

After performing step S3202, a step-out monitoring process is executed to monitor for the occurrence of step-out of the controlled reel (step S3203). Details of the step-out monitoring process will be described later. Then, for the controlled reel, the rotation position is determined based on the detection results of the reel index sensor and the number of excitation data outputs (step S3204). Then, it is determined whether the braking target flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S3205). As previously explained, the braking target flag is a flag that enables the main MPU 72 to identify that valid operation of the stop buttons 42-44 corresponding to the rotating reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has been detected, and is provided in one-to-one correspondence with each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The braking target flag is set to "1" in step S3011 of the reel control process (Figure 58).

If the braking target flag corresponding to the controlled reel is set to "1" (step S3205: YES), the process determines whether it is time to start stop control for the controlled reel based on the rotational position of the controlled reel determined in step S3204 and the stop target symbol determined in step S3015 of the reel control process (Figure 58) (step S3206). If it is time to start stop control (step S3206: YES), the braking target flag is cleared to "0" (step S3207), and the stop start flag provided in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S3208). The stop start flag allows the main MPU 72 to identify the reel 32L, 32M, or 32R for which stop control should be initiated, and is provided in one-to-one correspondence with each reel 32L, 32M, or 32R. By setting the stop start flag to "1", the stop control setting process is executed in step S3306 of the motor control process (FIG. 61) described below, and stop control for the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is initiated.

If a negative determination is made in step S3205, if a negative determination is made in step S3206, or if the processing of step S3208 is performed, motor control processing is executed for the reel to be controlled (step S3209). Figure 61 is a flowchart showing the motor control processing. Note that the motor control processing is executed using a specific control program and specific control data.

In the motor control process, first, it is determined whether the controlled reel is currently in an acceleration period (step S3301). In step S3301, a positive determination is made if the acceleration flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1." If a positive determination is made in step S3301, an acceleration setting process is executed (step S3302). In the acceleration setting process, the excitation data set in the excitation data areas 132-134 of the second calculation target area 111 is updated each time the timing for updating the excitation data set in the excitation data areas 132-134 arrives, according to the acceleration control table read into the second calculation target area 111. Furthermore, in the acceleration setting process, when the pointer information in the acceleration control table is updated to the pointer information corresponding to the final pointer and the acceleration period ends, the acceleration control table is cleared and the acceleration flag is cleared to "0." Then, a constant speed rotation table is read into the second calculation target area 111, and the constant speed flag provided in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1." The constant speed flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to determine whether the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are currently rotating at a constant speed. Setting the constant speed flag to "1" transitions the acceleration period to a constant speed rotation period.

If a negative determination is made in step S3301, the process determines whether the constant speed rotation period is in progress (step S3303). Specifically, the process determines that the constant speed rotation period is in progress if the constant speed flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1." If the constant speed rotation period is in progress (step S3303: YES), the process determines whether the stop start flag corresponding to the control target reel in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S3304). As described above, the stop start flag enables the main MPU 72 to identify the reel 32L, 32M, or 32R for which stop control should be initiated, and is provided in one-to-one correspondence with each reel 32L, 32M, or 32R. If the stop start flag is determined to be the timing for starting stop control (step S3206: YES), the stop start flag is set to "1" in step S3208 of the stepping motor control process (Figure 60). If the stop start flag is set to "1" (step S3304: YES), this means that it is time to start stop control for the controlled reel, so the stop start flag is cleared to "0" (step S3305) and the stop control setting process is executed (step S3306).

In the stop control setting process (step S3306), the constant speed flag in the second calculation target area 111 is cleared to "0," and the constant speed rotation table read into the second calculation target area 111 is cleared. Then, the stop control flag provided in the second calculation target area 111 corresponding to the reel to be controlled is set to "1," and the stop table is read from the main ROM 73 into the second calculation target area 111. The stop control flag allows the main MPU 72 to determine that stop control is being performed on reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and is provided in one-to-one correspondence with each of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Setting the stop control flag to "1" transitions from the constant speed rotation period to the stop control period.

Then, it is determined whether the current stop control is a third stop control, which is performed when the other two reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are already stopped (step S3307). If there are reels 32L, 32M, and 32R spinning other than the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for which the current stop control is being initiated, and the current stop control is not a third stop control (step S3307: NO), the stop information update flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S3308), and the motor control process ends. As already explained, the stop information update flag is a flag that enables the main MPU 72 to determine whether the slide table stored in the main RAM 74 should be updated in the first stop information setting process (step S409 of the role selection process (FIG. 17)) or the previous second stop information setting process (step S3018 of the reel control process (FIG. 58)), depending on the symbol that stops at the base position due to the current stop control of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. When the stop information update flag is set to "1", a positive determination is made in step S2016 of the reel control process (FIG. 58), and the second stop information setting process is executed in step S3018.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3304, the constant speed rotation setting process is executed (step S3309), and the motor control process is terminated. In the constant speed rotation setting process, the excitation data set in the excitation data areas 132-134 is updated each time the excitation data is switched, in accordance with the constant speed rotation table read into the second calculation target area 111. This allows the controlled reel to rotate at a constant speed.

If a negative determination is made in step S3303, a determination is made as to whether stop control is being performed on the reel to be controlled (step S3310). Specifically, stop control is determined to be in progress if the stop control flag corresponding to the reel to be controlled in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1." If stop control is in progress (step S3310: YES), stop control processing is executed (step S3311). In the stop control processing, excitation data is set in the excitation data areas 132-134 corresponding to the reel to be controlled according to the stop table read into the second calculation target area 111. Furthermore, in the stop control processing, when the pointer information in the stop table is updated to the pointer information corresponding to the final pointer and stop control of the reel to be controlled is completed, the stop control flag corresponding to the reel to be controlled in the second calculation target area 111 is cleared to "0," and the stop table read into the second calculation target area 111 is cleared. This ends drive control of the reel to be controlled.

If a negative determination is made in step S3310, it is determined whether the out-of-step response flag 141 corresponding to the reel to be controlled in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S3312). If a positive determination is made in step S3312, a re-acceleration stop control process is executed (step S3313). In the re-acceleration stop control process, excitation data is set in the excitation data areas 132-134 corresponding to the reel to be controlled according to the stop table read into the second calculation target area 111.

If the pointer information in the stop table is updated to the pointer information corresponding to the final pointer during the re-acceleration stop control process (step S3313) and the re-acceleration stop control ends (step S3314: YES), the step-out response flag 141 in the second calculation target area 111 is cleared to "0" (step S3315), the step-out response flag 142 corresponding to the controlled reel in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S3316), and this motor control process ends. By setting the step-out response flag 142 to "1," the main MPU 72 can determine that the stop control for the controlled reel that was spinning when the step-out occurred has ended and that it is now ready to re-accelerate.

Returning to the explanation of the stepping motor control process (Figure 60), after performing the motor control process in step S3209, it is determined whether the currently controlled reel is the right reel 32R (step S3210). If the controlled reel is not the right reel 32R (step S3210: NO), the controlled reel is updated (step S3211). In step S3211, if the left reel 32L is selected as the controlled reel, the controlled reel is updated to the center reel 32M, and if the center reel 32M is selected as the controlled reel, the controlled reel is updated to the right reel 32R. Then, the process returns to step S3203, and steps S3203 to S3210 are executed for the updated controlled reel.

If a positive determination is made in step S3210, the excitation data set in the left excitation data area 132, middle excitation data area 133, and right excitation data area 134 of the second calculation target area 111 is output to the motor drivers (not shown) of the left reel 32L, middle reel 32M, and right reel 32R (step S3212). In this way, the excitation data is output after the processing of steps S3203 to S3210 has been executed for all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Then, it is determined whether stop control of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has been completed (step S3213), and if stop control of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has been completed (step S3213: YES), the control required flag in the second calculation target area 111 is cleared to "0" (step S3214), and this stepping motor control process is terminated.

Next, we will explain the configuration of the specific control work area 103 for displaying stop order information on the dual-purpose display unit 66.

As already explained, the second calculation target area 111 in the specific control work area 103 is provided with a stop order corresponding display in progress flag 138 (FIG. 48) that enables the main MPU 72 to recognize that the stop order corresponding display is being performed on the dual-purpose display unit 66. The stop order corresponding display on the dual-purpose display unit 66 is performed when the stop order corresponding display in progress flag 138 is set to "1," display data for the stop order corresponding display (display data for a bell win, display data for a promotion replay, or display data for avoiding a fall replay) is set in the right-side dual-purpose display unit counter 136 in the second calculation target area 111, and all "0" display data is set in the left-side dual-purpose display unit counter 135. The all "0" display data is display data for putting the segment indicators 66a and 66b in a non-display state.

When winning data including winning data for the first bell role is set in the second calculation target area 111 during the role lottery process (Figure 17) and becomes the subject of stop order corresponding display, display data for the first bell winning corresponding to the winning data is set in the right-side dual-use display counter 136 of the second calculation target area 111. As already explained, when winning data including winning data for the first bell role is set in the second calculation target area 111 while in the advantageous zone SC2 and in the ready state ST5 or ART state ST6, it becomes the subject of stop order corresponding display. By setting display data for the first bell winning in the right-side dual-use display counter 136, a display corresponding to the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, 32R that allows the first bell winning to be achieved is displayed on the right-side segment display 66b of the dual-use display unit 66.

When winning data including winning data for a promotion replay role (first RT replay role or second RT replay role) is set in the second calculation target area 111 during the role lottery process (FIG. 17) and becomes the subject of stop order corresponding display, display data for the promotion replay corresponding to the winning data is set in the right-side dual-use display counter 136 of the second calculation target area 111. As already explained, when winning data including winning data for a promotion replay role is set in the second calculation target area 111 while in the advantageous zone SC2 and in the ready state ST5 or ART state ST6, it becomes the subject of stop order corresponding display. By setting display data for the promotion replay in the right-side dual-use display counter 136, a display corresponding to the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the promotion replay win to be achieved is displayed on the right-side segment display 66b of the dual-use display unit 66.

When winning data including winning data for a fall replay role (first fall replay role or second fall replay role) is set in the second calculation target area 111 during the role lottery process (Figure 17) and becomes subject to stop order corresponding display, display data for fall replay avoidance corresponding to the winning data is set in the right-side dual-purpose display counter 136 of the second calculation target area 111. As already explained, when winning data including winning data for a first fall replay role or a second fall replay role is set in the second calculation target area 111 while in the advantageous zone SC2 and ART state ST6, it becomes subject to stop order corresponding display. Furthermore, when winning data including winning data for a first fall replay role is set in the second calculation target area 111 while in the advantageous zone SC2 and preparation state ST5, it also becomes subject to stop order corresponding display. On the other hand, if winning data including winning data for the second fall replay role is set in the second calculation target area 111 while in the advantageous zone SC2 and preparation state ST5, it will not be subject to stop order display. By setting display data for fall replay avoidance in the right-side dual-purpose display counter 136, the right-side segment display 66b of the dual-purpose display 66 will display a display corresponding to the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that will prevent the fall replay winning from occurring.

In the stop order display, when the right segment display 66b of the dual-purpose display unit 66 displays a stop order that allows for the first bell win, when the right segment display 66b displays a stop order that allows for the promotion replay win, or when the right segment display 66b displays a stop order that allows for the fall replay win to be avoided, all "0" display data is set to the left dual-purpose display unit counter 135 in the second calculation target area 111, and the left segment display 66a of the dual-purpose display unit 66 is in a non-display state.

The display data set in each of the dual-purpose display counters 135, 136 is cleared by executing the stop order corresponding display termination process in step S3021 of the reel control process (FIG. 58). Furthermore, the state in which the first stop order flag, second stop order flag, or third stop order flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" is also cleared by executing the stop order corresponding display termination process (step S3021). Therefore, by executing the stop order corresponding display termination process (step S3021), the stop order corresponding display in the dual-purpose display unit 66 ends.

Next, the stop order corresponding display start processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 62. The stop order corresponding display start processing is executed in step S3005 of the reel control processing (FIG. 58). Note that the stop order corresponding display start processing is executed using a program and data for specific control.

The stop order display start process first determines whether the acceleration end flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S3401). As previously explained, the acceleration end flag is set to "1" in step S3003 of the reel control process (FIG. 58) when the acceleration period of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has ended. If a negative determination is made in step S3401, the process then determines whether the display resume flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S3402). As previously explained, the display resume flag is a flag that enables the main MPU 72 to determine that the stop order display that was being executed by the dual-purpose display unit 66 before the power was cut off should be resumed. If a determination is made in step S1811 of the power recovery process (FIG. 40) that any of the first through third stop order flags in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1," the display resume flag is set to "1" in step S1812.

If the display resume flag is set to "1" (step S3402: YES), a process for sending a stop order notification command is executed (step S3403). In the process for sending the stop order notification command, if the first stop order flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1", a bell winning command is sent to the production side MPU 92, if the second stop order flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1", a promotion replay command is sent to the production side MPU 92, and if the third stop order flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1", a fall replay avoidance command is sent. The bell winning command is set with information that enables the production side MPU 92 to determine the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that will result in a first bell winning based on the winning data set in the second calculation target area 111; the promotion replay command is set with information that enables the production side MPU 92 to determine the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that will result in a first RT replay winning or a second RT replay winning based on the winning data set in the second calculation target area 111; and the fall replay avoidance command is set with information that enables the production side MPU 92 to determine the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that will prevent a first fall replay winning or a second fall replay winning based on the winning data set in the second calculation target area 111.

When the presentation side MPU 92 receives a bell winning command, a promotion replay command, or a fall replay avoidance command after receiving a power restoration command from the main side MPU 72, it controls the display of the image display device 63 so that the stop order notification that was being made on the image display device 63 before the power was cut off is continued. As a result, if a power outage is identified while the stop order notification is being made on the image display device 63 and power is restored without the setting key insertion hole 57 being turned on, the stop order notification can be resumed on the image display device 63.

After processing step S3403, the display resume flag in the second calculation target area 111 is cleared to "0" (step S3404). Furthermore, if a positive determination is made in step S3401, the acceleration end flag in the second calculation target area 111 is cleared to "0" (step S3405), and it is determined whether the stop order corresponding display in progress flag 138 in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S3406). If a power outage occurs while the stop order corresponding display is being performed and one or more reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spinning, and after power is restored and the stop order corresponding display resumes, the re-acceleration of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that were spinning at the time of the power outage has ended, a positive determination is made in step S3406. If a positive determination is made in step S3406, since the stop order corresponding display is already being performed, the stop order corresponding display start process is terminated without executing the processes of steps S3407 to S3417.

If the processing of step S3404 has been performed, or if a negative determination is made in step S3406, it is determined whether the first stop order flag for the second calculation target area 111 has been set to "1" (step S3407). The first stop order flag is set to "1" in step S3105 of the notification control processing (Figure 59) already described.

If a positive determination is made in step S3407, the stop order determination process for the first bell win is executed (step S3408). In this stop order determination process, the stop order correspondence table for the first bell win is first read from the main ROM 73 to the second calculation target area 111. The stop order correspondence table for the first bell win stores display data for the bell win corresponding to each winning data and corresponding to the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that will enable the first bell win corresponding to the winning data. Then, based on the stop order correspondence table for the first bell win read into the second calculation target area 111, the display data for the bell win corresponding to the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that will enable the first bell win corresponding to the current winning data set in the second calculation target area 111 is determined.

Then, the display data for the bell win determined in step S3408 is set in the right-side dual-purpose display counter 136 in the second calculation target area 111 (step S3409). As a result, the display data of the right-side dual-purpose display counter 136 is output to the dual-purpose display unit 66 in the display unit control process (Figure 56) already explained, and the right-side segment display 66b in the dual-purpose display unit 66 can display the stop order corresponding to the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that will enable the first bell win corresponding to the current winning data.

If a negative determination is made in step S3407, it is determined whether the second stop order flag for the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S3410). The second stop order flag is set to "1" in step S3109 of the notification control process (Figure 59) already described.

If a positive determination is made in step S3410, a stop order determination process for promotion replays is executed (step S3411). In this stop order determination process, a stop order correspondence table for promotion replays is first read from the main ROM 73 into the second calculation target area 111. The stop order correspondence table for promotion replays stores, for each winning data, promotion replay display data corresponding to the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that will enable the first RT replay win or second RT replay win corresponding to the winning data. Then, based on the stop order correspondence table for promotion replays read into the second calculation target area 111, promotion replay display data corresponding to the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that will enable the first RT replay win or second RT replay win that corresponds to the current winning data set in the second calculation target area 111 is determined.

Then, the display data for the promotion replay determined in step S3411 is set in the right-side dual-purpose display counter 136 in the second calculation target area 111 (step S3412). As a result, the display data of the right-side dual-purpose display counter 136 is output to the dual-purpose display unit 66 in the display unit control process (FIG. 56) already described, allowing the right-side segment display 66b in the dual-purpose display unit 66 to display a stop order corresponding to the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that will enable the first RT replay win or second RT replay win corresponding to the current winning data.

If a negative determination is made in step S3410, it is determined whether the third stop order flag for the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S3413). The third stop order flag is set to "1" in step S3115 of the notification control process (Figure 59) already described.

If a positive determination is made in step S3413, a stop order determination process for fall replay avoidance is executed (step S3414). In this stop order determination process, a stop order correspondence table for fall replay avoidance is first read from the main ROM 73 into the second calculation target area 111. The stop order correspondence table for fall replay avoidance stores, for each winning data, fall replay avoidance display data corresponding to the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that can prevent the first fall replay win or second fall replay win corresponding to the winning data. Then, based on the stop order correspondence table for fall replay avoidance read into the second calculation target area 111, fall replay avoidance display data corresponding to the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that can prevent the first fall replay win or second fall replay win corresponding to the current winning data set in the second calculation target area 111 is determined.

Then, the display data for avoiding the fall replay determined in step S3414 is set in the right-side dual-purpose display counter 136 in the second calculation target area 111 (step S3415). As a result, the display data of the right-side dual-purpose display counter 136 is output to the dual-purpose display unit 66 in the display unit control process (FIG. 56) already described, and the right-side segment display 66b in the dual-purpose display unit 66 can display a stop order corresponding to the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which makes it possible to avoid the realization of the first fall replay winning or second fall replay winning corresponding to the current winning data.

If the processing of step S3409, step S3412, or step S3415 has been performed, display data of all "0" is set to the left-side dual-purpose display counter 135 in the second calculation target area 111 (step S3416). As a result, the display data of the left-side dual-purpose display counter 135 is output to the dual-purpose display unit 66 in the display unit control processing (Figure 56) already described, thereby putting the left-side segment display 66a into a non-display state.

Then, the stop order corresponding display in progress flag 138 in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S3417), and the stop order corresponding display start process is terminated. By setting the stop order corresponding display in progress flag 138 to "1," the main MPU 72 can recognize that the stop order corresponding display is being performed on the dual-purpose display unit 66.

In this way, in the stop order corresponding display start processing (FIG. 62), if the acceleration end flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" and the stop order corresponding display in progress flag 138 in the second calculation target area 111 is not set to "1" (step S3401: YES, step S3406: NO), processing is executed to start the stop order corresponding display on the dual-purpose display unit 66 (steps S3407 to S3417). Also, if the display restart flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S3402: YES), processing is executed to start the stop order corresponding display on the dual-purpose display unit 66 (steps S3407 to S3417).

If power is interrupted while the stop order display is being performed on the dual-purpose display unit 66 and power is restored without the setting key insertion hole 57 being turned ON, the restoration process (FIG. 40) is executed in step S103 of the main process (FIG. 14). In this case, the partial clear process (step S106) and full clear process (step S107) are not performed, and the first stop order flag, second stop order flag, or third stop order flag in the second calculation target area 111 remains set to "1." Therefore, if no error condition occurs (step S1801: NO, step S1806: NO, step S1807: YES, step S1808: YES), a positive determination is made in step S1811 of the power restoration process (FIG. 40), and the display resume flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S1812). As a result, a positive determination is made in step S3402 of the stop order corresponding display start processing (FIG. 62), and processing from step S3403 onwards is performed, thereby restarting stop order corresponding display on the dual-purpose display unit 66.

As already explained, if the power is restored while the setting key insertion hole 57 is turned on using the setting key, the main processing (FIG. 14) performs either a partial clear processing (step S106) or a full clear processing (step S107). In these partial clear processing (step S106) and full clear processing (step S107), the first stop order flag, second stop order flag, and third stop order flag in the second calculation target area 111, and the dual-purpose display counters 135 and 136 are cleared to "0." In addition, the partial clear processing (step S106) clears all winning data set in the second calculation target area 111 other than bonus winning data, and the full clear processing (step S107) clears all winning data set in the second calculation target area 111, including bonus winning data. Therefore, if either the partial clear process (step S106) or the full clear process (step S107) is executed in the main process (FIG. 14) after power is restored, the stop order display will not resume on the dual-purpose display unit 66 even if the display unit control process (step S210) is performed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 15).

Next, the out-of-step monitoring process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in Figure 63. The out-of-step monitoring process is executed in step S3203 of the stepping motor control process (Figure 60). As already explained, in the stepping motor control process (Figure 60), the out-of-step monitoring process (step S3203) is executed when any of the left reel 32L, center reel 32M, and right reel 32R is selected as the reel to be controlled. Note that the out-of-step monitoring process is executed using a program and data for specific control.

The out-of-step monitoring process first determines whether out-of-step has occurred for the reel being controlled (step S3501). Specifically, it determines whether the cycle at which the rising edge of the detection signal received from the reel index sensor is confirmed by the main MPU 72 falls within a predetermined cycle range, and if the cycle at which the rising edge of the detection signal is confirmed falls outside the predetermined cycle range, it determines that out-of-step has occurred for the reel being controlled.

If a positive determination is made in step S3501, a spin control information clearing process is executed (step S3502). In this clearing process, the acceleration flags and constant speed flags in the second calculation target area 111 are cleared to "0" for all currently spinning reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, including the control target reel, and the acceleration control table and constant speed rotation table read into the second calculation target area 111 are cleared.

Then, the stop table is read into the second calculation area 111 to control the stop of all currently spinning reels 32L, 32M, and 32R (step S3503), and the out-of-step response flag 141 in the second calculation area 111 corresponding to all currently spinning reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is set to "1" (step S3504).

Then, it is determined whether the braking target flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S3505). In step S3505, a positive determination is made if the braking target flag corresponding to any of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, including the controlled reel, is set to "1." If a positive determination is made in step S3505, a stop command cancellation command is set to the production-side MPU 92 (step S3506). The stop command cancellation command is a command that causes the production-side MPU 92 to recognize that the stop command already sent to the production-side MPU 92 is to be canceled for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in which a stop command has been issued and which were in a state before the stop control was initiated. After stop control is performed on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in which a stop command has been issued and which were in a state before the stop control was initiated due to the occurrence of a step-out, acceleration control is performed to re-accelerate, and the reels are returned to a constant-speed rotation state after the acceleration control ends. Then, operation of the stop buttons 42-44 corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is enabled. By sending a stop command cancellation command, the performance-side MPU 92 can accurately determine which reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will re-accelerate after a loss of synchronization occurs.

Then, all braking target flags in the second calculation target area 111 are cleared to "0" (step S3507), and the symbol number data of the stop target symbols set in the second calculation target area 111 is cleared (step S3508). As already explained, the symbol number data of the stop target symbols is set in the second calculation target area 111 in step S3015 of the reel control process (FIG. 58). If a negative judgment is made in step S3505, or if the processing of step S3508 is performed, an operation invalidation notification process is executed (step S3509), similar to step S3010 in the reel control process (FIG. 58), and the step-out monitoring process is terminated. In the operation invalidation notification process, the lamps (not shown) of the stop buttons 42-44 corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that were spinning when the step-out occurred are switched to an off state, thereby notifying that the operation of those stop buttons 42-44 has been invalidated.

As described above, if a stop command has been issued for any of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R but stop control has not yet begun, and one of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, including the reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, experiences a loss of synchronism, stop control is initiated for all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are currently spinning, including the reel 32L, 32M, and 32R for which a stop command had been issued but stop control had not yet begun. After stop control is initiated, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that were spinning when the loss of synchronism occurred are accelerated again by acceleration control, and enter a constant speed rotation state after the acceleration control ends. Operation of the stop buttons 42-44 corresponding to the reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is then enabled.

Next, the out-of-step response processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in Figure 64. The out-of-step response processing is executed in step S3006 of the reel control processing (Figure 58). Note that the out-of-step response processing is executed using a program and data for specific control.

The step-out response process first determines whether the step-out response in progress flag 141 in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S3601). If the step-out response in progress flag 141 is not set to "1" (step S3601: NO), the step-out response process is terminated.

If the out-of-step response flag 141 is set to "1" (step S3601: YES), this means that out-of-step has occurred in the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and that stop control is being performed on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that were spinning when the out-of-step occurred. If a positive determination is made in step S3601, a determination is made as to whether the out-of-step response completed flag 142 in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S3602). The out-of-step response completed flag 142 is set to "1" in step S3316 of the motor control process (Figure 61) already described when stop control has been completed for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that were spinning when the out-of-step occurred. If a negative determination is made in step S3602, the process of step S3602 is repeatedly executed until the out-of-step response completed flag 142 is set to "1."

If a positive determination is made in step S3602, the step-out response flag 142 in the second calculation target area 111 is cleared to "0" (step S3603), and rotation restart processing is executed (step S3604). In the rotation restart processing, the acceleration control table for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that were spinning when the step-out occurred is read from the main ROM 73 into the second calculation target area 111, similar to the rotation start processing in step S3001 of the reel control processing (Figure 58).

Then, the acceleration flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S3605), and the process proceeds to step S3002 of the reel control process (Figure 58). This causes acceleration control to be performed on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that were rotating when the step-out occurred, and after this acceleration control is completed, constant speed rotation control is performed on those reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In this way, if one or more reels 32L, 32M, 32R lose synchronization while some or all of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating, stop control, acceleration control for re-acceleration, and constant speed rotation control are performed on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that were rotating when the synchronization loss occurred. On the other hand, these controls are not performed on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that were already stopped when the synchronization loss occurred. For the reels that were already stopped when the synchronization loss occurred, the stopped state of those reels 32L, 32M, 32R remains unchanged.

If the supply of operating power to the slot machine 10 is not stopped while the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spinning, the stop order corresponding display initiated by the dual-purpose display unit 66 will continue until all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop and the stop order corresponding display termination process is executed in step S3021 of the reel control process (Figure 58). Therefore, if a loss of synchronism occurs for reels 32L, 32M, and 32R while the supply of operating power to the slot machine 10 is continuing, the stop order corresponding display will continue until the stop control for re-acceleration, re-acceleration, constant speed rotation, and stop control for reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that were spinning at the time of the loss of synchronism are terminated and the stop order corresponding display termination process (step S3021) is executed. This prevents the stop order display that has started on the dual-purpose display unit 66 from being interrupted if reels 32L, 32M, and 32R lose synchronization while the supply of operating power to the slot machine 10 continues.

Next, we will explain how the stop order display is performed on the dual-purpose display unit 66, with reference to the time chart in Figure 65. FIG. 65(a) shows the execution period of the stop order corresponding display, FIG. 65(b) shows the state of the display resume flag in the second calculation target area 111, FIG. 65(c) shows the state of the stop order flag in the second calculation target area 111, FIG. 65(d) shows the acceleration period for all reels 32L, 32M, 32R, FIG. 65(e) shows the timing when operation of stop buttons 42 to 44 becomes effective, FIG. 65(f) shows the timing when the first reel (left reel 32L) stops, FIG. 65(g) shows the timing when step-out occurs in the two reels 32M, 32R, FIG. 65(h) shows the re-acceleration period for the two reels 32M, 32R, FIG. 65(i) shows the timing when operation of the two stop buttons 43, 44 corresponding to the two reels 32M, 32R becomes effective, and FIG. 65(j) shows the state of operating power supply to the slot machine 10.

At timing t1 when the winning combination lottery process (Figure 17) ends, the stop order flag (e.g., the first stop order flag) in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" as shown in Figure 65(c), and acceleration of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R begins as shown in Figure 65(d). After that, when the acceleration period for all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R ends at timing t2 as shown in Figure 65(d), operation of stop buttons 42 to 44 becomes valid at timing t2 as shown in Figure 65(e). At timing t2, stop order display begins on the dual-purpose display unit 66 as shown in Figure 65(a).

Then, at timing t3, the left reel 32L stops, as shown in Figure 65(f). Then, at timing t4, the supply of operating power is stopped, as shown in Figure 65(j), and the stop order display on the dual-purpose display unit 66 ends, as shown in Figure 65(a).

Then, at timing t5, power is restored as shown in FIG. 65(j). Power is restored when the setting key insertion hole 57 is not turned ON, and the main processing (FIG. 14) executes the power restoration processing (FIG. 40) in step S103, restoring the processing state to the state before power was cut off. As shown in FIG. 65(c), the stop order flag in the second calculation target area 111 remains set to "1" at timing t5. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 65(b), the display resume flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" at timing t5. Thereafter, the stop order corresponding display start processing (FIG. 62) is executed in step S3005 of the reel control processing (FIG. 58) while the display resume flag remains set to "1." In the stop order corresponding display start processing (FIG. 62), a positive determination is made in step S3402 based on the display resume flag being set to "1," and processing from step S3403 onward is executed. As a result, at timing t6, stop order display in the dual-purpose display unit 66 is resumed as shown in FIG. 65(a), and the display resume flag in the second calculation target area 111 is cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 65(b). Also, at timing t6, rotation control of the two reels 32M, 32R that were spinning before the power was shut off is started.

Then, as shown in Figure 65(g), at time t7, the two reels 32M, 32R that were spinning before the power was cut off lose synchronization, and stop control is performed on those two reels 32M, 32R to allow them to accelerate again. Then, as shown in Figure 65(h), at time t8, the two reels 32M, 32R that were spinning when the synchronization loss occurred begin to accelerate again. Then, at time t9, as shown in Figure 65(h), the re-acceleration of the two reels 32M, 32R ends, and constant speed rotation begins. Then, at time t9, as shown in Figure 65(i), operation of the stop buttons 43, 44 corresponding to the reels 32M, 32R that have begun constant speed rotation becomes valid.

In this way, if no power interruption occurs, the stop order display in the combined display unit 66 begins when the acceleration period for all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R ends and operation of the stop buttons 42-44 becomes valid. On the other hand, if a power interruption occurs and the recovery process (FIG. 40) is performed in step S103 of the main process (FIG. 14) after power is restored, the stop order flag in the second calculation target area 111 remains set to "1," so the display resume flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1." Then, based on the display resume flag being set to "1," the stop order display in the combined display unit 66 resumes when rotation control of reels 32M and 32R, which were spinning when the power outage occurred, begins. The timing at which the stop order display resumes is before the re-acceleration period for the reels 32M, 32R that were spinning when the step-out occurred ends and operation of the stop buttons 43, 44 corresponding to those reels 32M, 32R becomes valid.

If the timing for resuming the stop order corresponding display after power is restored is the timing when the re-acceleration of reels 32M, 32R, which were spinning before the power was cut off, finishes, the stop order corresponding display, which was displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66 once the acceleration of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R has finished, would be temporarily unviewable after power is restored. In contrast, by configuring the stop order corresponding display to start when power is restored, the stop order corresponding display can be restored to a viewable state immediately after power is restored.

As described above, when winning data that is the subject of stop order notification is set in the role selection process (FIG. 17), when the acceleration period of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R ends and operation of stop buttons 42-44 becomes valid, display data for stop order corresponding display is set in the right-side dual-purpose display counter 136 in the second calculation target area 111, and display data of all "0" is set in the left-side dual-purpose display counter 135. In addition, the stop order corresponding display in progress flag 138 in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1." When the stop order corresponding display in progress flag 138 is set to "1," the display control process (FIG. 56) is executed in step S210 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 15), whereby the display data set in each dual-purpose display counter 135, 136 is output to the dual-purpose display unit 66, and the stop order corresponding display is performed on the dual-purpose display unit 66. Therefore, the stop order corresponding display can be started when the acceleration period of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R ends and operation of stop buttons 42 to 44 becomes valid. Therefore, the stop order corresponding display can be displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66 when the player validly operates stop buttons 42 to 44.

The state in which any of the first, second, and third stop order flags in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" is maintained even if power is interrupted, as long as the recovery process (FIG. 40) is executed in step S103 of the main process (FIG. 14) after power is restored and the processing state before power interruption is restored without an error occurring. Therefore, if power is interrupted while reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spinning and power is restored without the setting key insertion hole 57 being turned ON, processing can be executed to resume the stop order corresponding display on the dual-purpose display unit 66 based on the stop order flag being set to "1" at the time of power restoration. If the stop order corresponding display were configured to begin when the operation of the stop buttons 42-44 becomes effective after power restoration, the stop order corresponding display that was displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66 at the time the acceleration period of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R ended before power restoration would be temporarily inaccessible after power restoration. In contrast, by configuring the display to resume displaying the order of stops when power is restored, it is possible to check the display of the order of stops immediately after power is restored.

The main MPU 72 detects out-of-step of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the detection signal received from the reel index sensor. When out-of-step is detected, it performs processing to stop all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that were spinning when the out-of-step occurred, and then performs processing to re-accelerate those reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Therefore, when out-of-step occurs in reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, re-acceleration of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is possible without requiring maintenance by the amusement hall manager. This reduces the maintenance burden on the amusement hall manager.

If power is interrupted while only some of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spinning, and power is restored without the setting key insertion hole 57 being turned ON, restoring the processing state to the state before the power interruption, the main MPU 72 controls the rotation of only the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that were spinning before the power interruption. This eliminates the need to stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that were stopped before the power interruption, thereby minimizing the impact of the power interruption. If the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that were stopped before the power interruption had to be stopped again, there is a possibility that the desired symbol will not stop after power is restored, even if the stopping operation was performed at the time when the desired symbol would stop on the main line ML before the power interruption. However, this situation can be avoided by using a configuration that resumes rotation of only the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that were spinning before the power interruption.

If power is restored without the setting key insertion hole 57 being turned ON and the processing state is restored to that before the power was cut off, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that were spinning before the power was cut off will resume rotation without the need to start the game (operate the start lever 41). This prevents unnecessary consumption of gaming media when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R resume rotation. This prevents players from suffering unfair disadvantages due to a power cut.

If power is cut off while all or some of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spinning, and the setting key insertion hole 57 is turned ON when power is restored and a partial clear process (step S106) or full clear process (step S107) is executed in the main process (Figure 14), rotation control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will not be performed until the start lever 41 is validly operated after power is restored. When power is restored, the amusement hall manager can choose between resuming the game that was playing before the power was cut off or leaving the game in its completed state.

<Configuration for selecting lottery table>
Next, a configuration for selecting a lottery table corresponding to a combination of a set value, a game state, and a lottery mode in the lottery process for winning combinations (FIG. 17) will be described.

As shown in FIG. 48, the second calculation target area 111 is provided with a first RT mode flag 151, a second RT mode flag 152, and an internal RT state flag 153. The first RT mode flag 151 is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to determine that the lottery mode is the first RT mode, and the second RT mode flag 152 is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to determine that the lottery mode is the second RT mode. A state in which the values of the first RT mode flag 151 and the second RT mode flag 152 are "0" corresponds to a state in which the lottery mode is normal mode. The internal RT state flag 153 is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to determine that the game state is the internal RT state ST2.

As already explained, the second calculation target area 111 is provided with a BB flag that enables the main MPU 72 to determine whether it is in the first to fourth BB state ST3, and an RB flag that enables the main MPU 72 to determine whether it is in the first to second RB state ST4. In the role lottery process (Figure 17), the lottery table is selected based on the settings of the slot machine 10 as well as the states of the first RT mode flag 151, second RT mode flag 152, internal RT state flag 153, BB flag, and RB flag.

Next, the lottery table selection process executed by the main MPU 72 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 66. The lottery table selection process is executed in step S402 of the role selection process (Figure 17). Note that the lottery table selection process is executed using a program and data for specific control.

In the lottery table selection process, the current setting value of the slot machine 10 is first determined by referencing the value of the setting value counter in the second calculation target area 111 (step S3701). Then, it is determined whether the internal RT state flag 153 in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S3702). If the internal RT state flag 153 is set to "1" (step S3702: YES), the internal RT state lottery table (FIG. 24) corresponding to the current setting value determined in step S3701 is selected (step S3703). In step S3703, the internal RT state lottery table (FIG. 24) is selected regardless of the state of the first RT mode flag 151 and second RT mode flag 152 in the second calculation target area 111. This allows the internal RT state lottery table to be selected in the internal RT state ST2 regardless of the lottery mode.

If a negative determination is made in step S3702, it is determined whether or not the bonus state is in effect (step S3704). In step S3704, a positive determination is made if the BB flag or RB flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1". If a positive determination is made in step S3704, a bonus lottery table is selected regardless of the state of the first RT mode flag 151 and second RT mode flag 152 in the second calculation target area 111 (step S3705). This allows a bonus lottery table to be selected in the bonus state regardless of the lottery mode.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3704, it is determined whether the first RT mode flag 151 in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S3706), and if the first RT mode flag 151 is set to "1" (step S3706: YES), the first RT mode lottery table (Figure 20) corresponding to the current setting value determined in step S3701 is selected (step S3707).

If a negative judgment is made in step S3706, it is determined whether the second RT mode flag 152 in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S3708), and if the second RT mode flag 152 is set to "1" (step S3708: YES), the second RT mode lottery table (Figure 22) corresponding to the current setting value determined in step S3701 is selected (step S3709).

If a negative judgment is made in step S3706 and step S3708, i.e., if neither the first RT mode flag 151 nor the second RT mode flag 152 is set to "1", the current setting value is determined by referencing the setting value counter in the second calculation target area 111, and the normal mode lottery table (Figure 18) corresponding to the determined setting value is selected (step S3710), and this lottery table selection process is terminated.

Next, the lottery mode control process executed by the main MPU 72 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 67. The lottery mode control process is executed in step S603 of the response process at the end of play (Figure 28). Note that the lottery mode control process is executed using a program and data for specific control.

In the lottery mode control process, it is first determined whether any RT replay win or any fall replay win has occurred (step S3801). If any RT replay win or any fall replay win has occurred (step S3801: YES), the RT mode flags 151 and 152 are cleared (step S3802). In this clearing process, the first RT mode flag 151 and the second RT mode flag 152 in the second calculation target area 111 are cleared to "0."

Then, it is determined whether the newly established replay win is a first RT replay win or a second fall replay win (step S3803). If a positive determination is made in step S3803, the first RT mode flag 151 in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S3804), and this lottery mode control process is terminated. By setting the first RT mode flag 151 to "1", the lottery mode is changed to the first RT mode.

If a negative determination is made in step S3803, it is determined whether the currently established replay winning is a second RT replay winning (step S3805). If a negative determination is made in step S3805, the lottery mode control process is terminated. In this way, if a first fall replay winning is established, neither the first RT mode flag 151 nor the second RT mode flag 152 in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1", and the lottery mode is changed to normal mode. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S3805, the second RT mode flag 152 in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S3806), and the lottery mode control process is terminated. Setting the second RT mode flag 152 to "1" changes the lottery mode to second RT mode.

If a negative determination is made in step S3801, it is determined whether or not bonus winning data has been set in the second calculation target area 111 (step S3807), and if bonus winning data has been set (step S3807: YES), it is determined whether or not the internal RT state flag 153 of the second calculation target area 111 has been set to "1" (step S3808). If a negative determination is made in step S3808, the internal RT state flag 153 is set to "1" (step S3809), and this lottery mode control process is terminated. By setting the internal RT state flag 153 to "1", the game state transitions to the internal RT state ST2.

As described above, in the lottery mode control process, if bonus winning data is set in the second calculation target area 111 and the internal RT state flag 153 is not set to "1," the internal RT state flag 153 is set to "1" and the game state transitions to the internal RT state ST2. As already explained, if bonus winning data is set in the role lottery process (FIG. 17), and a bonus win corresponding to the bonus winning data is achieved in the game in which the bonus winning data is set, the game transitions to the bonus state and the bonus winning data is cleared. On the other hand, if a bonus win corresponding to the bonus winning data is not achieved in the game in which the bonus winning data is set, the internal RT state flag 153 is set to "1" in the lottery mode control process (FIG. 67), the game transitions to the internal RT state ST2, and the bonus winning data set in the second calculation target area 111 is stored and retained. The bonus winning data is stored and retained until a corresponding bonus win is achieved, even in games following the game in which the winning data was set, except when the all-clear process (step S107 of the main process (FIG. 14)) is performed.

As already explained, in the lottery table selection process (FIG. 66), a lottery table is selected based on the settings of the slot machine 10 as well as the states of the first RT mode flag 151, second RT mode flag 152, internal RT status flag 153, BB flag, and RB flag in the second calculation target area 111. In a game in which bonus winning data is set in the second calculation target area 111, whether or not a bonus win corresponding to the bonus win will be achieved is determined based on the combination of stopped symbols. Also, if winning data for a first RT replay role, a second RT replay role, a first fall replay role, or a second fall replay role is set in the second calculation target area 111 in the role lottery process (FIG. 17), whether or not a first RT replay win, a second RT replay win, a first fall replay win, or a second fall replay win corresponding to the winning data will be achieved is determined based on the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In the lottery mode control process (FIG. 67) that is performed after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, the state of the first RT mode flag 151, second RT mode flag 152, and internal RT state flag 153 is changed. This allows the process of setting information other than the setting values referenced when selecting a lottery table to be consolidated into the lottery mode control process (FIG. 67) that is performed after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning.

Next, we will explain what happens when the power is cut off before transitioning to the bonus state or internal RT state ST2 in a game in which bonus winning data has been set during the role lottery process (Figure 17).

If the supply of operating power is started without the setting key insertion hole 57 being turned ON, the power recovery process (FIG. 40) is executed in step S103 of the main process (FIG. 14). As already explained with reference to FIG. 40, in the power recovery process, after the backup abnormality confirmation process (FIG. 41) is executed in step S1804, if the backup abnormality flag 113 in the non-specific control work area 102 is not set to "1" (step S1806: NO), the value of the setting value counter in the second calculation target area 111 is within the normal setting value range (specifically, the range of "1" to "6") (step S1807: YES), and the power outage flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S1808: YES), the partial clear process (step S106 of the main process (FIG. 14)) and the full clear process (step S107 of the main process (FIG. 14)) are not executed, and the processing state before the power was shut off is restored.

If the power is cut off before a transition to the bonus state or internal RT state ST2 occurs in a game in which bonus winning data is set in the second calculation target area 111, and the game returns to the processing state before the power was cut off without executing the partial clear process (step S106) or full clear process (step S107), the game that was running partway before the power was cut off, with bonus winning data set in the second calculation target area 111, will be resumed. Then, if a bonus win corresponding to the bonus winning data set in the second calculation target area 111 is achieved in that game, the game will transition to the bonus state, and if a bonus win corresponding to the bonus winning data set in the second calculation target area 111 is not achieved, the internal RT state flag 153 of the second calculation target area 111 will be set to "1" and the game will transition to the internal RT state ST2.

As already explained, if the power is restored while the setting key insertion hole 57 is turned ON (step S102: YES), the main processing (FIG. 14) executes the all clear processing (FIG. 43) on the condition that the error state flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S104: YES) or the reset button 56 is being pressed (step S105: YES). In the all clear processing (FIG. 43), information related to the game status stored in the second calculation target area 111 and the bonus winning data set in the second calculation target area 111 are erased.

As already explained, if the supply of operating power is started while the setting key insertion hole 57 is turned ON and the reset button 56 is not being pressed (step S102: YES, step S105: NO), the main processing (Figure 14) will execute a partial clear process (step S106) on the condition that the error state flag in the second calculation target area 111 is not set to "1" (step S104: NO).

Here, the partial clearing process executed by the main MPU 72 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 68. Note that the partial clearing process is executed using a specific control program and specific control data.

The partial clearing process first executes a partial clearing process for the work area 103 for specific control (step S3901). In this partial clearing process, all memory areas in the work area 103 for specific control are cleared to "0" except for the memory areas storing information for determining the current setting values of the slot machine 10, information for determining the current game state, information for determining the current game zone, information for determining the current lottery mode, information on the number of stored virtual medals, and bonus winning data. By executing the partial clearing process for the work area 103 for specific control (step S3901), all winning data other than bonus winning data set in the second calculation target area 111 of the work area 103 for specific control is erased. Furthermore, by executing the partial clearing process for the work area 103 for specific control (step S3901), information related to the rotation control of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is erased. Therefore, even if one or more reels 32L, 32M, and 32R were spinning before the power was shut off, if the partial clear process (FIG. 68) is executed after the power is restored, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will not start spinning until new gaming media are bet and the start lever 41 is operated. Furthermore, by executing the partial clear process (step S3901) of the work area 103 for specific control, the information used to display the stop order correspondence on the dual-purpose display unit 66 is also erased. Therefore, even if the stop order correspondence display was being performed on the dual-purpose display unit 66 before the power was shut off, if the partial clear process (FIG. 68) is executed after the power is restored, the stop order correspondence display will not resume on the dual-purpose display unit 66.

Then, a partial initialization process is performed on the work area 103 for specific control (step S3902). In this partial initialization process, the memory areas in the work area 103 for specific control that were cleared to "0" in step S3901 are initialized.

Then, in steps S3903 and S3904, the same processing as steps S2003 and S2004 of the all clear processing (Figure 43) already described is executed. Specifically, first, clear processing of the stack area 101 for specific control is executed (step S3903). In this clear processing, the stack area 101 for specific control is cleared to "0". Then, initial setting processing of the stack area 101 for specific control is executed (step S3904). In this initial setting processing, initial setting is performed on the stack area 101 for specific control cleared in step S3903, and the stack pointer information of the main MPU 72 is set so that the memory area to be written to is the memory area corresponding to the final address (Y(r+1)) of the stack area 101 for specific control.

Then, a partial clear command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S3905). The partial clear command is a command that causes the production side MPU 92 to recognize that the partial clear process (Figure 68) has been executed. Then, a signal output control process for partial clear is executed (step S3906). In this signal output control process, signal output control is performed in a manner that indicates to the external device, the data counter DC, that the partial clear process (Figure 68) has been executed. Details of the signal output control process for partial clear (step S3906) will be described later.

Then, in steps S3907 to S3909, the same processing as steps S3807 to S3809 of the lottery mode control process (FIG. 67) is executed. Specifically, a determination is made as to whether bonus winning data has been set in the second calculation target area 111 (step S3907), and if bonus winning data has been set (step S3907: YES), a determination is made as to whether the internal RT state flag 153 for the second calculation target area 111 has been set to "1" (step S3908). If a negative determination is made in step S3908, the internal RT state flag 153 is set to "1" (step S3909), and the lottery mode control process is terminated. Setting the internal RT state flag 153 to "1" transitions the gaming state to the internal RT state ST2.

If the power supply is interrupted before a transition to the bonus state or internal RT state ST2 occurs in a game in which bonus winning data is set in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17), the bonus winning data is set in the second calculation target area 111, and the game state is not in the internal RT state ST2. Even if the partial clear process (FIG. 68) is executed, the information about the game state stored in the second calculation target area 111 and the bonus winning data set in the second calculation target area 111 are not erased. If the partial clear process (FIG. 68) is executed when bonus winning data is set in the second calculation target area 111 and the game state is not in the internal RT state ST2, the internal RT state flag 153 of the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1," and the game state transitions to the internal RT state ST2. This prevents a situation in which the opportunity to transition to the internal RT state ST2 is lost due to a power supply interruption before a transition to the bonus state or internal RT state ST2 occurs, even though bonus winning data has been set in the second calculation target area 111.

By executing the partial clear process (Figure 68), the internal RT state flag 153 in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" and the game state transitions to the internal RT state ST2 before the first game after power is restored is started. This allows the first game after power is restored to be started in the internal RT state ST2 state. This prevents a lottery table other than the internal RT state lottery table (Figure 24) from being selected in a game that starts between the time bonus winning data is set in the second calculation target area 111 and the time a bonus win is achieved. This prevents a player from suffering an unfair disadvantage due to a power outage that occurs between the time bonus winning data is set in the second calculation target area 111 and the transition to the bonus state or internal RT state ST2.

Next, we will explain how to transition to the internal RT state ST2 with reference to the time chart in Figure 69. Figure 69(a) shows the state of the internal RT state flag 153 in the second calculation target area 111, Figure 69(b) shows the period during which bonus winning data is set in the second calculation target area 111, Figure 69(c) shows the period during which one or more reels 32L, 32M, 32R are spinning, Figure 69(d) shows the state of operating power supply to the slot machine 10, Figure 69(e) shows the timing when the partial clear process (Figure 68) is started in step S106 of the main process (Figure 14), and Figure 69(f) shows the timing when the game starts.

As shown in Figure 69(f), after the game starts at timing t1, if a bonus role is won in the role lottery process (Figure 17), bonus winning data is set in the second calculation target area 111 at timing t2, as shown in Figure 69(b). Then, at timing t3, as shown in Figure 69(c), acceleration control of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R begins. Then, if the power is cut off at timing t4 while one or more reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spinning, as shown in Figure 69(d), the rotation of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stops, as shown in Figure 69(c).

Then, power is restored at timing t5 as shown in Figure 69(d), and the partial clear process (step S106) is initiated in the main process (Figure 14) at timing t6 as shown in Figure 69(e). At timing t6, bonus winning data is set in the second calculation target area 111 as shown in Figure 69(b), and the internal RT state flag 153 is not set to "1" as shown in Figure 69(a). Therefore, at timing t7 as shown in Figure 69(a), the internal RT state flag 153 is set to "1" in the partial clear process (step S106). This causes the gaming state to transition to internal RT state ST2. Then, at timing t8 after the gaming state has transitioned to internal RT state ST2, the game starts as shown in Figure 69(f).

In this way, if the power is cut off before the transition to the bonus state or internal RT state ST2 occurs in a game in which bonus winning data is set in the role lottery process (Figure 17), the game state will transition to the internal RT state ST2 in a partial clear process (Figure 68) that is carried out between the time the power is restored and the start of the first game. This allows the first game after the power is restored to begin with the game state transitioned to the internal RT state ST2.

As described above, bonus winning data is set in the second calculation target area 111 based on the occurrence of a bonus win in the winning combination lottery process (Figure 17). If a bonus win corresponding to the bonus winning data is subsequently achieved in the game in which the bonus win occurred, the BB flag or RB flag is set to "1" and the gaming state transitions to the bonus state. On the other hand, if bonus winning data is set in the second calculation target area 111 but a bonus win corresponding to the bonus winning data is not achieved, the internal RT state flag 153 is set to "1" and the gaming state transitions to the internal RT state ST2. If bonus winning data is set in the winning combination lottery process (Figure 17) and the power is interrupted before the transition to the bonus state or the internal RT state ST2 occurs in the game in which the bonus winning data is set, the bonus winning data is set in the second calculation target area 111, and the internal RT state flag 153 is not set to "1." In this state, if the partial clear process (step S106) is executed in the main process (FIG. 14) after power is restored, the internal RT state flag 153 is set to "1" before the first game starts after power is restored. This allows the lottery table selected in the first game started after power is restored to be the internal RT state lottery table (FIG. 24), and prevents a lottery table other than the internal RT state lottery table (FIG. 24) from being selected in a game started between the occurrence of a bonus win and the realization of the bonus prize. This prevents a player from suffering an unfair disadvantage due to a power outage occurring after a bonus win has occurred.

If bonus winning data is set in the second calculation target area 111 and the internal RT state flag 153 is not set to "1," and the power recovery process (FIG. 40) is executed in step S103 of the main process (FIG. 14) after power is restored, the game that was interrupted due to a power outage will be resumed with the bonus winning data set in the second calculation target area 111, provided that no error occurs. Therefore, if a bonus win corresponding to the bonus winning data set in the second calculation target area 111 is achieved in the game, the BB flag or RB flag can be set to "1" and the game state can be transitioned to the bonus state. Furthermore, if a bonus win corresponding to the bonus winning data is not achieved in the game, the internal RT state flag 153 can be set to "1" and the game state can be transitioned to the internal RT state ST2. This prevents a player from suffering an unfair disadvantage due to a power outage occurring after a bonus win.

In the second calculation target area 111, the memory area in which information regarding the game status is stored and the memory area in which bonus winning data is set are excluded from the range to be cleared in the partial clear process (step S106). Therefore, when the partial clear process (step S106) is executed in the main process (FIG. 14) after power is restored, it is possible to prevent the bonus winning data stored in the second calculation target area 111 before power is cut off from being cleared. As a result, even if the partial clear process (step S106) is executed after power is restored, the internal RT state flag 153 can be set to "1" based on the fact that bonus winning data was set in the second calculation target area 111 before power was cut off, and the game status can be transitioned to the internal RT state ST2.

If the partial clear process (step S106) is executed in the main process (Figure 14) after power is restored, the game being played before the power was cut off will end. On the other hand, if the return process (step S103) is executed in the main process (Figure 14) after power is restored, the game being played before the power was cut off will continue to be played, provided that no error occurs. This allows the game to be resumed in a situation similar to the situation before the power was cut off, and also reduces the impact of the power cut off.

In the lottery table selection process (FIG. 66), a lottery table is selected based on the settings of the slot machine 10 as well as the states of the first RT mode flag 151, second RT mode flag 152, internal RT status flag 153, BB flag, and RB flag in the second calculation target area 111. In a game in which bonus winning data is set in the second calculation target area 111, whether or not a bonus win corresponding to the bonus win will be achieved is determined based on the combination of stopped symbols. Also, if winning data for a first RT replay role, a second RT replay role, a first fall replay role, or a second fall replay role is set in the second calculation target area 111 in the role lottery process (FIG. 17), whether or not a first RT replay win, a second RT replay win, a first fall replay win, or a second fall replay win will be achieved is determined based on the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In the lottery mode control process (FIG. 67) that is performed after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, the state of the first RT mode flag 151, second RT mode flag 152, and internal RT state flag 153 is changed. This allows the process of setting information other than the setting values referenced when selecting a lottery table to be consolidated into the lottery mode control process (FIG. 67) that is performed after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning.

<Configuration for performing suggestive operation>
Next, a configuration for performing a suggestion operation that suggests a setting value of the slot machine 10 will be described.

In this embodiment, the suggested actions that indicate the setting values of the slot machine 10 are stopping the game and automatic settlement. When stopping the game is suggested, the game enters a stopped state in which the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 indicate the stopped state until the reset button 56 is operated to cancel the game. When stopping the game, a new game cannot be started until the stop cancellation operation is performed. When automatic settlement is suggested, medals corresponding to the number of all virtual medals stored in the credit counter in the second calculation target area 111 are automatically paid out, even though the settlement button 51 has not been operated. With automatic settlement, a new game can be started after the medals have been paid out.

A suggested action can be performed when a trigger for starting the suggested action occurs while the suggested action has been set. In this slot machine 10, there are two triggers for starting the suggested action: "the end of the advantageous zone SC2 when the limited total net increase in gaming media is equal to or greater than a predetermined suggestion standard number" and "the end of the bonus state." The amusement hall manager can select one of these two triggers. In this embodiment, the predetermined suggestion standard number is set to "400," but the predetermined suggestion standard number may be a value smaller than "400," or may be a value greater than "400."

If the end of the favorable period SC2 when the limited total net increase in gaming media is equal to or greater than the specified suggestion standard number is selected as the trigger for initiating the suggestive action, and the favorable period SC2 ends, it is determined that the trigger for initiating the suggestive action has occurred, provided that the limited total net increase in gaming media from the start of the ended favorable period SC2 is equal to or greater than the specified suggestion standard number (specifically, "400"). On the other hand, if the limited total net increase in gaming media in the ended favorable period SC2 is less than the specified suggestion standard number (specifically, "400"), it is not determined that the trigger for initiating the suggestive action has occurred. As already explained, the limited total net increase in gaming media is the increase in the specified difference from the specified reference value, where the minimum value of the specified difference is the specified reference value, calculated by subtracting the total number of gaming media consumed to play games while the advantageous zone SC2 is continuing (0 when no gaming media are being played) from the total number of gaming media awarded through games played while the advantageous zone SC2 is continuing (0 when no gaming media are being awarded). The main MPU 72 determines the limited total net increase in gaming media by referencing the total acquisition counter in the second calculation target area 111.

As already explained, if the power is turned on while the setting key insertion hole 57 is turned ON, the main processing (FIG. 14) executes a partial clear process (step S106) or a full clear process (step S107), followed by a setting value update process (step S109). In the setting value update process (step S109), it is possible to set whether or not a suggested action will be performed and the type of trigger for starting the suggested action before the updated setting value is confirmed.

Before explaining the settings related to whether or not suggested actions are performed and the type of trigger for starting a suggested action, we will explain how the setting values are updated in the setting value update process (step S109). Figure 70 (a) is an explanatory diagram illustrating the display state of the credit display unit 65 when the setting values are being updated.

As shown in Figure 70(a), when the setting value update process (step S109) is initiated, the credit display unit 65 displays a setting value update display that allows the selection of the updated setting value. In the setting value update display, the left segment indicator 65a of the credit display unit 65 flashes the letter "E" as an identification character that indicates that the setting value update process (step S109) is in progress, and the right segment indicator 65b flashes a number indicating the pre-determined setting value (any of "1" to "6"). For example, if the pre-determined setting value is "3," the credit display unit 65 displays "E3" as shown in Figure 70(a).

The blinking display alternates between a lit state in which the letter "E" and the number indicating the set value before confirmation are displayed for 0.5 seconds, and a non-lit state in which they are not displayed for 0.5 seconds. The blinking display continues until the start lever 41 is operated as a confirmation operation.

While the flashing display is being displayed on the credit display unit 65, the amusement hall manager can operate the reset button 56 to update the pre-confirmed setting value displayed on the right-side segment display 65b in the following order: "1" → "2" → ... → "6" → "1," and can confirm the updated setting value by operating the start lever 41. When the confirmation operation (operation of the start lever 41) is performed, the flashing display ends, the letter "E" lights up on the left-side segment display 65a of the credit display unit 65, and a number indicating the confirmed updated setting value (any of "1" to "6") lights up on the right-side segment display 65b.

As shown in FIG. 48, the second calculation target area 111 in the work area 103 for specific control is provided with a suggested operation flag 154 and a trigger type flag 155. The suggested operation flag 154 is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to understand that a setting has been made to perform processing to execute a suggested operation based on the first trigger for starting a suggested operation occurring after the setting value update process (step S109) has been executed. The processing to execute the suggested operation is the processing of steps S4304 to S4313 and steps S4317 to S4318 of the first suggested operation process (FIG. 75) described below.

When a trigger for starting a set suggested action occurs, if the suggested action flag 154 is set to "1", processing to execute the suggested action is executed, but if the suggested action flag 154 is not set to "1", processing to execute the suggested action is not executed. Note that even if processing to execute the suggested action is executed, if the first to third suggested action lotteries described below result in a loss, the suggested action will not be performed.

The trigger type flag 155 is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to grasp the type of trigger currently selected to start the suggested action. When the trigger type flag 155 is set to "0", the selected trigger to start the suggested action is "the end of the advantageous zone SC2 when the limited total net increase in gaming media is equal to or greater than the specified suggestion standard number", and when the trigger type flag 155 is set to "1", the selected trigger to start the suggested action is "the end of the bonus state".

Information regarding the presence or absence of a suggested action and the type of trigger for starting the suggested action is displayed on the combined display unit 66, and the amusement hall manager sets the presence or absence of a suggested action and the type of trigger for starting the suggested action while viewing the information displayed on the combined display unit 66. As already explained with reference to Figure 7(a), the combined display unit 66 is equipped with a left segment display 66a and a right segment display 66b, which are 7-segment displays, and these left segment display 66a and right segment display 66b are arranged side by side horizontally in the common display area 68.

In the setting value update process (step S109), when the credit display unit 65 is flashing, i.e., when a confirmation operation (operation of the start lever 41) has not been performed, the dual-purpose display unit 66 displays a suggested action setting display for setting information regarding the presence or absence of a suggested action and the type of trigger for starting the suggested action. Figure 70 (b) is an explanatory diagram illustrating the display mode of the dual-purpose display unit 66 when the suggested action setting display is being displayed.

As shown in FIG. 70(b), the suggested action setting display flashes a number "0" or "1" corresponding to the value of the suggested action flag 154 on the left segment display 66a of the dual-purpose display unit 66, and flashes an alphabet "A" or "C" corresponding to the value of the trigger type flag 155 on the right segment display 66b. Specifically, when the value of the suggested action flag 154 is "0," the left segment display 66a flashes a number "0," and when the value of the suggested action flag 154 is "1," the left segment display 66a flashes a number "1." Therefore, the amusement hall manager can tell that a suggested action has not been set when the left segment display 66a flashes a number "0," and can tell that a suggested action has been set when the left segment display 66a flashes a number "1."

When the value of the trigger type flag 155 is "0," the right-side segment display 66b displays a flashing identification letter "A," and when the value of the trigger type flag 155 is "1," the right-side segment display 66b displays a flashing identification letter "C." Therefore, when the right-side segment display 66b displays a flashing identification letter "A," the amusement hall manager can determine that "the end of the advantageous zone SC2 when the limited total net increase in gaming media is equal to or greater than the predetermined suggestion standard number" has been selected as the trigger for starting the suggestive action, and when the right-side segment display 66b displays a flashing identification letter "C," the manager can determine that "the end of the bonus state" has been selected as the trigger for starting the suggestive action.

For example, if the value of the suggested action flag 154 is "1" and the value of the trigger type flag 155 is "0," the display on the dual-purpose display unit 66 will be "1A," as shown in FIG. 70(b). The flashing display on the dual-purpose display unit 66, like the flashing display on the credit display unit 65, alternates between a lit state for 0.5 seconds and a non-lit state for 0.5 seconds. By confirming that the flashing display is being displayed on the credit display unit 65 and the dual-purpose display unit 66, the amusement hall manager can determine that the updated setting values and the settings for information regarding the presence or absence of a suggested action and the type of trigger for starting a suggested action have not yet been finalized.

As already explained, the dual-purpose display unit 66 displays the number of awarded game media, which allows the user to check the number of awarded game media based on the formation of a small winning combination, the stop order corresponding display, and the suggestive action setting display; however, the alphabetical character "A" or "C" is only displayed on the right-hand segment display 66b when the suggestive action setting display is being displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66. For this reason, the amusement hall manager can determine that the suggestive action setting display is being displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66 by confirming that the identification character "A" or "C" is being displayed on the right-hand segment display 66b.

When the combined display unit 66 is flashing, the amusement hall manager can operate the left stop button 42 to update the number (the number "0" or "1") corresponding to the suggested action flag 154 displayed on the left segment display 66a of the combined display unit 66, and can operate the right stop button 44 to update the alphabetical identification character (the letter "A" or "C") corresponding to the trigger type flag 155 displayed on the right segment display 66b of the combined display unit 66. Note that the combination of the left stop button 42, middle stop button 43, and right stop button 44 that is operated to set whether or not a suggested action will be performed and the stop button that is operated to set the type of trigger for starting the suggested action is not limited to the combination of the left stop button 42 and the right stop button 44 and can be any combination.

The updated setting values, as well as the settings for whether or not a suggested action will be performed and the type of trigger for starting a suggested action, are confirmed by performing a confirmation operation (operating the start lever 41) while the credit display unit 65 and the combined display unit 66 are flashing. When a confirmation operation is performed, the display on the credit display unit 65 and the combined display unit 66 changes from flashing to lit. Even if the reset button 56, left stop button 42, or right stop button 44 is operated to update the display on the credit display unit 65 or the combined display unit 66, the values of the setting value counter, suggested action flag 154, and trigger type flag 155 in the second calculation target area 111 are not updated until a confirmation operation is performed; when a confirmation operation is performed, the values of the setting value counter, suggested action flag 154, and trigger type flag 155 are rewritten.

When the credit display unit 65 and the dual-purpose display unit 66 are flashing, the amusement hall manager can see that the values of the setting value counter, suggested action flag 154, and trigger type flag 155 in the second calculation target area 111 have not been updated and that a confirmation operation should be performed. Then, by confirming that the display on the credit display unit 65 and the dual-purpose display unit 66 has changed from flashing to lit, the manager can see that the updated setting values, as well as the settings regarding whether or not a suggested action will occur and the type of trigger for starting a suggested action, have been confirmed.

Next, the setting value update process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 71. The setting value update process is executed in step S109 of the main processing (Figure 14). Note that the setting value update process is executed using a program and data for specific control.

The setting value update process first sets the setting value update in progress flag provided in the second calculation target area 111 to "1" (step S4001). As already explained, the setting value update in progress flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to know that a display to update the setting value is being performed on the credit display unit 65. By setting the setting value update in progress flag to "1", the display unit control process (FIG. 56) in step S210 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 15) causes the display data of each credit display unit counter 129, 131 to be output to the credit display unit 65, and the display data of each dual-purpose display unit counter 135, 136 to be output to the dual-purpose display unit 66.

Then, the blinking display start setting process is executed (step S4002). Figure 72 is a flowchart showing the blinking display start setting process. Note that the blinking display start setting process is executed using a specific control program and specific control data.

In the blinking display start setting process, the value of the setting value counter in the second calculation target area 111 is set to a pre-determination setting value counter provided in the second calculation target area 111 (step S4101). The pre-determination setting value counter is set to the pre-determination setting value (numeric information of any of "1" to "6") updated by the credit display unit 65. By setting the value of the setting value counter to the pre-determination setting value counter, the current setting value of the slot machine 10 is set to the pre-determination setting value counter. Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the pre-determination setting value counter is within the range of normal setting values ("1" to "6") (step S4102). If it is outside the normal setting value range (step S4102: NO), the pre-determination setting value counter is set to "1" (step S4103).

If a positive determination is made in step S4102, or if the processing of step S4103 is performed, display data corresponding to the identification character "E," which indicates that the setting value is being updated, is set in the counter 129 for the left credit display section of the second calculation object area 111 (step S4104). Then, numeric display data corresponding to the value of the pre-determined setting value counter in the second calculation object area 111 is set in the counter 131 for the right credit display section of the second calculation object area 111 (step S4105).

Then, the value of the suggested action flag 154 in the second calculation target area 111 is set to the pre-confirmation suggested action flag provided in the second calculation target area 111 (step S4106). The pre-confirmation suggested action flag is a flag in which information regarding the presence or absence of a pre-confirmation suggested action that is updated on the left segment display 66a of the dual-purpose display unit 66 is set. Then, the numeric display data of "0" or "1" corresponding to the value of the pre-confirmation suggested action flag is set to the left dual-purpose display unit counter 135 in the second calculation target area 111 (step S4107).

Then, the value of the trigger type flag 155 in the second calculation target area 111 is set to the pre-confirmation trigger type flag provided in the second calculation target area 111 (step S4108). The pre-confirmation trigger type flag is a flag set with information regarding the type of trigger for starting the suggested action before confirmation, which is updated on the right segment display 66b of the dual-purpose display unit 66. Then, the display data for the identification character "A" or "C" corresponding to the value of the pre-confirmation trigger type flag is set to the right-side dual-purpose display unit counter 136 in the second calculation target area 111 (step S4109).

Then, the blinking display flag 137 in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S4110), and the blinking display start setting process is terminated. By setting the blinking display flag 137 to "1", blinking display will begin in the credit display unit 65 and the dual-purpose display unit 66. This allows the amusement hall manager to understand that the updated setting values, as well as the settings for information regarding the presence or absence of suggested actions and the type of trigger for starting suggested actions, have not yet been finalized.

Returning to the explanation of the setting value update process (Figure 71), after the blinking display start setting process is executed in step S4002, the update in progress process is executed (step S4003). Figure 73 is a flowchart showing the update in progress process. Note that the update in progress process is executed using a specific control program and specific control data.

The update process first determines whether the reset button 56 has been pressed (step S4201). If a positive determination is made in step S4201, the value of the pre-determination setting value counter in the second calculation target area 111 is incremented by 1 (step S4202). It then determines whether the value of the pre-determination setting value counter is equal to or greater than 7 (step S4203), and if the value of the pre-determination setting value counter is equal to or greater than 7 (step S4203: YES), the pre-determination setting value counter is set to 1 (step S4204).

Then, display data for one of the numbers "1" to "6" corresponding to the value of the pre-determination setting value counter in the second calculation target area 111 is set in the counter 131 for the right-side credit display unit in the second calculation target area 111 (step S4205). This updates the display of the pre-determination setting value on the right-side segment indicator 65b of the credit display unit 65. As already explained, even if the value of the pre-determination setting value counter is updated, the value of the setting value counter in the second calculation target area 111 will not be updated until the determination operation (operation of the start lever 41) is performed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4201, if a negative judgment is made in step S4203, or if the processing of step S4205 is performed, it is determined whether the left stop button 42 has been operated (step S4206). If a positive judgment is made in step S4206, the value of the pre-confirmation suggested action flag in the second calculation target area 111 is inverted (step S4207). Specifically, if the left stop button 42 is operated when the value of the pre-confirmation suggested action flag is "0", the pre-confirmation suggested action flag is set to "1", and if the left stop button 42 is operated when the value of the pre-confirmation suggested action flag is "1", the pre-confirmation suggested action flag is cleared to "0".

Then, display data corresponding to the number "0" or "1" corresponding to the value of the pre-confirmation suggested action flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set in the left-side dual-purpose display counter 135 in the second calculation target area 111 (step S4208). This updates the display of information regarding the presence or absence of a pre-confirmation suggested action on the left-side segment display 66a of the dual-purpose display unit 66. As already explained, even if the value of the pre-confirmation suggested action flag is updated, the value of the suggested action flag 154 in the second calculation target area 111 is not updated until a confirmation operation (operation of the start lever 41) is performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S4206, or if the processing of step S4208 is performed, it is determined whether the right stop button 44 has been operated (step S4209). If a positive determination is made in step S4209, the value of the pre-confirmation trigger type flag in the second calculation target area 111 is inverted (step S4210). Specifically, if the right stop button 44 is operated when the value of the pre-confirmation trigger type flag is "0", the pre-confirmation trigger type flag is set to "1", and if the right stop button 44 is operated when the value of the pre-confirmation trigger type flag is "1", the pre-confirmation trigger type flag is cleared to "0".

Then, display data corresponding to the identification character "A" or "C" corresponding to the value of the pre-confirmation trigger type flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set in the right-side dual-use display counter 136 in the second calculation target area 111 (step S4211), and this update processing ends. By setting the display data corresponding to the value of the pre-confirmation trigger type flag in the right-side dual-use display counter 136, the display of information regarding the type of trigger for starting a suggested action before confirmation on the right-side segment indicator 66b of the dual-use display unit 66 is updated. As already explained, even if the value of the pre-confirmation trigger type flag is updated, the value of the trigger type flag 155 in the second calculation target area 111 is not updated until the confirmation operation (operation of the start lever 41) is performed.

In this way, when the credit display unit 65 and the combined display unit 66 are flashing, the amusement hall manager can press the reset button 56 to update the pre-confirmed setting value displayed in the credit display unit 65 within the range of "1" to "6." Furthermore, when this flashing display is occurring, the left stop button 42 can be used to switch the display of information regarding the presence or absence of a suggested action on the left segment display 66a of the combined display unit 66 to "0" or "1." Furthermore, when this flashing display is occurring, the right stop button 44 can be used to switch the display of information regarding the type of trigger for starting a suggested action on the right segment display 66b of the combined display unit 66 to "A" or "C."

Returning to the explanation of the setting value update process (Figure 71), after executing the update processing in step S4003, it is determined whether the setting key insertion hole 57 has been switched to the OFF state (step S4004). If a negative determination is made in step S4004, it is determined whether a confirmation operation (operation of the start lever 41) has been performed (step S4005). If a negative determination is made in step S4005, the process returns to step S4003, and steps S4003 to S4005 are repeatedly executed until a positive determination is made in step S4004 or step S4005.

If a confirmation operation is performed (step S4005: YES), processing is executed to confirm the settings for the slot machine 10, the presence or absence of a suggested action, and the type of trigger for starting the suggested action (processing of steps S4006 to S4009). Specifically, the value of the pre-confirmation setting value counter in the second calculation target area 111 is first set to the setting value counter in the second calculation target area 111 (step S4006). This allows the setting value of the slot machine 10 to be updated to the value displayed on the right segment indicator 65b of the credit display unit 65, which was updated when the amusement hall manager pressed the reset button 56.

Then, the value of the pre-confirmation suggested action flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to the suggested action flag 154 in the second calculation target area 111 (step S4007). This allows the setting regarding the presence or absence of a suggested action to be updated to a setting corresponding to the display on the left segment indicator 66a of the dual-purpose display unit 66, which was updated by the amusement hall manager operating the left stop button 42. Specifically, when "0" is displayed on the left segment indicator 66a, the setting is such that processing to execute the suggested action will not be performed even if an opportunity to start the suggested action occurs, and when "1" is displayed on the left segment indicator 66a, the setting is such that processing to execute the suggested action will be performed when an opportunity to start the suggested action occurs.

Then, the value of the pre-determined trigger type flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to the trigger type flag 155 in the second calculation target area 111 (step S4008). This allows the setting regarding the type of trigger for starting the suggested action to be updated to a setting corresponding to the display on the right-side segment indicator 66b of the dual-purpose display unit 66, which was updated by the amusement hall manager operating the right stop button 44. Specifically, when the identification character "A" is displayed on the right-side segment indicator 66b, "the end of the advantageous zone SC2 when the limited total net increase in gaming media is equal to or greater than the predetermined suggestion standard number" is selected as the trigger for starting the suggested action, and when the identification character "C" is displayed on the right-side segment indicator 66b, "the end of the bonus state" is selected as the trigger for starting the suggested action.

Then, the blinking display flag 137 in the second calculation target area 111 is cleared to "0" (step S4009). This switches the blinking display on the credit display unit 65 and the dual-purpose display unit 66 to a steady display. By confirming that the steady display has begun on the credit display unit 65 and the dual-purpose display unit 66, the amusement hall manager can understand that the settings for the slot machine 10, the presence or absence of a suggested action, and the type of trigger for starting the suggested action have been finalized.

Then, it is determined whether the setting key insertion hole 57 has been switched to the OFF state (step S4010). If a negative determination is made in step S4010, the determination process of step S4010 is repeated until the setting key insertion hole 57 is switched to the OFF state.

If a positive determination is made in step S4004, the blinking display flag 137 in the second calculation target area 111 is cleared to "0" (step S4011). If the setting key insertion hole 57 is switched to the OFF state without a confirmation operation being performed, that is, if the setting key insertion hole 57 is switched to the OFF state before the blinking display in the credit display unit 65 and the combined display unit 66 has ended, the blinking display flag 137 is cleared to "0," and the blinking display in the credit display unit 65 and the combined display unit 66 is no longer performed.

If a positive determination is made in step S4010, or if the processing of step S4011 is performed, a pre-determination information clearing process is executed (step S4012). In the pre-determination information clearing process, the values of the pre-determination setting value counter, pre-determination suggestion action flag, and pre-determination trigger type flag in the second calculation target area 111 are cleared to "0". Then, the values of the counters 129, 131 for each credit display unit and the counters 135, 136 for each dual-purpose display unit in the second calculation target area 111 are cleared to "0" (step S4013), the setting value update in progress flag in the second calculation target area 111 is cleared to "0" (step S4014), and this setting value update process is terminated.

In this way, when a confirmation operation (operation of the start lever 41) is performed while the credit display unit 65 and the combined display unit 66 are flashing, and then the setting key insertion hole 57 is switched to the OFF state, the settings for the slot machine 10, the presence or absence of a suggested action, and the type of trigger for starting the suggested action are updated to the settings selected by the amusement hall manager while looking at the credit display unit 65 and the combined display unit 66. On the other hand, when a confirmation operation (operation of the start lever 41) is performed while the credit display unit 65 and the combined display unit 66 are flashing, the settings for the slot machine 10, the presence or absence of a suggested action, and the type of trigger for starting the suggested action are not updated, regardless of whether the values of the pre-confirmation setting value counter, pre-confirmation suggested action flag, and pre-confirmation trigger type flag in the second calculation target area 111 have been updated. In this case, normal processing (Figure 16) will begin while maintaining the values of the setting value counter, suggested operation flag 154, and trigger type flag 155 in the second calculation target area 111 at the start of the setting value update processing (Figure 71).

The settings for the setting value, the presence or absence of a suggested action, and the type of trigger for starting a suggested action are confirmed with a single confirmation operation (operation of the start lever 41) while the credit display unit 65 and the combined display unit 66 are flashing. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which an operation to update the setting for the setting value, an operation to update the setting for the presence or absence of a suggested action, and an operation to update the setting for the type of trigger for starting a suggested action must be performed three separate times, the operation for updating the setting for the setting value, the presence or absence of a suggested action, and the type of trigger for starting a suggested action is simplified. It is also possible to prevent the setting value update process (Figure 71) from ending with only the remaining settings confirmed if the operation to confirm any of the settings for the slot machine 10, the presence or absence of a suggested action, and the type of trigger for starting a suggested action is forgotten.

Next, we will explain the first to third suggested action lottery that is performed when the trigger for starting the set suggested action occurs.

The main ROM 73 stores six first suggested action lottery tables for "Setting 1" to "Setting 6", six second suggested action lottery tables for "Setting 1" to "Setting 6", and six third suggested action lottery tables for "Setting 1" to "Setting 6". Figure 74(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the winning probability of a suggested action in the first suggested action lottery table, Figure 74(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the winning probability of a suggested action in the second suggested action lottery table, and Figure 74(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the winning probability of a suggested action in the third suggested action lottery table.

If RB state ST4 ends with "end of bonus state" selected as the trigger for starting a suggested action, the first suggested action lottery table is read and a first suggested action lottery is held. Also, if BB state ST3 ends with "end of bonus state" selected as the trigger for starting a suggested action, the second suggested action lottery table is read and a second suggested action lottery is held.

When "the end of the advantageous zone SC2 when the limited total net increase in gaming media is equal to or greater than a predetermined suggestion reference number" is selected as the trigger for initiating a suggestive action, if the initiation trigger occurs when neither the first ending flag nor the second ending flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1," the third suggestive action lottery table is read and a third suggestive action lottery is conducted. As already explained, the first ending flag is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to identify that the number of games played in the advantageous zone SC2, measured using the advantageous continuation counter, is likely to reach the upper limit of the number of games, and the second ending flag is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to identify that the limited total net increase in gaming media, measured using the total acquisition counter in the second calculation target area 111, is likely to reach the upper limit of the net increase. The first ending flag is set to "1" in step S803 of the ending handling process (Figure 30), and the second ending flag is set to "1" in step S807 of the ending handling process (Figure 30).

When "the end of the advantageous zone SC2 when the limited total net increase in gaming media is equal to or greater than a predetermined suggestion standard number" is selected as the trigger for starting a suggestive action, if the setting value of the slot machine 10 is equal to or less than "setting 4," the second suggestive action lottery table is read out and a second suggestive action lottery is conducted, provided that the second ending flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1," and the first suggestive action lottery table is read out and a first suggestive action lottery is conducted, provided that only the first ending flag of the first and second ending flags in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1."

When "the end of the advantageous zone SC2 when the limited total net increase in gaming media is equal to or greater than a predetermined suggestion standard number" is selected as the trigger for starting a suggestive action, and when at least one of the first ending flag and the second ending flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" and the setting value of the slot machine 10 is "setting 5" or greater, if this trigger for starting occurs, automatic settlement will be carried out without a suggestive action lottery being held, and playing will be stopped after the automatic settlement is completed. Therefore, when automatic settlement and playing are carried out at the end of the advantageous zone SC2, the player can be assured that the setting value of the slot machine 10 on which they are currently playing is set to "5" or greater.

As shown in Figure 74 (a), in the first suggested action lottery table for "setting 1," there is a 1/64 chance of winning a suggested action. In the first suggested action lottery table for "setting 1," the chance of winning a stop is "0," and the chance of winning automatic settlement is 1/64. In the first suggested action lottery table for "setting 2," there is a 1/32 chance of winning a suggested action. In the first suggested action lottery table for "setting 2," there is a 0 chance of winning a stop, and the chance of winning automatic settlement is 1/32. In the first suggested action lottery table for "setting 3," there is a 1/16 chance of winning a suggested action. In the first suggested action lottery table for "setting 3," there is a 0 chance of winning a stop, and the chance of winning automatic settlement is 1/16.

In the first suggested action lottery table for "Setting 4", there is a 1/8 chance of winning a suggested action. In the first suggested action lottery table for "Setting 4", the chance of winning a stop is 1/32, and the chance of winning automatic settlement is 3/32. In the first suggested action lottery table for "Setting 5", there is a 1/4 chance of winning a suggested action. In the first suggested action lottery table for "Setting 5", the chance of winning a stop is 1/8, and the chance of winning automatic settlement is 1/8. In the first suggested action lottery table for "Setting 6", there is a 1/2 chance of winning a suggested action. In the first suggested action lottery table for "Setting 6", the chance of winning a stop is 3/8, and the chance of winning automatic settlement is 1/8.

In the first suggestive action lottery table for "Setting 1" to "Setting 6," the more advantageous the setting value is to the player, the higher the probability of winning the suggestive action. Therefore, if a suggestive action is performed at the end of RB state ST4, the player can be made to expect that the slot machine 10 they are currently playing on may have a high setting value.

While the first suggestive action lottery table for "Setting 1" to "Setting 3" only allows for automatic settlement, the first suggestive action lottery table for "Setting 4" to "Setting 6" allows for both stopping and automatic settlement. Therefore, if stopping occurs at the end of RB state ST4, the player can be assured that the setting value of the slot machine 10 they are currently playing is "Setting 4" or higher. With the first suggestive action lottery table for "Setting 4" to "Setting 6," the more advantageous the setting value is for the player, the higher the probability of stopping if they win the suggestive action. Therefore, if stopping occurs at the end of RB state ST4, the player can be made to hope that the slot machine 10 they are currently playing is set to a setting value of "Setting 5" or higher.

As shown in Figure 74 (b), in the second suggested action lottery table for "setting 1," there is a 1/32 chance of winning a suggested action. In the second suggested action lottery table for "setting 1," the chance of winning a stop is "0," and the chance of winning automatic settlement is 1/32. In the second suggested action lottery table for "setting 2," there is a 1/16 chance of winning a suggested action. In the second suggested action lottery table for "setting 2," there is a 0 chance of winning a stop, and the chance of winning automatic settlement is 1/16. In the second suggested action lottery table for "setting 3," there is a 1/8 chance of winning a suggested action. In the second suggested action lottery table for "setting 3," there is a 0 chance of winning a stop, and the chance of winning automatic settlement is 1/8.

In the second suggested action lottery table for "setting 4", there is a 1/4 chance of winning the suggested action. In the second suggested action lottery table for "setting 4", the chance of winning the stop is 1/16, and the chance of winning automatic settlement is 3/16. In the second suggested action lottery table for "setting 5", there is a 1/2 chance of winning the suggested action. In the second suggested action lottery table for "setting 5", the chance of winning the stop is 1/4, and the chance of winning automatic settlement is 1/4. In the second suggested action lottery table for "setting 6", there is a guaranteed chance of winning the suggested action. In the second suggested action lottery table for "setting 6", the chance of winning the stop is 3/4, and the chance of winning automatic settlement is 1/4.

In the second suggestive action lottery table for "Setting 1" to "Setting 6," the more advantageous the setting value is to the player, the higher the probability of winning the suggestive action. Therefore, if a suggestive action is performed at the end of BB state ST3, the player can be made to expect that a high setting value is set for the slot machine 10 they are currently playing on.

While the second suggestive action lottery table for "Setting 1" to "Setting 3" only allows for automatic settlement, the second suggestive action lottery table for "Setting 4" to "Setting 6" allows for both stopping and automatic settlement. Therefore, if stopping occurs at the end of BB state ST3, the player can be assured that the setting value of the slot machine 10 they are currently playing is "Setting 4" or higher. With the second suggestive action lottery table for "Setting 4" to "Setting 6," the more advantageous the setting value is for the player, the higher the probability of stopping if they win the suggestive action. Therefore, if stopping occurs at the end of BB state ST3, the player can be made to hope that the slot machine 10 they are currently playing is set to a setting value of "Setting 5" or higher.

In the first suggestive action lottery table for "Setting 1" through "Setting 4" and the second suggestive action lottery table for "Setting 1" through "Setting 4," the more advantageous the setting value is to the player, the higher the probability of winning the suggestive action. Therefore, if a suggestive action is performed at the end of the advantageous zone SC2 when one or more ending flags are set to "1," the player can expect that a high setting value is set for the slot machine 10 they are currently playing on. As already explained, if the "end of the advantageous zone SC2 when the limited total net increase in gaming media is equal to or greater than a predetermined suggestive reference number" is selected as the trigger for starting a suggestive action, and the trigger occurs when at least one of the first ending flag and the second ending flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" and the setting value of the slot machine 10 is "5" or greater, automatic settlement will be performed without a suggestive action lottery, and play will be stopped after the automatic settlement is completed.

As shown in Figure 74 (c), the third suggested action lottery table for "setting 1" has a 1/64 chance of winning automatic settlement, the third suggested action lottery table for "setting 2" has a 1/32 chance of winning automatic settlement, the third suggested action lottery table for "setting 3" has a 1/16 chance of winning automatic settlement, the third suggested action lottery table for "setting 4" has a 1/8 chance of winning automatic settlement, the third suggested action lottery table for "setting 5" has a 1/4 chance of winning automatic settlement, and the third suggested action lottery table for "setting 6" has a 1/2 chance of winning automatic settlement.

In the third suggestive action lottery table for "Setting 1" to "Setting 6," the more advantageous the setting value is to the player, the higher the probability of winning the automatic settlement. Therefore, if automatic settlement is performed at the end of the advantageous zone SC2 when none of the ending flags are set to "1," the player can be made to expect that the slot machine 10 they are currently playing on has a high setting value.

Next, the first suggested operation processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 75. The first suggested operation processing is executed in step S1209 of the bonus state processing (Figure 34) and in step S1406 of the initialization processing of the advantageous zone SC2 (Figure 36). Note that the first suggested operation processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

In the first suggested action process, it is determined whether the suggested action flag 154 in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S4301), and if the suggested action flag 154 is set to "1" (step S4301: YES), it is determined whether the trigger type flag 155 in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S4302). As already explained, when the value of the trigger type flag 155 is "0", "the end of the advantageous zone SC2 when the limited total net increase in gaming media is equal to or greater than the specified suggestion standard number" is selected as the trigger for starting the suggested action, and when the trigger type flag 155 is set to "1", "the end of the bonus state" is selected as the trigger for starting the suggested action.

If a positive determination is made in step S4302, it is determined whether the bonus state has ended (step S4303). In step S4303, a positive determination is made if the bonus end initialization flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1". If the bonus state has not ended (step S4303: NO), the first suggested action processing is terminated. In this way, when "end of bonus state" is set as the trigger for starting the suggested action, if the advantageous zone SC2 ends without the bonus state ending, the suggested action flag 154 in the second calculation target area 111 will remain set to "1".

If a positive judgment is made in step S4303, this means that the trigger for starting a suggested action has occurred when "end of bonus state" is set as the trigger for starting the suggested action. In this case, the suggested action flag 154 in the second calculation target area 111 is cleared to "0" (step S4304), and the bonus end initialization flag in the second calculation target area 111 is cleared to "0" (step S4305). Then, the suggested action lottery process for when the bonus ends (steps S4306 to S4311) is executed. Clearing the suggested action flag 154 to "0" prevents the suggested action from being performed at the end of the bonus state from the next time onwards. In this way, if "end of bonus state" is selected as the trigger for starting a suggested action, the suggested action can only be executed when the trigger for starting the suggested action occurs for the first time since the setting value update process (Figure 71) was executed. The suggested action flag 154 is automatically cleared to "0," eliminating the need for any operation by the amusement hall manager. This reduces the management burden on the amusement hall manager.

Then, it is determined whether the bonus state that has ended this time is RB state ST4 (step S4306). If the bonus state that has ended this time is RB state ST4 (step S4306: YES), the first suggestive action lottery table corresponding to the setting value of the slot machine 10 is read from the main ROM 73 into the second calculation target area 111 (step S4307). On the other hand, if the bonus state that has ended this time is BB state ST3 rather than RB state ST4 (step S4306: NO), the second suggestive action lottery table corresponding to the setting value of the slot machine 10 is read from the main ROM 73 into the second calculation target area 111 (step S4308).

If the processing of step S4307 or step S4308 is performed, the random number updated in the second calculation target area 111 in the work area 103 for specific control is obtained (step S4309), and the obtained random number is compared with the suggested action lottery table read in step S4307 or step S4308 to determine whether any of the suggested actions have been selected (step S4310).

If any of the suggested actions is selected (step S4310: YES), it is determined whether the type of suggested action selected is automatic settlement (step S4311). If automatic settlement is selected (step S4311: YES), the automatic settlement process (Figure 76(a)) described below is executed (step S4312), and the first suggested action process is terminated. On the other hand, if the stoppage is selected (step S4311: NO), the stoppage process (Figure 76(b)) described below is executed (step S4313), and the first suggested action process is terminated.

Next, the automatic settlement process executed by the main MPU 72 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 76 (a). The automatic settlement process is executed in the first suggested operation process (step S4312 in Figure 75) and steps S4605 and S4608 in the second suggested operation process (Figure 77) described below. Note that the automatic settlement process is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

In the automatic settlement process, an automatic settlement command is first sent to the production-side MPU 92 (step S4401). The automatic settlement command is a command that causes the production-side MPU 92 to recognize that automatic settlement is being executed. Then, a freeze counter setting process is executed (step S4402). In the freeze counter setting process, the freeze counter provided in the second calculation target area 111 is set to the time required to pay out 50 medals, which is the maximum number of medals that can be stored. The freeze counter value is decremented by 1 each time the timer decrement process is executed in step S209 of the timer interrupt process (Figure 15). By executing the freeze counter setting process (step S4402), the end of the current game can be delayed until automatic settlement is completed. Therefore, the acceptance permission process in step S314 of the normal process (Figure 16) is performed after automatic settlement is completed. This prevents gaming media bets from being made while automatic settlement is in progress, and also prevents the game from starting even if the start lever 41 is operated while automatic settlement is in progress.

Then, the credit counter in the second calculation target area 111 is referenced to determine the number of virtual medals stored in memory, and the determined number of stored medals is set in the payout number counter in the second calculation target area 111 (step S4403). The value of the credit counter in the second calculation target area 111 is then cleared to "0" (step S4404), and drive control processing for the hopper device 53 is executed (step S4405). In the drive control processing for the hopper device 53, the hopper device 53 is controlled and driven so that the number of medals corresponding to the value of the payout number counter in the second calculation target area 111 are discharged into the medal tray 59.

Then, it is determined whether the value of the freeze counter in the second calculation target area 111 set in step S4402 is "0" (step S4406), and the determination process of step S4406 is repeatedly executed until a positive determination is made in step S4406. Then, if the time set in the freeze counter in step S4402 has elapsed and a positive determination is made in step S4406, this suggestion operation process is terminated.

In this way, when automatic settlement is performed as a suggested operation, medals corresponding to the number of all virtual medals stored in the credit counter in the second calculation target area 111 are automatically paid out, even if the settlement button 51 is not operated. While automatic settlement is being performed, processing from step S312 onwards in the normal processing (Figure 16) is not executed, and game progress is halted. When the payout of the medals is complete, automatic settlement ends and game progress resumes.

Next, the stopping process executed by the main MPU 72 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 76 (b). The stopping process is executed in step S4313 of the first suggested operation process (Figure 75) and in step S4609 of the second suggested operation process (Figure 77) described below. The stopping process is executed using a program and data for specific control.

The stoppage process first sends a stoppage state notification command to the production side MPU 92 (step S4501). The stoppage state notification command is a command to cause the production side MPU 92 to execute a stoppage state notification, which notifies the production side MPU 92 that a stoppage has occurred. When the production side MPU 92 receives the stoppage state notification command, it executes light emission control of the upper lamp 61, sound output control of the speaker 62, and display control of the image display device 63 so that a stoppage state notification is executed.

Then, it is determined whether or not the operation to cancel the paused state notification has been performed by operating the reset button 56 (step S4502). If the operation to cancel the paused state notification has not been performed (step S4502: NO), the determination process of step S4502 is repeated until the cancellation operation is performed. If a positive determination is made in step S4502, a paused state cancellation command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S4503), and the suggestion operation process is terminated. The paused state cancellation command is a command that causes the production side MPU 92 to end the paused state notification. When the production side MPU 92 receives the paused state cancellation command, it executes processing to end the paused state notification being performed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63.

In this way, when a stop is indicated as a suggestion, the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 will indicate the stop state until a stop release operation is performed. In the stop state, the processing from step S312 onwards in the normal processing (Figure 16) will not be executed, and it will be impossible to start a new game.

Returning to the explanation of the first suggested operation processing (FIG. 75), if it is determined in step S4302 that the trigger type flag 155 is not set to "1," i.e., if "the end of the favorable zone SC2 when the limited total net increase in gaming media is equal to or greater than the specified suggestion reference number" is selected as the trigger for starting the suggested operation, it is determined whether the favorable zone SC2 has ended (step S4314). In step S4314, a positive determination is made if the favorable end initialization flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1." If a negative determination is made in step S4314, the first suggested operation processing is terminated. In this way, if the bonus state ends without the trigger for starting the suggested operation occurring when "the end of the favorable zone SC2 when the limited total net increase in gaming media is equal to or greater than the specified suggestion reference number" is set as the trigger for starting the suggested operation, the suggested operation flag 154 in the second calculation target area 111 remains set to "1."

If a positive judgment is made in step S4314, the initialization flag for the advantageous end in the second calculation target area 111 is cleared to "0" (step S4315). Then, it is determined whether the value of the total acquisition counter in the second calculation target area 111 is equal to or greater than a predetermined suggestive reference number (specifically, equal to or greater than "400") (step S4316). If a negative judgment is made in step S4316, the first suggestive operation processing is terminated. In this way, in a state where "the end of the advantageous zone SC2 when the limited total net increase in gaming media is equal to or greater than a predetermined suggestive reference number" is set as the trigger for starting the suggestive operation, if the limited total net increase in gaming media in the advantageous zone SC2 that has just ended is less than the predetermined suggestive reference number (specifically, less than "400"), the suggestive operation flag 154 in the second calculation target area 111 will remain set to "1". Therefore, if the advantageous period SC2 subsequently ends and the difference in number of coins in the ended advantageous period SC2 is equal to or greater than a predetermined suggestion reference number (specifically, "400"), a suggestion action may be executed.

If a positive judgment is made in step S4316, this means that the trigger for the suggested action occurred when "the end of the favorable zone SC2 when the limited total net increase in gaming media is equal to or greater than the specified suggestion standard number" was selected as the trigger for the suggested action. In this case, the suggested action flag 154 in the second calculation target area 111 is cleared to "0" (step S4317). This prevents the suggested action from being performed at the end of the favorable zone SC2 from the next time onwards. In this way, if "the end of the favorable zone SC2 when the limited total net increase in gaming media is equal to or greater than the specified suggestion standard number" is selected as the trigger for the suggested action, the suggested action can only be performed the first time the trigger for the suggested action occurs since the setting value update process (Figure 71) was executed. The suggested action flag 154 is automatically cleared to "0", eliminating the need for any operation by the amusement hall administrator. This reduces the management burden on the amusement hall administrator.

Then, the second suggested operation process (Figure 77) is executed (step S4318), and the first suggested operation process is terminated. Figure 77 is a flowchart showing the second suggested operation process. Note that the second suggested operation process is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

The second suggestive action process first determines whether at least one of the first ending flag and the second ending flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S4601). If neither ending flag is set to "1" (step S4601: NO), a third suggestive action lottery table corresponding to the setting value of the slot machine 10 is read from the main ROM 73 into the second calculation target area 111 (step S4602). The random number updated in the second calculation target area 111 in the specific control work area 103 is then obtained (step S4603), and the obtained random number is compared with the third suggestive action lottery table read in step S4602 to determine whether automatic settlement has been won (step S4604). If automatic settlement has been won (step S4604: YES), the automatic settlement process (Figure 76(a)) is executed (step S4605), and the second suggestive action process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4601 that at least one of the first ending flag and the second ending flag is set to "1," it is determined whether the current setting value of the slot machine 10 is "Setting 5" or greater (step S4606). In step S4606, a positive determination is made if the value of the setting value counter in the second calculation target area 111 is "5" or greater, and a negative determination is made if the value of the setting value counter is "4" or less.

If the current setting value of the slot machine 10 is "Setting 4" or less (step S4606: NO), it is determined whether the second ending flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S4607). As already explained, the first ending flag is set to "1" in step S803 of the ending corresponding processing (FIG. 30), and the second ending flag is set to "1" in step S807 of the ending corresponding processing (FIG. 30). If the second ending flag is set to "1" (step S4607: YES), proceed to step S4308 of the first suggested action processing (FIG. 75), and execute the processing of steps S4308 to S4313. As a result, a suggested action lottery is conducted based on the second suggested action lottery table. If the automatic settlement is selected in the suggested action lottery, automatic settlement is performed, and if the stop play is selected, the play is stopped.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S4607, i.e., if only the first ending flag is set to "1", the process proceeds to step S4307 of the first suggested action processing (Figure 75), and the processing of step S4307 and steps S4309 to S4313 is executed. As a result, a suggested action lottery is conducted based on the first suggested action lottery table, and if automatic settlement is won in the suggested action lottery, automatic settlement is carried out, and if play termination is won, play termination is carried out.

If at least one of the first ending flag and the second ending flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" and the current setting value of the slot machine 10 is "5" or greater (step S4601: YES, step S4606: YES), an automatic settlement process (Figure 76(a)) is executed (step S4608). After the automatic settlement process is completed, a stop process (Figure 76(b)) is executed (step S4609), and the second suggestive operation process is terminated.

In this way, if at least one of the first ending flag and the second ending flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" and the current setting value of the slot machine 10 is "5" or higher, automatic settlement will be performed without a suggestive action lottery being conducted, and play will end after the automatic settlement is completed. Therefore, if play ends after automatic settlement, the player can be sure that the slot machine 10 they are currently playing has a high setting value of "5" or higher.

Next, the manner in which a stop is performed as a suggested action at the end of BB state ST3 will be described with reference to the time chart in Figure 78. Figure 78(a) shows the period during which the stop state notification is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63, Figure 78(b) shows the state of the suggested action flag 154 in the second calculation target area 111, Figure 78(c) shows the state of the trigger type flag 155 in the second calculation target area 111, Figure 78(d) shows the execution period of the setting value update process (Figure 71) executed in step S107 of the main process (Figure 14), Figure 78(e) shows the timing of the suggestive action lottery at the end of BB state (processing of steps S4308 to S4311 of the first suggested action process (Figure 75)), Figure 78(f) shows the duration of BB state ST3, and Figure 78(g) shows the timing when the operation to cancel the stop state notification is performed.

As shown in FIG. 78(d), the setting value update process (FIG. 71) begins at timing t1, allowing the user to set whether or not a suggested action will occur and the type of trigger for the suggested action. Then, by performing a confirmation operation (operating the start lever 41) at timing t2, the suggested action flag 154 in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 78(b), and the trigger type flag 155 in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 78(c). Setting the suggested action flag 154 to "1" sets the system so that processing is performed to execute a suggested action based on the occurrence of a trigger for the start of a suggested action. Setting the trigger type flag 155 to "1" also selects "end of bonus state" as the trigger for the start of a suggested action. Then, as shown in FIG. 78(d), the setting key insertion hole 57 is switched to the OFF state at timing t3, thereby terminating the setting value update process.

After that, at timing t4, the BB state ST3 ends as shown in FIG. 78(f). At timing t4, the suggested action flag 154 is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 78(b), and the trigger type flag 155 is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 78(c). Therefore, at timing t4, the suggested action flag 154 is cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 78(b), and a suggested action lottery is executed at the end of the BB state as shown in FIG. 78(e). If the suggested action lottery results in a stoppage, at timing t4, the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 begin to notify the stoppage state as shown in FIG. 78(a), and the game enters the stoppage state. In the stoppage state, processing from step S312 onward in the normal processing (FIG. 16) is not executed, and game progress is halted. Then, at timing t5, an operation to cancel the paused state notification is performed as shown in Figure 78(g), which ends the paused state notification as shown in Figure 78(a) and resumes game progress.

In this way, if a trigger for the set suggested action occurs while the suggested action flag 154 is set to "1," a suggested action lottery is held. If the suggested action lottery results in a stoppage, the game will remain in a stopped state until the stoppage notification is canceled. In the stopped state, the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 will notify the stoppage, and game progress will be halted. Also, although not shown, if the suggested action lottery results in an automatic settlement, medals corresponding to the number of virtual medals stored in the credit counter in the second calculation target area 111 will be automatically paid out, even if the settlement button 51 has not been operated. While automatic settlement is being executed, processing from step S312 onwards in the normal processing (Figure 16) will not be executed, and game progress will be halted. When the medals have been paid out, automatic settlement will end and game progress will resume.

Next, with reference to the time chart in Figure 79, we will explain how a suggested action is performed at the end of the advantageous zone SC2 when the setting value of the slot machine 10 is "Setting 5" or higher and at least one of the first ending flag and the second ending flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1". Figure 79(a) shows the period during which automatic settlement is performed, Figure 79(b) shows the period during which a stop state notification is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62 and image display device 63, Figure 79(c) shows the state of the second ending flag in the second calculation target area 111, Figure 79(d) shows the state of the suggested action flag 154 in the second calculation target area 111, Figure 79(e) shows the duration of the BB state ST3, Figure 79(f) shows the duration of the advantageous zone SC2, Figure 79(g) shows the period during which the freeze counter value in the second calculation target area 111 is "1" or greater, and Figure 79(h) shows the timing when the operation to cancel the stop state notification is performed.

As shown in Figure 79 (f), the advantageous section SC2 ends at the timing of t1. At the timing of t1, the second ending flag is set to "1" as shown in Figure 79 (c), and the game state is BB state ST3 as shown in Figure 79 (e). In addition, the value of the trigger type flag 155 in the second calculation target area 111 is "0", and "the end of the advantageous section SC2 when the limited total net increase in the number of gaming media is equal to or greater than a predetermined suggestion standard number" has been selected as the trigger for starting the suggestive operation. In this way, if the current setting value of the slot machine 10 is "Setting 5" or higher, the suggested action flag 154 is set to "1", the value of the trigger type flag 155 is "0", and the second ending flag is set to "1", when the advantageous zone SC2 ends, the suggested action lottery is not executed, and at timing t1, numerical information corresponding to the time required to pay out 50 medals, which is the upper limit of the stored memory number, is set in the freeze counter of the second calculation target area 111 as shown in Figure 79 (g), and automatic settlement is initiated as shown in Figure 79 (a).

After that, as shown in Figure 79(a), automatic settlement ends at timing t2, and as shown in Figure 79(g), the value of the freeze counter becomes "0" at timing t3. At timing t3 when the value of the freeze counter becomes "0," a stoppage status notification begins via the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63, as shown in Figure 79(b). After that, at timing t4, an operation to cancel the stoppage status notification is performed, as shown in Figure 79(h), and the stoppage status notification ends, as shown in Figure 79(b).

In this way, if the current setting value of the slot machine 10 is "Setting 5" or higher, the suggested action flag 154 is set to "1", the value of the trigger type flag 155 is "0", and one or more ending flags are set to "1", when the advantageous zone SC2 ends, the suggested action lottery is not executed, automatic settlement is performed, and then a notification of a play stop state is issued. If play stops after automatic settlement, the player can be sure that the slot machine 10 they are currently playing is set to a high setting value of "Setting 5" or higher.

Even if the advantageous section SC2 ends in the middle of BB state ST3 and a suggested action is performed based on the end of the advantageous section SC2, if the number of gaming media awarded in BB state ST3 is less than 200, which is the mid-game termination reference number for BB state ST3, BB state ST3 will continue, as shown in Figure 79 (e). This prevents the BB state ST3, which is an advantageous gaming state for the player, from ending due to the execution of a suggested action.

As described above, when the suggestive action flag 154 is set to "1" and the value of the trigger type flag 155 is "0", and the advantageous zone SC2 ends, if at least one of the first ending flag and the second ending flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" and the setting value of the slot machine 10 is "setting 4" or less, a first suggestive action lottery (step S4307 and steps S4309 to S4311 of the first suggestive action processing (Figure 75)) or a second suggestive action lottery (steps S4308 to S4311 of the first suggestive action processing (Figure 75)) is conducted. Then, if automatic settlement is won in the first suggestive action lottery or the second suggestive action lottery, automatic settlement is conducted, and if play stop is won, play stop is conducted. Furthermore, if the suggestive action flag 154 is set to "1" and the value of the trigger type flag 155 is "0" when the advantageous zone SC2 ends, and if the values of the first ending flag and the second ending flag are "0" and the limited total net increase in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone SC2 is equal to or greater than a predetermined suggestive reference number (specifically, "400"), a third suggestive action lottery (steps S4602 to S4604 of the second suggestive action processing (FIG. 77)) is held. If automatic settlement is won in the third suggestive action lottery, automatic settlement is carried out. This draws attention to whether or not a suggestive action will be performed at the end of the advantageous zone SC2, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

When the suggestive action flag 154 is set to "1" and the trigger type flag 155 is set to "0," and the advantageous zone SC2 ends, if at least one of the first ending flag and the second ending flag is set to "1" and the setting value of the slot machine 10 is "Setting 5" or higher, an automatic settlement will be performed without a suggestive action lottery, and a play stop state notification will be made after the automatic settlement is completed. By confirming that a play stop state notification has been made after the automatic settlement is completed, the player can be sure that the slot machine 10 they are currently playing is set to a high setting value of "Setting 5" or higher. This draws attention to whether or not a play stop state notification will be made after the automatic settlement, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

If the bonus state ends while the suggested action flag 154 is set to "1" and the value of the trigger type flag 155 is "1," a first suggested action lottery or a second suggested action lottery will be held. If the first suggested action lottery or the second suggested action lottery results in automatic settlement, automatic settlement will be carried out, and if the end of play is won, a notification of the end of play will be issued. This draws attention to whether or not a suggested action will be performed at the end of the bonus state, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

If the left stop button 42 is operated while the setting value update process (Figure 71) is being executed, the number "0" or "1" displayed on the left segment display 66a of the combined display unit 66 is updated, and if the start lever 41 is operated, a value corresponding to the updated number is set in the suggested action flag 154. By operating the left stop button 42 and start lever 41 while the setting value update process (Figure 71) is being executed, the amusement hall manager can select a state in which processing for executing a suggested action when an opportunity to start a suggested action occurs (processing of steps S4304 to S4313 and steps S4317 to S4318 of the first suggested action process (Figure 75)) is executed, or a state in which processing for executing the suggested action is not executed even when an opportunity to start a suggested action occurs.

When a trigger for starting a set suggested action occurs and processing for executing the suggested action (steps S4304 to S4313 and steps S4317 to S4318 of the first suggested action processing (Figure 75)) is executed, the main MPU 72 clears the suggested action flag 154 in the second calculation target area 111 to "0." This eliminates the need for the amusement hall manager to cancel the setting for the execution of suggested actions, and allows the number of times suggested actions are executed after the setting value update processing (Figure 71) is completed to be reduced to one or less.

When the credit display unit 65 and the dual-purpose display unit 66 are flashing, performing a confirmation operation (operating the start lever 41) sets the setting value information updated while viewing the credit display unit 65 to the setting value counter in the second calculation target area 111, information regarding the presence or absence of a suggested action updated while viewing the left segment indicator 66a of the dual-purpose display unit 66 is set to the suggested action flag 154, and information regarding the type of trigger for starting the suggested action updated while viewing the right segment indicator 66b of the dual-purpose display unit 66 is set to the trigger type flag 155. Because the slot machine 10's setting value, the presence or absence of a suggested action, and the type of trigger for starting the suggested action are rewritten based on the operation of the start lever 41 operated by the player to start the game, the number of operating means in the slot machine 10 can be reduced compared to an arrangement in which dedicated operating means are provided for rewriting this information. By configuring the system to rewrite information related to the setting value, the presence or absence of a suggested action, and the type of trigger for starting the suggested action with a single operation of the start lever 41, the operation for rewriting this information can be simplified compared to a configuration in which the operation for rewriting information related to the setting value and the operation for rewriting information related to the presence or absence of a suggested action and the type of trigger for starting the suggested action are separate. It is also possible to prevent the setting value update process from ending in a state where only part of the information related to the setting value, the presence or absence of a suggested action, and the type of trigger for starting the suggested action is rewritten and the operation for rewriting the remaining information is forgotten.

When the setting value update process (Figure 71) is being executed, the combined display unit 66, which displays information to update the information regarding the presence or absence of a suggested action and the type of trigger for starting the suggested action, and the left stop button 42, right stop button 44, and start lever 41, which are operated to update the information regarding the presence or absence of a suggested action and the type of trigger for starting the suggested action, are provided on the front side of the slot machine 10. This simplifies the operations of operating the left stop button 42 to update the information regarding the presence or absence of a suggested action while viewing the display on the combined display unit 66, operating the right stop button 44 to update the information regarding the type of trigger for starting the suggested action, and operating the start lever 41 to confirm the updated information regarding the presence or absence of a suggested action and the type of trigger for starting the suggested action.

Setting information regarding the presence or absence of suggested actions and the trigger for starting suggested actions can only be performed when the setting value update process (Figure 71), which can only be performed by the gaming hall administrator, is being executed. This prevents information regarding the presence or absence of suggested actions and the trigger for starting suggested actions from being illegally rewritten. Furthermore, by performing the process for setting this information in a manner that is not visible to players, the display for updating this information can be displayed on the credit display unit 65 and dual-purpose display unit 66, which are normally visible to players.

Information regarding the presence or absence of a suggested action and the type of trigger for starting the suggested action is displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66. This allows for a reduction in the number of display units in the slot machine 10 compared to configurations that use dedicated display units for displaying this information.

When the display for updating the setting value is being displayed on the credit display unit 65, the display for updating the information regarding the presence or absence of a suggested action and the type of trigger for starting the suggested action is displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66. This allows the operation for updating the setting value and the operation for updating the information regarding the presence or absence of a suggested action and the type of trigger for starting the suggested action to be performed simultaneously in parallel. For example, if the setting values and the information regarding the presence or absence of a suggested action and the type of trigger for starting the suggested action must be set for multiple slot machines 10 before opening, these setting operations can be made simple and time-saving. This increases convenience for the amusement hall manager.

When the value of the trigger type flag 155 is "0" and the limited total net increase in gaming media in the advantageous zone SC2 is equal to or greater than a predetermined suggestion standard number (specifically, "400"), processing is executed to execute a suggested action at the end of the advantageous zone SC2, both in cases where the bonus state ends at the same time as the end of the advantageous zone SC2 and in cases where the bonus state continues after the end of the advantageous zone SC2. Therefore, in situations where the amusement hall manager has selected "the end of the advantageous zone SC2 when the limited total net increase in gaming media is equal to or greater than a predetermined suggestion standard number" as the trigger for starting a suggested action, it is possible to prevent a suggested action from being executed at a time other than the end of the advantageous zone SC2.

When the value of trigger type flag 155 is "1," if the bonus state ends because the conditions for ending advantageous section SC2 are met even though the conditions for ending the bonus state have not been met, processing is executed to execute a suggested action at the end of the bonus state. This prevents the suggested action from being executed at a time other than the end of the bonus state in situations where the amusement hall manager has selected "end of bonus state" as the trigger for starting a suggested action.

In the first to third suggestive action lotteries, the more advantageous the setting value of the slot machine 10 is to the player, the easier it is to win the suggestive action. Therefore, when a suggestive action is executed, the player can be made to expect that the slot machine 10 they are currently playing on has a high setting value. This increases the player's interest in the game.

While the first suggestive action lottery table for "Setting 1" to "Setting 3" only allows for automatic settlement, the first suggestive action lottery table for "Setting 4" to "Setting 6" allows for both stopping and automatic settlement. Therefore, if stopping occurs at the end of RB state ST4, the player can be confident that the setting value of the slot machine 10 they are currently playing is "Setting 4" or higher. With the first suggestive action lottery table for "Setting 4" to "Setting 6," the more advantageous the setting value is for the player, the higher the probability of stopping. Therefore, if stopping occurs at the end of RB state ST4, the player can be made to hope that the slot machine 10 they are currently playing is set to a setting value of "Setting 5" or higher.

While the second suggestive action lottery table for "Setting 1" to "Setting 3" only allows for a win in the stoppage, the second suggestive action lottery table for "Setting 4" to "Setting 6" allows for a win in the stoppage and automatic settlement. Therefore, when automatic settlement is performed at the end of BB state ST3, the player can be assured that the setting value of the slot machine 10 they are currently playing is "Setting 4" or higher. With the second suggestive action lottery table for "Setting 4" to "Setting 6," the more advantageous the setting value is for the player, the higher the probability of winning automatic settlement. Therefore, when automatic settlement is performed at the end of BB state ST3, the player can be made to expect that the setting value of the slot machine 10 they are currently playing is set to a high setting value of "Setting 5" or higher.

By setting information regarding whether or not a suggested action will be performed and the type of trigger for starting the suggested action during the setting update process (Figure 71), the amusement hall manager can cause the suggested action to be performed with a probability corresponding to the setting value of the slot machine 10. This reduces the management burden on the amusement hall manager compared to a configuration in which the amusement hall manager has to decide for themselves whether or not to perform a suggested action based on the setting value.

There are two triggers for the suggestive action: "the end of the advantageous zone SC2 when the limited total net increase in gaming media is equal to or exceeds a predetermined suggestive reference number," and "the end of the bonus state." This allows players to anticipate that the suggestive action will occur both when the advantageous zone SC2 begins and when the bonus state ends. This increases the player's interest in the game.

During the setting value update process (Figure 71), the amusement hall manager can select "the end of the advantageous zone SC2 when the limited total net increase in gaming media is equal to or exceeds a predetermined suggestion standard number" or "the end of the bonus state" as the trigger for starting the suggestive action. This allows the amusement hall manager to know in advance the timing when the suggestive action may be executed on the slot machine 10. This reduces the burden of monitoring the slot machine 10 on the amusement hall manager.

The suggested action flag 154 is set to "1" during the setting value update process (Figure 71), and when the advantageous zone SC2 ends for the first time after the setting value update process (Figure 71) is completed, if the difference in the number of coins in the advantageous zone SC2 is less than the predetermined suggestion standard number (specifically, "400"), the suggested action flag 154 will remain set to "1". This reduces the possibility that, in a slot machine 10 equipped with a configuration for executing suggested actions, the suggested action flag 154 will be cleared to "0" without the first to third suggested action lotteries being executed, even if the amusement hall manager has configured the machine to execute suggested actions.

<Configuration for externally outputting various signals>
Next, a configuration for outputting various signals to the data counter DC, which is an external device, will be described.

Figure 80 is a block diagram showing the configuration for outputting various signals from the main MPU 72 to the data counter DC. As already explained, the slot machine 10 is equipped with an external terminal board 95 that relays signal outputs from the main MPU 72 to the data counter DC. The signals output from the main MPU 72 to the data counter DC include an insertion signal indicating the number of gaming media inserted into the slot machine 10, a payout signal indicating the number of gaming media awarded to the player, a first state signal indicating that the slot machine is in a bonus state, a second state signal indicating that the slot machine is in the advantageous zone SC2, and a third state signal indicating that the slot machine is in the ART state ST6.

As shown in FIG. 80, the signal lines electrically connecting the main MPU 72 and the external terminal board 95 include a turn-on signal line 157 for outputting a turn-on signal, a payout signal line 158 for outputting a payout signal, a first state signal line 159 for outputting a first state signal, a second state signal line 161 for outputting a second state signal, and a third state signal line 162 for outputting a third state signal.

The data counter DC determines the number of gaming media inserted into the slot machine 10 based on the number of times the insertion signal received from the main MPU 72 rises from a LOW state to a HIGH state, and determines the number of gaming media awarded into the slot machine 10 based on the number of times the payout signal received from the main MPU 72 rises from a LOW state to a HIGH state. The data counter DC also determines that the bonus state is in effect based on the first state signal received from the main MPU 72 being a HIGH state, determines that the advantageous section SC2 is in effect based on the second state signal received from the main MPU 72 being a HIGH state, and determines that the ART state ST6 is in effect based on the third state signal received from the main MPU 72 being a HIGH state.

The data counter DC calculates the net increase in gaming media in the bonus state, the net increase in gaming media in the advantageous zone SC2, and the net increase in gaming media in the ART state ST6 based on various signals received from the main MPU 72, and displays information indicating these net increases. Players and amusement hall managers can check the net increase in gaming media in the bonus state, the advantageous zone SC2, and the ART state ST6 based on the display on the data counter DC.

In the signal output control process for all clears executed in step S2009 of the all clear process (FIG. 43), both the deposit signal and the payout signal are set to a HIGH state for 0.5 seconds. In the signal output control process for partial clears executed in step S3906 of the partial clear process (FIG. 68), both the deposit signal and the payout signal are set to a HIGH state for 0.5 seconds, then both the deposit signal and the payout signal are lowered to a LOW state for 0.5 seconds, and then both the deposit signal and the payout signal are set to a HIGH state for 0.5 seconds again. The data counter DC can determine that the all clear process (FIG. 43) has been executed in the slot machine 10 if the deposit signal and the payout signal are set to a HIGH state once in 0.5 seconds, and can determine that the partial clear process (FIG. 68) has been executed in the slot machine 10 if the deposit signal and the payout signal are set to a HIGH state twice in 0.5 seconds.

The main MPU 72 controls the output of signals that cause the data counter DC to recognize that a partial clear process (Figure 68) or a full clear process (Figure 43) has been performed, using the input signal line 157 for outputting the input signal and the output signal line 158 for outputting the output signal. This eliminates the need for dedicated signal lines to output signals that cause the data counter DC to recognize that these partial clear processes and full clear processes have been performed, thereby reducing the number of signal lines.

The first to third state signals are raised when the game starts while the first to third raise preparation flags in the second calculation target area 111 are set to "1." As already explained, the first raise preparation flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to determine that the first state signal output to the external device, the data counter DC, is waiting to be raised from a LOW state to a HIGH state. The first raise preparation flag is set to "1" in step S1112 of the bonus processing (Figure 33) when a bonus win is achieved. As already explained, the second raise preparation flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to determine that the second state signal output to the external device, the data counter DC, is waiting to be raised from a LOW state to a HIGH state. The second raise preparation flag is set to "1" when a transition to the advantageous zone SC2 occurs. The process of setting the second start-up preparation flag to "1" is executed in step S703 of the second control process for the gaming area (FIG. 29), and in steps S1105 and S1110 of the bonus process (FIG. 33). As already explained, the third start-up preparation flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to determine that the process of changing the third state signal output to the external device, the data counter DC, from a LOW state to a HIGH state is awaited. When a transition to the ART state ST6 occurs, the third start-up preparation flag is set to "1" in step S904 of the preparation state process (FIG. 31).

When one or more of the first through third state signals are raised, output control of the insertion signal begins a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) after the signal is raised. This prevents the main MPU 72 from starting output control of the insertion signal before the data counter DC detects the rising edge of the state signal. This allows the data counter DC to accurately detect the number of gaming media inserted in the bonus state, advantageous zone SC2, and ART state ST6.

On the other hand, if the first to third state signals are not raised, output control of the insertion signal begins at the start of the game without measuring the predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds). Therefore, if the first to third state signals are not raised, the period from the start of the game until the data counter DC can determine the number of inserted gaming media can be shortened. Furthermore, the process of measuring the predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) at the start of the game can be omitted.

The first to third state signals are lowered under one of the conditions that the first to third state-in-progress preparation flags in the second calculation target area 111 are set to "1" after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped. As previously explained, the first state-in-progress preparation flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to determine that the first state signal output to the external device, the data counter DC, is waiting to be lowered from a HIGH state to a LOW state. When the bonus state ends, the first state-in-progress preparation flag is set to "1" in step S1210 of the bonus state processing (Figure 34) and in step S1412 of the initialization processing for the advantageous section SC2 (Figure 36). As previously explained, the second state-in-progress preparation flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to determine that the second state signal output to the external device, the data counter DC, is waiting to be lowered from a HIGH state to a LOW state. The second fall preparation flag is set to "1" in step S1404 of the initialization process for the favorable section SC2 (FIG. 36) when the favorable section SC2 ends. As already explained, the third fall preparation flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to determine that it is waiting to fall the third state signal being output to the external device, the data counter DC, from HI to LOW. The third fall preparation flag is set to "1" in step S1005 of the ART state process (FIG. 32) and in step S1409 of the initialization process for the favorable section SC2 (FIG. 36) when the ART state ST6 ends.

When a small win or replay win is achieved, payout signal output control is initiated. In a game in which none of the first to third start-up preparation flags or the first to third stop-down preparation flags in the second calculation target area 111 are set to "1," the end timing of the game is not affected by payout signal output control, and the game ends even if payout signal output control is in progress. This makes it possible to make the next game ready to start even if payout signal output control is in progress. This prevents the timing at which a game can be started from being delayed due to payout signal output control.

In a game in which at least one of the first to third drop preparation flags in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1," i.e., in a game in which at least one of the first to third state signals is dropped, when payout signal output control is performed, the drop of the state signal is postponed until a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) has elapsed since the payout signal output control ended, and the game ends after the state signal is dropped. This prevents the main MPU 72 from dropping the state signal before the data counter DC has finished processing to determine the number of gaming media awarded. This allows the data counter DC to accurately determine the number of gaming media awarded in the bonus state, advantageous zone SC2, and ART state ST6.

In a game in which at least one of the first to third launch preparation flags in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1," i.e., in a game in which at least one of a transition to the bonus state, a transition to the advantageous zone SC2, and a transition to the ART state ST6 has occurred, if payout signal output control is performed, the end of the game is postponed until a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) has elapsed since the end of the payout signal output control, and the next game can be started after the end of the previous game. The in-state signal is then raised at the start of the next game. This prevents the main MPU 72 from raising the in-state signal before the data counter DC has completed processing to determine the number of gaming media awarded. This allows the data counter DC to accurately determine the number of gaming media awarded in the bonus state, the advantageous zone SC2, and the ART state ST6.

As shown in FIG. 80, the second calculation target area 111 in the work area 103 for specific control is provided with a deposit signal output counter 163, an interval adjustment timer counter 164, a payout signal output counter 165, a deposit switch timer counter 166, and a payout switch timer counter 167. The deposit signal output counter 163 is a counter that allows the main MPU 72 to keep track of the number of times the deposit signal output to the data counter DC is raised from a LOW state to a HIGH state. At the start of a game, the deposit signal output counter 163 is set to "3", which is the specified number of gaming media.

The interval adjustment timer counter 164 is a counter that allows the main MPU 72 to determine whether a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) has elapsed since the in-state signal was raised, and whether a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) has elapsed since the output control of the dispensing signal ended. When the in-state signal is raised, or when the output control of the dispensing signal ends, numerical information corresponding to the predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) is set in the interval adjustment timer counter 164. The value of the interval adjustment timer counter 164 is decremented by 1 each time the timer subtraction process (step S209) is executed in the timer interrupt process (Figure 15), and becomes "0" when a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) has elapsed since the start setting process (Figure 81) was executed.

The payout signal output counter 165 is a counter that allows the main MPU 72 to keep track of the number of times the payout signal is raised from a LOW state to a HIGH state. When a small win is achieved, the payout signal output counter 165 is set to the number of gaming media awarded corresponding to that small win. As already explained, in this embodiment, the number of gaming media awarded when a small win is achieved is either "1," "2," "5," or "11." When a replay win is achieved, the payout signal output counter 165 is set to "3," which is the specified number of gaming media.

The on-switch timer counter 166 is a timer counter that allows the main MPU 72 to determine the timing at which the on-signal rises from a LOW state to a HIGH state and the timing at which it falls from a HIGH state to a LOW state during output control of the on-signal. The on-switch timer counter 166 is set to "5" when output control of the on-signal begins. While output control of the on-signal is in progress, the main MPU 72 subtracts 1 from the value of the on-switch timer counter 166 each time an interrupt occurs in the timer interrupt process (Figure 15). When the value after subtraction reaches "0," the on-signal is switched and the on-signal is newly set to "5." Therefore, the on-signal is switched between a LOW state and a HIGH state every 7.45 milliseconds during output control of the on-signal.

The payout switch timer counter 167 is a timer counter that allows the main MPU 72 to grasp the timing when the payout signal rises from a LOW state to a HIGH state and the timing when the payout signal falls from a HIGH state to a LOW state during payout signal output control. The payout switch timer counter 167 is set to "5" when payout signal output control begins. When the main MPU 72 is controlling the payout signal output, it subtracts 1 from the value of the payout switch timer counter 167 each time an interrupt occurs in the timer interrupt process (Figure 15), and when the value after the subtraction reaches "0," it switches the payout signal and sets the payout switch timer counter 167 to a new "5." Therefore, the payout signal switches between the LOW state and the HIGH state every 7.45 milliseconds during the payout signal output control.

Next, the startup setting process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 81. The startup setting process is executed in step S307 of the normal processing (Figure 16). Note that the startup setting process is executed using a program and data for specific control.

In the start-up setting process, the in-game flag in the second calculation target area 111 is first set to "1" (step S4701). This allows the main MPU 72 to recognize that a game is being played. Then, the end-of-award-number display process is executed (step S4702). In the end-of-award-number display process, the end-of-award-number display flag in the second calculation target area 111, the left-side dual-purpose display counter 135, and the right-side dual-purpose display counter 136 are cleared to "0." In this way, when a small win is achieved and the display of the number of awards begins on the dual-purpose display unit 66, the display of the number of awards ends at the start of the game following the game in which the small win was achieved. Then, the replay bet flag and the bet number counter 125 in the second calculation target area 111 are cleared to "0" (step S4703). Then, the input signal output counter 163 provided in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "3", which is the specified number of gaming media bets (step S4704).

Then, it is determined whether the first launch preparation flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S4705), and if the first launch preparation flag is set to "1" (step S4705: YES), the first state signal is raised from a LOW state to a HIGH state (step S4706). In this way, if a game is started with the first launch preparation flag set to "1", the first state signal is raised from a LOW state to a HIGH state at the start of the game.

If a negative determination is made in step S4705, or if the processing of step S4706 is performed, it is determined whether the second launch preparation flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S4707), and if the second launch preparation flag is set to "1" (step S4707: YES), the second state signal is raised from a LOW state to a HIGH state (step S4708). In this way, if a game is started with the second launch preparation flag set to "1", the second state signal is raised from a LOW state to a HIGH state at the start of the game.

If a negative determination is made in step S4707, or if the processing of step S4708 is performed, it is determined whether the third launch preparation flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S4709), and if the third launch preparation flag is set to "1" (step S4709: YES), the third state signal is raised from a LOW state to a HIGH state (step S4710). In this way, if a game is started with the third launch preparation flag set to "1", the third state signal is raised from a LOW state to a HIGH state at the start of the game.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4709 or if the processing of step S4710 is performed, it is determined whether one or more of the first, second, and third start-up preparation flags in the second calculation target area 111 are set to "1" (step S4711). If a positive judgment is made in step S4711, all start-up preparation flags are cleared to "0" (step S4712), the interval adjustment timer counter 164 is set (step S4713), and the start-up setting processing is terminated. In the interval adjustment timer counter 164 setting processing, numerical information corresponding to a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) is set to the interval adjustment timer counter 164 in the second calculation target area 111. As described above, the value of the interval adjustment timer counter 164 is decremented by one each time the timer subtraction processing (step S209) is performed in the timer interrupt processing (Figure 15). The value of the interval adjustment timer counter 164 becomes "0" when a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) has elapsed since the first to third state-in-state signals were set.

If a negative determination is made in step S4711, the closing signal output start flag provided in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S4714), and this start-up setting process is terminated. The closing signal output start flag is a flag that enables the main MPU 72 to determine that closing signal output control should be started in the data output process (Figure 82) in step S211 of the timer interrupt process (Figure 15). By setting the closing signal output control in progress flag to "1", closing signal output control is executed in the data output process (Figure 82).

Next, the data output processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 82. The data output processing is executed in step S211 of the timer interrupt processing (Figure 15). Note that the data output processing is executed using a program and data for specific control.

In the data output process, if the turn-on signal output start flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S4801), the turn-on signal output start flag is cleared to "0" (step S4802), and the turn-on signal is raised from a LOW state to a HIGH state (step S4803). Then, the turn-on switch timer counter 166 in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "5" (step S4804), and the turn-on signal output control in progress flag provided in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S4805). The turn-on signal output control in progress flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to determine that the turn-on signal output control is in progress.

If a negative determination is made in step S4801, it is determined whether the closing signal output control in progress flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S4806). If the closing signal output control is in progress (step S4806: YES), the value of the closing switch timer counter 166 is decremented by 1 (step S4807), and it is determined whether the value after decrement is "0" (step S4808). If a positive determination is made in step S4808, it is determined whether the closing signal is in a LOW state (step S4809). If the closing signal is in a LOW state (step S4809: YES), the closing signal is raised from a LOW state to a HIGH state (step S4810). Then, the closing switch timer counter 166 in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "5" (step S4811).

If a negative determination is made in step S4809, the closing signal is changed from HIGH to LOW (step S4812), and the value of the closing signal output counter 163 in the second calculation target area 111 is decremented by 1 (step S4813). It is then determined whether the value of the closing signal output counter 163 after the decrement is "0" (step S4814). If the value of the closing signal output counter 163 is not "0" (step S4814: NO), this means that the closing signal output control has not ended, and the closing switch timer counter 166 in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "5" (step S4815). This allows the closing signal output control to continue.

If the value of the turn-on signal output counter 163 after decrementing by 1 in step S4813 is "0" (step S4814: YES), this means that the turn-on signal has been raised three times, so the turn-on signal output control in progress flag in the second calculation target area 111 is cleared to "0" (step S4816). This ends the turn-on signal output control.

If a negative determination is made in step S4806, i.e., if it is determined that the turn-on signal output control is not in progress, it is determined whether the value of the turn-on signal output counter 163 in the second calculation target area 111 is "0" (step S4817). The value of the turn-on signal output counter 163 is "3" if the start of the turn-on signal output control is pending, and is "0" if the start of the turn-on signal output control is not pending.

If a negative determination is made in step S4817, it is determined whether the value of the interval adjustment timer counter 164 in the second calculation target area 111 is "0" (step S4818). If the value of the interval adjustment timer counter 164 is "0" (step S4818: YES), the process proceeds to step S4803, and processing is executed to start output control of the closing signal (processing of steps S4803 to S4805). Specifically, the closing signal is raised from a LOW state to a HIGH state (step S4803), the closing switch timer counter 166 is set to "5" (step S4804), and the closing signal output control in progress flag is set to "1" (step S4805).

In this way, while the start of output control of the throw-in signal is on hold, a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) has elapsed since the rising edge of the in-state signal, and the value of the interval adjustment timer counter 164 reaches "0," causing output control of the throw-in signal to begin. By delaying the start of output control of the throw-in signal until the value of the interval adjustment timer counter 164 reaches "0," it is possible to ensure that output control of the throw-in signal in the main MPU 72 begins after the rising edge of the in-state signal is detected by the data counter DC. This allows the data counter DC to accurately determine the net increase in the number of gaming media during the bonus state, advantageous zone SC2, and ART state ST6.

If step S4805 is processed, if a negative judgment is made in step S4808, if step S4811 is processed, if step S4815 is processed, if step S4816 is processed, if a positive judgment is made in step S4817, or if a negative judgment is made in step S4818, dispensing signal control processing is executed (step S4819), and this data output processing is terminated.

Next, the medium provision process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 83. The medium provision process is executed in step S310 of the normal process (Figure 16). Note that the medium provision process is executed using a program and data for specific control.

In the media awarding process, it is determined whether a small win has been achieved in the current game (step S4901). If a small win has been achieved (step S4901: YES), the setting process for the dual-purpose display counters 135, 136 is executed (step S4902). In the setting process for the dual-purpose display counters 135, 136, the number of game media awarded corresponding to the currently achieved small win is first determined by referencing the award number counter in the second calculation target area 111. As already explained, the number of game media awarded corresponding to the currently achieved small win is set in the award number counter during the win determination process in step S3019 of the reel control process (Figure 58). Subsequently, if the number of gaming media awarded is "1," "2," or "5," i.e., if the number of gaming media awarded is a single digit in decimal notation, display data of all "0"s is set to the left-hand dual-use display counter 135 in the second calculation target area 111, and display data for displaying a number corresponding to the number awarded is set to the right-hand dual-use display counter 136. Also, if the number of gaming media awarded corresponding to the newly established small winning combination is "11," i.e., if the number of gaming media awarded is a two-digit number in decimal notation, display data for displaying the tens digit of the number awarded in decimal notation is set to the left-hand dual-use display counter 135 in the second calculation target area 111, and display data for displaying the ones digit of the number awarded in decimal notation is set to the right-hand dual-use display counter 136.

Then, the award number display flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S4903). As a result, in the display unit control process (FIG. 56) executed in step S210 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 15), the display data set in each dual-purpose display counter 135, 136 is output to the dual-purpose display unit 66, and the award number is displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66. As already explained, the dual-purpose display unit 66 continues to display the award number until the start of the game following the game in which the small winning combination occurred.

Then, the number of gaming media awarded corresponding to the small win that has just been established is set in the payout signal output counter 165 in the second calculation target area 111 (step S4904), and the payout signal output start flag provided in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S4905). The payout signal output start flag is a flag that enables the main MPU 72 to determine that payout signal output control should be started in the payout signal control process (Figure 84) described below. By setting the payout signal output start flag to "1", payout signal output control will be started in the payout signal control process (Figure 84).

Then, it is determined whether the number of stored virtual medals stored in the credit counter of the second calculation target area 111 is equal to or greater than the upper limit of stored numbers, which is "50" (step S4906). If a negative determination is made in step S4906, it is determined whether the total value of the stored number of virtual medals (the value of the credit counter) and the number of gaming media awarded corresponding to the established small win exceeds the upper limit of stored numbers, which is "50" (step S4907).

If a positive determination is made in step S4907, a credit counter increment process is executed (step S4908). In the credit counter increment process, the credit counter value is incremented by 1 until the upper limit of the stored memory number (specifically, "50") is reached, and the process of decrementing the value of the awarded number counter in the second calculation target area 111 by 1 is repeated.

If a positive determination is made in step S4906, or if the processing of step S4908 is performed, drive control processing of the hopper device 53 is executed (step S4909). In the drive control processing of the hopper device 53, drive control is performed on the hopper device 53 so that the number of gaming media corresponding to the value of the award number counter in the second calculation target area 111 is paid out to the medal tray 59.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4907, the value of the number of awards counter in the second calculation target area 111 is added to the credit counter of the second calculation target area 111 (step S4910). If the processing of step S4909 or step S4910 is performed, the value of the number of awards counter in the second calculation target area 111 is cleared to "0" (step S4911), and this medium awarding processing ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S4901, it is determined whether a replay win has been achieved in the current game (step S4912). In step S4912, a positive determination is made if the replay occurrence flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1". As already explained, if a replay win has been achieved, the replay occurrence flag is set to "1" in the win determination process in step S3019 of the reel control process (Figure 58).

If a positive determination is made in step S4912, the payout signal output counter 165 in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "3", which is the specified number of gaming media (step S4913), the payout signal output start flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S4914), and this media dispensing process is terminated. By setting the payout signal output start flag to "1", payout signal output control is started in the payout signal control process (Figure 84).

Next, the dispensing signal control processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 84. The dispensing signal control processing is executed in step S4819 of the data output processing (Figure 82). Note that the dispensing signal control processing is executed using a program and data for specific control.

In the dispensing signal control process, it first determines whether the dispensing signal output start flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S5001). If the dispensing signal output start flag is set to "1" (step S5001: YES), the dispensing signal output start flag is cleared to "0" (step S5002), and the dispensing signal is raised from a LOW state to a HIGH state (step S5003). Then, the dispensing switch timer counter 167 in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "5" (step S5004). As already explained, when the main MPU 72 is controlling the output of the dispensing signal, it subtracts 1 from the value of the dispensing switch timer counter 167 each time it executes the dispensing signal control process (Figure 84), and switches the dispensing signal when the value after the subtraction reaches "0."

Then, the payout signal output control in progress flag provided in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S5005). The payout signal output control in progress flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to recognize that payout signal output control is in progress. Then, the payout signal output execution flag provided in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S5006), and this payout signal control process is terminated. The payout signal output execution flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to recognize that a game in which payout signal output control has been performed is being performed.

The payout signal output control in progress flag is cleared to "0" when payout signal output control ends. On the other hand, the payout signal output execution flag remains set to "1" until the external output setting process (FIG. 85) is executed in step S312 of the normal processing (FIG. 16). By providing a payout signal output execution flag separate from the payout signal output control in progress flag, even if payout signal output control ends and the payout signal output control in progress flag is cleared to "0" before the external output setting process (FIG. 85) is executed, the main MPU 72 can determine that a game has been controlled to output a payout signal based on the state of the payout signal output execution flag.

If a negative determination is made in step S5001, it is determined whether the dispensing signal output control in progress flag is set to "1" (step S5007). If the dispensing signal output control in progress flag is set to "1" (step S5007: YES), the value of the dispensing switch timer counter 167 is decremented by 1 (step S5008), and it is determined whether the value after decrement is "0" (step S5009). If a positive determination is made in step S5009, it is determined whether the dispensing signal is in a LOW state (step S5010). If the dispensing signal is in a LOW state (step S5010: YES), the dispensing signal is raised from a LOW state to a HIGH state (step S5011). Thereafter, the dispensing switch timer counter 167 in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "5" (step S5012), and this dispensing signal control process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S5010, the dispensing signal is lowered from a HIGH state to a LOW state (step S5013). The value of the dispensing signal output counter 165 in the second calculation target area 111 is then decremented by 1 (step S5014), and it is determined whether the value of the dispensing signal output counter 165 after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S5015). If the value of the dispensing signal output counter 165 is not "0" (step S5015: NO), this means that the dispensing signal output control has not ended, so the dispensing switch timer counter 167 in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "5" (step S5016), and this dispensing signal control process is terminated.

If the value of the payout signal output counter 165 after subtracting 1 in step S5014 is "0" (step S5015: YES), the payout signal output control in progress flag for the second calculation target area 111 is cleared to "0" (step S5017), and this payout signal control process is terminated. In this way, when the payout signal has been raised the number of times set in the payout signal output counter 165 based on the establishment of a small win or replay win, the payout signal control in progress flag is cleared to "0", and payout signal output control is terminated.

Next, the external output setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 85. The external output setting process is executed in step S312 of the normal processing (Figure 16). Note that the external output setting process is executed using a program and data for specific control.

The external output setting process first executes the management output setting process (step S5101). In the management output setting process, information about the status of the slot machine 10 is output to the gaming hall's management computer, which is an external device, via the external terminal board 95.

Then, it is determined whether at least one of the first to third shutdown preparation flags in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S5102). If none of the first to third shutdown preparation flags are set to "1" (step S5102: NO), it is determined whether at least one of the first to third startup preparation flags in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S5103). If none of the first to third shutdown preparation flags or the first to third startup preparation flags in the second calculation target area 111 are set to "1" (step S5102: NO, step S5103: NO), the external output setting process is terminated. In this case, the game can be ended early without delaying the game end timing, making it possible to start the next game.

On the other hand, if at least one of the first to third stop preparation flags and the first to third start preparation flags in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S5102: YES or step S5103: YES), it is determined whether the payout signal output execution flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S5104). If the payout signal output execution flag is set to "1" (step S5104: YES), this indicates that the game involved payout signal output control. In this case, it is determined whether the payout signal output control in progress flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S5105). If the payout signal output control in progress flag is set to "1" (step S5105: YES), the determination process of step S5105 is repeated until a negative determination is made in step S5105. The dispensing signal output control in progress flag is cleared to "0" in step S5017 of the dispensing signal control process (FIG. 84) when dispensing signal output control has ended.

If a negative determination is made in step S5105, a setting process for the interval adjustment timer counter 164 is executed (step S5106). In this setting process, numerical information corresponding to a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) is set in the interval adjustment timer counter 164 in the second calculation target area 111. The value of the interval adjustment timer counter 164 is decremented by 1 each time the timer decrement process (step S209) is executed in the timer interrupt process (Figure 15), and becomes "0" after the predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) has elapsed.

Then, it is determined whether the value of the interval adjustment timer counter 164 in the second calculation target area 111 is "0" (step S5107). If the value of the interval adjustment timer counter 164 is not "0" (step S5107: NO), the determination process of step S5107 is repeated until a positive determination is made in step S5107. Then, if a positive determination is made in step S5107, the dispensing signal output execution flag in the second calculation target area 111 is cleared to "0" (step S5108).

If a negative judgment is made in step S5104, or if the processing of step S5108 is performed, the first state signal is selected as the target state signal from the first to third state signals (step S5109), and the processing of steps S5110 to S5113 is performed for the first state signal. Since the target state signal is updated in step S5114, which will be described later, the processing of steps S5110 to S5113 is also performed for the second state signal and the third state signal.

After processing step S5109, it is determined whether the fall preparation flag corresponding to the target state signal in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S5110). In step S5110, if the target state signal is the first state signal, a positive determination is made if the first fall preparation flag is set to "1". If the target state signal is the second state signal, a positive determination is made if the second fall preparation flag is set to "1". If the target state signal is the third state signal, a positive determination is made if the third fall preparation flag is set to "1".

If a positive judgment is made in step S5110, the target state signal is lowered from HI to LOW (step S5111), and the lowering preparation flag corresponding to the target state signal in the second calculation target area 111 is cleared to "0" (step S5112).

If a negative determination is made in step S5110, or if the processing of step S5112 is performed, it is determined whether the target state signal is a third state signal (step S5113). If the target state signal is not a third state signal (step S5113: NO), the target state signal is updated (step S5114). In step S5114, if the current target state signal is a first state signal, the target state signal is updated to a second state signal, and if the current target state signal is a second state signal, the target state signal is updated to a third state signal. Then, the process returns to step S5110, and the processing of steps S5110 to S5113 is performed on the updated state signal. If a positive determination is made in step S5113, the external output setting process ends.

In this way, when the drop preparation flag corresponding to one or more in-state signals is set to "1," in games in which payout signal output control is not executed, the in-state signal is dropped without a delay period being set. On the other hand, in games in which payout signal output control is executed, a delay period of a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) is set after the payout signal output control ends, and the in-state signal is dropped after the delay period has elapsed. In this way, a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) is ensured between the end of payout signal output control and the drop of the in-state signal. This prevents the in-state signal from being dropped while the payout signal output control is being executed, and also prevents the in-state signal from being dropped before the predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) has elapsed after the payout signal output control ends.

By preventing the in-state signal from being raised before a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) has elapsed since the payout signal output control ended, it is possible to prevent the main MPU 72 from processing to raise the in-state signal while the data counter DC is still determining the number of gaming media awarded. This allows the data counter DC to accurately determine the number of gaming media inserted in the bonus state, advantageous zone SC2, and ART state ST6.

When the launch preparation flag corresponding to one or more in-state signals is set to "1," in a game in which payout signal output control is not executed, the game ends without a delay period being set. This allows the next game to start early. On the other hand, in a game in which payout signal output control is executed, a delay period of a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) is set after the payout signal output control ends, and the game ends after this delay period has elapsed. This ensures a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) between the end of payout signal output control and the start of the next game when the in-state signal is launched. This prevents the in-state signal from being launched while the payout signal output control is being executed, and also prevents the in-state signal from being launched before the predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) has elapsed after the payout signal output control ends.

When payout signal output control is performed in a game in which the in-state signal is lowered, the interval adjustment timer counter 164 begins measuring a predetermined time (500 milliseconds) after the payout signal output control ends, and the end of the game is postponed until the measurement of the predetermined time ends. Furthermore, in games in which the in-state signal is not lowered, the interval adjustment timer counter 164 is not used to measure time. Therefore, the interval adjustment timer counter 164 always remains at "0" when the game ends. As previously explained, when the in-state signal is raised at the start of a game, the interval adjustment timer counter 164 begins measuring a predetermined time (500 milliseconds) at the start of the game. Because the measurement period of the predetermined time that starts at the start of the game and the measurement period of the predetermined time that starts after the payout signal output control ends do not overlap, a single interval adjustment timer counter 164 can be used to measure the predetermined time (500 milliseconds) from the rise of the in-state signal and the predetermined time (500 milliseconds) after the payout signal output control ends. This simplifies the configuration of the main RAM 74 for measuring the predetermined time.

Next, the rising and falling of the in-state signal will be explained with reference to the time chart in Figure 86, using the rising and falling of the third-state signal as an example. Figure 86(a) shows the state of the third-state signal, Figure 86(b) shows the state of the deposit signal output control flag in the second calculation target area 111, Figure 86(c) shows the state of the payout signal output control flag in the second calculation target area 111, Figure 86(d) shows the state of the third-rise preparation flag in the second calculation target area 111, Figure 86(e) shows the state of the third-fall preparation flag in the second calculation target area 111, Figure 86(f) shows the period during which the value of the interval adjustment timer counter 164 in the second calculation target area 111 is 1 or greater, and Figure 86(g) shows the game execution period.

First, we will explain what happens when the game ends without the first to third startup preparation flags and the first to third shutdown preparation flags in the second calculation target area 111 being set to "1."

As shown in Figure 86 (c), at timing t1, the payout signal output control in progress flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" and payout signal output control begins. Then, at timing t2 while payout signal output control is being executed, the game ends as shown in Figure 86 (g). This makes it possible to start the next game.

Then, at timing t3 while the payout signal output control is being executed, the game starts as shown in FIG. 86(g), and the payout signal output control in progress flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 86(b), and the payout signal output control in progress flag in the second calculation target area 111 is started. Then, at timing t4, the payout signal output control ends as shown in FIG. 86(c), and the payout signal output control in progress flag in the second calculation target area 111 is cleared to "0." Then, at timing t5, the payout signal output control ends as shown in FIG. 86(b), and the payout signal output control in progress flag in the second calculation target area 111 is cleared to "0."

In this way, if the first to third startup preparation flags and the first to third shutdown preparation flags are not set to "1," the game ends and the next game can be started, even if the payout signal output control is still in progress. By enabling the next game to start early, frequent waiting times during which the game cannot be started can be prevented.

Next, we will explain what happens when the third state signal falls at the end of the game.

As shown in Figure 86(c), at timing t6, the dispensing signal output control in progress flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1", and dispensing signal output control is initiated. Then, as shown in Figure 86(e), at timing t7, the third rise preparation flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1". Then, at timing t8, dispensing signal output control ends, and the dispensing signal output control in progress flag is cleared to "0". As shown in Figure 86(e), at timing t8, the third fall preparation flag is set to "1". Therefore, at timing t8 when dispensing signal output control ends, numerical information corresponding to a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) is set in the interval adjustment timer counter 164 in the second calculation target area 111, and measurement of the predetermined time begins, as shown in Figure 86(f).

Then, at time t9, a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) after the payout signal output control ended at time t8, the value of the interval adjustment timer counter 164 becomes "0," as shown in Figure 86(f). At this time t9, the third state signal falls from HI to LOW as shown in Figure 86(a), and the third fall preparation flag is cleared to "0" as shown in Figure 86(e). Then, the game ends at time t10 as shown in Figure 86(g).

In this way, when payout signal output control is performed in a game in which the in-state signal is turned off, a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) is ensured between the end of payout signal output control and the turning off of the in-state signal. This prevents the main MPU 72 from turning off the in-state signal while the data counter DC is processing to determine the number of gaming media awarded.

Next, we will explain what happens when the third state signal is raised.

As shown in Figure 86(c), at timing t11, the dispensing signal output control in progress flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1", and dispensing signal output control is initiated. Thereafter, as shown in Figure 86(d), at timing t12, the third start-up preparation flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1". Thereafter, at timing t13, dispensing signal output control ends, and the dispensing signal output control in progress flag is cleared to "0". As shown in Figure 86(d), at timing t13, the third start-up preparation flag is set to "1". Therefore, at timing t13 when dispensing signal output control ends, numerical information corresponding to a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) is set in the interval adjustment timer counter 164 in the second calculation target area 111, and measurement of the predetermined time begins, as shown in Figure 86(f).

Then, at time t14, a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) after the payout signal output control ended at time t13, the value of the interval adjustment timer counter 164 becomes "0," as shown in Figure 86 (f). Then, at time t15, as shown in Figure 86 (g), the game ends and the next game can be started.

Then, as shown in Figure 86(g), the game starts at time t16. As shown in Figure 86(d), the third launch preparation flag is set to "1" at time t16. Therefore, at time t16 when the game starts, the third state signal is raised as shown in Figure 86(a), and the third launch preparation flag is cleared to "0" as shown in Figure 86(d). Also, at time t16 when the third state signal is raised, numerical information corresponding to a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) is set in the interval adjustment timer counter 164 in the second calculation target area 111 as shown in Figure 86(f), and measurement of the predetermined time begins.

Then, at time t17, a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) after time t16 when the third state signal was raised, the value of the interval adjustment timer counter 164 becomes "0" as shown in Figure 86(f), and the turn-on signal output control in progress flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" as shown in Figure 86(b), and turn-on signal output control begins.

In this way, when payout signal output control is performed in a game in which the startup preparation flag is set to "1," the game ends a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) after the payout signal output control ends, and the next game becomes ready to start. The in-state signal is then raised when the next game starts. Because a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) is ensured between the end of payout signal output control and the raising of the in-state signal, it is possible to prevent the main MPU 72 from raising the in-state signal while the data counter DC is processing to determine the number of gaming media awarded.

If the in-state signal (specifically, the third in-state signal) is raised at the start of a game, the start of output control of the insertion signal is postponed until a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) has elapsed since the in-state signal was raised. This prevents the main MPU 72 from starting output control of the insertion signal before the data counter DC detects the rise of the in-state signal. This allows the data counter DC to accurately determine the number of gaming media inserted in the bonus state, the number of gaming media inserted in the advantageous zone SC2, and the number of gaming media inserted in the ART state ST6.

As described above, when one or more of the first through third state signals are raised, output control of the insertion signal begins a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) after the signal is raised. This prevents the main MPU 72 from starting output control of the insertion signal before the data counter DC detects the rising edge of the state signal. This allows the data counter DC to accurately detect the number of gaming media inserted in the bonus state, advantageous zone SC2, and ART state ST6.

Without setting a freeze period at the start of the bonus state, advantageous section SC2, or ART state ST6, the main MPU 72 can start output control of the input signal after the data counter DC has completed processing to grasp the rising edge of the in-state signal. Because there is no need to set a freeze period, the bonus state, advantageous section SC2, or ART state ST6 can be started smoothly without causing stress to the player.

If the first to third state signals are not raised, output control of the insertion signal begins at the start of the game without measuring the predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds). Therefore, if the first to third state signals are not raised, the period from the start of the game until the data counter DC can determine the number of inserted gaming media can be shortened. In addition, the process of measuring the predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) at the start of the game can be omitted.

In a game in which at least one of the first to third state signals is turned off, if payout signal output control is performed, the turning off of the state signal is postponed until a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) has elapsed since the payout signal output control ended, and the game ends after the state signal is turned off. This prevents the main MPU 72 from turning off the state signal before the data counter DC has finished processing to determine the number of gaming media awarded. This allows the data counter DC to accurately determine the number of gaming media awarded in the bonus state, advantageous zone SC2, and ART state ST6.

In games where payout signal output control is performed based on the establishment of a small win or replay win, the falling of the in-state signal is postponed until a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) has passed since the end of payout signal output control, and the game ends after the in-state signal has fallen. By ending the game after the in-state signal has fallen, it is possible to prevent the next game from starting and the output control of the throw-in signal from starting before the in-state signal has fallen.

In a game in which at least one of a transition to the bonus state, a transition to the advantageous zone SC2, and a transition to the ART state ST6 has occurred, if payout signal output control is performed, the end of the game is postponed until a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) has elapsed since the end of the payout signal output control, and the next game can be started after the end of the previous game. The in-state signal is then raised when the next game starts. This prevents the main MPU 72 from raising the in-state signal before the data counter DC has finished processing to determine the number of gaming media awarded. This allows the data counter DC to accurately determine the number of gaming media awarded in the bonus state, the advantageous zone SC2, and the ART state ST6.

In a game in which none of the first to third startup preparation flags and the first to third shutdown preparation flags in the second calculation target area 111 are set to "1," the timing of the end of that game is not affected by the payout signal output control, and the game ends even if the payout signal output control is still in progress. This makes it possible to make the next game ready to start even if the payout signal output control is still in progress. This prevents the payout signal output control from causing a delay in the timing at which the game can start.

When a replay win is achieved, output control is performed to output a payout signal for a specified number of gaming media (specifically, "3"), and in the next game after the replay win is achieved, output control is performed to output a deposit signal for the specified number. This eliminates the need for a dedicated signal line connecting the main MPU 72 and the data counter DC to send a signal indicating that a replay win has been achieved, while still making it possible to grasp the net increase in the number of gaming media, including when a replay win is achieved, in the data counter DC.

The main MPU 72 causes the data counter DC to recognize the number of gaming media bets by raising the input signal a number of times corresponding to the number of gaming media bets, and causes the data counter DC to recognize the number of gaming media awarded based on the establishment of a small win or the establishment of a replay win by raising the payout signal a number of times corresponding to the number of gaming media awarded or the specified number of gaming media. This prevents an increase in the number of signal lines electrically connecting the main MPU 72 and the data counter DC, while allowing the data counter DC to grasp the number of gaming media bets, the number of gaming media awarded based on the establishment of a small win, and the establishment of a replay win.

The main MPU 72 uses the insert signal line 157 for outputting the insert signal and the payout signal line 158 for outputting the payout signal to control the output of signals that cause the data counter DC to recognize that the partial clear process (FIG. 68) in step S106 of the main processing (FIG. 14) and the full clear process (FIG. 43) in step S107 have been performed. This eliminates the need for dedicated signal lines to output signals that cause the data counter DC to recognize that these partial clear processes and full clear processes have been performed, thereby reducing the number of signal lines.

The main MPU 72 uses one interval adjustment timer counter 164 to determine whether a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) has elapsed since the in-state signal was raised, and whether a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) has elapsed since the output control of the dispensing signal ended. This simplifies the configuration of the main RAM 74 compared to a configuration in which two interval adjustment timer counters 164 are provided.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

The backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 41) is executed using a non-specific control program and non-specific control data. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the backup abnormality confirmation process is executed using a specific control program and specific control data, the storage area in the main ROM 73 can have more storage capacity for storing the specific control program and specific control data.

If the supply of operating power begins without the setting key insertion hole 57 being turned on, the processing state before power is restored is restored, provided that one of the conditions is that the checksum calculated after power is restored matches the checksum calculated and stored for the same calculation range as the checksum before power is shut off. The checksum calculation range includes the first calculation target area 109, the non-specific control work area 102, the second calculation target area 111, the first unused area 105, and the second unused area 106. Therefore, if an abnormality occurs after power is restored in which the data stored in the first calculation target area 109, the non-specific control work area 102, the second calculation target area 111, the first unused area 105, and the second unused area 106 differs from the data stored before power was shut off, it is possible to prevent gameplay from proceeding after power is restored based on the abnormal data.

In the power recovery process (Figure 40), when the backup abnormality confirmation process (step S1804) is executed as a process corresponding to non-specific control, return address information for returning to the process next after the backup abnormality confirmation process (step S1804) is written to the top area 108 in the stack area 101 for specific control after the backup abnormality confirmation process (step S1804) is completed. The top area 108 where the return address information is stored at the start of the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 41) is excluded from the range of checksum calculation. This makes it possible to execute the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 41) as a process corresponding to non-specific control after power recovery, while preventing changes to the data stored in the first calculation target area 109, which is the range of checksum calculation in the stack area 101 for specific control.

The checksum area 114 in the specific control work area 103, where the checksum calculated before the power was shut off is stored, is excluded from the range of checksum calculations. This prevents changes to data stored in storage areas included in the range of checksum calculations in the main RAM 74, while allowing the checksum calculated before the power was shut off to be stored in the checksum area 114.

When the power supply is cut off and the operation of the main MPU 72 stops, the data stored in the specific control stack area 101 at the start of the processing round of the timer interrupt processing (Figure 15) in which the power outage was identified is stored in the first calculation target area 109 of the specific control stack area 101 and the top save area 115 of the second calculation target area 111, including return address information corresponding to the process following the process being executed immediately before the interrupt by the timer interrupt processing (Figure 15). Furthermore, when the power supply is cut off and the operation of the main MPU 72 stops, the data stored in registers other than the program counter in the main MPU 72 at the start of the processing round of the timer interrupt processing (Figure 15) in which the power outage was identified is stored in the stack pointer save area 116 and the register save area 117 in the second calculation target area 111. In this way, the power is cut off while the information for restoring the processing state to the state immediately before the start of the processing round of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 15) in which the occurrence of a power outage was identified is stored in the first calculation target area 109 and the second calculation target area 111. Therefore, after the power is restored, the information stored in the first calculation target area 109 and the second calculation target area 111 can be used to restore the processing state to the state immediately before the start of the processing round of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 15) in which the occurrence of a power outage was identified.

At the time the power is cut off, the first calculation target area 109 and second calculation target area 111, which store information for restoring the processing state to the state immediately before the start of the processing round of the timer interrupt processing (Figure 15) in which the power outage was identified, are included in the checksum calculation range. Therefore, before restoring the processing state to the state immediately before the start of the processing round of the timer interrupt processing (Figure 15) in which the power outage was identified after the power is restored, it is possible to confirm that no abnormalities have occurred in the information for restoring the processing state to the state immediately before the start of the processing round of the timer interrupt processing (Figure 15) in which the power outage was identified. This prevents the processing state from being restored based on data in which an abnormality has occurred.

The process for identifying the occurrence of a power outage (the process of step S202 in the timer interrupt process (Figure 15)) is a process corresponding to specific control, and the power outage process (Figure 39) executed when the occurrence of a power outage is identified is also a process corresponding to specific control. If a configuration were used in which processing corresponding to non-specific control was included from the time the occurrence of a power outage was identified until the time the power outage process was executed and the infinite loop was entered, processing would be required to save information from the registers of the main MPU 72 when transitioning from processing corresponding to specific control to processing corresponding to non-specific control, and processing would be required to restore the saved register information to the registers of the main MPU 72 when returning from processing corresponding to non-specific control to processing corresponding to specific control. In contrast, a configuration in which the series of processes from identifying the occurrence of a power outage until the time the power outage process was executed and the infinite loop was entered is executed only using processing corresponding to specific control can shorten the processing executed during the period from identifying the occurrence of a power outage to operation of the main MPU 72 stopping.

In the power recovery process (Figure 40), an interrupt by the timer interrupt process (Figure 15) is permitted after the backup abnormality confirmation process (step S1804) is executed. This prevents the data stored in the second calculation target area 111 from being changed if an interrupt by the timer interrupt process occurs before the backup abnormality confirmation process is executed and information from the register of the main MPU 72 is written to the second calculation target area 111.

In the timer interrupt process (Figure 15), the information in all registers of the main MPU 72 is initially saved to the second calculation target area 111 in the specific control work area 103. If a power outage is identified, power outage processing (step S204) is executed in that state, and an infinite loop is entered. When the timer interrupt process (Figure 15) is resumed after power is restored, steps S205 to S214 are executed, and then in step S215, the information in all registers that was saved in the second calculation target area 111 before the power was cut off is restored to all registers of the main MPU 72. This allows various processes in the main MPU 72, such as normal processing, to continue in the state before the power was cut off.

The range of checksum calculations includes the work area 102 for non-specific control, which stores management information for the slot machine 10 (information for displaying the advantageous zone stay ratio on the ratio display 85). The power restoration process (Figure 40) executes processing to return to the processing state immediately before the start of the processing round of the timer interrupt process (Figure 15) in which the power outage was identified, with one of the conditions being that the checksum calculated after power is restored matches the checksum calculated and stored before the power was cut off. This prevents gameplay from continuing while an abnormality exists in the management information for the slot machine 10 stored in the work area 102 for non-specific control.

The non-specific control stack area 104 is excluded from the scope of checksum calculation. Therefore, after power is restored, when the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 41), a non-specific control process, is started while the power recovery process (Figure 40), a specific control process, is being executed, data from some registers in the primary MPU 72 can be saved to the non-specific control stack area 104 without changing the data stored in the scope of checksum calculation. At the end of the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 41), the data saved in the non-specific control stack area 104 can be restored to those registers in the primary MPU 72. This allows those registers in the primary MPU 72 to be used in the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 41), while the data in those registers can be restored to the data at the start of the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 41), allowing the power recovery process (Figure 40), a specific control process, to be resumed. Furthermore, because the non-specific control stack area 104 is excluded from the scope of checksum calculation, the scope of checksum calculation is reduced. This reduces the amount of processing that must be performed from the time a power outage is detected until the power supply is shut off and operation of the main MPU 72 stops.

If the checksum calculated after power is restored does not match the checksum stored before power was cut off, i.e., if an abnormality occurs in the data stored in a memory area included in the range of checksum calculation, the backup abnormality flag 113 is set to "1" and a backup abnormality alert is issued by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63. This allows the amusement hall manager to know that an abnormality has occurred in the data stored in a memory area included in the range of checksum calculation.

If the backup abnormality flag 113 is set to "1" and the supply of operating power is started while the setting key insertion hole 57 is turned ON, the all clear process (Figure 43) is executed, regardless of whether the reset button 56 is pressed, and all storage areas in the main RAM 74, including the backup abnormality flag 113, are initialized. This prevents gameplay from proceeding based on abnormal data when an abnormality has occurred in the data stored in the range subject to checksum calculation.

If the backup abnormality flag 113 is set to "1" and the supply of operating power is started while the setting key insertion hole 57 is turned ON, the all-clear process (Figure 43) will be executed without pressing the reset button 56. This makes it easy for the amusement hall manager to understand how to clear the backup abnormality flag 113 when it is set to "1."

During the processing round of the start waiting process (step S302) in which the value of the bet number counter 125 has been incremented by "1" or more, the main MPU 72 sends to the presentation MPU 92 one bet command corresponding to the final value of the bet number counter 125 during that processing round. Even if the credit insertion button 47 is operated to increase the number of gaming media bets by "2" or more at one time, the number of bet commands sent from the main MPU 72 to the presentation MPU 92 can be limited to one. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which multiple bet commands equal to the increase in the number of gaming media bets is sent when the increase in the number of gaming media is "2" or more, the processing load required to send bet commands from the main MPU 72 to the presentation MPU 92 can be reduced.

If the main MPU 72 is configured to send commands to the presentation MPU 92 that enable it to determine the number of gaming media bets in the previous processing run of the start waiting process (step S302) and the number of gaming media bets in the current processing run, there are six possible combinations of "number of gaming media bets in the previous processing run" → "number of gaming media bets in the current processing run": "0" → "1," "0" → "2," "0" → "3," "1" → "2," "1" → "3," and "2" → "3." Therefore, six types of bet commands must be stored in the main ROM 73. Furthermore, a memory area must be provided in the second calculation target area 111 to store the number of gaming media bets in the previous processing run of the start waiting process (step S302). In contrast, this embodiment is configured to send a bet command indicating only the increased number of gaming media bets (three possibilities: "1" to "3") for the current round of the start waiting process (step S302), which reduces the number of bet commands stored in the main ROM 73 and simplifies the configuration of the main RAM 74.

When the credit insertion button 47 is operated, the bet number may increase by "1," "2," or "3." The main MPU 72 sends only one bet command corresponding to the increased bet number to the presentation MPU 92, regardless of the number of gaming media bets before the credit insertion button 47 was operated. This eliminates the need for a dedicated bet command to have the presentation MPU 92 recognize that the credit insertion button 47 has been operated, while maintaining a configuration in which, when the credit insertion button 47 is operated and the bet number increases by "2" or more, multiple bet alarm sounds corresponding to the combination of the gaming media bet numbers before and after the increase are output in sequence. Because there is no need to pre-store in the main ROM 73 a dedicated bet command to have the presentation MPU 92 recognize that the credit insertion button 47 has been operated, the number of bet commands stored in the main ROM 73 can be reduced.

During the first wait-to-start process (step S302) executed after the end of a game in which a replay win has been achieved, the main MPU 72 sets the bet number counter 125 to "3" and sends a third bet command to the presentation MPU 92. This allows the first to third bet alert sounds to be output from the speaker 62 even when the number of gaming media bets reaches "3" based on the achievement of a replay win. Compared to a configuration in which dedicated bet commands indicating that gaming media have been bet upon the achievement of a replay win are stored in the main ROM 73, this reduces the number of bet commands stored in the main ROM 73 and prevents the main MPU 72 from having to process the bet command to send to the presentation MPU 92 with increased complexity.

The presentation-side RAM 94 is provided with a first sound set flag 127 and a second sound set flag 128, which enable the type of bet command already received from the main MPU 72 to be determined. The presentation-side MPU 92 determines the number of gaming media bets before the increase based on the state of the first sound set flag 127 and the second sound set flag 128, and determines the number of gaming media bets after the increase based on the bet command received from the main MPU 72. Therefore, even if the only information that the presentation-side MPU 92 can determine based on the bet command received from the main MPU 72 is the number of gaming media bets after the increase in the current processing round of the start waiting process (step S302), it can output a bet alert sound from the speaker 62 in a manner corresponding to the combination of the number of gaming media bets before and after the increase.

The presentation-side ROM 93 stores a number (specifically, "3") of bet alarm sound tables for outputting bet alarm sounds that notify players that the number of bets on gaming media has increased by 1, the number corresponding to the type of bet number (specifically, "1" to "3") after the increase by 1. Specifically, a first bet alarm sound table that notifies players that the number of bets has increased from "0" to "1," a second bet alarm sound table that notifies players that the number of bets has increased from "1" to "2," and a third bet alarm sound table that notifies players that the number of bets has increased from "2" to "3" are stored. Based on the bet command received from the main MPU 72, the presentation MPU 92 loads the bet sound alarm tables into the output target area 122 in the following order: first bet sound alarm table → second bet sound alarm table → third bet sound alarm table. The presentation MPU 92 controls the sound output of the speaker 62 based on these bet sound alarm tables so that the bet sound alarms are output from the speaker 62 in the following order: first bet sound → second bet sound → third bet sound. Furthermore, when the presentation MPU 92 determines that the number of gaming media bets has increased by two or more based on the bet command received from the main MPU 72, it controls the output of bet sound alarms of two or more corresponding to the combination of the number of gaming media bets before and after the increase. This reduces the capacity of the bet sound alarm tables stored in the presentation ROM 93 compared to a configuration in which bet sound alarm tables corresponding to combinations of two or more bet sounds are pre-stored in the presentation ROM 93 in addition to the first to third bet sound alarm tables.

When one or more gaming media have been bet, if the settlement button 51 is operated and the number of gaming media bets becomes "0," the main MPU 72 sends a settlement operation command to the presentation MPU 92. When the presentation MPU 92 receives the settlement operation command, it clears the first sound setting flag 127 and the second sound setting flag 128 to "0." This prevents the correspondence between the number of gaming media bets and the bet notification sound output from the speaker 62 from becoming misaligned, even if the settlement button 51 is operated.

The setting confirmation display start process (setting confirmation process (processing of steps S2807 to S2811 in Figure 55 (b)) is executed under the conditions that a game is not being executed and the number of gaming media bets is not "1" or more. In addition, when the setting confirmation display starts, the selector 52 is placed in an acceptance-prohibited state, and as already explained, operation of the credit insertion button 47 is disabled while the setting confirmation display is being executed. For this reason, the number of gaming media bets will not increase while the setting confirmation display is being executed, and a game will not start while the setting confirmation display is being executed because the number of gaming media bets has not reached the specified number. As a result, if the setting key insertion hole 57 is turned OFF or the front door 12 is closed while the setting confirmation display is being displayed, the acceptance permission process (step S2817) can be executed without performing the process to confirm that a game is not being executed or the process to confirm that the value of the bet number counter 125 is not the maximum value (specifically, "3"). This simplifies the processing configuration for the setting confirmation display termination process (steps S2814 to S2817 of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 55(b))), and reduces the amount of data in the program used to execute the setting confirmation display termination process.

By preventing the start of a game while the setting confirmation display is being displayed, it is possible to prevent a player from starting a game if the gaming parlor manager leaves the slot machine 10 without properly closing the front door 12 while the setting confirmation display is being displayed, for example, to deal with a problem with another gaming machine.

The setting confirmation display ends when the front door 12 is closed. Therefore, if the amusement hall manager forgets to switch the setting key insertion hole 57 to the OFF state while the setting confirmation display is on and closes the front door 12, the setting confirmation display on the credit display unit 65 can be prevented from continuing.

When a game is being played, when the number of gaming media bets is "1" or more, or when the gaming state is bonus state, the setting confirmation display will not be initiated even if the front door 12 is open and the setting key insertion hole 57 is turned ON. Therefore, if the amusement hall manager closes the front door 12 while the setting key insertion hole 57 is turned ON, even if someone attempts to fraudulently check the setting values of the slot machine 10 and opens the front door 12 while a game is being played, when the number of gaming media bets is "1" or more, or when the gaming state is bonus state, the opening of the front door 12 can be prevented from initiating the setting confirmation display on the credit display unit 65.

The setting confirmation display start process (steps S2807 to S2811) is executed only when a game is not being played, and is not executed when a game is being played. This reduces the processing load on the main MPU 72 while a game is being played, compared to a configuration in which the setting confirmation display start process can be executed even when a game is being played.

When the gaming state is in the bonus state, if no game is being played and the number of gaming media bets is less than "1," the setting confirmation display will not be initiated even if the front door 12 is opened and the setting key insertion hole 57 is turned ON. This prevents the setting confirmation process from being executed during the bonus state, thereby preventing the bonus state, which is advantageous to the player, from being interrupted.

The main MPU 72 monitors only the current state of the setting key insertion hole 57. If the configuration were to monitor the change in state of the setting key insertion hole 57, it would be necessary to provide a process for storing the state of the setting key insertion hole 57 in the previous processing run of the setting confirmation process (Figure 55 (b)), and it would be necessary to provide a storage area in the main RAM 74 for storing the state of the setting key insertion hole 57 in the previous processing run. In contrast, by monitoring only the current state of the setting key insertion hole 57, the processing load on the main MPU 72 is reduced and the configuration of the main RAM 74 is simplified.

If winning data that is the subject of stop order notification is set in the role lottery process (Figure 17), when the acceleration period of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R ends and operation of stop buttons 42-44 becomes valid, display data for stop order corresponding display is set in the right-side dual-purpose display counter 136 in the second calculation target area 111, and display data of all "0" is set in the left-side dual-purpose display counter 135. In addition, the stop order corresponding display in progress flag 138 in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1." When the stop order corresponding display in progress flag 138 is set to "1," the display control process (Figure 56) is executed in step S210 of the timer interrupt process (Figure 15), whereby the display data set in each dual-purpose display counter 135, 136 is output to the dual-purpose display unit 66, and the stop order corresponding display is performed on the dual-purpose display unit 66. Therefore, the stop order corresponding display can be started when the acceleration period of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R ends and operation of stop buttons 42 to 44 becomes valid. Therefore, the stop order corresponding display can be displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66 when the player validly operates stop buttons 42 to 44.

The state in which any of the first, second, and third stop order flags in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" is maintained even if power is interrupted, as long as the recovery process (FIG. 40) is executed in step S103 of the main process (FIG. 14) after power is restored and the processing state before power interruption is restored without an error occurring. Therefore, if power is interrupted while reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spinning and power is restored without the setting key insertion hole 57 being turned ON, processing can be executed to resume the stop order corresponding display on the dual-purpose display unit 66 based on the stop order flag being set to "1" at the time of power restoration. If the stop order corresponding display were configured to begin when the operation of the stop buttons 42-44 becomes effective after power restoration, the stop order corresponding display that was displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66 at the time the acceleration period of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R ended before power restoration would be temporarily inaccessible after power restoration. In contrast, by configuring the display to resume displaying the order of stops when power is restored, the display can be checked immediately after power is restored.

The main MPU 72 detects out-of-step of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the detection signal received from the reel index sensor. When out-of-step is detected, it performs processing to stop all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that were spinning when the out-of-step occurred, and then performs processing to re-accelerate those reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Therefore, when out-of-step occurs in reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, re-acceleration of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is possible without requiring maintenance by the amusement hall manager. This reduces the maintenance burden on the amusement hall manager.

If power is interrupted while only some of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spinning, and power is restored without the setting key insertion hole 57 being turned ON, restoring the processing state to the state before the power interruption, the main MPU 72 controls the rotation of only the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that were spinning before the power interruption. This eliminates the need to stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that were stopped before the power interruption, thereby minimizing the impact of the power interruption. If the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that were stopped before the power interruption had to be stopped again, there is a possibility that the desired symbol will not stop after power is restored, even if the stopping operation was performed at the time when the desired symbol would stop on the main line ML before the power interruption. However, this situation can be avoided by using a configuration that resumes rotation of only the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that were spinning before the power interruption.

If power is restored without the setting key insertion hole 57 being turned ON and the processing state is restored to that before the power was cut off, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that were spinning before the power was cut off will resume rotation without the need to start the game (operate the start lever 41). This prevents unnecessary consumption of gaming media when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R resume rotation. This prevents players from suffering unfair disadvantages due to a power cut.

If power is cut off while all or some of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spinning, and the setting key insertion hole 57 is turned ON when power is restored and a partial clear process (step S106) or full clear process (step S107) is executed in the main process (Figure 14), rotation control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will not be performed until the start lever 41 is validly operated after power is restored. When power is restored, the amusement hall manager can choose between resuming the game that was playing before the power was cut off or leaving the game in its completed state.

Based on the occurrence of a bonus win in the lottery process for winning combinations (Figure 17), bonus winning data is set in the second calculation target area 111. If a bonus win corresponding to the bonus winning data is subsequently achieved in the game in which the bonus win occurred, the BB flag or RB flag is set to "1" and the gaming state transitions to the bonus state. On the other hand, if bonus winning data is set in the second calculation target area 111 but a bonus win corresponding to the bonus winning data is not achieved, the internal RT state flag 153 is set to "1" and the gaming state transitions to the internal RT state ST2. If bonus winning data is set in the lottery process for winning combinations (Figure 17) and the power is interrupted before the transition to the bonus state or the internal RT state ST2 occurs in the game in which the bonus winning data is set, the bonus winning data is set in the second calculation target area 111, and the internal RT state flag 153 is not set to "1." In this state, if the partial clear process (step S106) is executed in the main process (FIG. 14) after power is restored, the internal RT state flag 153 is set to "1" before the first game starts after power is restored. This allows the lottery table selected in the first game started after power is restored to be the internal RT state lottery table (FIG. 24), and prevents a lottery table other than the internal RT state lottery table (FIG. 24) from being selected in a game started between the occurrence of a bonus win and the realization of the bonus prize. This prevents a player from suffering an unfair disadvantage due to a power outage occurring after a bonus win has occurred.

If bonus winning data is set in the second calculation target area 111 and the internal RT state flag 153 is not set to "1," and the power recovery process (FIG. 40) is executed in step S103 of the main process (FIG. 14) after power is restored, the game that was interrupted due to a power outage will be resumed with the bonus winning data set in the second calculation target area 111, provided that no error occurs. Therefore, if a bonus win corresponding to the bonus winning data set in the second calculation target area 111 is achieved in the game, the BB flag or RB flag can be set to "1" and the game state can be transitioned to the bonus state. Furthermore, if a bonus win corresponding to the bonus winning data is not achieved in the game, the internal RT state flag 153 can be set to "1" and the game state can be transitioned to the internal RT state ST2. This prevents a player from suffering an unfair disadvantage due to a power outage occurring after a bonus win.

In the second calculation target area 111, the memory area in which information regarding the game status is stored and the memory area in which bonus winning data is set are excluded from the range to be cleared in the partial clear process (step S106). Therefore, when the partial clear process (step S106) is executed in the main process (FIG. 14) after power is restored, it is possible to prevent the bonus winning data stored in the second calculation target area 111 before power is cut off from being cleared. As a result, even if the partial clear process (step S106) is executed after power is restored, the internal RT state flag 153 can be set to "1" based on the fact that bonus winning data was set in the second calculation target area 111 before power was cut off, and the game status can be transitioned to the internal RT state ST2.

If the partial clear process (step S106) is executed in the main process (Figure 14) after power is restored, the game being played before the power was cut off will end. On the other hand, if the return process (step S103) is executed in the main process (Figure 14) after power is restored, the game being played before the power was cut off will continue to be played, provided that no error occurs. This allows the game to be resumed in a situation similar to the situation before the power was cut off, and also reduces the impact of the power cut off.

In the lottery table selection process (FIG. 66), a lottery table is selected based on the settings of the slot machine 10 as well as the states of the first RT mode flag 151, second RT mode flag 152, internal RT status flag 153, BB flag, and RB flag in the second calculation target area 111. In a game in which bonus winning data is set in the second calculation target area 111, whether or not a bonus win corresponding to the bonus win will be achieved is determined based on the combination of stopped symbols. Also, if winning data for a first RT replay role, a second RT replay role, a first fall replay role, or a second fall replay role is set in the second calculation target area 111 in the role lottery process (FIG. 17), whether or not a first RT replay win, a second RT replay win, a first fall replay win, or a second fall replay win will be achieved is determined based on the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In the lottery mode control process (FIG. 67) that is performed after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, the state of the first RT mode flag 151, second RT mode flag 152, and internal RT state flag 153 is changed. This allows the process of setting information other than the setting values referenced when selecting a lottery table to be consolidated into the lottery mode control process (FIG. 67) that is performed after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning.

When the suggestive action flag 154 is set to "1" and the value of the trigger type flag 155 is "0", and the advantageous zone SC2 ends, if at least one of the first ending flag and the second ending flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" and the setting value of the slot machine 10 is "setting 4" or less, a first suggestive action lottery (step S4307 and steps S4309 to S4311 of the first suggestive action processing (Figure 75)) or a second suggestive action lottery (steps S4308 to S4311 of the first suggestive action processing (Figure 75)) is held. Then, if automatic settlement is won in the first suggestive action lottery or the second suggestive action lottery, automatic settlement is carried out, and if play stop is won, play stop is carried out. Furthermore, if the suggestive action flag 154 is set to "1" and the value of the trigger type flag 155 is "0" when the advantageous zone SC2 ends, and if the values of the first ending flag and the second ending flag are "0" and the limited total net increase in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone SC2 is equal to or greater than a predetermined suggestive reference number (specifically, "400"), a third suggestive action lottery (steps S4602 to S4604 of the second suggestive action processing (FIG. 77)) is held. If automatic settlement is won in the third suggestive action lottery, automatic settlement is carried out. This draws attention to whether or not a suggestive action will be performed at the end of the advantageous zone SC2, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

When the suggestive action flag 154 is set to "1" and the trigger type flag 155 is set to "0," and the advantageous zone SC2 ends, if at least one of the first ending flag and the second ending flag is set to "1" and the setting value of the slot machine 10 is "Setting 5" or higher, an automatic settlement will be performed without a suggestive action lottery, and a play stop state notification will be made after the automatic settlement is completed. By confirming that a play stop state notification has been made after the automatic settlement is completed, the player can be sure that the slot machine 10 they are currently playing is set to a high setting value of "Setting 5" or higher. This draws attention to whether or not a play stop state notification will be made after the automatic settlement, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

If the bonus state ends while the suggested action flag 154 is set to "1" and the value of the trigger type flag 155 is "1," a first suggested action lottery or a second suggested action lottery will be held. If the first suggested action lottery or the second suggested action lottery results in automatic settlement, automatic settlement will be carried out, and if the end of play is won, a notification of the end of play will be issued. This draws attention to whether or not a suggested action will be performed at the end of the bonus state, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

If the left stop button 42 is operated while the setting value update process (Figure 71) is being executed, the number "0" or "1" displayed on the left segment display 66a of the combined display unit 66 is updated, and if the start lever 41 is operated, a value corresponding to the updated number is set in the suggested action flag 154. By operating the left stop button 42 and start lever 41 while the setting value update process (Figure 71) is being executed, the amusement hall manager can select a state in which processing for executing a suggested action when an opportunity to start a suggested action occurs (processing of steps S4304 to S4313 and steps S4317 to S4318 of the first suggested action process (Figure 75)) is executed, or a state in which processing for executing the suggested action is not executed even when an opportunity to start a suggested action occurs.

When a trigger for starting a set suggested action occurs and processing for executing the suggested action (steps S4304 to S4313 and steps S4317 to S4318 of the first suggested action processing (Figure 75)) is executed, the main MPU 72 clears the suggested action flag 154 in the second calculation target area 111 to "0." This eliminates the need for the amusement hall manager to cancel the setting for the execution of suggested actions, and allows the number of times suggested actions are executed after the setting value update processing (Figure 71) is completed to be reduced to one or less.

When the credit display unit 65 and the dual-purpose display unit 66 are flashing, performing a confirmation operation (operating the start lever 41) sets the setting value information updated while viewing the credit display unit 65 to the setting value counter in the second calculation target area 111, information regarding the presence or absence of a suggested action updated while viewing the left segment indicator 66a of the dual-purpose display unit 66 is set to the suggested action flag 154, and information regarding the type of trigger for starting the suggested action updated while viewing the right segment indicator 66b of the dual-purpose display unit 66 is set to the trigger type flag 155. Because the slot machine 10's setting value, the presence or absence of a suggested action, and the type of trigger for starting the suggested action are rewritten based on the operation of the start lever 41 operated by the player to start the game, the number of operating means in the slot machine 10 can be reduced compared to an arrangement in which dedicated operating means are provided for rewriting this information. By configuring the system to rewrite information related to the setting value, the presence or absence of a suggested action, and the type of trigger for starting the suggested action with a single operation of the start lever 41, the operation for rewriting this information can be simplified compared to a configuration in which the operation for rewriting information related to the setting value and the operation for rewriting information related to the presence or absence of a suggested action and the type of trigger for starting the suggested action are separate. It is also possible to prevent the setting value update process from ending in a state where only part of the information related to the setting value, the presence or absence of a suggested action, and the type of trigger for starting the suggested action is rewritten and the operation for rewriting the remaining information is forgotten.

When the setting value update process (Figure 71) is being executed, the combined display unit 66, which displays information to update the information regarding the presence or absence of a suggested action and the type of trigger for starting the suggested action, and the left stop button 42, right stop button 44, and start lever 41, which are operated to update the information regarding the presence or absence of a suggested action and the type of trigger for starting the suggested action, are provided on the front side of the slot machine 10. This simplifies the operations of operating the left stop button 42 to update the information regarding the presence or absence of a suggested action while viewing the display on the combined display unit 66, operating the right stop button 44 to update the information regarding the type of trigger for starting the suggested action, and operating the start lever 41 to confirm the updated information regarding the presence or absence of a suggested action and the type of trigger for starting the suggested action.

Setting information regarding the presence or absence of suggested actions and the trigger for starting suggested actions can only be performed when the setting value update process (Figure 71), which can only be performed by the gaming hall administrator, is being executed. This prevents information regarding the presence or absence of suggested actions and the trigger for starting suggested actions from being illegally rewritten. Furthermore, by performing the process for setting this information in a manner that is not visible to players, the display for updating this information can be displayed on the credit display unit 65 and dual-purpose display unit 66, which are normally visible to players.

Information regarding the presence or absence of a suggested action and the type of trigger for starting the suggested action is displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66. This allows for a reduction in the number of display units in the slot machine 10 compared to configurations that use dedicated display units for displaying this information.

When the display for updating the setting value is being displayed on the credit display unit 65, the display for updating the information regarding the presence or absence of a suggested action and the type of trigger for starting the suggested action is displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66. This allows the operation for updating the setting value and the operation for updating the information regarding the presence or absence of a suggested action and the type of trigger for starting the suggested action to be performed simultaneously in parallel. For example, if the setting values and the information regarding the presence or absence of a suggested action and the type of trigger for starting the suggested action must be set for multiple slot machines 10 before opening, these setting operations can be made simple and time-saving. This increases convenience for the amusement hall manager.

When the value of the trigger type flag 155 is "0" and the limited total net increase in gaming media in the advantageous zone SC2 is equal to or greater than a predetermined suggestion standard number (specifically, "400"), processing is executed to execute a suggested action at the end of the advantageous zone SC2, both in cases where the bonus state ends at the same time as the end of the advantageous zone SC2 and in cases where the bonus state continues after the end of the advantageous zone SC2. Therefore, in situations where the amusement hall manager has selected "the end of the advantageous zone SC2 when the limited total net increase in gaming media is equal to or greater than a predetermined suggestion standard number" as the trigger for starting a suggested action, it is possible to prevent a suggested action from being executed at a time other than the end of the advantageous zone SC2.

When the value of trigger type flag 155 is "1," if the bonus state ends because the conditions for ending advantageous section SC2 are met even though the conditions for ending the bonus state have not been met, processing is executed to execute a suggested action at the end of the bonus state. This prevents the suggested action from being executed at a time other than the end of the bonus state in situations where the amusement hall manager has selected "end of bonus state" as the trigger for starting a suggested action.

In the first to third suggestive action lotteries, the more advantageous the setting value of the slot machine 10 is to the player, the easier it is to win the suggestive action. Therefore, when a suggestive action is executed, the player can be made to expect that the slot machine 10 they are currently playing on has a high setting value. This increases the player's interest in the game.

While the first suggestive action lottery table for "Setting 1" to "Setting 3" only allows for automatic settlement, the first suggestive action lottery table for "Setting 4" to "Setting 6" allows for both stopping and automatic settlement. Therefore, if stopping occurs at the end of RB state ST4, the player can be confident that the setting value of the slot machine 10 they are currently playing is "Setting 4" or higher. With the first suggestive action lottery table for "Setting 4" to "Setting 6," the more advantageous the setting value is for the player, the higher the probability of stopping. Therefore, if stopping occurs at the end of RB state ST4, the player can be made to hope that the slot machine 10 they are currently playing is set to a setting value of "Setting 5" or higher.

While the second suggestive action lottery table for "Setting 1" to "Setting 3" only allows for a win in the stoppage, the second suggestive action lottery table for "Setting 4" to "Setting 6" allows for a win in the stoppage and automatic settlement. Therefore, when automatic settlement is performed at the end of BB state ST3, the player can be assured that the setting value of the slot machine 10 they are currently playing is "Setting 4" or higher. With the second suggestive action lottery table for "Setting 4" to "Setting 6," the more advantageous the setting value is for the player, the higher the probability of winning automatic settlement. Therefore, when automatic settlement is performed at the end of BB state ST3, the player can be made to expect that the setting value of the slot machine 10 they are currently playing is set to a high setting value of "Setting 5" or higher.

By setting information regarding whether or not a suggested action will be performed and the type of trigger for starting the suggested action during the setting update process (Figure 71), the amusement hall manager can cause the suggested action to be performed with a probability corresponding to the setting value of the slot machine 10. This reduces the management burden on the amusement hall manager compared to a configuration in which the amusement hall manager has to decide for themselves whether or not to perform a suggested action based on the setting value.

There are two triggers for the suggestive action: "the end of the advantageous zone SC2 when the limited total net increase in gaming media is equal to or exceeds a predetermined suggestive reference number," and "the end of the bonus state." This allows players to anticipate that the suggestive action will occur both when the advantageous zone SC2 begins and when the bonus state ends. This increases the player's interest in the game.

During the setting value update process (Figure 71), the amusement hall manager can select "the end of the advantageous zone SC2 when the limited total net increase in gaming media is equal to or exceeds a predetermined suggestion standard number" or "the end of the bonus state" as the trigger for starting the suggestive action. This allows the amusement hall manager to know in advance the timing when the suggestive action may be executed on the slot machine 10. This reduces the burden of monitoring the slot machine 10 on the amusement hall manager.

The suggested action flag 154 is set to "1" during the setting value update process (Figure 71), and when the advantageous zone SC2 ends for the first time after the setting value update process (Figure 71) is completed, if the difference in the number of coins in the advantageous zone SC2 is less than the predetermined suggestion standard number (specifically, "400"), the suggested action flag 154 will remain set to "1". This reduces the possibility that, in a slot machine 10 equipped with a configuration for executing suggested actions, the suggested action flag 154 will be cleared to "0" without the first to third suggested action lotteries being executed, even if the amusement hall manager has configured the machine to execute suggested actions.

When one or more of the first through third state signals are raised, output control of the insertion signal begins a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) after the signal is raised. This prevents the main MPU 72 from starting output control of the insertion signal before the data counter DC detects the rising edge of the state signal. This allows the data counter DC to accurately detect the number of gaming media inserted in the bonus state, advantageous zone SC2, and ART state ST6.

Without setting a freeze period at the start of the bonus state, advantageous section SC2, or ART state ST6, the main MPU 72 can start output control of the input signal after the data counter DC has completed processing to grasp the rising edge of the in-state signal. Because there is no need to set a freeze period, the bonus state, advantageous section SC2, or ART state ST6 can be started smoothly without causing stress to the player.

If the first to third state signals are not raised, output control of the insertion signal begins at the start of the game without measuring the predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds). Therefore, if the first to third state signals are not raised, the period from the start of the game until the data counter DC can determine the number of inserted gaming media can be shortened. In addition, the process of measuring the predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) at the start of the game can be omitted.

In a game in which at least one of the first to third state signals is turned off, if payout signal output control is performed, the turning off of the state signal is postponed until a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) has elapsed since the payout signal output control ended, and the game ends after the state signal is turned off. This prevents the main MPU 72 from turning off the state signal before the data counter DC has finished processing to determine the number of gaming media awarded. This allows the data counter DC to accurately determine the number of gaming media awarded in the bonus state, advantageous zone SC2, and ART state ST6.

In games where payout signal output control is performed based on the establishment of a small win or replay win, the falling of the in-state signal is postponed until a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) has passed since the end of payout signal output control, and the game ends after the in-state signal has fallen. By ending the game after the in-state signal has fallen, it is possible to prevent the next game from starting and the output control of the throw-in signal from starting before the in-state signal has fallen.

In a game in which at least one of a transition to the bonus state, a transition to the advantageous zone SC2, and a transition to the ART state ST6 has occurred, if payout signal output control is performed, the end of the game is postponed until a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) has elapsed since the end of the payout signal output control, and the next game can be started after the end of the previous game. The in-state signal is then raised when the next game starts. This prevents the main MPU 72 from raising the in-state signal before the data counter DC has finished processing to determine the number of gaming media awarded. This allows the data counter DC to accurately determine the number of gaming media awarded in the bonus state, the advantageous zone SC2, and the ART state ST6.

In a game in which none of the first to third startup preparation flags and the first to third shutdown preparation flags in the second calculation target area 111 are set to "1," the timing of the end of that game is not affected by the payout signal output control, and the game ends even if the payout signal output control is still in progress. This makes it possible to make the next game ready to start even if the payout signal output control is still in progress. This prevents the payout signal output control from causing a delay in the timing at which the game can start.

When a replay win is achieved, output control is performed to output a payout signal for a specified number of gaming media (specifically, "3"), and in the next game after the replay win is achieved, output control is performed to output a deposit signal for the specified number. This eliminates the need for a dedicated signal line connecting the main MPU 72 and the data counter DC to send a signal indicating that a replay win has been achieved, while still making it possible to grasp the net increase in the number of gaming media, including when a replay win is achieved, in the data counter DC.

The main MPU 72 causes the data counter DC to recognize the number of gaming media bets by raising the input signal a number of times corresponding to the number of gaming media bets, and causes the data counter DC to recognize the number of gaming media awarded based on the establishment of a small win or the establishment of a replay win by raising the payout signal a number of times corresponding to the number of gaming media awarded or the specified number of gaming media. This prevents an increase in the number of signal lines electrically connecting the main MPU 72 and the data counter DC, while allowing the data counter DC to grasp the number of gaming media bets, the number of gaming media awarded based on the establishment of a small win, and the establishment of a replay win.

The main MPU 72 uses the insert signal line 157 for outputting the insert signal and the payout signal line 158 for outputting the payout signal to control the output of signals that cause the data counter DC to recognize that the partial clear process (FIG. 68) in step S106 of the main processing (FIG. 14) and the full clear process (FIG. 43) in step S107 have been performed. This eliminates the need for dedicated signal lines to output signals that cause the data counter DC to recognize that these partial clear processes and full clear processes have been performed, thereby reducing the number of signal lines.

The main MPU 72 uses one interval adjustment timer counter 164 to determine whether a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) has elapsed since the in-state signal was raised, and whether a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) has elapsed since the output control of the dispensing signal ended. This simplifies the configuration of the main RAM 74 compared to a configuration in which two interval adjustment timer counters 164 are provided.

Second Embodiment
In this embodiment, the checksum calculation method is different from that of the first embodiment. The following describes the configuration that differs from the first embodiment. Note that a description of the configuration that is the same as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 87 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the setting of each area in the main RAM 74 in this embodiment.

Similar to the first embodiment described above, the main RAM 74 is provided with a stack area 101 for specific control, a work area 102 for non-specific control, a work area 103 for specific control, a stack area 104 for non-specific control, and first to third unused areas 105-107. In this embodiment, the first calculation target area 109 in the stack area 101 for specific control, the work area 102 for non-specific control, the work area 103 for specific control, the first unused area 105, and the second unused area 106 are used as the calculation target range, and a checksum is calculated before and after power is shut down. The checksum calculation target range includes the entire work area 103 for specific control.

As shown in Figure 87, the work area 103 for specific control has a checksum area 171. The checksum area 171 is a storage area in which the two's complement of the checksum calculated before power was cut off is stored. The checksum area 171 is set as a storage area of a total of 2 bytes corresponding to Y(t+2), the penultimate address in the work area 103 for specific control, and Y(t+3), the last address. The two's complement of the checksum is 2-byte numerical information that, when added to the checksum calculated before power was cut off, results in a calculation result of "0". The method for calculating the two's complement of the checksum will be described later.

In the power outage processing (Figure 88), which is executed when a power outage is detected, the checksum area 171 is cleared to "0" before the checksum is calculated. In the power outage processing (Figure 88), the main MPU 72 reserves the BC register as a register for calculating the checksum and clears the BC register to "0." As already explained in the first embodiment, the BC register consists of two bytes. In calculating the checksum, a one-byte storage area corresponding to Y(4), the start address of the range to be calculated, is first set as the sum area. The data stored in the sum area is then added to the BC register as one-byte numerical information, and the address of the sum area is updated to Y(5) by adding "1" to the current address of the sum area (Y(4)). This updates the sum area to a one-byte storage area corresponding to the address of Y(5). In calculating the checksum, one byte of numerical information stored in the area to be added is added to the BC register, and the address of the area to be added is updated by incrementing it by one, until the address of the area to be added reaches Y(t+4), the end address of the calculation. During each addition, if a carryover occurs that causes the result of the addition to exceed the most significant bit of the BC register, the carryover is ignored. As a result, the BC register contains the sum of the one-byte numerical information stored in the memory areas corresponding to all addresses included in the range to be calculated for the checksum (Y(4) to Y(t+3)). This sum is two bytes of numerical information. In this embodiment, the sum calculated by the BC register is used as the checksum. The register reserved for checksum calculation in the master MPU 72 is not limited to the BC register; it may be the DE register or the HL register.

In this embodiment, the two's complement of the checksum is calculated and stored in the checksum area 171. The two's complement of the checksum is calculated by adding "1" to the 2-byte numerical information obtained by inverting each bit of the 16-bit checksum (inverting "0" to "1" or "1" to "0").

Checksum area 171 is included in the range covered by the checksum calculation. Therefore, if the two's complement of the checksum calculated when checksum area 171 is cleared to "0" before power is shut off is stored in checksum area 171, and the checksum is calculated in the same way as before power is shut off after power is restored without clearing checksum area 171 to "0," the checksum calculation result will be "0" if the data stored in the range covered by the checksum calculation is the same as the data before power was shut off. In the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 89) executed after power is restored, if the checksum calculation result is "0," it is determined that no abnormality has occurred in the data stored in the range covered by the checksum calculation, and if the checksum calculation result is not "0," it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the data stored in the range covered by the checksum calculation.

In this way, by determining whether the checksum calculated after power is restored is "0," it is possible to determine whether an abnormality has occurred in the data stored in the range covered by the checksum calculation. This makes it easier to determine whether an abnormality has occurred in the data stored in the range covered by the checksum calculation.

Next, the power outage processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 88. Power outage processing is executed in step S204 of the timer interrupt processing (Figure 15). Note that power outage processing is executed using a specific control program and specific control data.

In the power outage processing, steps S5201 to S5203 are performed, similar to steps S1701 to S1703 of the power outage processing (Figure 39) in the first embodiment. Specifically, the data stored in the head area 108 of the stack area 101 for specific control is first stored in the head save area 115 of the work area 103 for specific control (step S5201). By saving the data stored in the head area 108 to the head save area 115 in step S5201, the head area 108 can be used to execute the backup abnormality confirmation processing (Figure 89), a processing for non-specific control, after power is restored. Furthermore, if it is confirmed that no abnormality has occurred in the data stored in the checksum calculation range, the data stored in the head save area 115 can be restored to the head area 108. This restores the data in the head area 108 to the data stored in the head area 108 at the start of the power outage processing (Figure 88), restoring the processing state before power was interrupted. Additionally, by configuring the system to calculate checksums before and after power is restored while the data in the head area 108 is being saved to the head save area 115, it is possible to confirm that no abnormalities have occurred in the data saved to the head save area 115 by verifying that the checksum calculated after power is restored matches the checksum stored before power was cut off. The output status of the output port of the main MPU 72 is then cleared (step S5202), and all actuators (not shown) are turned off (step S5203).

Then, the checksum area 171 in the specific control work area 103 is cleared to "0" (step S5204). The BC register of the master MPU 72 is reserved for the checksum calculation, and the BC register is cleared to "0" (step S5205). The address of the area to be added for the checksum is set to "Y(4)," the start address of the calculation range (step S5206). One byte of data stored in the memory area corresponding to the address of the area to be added in the master RAM 74 is read (step S5207), and the read one byte of data is added as one byte of numerical information to the BC register reserved for the checksum calculation in the master MPU 72 (step S5208). In step S5208, if a carry occurs that causes the result of the addition to exceed the most significant bit of the BC register, the carry is ignored. The address of the area to be added is updated by adding "1" to the address of the area to be added (step S5209). In step S5209, the addresses of the addition area are updated in the following order: Y(4) → Y(5) → Y(6) → ... → Y(t+3) → Y(t+4).

Then, it is determined whether the address of the area to be added is "Y(t+4)," which is the end address of the checksum calculation (step S5210). If a negative determination is made in step S5210, processing returns to step S5207, and steps S5207 to S5210 are repeatedly executed until a positive determination is made in step S5210. As a result, the BC register reserved for checksum calculation in the main MPU 72 contains the sum of the one-byte numerical information stored in the checksum calculation range (Y(4) to Y(t+3)) in the main RAM 74 as the checksum calculation result. As already explained, this sum is two bytes of numerical information.

Then, the two's complement of the checksum calculated in the BC register is calculated (step S5211). In step S5211, the two's complement of the checksum is calculated by adding "1" to the 2-byte numerical information obtained by inverting each bit of the 16-bit checksum (inverting "0" to "1" or inverting "1" to "0"). The two's complement of the calculated checksum is then stored in the checksum area 171 in the specific control work area 103 (step S5212). Access to the main RAM 74 is then prohibited (step S1713). After the above processing has been performed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for a complete power cut-off that would make processing unable to be performed.

Next, the backup abnormality confirmation process executed by the primary MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 89. The backup abnormality confirmation process is executed in step S1804 of the power recovery process (Figure 40). Note that the backup abnormality confirmation process is executed using a program and data for non-specific control.

In the backup abnormality confirmation process, steps S5301 to S5304 are the same as steps S1901 to S1904 of the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 41) in the first embodiment. Specifically, a load command is first used to set the stack pointer of the primary MPU 72 to "Y(u+1)," the last address in the non-specific control stack area 104, as a fixed address at the start of the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 89) (step S5301). Then, the information in the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register, which are some of the various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers provided by the primary MPU 72, is saved to the non-specific control stack area 104 in the following order: WA register → BC register → DE register → HL register → IX register → IY register (step S5302). The processing content in step S5302 is the same as the processing content in step S1902 of the backup abnormality confirmation processing (FIG. 41) in the first embodiment described above.

The WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are registers used in the processing of steps S5303 to S5310. By saving the information set in these registers to the stack area 104 for non-specific control prior to the processing of steps S5303 to S5310, it is possible to save the information in these registers used during specific control before the non-specific control is started. Therefore, even if these registers are overwritten during non-specific control, by restoring the information saved in the stack area 104 for non-specific control to these registers when the non-specific control is terminated, it is possible to restore the state of these registers to the state corresponding to specific control before the non-specific control was executed.

After performing step S5302, the master MPU 72 allocates a BC register for the checksum calculation and clears the BC register to "0" (step S5303). Then, "Y(4)," the start address of the calculation range, is set as the address of the area to be added for the checksum (step S5304). Then, one byte of data stored in the memory area corresponding to the address of the area to be added in the master RAM 74 is read (step S5305), and the read one byte of data is added as one byte of numerical information to the BC register allocated for the checksum calculation in the master MPU 72 (step S5306). In step S5306, if a carry occurs that causes the result of the addition to exceed the most significant bit of the BC register, the carry is ignored. Then, "1" is added to the address of the area to be added, updating the address of the area to be added (step S5307). In step S5307, the addresses of the addition area are updated in the following order: Y(4) → Y(5) → Y(6) → ... → Y(t+3) → Y(t+4).

Then, it is determined whether the address of the area to be added is Y(t+4), which is the end address of the checksum calculation (step S5308). If a negative determination is made in step S5308, processing returns to step S5305, and steps S5305 to S5308 are repeatedly executed until a positive determination is made in step S5308. As a result, the BC register reserved for checksum calculation in the main MPU 72 contains the sum of the one-byte numerical information stored in the checksum calculation range (Y(4) to Y(t+3)) in the main RAM 74 as the checksum calculation result. As already explained, this sum is two bytes of numerical information.

If a positive determination is made in step S5308, the main MPU 72 determines whether the checksum stored in the BC register reserved for checksum calculation, i.e., the checksum calculated after power is restored, is "0" (step S5309). If the checksum calculated after power is restored is not "0" (step S5309: NO), the backup abnormality flag 113 provided in the work area 102 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S5310). This enables the main MPU 72 to determine that an abnormality has occurred in the data stored in the range subject to checksum calculation.

If a positive determination is made in step S5309 or if step S5310 is performed, steps S5311 and S5312 execute the same processing as steps S1911 and S1912 in the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 41) in the first embodiment described above. Specifically, the data saved in the non-specific control stack area 104 in step S5302 is restored to the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the primary MPU 72 in the reverse order (IY register → IX register → HL register → DE register → BC register → WA register) of step S5302 (WA register → BC register → DE register → HL register → IX register → IY register) (step S5311). The processing content in step S5311 is the same as the processing content in step S1911 in the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 41) in the first embodiment described above. By executing the processing of step S5311, the information in the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main MPU 72 can be restored to the information corresponding to specific control at the start of the backup abnormality confirmation processing (FIG. 89), which is processing corresponding to non-specific control.

Then, the fixed address "Y(0)" is set in the stack pointer of the primary MPU 72 (step S5312), and this backup abnormality confirmation process is terminated. By setting the fixed address information in the stack pointer in this way, the stack pointer information is restored to the information immediately before the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 89) was started, eliminating the need to save the stack pointer information of the primary MPU 72 corresponding to specific control to the work area 102 for non-specific control before starting the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 89). This allows all storage areas in the work area 102 for non-specific control to be included in the range of checksum calculations, and reduces the processing load on the primary MPU 72.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

By determining whether the checksum calculated after power is restored is "0," it is possible to determine whether an abnormality has occurred in the data stored in the range covered by the checksum calculation. This makes it easier to determine whether an abnormality has occurred in the data stored in the range covered by the checksum calculation.

The entire work area 103 for specific control can be included in the range of checksum calculations before and after a power outage. This makes it easy to specify the range of checksum calculations before and after a power outage.

Third Embodiment
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that if it is confirmed that no error state has occurred in the power recovery process, the process returns to the timer interrupt process. The following describes the configuration that differs from the first embodiment. Note that a description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will be omitted.

In this embodiment, if it is confirmed that no error state has occurred during the power recovery processing (Figure 90), regardless of the processing that was being executed immediately before the interrupt due to the timer interrupt processing (Figure 15) that was executed immediately before the power was cut off, the state of the main RAM 74, excluding the checksum area 114 and the display resume flag, is restored to the state at the end of the register save processing in step S201 of the timer interrupt processing (Figure 15) that was executed immediately before the power was cut off, and processing returns to step S202 of the timer interrupt processing (Figure 15). This makes it possible to resume the timer interrupt processing (Figure 15) from step S202.

Figure 90 is a flowchart showing the power restoration process executed by the primary MPU 72 in this embodiment. The power restoration process is executed in step S103 of the main process (Figure 14). Note that, in the power restoration process, all processes other than the backup abnormality confirmation process (step S5404) are executed using a program and data for specific control, while the backup abnormality confirmation process (step S5404) is executed using a program and data for non-specific control.

In the power recovery process, steps S5401 to S5414 are executed, which are the same as steps S1801 to S1814 in the power recovery process (Figure 40) in the first embodiment. Specifically, it is first determined whether the error status flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S5401). If the error status flag is not set to "1" (step S5401: NO), a load command is issued to set "Y(3)," which is address information corresponding to the last storage area of the top area 108 in the specific control stack area 101, as a fixed address at the start of the power recovery process (Figure 90) in the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 (step S5402). This sets the last storage area of the top area 108 as the storage area into which information is written in response to a push command in the specific control stack area 101.

Then, a push command is issued to save the flag register information of the main MPU 72 to a memory area in the specific control stack area 101 corresponding to the current stack pointer information ("Y(3)") of the main MPU 72, and the stack pointer information of the main MPU 72 is updated to the address information of the memory area to be written to next ("Y(2)") (step S5403). By saving the flag register information before the program of the subroutine corresponding to the backup abnormality confirmation process (step S5404) is started, it is possible to save the flag register information in the leading area 108 in the state before it changes after the subroutine is called or started.

Then, a call instruction is issued to read a subroutine program corresponding to the backup abnormality confirmation process set in the non-specific control program, thereby starting the backup abnormality confirmation process (step S5404). In this case, information (2 bytes) specifying the return address for returning to the process of step S5405 after the backup abnormality confirmation process is completed is saved as return address information in the specific control stack area 101 by a push instruction. The most significant byte of the return address information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the current stack pointer information ("Y(2)") of the primary MPU 72 in the specific control stack area 101, and the least significant byte of the return address information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the next stack pointer information ("Y(1)"). The stack pointer information of the primary MPU 72 is then updated to the address information ("Y(0)") of the storage area to be written to next. The leading area 108 now contains the flag register information (1 byte) of the primary MPU 72 and the return address information (2 bytes).

When the backup abnormality confirmation process (FIG. 41) is terminated, a pop command is used to read the information saved in the memory area corresponding to the information one order earlier ("Y(1)") and the information two orders earlier ("Y(2)") relative to the current stack pointer information ("Y(0)") of the main MPU 72 in the stack area 101 for specific control, i.e., the return address information saved in the top area 108 of the stack area 101 for specific control, and set this in the program counter of the main MPU 72. The stack pointer information of the main MPU 72 is also updated to the address information ("Y(3)") of the memory area to which the two orders earlier are to be written. This allows the process to return to step S5405 of the power recovery process (FIG. 90).

After executing the backup abnormality confirmation process in step S5404, the information saved in step S5403 to the memory area corresponding to the address information of "Y(3)" in the leading area 108 is restored to the flag register of the primary MPU 72 by a pop command (step S5405). This allows the flag register of the primary MPU 72 to be returned to the state it was in before the call command was used to read the subroutine program corresponding to the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 41) set in the non-specific control program.

Then, it is determined whether the backup abnormality flag 113 in the non-specific control work area 102 is set to "1" (step S5406). If the backup abnormality flag 113 is not set to "1" (step S5406: NO), it is determined whether the setting value of the slot machine 10 is a normal value (any value from "1" to "6") (step S5407). If it is determined that the setting value is normal (step S5407: YES), it is determined whether the power outage flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S5408). If the power outage flag is set to "1" (step S5408: YES), this means that the power outage processing (Figure 39) was executed normally when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 was stopped, and processing proceeds to step S5409.

In step S5409, the power outage flag is cleared. Then, a power restoration command is sent to the production-side MPU 92 (step S5410). Then, it is determined whether any of the stop order flags provided in the second calculation target area 111 in the specific control work area 103 are set to "1" (step S5411), and if any of the stop order flags are set to "1" (step S5411: YES), the display resume flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S5412).

If a negative judgment is made in step S5411 or if the processing of step S5412 is performed, the data stored in the leading save area 115 of the second calculation target area 111 is restored to the leading area 108 in the specific control stack area 101 (step S5413). As already described in the first embodiment above, when a power outage is identified, the data stored in the leading area 108 is saved to the leading save area 115 in step S1701 of the power outage processing (Figure 39). Therefore, the leading save area 115 stores the data that was stored in the leading area 108 at the start of the power outage processing (Figure 39). By restoring the data stored in the leading save area 115 to the leading area 108 in step S5413, the data stored in the leading area 108 can be restored to the data that was stored in the leading area 108 at the start of the power outage processing (Figure 39). The data stored in the specific control stack area 101 does not change between the time the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 15) starts and the time the power outage processing (FIG. 39) starts in step S204. Therefore, by restoring the data stored in the leading area 108 to the data that was stored in the leading area 108 at the start of the power outage processing (FIG. 39), the specific control stack area 101 can be restored to the state it was in at the start of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 15) that was being executed immediately before the power was cut off.

Then, the data stored in the stack pointer save area 116 in the second calculation target area 111 is restored to the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 by a load command (step S5414). As already explained in the first embodiment above, in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 15) processing round in which the occurrence of a power outage is identified, in the register save processing (step S201) executed before the power outage processing (FIG. 39) in step S204 is executed, the stack pointer information of the main MPU 72 at the start of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 15) is saved in the stack pointer save area 116, and the information of the various registers of the main MPU 72 other than the program counter and stack pointer is saved in the corresponding register save buffer in the register save area 117 in the second calculation target area 111. By executing the processing of step S5414, the data stored in the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 can be restored to the data stored in that stack pointer at the start of the timer interrupt processing (Figure 15) that was being executed immediately before the power was shut off.

Then, the address information of the program in the main ROM 73 for returning to step S202 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 15) is set in the program counter of the main MPU 72 (step S5415). As already explained, in this embodiment, a return to step S202 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 15) is made regardless of the processing that was being executed immediately before the interrupt caused by the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 15) that was being executed immediately before the power was cut off. For this reason, the address set in the program counter in step S5415 is a fixed address. Execution of the processing of step S5415 causes a return to step S202 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 15).

As already explained, in step S5413, the stack area 101 for specific control is returned to the state it had at the start of the timer interrupt processing (Figure 15) that was being executed immediately before the power was shut down, and in step S5414, the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 is returned to the state it had at the start of the timer interrupt processing (Figure 15) that was being executed immediately before the power was shut down. Furthermore, the stack pointer information of the main MPU 72 at the start of the timer interrupt processing (Figure 15) that was being executed immediately before the power was shut down is saved in the stack pointer save area 116 of the second calculation target area 111, and the register information of the main MPU 72 other than the program counter and stack pointer at the start of the timer interrupt processing (Figure 15) that was being executed immediately before the power was shut down is saved in the register save area 117 of the second calculation target area 111. Therefore, the state of the main RAM 74, excluding the checksum area 114 and the display resume flag, can be returned to the state at the end of the register save process in step S201 of the timer interrupt process (Figure 15) that was being executed immediately before the power was cut off, and after the power is restored, it is possible to return to step S202 of the timer interrupt process (Figure 15).

Because the power outage flag in the second calculation target area 111 was cleared to "0" in step S5409, a negative judgment is made in step S202 of the timer interrupt processing after recovery (Figure 15). In the register restore processing (step S215) of the timer interrupt processing after recovery (Figure 15), the information stored in each register save buffer in the register save area 117 is restored to each register of the main MPU 72, and the information stored in the stack pointer save area 116 is restored to the stack pointer of the main MPU 72. This allows the various registers in the main MPU 72, excluding the program counter, to be restored to the state they were in at the start of the timer interrupt processing (Figure 15) that was being executed immediately before the power was cut off. Thereafter, at the end of the timer interrupt processing (Figure 15), the information saved in the specific control stack area 101 is set in the program counter of the main MPU 72 by a pop command. This ends the timer interrupt process (Figure 15) and allows the system to return to the process following the process that was running immediately before the timer interrupt process (Figure 15) that was running immediately before the power was shut off.

If a positive determination is made in step S5401, a positive determination is made in step S5406, a negative determination is made in step S5407, or a negative determination is made in step S5408, steps S5416 to S5418 are executed, which are the same as steps S1818 to S1820 of the power recovery process (Figure 40) in the first embodiment described above.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

If it is confirmed that no error has occurred during the power recovery process (Figure 90), the state of the main RAM 74, excluding the checksum area 114 and the display resume flag, is restored to the state at the end of the register save process in step S201 of the timer interrupt process (Figure 15) that was executed immediately before the power was cut off, and processing returns to step S202 of the timer interrupt process (Figure 15). This allows the timer interrupt process (Figure 15) to be resumed from step S202, and at the end of the timer interrupt process (Figure 15), processing can be restored to the process following the process that was executed immediately before the interrupt occurred due to the timer interrupt process (Figure 15) that was executed immediately before the power was cut off. This allows the processing state to be restored to the state it was in immediately before the power was cut off while minimizing the impact of the power cut off.

<Fourth embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the process of calculating a checksum when a power outage is detected and the process of calculating a checksum after power is restored are performed using a program and data for non-specific control. The following describes the configuration that differs from the first embodiment. Note that a description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will generally be omitted.

Figure 91 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of the main RAM 74 in this embodiment, and Figure 92 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the setting mode of each area in the main RAM 74.

As shown in Figure 91, the main RAM 74 is provided with a stack area 181 for specific control, a work area 182 for non-specific control, a work area 183 for specific control, and a stack area 184 for non-specific control. In accordance with the distinction between specific control and non-specific control in the control executed by the main MPU 72, as shown in Figure 92, the address range of the stack area 181 for specific control, the address range of the work area 183 for specific control, the address range of the work area 182 for non-specific control, and the address range of the stack area 184 for non-specific control are also clearly distinguished in the main RAM 74.

Specifically, the area of consecutive addresses within the range of addresses Y(1) to Y(r+1) is set as a stack area 181 for specific control. Furthermore, addresses Y(r+2) to Y(r+4) consecutive to addresses Y(1) to Y(r+1) are addresses in an unused first unused area 185, and the area of consecutive addresses following this within the range of addresses Y(r+5) to Y(s+1) is set as a work area 183 for specific control. Furthermore, addresses Y(s+2) to Y(s+4) consecutive to addresses Y(r+5) to Y(s+1) are addresses in an unused second unused area 186, and the area of consecutive addresses following this within the range of addresses Y(s+5) to Y(t+3) is set as a work area 182 for non-specific control. Additionally, addresses Y(t+4) to Y(t+6), which are consecutive to addresses Y(s+5) to Y(t+3), are addresses in the unused third unused area 187, and the areas of consecutive addresses within the range of addresses Y(t+7) to Y(u+1) are set as the non-specific control stack area 184. The relationship between each area and address as described above is set both as a physical address in the primary RAM 74 and as a logical address on the memory map recognized by the primary MPU 72.

When the main MPU 72 executes processing corresponding to specific control, the main MPU 72 can write information to the specific control work area 183 and the specific control stack area 181, and can read information from the specific control work area 183 and the specific control stack area 181. On the other hand, when the main MPU 72 executes processing corresponding to specific control, the main MPU 72 can read information from the non-specific control work area 182 and the non-specific control stack area 184, but cannot write information to the non-specific control work area 182 and the non-specific control stack area 184. This makes it possible to prevent information used in processing corresponding to non-specific control from being accidentally erased when processing corresponding to specific control is being executed.

Furthermore, when the main MPU 72 executes processing corresponding to non-specific control, the main MPU 72 can write information to the non-specific control work area 182 and the non-specific control stack area 184, and can read information from the non-specific control work area 182 and the non-specific control stack area 184. On the other hand, when the main MPU 72 executes processing corresponding to non-specific control, the main MPU 72 can read information from the specific control work area 183 and the specific control stack area 181, but cannot write information to the specific control work area 183 and the specific control stack area 181. This makes it possible to prevent information used in processing corresponding to specific control from being accidentally erased when processing corresponding to non-specific control is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 91, the stack area 181 for specific control in the main RAM 74 has a leading area 188 that is excluded from the calculation range of the checksum calculated before power is cut off and after power is restored, and a first calculation target area 189 that is included in the calculation range of the checksum. The leading area 188 is a storage area for the first 3 bytes in the stack area 181 for specific control. In addition, the work area 182 for non-specific control has a third calculation target area 191 that is included in the calculation range of the checksum, and a third non-calculation target area 192 that is excluded from the calculation range of the checksum.

In this embodiment, the memory area used to display on the ratio display 85 the advantageous zone stay ratio so that it can be grasped is provided in the third calculation target area 191 within the calculation target range of the non-specific checksum. The memory area used to display the advantageous zone stay ratio includes the game execution grasp flag, total game number counter, advantageous game number counter, and management display flag already explained in the first embodiment above. By providing the memory area used to display the advantageous zone stay ratio in the third calculation target area 191, if an abnormality occurs in the data used to display the advantageous zone stay ratio, it is possible to prevent game play from continuing while the abnormality exists in the data.

Similar to the first embodiment described above, when the main MPU 72 determines that a power outage has occurred, it executes power outage processing (FIG. 93(a)) in step S204 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 15). In the power outage processing (FIG. 93(a)), a checksum is calculated for data stored in some storage areas in the main RAM 74. As shown in FIG. 92, the range of checksum calculation is the first calculation target area 189 in the stack area 181 for specific control, the work area 183 for specific control, the third calculation target area 191 in the work area 182 for non-specific control, the first unused area 185, and the second unused area 186.

As shown in FIG. 92, the address range of the storage area in the main RAM 74 that is the target of checksum calculation is the consecutive address range Y(4) to Y(t+1). This simplifies the process for specifying the address range of the storage area that is the target of checksum calculation in the processing configuration for calculating the checksum. As already explained, in the main RAM 74, the address range of the first unused area 185 (Y(r+2) to Y(r+4)) lies between the address range of the first calculation target area 189 (Y(4) to Y(r+1)) and the address range of the specific control work area 183 (Y(r+5) to Y(s+1)), and the address range of the second unused area 186 (Y(s+2) to Y(s+4)) lies between the address range of the specific control work area 183 (Y(r+5) to Y(s+1)) and the address range of the third calculation target area 191 (Y(s+5) to Y(t+1)). By including the first unused area 185 and the second unused area 186 in the range of checksum calculation, the address range of the storage areas in the main RAM 74 that are the target of checksum calculation can be made a contiguous address range. On the other hand, the address range of the third unused area 187 (Y(t+4) to Y(t+6)) is not contiguous with the first calculation target area 189, the work area 183 for specific control, or the third calculation target area 191. Therefore, by excluding the third unused area 187 from the range of checksum calculation, it is possible to prevent the address range of the storage areas in the main RAM 74 that are the target of checksum calculation from becoming dispersed. The third unused area 187 is an area that is not used in either specific control or non-specific control, and a checksum is not calculated for the third unused area 187.

As already explained in the first embodiment above, if the supply of operating power is started without the setting key insertion hole 57 being turned ON, the power recovery process (FIG. 40) is executed in step S103 of the main process (FIG. 14). In the power recovery process (FIG. 40), the backup abnormality confirmation process (FIG. 95) in step S1804 calculates a checksum for the same calculation range as the checksum calculated before the power was cut off. If the checksum calculated after power is restored for the same calculation range in the main RAM 74 matches the checksum calculated before the power was cut off, the main MPU 72 confirms that no abnormality has occurred in the data stored in that calculation range.

The checksum calculation method is the same as described in the first embodiment above, and is the same when calculating the checksum based on the identification of a power outage and when calculating the checksum after power is restored.

As shown in FIG. 91, in the work area 182 for non-specific control, a third non-calculation area 192, which is provided separately from the third calculation target area 191, includes a checksum area 193 in which the checksum calculated before power was shut off is stored. By providing the checksum area 193 in the third non-calculation target area 192, which is excluded from the checksum calculation range, it is possible to store the checksum in the checksum area 193 without changing the data stored in the checksum calculation range.

In this embodiment, the process of calculating a checksum before power is cut off and the process of calculating a checksum after power is restored are executed using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control. Therefore, a common program in the main ROM 73 can be used to calculate the checksum before power is cut off and after power is restored. This allows for more ample capacity in the area for storing programs in the main ROM 73, compared to a configuration in which the program for calculating a checksum before power is cut off and the program for calculating a checksum after power is restored are stored as different programs in the main ROM 73. Furthermore, compared to a configuration in which the process of calculating a checksum before power is cut off and after power is restored using a program for specific control and data for specific control, it allows for more ample capacity in the area for storing the program for specific control and data for specific control in the main ROM 73.

As will be described in detail later, at the start of the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 95), a process is executed to save data from some registers in the primary MPU 72 to the non-specific control stack area 184. As shown in Figure 92, the non-specific control stack area 184 is excluded from the checksum calculation range. This makes it possible to save data from some registers in the primary MPU 72 to the non-specific control stack area 184 while preventing changes to the data stored in the calculation range after power is restored and before the checksum is calculated for the same calculation range as before the power was shut off. At the end of the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 95), a process is executed to restore the data saved in the non-specific control stack area 184 to those registers in the primary MPU 72. This makes it possible to use those registers in the primary MPU 72 in the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 95), which is a non-specific control process, while restoring the data in those registers to the data at the start of the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 95) and returning to the specific control process. Additionally, by excluding the non-specific control stack area 184 from the range of checksum calculations, the range of checksum calculations is reduced. This reduces the amount of processing that must be performed from the time a power outage is identified until the power is cut off and operation of the main MPU 72 stops.

Next, the power outage processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 93(a). As already explained in the first embodiment above, the power outage processing is executed in step S204 when it is determined in the timer interrupt processing (Figure 15) that the power outage flag is set to "1" (step S202: YES) and when it is determined that command transmission has ended (step S203: YES). Note that in the power outage processing, processing other than the checksum processing (step S5504) is executed using a program and data for specific control, while the checksum processing (step S5504) is executed using a program and data for non-specific control.

In the power outage processing, steps S5501 to S5503 are executed in the same manner as steps S1701 to S1703 in the power outage processing (Figure 39) in the first embodiment described above. Specifically, the data stored in the head area 188 of the stack area 181 for specific control is first stored in the head save area 195 provided in the work area 183 for specific control (step S5501). The head save area 195 is a storage area provided in the work area 183 for specific control to save the data in the head area 188.

By backing up the data stored in the head area 188 to the head backup area 195 in step S5501, the head area 188 can be used to execute the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 95), a process for non-specific control, after power is restored. If it is confirmed that no abnormalities have occurred in the data stored in the checksum calculation range, the data stored in the head backup area 195 can be restored to the head area 188. This allows the data in the head area 188 to be restored to the data stored in the head area 188 at the start of the power outage process (Figure 93(a)), restoring the processing state to the state before the power was cut off. Furthermore, by configuring the checksums before and after power is restored to be calculated while the data in the head area 188 is saved in the head backup area 195, it is possible to confirm that no abnormalities have occurred in the data saved in the head backup area 195 by confirming that the checksum calculated after power is restored matches the checksum stored before power was cut off.

Then, the output status of the output port of the main MPU 72 is cleared (step S5502), and all actuators (not shown) are turned off (step S5503). Then, a jump command is issued to jump to the subroutine program corresponding to the power outage processing set in the non-specific control program, thereby starting the power outage processing (step S5504).

Next, the checksum processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 93 (b). The checksum processing is executed in step S5504 of the power outage processing (Figure 93 (a)). Note that the checksum processing is executed using a program and data for non-specific control.

In the checksum processing, a load instruction is first used to set the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 to "Y(u+1)," the last address in the non-specific control stack area 184, as a fixed address at the start of the non-specific control (step S5601). A call instruction is then used to read the subroutine program corresponding to the checksum calculation processing set in the non-specific control program, thereby starting the checksum calculation processing (step S5602). In this case, a push instruction is used to save information (2 bytes) specifying the return address for returning to the processing of step S5603 after the checksum calculation processing ends as return address information in the non-specific control stack area 184. The most significant byte of the return address information is stored in the storage area for non-specific control stack area 184 corresponding to the current stack pointer information ("Y(u+1)") of the main MPU 72, and the least significant byte of the return address information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the next stack pointer information ("Y(u)"). The stack pointer information of the main MPU 72 is then updated to the address information of the memory area to be written to next.

Figure 94 is a flowchart showing the checksum calculation process executed by the main MPU 72. Note that the checksum calculation process is executed using a non-specific control program and non-specific control data.

The checksum calculation process first clears the checksum area 193 in the non-specific control work area 182 to "0" (step S5701). Then, the BC register of the master MPU 72 is reserved for checksum calculation, and the BC register is cleared to "0" (step S5702). As already explained, the BC register is a 2-byte storage area.

Then, "Y(4)," the start address of the calculation range, is set as the address of the area to be added for the checksum (step S5703). The data stored in the memory area corresponding to the address of the area to be added in the main RAM 74 is then read (step S5704), and the read data is added as 1-byte numerical information to the BC register reserved for checksum calculation in the main MPU 72 (step S5705). In step S5705, if a carry occurs that causes the result of the addition to exceed the most significant bit of the BC register, the carry is ignored. Then, "1" is added to the address of the area to be added, updating the address of the area to be added (step S5706). In step S5706, the address of the area to be added is updated in the following order: Y(4) → Y(5) → Y(6) → ... → Y(t+1) → Y(t+2).

Then, it is determined whether the address of the area to be added is Y(t+2), which is the end address of the checksum calculation (step S5707). If a negative determination is made in step S5707, processing returns to step S5704, and steps S5704 to S5707 are repeatedly executed until a positive determination is made in step S5707. As a result, the BC register reserved for checksum calculation in the main MPU 72 contains the sum of the data stored in the checksum calculation range (Y(4) to Y(t+1)) in the main RAM 74 as the checksum calculation result. As explained above, this sum is 2-byte numerical information. If a positive determination is made in step S5707, this checksum calculation process ends.

When the checksum calculation process (Figure 94) is terminated, a pop command is used to read out the information saved in the storage area corresponding to the information one order earlier ("Y(u)") and the storage area corresponding to the information two orders earlier ("Y(u+1)") relative to the current stack pointer information of the main MPU 72 in the non-specific control stack area 184, and set this information in the program counter of the main MPU 72, while also updating the stack pointer information of the main MPU 72 to the address information of the storage area to which the information two orders earlier is to be written. This allows the process to return to step S5603 of the checksum process (Figure 93 (b)).

Returning to the explanation of the checksum processing (Figure 93 (b)), after the checksum calculation processing is executed in step S5602, the checksum stored in the BC register of the main MPU 72 is stored in the checksum area 193 of the third non-calculation area 192 in the non-specific control work area 182 (step S5603). This results in the checksum calculated before power was cut off being stored in the checksum area 193. Thereafter, access to the main RAM 74 is prohibited (step S5604). After the above processing is performed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the possibility that power will be completely cut off and processing will no longer be possible.

Next, the backup abnormality confirmation process executed by the primary MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 95. As already explained in the first embodiment above, the backup abnormality confirmation process is executed in step S1804 of the power recovery process (Figure 40). Note that the backup abnormality confirmation process is executed using a program and data for non-specific control.

In the backup abnormality confirmation process, steps S5801 and S5802 are the same as steps S1901 and S1902 of the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 41) in the first embodiment. Specifically, a load command is first used to set the stack pointer of the primary MPU 72 to "Y(u+1)," the last address in the non-specific control stack area 184, as a fixed address at the start of the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 95) (step S5801). Then, the information in the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register, which are some of the various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers provided by the primary MPU 72, is saved to the non-specific control stack area 184 in the following order: WA register → BC register → DE register → HL register → IX register → IY register (step S5802). The processing content in step S5802 is the same as the processing content in step S1902 of the backup abnormality confirmation processing (FIG. 41) in the first embodiment described above.

The WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are registers used in the processing of steps S5803 to S5805. By saving the information set in these registers to the non-specific control stack area 184 prior to executing the processing of steps S5803 to S5805, it is possible to save the information in these registers used during specific control before the non-specific control is started. Therefore, even if these registers are overwritten during non-specific control, by restoring the information saved in the non-specific control stack area 184 to these registers when the non-specific control is terminated, it is possible to restore the state of these registers to the state corresponding to specific control before the non-specific control was executed.

Then, a call instruction is issued to read a subroutine program corresponding to the checksum calculation process (FIG. 94) set in the non-specific control program, thereby starting the checksum calculation process (step S5803). In this case, a push instruction is issued to save, as return address information, two bytes of information specifying the return address for returning to the process of step S5804 after the checksum calculation process is completed, in the non-specific control stack area 184. The most significant byte of the return address information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the current stack pointer information ("Y(u+1)") of the main MPU 72 in the non-specific control stack area 184, and the least significant byte of the return address information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the next stack pointer information ("Y(u)"). The stack pointer information of the main MPU 72 is then updated to the address information of the storage area to be written to next.

In step S5803, the same program as that read in step S5603 of the checksum processing (Figure 93 (b)) is read. This configuration uses a common program in the main ROM 73 to calculate the checksum before power is cut off and after power is restored. This allows for more ample capacity in the area for storing programs in the main ROM 73 compared to a configuration in which the program for calculating the checksum before power is cut off and the program for calculating the checksum after power is restored are stored as different programs in the main ROM 73.

The processing content of the checksum calculation process (step S5803) has already been explained with reference to Figure 94. By executing the checksum calculation process (Figure 94), the checksum is stored in the BC register of the main MPU 72.

When the checksum calculation process (Figure 94) is terminated, a pop command is used to read out the information saved in the memory area corresponding to the information one order earlier ("Y(u)") and the memory area corresponding to the information two orders earlier ("Y(u+1)") relative to the current stack pointer information of the main MPU 72 in the non-specific control stack area 184, and set this information in the program counter of the main MPU 72, while also updating the stack pointer information of the main MPU 72 to the address information of the memory area to which the information two orders earlier is to be written. This allows the process to return to step S5804 of the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 95).

After executing the checksum calculation process (Figure 94) in step S5803, it is determined whether the checksum stored in the BC register of the main MPU 72 matches the checksum stored in the checksum area 193 of the third non-calculation area 192 in the work area 182 for non-specific control (step S5804). If the checksum calculated after power recovery does not match the checksum stored before power was cut off (step S5804: NO), the backup abnormality flag 194 provided in the work area 182 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S5805). The backup abnormality flag 194 is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to detect an abnormality in which the checksum calculated after power is turned on does not match the checksum calculated before power is turned off for the same calculation target range, which is the first calculation target area 189 in the stack area 181 for specific control, the work area 183 for specific control, the third calculation target area 191, the first unused area 185, and the second unused area 186 in the work area 182 for non-specific control. Setting the backup abnormality flag 194 to "1" allows the main MPU 72 to detect an abnormality in the data stored in the range subject to checksum calculation.

If a positive determination is made in step S5804 or if step S5805 is performed, steps S5806 and S5807 execute the same processing as steps S1911 and S1912 of the backup abnormality confirmation process (FIG. 41) in the first embodiment described above. Specifically, the data saved in the non-specific control stack area 184 in step S5802 is restored to the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the primary MPU 72 in the reverse order (IY register → IX register → HL register → DE register → BC register → WA register) of step S5802. The processing content in step S5806 is the same as the processing content in step S1911 of the backup abnormality confirmation process (FIG. 41) in the first embodiment described above. By executing the processing of step S5806, the information in the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main MPU 72 can be restored to the information corresponding to specific control at the start of the backup abnormality confirmation processing (FIG. 95), which is processing corresponding to non-specific control.

Then, the fixed address "Y(0)" is set in the stack pointer of the primary MPU 72 (step S5807), and this backup abnormality confirmation process is terminated. By setting the fixed address information in the stack pointer in this way, the stack pointer information is restored to the information immediately before the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 95) was started. This eliminates the need to save the stack pointer information of the primary MPU 72 corresponding to specific control to the work area 182 for non-specific control before starting the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 95). This allows the storage areas included in the work area 182 for non-specific control, excluding the checksum area 193, to be included in the range of checksum calculations, and also reduces the processing load on the primary MPU 72.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

The process of calculating a checksum before power is cut off and the process of calculating a checksum after power is restored are executed using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control. Therefore, a common program in the main ROM 73 can be used to calculate the checksum before power is cut off and after power is restored. This allows for more ample capacity in the area for storing programs in the main ROM 73, compared to a configuration in which the program for calculating a checksum before power is cut off and the program for calculating a checksum after power is restored are stored as different programs in the main ROM 73. Furthermore, compared to a configuration in which the process of calculating a checksum before power is cut off and after power is restored using a program for specific control and data for specific control, it allows for more ample capacity in the area for storing the program for specific control and data for specific control in the main ROM 73.

Fifth Embodiment
This embodiment differs from the fourth embodiment in that a match check of the specific checksum and a match check of the non-specific checksum are performed after power is restored. The following describes the configuration that differs from the fourth embodiment. Note that a description of the same configuration as the fourth embodiment will generally be omitted.

In this embodiment, the main RAM 74 is set with a specific checksum calculation range and a non-specific checksum calculation range. The main MPU 72 calculates and stores the specific checksum before power is cut off, and calculates the specific checksum for the same calculation range as before power is cut off after power is restored. The main MPU 72 also calculates and stores the non-specific checksum before power is cut off, and calculates the non-specific checksum for the same calculation range as before power is cut off after power is restored. Therefore, if the specific checksum calculated after power is restored does not match the specific checksum stored before power is cut off, it is possible to determine that an abnormality has occurred in the data stored in the calculation range of the specific checksum. Conversely, if the non-specific checksum calculated after power is restored does not match the non-specific checksum stored before power is cut off, it is possible to determine that an abnormality has occurred in the data stored in the calculation range of the non-specific checksum.

In this way, by setting multiple checksum calculation ranges in the main RAM 74 and calculating a checksum for each calculation range, it becomes easier to identify the range in the main RAM 74 where a data abnormality has occurred, and by initializing only the range where the data abnormality has occurred, it is possible to resolve the data abnormality while retaining the data stored in other calculation ranges.

Figure 96 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of the main RAM 74 in this embodiment, and Figure 97 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the setting mode of each area in the main RAM 74.

As shown in Figure 96, the main RAM 74 is provided with a stack area 201 for specific control, a work area 202 for non-specific control, a work area 203 for specific control, and a stack area 204 for non-specific control. In accordance with the distinction between specific control and non-specific control in the control executed by the main MPU 72, as shown in Figure 97, the address range of the stack area 201 for specific control, the address range of the work area 203 for specific control, the address range of the work area 202 for non-specific control, and the address range of the stack area 204 for non-specific control are also clearly distinguished in the main RAM 74.

Specifically, the area of consecutive addresses within the range of addresses Y(1) to Y(r+1) is set as the stack area 201 for specific control. Furthermore, addresses Y(r+2) to Y(r+4) consecutive to addresses Y(1) to Y(r+1) are addresses in the unused first unused area 205, and the area of consecutive addresses following this within the range of addresses Y(r+5) to Y(s+1) is set as the work area 203 for specific control. Furthermore, addresses Y(s+2) to Y(s+4) consecutive to addresses Y(r+5) to Y(s+1) are addresses in the unused second unused area 206, and the area of consecutive addresses following this within the range of addresses Y(s+5) to Y(t+5) is set as the work area 202 for non-specific control. Additionally, addresses Y(t+6) to Y(t+8), which are consecutive to addresses Y(s+5) to Y(t+5), are addresses in the unused third unused area 207, and the areas of consecutive addresses within the range of addresses Y(t+9) to Y(u+1) are set as the non-specific control stack area 204. The relationship between each area and address as described above is set both as a physical address in the primary RAM 74 and as a logical address on the memory map recognized by the primary MPU 72.

When the main MPU 72 executes processing corresponding to specific control, the main MPU 72 can write information to the specific control work area 203 and the specific control stack area 201, and can read information from the specific control work area 203 and the specific control stack area 201. On the other hand, when the main MPU 72 executes processing corresponding to specific control, the main MPU 72 can read information from the non-specific control work area 202 and the non-specific control stack area 204, but cannot write information to the non-specific control work area 202 and the non-specific control stack area 204. This makes it possible to prevent information used in processing corresponding to non-specific control from being accidentally erased when processing corresponding to specific control is being executed.

Furthermore, when the main MPU 72 executes processing corresponding to non-specific control, the main MPU 72 can write information to the non-specific control work area 202 and the non-specific control stack area 204, and can read information from the non-specific control work area 202 and the non-specific control stack area 204. On the other hand, when the main MPU 72 executes processing corresponding to non-specific control, the main MPU 72 can read information from the specific control work area 203 and the specific control stack area 201, but cannot write information to the specific control work area 203 and the specific control stack area 201. This makes it possible to prevent information used in processing corresponding to specific control from being accidentally erased when processing corresponding to non-specific control is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 96, the stack area 201 for specific control in the main RAM 74 includes a leading area 208 that is excluded from the calculation range of the specific checksum calculated before power is shut off and after power is restored, and a first calculation target area 209 that is included in the calculation range of the specific checksum. The leading area 208 is a storage area for the first 3 bytes in the stack area 201 for specific control. The work area 202 for non-specific control includes a third calculation target area 211 that is included in the calculation range of the non-specific checksum calculated before power is shut off and after power is restored, and a third non-calculation target area 212 that is excluded from the calculation range of the non-specific checksum.

In this embodiment, the memory area used to display on the ratio display 85 the advantageous zone stay ratio so that it can be grasped is provided in the third calculation target area 211, which is included in the calculation target range of the non-specific checksum. The memory area used to display the advantageous zone stay ratio includes the game execution grasp flag, total game number counter, advantageous game number counter, and management display flag already explained in the first embodiment above. By providing the memory area used to display the advantageous zone stay ratio in the third calculation target area 211, if an abnormality occurs in the data used to display the advantageous zone stay ratio, it is possible to prevent game play from continuing while the abnormality exists in the data.

As already explained in the fourth embodiment above, when the main MPU 72 determines that a power outage has occurred, it executes power outage processing (FIG. 93(a)) in step S204 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 15). In the power outage processing (FIG. 93(a)), a specific checksum and a non-specific checksum are calculated for data stored in some storage areas in the main RAM 74. As shown in FIG. 97, the calculation range for the specific checksum is the first calculation target area 209 in the stack area 201 for specific control, the work area 203 for specific control, and the first unused area 205. The calculation range for the non-specific checksum is the third calculation target area 211 in the work area 202 for non-specific control.

The address range of the storage area that is the target of the specific checksum calculation is the continuous address range Y(4) to Y(s+1). This simplifies the process for specifying the address range of the storage area that is the target of the specific checksum calculation in the processing configuration for calculating the specific checksum. As already explained, in the main RAM 74, the address range of the first unused area 205 (Y(r+2) to Y(r+4)) exists between the address range of the first calculation target area 209 (Y(4) to Y(r+1)) and the address range of the specific control work area 203 (Y(r+5) to Y(s+1)). By including the first unused area 205 in the target range of the specific checksum calculation, the address range of the storage area that is the target of the checksum calculation in the main RAM 74 can be made a continuous address range.

The address range of the storage area that is the target of the non-specific checksum calculation is the consecutive address range Y(s+5) to Y(t+1). This simplifies the process for specifying the address range of the storage area that is the target of the non-specific checksum calculation in the processing configuration for calculating the non-specific checksum.

The second unused area 206 and the third unused area 207 are areas that are not used in either specific control or non-specific control, and checksums are not calculated for these second unused area 206 and third unused area 207.

In this embodiment, in the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 101) executed after power is restored, a specific checksum is calculated for the same calculation target range as the specific checksum calculated before power is shut down, and a non-specific checksum is calculated for the same calculation target range as the non-specific checksum calculated before power is shut down. If the specific checksum calculated after power is restored for the same calculation target range in the main RAM 74 matches the specific checksum calculated before power is shut down, the main MPU 72 confirms that no abnormality has occurred in the data stored in that calculation target range, and if the non-specific checksum calculated after power is restored for the same calculation target range in the main RAM 74 matches the non-specific checksum calculated before power is shut down, it confirms that no abnormality has occurred in the data stored in that calculation target range.

The calculation method for the specific checksum and the calculation method for the non-specific checksum are the same as the checksum calculation method in the fourth embodiment described above, with only the calculation range being different. The calculation method for the specific checksum is the same when calculating a specific checksum based on the identification of a power outage and when calculating a specific checksum after power is restored, while the calculation method for the non-specific checksum is the same when calculating a non-specific checksum based on the identification of a power outage and when calculating a non-specific checksum after power is restored.

As shown in FIG. 96, in the work area 202 for non-specific control, a third non-computation area 212, which is provided separately from the third computation target area 211, is provided with an area 213 for specific checksums and an area 214 for non-specific checksums. The area 213 for specific checksums is a memory area for storing a 2-byte specific checksum calculated based on the identification of a power outage, and the area 214 for non-specific checksums is a memory area for storing a 2-byte non-specific checksum calculated based on the identification of a power outage. The area 213 for specific checksums and the area 214 for non-specific checksums are both 2-byte memory areas.

By providing a specific checksum area 213 and a non-specific checksum area 214 in the third non-calculation area 212, which is excluded from the calculation range of the specific checksum and non-specific checksum, it is possible to store the specific checksum and non-specific checksum in the specific checksum area 213 and the non-specific checksum area 214 without changing the data stored in the calculation range of the specific checksum and non-specific checksum.

As described above, in specific control processing, writing to the specific control work area 203 is possible, but writing to the non-specific control work area 202 is not possible. Furthermore, in non-specific control processing, writing to the non-specific control work area 202 is possible, but writing to the specific control work area 203 is not possible. Therefore, if the specific checksum area 213 and the non-specific checksum area 214 are distributed across different work areas 202 and 203, the process of storing the specific checksum calculated before power interruption in the specific checksum area 213 and the process of storing the non-specific checksum calculated before power interruption in the non-specific checksum area 214 will be distributed across the specific control processing and the non-specific control processing. In contrast, in this embodiment, the specific checksum area 213 and the non-specific checksum area 214 are provided in the third non-calculation area 212 in the non-specific control work area 202. This allows the process of storing a specific checksum in the specific checksum area 213 and the process of storing a non-specific checksum in the non-specific checksum area 214 to be consolidated into a non-specific control process. This simplifies the processing configuration for storing a specific checksum in the specific checksum area 213 and the process of storing a non-specific checksum in the non-specific checksum area 214.

In this embodiment, the process of calculating the specific checksum and non-specific checksum before power is shut off and the process of calculating the specific checksum and non-specific checksum after power is restored are executed using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control. Therefore, the specific checksum can be calculated using a common program in the main ROM 73 before power is shut off and after power is restored. This allows for more ample capacity in the area for storing programs in the main ROM 73 compared to a configuration in which the program for calculating the specific checksum before power is shut off and the program for calculating the specific checksum after power is restored are stored as different programs in the main ROM 73. Furthermore, the non-specific checksum can be calculated using a common program in the main ROM 73 before power is shut off and after power is restored. This allows for more ample capacity in the area for storing programs in the main ROM 73 compared to a configuration in which the program for calculating the non-specific checksum before power is shut off and the program for calculating the non-specific checksum after power is restored are stored as different programs in the main ROM 73. Furthermore, compared to a configuration in which the process of calculating the specific checksum and non-specific checksum before power is shut off and after power is restored is performed using a specific control program and specific control data, the main ROM 73 can have more ample capacity for storing the specific control program and specific control data.

As will be described in detail later, at the start of the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 101), a process is executed to save data from some registers in the main MPU 72 to the non-specific control stack area 204. As shown in Figure 96, the non-specific control stack area 204 is excluded from the calculation range of the specific checksum and the calculation range of the non-specific checksum. This makes it possible to save data from some registers in the main MPU 72 to the non-specific control stack area 204 while preventing changes to the data stored in the calculation range of the specific checksum and the data stored in the calculation range of the non-specific checksum after power is restored and before the calculation of the specific checksum and non-specific checksum is performed. At the end of the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 101), a process is executed to restore the data saved in the non-specific control stack area 204 to those registers in the main MPU 72. This allows those registers in the main MPU 72 to be used in the backup abnormality confirmation process (FIG. 101), which is a process for non-specific control, while the data in those registers can be restored to the data at the start of the backup abnormality confirmation process (FIG. 101), allowing for a return to the process for specific control. Furthermore, because the stack area 204 for non-specific control is excluded from the calculation range of the specific checksum and the calculation range of the non-specific checksum, the calculation range of these checksums is reduced. This reduces the amount of processing that must be performed from the time a power outage is identified until the power is cut off and operation of the main MPU 72 stops.

Next, the checksum processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 98. As already explained in the fourth embodiment above, the checksum processing is executed in step S5504 of the power outage processing (Figure 93 (a)). Note that the checksum processing is executed using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

In the checksum processing, a load instruction is first used to set the stack pointer of the master MPU 72 to "Y(u+1)," the last address in the non-specific control stack area 204, as a fixed address at the start of the non-specific control (step S5901). A call instruction is then used to read a subroutine program corresponding to the specific checksum calculation processing set in the non-specific control program, thereby starting the specific checksum calculation processing (step S5902). In this case, a push instruction is used to save information (2 bytes) specifying the return address for returning to the processing of step S5903 after the specific checksum calculation processing ends as return address information in the non-specific control stack area 204. The most significant byte of the return address information is stored in the storage area for non-specific control stack area 204 corresponding to the current stack pointer information ("Y(u+1)") of the master MPU 72, and the least significant byte of the return address information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the next stack pointer information ("Y(u)"). The stack pointer information of the main MPU 72 is then updated to the address information of the memory area to be written to next.

Figure 99 is a flowchart showing the specific checksum calculation process executed by the main MPU 72. Note that the specific checksum calculation process is executed using a non-specific control program and non-specific control data.

In the specific checksum calculation process, the specific checksum area 213 in the non-specific control work area 202 is first cleared to "0" (step S6001). Then, in steps S6002 to S6006, the same processing as steps S5702 to S5706 in the checksum calculation process (Figure 94) in the fourth embodiment is executed. Specifically, the BC register of the main MPU 72 is first reserved for checksum calculation, and the BC register is cleared to "0" (step S6002). As already explained, the BC register is a storage area consisting of 2 bytes.

Then, "Y(4)," the start address of the calculation range, is set as the address of the area to be added for the specific checksum (step S6003). The data stored in the memory area corresponding to the address of the area to be added in the main RAM 74 is then read (step S6004), and the read data is added as one byte of numerical information to the BC register reserved for the calculation of the specific checksum in the main MPU 72 (step S6005). In step S6005, if a carry occurs that causes the result of the addition to exceed the most significant bit of the BC register, the carry is ignored. Then, "1" is added to the address of the area to be added, updating the address of the area to be added (step S6006). In step S6006, the address of the area to be added is updated in the following order: Y(4) → Y(5) → Y(6) → ... → Y(s+1) → Y(s+2).

Then, it is determined whether the address of the area to be added is Y(s+2), which is the end address of the specific checksum calculation (step S6007). If a negative determination is made in step S6007, the process returns to step S6004, and steps S6004 to S6007 are repeatedly executed until a positive determination is made in step S6007. As a result, the BC register reserved for the specific checksum calculation in the main MPU 72 contains the lowest two bytes of the total value of the data stored in the checksum calculation range (Y(4) to Y(s+1)) in the main RAM 74 as the result of the specific checksum calculation. If a positive determination is made in step S6007, the specific checksum calculation process is terminated.

When the specific checksum calculation process (Figure 99) is terminated, a pop command is used to read out the information saved in the memory area corresponding to the information one order earlier ("Y(u)") and the memory area corresponding to the information two orders earlier ("Y(u+1)") relative to the current stack pointer information of the main MPU 72 in the non-specific control stack area 204, and set this information in the program counter of the main MPU 72, while also updating the stack pointer information of the main MPU 72 to the address information of the memory area to which the information two orders earlier is to be written. This allows the process to return to step S5903 of the checksum process (Figure 98).

Returning to the explanation of the checksum processing (Figure 98), after the specific checksum calculation processing is executed in step S5902, the specific checksum stored in the BC register of the main MPU 72 is stored in the specific checksum area 213 of the third non-calculation area 212 in the non-specific control work area 202 (step S5903). As a result, the specific checksum calculated before power was shut off is stored in the specific checksum area 213.

Then, a call instruction is used to read a subroutine program corresponding to the non-specific checksum calculation process set in the non-specific control program, thereby starting the non-specific checksum calculation process (step S5904). In this case, a push instruction is used to save, as return address information, two bytes of information for non-specifically specifying the return address for returning to the processing of step S5905 after the non-specific checksum calculation process is completed, to the non-specific control stack area 204. The most significant byte of the return address information is stored in the storage area for non-specific control stack area 204 corresponding to the current stack pointer information ("Y(u+1)") of the main MPU 72, and the least significant byte of the return address information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the next stack pointer information ("Y(u)"). The stack pointer information of the main MPU 72 is then updated to the address information of the storage area to be written to next.

Figure 100 is a flowchart showing the non-specific checksum calculation process executed by the main MPU 72. Note that the non-specific checksum calculation process is executed using a non-specific control program and non-specific control data.

In the non-specific checksum calculation process, the non-specific checksum area 214 in the non-specific control work area 202 is first cleared to "0" (step S6101). Then, the BC register of the main MPU 72 is reserved for checksum calculation, and the BC register is cleared to "0" (step S6102). As already explained, the BC register is a 2-byte storage area.

Then, "Y(s+5)," the start address of the calculation range, is set as the address of the area to be added for the non-specific checksum (step S6103). The data stored in the memory area corresponding to the address of the area to be added in the main RAM 74 is then read (step S6104), and the read data is added as one byte of numerical information to the BC register reserved for the calculation of the non-specific checksum in the main MPU 72 (step S6105). In step S6105, if a carry occurs that causes the result of the addition to exceed the most significant bit of the BC register, the carry is ignored. Then, "1" is added to the address of the area to be added, updating the address of the area to be added (step S6106). In step S6106, the address of the area to be added is updated in the following order: Y(s+5) → Y(s+6) → Y(s+7) → ... → Y(t+1) → Y(t+2).

Then, it is determined whether the address of the area to be added is Y(t+2), which is the end address of the non-specific checksum calculation (step S6107). If a negative determination is made in step S6107, processing returns to step S6104, and steps S6104 to S6107 are repeatedly executed until a positive determination is made in step S6107. As a result, the BC register reserved for non-specific checksum calculation in the main MPU 72 contains the lowest two bytes of the sum of the data stored in the checksum calculation range (Y(s+5) to Y(t+1)) in the main RAM 74 as the non-specific checksum calculation result. If a positive determination is made in step S6107, this non-specific checksum calculation process is terminated.

When the non-specific checksum calculation process (Figure 100) is terminated, a pop command is used to read out the information saved in the memory area corresponding to the information one order earlier ("Y(u)") and the memory area corresponding to the information two orders earlier ("Y(u+1)") relative to the current stack pointer information of the main MPU 72 in the non-specific control stack area 204, and set this information in the program counter of the main MPU 72, while also updating the stack pointer information of the main MPU 72 to the address information of the memory area to which the information two orders earlier is to be written. This allows the process to return to step S5905 of the checksum process (Figure 98).

Returning to the explanation of the checksum processing (Figure 98), after executing the non-specific checksum calculation processing in step S5904, the non-specific checksum stored in the BC register of the main MPU 72 is stored in the non-specific checksum area 214 of the third non-calculation area 212 in the non-specific control work area 202 (step S5905). This results in the non-specific checksum calculated before power was cut off being stored in the non-specific checksum area 214. Thereafter, access to the main RAM 74 is prohibited (step S5906). After performing the above processing, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the possibility that power will be completely cut off and processing will no longer be possible.

Next, the backup abnormality confirmation process executed by the primary MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 101. As already explained in the first embodiment above, the backup abnormality confirmation process is executed in step S1804 of the power recovery process (Figure 40). Note that the backup abnormality confirmation process is executed using a program and data for non-specific control.

In the backup abnormality confirmation process, steps S6201 and S6202 are the same as steps S5801 and S5802 of the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 95) in the fourth embodiment. Specifically, a load command is first used to set the stack pointer of the primary MPU 72 to "Y(u+1)," the last address in the non-specific control stack area 204, as a fixed address at the start of the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 101) (step S6201). Then, the information in the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register, which are some of the various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers provided by the primary MPU 72, is saved to the non-specific control stack area 204 in the following order: WA register → BC register → DE register → HL register → IX register → IY register (step S6202). The processing content in step S6202 is the same as the processing content in step S1902 of the backup abnormality confirmation processing (FIG. 41) in the first embodiment described above.

The WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are registers used in the processing of steps S6203 to S6209. By saving the information set in these registers to the stack area 204 for non-specific control prior to the execution of the processing of steps S6203 to S6209, it is possible to save the information in these registers used during specific control before the non-specific control is started. Therefore, even if these registers are overwritten during non-specific control, by restoring the information saved in the stack area 204 for non-specific control to these registers when the non-specific control is terminated, it is possible to restore the state of these registers to the state corresponding to specific control before the non-specific control was executed.

Then, a call instruction is issued to read a subroutine program corresponding to the specific checksum calculation process (Figure 99) set in the non-specific control program, thereby starting the specific checksum calculation process (step S6203). In this case, a push instruction is issued to save, as return address information, two bytes of information specifying the return address for returning to the processing of step S6204 after the specific checksum calculation process is completed, in the non-specific control stack area 204. The most significant byte of the return address information is stored in a memory area in the non-specific control stack area 204 corresponding to the current stack pointer information ("Y(u+1)") of the main MPU 72, and the least significant byte of the return address information is stored in a memory area corresponding to the next stack pointer information ("Y(u)"). The stack pointer information of the main MPU 72 is then updated to the address information of the memory area to be written to next.

In step S6203, the same program as that read in step S5902 of the checksum processing (Figure 98) is read. This configuration calculates the specific checksum using a common program in the main ROM 73 before power is cut off and after power is restored. This allows for more ample capacity in the area for storing programs in the main ROM 73 compared to a configuration in which the program for calculating the specific checksum before power is cut off and the program for calculating the specific checksum after power is restored are stored as different programs in the main ROM 73.

The processing content of the specific checksum calculation process (step S6203) has already been explained with reference to Figure 99. By executing the specific checksum calculation process (Figure 99), the specific checksum is stored in the BC register of the main MPU 72.

When the specific checksum calculation process (Figure 99) is terminated, a pop command is used to read out the information saved in the memory area corresponding to the information one order earlier ("Y(u)") and the memory area corresponding to the information two orders earlier ("Y(u+1)") relative to the current stack pointer information of the main MPU 72 in the non-specific control stack area 204, and set this information in the program counter of the main MPU 72, while also updating the stack pointer information of the main MPU 72 to the address information of the memory area to which the information two orders earlier is to be written. This allows the process to return to step S6204 of the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 101).

After executing the specific checksum calculation process (FIG. 99) in step S6203, it is determined whether the specific checksum stored in the BC register of the main MPU 72 matches the checksum stored in the specific checksum area 213 of the third non-calculation area 212 in the non-specific control work area 202 (step S6204). If the specific checksum calculated after power restoration does not match the specific checksum stored before power was shut off (step S6204: NO), the backup abnormality flag 215 in the non-specific control work area 202 is set to "1" (step S6205). The backup abnormality flag 215 is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to detect an abnormality in which the specific checksum calculated after power was turned on does not match the specific checksum calculated before power was shut off for the same calculation target range, which is the first calculation target area 209 in the specific control stack area 201, the specific control work area 203, and the first unused area 205. By setting the backup abnormality flag 215 to "1", the main MPU 72 can determine that an abnormality has occurred in the data stored in the range subject to the specific checksum calculation.

If the backup abnormality flag 215 is set to "1", as in the first embodiment, a positive determination is made in step S1806 of the power recovery process (Figure 40), and the operation prohibition process (processing in steps S1818 to S1820) is executed.

As in the first embodiment, the operation prohibition process first clears all output ports of the main MPU 72 to "0," thereby turning off all actuators connected to those output ports (step S1818). Then, the error state flag in the specific control work area 203 is set to "1" (step S1819). This allows the main MPU 72 to detect the occurrence of one or more of the following error states: an error state in which a specific checksum calculated after power-on using a portion of the storage area in the main RAM 74 as the calculation range does not match the specific checksum calculated and stored for the same calculation range before power-off; an error state in which the setting value of the slot machine 10 is outside the normal setting value range ("1" to "6"); or an error state corresponding to the power outage processing (Figure 39) not being performed properly before power-off.

Then, an error notification process is executed to notify the amusement hall manager or the like of the occurrence of an error state (step S1820). The process then enters an infinite loop. In the error notification process (step S1820), an error notification command is sent to the production-side MPU 92. When the production-side MPU 92 receives the error notification command, it controls the light emission of the upper lamp 61, the sound output of the speaker 62, and the display on the image display device 63 in a manner that notifies the occurrence of an error state. In the error notification, content explaining the error recovery operation, which involves turning on the power to the slot machine 10 while turning on the setting key insertion hole 57, is displayed on the image display device 63. This makes it possible to prompt the amusement hall manager to perform the error recovery operation.

When the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped, the error notification being executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 is terminated, but the error status flag in the specific control work area 203 remains set to "1" and the backup abnormality flag 215 in the non-specific control work area 202 remains set to "1." If the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started without turning on the setting key insertion hole 57 and the error status flag in the specific control work area 203 remains set to "1," a positive determination is made in step S1801 of the power recovery process (Figure 40), and error notification will again be started by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63.

The state in which the error status flag in the specific control work area 203 is set to "1" is cleared by executing the all clear process (FIG. 43) in step S107 of the main processing (FIG. 14). If the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started while the setting key insertion hole 57 is being turned ON after the error status flag is set to "1," positive determinations are made in steps S102 and S104 of the main processing (FIG. 14), and the all clear process (FIG. 43) is executed in step S107.

The all-clear process (Figure 43) clears the error status flag in the work area 203 for specific control to "0." As a result, if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is initiated while the setting key insertion hole 57 is turned ON, a negative judgment is made in step S104 of the main process (Figure 14). The all-clear process (Figure 43) clears the backup abnormality flag 215 in the work area 202 for non-specific control to "0." As previously explained, in the main process (Figure 14), after the all-clear process (step S107) is executed, an interrupt by the timer interrupt process (Figure 15) is permitted, and the setting value update process (step S109) performed thereafter updates the setting value of the slot machine 10 to a setting value within the normal range ("1" to "6"). By permitting an interrupt by the timer interrupt process (Figure 15), it becomes possible to stop operation of the main MPU 72 with the power outage flag set to "1" in the event of a power outage. For this reason, if the all-clear process (step S107) is executed after an error is reported, and then a power outage occurs and the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 begins without the setting key insertion hole 57 being turned ON, a negative determination will be made in step S1806 of the power recovery process (FIG. 40) and positive determinations will be made in steps S1807 and S1808, unless a new error state occurs.

Returning to the explanation of the backup abnormality confirmation process (FIG. 101), if a positive judgment is made in step S6204 or if the process of step S6205 is performed, a call instruction is issued to read a subroutine program corresponding to the non-specific checksum calculation process (FIG. 100) set in the non-specific control program, thereby starting the non-specific checksum calculation process (step S6206). In this case, information (2 bytes) specifying the return address for returning to the process of step S6207 after the specific checksum calculation process is completed is saved as return address information in the non-specific control stack area 204 by a push instruction. The most significant byte of the return address information is stored in the storage area for non-specific control stack area 204 corresponding to the current stack pointer information ("Y(u+1)") of the main MPU 72, and the least significant byte of the return address information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the next stack pointer information ("Y(u)"). The stack pointer information of the main MPU 72 is then updated to the address information of the memory area to be written to next.

In step S6206, the same program as that read in step S5904 of the checksum processing (Figure 98) is read. This configuration calculates the non-specific checksum using a common program in the main ROM 73 before power is cut off and after power is restored. This allows for more ample capacity in the area for storing programs in the main ROM 73 compared to a configuration in which the program for calculating the non-specific checksum before power is cut off and the program for calculating the non-specific checksum after power is restored are stored as different programs in the main ROM 73.

The processing content of the non-specific checksum calculation process (step S6206) has already been explained with reference to Figure 100. By executing the specific checksum calculation process (Figure 100), the non-specific checksum is stored in the BC register of the main MPU 72.

When the non-specific checksum calculation process (Figure 100) is terminated, a pop command is used to read out the information saved in the memory area corresponding to the information one order earlier ("Y(u)") and the memory area corresponding to the information two orders earlier ("Y(u+1)") relative to the current stack pointer information of the main MPU 72 in the non-specific control stack area 204, and set this information in the program counter of the main MPU 72, while also updating the stack pointer information of the main MPU 72 to the address information of the memory area to which the information two orders earlier is to be written. This allows the process to return to step S6207 of the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 101).

After executing the non-specific checksum calculation process (FIG. 100) in step S6206, it is determined whether the non-specific checksum stored in the BC register of the main MPU 72 matches the checksum stored in the non-specific checksum area 214 of the third non-calculation area 212 in the non-specific control work area 202 (step S6207). If the non-specific checksum calculated after power is restored does not match the non-specific checksum stored before power was cut off (step S6207: NO), a non-specific abnormality notification command is sent to the production MPU 92 (step S6208). The non-specific abnormality notification command is a command that causes the production MPU 92 to execute a non-specific abnormality notification, which notifies the production MPU 92 that an abnormality has occurred in the data stored in the calculation range of the non-specific checksum and that initialization processing of the non-specific control work area 202 (step S6209) will be executed. When the production-side MPU 92 receives the non-specific abnormality notification command, it controls the light emission of the upper lamp 61, the sound output of the speaker 62, and the display of the image display device 63 so that a non-specific abnormality notification is issued for 5 seconds. This notifies the gaming hall manager that initialization processing (step S6209) of the work area 202 for non-specific control will be executed.

After that, an initialization process for the work area 202 for non-specific control is executed (step S6209). In this initialization process, the storage areas in the work area 202 for non-specific control are cleared to "0" and initial settings are made for the storage areas cleared to "0". By executing the initialization process for the work area 202 for non-specific control, the state in which an abnormality has occurred in the data stored in the work area 202 for non-specific control is resolved. The initialization process for the work area 202 for non-specific control is executed without the need for any action by the amusement hall administrator. If an abnormality occurs in the data stored in the range subject to the calculation of the non-specific checksum, the state is resolved without the need for any action by the amusement hall administrator, thereby reducing the management burden on the amusement hall administrator.

If a positive determination is made in step S6207 or if step S6209 is performed, steps S6210 and S6211 execute the same processing as steps S5806 and S5807 of the backup abnormality confirmation process (FIG. 95) in the fourth embodiment. Specifically, the data saved in the non-specific control stack area 204 in step S6202 is restored to the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the primary MPU 72 in the reverse order (IY register → IX register → HL register → DE register → BC register → WA register) of step S6202. The processing content in step S6210 is the same as the processing content in step S1911 of the backup abnormality confirmation process (FIG. 41) in the first embodiment. By executing the processing of step S6210, the information in the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main MPU 72 can be restored to the information corresponding to specific control at the start of the backup abnormality confirmation processing (FIG. 101), which is processing corresponding to non-specific control.

Then, the fixed address "Y(0)" is set in the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 (step S6211), and this backup abnormality confirmation process is terminated. By setting the fixed address information in the stack pointer in this way, the stack pointer information is restored to the information immediately before the backup abnormality confirmation process (FIG. 101) was started. This eliminates the need to save the stack pointer information of the main MPU 72 corresponding to specific control to the work area 202 for non-specific control before starting the backup abnormality confirmation process (FIG. 101). This allows the storage areas included in the work area 202 for non-specific control, excluding the specific checksum area 213 and the non-specific checksum area 214, to be included in the range of calculation of the non-specific checksum, and also reduces the processing load on the main MPU 72.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

In the main RAM 74, the first calculation target area 209 in the stack area 201 for specific control, the work area 203 for specific control, and the first unused area 205 are set as the calculation target range for the specific checksum, and the third calculation target area 211 in the work area 202 for non-specific control is set as the calculation target range for the non-specific checksum. The specific checksum is calculated and stored before power is cut off, and after power is restored, the specific checksum is calculated for the same calculation target range as before power is cut off. The non-specific checksum is calculated and stored before power is cut off, and after power is restored, the non-specific checksum is calculated for the same calculation target range as before power is cut off. Therefore, if the specific checksum calculated after power is restored does not match the specific checksum stored before power is cut off, it is possible to determine that an abnormality has occurred in the data stored in the calculation target range for the specific checksum. Furthermore, if the non-specific checksum calculated after power is restored does not match the non-specific checksum stored before power is cut off, it is possible to determine that an abnormality has occurred in the data stored in the calculation target range for the non-specific checksum.

The specific checksum area 213 and the non-specific checksum area 214 are provided in the third non-calculation area 212 in the non-specific control work area 202. This allows the process of storing the specific checksum in the specific checksum area 213 and the process of storing the non-specific checksum in the non-specific checksum area 214 to be consolidated into the non-specific control process. Therefore, the processing configuration for these processes can be simplified compared to a configuration in which the process of storing the specific checksum in the specific checksum area 213 and the process of storing the non-specific checksum in the non-specific checksum area 214 are distributed across the specific control process and the non-specific control process.

If the non-specific checksum calculated after power is restored does not match the non-specific checksum stored before power was cut off, a non-specific abnormality notification is issued and the work area 202 for non-specific control is initialized. By checking the non-specific abnormality notification, the amusement hall manager can understand that an abnormality has occurred in the data stored in the range subject to the calculation of the non-specific checksum.

In the initialization process for the work area 202 for non-specific control, all storage areas in the work area 202 for non-specific control are cleared to "0", and the storage areas that have been cleared to "0" are initialized. Executing the initialization process for the work area 202 for non-specific control resolves any abnormalities in the data stored in the work area 202 for non-specific control. The initialization process for the work area 202 for non-specific control is executed without the need for any action by the amusement hall administrator. If an abnormality occurs in the data stored in the range subject to the calculation of the non-specific checksum, the state is resolved without the need for any action by the amusement hall administrator, thereby reducing the management burden on the amusement hall administrator.

If the specific checksum calculated after power is restored does not match the specific checksum stored before power was cut off, an error state will occur and an error notification will be issued. This allows the amusement hall manager to be notified that an error state has occurred.

The state in which the error state flag is set to "1" will not be resolved until the all-clear process is executed. Executing the all-clear process will resolve the state in which the error state flag is set to "1" and will also resolve the state in which an abnormality has occurred in the data stored in the range that is the target of the specific checksum calculation. This prevents the game from being executed in a state in which an abnormality has not been resolved in the data stored in the range that is the target of the specific checksum calculation.

It is possible to identify a state in which an abnormality has occurred only in data stored in the range calculated by a specific checksum, and a state in which an abnormality has occurred only in data stored in the range calculated by a non-specific checksum. Therefore, in a configuration in which an amusement hall manager is required to perform an operation to clear the error state when an abnormality occurs in data stored in the range calculated by a specific checksum, this eliminates the need for the amusement hall manager to perform an operation to clear the error when an abnormality occurs in data stored in the range calculated by a non-specific checksum. This reduces the management burden on the amusement hall manager.

If an abnormality occurs in the data stored in the range covered by the non-specific checksum calculation, it is possible to initialize only the range covered by the non-specific checksum calculation while preserving the data stored in the range covered by the specific checksum calculation. This prevents the range covered by the specific checksum calculation, where no data abnormality has occurred, from being initialized.

The process of calculating the specific checksum and non-specific checksum before power is cut off, and the process of calculating the specific checksum and non-specific checksum after power is restored, are executed using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control. Therefore, the specific checksum can be calculated using a common program in the main ROM 73 before power is cut off and after power is restored. This allows for more ample capacity in the area for storing programs in the main ROM 73 compared to a configuration in which the program for calculating the specific checksum before power is cut off and the program for calculating the specific checksum after power is restored are stored as different programs in the main ROM 73. Furthermore, the non-specific checksum can be calculated using a common program in the main ROM 73 before power is cut off and after power is restored. This allows for more ample capacity in the area for storing programs in the main ROM 73 compared to a configuration in which the program for calculating the non-specific checksum before power is cut off and the program for calculating the non-specific checksum after power is restored are stored as different programs in the main ROM 73. Furthermore, compared to a configuration in which the process of calculating the specific checksum and non-specific checksum before power is shut off and after power is restored is performed using a specific control program and specific control data, the main ROM 73 can have more ample capacity for storing the specific control program and specific control data.

Sixth Embodiment
In this embodiment, the conditions under which the setting confirmation display is started on the credit display unit 65 are different from those in the first embodiment. The following describes the configuration that differs from the first embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

In this embodiment, the setting confirmation display is initiated under the following conditions: no game is being played; there is a vacant slot in at least one of the number of gaming media bets and the number of virtual medals stored; the gaming state is not a bonus state; the front door 12 is open; and the setting key insertion hole 57 has been turned ON using the setting key. When no game is being played; there is a vacant slot in at least one of the number of gaming media bets and the number of virtual medals stored; and the gaming state is not a bonus state, the amusement hall manager can initiate the setting confirmation display by opening the front door 12 and turning ON the setting key insertion hole 57. By displaying the setting confirmation display, the current setting value of the slot machine 10 can be ascertained based on the display in the credit display section 65.

The setting confirmation display is initiated under the following conditions: a game is not being executed; and there is a vacant slot in at least one of the number of gaming media bets and the number of virtual medals stored. As already explained in the first embodiment, the selector 52 is placed in a non-acceptance state when the setting confirmation display begins. Therefore, the number of gaming media bets and the number of virtual medals stored do not increase while the setting confirmation display is being executed, and a game will not be started while the setting confirmation display is being executed because the number of gaming media bets has not reached the specified number. Even when the setting confirmation display ends, there remains a vacant slot in at least one of the number of gaming media bets and the number of virtual medals stored. As a result, when the setting confirmation display ends, the acceptance permission process can be executed to switch the selector 52 to the acceptance permission state without executing the following processes: confirming that a game is not being executed; confirming that the value of the bet number counter 125 in the second calculation target area 111 is less than the maximum value (specifically, "3"); and confirming that the value of the credit counter in the second calculation target area 111 is less than the maximum number of stored medals (specifically, "50").

As already explained in the first embodiment above, when a replay win is achieved, the bet number counter 125 in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "3," the specified number of gaming media, during the start waiting process (Figure 49) that is performed first after the replay win is achieved, and no more gaming media are available for betting. Also, as already explained in the first embodiment above, if the number of stored virtual medals is less than the upper limit of stored memory (specifically, "50") at the end of the game in which the replay win is achieved, the acceptance permission process is executed in step S314 of the normal process (Figure 16), causing the selector 52 to enter the acceptance permission state. In the acceptance permission state, the number of stored virtual medals is increased by one when a medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 45 is detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a. In this embodiment, after a game in which a replay win is achieved is over, if the number of stored virtual medals is less than the maximum number of stored virtual medals (specifically, 50), the setting confirmation display is ready to start, but if the number of stored virtual medals is equal to or greater than the maximum number of stored virtual medals (specifically, 50), the setting confirmation display is not ready to start. If the number of stored virtual medals is equal to or greater than the maximum number of stored virtual medals (specifically, 50) after a game in which a replay win is achieved is over, the amusement hall manager can operate the settlement button 51 to make the number of stored virtual medals available, thereby readying the setting confirmation display to start.

Next, the setting confirmation process executed by the main MPU 72 in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 102. As already explained in the first embodiment above, the setting confirmation process is executed in step S303 of the normal process (Figure 16). The setting confirmation process is executed when no game is being played. Note that the setting confirmation process is executed using a program and data for specific control.

Steps S6301 to S6302 in the setting confirmation process (Figure 102) are similar to steps S2801 to S2802 in the setting confirmation process (Figure 55(b)) in the first embodiment described above. Specifically, it is first determined whether the setting confirmation display flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S6301), and if the setting confirmation display flag is not set to "1" (step S6301: NO), it is determined whether the in-game flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S6302).

If a negative judgment is made in step S6302, it is determined whether the value of the bet number counter 125 in the second calculation target area 111 is less than the maximum bet number of "3" (step S6303). If the value of the bet number counter 125 is less than "3" (step S6303: YES), i.e., if the number of gaming media bets is less than the maximum bet number, it is determined whether the value of the credit counter in the second calculation target area 111 is less than the maximum stored number of "50" (step S6304).

If the number of gaming media bets is equal to or greater than the maximum number of bets and the number of virtual medal storages is equal to or greater than the maximum number of storages (step S6303: NO, step S6304: NO), the setting confirmation process ends without executing step S6305 and subsequent steps. Therefore, if the number of gaming media bets is equal to or greater than the maximum number of bets and the number of virtual medal storages is equal to or greater than the maximum number of storages, i.e., if there are no available slots in either the number of gaming media bets or the number of virtual medal storages, the setting confirmation display does not begin on the dual-purpose display unit 66. On the other hand, if the number of gaming media bets is less than the maximum number of bets (step S6303: YES) or the number of virtual medal storages is less than the maximum number of storages (step S6304: YES), the process proceeds to step S6305. The process from step S6305 onwards is executed if there are available slots in at least one of the number of gaming media bets or the number of virtual medal storages.

Steps S6305 to S6312 execute the same processing as steps S2804 to S2811 in the setting confirmation process (Figure 55 (b)) in the first embodiment described above. Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the bonus state is in effect (step S6305). In step S6305, a positive determination is made if either the BB flag or the RB flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1," and a negative determination is made if neither the BB flag nor the RB flag is set to "1." If a negative determination is made in step S6305, it is determined whether or not the front door 12 is in an open state (step S6306). In step S6306, a positive determination is made if the main MPU 72 has received an open detection signal from the door open detection sensor 48a provided on the front of the housing 11, and a negative determination is made if the main MPU 72 has received a closed detection signal from the door open detection sensor 48a. If a positive determination is made in step S6306, it is determined whether the setting key insertion hole 57 has been turned ON using the setting key (step S6307).

If the game state is in the bonus state (step S6305: YES), the front door 12 is closed (step S6306: NO), or the setting key insertion hole 57 has not been turned ON (step S6307: NO), the setting confirmation process ends without starting the setting confirmation display.

If a positive determination is made in step S6307, the setting confirmation display start process (steps S6308 to S6312) is executed to start the setting confirmation display on the credit display unit 65. The setting confirmation display start process is executed under the following conditions: the setting confirmation display is not being displayed on the credit display unit 65 (step S2801: NO), a game is not being executed (step S2802: NO), there is free space in at least one of the number of gaming media bets and the number of virtual medals stored (step S6303: YES or step S6304: YES), the bonus state is not active (step S6305: NO), the front door 12 is open (step S6306: YES), and the setting key insertion hole 57 has been turned ON (step S6307: YES).

The setting confirmation display start process (steps S6308 to S6312) first executes a reception prohibition process that places the selector 52 in a reception prohibition state (step S6308). As a result, medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 45 are guided from the medal ejection slot 58 to the medal tray 59. Then, setting identification display data corresponding to the identification character "P" is set in the left-side credit display counter 129 in the second calculation target area 111 (step S6309). Then, the current setting value of the slot machine 10 is determined by referencing the setting value counter in the second calculation target area 111, and display data corresponding to that setting value is set in the right-side credit display counter 131 (step S6310). By setting the setting identification display data in the left-side credit display counter 129, the identification character "P" is displayed on the left-side segment indicator 65a of the credit display unit 65, making it possible to determine that the setting confirmation display is being performed. When display data corresponding to the set value is set in the right-side credit display counter 131, a number indicating the current set value of the slot machine 10 is displayed on the right-side segment indicator 65b of the credit display unit 65. This makes it possible to check the current set value of the slot machine 10 based on the display in the credit display unit 65.

Then, the setting confirmation display flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S6311). This allows display data for the setting confirmation display to be output to the credit display unit 65 in the display unit control process (Fig. 56) in step S210 of the timer interrupt process (Fig. 15). Then, a confirmation start command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S6312), and this setting confirmation process is terminated. As already explained in the first embodiment above, when the production side MPU 92 receives the confirmation start command, it controls the display of the image display device 63 so that a display is displayed on the credit display unit 65 indicating that the setting confirmation display is being executed.

If a positive determination is made in step S6301, steps S6313 to S6318 execute the same processing as steps S2812 to S2817 of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 55(b)) in the first embodiment described above. Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key insertion hole 57 is in the OFF state (step S6313). If a negative determination is made in step S6313, it is determined whether the front door 12 is closed (step S6314). If the setting key insertion hole 57 is in the OFF state while the setting confirmation display is being displayed (step S6313: YES), or if the front door 12 is closed while the setting confirmation display is being displayed (step S6314: YES), the setting confirmation display termination process (steps S6315 to S6318) is executed.

In the setting confirmation display termination process, first the setting confirmation display flag in the second calculation target area 111 is cleared to "0" (step S6315), and then the credit display counters 129, 131 are cleared (step S6316). In this clearing process, the left credit display counter 129 and the right credit display counter 131 in the second calculation target area 111 are cleared to "0". This ends the setting confirmation display that was being displayed in the credit display unit 65. In the credit display unit 65, the display unit control process (FIG. 56) is executed, and the number of gaming media stored is displayed.

After that, a confirmation end command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S6317). As already explained in the first embodiment above, when the production side MPU 92 receives the confirmation end command, it controls the display of the image display device 63 so that the display in the credit display unit 65 indicating that the setting confirmation display is being executed ends. After that, it executes an acceptance permission process to set the selector 52 to an acceptance permission state (step S6318), and ends this setting confirmation process. By executing the acceptance permission process, medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 45 will be guided to the hopper device 53.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

The setting confirmation display is initiated when a game is not being executed and when there is a vacant slot in at least one of the number of gaming media bets and the number of virtual medals stored. Furthermore, when the setting confirmation display is initiated, the selector 52 is placed in a non-acceptance state. Therefore, the number of gaming media bets and the number of virtual medals stored do not increase while the setting confirmation display is being executed, and a game will not be started while the setting confirmation display is being executed because the number of gaming media bets has not reached the specified number. Even when the setting confirmation display ends, there remains a vacant slot in at least one of the number of gaming media bets and the number of virtual medals stored. As a result, when the setting confirmation display ends, the acceptance permission process can be executed to switch the selector 52 to the acceptance permission state without executing the following processes: confirming that a game is not being executed; confirming that the value of the bet number counter 125 in the second calculation target area 111 is less than the maximum value (specifically, "3"); and confirming that the value of the credit counter in the second calculation target area 111 is less than the maximum number of stored medals (specifically, "50"). This simplifies the processing configuration for ending the settings confirmation display (steps S6315 to S6318).

Even if the number of gaming media bets is the maximum number of bets (specifically, "3"), if the number of stored virtual medals is less than the maximum number of stored medals (specifically, "50"), the setting confirmation display can be initiated by opening the front door 12 and turning on the setting key insertion hole 57, provided that no game is being played and the gaming state is not a bonus state. In this way, the setting confirmation display can be initiated even when the number of gaming media bets is the maximum number of bets. This makes it easier for the amusement hall manager to check the setting values of the slot machine 10.

Even if the number of stored virtual medals is the maximum number (specifically, 50), if the number of gaming media bets is less than the maximum number (specifically, 3), the setting confirmation display can be initiated by opening the front door 12 and turning on the setting key insertion hole 57, provided that no game is being played and the gaming state is not a bonus state. In this way, the setting confirmation display can be initiated even when the number of stored virtual medals is the maximum number. This makes it easier for the amusement hall manager to check the setting values of the slot machine 10.

Seventh Embodiment
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the setting confirmation display is displayed on the credit display unit 65 as part of the condition that the setting key insertion hole 57 is switched from the OFF state to the ON state while the front door 12 is open. The following describes the configuration that differs from the first embodiment. Note that a description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will generally be omitted.

In this embodiment, the setting confirmation display is initiated when the setting key insertion hole 57 is switched from OFF to ON using the setting key while no game is being played, the number of gaming media bets is less than "1" or more, the gaming state is not a bonus state, and the front door 12 is open. The amusement hall manager can initiate the setting confirmation display by opening the front door 12 and turning ON the setting key insertion hole 57 while no game is being played, the number of gaming media bets is less than "1" or more, and the gaming state is not a bonus state. By displaying the setting confirmation display, the current setting value of the slot machine 10 can be ascertained based on the display in the credit display section 65.

The setting confirmation display is initiated as part of the condition that the setting key insertion hole 57 is switched from OFF to ON while the front door 12 is open. Therefore, if the amusement hall manager closes the front door 12 while the setting key insertion hole 57 is still turned ON, the setting confirmation display on the credit display unit 65 can be prevented from starting the moment the front door 12 is opened by a player who then opens the front door 12. This prevents players from fraudulently checking the setting values of the slot machine 10.

Next, the setting confirmation process executed by the main MPU 72 in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 103. As already explained in the first embodiment above, the setting confirmation process is executed in step S303 of the normal process (Figure 16). The setting confirmation process is executed when no game is being played. Note that the setting confirmation process is executed using a program and data for specific control.

In the setting confirmation process, steps S6401 to S6405 are executed in the same manner as steps S2801 to S2805 in the setting confirmation process (Figure 55(b)) in the first embodiment described above. Specifically, it is first determined whether the setting confirmation display flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S6401). If the setting confirmation display flag is not set to "1" (step S6401: NO), it is determined whether the in-game flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S6402).

If a negative determination is made in step S6402, it is determined whether the value of the bet number counter 125 in the second calculation target area 111 is equal to or greater than "1" (step S6403). If a negative determination is made in step S6403, it is determined whether the game is in a bonus state (step S6404). In step S6404, a positive determination is made if either the BB flag or the RB flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1", and a negative determination is made if neither the BB flag nor the RB flag is set to "1". If a game is being executed (step S6402: YES), if the number of gaming media bets is equal to or greater than "1" (step S6403: YES), or if the game state is in a bonus state (step S6404: YES), this setting confirmation process is terminated without starting the setting confirmation display.

If a negative determination is made in step S6404, it is determined whether the front door 12 is open (step S6405). In step S6405, the main MPU 72 makes a positive determination if it has received an open detection signal from the door open detection sensor 48a provided on the front of the housing 11, and makes a negative determination if it has received a closed detection signal from the door open detection sensor 48a.

If a positive determination is made in step S6405, it is determined whether the setting key flag provided in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S6406). The setting key flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to determine whether the setting key insertion hole 57 was in the OFF state in the previous processing of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 103). A setting key flag of "1" corresponds to the setting key insertion hole 57 being in the OFF state in the previous processing of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 103), and a setting key flag value of "0" corresponds to the setting key insertion hole 57 being in the ON state in the previous processing of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 103). The setting key flag is set to "1" in step S6414, which will be described later. The setting key flag is cleared to "0" in step S6415, which will be described later.

If a negative judgment is made in step S6406, the setting confirmation display is not started and the process proceeds to step S6419. In this way, if the setting key insertion hole 57 was in the ON state in the previous processing of the setting confirmation process (Figure 103), the setting confirmation display is not started.

If a positive determination is made in step S6406, it is determined whether the setting key insertion hole 57 is being turned ON using the setting key (step S6407). If a positive determination is made in step S6407, this means that the setting key insertion hole 57 was in the OFF state in the previous processing run of the setting confirmation process (Figure 103) and that the setting key insertion hole 57 has switched from the OFF state to the ON state in the current processing run. In this case, processing to start the setting confirmation display (processing in steps S6408 to S6412) is executed.

The setting confirmation display start process is executed under the following conditions: the setting confirmation display is not being displayed on the credit display unit 65 (step S6401: NO); no game is being executed (step S6402: NO); the number of gaming media bets is not "1" or greater (step S6403: NO); the bonus state is not active (step S6404: NO); the front door 12 is open (step S6405: YES); and the setting key insertion hole 57 has been switched from the OFF state to the ON state (step S6406: YES, step S6407: YES). Steps S6408 through S6412 execute the same processing as steps S2807 through S2811 of the setting confirmation process (Figure 55(b)) in the first embodiment described above.

The setting confirmation display start process (steps S6408 to S6412) first executes a reception prohibition process that places the selector 52 in a reception prohibition state (step S6408). As a result, medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 45 are guided from the medal ejection slot 58 to the medal tray 59. Then, setting identification display data corresponding to the identification character "P" is set in the left-side credit display counter 129 in the second calculation target area 111 (step S6409). Then, the current setting value of the slot machine 10 is determined by referencing the setting value counter in the second calculation target area 111, and display data corresponding to that setting value is set in the right-side credit display counter 131 (step S6410). By setting the setting identification display data in the left-side credit display counter 129, the identification character "P" is displayed on the left-side segment indicator 65a of the credit display unit 65, making it possible to determine that the setting confirmation display is being performed. When display data corresponding to the set value is set in the right-side credit display counter 131, a number indicating the current set value of the slot machine 10 is displayed on the right-side segment indicator 65b of the credit display unit 65. This makes it possible to check the current set value of the slot machine 10 based on the display in the credit display unit 65.

Then, the setting confirmation display flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S6411). This allows display data for the setting confirmation display to be output to the credit display unit 65 in the display unit control process (Fig. 56) in step S210 of the timer interrupt process (Fig. 15). Then, a confirmation start command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S6412), and this setting confirmation process is terminated. As already explained in the first embodiment above, when the production side MPU 92 receives the confirmation start command, it controls the display of the image display device 63 so that a display is displayed on the credit display unit 65 indicating that the setting confirmation display is being executed.

If a positive judgment is made in step S6402, if a positive judgment is made in step S6403, if a positive judgment is made in step S6404, if a negative judgment is made in step S6405, if a negative judgment is made in step S6406, if a negative judgment is made in step S6407, or if the processing of step S6412 is performed, it is determined whether the setting key insertion hole 57 is in the OFF state (step S6413). If a positive judgment is made in step S6413, the setting key flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S6414). On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S6413, the setting key flag in the second calculation target area 111 is cleared to "0". By executing the processing of steps S6413 to S6415, the state of the setting key insertion hole 57 in the current processing round can be determined in the next processing round of the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 103).

As already explained, the setting confirmation display is initiated as part of the condition that the setting key insertion hole 57 is switched from the OFF state to the ON state. Therefore, in the processing iteration of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 103) in which the setting confirmation display is initiated, a negative judgment is made in step S6413 and the setting key flag is cleared to "0" in step S6415. Therefore, if the initiated setting confirmation display is terminated by the closure of the front door 12 without the setting key insertion hole 57 being switched to the OFF state, even if the front door 12 is subsequently opened, the setting confirmation display on the credit display unit 65 will not be initiated the moment the front door 12 is opened. If the amusement hall manager wishes to initiate the setting confirmation display again, he or she must return the setting key insertion hole 57 to the OFF state and then switch it back to the ON state.

If a positive determination is made in step S6401, steps S6416 to S6421 execute the same processing as steps S2812 to S2817 of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 55(b)) in the first embodiment described above. Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key insertion hole 57 is in the OFF state (step S6416). If a negative determination is made in step S6416, it is determined whether the front door 12 is closed (step S6417). If the setting key insertion hole 57 is in the OFF state while the setting confirmation display is being displayed (step S6416: YES), or if the front door 12 is closed while the setting confirmation display is being displayed (step S6417: YES), the setting confirmation display termination process (steps S6418 to S6421) is executed.

In the setting confirmation display termination process, first, the setting confirmation display flag in the second calculation target area 111 is cleared to "0" (step S6418), and then the credit display counters 129, 131 are cleared (step S6419). In this clearing process, the left credit display counter 129 and the right credit display counter 131 in the second calculation target area 111 are cleared to "0". This ends the setting confirmation display that was being displayed in the credit display unit 65. In the credit display unit 65, the display unit control process (FIG. 56) is executed, and the number of gaming media stored is displayed.

After that, a confirmation end command is sent to the production-side MPU 92 (step S6420). As already explained in the first embodiment above, when the production-side MPU 92 receives the confirmation end command, it controls the display of the image display device 63 so that the display in the credit display unit 65 indicating that the setting confirmation display is being executed ends. After that, it executes an acceptance permission process to set the selector 52 to an acceptance permission state (step S6421), and ends this setting confirmation process. By executing the acceptance permission process, medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 45 will be guided to the hopper device 53.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

The setting confirmation display is initiated as part of the condition that the setting key insertion hole 57 is switched from OFF to ON while the front door 12 is open. Therefore, if the amusement hall manager closes the front door 12 while the setting key insertion hole 57 is still turned ON, the setting confirmation display on the credit display unit 65 can be prevented from starting the moment the front door 12 is opened by a player who then opens the front door 12. This prevents players from fraudulently checking the setting values of the slot machine 10.

Eighth Embodiment
In this embodiment, the processing content of the partial clearing process (step S106) in the main processing (FIG. 14) differs from that of the first embodiment. The following describes the configuration that differs from the first embodiment. Note that a description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will generally be omitted.

In this embodiment, if power is cut off before a transition to the bonus state or internal RT state ST2 occurs in a game in which bonus winning data is set in the second calculation target area 111, and a partial clear process (FIG. 104) is executed in step S106 of the main process (FIG. 14) after power is restored, the partial clear process does not set the internal RT state flag 153 of the second calculation target area 111 to "1". In the first game executed after power is restored, if a bonus win occurs corresponding to the bonus winning data set in the second calculation target area 111, the game will transition to the bonus state, and if a bonus win corresponding to the bonus winning data is not achieved, the internal RT state flag 153 will be set to "1" and the game will transition to the internal RT state ST2.

Figure 104 is a flowchart showing the partial clear process executed by the main MPU 72 in this embodiment. The partial clear process is executed in step S106 when, during the main process (Figure 14), the setting key insertion hole 57 is turned ON and the supply of operating power is started (step S102: YES), the error state flag in the second calculation target area 111 is not set to "1" (step S104: NO), and the reset button 56 has not been pressed (step S105: NO). The partial clear process is executed using a specific control program and specific control data.

In the partial clearing process, steps S6501 to S6506 are executed, which are the same as steps S3901 to S3906 of the partial clearing process (FIG. 68) in the first embodiment. First, a partial clearing process for the work area 103 for specific control is executed (step S6501). In this partial clearing process, all memory areas in the work area 103 for specific control are cleared to "0" except for the memory areas storing information for determining the current setting values of the slot machine 10, information for determining the current game state, information for determining the current game zone, information for determining the current lottery mode, information on the number of stored virtual medals, and bonus winning data. By executing the partial clearing process for the work area 103 for specific control (step S6501), all winning data other than the bonus winning data set in the second calculation target area 111 of the work area 103 for specific control is erased. Furthermore, by executing a partial clear process (step S6501) in the work area 103 for specific control, information related to the rotation control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is erased. Therefore, even if one or more reels 32L, 32M, and 32R were spinning before the power was shut off, if the partial clear process (FIG. 68) is executed after the power is restored, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will not start spinning until new gaming media are bet and the start lever 41 is operated. Furthermore, by executing a partial clear process (step S6501) in the work area 103 for specific control, information for displaying the stop order correspondence on the dual-purpose display unit 66 is also erased. Therefore, even if the stop order correspondence display was being displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66 before the power was shut off, if the partial clear process (FIG. 68) is executed after the power is restored, the stop order correspondence display will not resume on the dual-purpose display unit 66.

After that, partial initialization processing of the work area 103 for specific control is executed (step S6502). In this partial initialization processing, initial settings are made to the storage areas in the work area 103 for specific control that were cleared to "0" in step S6501. Then, clear processing of the stack area 101 for specific control is executed (step S6503). In this clear processing, the stack area 101 for specific control is cleared to "0". Then, initial setting processing of the stack area 101 for specific control is executed (step S6504). In this initial setting processing, initial settings are made to the stack area 101 for specific control that was cleared in step S6503.

Then, a partial clear command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S6505). As already explained in the first embodiment, the partial clear command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that the partial clear process (Figure 68) has been executed. Then, the signal output control process for partial clear is executed (step S6506), and this partial clear process ends.

Next, we will explain how to transition to internal RT state ST2 with reference to the time chart in Figure 105. Figure 105(a) shows the period when the internal RT state flag 153 is set to "1", Figure 105(b) shows the period when bonus winning data is set in the second calculation target area 111, Figure 105(c) shows the period when one or more reels 32L, 32M, 32R are spinning, Figure 105(d) shows the state of operating power supply to the slot machine 10, Figure 105(e) shows the timing when the partial clear process (Figure 104) is started in step S106 of the main process (Figure 14), and Figure 105(f) shows the timing when the game starts.

As shown in Figure 105(f), the game starts at timing t1. When a bonus role is won in the role lottery process (Figure 17), bonus winning data is set in the second calculation target area 111 at timing t2, as shown in Figure 105(b). Then, at timing t3, as shown in Figure 105(c), all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R begin to rotate. Then, when the power is cut off at timing t4 while one or more reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spinning, as shown in Figure 105(d), the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop spinning, as shown in Figure 105(c).

Then, power is restored at timing t5 as shown in Figure 105(d), and at timing t6 as shown in Figure 105(e), the partial clear process (Figure 104) is started in step S106 of the main process (Figure 14). As already explained, even if the partial clear process (Figure 104) is executed, the bonus winning data set in the second calculation target area 111 is not erased. Therefore, at timing t6, the bonus winning data is set in the second calculation target area 111 as shown in Figure 105(b). Also, at timing t6 as shown in Figure 105(a), the internal RT status flag 153 is not set to "1".

When the start lever 41 is operated after gaming media has been bet, the game starts at time t7, as shown in FIG. 105(f), and all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R begin to rotate at time t8, as shown in FIG. 105(c). A stop command is then issued for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, causing all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to stop rotating at time t9. If a bonus win corresponding to the bonus win data set in the second calculation target area 111 is not achieved in the current game, the internal RT state flag 153 in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" at time t10, as shown in FIG. 105(a). This transitions the gaming state to the internal RT state ST2, and the internal RT state lottery table (FIG. 24) is selected as the lottery table for games that start thereafter.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

If power is cut off before a transition to the bonus state or internal RT state ST2 occurs in a game in which bonus winning data is set, and the partial clear process (FIG. 104) is executed in step S106 of the main process (FIG. 14) after power is restored, if a bonus win corresponding to the bonus winning data set in the second calculation target area 111 is not achieved in the first game executed after power is restored, the internal RT state flag 153 is set to "1" and a transition to the internal RT state ST2 occurs. Therefore, while the process for transitioning to the internal RT state ST2 in the partial clear process (FIG. 104) is not required, a transition to the internal RT state ST2 can be triggered in the first game executed after power is restored based on the bonus winning data set before power is cut off.

Ninth Embodiment
In this embodiment, the processing content of the second suggestive operation process is different from that of the first embodiment. The following describes the configuration that is different from the first embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 106 is a flowchart showing the second suggested operation processing in this embodiment. The second suggested operation processing is executed in step S4318 of the first suggested operation processing (Figure 75). Note that the second suggested operation processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

In the second suggestive action processing, steps S6601 to S6605 are performed in the same manner as steps S4601 to S4605 of the second suggestive action processing (FIG. 77) in the first embodiment. Specifically, first, it is determined whether at least one of the first ending flag and the second ending flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S6601). If neither ending flag is set to "1" (step S6601: NO), a third suggestive action lottery table corresponding to the setting value of the slot machine 10 is read from the main ROM 73 into the second calculation target area 111 (step S6602). Thereafter, the random number updated in the second calculation target area 111 in the specific control work area 103 is obtained (step S6603), and the obtained random number is compared with the third suggestive action lottery table read in step S6602 to determine whether the automatic settlement has been won (step S6604). If the automatic settlement is selected (step S6604: YES), the automatic settlement process (FIG. 76(a)) is executed (step S6605), and the second suggested operation process ends.

In this way, if neither the first ending flag nor the second ending flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1", the third suggested action lottery table is read out and a third suggested action lottery is conducted, and if automatic settlement is won in the third suggested action lottery, automatic settlement is conducted, and if automatic settlement is not won in the third suggested action lottery, no suggested action is conducted.

If it is determined in step S6601 that at least one of the first ending flag and the second ending flag is set to "1", it is determined whether the current setting value of the slot machine 10 is "Setting 4" or "Setting 5" (step S6606), and if a positive determination is made in step S6606, a play stop process (Figure 76 (b)) is executed without performing a suggestive action lottery (step S6607), and the second suggestive action process is terminated.

In this embodiment, the stop processing (Figure 76 (b)) is executed without automatic settlement at the end of the advantageous zone SC2 only when at least one of the first ending flag and the second ending flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" and the setting value of the slot machine 10 is "Setting 4" or "Setting 5." Therefore, when the stop processing is performed at the end of the advantageous zone SC2, the player can be assured that the setting value of the slot machine 10 is "Setting 4" or "Setting 5."

If the current setting value of the slot machine 10 is not "Setting 4" or "Setting 5" (step S6606: NO), it is determined whether the current setting value of the slot machine 10 is "Setting 6" (step S6608). If a positive determination is made in step S6608, in steps S6609 and S6610, processing similar to steps S4608 and S4609 of the second suggested operation processing (FIG. 77) in the first embodiment is executed. Specifically, first, an automatic settlement processing (FIG. 76(a)) is executed (step S6609). Then, after the automatic settlement processing is completed, a stop processing (FIG. 76(b)) is executed (step S6610), and the second suggested operation processing is terminated.

In this embodiment, automatic settlement and stopping of play occurs at the end of the advantageous zone SC2 only when at least one of the first ending flag and the second ending flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" and the setting value of the slot machine 10 is "Setting 6." Therefore, when automatic settlement and stopping of play occurs at the end of the advantageous zone SC2, the player can be assured that the setting value of the slot machine 10 is "Setting 6."

If the current setting value of the slot machine 10 is not "Setting 4" to "Setting 6" (step S6606: NO, step S6608: NO), proceed to step S6602 and execute the processing of steps S6602 to S6605. In this way, if at least one of the first ending flag and the second ending flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" and the setting value of the slot machine 10 is one of "Setting 1" to "Setting 3," the third suggested action lottery table is read and a third suggested action lottery is held. If automatic settlement is won in the third suggested action lottery, automatic settlement is carried out; if automatic settlement is not won in the third suggested action lottery, no suggested action is carried out.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

If "the end of the advantageous period SC2 when the limited total net increase in gaming media is equal to or greater than a predetermined suggestion standard number" is selected as the trigger for starting the suggestive action, and if the advantageous period SC2 ends with one or more ending flags in the second calculation target area 111 set to "1," then if the setting value of the slot machine 10 is "Setting 4" or "Setting 5," the stop processing will be executed without a suggestive action lottery. On the other hand, under conditions other than these, the stop processing will not be executed alone without automatic settlement at the end of the advantageous period SC2. Therefore, if the stop processing is executed alone at the end of the advantageous period SC2, the player can understand that the setting value of the slot machine 10 is "Setting 4" or "Setting 5." By drawing attention to whether or not a stop state notification is executed at the end of the advantageous period SC2, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

If "the end of the favorable zone SC2 when the limited total net increase in gaming media is equal to or greater than a predetermined suggestion standard number" is selected as the trigger for starting the suggestive action, and if the favorable zone SC2 ends with one or more ending flags in the second calculation target area 111 set to "1," then if the setting value of the slot machine 10 is "Setting 6," an automatic settlement process will be executed without a suggestive action lottery, and a play termination process will be executed after the automatic settlement process is completed. On the other hand, under conditions other than the above, the combination of the automatic settlement process and play termination process will not be executed at the end of the favorable zone SC2. Therefore, if automatic settlement and play termination are executed at the end of the favorable zone SC2, the player can be sure that the setting value of the slot machine 10 is "Setting 6." By drawing attention to whether or not automatic settlement and play termination notification are executed at the end of the favorable zone SC2, the player's interest in the game can be enhanced.

Tenth Embodiment
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the setting value is displayed on the ratio display 85 and the process for displaying the setting value is executed using a program and data for non-specific control. The following describes the configuration that differs from the first embodiment. Note that a description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will be omitted.

In this embodiment, the ratio display 85 displays a setting confirmation display that allows the setting values of the slot machine 10 to be confirmed, and a setting value update display that updates the setting values. As already explained in the first embodiment above, the ratio display 85 is mounted on the element mounting surface of the main control board 71. By opening the front door 12 toward the front of the slot machine 10 relative to the cabinet 11 and exposing the internal space of the cabinet 11, the ratio display 85 can be viewed through the opposing wall 82 of the board box 81. Therefore, by configuring the setting values to be displayed on the ratio display 85, it is possible to allow the amusement hall manager to view the setting value display while making it difficult for players to see the setting value display.

As in the first embodiment described above, in the setting value update process (Figure 110), the setting value is updated by operating the reset button 56 on the power supply unit 54 provided inside the housing 11, thereby updating the setting value before confirmation. By displaying the setting value before confirmation on the ratio display 85, it is possible to easily check the display of the setting value before confirmation when operating the reset button 56.

By configuring the process for displaying setting values to be executed using non-specific control programs and non-specific control data, it is possible to provide ample capacity for the area in the main ROM 73 for storing specific control programs and specific control data.

Figure 107(a) is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of the non-specific control work area 102 for displaying setting values in this embodiment, Figure 107(b) is an explanatory diagram illustrating the display state of the ratio display 85 while the setting confirmation display is being executed, and Figure 107(c) is an explanatory diagram illustrating the display state of the ratio display 85 while the setting value update display is being executed.

Similar to the first embodiment described above, the identifier display unit 86 and ratio display unit 87 are arranged side by side horizontally on the display surface of the ratio display unit 85. The identifier display unit 86 includes a left-side segment display unit 86a and a right-side segment display unit 86b, which are seven-segment displays, and an auxiliary display unit 86c for the identifier. Furthermore, the ratio display unit 87 includes a left-side segment display unit 87a and a right-side segment display unit 87b, which are seven-segment displays, and an auxiliary display unit 87c for the ratio.

As shown in FIG. 107(a), the non-specific control work area 102 is provided with first to fourth display counters 221 to 224. The first display counter 221 is a counter into which one byte of display data corresponding to the left segment indicator 86a of the identifier display unit 86 is set, and the second display counter 222 is a counter into which one byte of display data corresponding to the right segment indicator 86b of the identifier display unit 86 and the auxiliary display unit 86c for the identifier. The third display counter 223 is a counter into which one byte of display data corresponding to the left segment indicator 87a of the ratio display unit 87 is set, and the fourth display counter 224 is a counter into which one byte of display data corresponding to the right segment indicator 87b of the ratio display unit 87 and the auxiliary display unit 87c for the ratio. These first to fourth display counters 221 to 224 are counters consisting of one byte.

When a setting confirmation display is being displayed on the ratio display 85, as shown in FIG. 107(b), the identification character "P" is displayed on the right segment display 86b of the identifier display unit 86, and the auxiliary display unit 86c for the identifier is lit. Furthermore, a "-" (hyphen) symbol is displayed on the left segment display 86a. The amusement hall manager can tell that a setting confirmation display is being displayed on the ratio display 85 when the identifier display unit 86 displays "-P." When a setting confirmation display is being displayed on the ratio display 85, a number indicating the setting value of the slot machine 10 (any number from "1" to "6") is displayed on the right segment display 87b of the ratio display unit 87, and the auxiliary display unit 87c for the ratio is turned off. Furthermore, a "-" (hyphen) symbol is displayed on the left segment display 87a. When a setting confirmation display is being displayed on the ratio display 85, the amusement hall manager can confirm the current setting value of the slot machine 10 by checking the display on the ratio display unit 87. For example, if the setting value of the slot machine 10 is "Setting 3," the display on the ratio display 85 will be "-P.-3," as shown in FIG. 107(b).

When a setting value update display is performed on the ratio display 85, as shown in FIG. 107(c), the right segment display 86b of the identifier display unit 86 flashes the identification character "E," and the auxiliary display unit 86c for the identifier flashes, alternating between lit and unlit states. Also, a flashing "-" (hyphen) symbol is displayed on the left segment display 86a. The amusement hall manager can tell that a setting value update display is being performed on the ratio display 85 when the identifier display unit 86 displays "-E." When a setting value update display is performed on the ratio display 85, a number (any number from "1" to "6") indicating the pre-determined setting value of the slot machine 10 flashes on the right segment display 87b of the ratio display unit 87, and the auxiliary display unit 87c for the ratio flashes. Also, a flashing "-" (hyphen) symbol is displayed on the left segment display 87a. When the ratio display 85 is displaying a setting value update, the amusement hall manager can check the setting value before confirmation by checking the display on the ratio display unit 87. For example, if the setting value before confirmation is "Setting 3," "-E.-3" will flash on the ratio display 85, as shown in Figure 107(c).

The blinking display on the ratio display 85 changes to a steady display when a confirmation operation is performed by operating the start lever 41. By confirming that the display on the ratio display 85 has changed from a blinking display to a steady display while the setting value update process (Figure 110) is being executed, the amusement hall manager can confirm that the settings for the slot machine 10, the presence or absence of a suggested action, and the type of trigger for starting the suggested action have been confirmed. As with the first embodiment described above, while the setting value update display is being performed, the display for selecting the presence or absence of a suggested action and the type of trigger for starting the suggested action is displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66.

Next, the setting confirmation process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 108. The setting confirmation process is executed in step S303 of the normal process (Figure 16). The setting confirmation process is executed when no game is being played. Note that the setting confirmation process is executed using a program and data for specific control.

In the setting confirmation process, steps S6701 to S6707 are executed, which are the same as steps S2801 to S2807 in the setting confirmation process (FIG. 55(b)) in the first embodiment. Specifically, it is first determined whether the setting confirmation display flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S6701). If the setting confirmation display flag is not set to "1" (step S6701: NO), it is determined whether the game in progress flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S6702). If a negative determination is made in step S6702, it is determined whether the value of the bet number counter 125 in the second calculation target area 111 is equal to or greater than "1" (step S6703). If the value of the bet number counter 125 is not equal to or greater than "1" (step S6703: NO), it is determined whether the bonus state is active (step S6704).

If a negative judgment is made in step S6704, it is determined whether the front door 12 is open (step S6705). If the front door 12 is open (step S6705: YES), it is determined whether the setting key insertion hole 57 has been turned ON using the setting key (step S6706). If the setting key insertion hole 57 has been turned ON (step S6706: YES), an acceptance prohibition process is executed to place the selector 52 in an acceptance prohibition state (step S6707). As a result, medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 45 are guided from the medal ejection slot 58 to the medal tray 59.

Then, in steps S6708 and S6709, the same processing as steps S2810 and S2811 of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 55(b)) in the first embodiment is executed. Specifically, the setting confirmation display flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S6708). This enables processing to be executed to display the setting confirmation in the setting value display process (FIG. 112), which will be described later. Then, a confirmation start command is sent to the production-side MPU 92 (step S6709), and this setting confirmation process is terminated. As already explained in the first embodiment, when the production-side MPU 92 receives the confirmation start command, it controls the display of the image display device 63 so that a display is displayed on the credit display unit 65 indicating that the setting confirmation display is being executed.

If the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" (step S6701: YES), steps S6710 to S6712 are executed in the same manner as steps S2812 to S2814 of the setting confirmation process (Figure 55(b)) in the first embodiment described above. Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key insertion hole 57 is in the OFF state (step S6710), and if the setting key insertion hole 57 is not in the OFF state (step S6710: NO), it is determined whether the front door 12 is closed (step S6711).

If a positive determination is made in step S6710 or if a positive determination is made in step S6711, the setting confirmation display termination process (steps S6712 to S6714) is executed. In the setting confirmation display termination process, the setting confirmation display flag in the second calculation target area 111 is first cleared to "0" (step S6712).

Then, in steps S6713 and S6714, processing similar to steps S2816 and S2817 of the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 55(b)) in the first embodiment is executed. Specifically, a confirmation end command is first sent to the production-side MPU 92 (step S6713). When the production-side MPU 92 receives the confirmation end command, it controls the display of the image display device 63 so that the display in the credit display unit 65 indicating that the setting confirmation display is being executed ends. Then, it executes an acceptance permission process that sets the selector 52 to an acceptance permission state (step S6714), and ends the setting confirmation processing. By executing the acceptance permission process, medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 45 are guided to the hopper device 53.

In this way, the setting confirmation display flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" based on the conditions that a game is not being executed and the number of gaming media bets is not "1" or greater, and the setting confirmation display is initiated on the ratio display 85. When the setting confirmation display begins, the selector 52 is placed in an acceptance prohibition state, and, as already described in the first embodiment, operation of the credit insertion button 47 is disabled while the setting confirmation display is being executed. Therefore, the number of gaming media bets does not increase while the setting confirmation display is being executed, and a game does not start while the setting confirmation display is being executed because the number of gaming media bets has not reached the specified number. This allows the acceptance permission process (step S6714) to be executed when the setting confirmation display ends without performing processes to confirm that a game is not being executed and to confirm that the value of the bet number counter 125 is not the maximum value (specifically, "3"). This simplifies the processing configuration for terminating the setting confirmation display (processing steps S6712 to S6714).

The setting confirmation display ends when the front door 12 is closed. Therefore, if the amusement hall manager forgets to switch the setting key insertion hole 57 to the OFF state and closes the front door 12 while the setting confirmation display is being displayed, the setting confirmation display will not continue on the ratio display 85. This prevents a situation in which the ratio display 85 is unable to start displaying other information (for example, displaying management information for the slot machine 10) due to the setting confirmation display being continued.

Next, the blinking display start setting process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 109. The blinking display start setting process is executed in step S4002 of the setting value update process (Figure 71). Note that the blinking display start setting process is executed using a specific control program and specific control data.

In the blinking display start setting process, steps S6801 to S6803 are executed in the same manner as steps S4101 to S4103 in the blinking display start setting process (Figure 72) in the first embodiment. Specifically, the value of the setting value counter in the second calculation target area 111 is first set to the pre-determination setting value counter in the second calculation target area 111 (step S6801). This sets the pre-determination setting value counter to the current setting value of the slot machine 10. It is then determined whether the value of the pre-determination setting value counter is within the normal setting value range ("1" to "6") (step S6802). If it is outside the normal setting value range (step S6802: NO), the pre-determination setting value counter is set to "1" (step S6803).

If a positive judgment is made in step S6802, or if the processing of step S6803 is performed, steps S6804 to S6808 execute processing similar to steps S4106 to S4110 of the flashing display start setting processing (Figure 72) in the first embodiment described above. Specifically, the value of the suggested operation flag 154 in the second calculation target area 111 is set to the pre-confirmation suggested operation flag in the second calculation target area 111 (step S6804), and the numeric display data of "0" or "1" corresponding to the value of the pre-confirmation suggested operation flag is set to the left-side dual-use display counter 135 in the second calculation target area 111 (step S6805).

Then, the value of the trigger type flag 155 in the second calculation target area 111 is set to the pre-determination trigger type flag in the second calculation target area 111 (step S6806), and the display data of the identification character "A" or "C" corresponding to the value of the pre-determination trigger type flag is set to the right-side dual-purpose display counter 136 in the second calculation target area 111 (step S6807). Then, the blinking display flag 137 in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S6808), and the blinking display start setting process is terminated. Setting the blinking display flag 137 to "1" initiates blinking display on the dual-purpose display unit 66 and ratio display 85. This allows the amusement hall manager to understand that the updated setting values, as well as the settings for information regarding the presence or absence of a suggested action and the type of trigger for starting a suggested action, have not yet been finalized.

In this way, in the blinking display start setting process (Fig. 109), which is a process for specific control, a process is executed to start a display on the dual-purpose display unit 66 for selecting whether or not to perform a suggested action and the type of trigger for starting the suggested action, but a process is not executed to display a setting value update on the ratio display 85. The process to display a setting value update on the ratio display 85 is executed in the setting value display process (Fig. 112), which is a process for non-specific control. The setting value display process (Fig. 112) will be described later.

Next, the update processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 110. The update processing is executed in step S4003 of the setting value update processing (Figure 71). Note that the update processing is executed using a program and data for specific control.

In the update processing, steps S6901 to S6904 are the same as steps S4201 to S4204 in the update processing (Figure 73) in the first embodiment. Specifically, it is first determined whether the reset button 56 has been pressed (step S6901). If a positive determination is made in step S6901, the value of the pre-determination setting value counter in the second calculation target area 111 is incremented by 1 (step S6902). It is then determined whether the value of the pre-determination setting value counter is equal to or greater than 7 (step S6903), and if the value of the pre-determination setting value counter is equal to or greater than 7 (step S6903: YES), the pre-determination setting value counter is set to 1 (step S6904).

If a negative judgment is made in step S6901, if a negative judgment is made in step S6903, or if the processing of step S6904 is performed, steps S6905 to S6910 execute processing similar to steps S4206 to S4211 of the update processing (Figure 73) in the first embodiment described above. Specifically, it is determined whether the left stop button 42 has been operated (step S6905), and if the left stop button 42 has been operated (step S6905: YES), the value of the pre-confirmation suggestion operation flag in the second calculation target area 111 is inverted (step S6906).

Then, display data corresponding to the number "0" or "1" corresponding to the value of the pre-confirmation suggested action flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set in the left-side dual-purpose display counter 135 in the second calculation target area 111 (step S6907). This updates the display of information regarding the presence or absence of a pre-confirmation suggested action on the left-side segment indicator 66a of the dual-purpose display unit 66.

If a negative judgment is made in step S6905 or if the processing of step S6907 is performed, it is determined whether the right stop button 44 has been operated (step S6908). If the right stop button 44 has been operated (step S6908: YES), the value of the pre-confirmation trigger type flag in the second calculation target area 111 is inverted (step S6909). Then, display data corresponding to the identification character "A" or "C" corresponding to the value of the pre-confirmation trigger type flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set in the right-side dual-use display counter 136 in the second calculation target area 111 (step S6910), and this update processing is terminated. By setting the display data corresponding to the value of the pre-confirmation trigger type flag in the right-side dual-use display counter 136, the display of information regarding the type of trigger for starting the suggested action before confirmation on the right segment indicator 66b of the dual-use display unit 66 is updated.

In this way, in the update processing (Figure 110), which is processing for specific control, processing is performed to update the value of the pre-confirmation setting value counter in the second calculation target area 111 based on operation of the reset button 56, but processing is not performed to make the content of the setting value update display on the ratio display 85 correspond to the value of the pre-confirmation setting value counter. Processing to make the content of the setting value update display correspond to the value of the pre-confirmation setting value counter is performed in the setting value display processing (Figure 112), which is processing for non-specific control. The setting value display processing (Figure 112) will be described later.

Next, the management execution process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 111. The management execution process is executed in step S1503 of the management process (Figure 37). Note that the management execution process is executed using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

In the management execution process, steps S7001 to S7003 are performed in the same manner as steps S1601 to S1603 in the management execution process (Figure 38) in the first embodiment. Specifically, first, the stack pointer data stored in the main MPU 72 is saved to the non-specific stack pointer save area in the non-specific control work area 102 using a load command (step S7001). By saving the stack pointer data at the start of non-specific control, after steps S7001 to S7011 are executed, this data can be restored to the stack pointer, restoring the stack pointer data to the data at the start of non-specific control.

After executing step S7001, a load command is issued to set the stack pointer of the master MPU 72 to "Y(u+1)," the last address in the non-specific control stack area 104, as a fixed address at the start of non-specific control (step S7002). Then, the master MPU 72 executes a process to save the information in the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register, which are some of the various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers provided in the master MPU 72, to the non-specific control stack area 104 in the order of WA register → BC register → DE register → HL register → IX register → IY register (step S7003). The processing content in step S7003 is the same as the processing content in step S1603 of the management execution processing (Figure 38) in the first embodiment described above.

The WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are registers used in the processing of steps S7004 to S7010. By saving the information set in these registers to the stack area 104 for non-specific control prior to the processing of steps S7004 to S7010, it is possible to save the information in these registers used during specific control before the non-specific control is started. Therefore, even if these registers are overwritten during non-specific control, by restoring the information saved in the stack area 104 for non-specific control to these registers when the non-specific control is terminated, it is possible to restore the state of these registers to the state corresponding to specific control before the non-specific control was executed.

Then, it is determined whether the setting confirmation display flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S7004). As already explained, the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" in step S6708 of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 108), which is a process for specific control, when the start condition for the setting confirmation display is met. Furthermore, the setting confirmation display flag is cleared to "0" in step S6712 of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 108), which is a process for specific control, when the end condition for the setting confirmation display is met.

If a negative determination is made in step S7004, it is determined whether the confirmation display in progress flag provided in the work area 102 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S7005). The confirmation display in progress flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to know that a setting confirmation display is being executed on the ratio display 85. The confirmation display in progress flag is set to "1" in the setting value display process (step S7008), which is a process for non-specific control.

If a negative determination is made in step S7005, it is determined whether the setting value update in progress flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S7006). As already explained in the first embodiment above, the setting value update in progress flag is set to "1" in step S4001 of the setting value update process (Figure 71), which is processing for specific control. In addition, the setting value update in progress flag is cleared to "0" in step S4014 of the setting value update process (Figure 71), which is processing for specific control.

If a negative determination is made in step S7006, it is determined whether the update display in progress flag provided in the work area 102 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S7007). The update display in progress flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to know that a setting value update display is being executed on the ratio display 85. The update display in progress flag is set to "1" in the setting value display process (step S7008), which is a process for non-specific control.

If a positive judgment is made in step S7004, if a positive judgment is made in step S7005, if a positive judgment is made in step S7006, or if a positive judgment is made in step S7007, the setting value display process (FIG. 112) described below is executed (step S7008). On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S7007, the ratio display process (FIG. 113) described below is executed (step S7009).

In this way, if any of the setting confirmation display flag, confirmation display in progress flag, setting value updating flag, and update display in progress flag is set to "1," setting value display processing (FIG. 112) is executed in step S7008, while if none of these flags is set to "1," ratio display processing (FIG. 113) is executed in step S7009. On the ratio display 85, when a setting value is being confirmed or updated, the setting confirmation display or setting value update display takes priority over the display of the slot machine 10 management information. The display of slot machine 10 management information is performed when a setting value is not being confirmed or updated.

If step S7008 or step S7009 has been performed, the ratio data output process (FIG. 114), described below, is executed (step S7010). Then, in steps S7011 and S7012, the same processes as steps S1618 and S1619 of the management execution process (FIG. 38) in the first embodiment are executed. Specifically, the data saved in the non-specific control stack area 104 in step S7003 is restored to the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the master MPU 72 in the reverse order (IY register → IX register → HL register → DE register → BC register → WA register) of the order in step S7003 (WA register → BC register → DE register → HL register → IX register → IY register) (step S7011). The processing content in step S7011 is the same as the processing content in step S1618 of the management execution process (FIG. 38) in the first embodiment described above. Execution of the processing in step S7011 makes it possible to restore the information in the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main MPU 72 to the information corresponding to specific control at the start of the management execution process (FIG. 111), which is processing corresponding to non-specific control.

Then, the data saved in the non-specific stack pointer save area in the non-specific control work area 102 in step S7001 is restored to the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 using a load command (step S7012), and this management execution process is terminated.

Next, the setting value display process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 112. As described above, the setting value display process is executed in step S7008 of the management execution process (Figure 111) when any of the setting confirmation display flag, confirmation display execution flag, setting value update execution flag, and update display execution flag is set to "1" (step S7004: YES, step S7005: YES, step S7006: YES, or step S7007: YES). Note that the setting value display process is executed using a program and data for non-specific control.

The setting value display process first determines whether the setting confirmation display flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S7101). If the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" (step S7101: YES), it determines whether the confirmation display execution flag in the non-specific control work area 102 is set to "1" (step S7102).

If the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" and the confirmation display in progress flag is not set to "1" (step S7101: YES, step S7102: NO), this means that the setting confirmation display flag was set to "1" in step S6708 of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 108), which is a process for specific control, and then the process (steps S7102 to S7106) for starting the setting confirmation display in the setting value display process (FIG. 112), which is a process for non-specific control, was not executed. In this case, the process (steps S7102 to S7106) for starting the setting confirmation display is executed.

Specifically, first, as identification display data for the setting confirmation display, the right segment indicator 86b of the identifier display unit 86 in the ratio indicator 85 displays the identification character "P," and display data for lighting the auxiliary indicator unit 86c for the identifier is set in the second indicator counter 222 in the non-specific control work area 102 (step S7103). Then, display data for displaying a number (any number from "1" to "6") corresponding to the value of the setting value counter in the second calculation target area 111 is set in the fourth indicator counter 224 in the non-specific control work area 102 (step S7104). Then, display data for displaying a "-" (hyphen) symbol is set in the first indicator counter 221 and the third indicator counter 223 in the non-specific control work area 102 (step S7105).

Then, the confirmation display in progress flag in the non-specific control work area 102 is set to "1" (step S7106), and this setting value display process is terminated. By setting the confirmation display in progress flag to "1", the main MPU 72 can determine that the setting confirmation display is being performed on the ratio display 85.

If a negative determination is made in step S7101, it is determined whether the confirmation display in progress flag in the work area 102 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S7107). If the setting confirmation display flag is not set to "1" and the confirmation display in progress flag is set to "1" (step S7101: NO, step S7107: YES), this means that while the setting confirmation display is being displayed on the ratio display 85, the setting confirmation display flag was cleared to "0" in step S6712 of the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 108), which is processing for specific control, based on the satisfaction of the setting confirmation display termination condition, and the processing for terminating the setting confirmation display in the setting value display processing (FIG. 112), which is processing for non-specific control (steps S7108 and S7109) has not been executed. In this case, the processing for terminating the setting confirmation display (steps S7108 and S7109) is executed.

Specifically, first, a clearing process is performed on the display counters 221-224 (step S7108). In this clearing process, the first through fourth display counters 221-224 in the non-specific control work area 102 are cleared to "0". Then, the confirmation display in progress flag in the non-specific control work area 102 is cleared to "0" (step S7109), and this setting value display process is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step S7107, it is determined whether the setting value update in progress flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S7110). If the setting value update in progress flag is not set to "1" (step S7110: NO), it is determined whether the update display in progress flag in the work area 102 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S7111).

If the setting value updating flag is set to "1" and the update display in progress flag is not set to "1" (step S7110: YES, step S7111: NO), this means that the setting value updating flag was set to "1" in step S4001 of the setting value update process (Figure 71), which is a process for specific control, and then the process for starting the setting value update display (steps S7112 to S7114) in the setting value display process (Figure 112), which is a process for non-specific control, was not executed. In this case, the process for starting the setting value update display (steps S7112 to S7114) is executed.

Specifically, first, as identification display data for the setting value update display, the right segment indicator 86b of the identifier display unit 86 in the ratio indicator 85 displays the identification character "E," and display data for lighting the auxiliary indicator unit 86c for the identifier is set in the second indicator counter 222 in the non-specific control work area 102 (step S7112). Then, display data for displaying the "-" (hyphen) symbol is set in the first indicator counter 221 and the third indicator counter 223 in the non-specific control work area 102 (step S7113). Then, the update display in progress flag in the non-specific control work area 102 is set to "1" (step S7114). This allows the main MPU 72 to recognize that the setting value update display is being performed on the ratio indicator 85.

If a positive judgment is made in step S7111, or if the processing of step S7114 is performed, display data for displaying a number (any number from "1" to "6") corresponding to the value of the pre-confirmation setting value counter in the second calculation target area 111 is set in the fourth display counter 224 in the non-specific control work area 102 (step S7115), and this setting value display processing is terminated.

As described above, the setting value display process is executed when any one of the setting confirmation display flag, confirmation display in progress flag, setting value update flag, and update display in progress flag is set to "1." Therefore, if a negative determination is made in step S7101, step S7107, or step S7110, this means that the update display in progress flag in the non-specific control work area 102 is set to "1."

If the setting value update in progress flag is not set to "1" and the update display in progress flag is set to "1" (step S7110: NO), this means that while the setting value update display is being displayed on the ratio display 85, the setting value update in progress flag was cleared to "0" in step S4014 of the setting value update process (FIG. 71), which is a process for specific control, based on the satisfaction of the termination condition for the setting value update display, and the process for terminating the setting value update display in the setting value display process (FIG. 112), which is a process for non-specific control (processing of steps S7116 and S7117) has not been executed. In this case, processing for terminating the setting value update display (processing of steps S7116 and S7117) is executed.

Specifically, first, as in step S7108, the display counters 221-224 are cleared (step S7116). In this clearing process, the first through fourth display counters 221-224 in the non-specific control work area 102 are cleared to "0." Then, the update display in progress flag in the non-specific control work area 102 is cleared to "0" (step S7117), and this setting value display process is terminated.

Next, the ratio display process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 113. The ratio display process is executed in step S7009 of the management execution process (Figure 111). Note that the ratio display process is executed using a program and data for non-specific control.

In the ratio display process, steps S7201 through S7209 are the same as steps S1604 through S1612 of the management execution process (Figure 38) in the first embodiment. Specifically, it is first determined whether the game execution grasp flag in the non-specific control work area 102 is set to "1" (step S7201). If the game execution grasp flag is set to "1" (step S7201: YES), it is determined whether the value of the game in progress flag in the second calculation target area 111 is "0" (step S7202). If the game execution grasp flag is set to "1" and the value of the game in progress flag is "0" (step S7201: YES, step S7202: YES), this means that one game has ended. In this case, the value of the total game number counter in the non-specific control work area 102 is incremented by 1 (step S7203).

Then, it is determined whether the gaming area is an advantageous area SC2 based on the state of the advantageous area flag in the second calculation target area 111 (step S7204), and if it is an advantageous area SC2 (step S7204: YES), not only is the value of the total game number counter incremented by 1, but the value of the advantageous game number counter in the work area 102 for non-specific control is also incremented by 1 (step S7205).

If a negative judgment is made in step S7201, if a negative judgment is made in step S7202, if a negative judgment is made in step S7204, or if the processing of step S7205 is performed, the value of the in-game flag in the second calculation target area 111 is determined, and the determined value is set to the game execution determination flag in the work area 102 for non-specific control (step S7206). In step S7206, if the value of the in-game flag is "1", the game execution determination flag is set to "1", and if the value of the in-game flag is "0", the game execution determination flag is cleared to "0". This makes it possible for the main MPU 72 executing processing for non-specific control to determine that the game has ended.

Then, it is determined whether the management display flag in the non-specific control work area 102 is set to "1" (step S7207). If the management display flag is not set to "1" (step S7207: NO), it is determined whether an instruction to display the gaming history management results has been issued (step S7208). Specifically, it is determined whether the front door 12 is open and the reset button 56 on the power supply unit 54 has been pressed continuously for three seconds or more while the slot machine 10 is receiving operating power.

If it is determined that an instruction to display the gaming history management results has occurred (step S7208: YES), the ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter to the value of the total game number counter is calculated (step S7209). In other words, the calculation is performed so that the calculation result = "value of advantageous game number counter" / "value of total game number counter".

Then, a process for setting the identification display data is executed (step S7210). In this setting process, display data for displaying "7" on the left segment display 86a of the identifier display unit 86 is set in the first display counter 221 in the work area 102 for non-specific control, and display data for displaying "U" on the right segment display 86b and turning on the auxiliary display unit 86c for the identifier is set in the second display counter 222 in the work area 102 for non-specific control. As a result, the identifier display unit 86 displays the identifier "7U.", which indicates the proportion of time spent in the advantageous zone.

Then, a ratio display data setting process is executed (step S7211). In this setting process, display data for displaying the tens digit of the value obtained by multiplying the calculation result of step S7209 by 100 is set in the third display counter 223, and display data for displaying the ones digit of the value obtained by multiplying the calculation result by 100 is set in the fourth display counter 224. As a result, of the value obtained by multiplying the calculation result of step S7209 by 100, the tens digit is displayed on the left segment indicator 87a of the ratio display unit 87, and the ones digit is displayed on the right segment indicator 87b. The calculation result is reported as a percentage. Specifically, if the value obtained by multiplying the calculation result by 100 is "35," the left segment indicator 87a of the ratio display unit 87 will display "3," and the right segment indicator 87b will display "5."

However, when the ratio display unit 87 uses only the two segment indicators 87a and 87b to display the result, the display content on the ratio display unit 87 will be the same whether the result of the calculation multiplied by 100 is "100" or "0." Therefore, when the result of the calculation multiplied by 100 is "100," display data for displaying "0" is set in the third display counter 223, and display data for turning on the auxiliary display unit 87c and displaying "0." is set in the fourth display counter 224. On the other hand, when the result of the calculation multiplied by 100 is "0," display data for displaying "0" is set in the third display counter 223, and display data for turning off the auxiliary display unit 87c and displaying "0" is set in the fourth display counter 224.

Then, the management display flag in the non-specific control work area 102 is set to "1" (step S7212), and this ratio display process is terminated. By setting the management display flag to "1", the main MPU 72 can determine that the management display is being executed on the ratio display 85.

If a positive determination is made in step S7207, a determination is made as to whether an end operation has been performed to end the display of the management results (step S7213), similar to step S1616 in the management execution process (FIG. 38) in the first embodiment described above. Specifically, a determination is made as to whether an ON signal has been received from any of the start detection sensor 41a, stop detection sensors 42a-44a, inserted medal detection sensor 45a, inserted credit detection sensor 47a, and settlement detection sensor 51a, and if an ON signal has been received from any of the detection sensors 41a-45a, 47a, it is determined that an end operation has been performed.

If a positive judgment is made in step S7213, a clearing process for the display counters 221-224 is executed (step S7214), similar to steps S7108 and S7116 of the setting value display process (FIG. 112). In this clearing process, the first through fourth display counters 221-224 in the non-specific control work area 102 are cleared to "0". Then, the management display flag in the non-specific control work area 102 is cleared to "0" (step S7215), and this ratio display process is terminated. By clearing the management display flag to "0", the main MPU 72 can determine that the display of the calculation result on the ratio display 85 has ended.

Next, the ratio data output process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 114. The ratio data output process is executed in step S7010 of the management execution process (Figure 111). Note that the ratio data output process is executed using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

The ratio data output process first determines whether the confirmation display in progress flag in the work area 102 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S7301). If the confirmation display in progress flag is not set to "1" (step S7301: NO), it determines whether the management display flag in the work area 102 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S7302). If a negative determination is made in step S7302, it determines whether the update display in progress flag in the work area 102 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S7303).

If the update display in progress flag is set to "1" (step S7303: YES), it is determined whether the blinking display flag 137 in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S7304). If the blinking display flag 137 is set to "1" (step S7304: YES), it is determined whether it is time to output display data (step S7305). In step S7305, if the lighting period is 0.5 seconds, a positive determination is made, and if the lighting period is 0.5 seconds, a negative determination is made.

If a positive judgment is made in step S7301, a positive judgment is made in step S7302, a negative judgment is made in step S7304, or a positive judgment is made in step S7305, the display data set in the first to fourth display counters 221 to 224 in the non-specific control work area 102 is output to the ratio display 85 (step S7306), and this ratio data output process is terminated.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

By configuring the process for displaying setting values to be executed using non-specific control programs and non-specific control data, it is possible to provide ample capacity for the area in the main ROM 73 for storing specific control programs and specific control data.

By opening the front door 12 toward the front of the slot machine 10 relative to the cabinet 11 and exposing the internal space of the cabinet 11, the setting confirmation display and setting value update display are displayed on the ratio display 85, which becomes visible through the opposing wall 82 of the base box 81. This makes it possible for the amusement hall manager to visually check the setting value display while making it difficult for players to see it.

In the setting value update process (Figure 110), the pre-confirmed setting value is updated by operating the reset button 56 on the power supply unit 54 located inside the housing 11. By displaying the pre-confirmed setting value on the ratio display 85, it is possible to easily check the display of the pre-confirmed setting value when operating the reset button 56.

Eleventh Embodiment
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that regardless of whether the in-state signal is activated, the output control of the throw-in signal is initiated a predetermined time after the timing at which the game is started based on the operation of the start lever 41. The following describes the configurations that differ from the first embodiment. Note that a description of the same configurations as the first embodiment will be omitted.

Figure 115 is a flowchart showing the startup setting process in this embodiment. The startup setting process is executed in step S307 of the normal processing (Figure 16). Note that the startup setting process is executed using a program and data for specific control.

In the start-up setting process, steps S7401 to S7410 are executed, which are the same as steps S4701 to S4710 in the start-up setting process (Figure 81) in the first embodiment described above. Specifically, the game in progress flag in the second calculation target area 111 is first set to "1" (step S7401). This allows the main MPU 72 to determine that a game is being played. Then, the end-of-award number display process is executed (step S7402). In the end-of-award number display process, the end-of-award number display in progress flag in the second calculation target area 111, the left-side dual-purpose display counter 135, and the right-side dual-purpose display counter 136 are cleared to "0." In this way, when a small win is achieved and the display of the number of awards begins on the dual-purpose display unit 66, the display of the number of awards ends at the start of the game following the game in which the small win was achieved. After that, the replay bet completion flag and bet number counter 125 in the second calculation target area 111 are cleared to "0" (step S7403). After that, the insertion signal output counter 163 provided in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "3", which is the specified number of gaming media bets (step S7404).

Then, it is determined whether the first launch preparation flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S7405), and if the first launch preparation flag is set to "1" (step S7405: YES), the first state signal is raised from a LOW state to a HIGH state (step S7406). In this way, if a game is started with the first launch preparation flag set to "1", the first state signal is raised from a LOW state to a HIGH state at the start of the game.

If a negative determination is made in step S7405, or if the processing of step S7406 is performed, it is determined whether the second launch preparation flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S7407), and if the second launch preparation flag is set to "1" (step S7407: YES), the second state signal is raised from a LOW state to a HIGH state (step S7408). In this way, if a game is started with the second launch preparation flag set to "1", the second state signal is raised from a LOW state to a HIGH state at the start of the game.

If a negative determination is made in step S7407, or if the processing of step S7408 is performed, it is determined whether the third launch preparation flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S7409), and if the third launch preparation flag is set to "1" (step S7409: YES), the third state signal is raised from a LOW state to a HIGH state (step S7410). In this way, if a game is started with the third launch preparation flag set to "1", the third state signal is raised from a LOW state to a HIGH state at the start of the game.

If a negative determination is made in step S7409, or if the processing of step S7410 is performed, the first startup preparation flag, second startup preparation flag, and third startup preparation flag in the second calculation target area 111 are cleared to "0" (step S7411), the setting processing of the interval adjustment timer counter 164 is performed (step S7412), and the start-up setting processing is terminated. In the setting processing of the interval adjustment timer counter 164, numerical information corresponding to a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) is set in the interval adjustment timer counter 164 of the second calculation target area 111. The value of the interval adjustment timer counter 164 is decremented by 1 each time the timer subtraction processing (step S209) is performed in the timer interrupt processing (Figure 15), and the value becomes "0" when a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) has elapsed since the start-up setting processing (Figure 115) was performed.

In this way, in the game start setting process (Figure 115) that is executed when the game starts based on the operation of the start lever 41, the specified number "3" is set in the insertion signal output counter 163, and then numerical information corresponding to a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) is set in the interval adjustment timer counter 164, regardless of whether the in-state signal is raised or lowered. The output control of the insertion signal begins a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) after the timing when the game starts based on the operation of the start lever 41, regardless of whether the in-state signal is raised or lowered.

When a game is started, numerical information corresponding to a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) is set in the interval adjustment timer counter 164, regardless of whether the in-state signal is raised at the start of the game. Therefore, during the start setting process (FIG. 115), it is possible to omit the process of checking the status of the first rise preparation flag, second rise preparation flag, and third rise preparation flag in the second calculation target area 111 before executing the process of setting numerical information corresponding to a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) in the interval adjustment timer counter 164. This simplifies the process configuration for setting numerical information corresponding to a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) in the interval adjustment timer counter 164 at the start of the game.

Next, the output control of the in-state signal and the throw-in signal will be explained with reference to the time chart in Figure 116. Figure 116(a) shows the state of the first in-state signal, Figure 116(b) shows the state of the first launch preparation flag in the second calculation target area 111, Figure 116(c) shows the period during which the value of the interval adjustment timer counter 164 in the second calculation target area 111 is 1 or greater, Figure 116(d) shows the state of the throw-in signal output control flag in the second calculation target area 111, Figure 116(e) shows the state of the payout signal output control flag in the second calculation target area 111, Figure 116(f) shows the timing at which the start lever 41 is operated, and Figure 116(g) shows the game execution period.

First, let's explain what happens when the first state signal is raised at the start of the game.

As shown in Figure 116(b), at time t1, the first launch preparation flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1." When the start lever 41 is operated at time t1, as shown in Figure 116(f), the game starts as shown in Figure 116(g). Also, at time t1 when the game starts, the first state in progress signal rises from a LOW state to a HIGH state as shown in Figure 116(a), and numerical information corresponding to a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) is set in the interval adjustment timer counter 164 as shown in Figure 116(c).

Then, at time t2, a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) after the start of the game at time t1, when the value of the interval adjustment timer counter 164 becomes "0" as shown in Figure 116(c), output control of the throw-in signal begins as shown in Figure 116(d). Then, at time t3, output control of the throw-in signal ends.

In this way, because the configuration is such that output control of the insertion signal begins a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) after the start of the game, if the in-state signal is raised at the start of the game, output control of the insertion signal can begin a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) after the signal is raised. This allows the main MPU 72 to begin output control of the insertion signal after the data counter DC detects the rise of the in-state signal. This makes it possible for the data counter DC to accurately detect the net increase in the number of gaming media during the bonus state, advantageous zone SC2, and ART state ST6.

Next, we will explain what happens when the in-state signal is not raised at the start of the game.

As shown in Figure 116(b), at time t4, the first launch preparation flag in the second calculation target area 111 is not set to "1". Furthermore, the second launch preparation flag and the third launch preparation flag are not set to "1". When the start lever 41 is operated at time t4 as shown in Figure 116(f), the game starts as shown in Figure 116(g). Also, at time t4 when the game starts, numerical information corresponding to a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) is set in the interval adjustment timer counter 164 as shown in Figure 116(c). Because the first launch preparation flag is not set to "1", the first state signal is not raised at time t4 as shown in Figure 116(a). Furthermore, because the second launch preparation flag and the third launch preparation flag are not set to "1", the second state signal and the third state signal are not raised either.

Then, at time t5, a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) after the start of the game at time t4, when the value of the interval adjustment timer counter 164 reaches "0" as shown in Figure 116(c), output control of the throw-in signal begins as shown in Figure 116(d). Then, at time t6, output control of the throw-in signal ends.

In this way, regardless of whether the in-state signal is raised at the start of the game, numerical information corresponding to a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) is set in the interval adjustment timer counter 164, and output control of the throw-in signal begins after the predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) has elapsed since the start of the game.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

Since the configuration is such that output control of the insertion signal begins a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) after the start of the game, if the in-state signal is raised at the start of the game, output control of the insertion signal can begin a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) after the signal is raised. This allows the main MPU 72 to begin output control of the insertion signal after the data counter DC detects the rise of the in-state signal. This makes it possible for the data counter DC to accurately detect the net increase in the number of gaming media during the bonus state, advantageous zone SC2, and ART state ST6.

When a game is started, numerical information corresponding to a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) is set in the interval adjustment timer counter 164, regardless of whether the in-state signal is raised at the start of the game. Therefore, during the start setting process (FIG. 115), it is possible to omit the process of checking the status of the first rise preparation flag, second rise preparation flag, and third rise preparation flag in the second calculation target area 111 before executing the process of setting numerical information corresponding to a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) in the interval adjustment timer counter 164. This simplifies the process configuration for setting numerical information corresponding to a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) in the interval adjustment timer counter 164 at the start of the game.

Twelfth Embodiment
In this embodiment, in a game in which the output control of a payout signal is performed, the end of the game is postponed until the output control of the payout signal is completed, regardless of whether the in-state signal falls or not, which is different from the first embodiment. The following describes the configuration that differs from the first embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

As already explained in the first embodiment above, when a small win or replay win occurs, payout signal output control is performed. In this embodiment, when payout signal output control ends, regardless of the state of the first to third drop preparation flags in the second calculation target area 111, numerical information corresponding to a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) is set in the interval adjustment timer counter 164 in the second calculation target area 111, and measurement of the predetermined time begins. The end of the game is then postponed until the predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) has elapsed since payout signal output control ended.

When payout signal output control is performed in a game in which the in-state signal is lowered, the in-state signal is lowered a predetermined time after the payout signal output control ends, and the game ends after the in-state signal is lowered. Because a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) is ensured between the end of payout signal output control and the in-state signal being lowered, it is possible to prevent the main MPU 72 from lowering the in-state signal while the data counter DC is performing a process to determine the number of gaming media awarded.

When payout signal output control is performed in a game in which at least one of the first to third startup preparation flags in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1," the game ends a predetermined time after the payout signal output control ends, and the next game becomes ready to start. The in-state signal is then raised when the next game starts. Because a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) is ensured between the end of payout signal output control and the raising of the in-state signal, it is possible to prevent the main MPU 72 from raising the in-state signal while the data counter DC is executing a process to determine the number of gaming media awarded.

In games where payout signal output control is performed, the process of checking the status of the first to third fall preparation flags and the first to third rise preparation flags in the second calculation target area 111 is omitted, and a process of setting numerical information corresponding to a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) in the interval adjustment timer counter 164 is executed. This ensures a predetermined time from the end of payout signal output control until the fall of the in-state signal, and simplifies the processing configuration for ensuring a predetermined time from the end of payout signal output control until the rise of the in-state signal.

Before explaining the dispensing signal control process (Figure 117) executed by the main MPU 72, we will explain the switching timer counter provided in the second calculation target area 111. The switching timer counter is a timer counter that allows the main MPU 72 to grasp the timing at which the dispensing signal rises from a LOW state to a HIGH state and the timing at which it falls from a HIGH state to a LOW state during output control of the dispensing signal, and also allows the main MPU 72 to grasp the timing at which the dispensing signal rises from a LOW state to a HIGH state and the timing at which it falls from a HIGH state to a LOW state during output control of the dispensing signal.

The switching timer counter is set to "5" when the output control of the input signal and the output control of the payout signal begin. When the main MPU 72 is controlling the output of the input signal, it subtracts 1 from the value of the switching timer counter each time an interrupt occurs in the timer interrupt process (Figure 15). When the value after subtraction reaches "0," it switches the input signal and sets a new "5" to the switching timer counter. Therefore, the input signal switches between the LOW and HIGH states every 7.45 milliseconds during the output control of the input signal.

When the main MPU 72 is controlling the output of a dispensing signal, it subtracts 1 from the value of the switching timer counter each time an interrupt occurs in the timer interrupt process (Figure 15), and when the value after subtraction reaches "0," it switches the dispensing signal and sets a new "5" to the switching timer counter. Therefore, the dispensing signal switches between the LOW and HIGH states every 7.45 milliseconds while the dispensing signal is being output.

As already explained in the first embodiment above, the output control of the throw-in signal does not begin until the game has started. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the game ends after the output control of the payout signal has ended. Therefore, the period during which the output control of the payout signal is performed does not overlap with the period during which the output control of the throw-in signal is performed in the game following the game in which the output control of the payout signal was performed.

The output control of the throw signal involves three combinations of rising and falling of the throw signal. The time required from the start of the throw signal output control to the end of that output control is approximately 40 milliseconds. Furthermore, if the state-in-progress signal is raised at the start of a game, the timing at which the throw signal output control begins is delayed by 500 milliseconds from the start of the game. Therefore, in games in which the state-in-progress signal is raised, the throw signal output control ends approximately 540 milliseconds after the game starts.

As already explained in the first embodiment above, when a game starts, the following processes are performed: a winning combination lottery (FIG. 17), acceleration control of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, constant-speed rotation control of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and stop control of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R based on valid operation of stop buttons 42-44; all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. In this embodiment, even ignoring the time required to operate the three stop buttons 42-44, the time required from the start of the game until all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped is longer than the time (approximately 540 milliseconds) required from the start of the game when the in-state signal is raised to the end of the output control of the deposit signal. In each game, the period during which the output control of the deposit signal and the period during which the output control of the payout signal are performed do not overlap. This makes it easier to grasp the number of gaming media inserted and the number of gaming media awarded in the data counter DC.

The period during which the output control of the input signal is executed and the period during which the output control of the dispensing signal is executed do not overlap, and the timing of switching the input signal and the timing of switching the dispensing signal can be determined using a common switching timer counter in the second calculation target area 111. This simplifies the configuration in the second calculation target area 111 for determining the timing of switching the input signal and the dispensing signal, compared to a configuration in which a timer counter for determining the timing of switching the dispensing signal is provided in the second calculation target area 111 separately from a timer counter for determining the timing of switching the input signal.

Next, the dispensing signal control processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 117. The dispensing signal control processing is executed in step S4819 of the data output processing (Figure 82). Note that the dispensing signal control processing is executed using a program and data for specific control.

In the dispensing signal control process, steps S7501 to S7505 are the same as steps S5001 to S5005 in the dispensing signal control process (Figure 84) in the first embodiment. Specifically, it is first determined whether the dispensing signal output start flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S7501). If the dispensing signal output start flag is set to "1" (step S7501: YES), the dispensing signal output start flag is cleared to "0" (step S7502). The dispensing signal is then raised from a LOW state to a HIGH state (step S7503), and the switching timer counter in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "5" (step S7504).

Then, the dispensing signal output control in progress flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S7505), and this dispensing signal control process is terminated. By setting the dispensing signal output control in progress flag to "1", the main MPU 72 can determine that the dispensing signal output control is in progress.

If a negative determination is made in step S7501, steps S7506 through S7511 are executed, similar to steps S5007 through S5012 of the dispensing signal control process (FIG. 84) in the first embodiment. Specifically, it is determined whether the dispensing signal output control flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S7506). If the dispensing signal output control flag is set to "1" (step S7506: YES), the value of the switching timer counter is decremented by one (step S7507), and it is determined whether the value after decrement is "0" (step S7508). If a positive determination is made in step S7508, it is determined whether the dispensing signal is in a LOW state (step S7509). If the dispensing signal is in a LOW state (step S7509: YES), the dispensing signal is raised from a LOW state to a HIGH state (step S7510). Then, the switching timer counter in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "5" (step S7511), and this dispensing signal control process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S7509, steps S7512 to S7515 execute the same processing as steps S5013 to S5016 of the dispensing signal control process (FIG. 84) in the first embodiment described above. Specifically, the dispensing signal is changed from a HIGH state to a LOW state (step S7512). The value of the dispensing signal output counter 165 in the second calculation target area 111 is then decremented by 1 (step S7513), and it is determined whether the value of the dispensing signal output counter 165 after the decrement is "0" (step S7514). If the value of the dispensing signal output counter 165 is not "0" (step S7514: NO), this means that the dispensing signal output control has not ended. Therefore, the switching timer counter in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "5" (step S7515), and the dispensing signal control process is terminated.

If the value of the payout signal output counter 165 after subtracting 1 in step S7513 is "0" (step S7514: YES), this means that the payout signal has been raised the number of times set in the payout signal output counter 165 based on the establishment of a small win or replay win, so the payout signal output control in progress flag in the second calculation target area 111 is cleared to "0" (step S7516). This ends the payout signal output control.

Then, the interval adjustment timer counter 164 is set (step S7517), and the dispensing signal control process is terminated. In the interval adjustment timer counter 164 setting process (step S7517), numerical information corresponding to a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) is set in the interval adjustment timer counter 164 in the second calculation target area 111.

In this way, when the output control of the dispensing signal ends, numerical information corresponding to a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) is set in the interval adjustment timer counter 164 without checking the states of the first to third rise preparation flags and the first to third fall preparation flags in the second calculation target area 111. The value of the interval adjustment timer counter 164 becomes "0" after the predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) has elapsed since the output control of the dispensing signal ended. By omitting the process for checking the states of the first to third rise preparation flags and the first to third fall preparation flags, it is possible to ensure a predetermined time from the end of the output control of the dispensing signal until the fall of the in-state signal, and to simplify the processing configuration for ensuring a predetermined time from the end of the output control of the dispensing signal until the rise of the in-state signal.

Next, the external output setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 118. The external output setting process is executed in step S312 of the normal processing (Figure 16). Note that the external output setting process is executed using a program and data for specific control.

In the external output setting process, the management output setting process is executed (step S7601), similar to step S5101 in the external output setting process (FIG. 85) in the first embodiment described above. In the management output setting process, information regarding the status of the slot machine 10 is output via the external terminal board 95 to the gaming hall's management computer, which is an external device.

Then, it is determined whether the dispensing signal output control in progress flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S7602), and if the dispensing signal output control in progress flag is set to "1" (step S7602: YES), the determination process of step S7602 is repeated until a negative determination is made in step S7602. When the dispensing signal output control has ended, the dispensing signal output control in progress flag is cleared to "0" in step S7516 of the dispensing signal control process (Figure 117).

If a negative judgment is made in step S7602, it is determined whether the value of the interval adjustment timer counter 164 in the second calculation target area 111 is "0" (step S7603), and if the value of the interval adjustment timer counter 164 is not "0" (step S7603: NO), the judgment process of step S7603 is repeated until a positive judgment is made in step S7603.

If a positive determination is made in step S7603, steps S7604 to S7609 are executed, which are the same as steps S5109 to S5114 of the external output setting process (Figure 85) in the first embodiment described above. Specifically, the first state signal is selected as the target state signal from the first to third state signals (step S7604), and steps S7605 to S7608 are executed for the first state signal. Since the target state signal is updated in step S7609, which will be described later, steps S7605 to S7608 are also executed for the second state signal and the third state signal.

After processing step S7604, it is determined whether the fall preparation flag corresponding to the target state signal in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S7605). In step S7605, if the target state signal is the first state signal, a positive determination is made if the first fall preparation flag is set to "1". If the target state signal is the second state signal, a positive determination is made if the second fall preparation flag is set to "1". If the target state signal is the third state signal, a positive determination is made if the third fall preparation flag is set to "1".

If a positive judgment is made in step S7605, the target state signal is changed from HI to LOW (step S7606), and the change preparation flag corresponding to the target state signal is cleared to "0" (step S7607).

Then, it is determined whether the target state signal is the third state flag (step S7608), and if the target state signal is not the third state flag (step S7608: NO), the target state signal is updated (step S7609). In step S7609, if the current target state signal is the first state signal, the target state signal is updated to the second state signal, and if the current target state signal is the second state signal, the target state signal is updated to the third state signal. Then, the process returns to step S7605, and the processes of steps S7605 to S7608 are executed for the updated state signal. If a positive determination is made in step S7608, this external output setting process ends.

In this way, when payout signal output control is performed, that is, when a small win or replay win is achieved, execution of processing from step S7604 onwards is postponed until a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) has elapsed since the end of payout signal output control, regardless of the state of the first to third drop preparation flags and the first to third rise preparation flags in the second calculation target area 111. This ensures a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) between the end of payout signal output control and the fall of the in-state signal, and also ensures a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) between the end of payout signal output control and the rise of the in-state signal at the start of the next game.

On the other hand, if the output control of the dispensing signal is not performed, a positive determination is made in steps S7602 and S7603 without any delay, and processing from step S7604 onwards is executed.

Next, the manner in which the end timing of a game in which payout signal output control is performed is delayed will be explained with reference to the time chart in Figure 119. Figure 119(a) shows the state of the first state signal, Figure 119(b) shows the state of the first launch preparation flag in the second calculation target area 111, Figure 119(c) shows the period in which the value of the interval adjustment timer counter 164 in the second calculation target area 111 is 1 or greater, Figure 119(d) shows the state of the throw-in signal output control flag in the second calculation target area 111, Figure 119(e) shows the state of the payout signal output control flag in the second calculation target area 111, and Figure 119(f) shows the game execution period.

First, let's explain what happens when the first to third state signals are not activated at the start of the game.

When a small win or replay win is achieved, as shown in Figure 119(e), the payout signal output control in progress flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" at timing t1, and payout signal output control is initiated. Then, at timing t2, payout signal output control ends, and the payout signal output control in progress flag is cleared to "0." At timing t2 when payout signal output control ends, as shown in Figure 119(c), numerical information corresponding to a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) is set in the interval adjustment timer counter 164 in the second calculation target area 111, and measurement of the predetermined time begins.

Then, at time t3, a predetermined time after the payout signal output control ended at time t2, the value of the interval adjustment timer counter 164 becomes "0." Then, as shown in Figure 119 (f), the game ends at time t4.

In this way, even if the in-state signal is not turned on or off, if the payout signal output control is performed, the end of the game will be postponed until a predetermined time has passed since the payout signal output control ended.

Next, we will explain when the in-state signal is raised, using the example of when the first in-state signal is raised.

When a small win or replay win is achieved, the payout signal output control in progress flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" at timing t5, as shown in Figure 119(e), and payout signal output control is initiated. Then, at timing t6 while payout signal output control is being executed, the first launch preparation flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" as shown in Figure 119(b).

After that, at timing t7, as shown in Figure 119(e), the payout signal output control ends and the payout signal output control in progress flag is cleared to "0." At timing t7 when the payout signal output control ends, as shown in Figure 119(c), numerical information corresponding to a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) is set in the interval adjustment timer counter 164 in the second calculation target area 111, and measurement of the predetermined time begins. After that, at timing t8, when a predetermined time has passed since timing t7 when the payout signal output control ended, the value of the interval adjustment timer counter 164 becomes "0." After that, at timing t9, as shown in Figure 119(f), the game ends.

After that, when the game starts at timing t10 when the first rise preparation flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1", as shown in Figure 119(f), the first state during signal is raised from LOW to HIGH as shown in Figure 119(a), and the first rise preparation flag is cleared to "0" as shown in Figure 119(b). Furthermore, at timing t10 when the first state during signal is raised, numerical information corresponding to a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) is set in the interval adjustment timer counter 164 in the second calculation target area 111 as shown in Figure 119(c).

After that, at timing t11, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the first state signal was raised, the value of the interval adjustment timer counter 164 becomes "0" as shown in Figure 119(c), the turn-on signal output control in progress flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" as shown in Figure 119(d), and turn-on signal output control begins.

In this way, a predetermined time is ensured between the end of payout signal output control and the raising of the in-state signal at the start of the next game. This prevents the main MPU 72 from raising the in-state signal before the data counter DC has completed processing to determine the number of gaming media awarded.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

In games where payout signal output control is performed, the process of checking the status of the first to third fall preparation flags and the first to third rise preparation flags in the second calculation target area 111 is omitted, and a process of setting numerical information corresponding to a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) in the interval adjustment timer counter 164 is executed. This ensures a predetermined time from the end of payout signal output control until the fall of the in-state signal, and simplifies the processing configuration for ensuring a predetermined time from the end of payout signal output control until the rise of the in-state signal.

The period during which the payout signal output control is performed does not overlap with the period during which the input signal output control is performed in the game following the game in which the payout signal output control was performed. This makes it possible for the data counter DC to grasp the number of gaming media inserted and the number of gaming media awarded in each game.

Even if the start timing of the output control of the throw-in signal is delayed due to the activation of the in-state signal at the start of a game, the output control of the throw-in signal ends before all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. The period during which the output control of the throw-in signal is performed and the period during which the output control of the payout signal is performed do not overlap in each game. This makes it easy to grasp the number of gaming media inserted and the number of gaming media awarded in the data counter DC.

The period during which the output control of the input signal is executed and the period during which the output control of the dispensing signal is executed do not overlap, and the timing of switching the input signal and the timing of switching the dispensing signal are determined using a common switching timer counter in the second calculation target area 111. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which a timer counter for determining the timing of switching the dispensing signal is provided in the second calculation target area 111 separately from a timer counter for determining the timing of switching the input signal, the configuration in the second calculation target area 111 for determining the timing of switching the input signal and the dispensing signal can be simplified.

When payout signal output control is performed in a game in which the in-state signal is lowered, the in-state signal is lowered a predetermined time after the payout signal output control ends, and the game ends after the in-state signal is lowered. Because a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) is ensured between the end of payout signal output control and the in-state signal being lowered, it is possible to prevent the main MPU 72 from lowering the in-state signal while the data counter DC is performing a process to determine the number of gaming media awarded.

When payout signal output control is performed in a game in which at least one of the first to third startup preparation flags in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1," the game ends a predetermined time after the payout signal output control ends, and the next game becomes ready to start. The in-state signal is then raised when the next game starts. Because a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) is ensured between the end of payout signal output control and the raising of the in-state signal, it is possible to prevent the main MPU 72 from raising the in-state signal while the data counter DC is executing a process to determine the number of gaming media awarded.

<Thirteenth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the rising and falling timings of the first to third state signals are different from those of the first embodiment. The following describes the configuration that differs from the first embodiment. Note that a description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

In this embodiment, a bonus start effect is executed for a predetermined time (specifically, 4 seconds) when the bonus state starts, and a bonus end effect is executed for a predetermined time (specifically, 4 seconds) when the bonus state ends. The effect-side MPU 92 executes processing to execute a bonus start effect upon receiving a command corresponding to the start of the bonus state, and executes processing to execute a bonus end effect upon receiving a command corresponding to the end of the bonus state. These commands corresponding to the start of the bonus state and the end of the bonus state are transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the effect-side MPU 92 during the response processing at the end of play (step S8111 of the normal processing (FIG. 125) described below). The bonus start effect and bonus end effect are displayed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63.

In the bonus start effect, a first effect period (first two seconds) in the first half of the bonus start effect creates an effect that raises expectations of a transition to the bonus state, and a second effect period (last two seconds) in the second half of the bonus start effect creates an effect that notifies the player that a transition to the bonus state has occurred. In the bonus end effect, a first effect period (first two seconds) in the first half of the bonus end effect creates an effect that notifies the player that the bonus state has ended, and a second effect period (last two seconds) in the second half of the bonus end effect creates an effect that notifies the player of the number of gaming media awarded to the player during the bonus state. The first state in signal, which indicates that the player is in the bonus state, is raised at the end of the first effect period (first two seconds) of the bonus start effect, and lowered at the end of the first effect period (first two seconds) of the bonus end effect.

In this embodiment, when a transition to the advantageous zone SC2 is made based on a favorable transition win, a favorable start effect is executed for a predetermined time (specifically, 4 seconds) at the start of the advantageous zone SC2, and a favorable end effect is executed for a predetermined time (specifically, 4 seconds) at the end of the advantageous zone SC2. The effect-side MPU 92 executes processing to execute the advantageous start effect upon receiving a command corresponding to the start of the advantageous zone SC2, and executes processing to execute the advantageous end effect upon receiving a command corresponding to the end of the advantageous zone SC2. These commands corresponding to the start of the advantageous zone SC2 and the end of the advantageous zone SC2 are transmitted from the main-side MPU 72 to the effect-side MPU 92 during the response processing at the end of play (step S8111 of the normal processing (FIG. 125) described below). The advantageous start effect and advantageous end effect are displayed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63.

In the favorable start effect, a first effect period (first 2 seconds) in the first half of the favorable start effect creates an effect that raises anticipation of a transition to favorable zone SC2, and a second effect period (last 2 seconds) in the second half of the favorable start effect creates an effect that notifies players that a transition to favorable zone SC2 has occurred. In the favorable end effect, a first effect period (first 2 seconds) in the first half of the favorable end effect creates an effect that notifies players that the favorable zone SC2 has ended, and a second effect period (last 2 seconds) in the second half of the favorable end effect creates an effect that notifies players of the limited total net increase in gaming media since the start of favorable zone SC2. The second state in progress signal, which indicates that the player is in favorable zone SC2, is raised at the end of the first effect period (first 2 seconds) of the favorable start effect, and lowered at the end of the first effect period (first 2 seconds) of the favorable end effect.

As already explained in the first embodiment above, if a transition to the third BB state ST3, fourth BB state ST3, or first RB state ST4 occurs, a transition to the advantageous zone SC2 also occurs when transitioning to the bonus state. In this way, if a transition to the advantageous zone SC2 occurs when transitioning to the bonus state, a bonus start effect is executed for a predetermined time (specifically, 4 seconds), and a display is displayed on the image display device 63 during the bonus start effect to notify that a transition to the advantageous zone SC2 has occurred. If a transition to the advantageous zone SC2 occurs when transitioning to the bonus state, the advantageous start effect is not executed. The first state signal and second state signal are raised at the end of the first effect period (the first half 2 seconds) that occurs in the first half of the bonus start effect.

In this embodiment, an ART start effect is executed for a predetermined time (specifically, 4 seconds) at the start of ART state ST6, and an ART end effect is executed for a predetermined time (specifically, 4 seconds) at the end of ART state ST6. The effect-side MPU 92 executes processing to execute the ART start effect upon receiving a command corresponding to the start of ART state ST6, and executes processing to execute the ART end effect upon receiving a command corresponding to the end of ART state ST6. These commands corresponding to the start of ART state ST6 and the end of ART state ST6 are transmitted from the main-side MPU 72 to the effect-side MPU 92 in the corresponding processing at the end of game play (step S8111 of the normal processing (FIG. 125) described below). The ART start effect and ART end effect are displayed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63.

In the ART start effect, a first effect period (first 2 seconds) in the first half of the ART start effect creates an effect that raises anticipation of a transition to ART state ST6, while a second effect period (last 2 seconds) in the second half of the ART start effect creates an effect that notifies players that they have transitioned to ART state ST6. In the ART end effect, a first effect period (first 2 seconds) in the first half of the ART end effect creates an effect that notifies players that ART state ST6 has ended, while a second effect period (last 2 seconds) in the second half of the ART end effect creates an effect that notifies players of the net increase in the number of gaming media in the ART state ST6. The third state in signal, which indicates that the game is in ART state ST6, is raised at the end of the first effect period (first 2 seconds) of the ART start effect, and lowered at the end of the first effect period (first 2 seconds) of the ART end effect.

As already explained in the first embodiment above, if the advantageous maintenance lottery process executed in step S1007 of the ART state processing (Figure 32) at the end of ART state ST6 does not result in an advantageous maintenance win (step S1008: NO), the advantageous section SC2 also ends at the end of that ART state ST6. In this case, the advantageous end effect is not executed, and an ART end effect is executed for a predetermined time (specifically, 4 seconds), and during that ART end effect, a display is displayed on the image display device 63 to notify that the advantageous section SC2 has ended. The second state signal and third state signal are turned off at the end of the first effect period (first half 2 seconds) executed in the first half of that ART end effect.

As already explained in the first embodiment above, if the ending conditions for the advantageous section SC2 are met in the ART state ST6 and the advantageous section SC2 ends, the ART state ST6 also ends when the advantageous section SC2 ends. In this case, the ART end effect is not executed, and instead an advantageous end effect is executed for a predetermined period of time (specifically, 4 seconds), and during this advantageous end effect, a display is displayed on the image display device 63 to notify the user that the ART state ST6 has ended. The second state signal and third state signal are turned off at the end of the first effect period (first half 2 seconds) that is executed in the first half of the advantageous end effect.

As already explained in the first embodiment above, when the ending conditions for the favorable section SC2 are met in the BB state ST3 transitioned from the ART state ST6, and the favorable section SC2 ends, if the total number of gaming media awarded in the BB state ST3 is equal to or greater than the mid-term termination reference number for the BB state ST3 (specifically, 200 or greater), the BB state ST3 and the ART state ST6 will also end at the end of the favorable section SC2. Also, when the ending conditions for the favorable section SC2 are met in the RB state ST4 transitioned from the ART state ST6, and the favorable section SC2 ends, if the total number of gaming media awarded in the RB state ST4 is equal to or greater than the mid-term termination reference number for the RB state ST4 (specifically, 100 or greater), the RB state ST4 and the ART state ST6 will also end at the end of the favorable section SC2. In these cases, the bonus end effect and ART end effect are not executed, and instead a favorable end effect is executed for a predetermined time (specifically, 4 seconds), during which the image display device 63 displays a message informing players that the bonus state and ART state ST6 have ended. The first to third state signals are turned off at the end of the first effect period (first half 2 seconds) that takes place in the first half of the favorable end effect.

In this way, two or more of the following effects will never be executed in a single game: bonus start effect, bonus end effect, advantageous start effect, advantageous end effect, ART start effect, and ART end effect.

Figure 120 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of the second calculation target area 111 in this embodiment. As shown in Figure 120, the second calculation target area 111 is provided with a standby counter 231 in addition to the bet number counter 125, left-side dual-purpose display counter 135, right-side dual-purpose display counter 136, deposit signal output counter 163, and payout signal output counter 165 already described in the first embodiment above. The standby counter 231 is a timer counter that enables the main MPU 72 to grasp the end of the first half of the first effect period and the end of the second half of the second effect period (the last 2 seconds) in the bonus start effect, bonus end effect, advantageous start effect, advantageous end effect, ART start effect, and ART end effect.

When a bonus start effect, bonus end effect, advantageous start effect, advantageous end effect, ART start effect, or ART end effect is being executed, a waiting period occurs in which the player cannot proceed with the game even if they operate the start lever 41 or stop buttons 42-44. The end of the game in which a bonus start effect, bonus end effect, advantageous start effect, advantageous end effect, ART start effect, or ART end effect is being executed is postponed until the waiting period ends, i.e., until the effect ends. At the start of these effects, the waiting counter 231 is set to the numerical value "2684," which corresponds to the total duration of the first effect period (2 seconds) and the second effect period (2 seconds), which is 4 seconds. When a waiting period is being set, the value of the waiting counter 231 is updated by subtracting 1 in the waiting setting process (Figure 123), described below, each time an interrupt occurs due to the timer interrupt process (Figure 15). As already explained in the first embodiment, the timer interrupt process (Figure 15) is initiated every 1.49 milliseconds when interrupts by the timer interrupt process are permitted. The main MPU 72 determines that the first effect period has ended when the value of the standby counter 231 becomes "1342" or less, and determines that the second effect period has ended when the value of the standby counter 231 becomes "0."

As with the first embodiment described above, payout signal output control is initiated by executing the payout signal control process (FIG. 84) with the payout signal output start flag in the second calculation target area 111 set to "1." The payout signal output start flag is set to "1" in step S4914 of the medium dispensing process (FIG. 83), which is executed in step S8110 of the normal process (FIG. 125). Payout signal output control is initiated when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R come to a stop and a small win or replay win is achieved. In this embodiment, the bonus start effect, bonus end effect, advantageous start effect, advantageous end effect, ART start effect, and ART end effect are initiated during the corresponding process at the end of play in step S311 of the normal process (FIG. 16). Therefore, these effects are initiated after the payout signal output control has begun.

As described above, the first to third state signals are raised or lowered at the end of the first effect period for those effects. Therefore, the time required for the first effect period (specifically, 2 seconds) for those effects can be secured from the start of payout signal output control until the first to third state signals are raised or lowered. The time required from the start of payout signal output control to the end of that output control is approximately 156 milliseconds when the maximum number of gaming media awarded (specifically, "11") is reached, which is shorter than the first effect period. Therefore, the main MPU 72 can be configured to raise or lower the first to third state signals after the external data counter DC has finished receiving the payout signal. This allows the data counter DC to accurately grasp the net increase in gaming media in the bonus state, advantageous zone SC2, and ART state ST6.

As described above, the first to third state signals are raised or lowered at the end of the first effect period in the bonus start effect, bonus end effect, advantageous start effect, advantageous end effect, ART start effect, or ART end effect. Furthermore, as described above, in games in which these effects are executed, the end of the game is postponed until the end of the second effect period in these effects. Therefore, after the end of these effects, a start waiting state is entered in which the next game can be started. In this embodiment, when the start lever 41 is operated to start the next game, the output control of the throw-in signal is initiated at the start of the next game without any delay. Therefore, a time equivalent to the second effect period (specifically, two seconds) in these effects can be secured between the rise or fall of the first to third state signals and the start of the throw-in signal output control. This allows the main MPU 72 to initiate the throw-in signal output control after the external data counter DC detects the rise or fall of the first to third state signals. Therefore, the data counter DC can accurately grasp the net increase in the number of gaming media in the bonus state, advantageous zone SC2, and ART state ST6.

Next, the startup setting process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 121. The startup setting process is executed in step S307 of the normal processing (Figure 16). Note that the startup setting process is executed using a program and data for specific control.

In the start-up setting process, steps S7701 to S7704 are executed, which are the same as steps S4701 to S4704 in the start-up setting process (Figure 81) in the first embodiment. Specifically, the game in progress flag in the second calculation target area 111 is first set to "1" (step S7701). This allows the main MPU 72 to recognize that a game is being played. Then, the end-of-award number display process is executed (step S7702). In the end-of-award number display process, the end-of-award number display in progress flag in the second calculation target area 111, the left-side dual-purpose display counter 135, and the right-side dual-purpose display counter 136 are cleared to "0." As in the first embodiment, when a small win is achieved and the display of the award number begins on the dual-purpose display unit 66, the display of the award number ends at the start of the game following the game in which the small win was achieved. After that, the replay bet completion flag and bet number counter 125 in the second calculation target area 111 are cleared to "0" (step S7703). After that, the input signal output counter 163 provided in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "3", which is the specified number of gaming media bets (step S7704). As already explained in the first embodiment above, the input signal output counter 163 is a counter that allows the main MPU 72 to grasp the number of times the input signal output to the data counter DC is raised from a LOW state to a HIGH state.

Then, the insertion start flag provided in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S7705), and the start-time setting process is terminated. The insertion start flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to determine that it is time to start output control of the insertion signal. When the insertion start flag is set to "1," the data output process (FIG. 122), described below, is executed, and output control of the insertion signal is started. In this way, in this embodiment, output control of the insertion signal is started without any delay when the game starts.

Next, the data output processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 122. The data output processing is executed in step S211 of the timer interrupt processing (Figure 15). Note that the data output processing is executed using a program and data for specific control.

The data output process first executes the standby setting process described below (step S7801). Then, it is determined whether the input start flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S7802). If the input start flag is set to "1" (step S7802: YES), the input start flag is cleared to "0" (step S7803). Then, in steps S7804 through S7806, the same processing as steps S4803 through S4805 in the data output process (Figure 82) in the first embodiment is executed. Specifically, the input signal is first raised from a LOW state to a HIGH state (step S7804). Then, the input switch timer counter 166 in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "5" (step S7805), and the input signal output control in progress flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S7806). As already explained in the first embodiment above, the closing signal output control in progress flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to determine that closing signal output control is in progress.

If a negative determination is made in step S7802, steps S7807 to S7817 execute the same processing as steps S4806 to S4816 in the data output processing (Figure 82) in the first embodiment described above. Specifically, it is first determined whether the closing signal output control in progress flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S7807). If the closing signal output control in progress flag is set to "1" (step S7807: YES), i.e., if the closing signal output control is in progress, the value of the closing switch timer counter 166 is decremented by 1 (step S7808), and it is determined whether the value after decrementing by 1 has become "0" (step S7809). If a positive determination is made in step S7809, it is determined whether the closing signal is in a LOW state (step S7810). If the closing signal is in a LOW state (step S7810: YES), the closing signal is raised from a LOW state to a HIGH state (step S7811). After that, the closing switch timer counter 166 in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "5" (step S7812).

If a negative determination is made in step S7810, the closing signal is changed from HIGH to LOW (step S7813), and the value of the closing signal output counter 163 in the second calculation target area 111 is decremented by 1 (step S7814). It is then determined whether the value of the closing signal output counter 163 after the decrement is "0" (step S7815). If the value of the closing signal output counter 163 is not "0" (step S7815: NO), this means that the closing signal output control has not ended, and the closing switch timer counter 166 in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "5" (step S7816). This allows the closing signal output control to continue.

If the value of the turn-on signal output counter 163 after decrementing by 1 in step S7814 is "0" (step S7815: YES), this means that the turn-on signal has been raised three times, so the turn-on signal output control in progress flag in the second calculation target area 111 is cleared to "0" (step S7817). This ends the turn-on signal output control.

If step S7806 is processed, if a negative judgment is made in step S7807, if a negative judgment is made in step S7809, if step S7812 is processed, if step S7816 is processed, or if step S7817 is processed, a payout signal control process is executed (step S7818), similar to step S4819 of the data output process (FIG. 82) in the first embodiment, and the data output process is terminated. The contents of the payout signal control process have already been described in the first embodiment with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 84. As described above, payout signal output control is initiated by executing the payout signal control process (step S7818) while the payout signal output start flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1." In the payout signal output control, the payout signal is raised from a LOW state to a HIGH state a number of times corresponding to the number of gaming media awarded set in the payout signal output counter 165 in the second calculation target area 111. In the output control of the dispensing signal, the dispensing signal falls 7.45 milliseconds after it is raised, and the dispensing signal rises 7.45 milliseconds after it is lowered.

Next, the standby setting process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 123. The standby setting process is executed in step S7801 of the data output process (Figure 122). Note that the standby setting process is executed using a program and data for specific control.

The standby setting process first determines whether the standby setting flag provided in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S7901). The standby setting flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to determine that a standby period has been set during which the game cannot proceed even if the player operates the start lever 41 and stop buttons 42-44. The standby setting flag is set to "1" in step S7904, which will be described later. The main MPU 72 determines that a standby period has been set when the standby setting flag is set to "1".

If a negative determination is made in step S7901, it is determined whether at least one of the first to third start-up preparation flags and the first to third stop-down preparation flags in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S7902). If a positive determination is made in step S7902, a standby setting process is executed (step S7903). In the standby setting process, the standby counter 231 in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "2684" as numerical information corresponding to the total duration of four seconds, which is the first display period (two seconds) and the second display period, in the bonus start effect, bonus end effect, advantageous start effect, advantageous end effect, ART start effect, or ART end effect. Thereafter, the standby setting completed flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S7904), and the standby setting process is terminated. This establishes a standby period during which the game cannot proceed even if the player operates the start lever 41 and stop buttons 42 to 44.

If a positive determination is made in step S7901, the value of the standby counter 231 in the second calculation target area 111 is decremented by "1" (step S7905), and it is determined whether the value after decrement is "0" (step S7906). If a positive determination is made in step S7906, this means that the second display period for the bonus start display, bonus end display, advantageous start display, advantageous end display, ART start display, or ART end display has ended. In this case, the standby setting completed flag in the second calculation target area 111 is cleared to "0" (step S7907). This ends the state in which the end of the game has been postponed.

Then, the first half end flag set in the second calculation target area 111 is cleared to "0" (step S7908), and this standby setting process is terminated. The first half end flag is a flag that enables the main MPU 72 to determine that the first effect period of the bonus start effect, bonus end effect, advantageous start effect, advantageous end effect, ART start effect, or ART end effect has ended. The first half end flag is set to "1" in step S7911, which will be described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S7906, it is determined whether the first half end flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S7909). If the first half end flag is not set to "1" (step S7909: NO), it is determined whether the first performance period has ended (step S7910). In step S7910, it is determined that the first performance period has ended if the value of the standby counter 231 in the second calculation target area 111 is "1342" or less.

If a positive judgment is made in step S7910, this means that the first performance period (first half 2 seconds) for the currently running bonus start performance, bonus end performance, advantageous start performance, advantageous end performance, ART start performance, or ART end performance has ended, so the first half end flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S7911), processing for the in-state signal is executed (step S7912), and this standby setting processing ends.

Figure 124 is a flowchart showing the in-state signal processing executed by the main MPU 72. Note that the in-state signal processing is executed using a specific control program and specific control data.

In the processing for the in-state signal, the first in-state signal is selected as the target in-state signal from the first through third in-state signals (step S8001), and the processing of steps S8002 through S8008 is performed for the first in-state signal. The target in-state signal is updated in step S8009, which will be described later, and the processing of steps S8002 through S8008 is also performed for the second in-state signal and the third in-state signal.

After processing step S8001, it is determined whether the start-up preparation flag corresponding to the target state signal in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S8002). In step S8002, if the target state signal is the first state signal, a positive determination is made if the first start-up preparation flag is set to "1". If the target state signal is the second state signal, a positive determination is made if the second start-up preparation flag is set to "1". If the target state signal is the third state signal, a positive determination is made if the third start-up preparation flag is set to "1".

If a positive judgment is made in step S8002, the target state signal is raised from a LOW state to a HIGH state (step S8003), and the rise preparation flag corresponding to the target state signal in the second calculation target area 111 is cleared to "0" (step S8004).

If a negative judgment is made in step S8002, it is determined whether the fall preparation flag corresponding to the target state signal in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S8005). In step S8005, if the target state signal is the first state signal, a positive judgment is made if the first fall preparation flag is set to "1". If the target state signal is the second state signal, a positive judgment is made if the second fall preparation flag is set to "1". If the target state signal is the third state signal, a positive judgment is made if the third fall preparation flag is set to "1".

If a positive judgment is made in step S8005, the target state signal is changed from HI to LOW (step S8006), and the change-off preparation flag corresponding to the target state signal in the second calculation target area 111 is cleared to "0" (step S8007).

If step S8004 is performed, if a negative judgment is made in step S8005, or if step S8007 is performed, it is determined whether the target state signal is a third state signal (step S8008). If the target state signal is not a third state signal (step S8008: NO), the target state signal is updated (step S8009). In step S8009, if the current target state signal is a first state signal, the target state signal is updated to a second state signal, and if the current target state signal is a second state signal, the target state signal is updated to a third state signal. Then, the process returns to step S8002, and steps S8002 to S8008 are executed for the updated state signal. As a result, steps S8002 to S8008 are executed using the first to third state signals as the target state signals. If the in-state signal processing (FIG. 124) is executed when multiple of the first to third rise preparation flags in the second calculation target area 111 are set to "1", the multiple in-state signals are raised. Also, if the in-state signal processing (FIG. 124) is executed when multiple fall preparation flags among the first to third fall preparation flags in the second calculation target area 111 are set to "1", the multiple in-state signals are lowered. If a positive determination is made in step S8008, this in-state signal processing is terminated.

Next, we will explain the normal processing executed by the main MPU 72 with reference to the flowchart in Figure 125. Note that the normal processing is executed using a program and data for specific control.

In normal processing, steps S8101 to S8112 are executed, which are the same as steps S301 to S312 in the normal processing of the first embodiment (Figure 16). Specifically, first, an interrupt permission process is executed to permit the next timer interrupt (step S8101). Then, a start wait process is executed (step S8102), and a setting confirmation process is executed (step S8103). Then, a determination is made as to whether the number of gaming media bets has reached a specified number (specifically, "3") (step S8104). If the number of bets has not reached the specified number (step S8104: NO), the process returns to the start wait process (step S8102). If the number of bets has reached the specified number (step S8104: YES), a determination is made as to whether the start lever 41 has been operated and a start command has been issued (step S8105). If a start command has not been issued (step S8105: NO), the process returns to the start wait process (step S8102).

On the other hand, if a start command is issued (step S8105: YES), the main line ML is enabled and then the acceptance prohibition process is executed (step S8106). By executing the acceptance prohibition process, even if a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 45, the medal will be ejected into the medal tray 59 without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a. After that, the start setting process (Figure 121) is executed to set various settings when the game starts (step S8107). Then, in step S8108, the role lottery process is executed to draw the roles for the current game.

Then, in step S8109, reel control processing is executed to drive and control each of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in a manner corresponding to the result of the lottery processing for the current role, and in step S8110, medium award processing is executed. In the medium award processing, if a small role win or replay win has been achieved in the current game, processing corresponding to the achievement of that small role win or replay win is executed.

Then, end-of-game response processing is executed to enable the setting of a game state and game zone corresponding to the result of this game (step S8111). In the end-of-game response processing (step S8111), if a bonus state is to be started, a command corresponding to the start of the bonus state is sent to the presentation-side MPU 92, and if the bonus state is to be ended, a command corresponding to the end of the bonus state is sent to the presentation-side MPU 92. The presentation-side MPU 92 controls the light emission of the upper lamp 61, the sound output of the speaker 62, and the display of the image display device 63 so that a bonus start effect is executed when a command corresponding to the start of the bonus state is received, and controls the light emission of the upper lamp 61, the sound output of the speaker 62, and the display of the image display device 63 so that a bonus end effect is executed when a command corresponding to the end of the bonus state is received. However, as already explained, if the ending conditions for the advantageous section SC2 are met in the bonus state transitioned from the ART state ST6 and the bonus state ends when the advantageous section SC2 ends, the advantageous end effect is executed without executing the bonus end effect and the ART end effect, and in that advantageous end effect, a display is displayed on the image display device 63 to notify that the bonus state and the ART state ST6 have ended.

In the response process at the end of game play (step S8111), when the advantageous zone SC2 starts, a command corresponding to the start of the advantageous zone SC2 is sent to the presentation side MPU 92, and when the advantageous zone SC2 ends, a command corresponding to the end of the advantageous zone SC2 is sent to the presentation side MPU 92. When the presentation side MPU 92 receives a command corresponding to the start of the advantageous zone SC2, it controls the illumination of the upper lamp 61, the sound output of the speaker 62, and the display of the image display device 63 so that an advantageous start effect is executed. When the presentation side MPU 92 receives a command corresponding to the end of the advantageous zone SC2, it controls the illumination of the upper lamp 61, the sound output of the speaker 62, and the display of the image display device 63 so that an advantageous end effect is executed. However, as already explained, when a transition to the third BB state ST3, fourth BB state ST3, or second RB state ST4 occurs and then a transition to the advantageous zone SC2 occurs, a bonus start effect is executed without executing the advantageous start effect, and a display is displayed on the image display device 63 during the bonus start effect to notify players that they have transitioned to the advantageous zone SC2. Furthermore, if the advantageous section SC2 ends without a win for maintaining the advantageous position at the end of the ART state ST6, the ART end effect is executed without executing the advantageous end effect, and in the ART end effect, a display is displayed on the image display device 63 to notify the user that the advantageous section SC2 has ended.

In the response process at the end of game play (step S8111), when ART state ST6 starts, a command corresponding to the start of ART state ST6 is sent to the production side MPU 92, and when ART state ST6 ends, a command corresponding to the end of ART state ST6 is sent to the production side MPU 92. When the production side MPU 92 receives a command corresponding to the start of ART state ST6, it controls the light emission of the upper lamp 61, the sound output of the speaker 62, and the display of the image display device 63 so that an ART start effect is executed, and when it receives a command corresponding to the end of ART state ST6, it controls the light emission of the upper lamp 61, the sound output of the speaker 62, and the display of the image display device 63 so that an ART end effect is executed. However, as already explained, if the ending conditions for the advantageous section SC2 are met in the ART state ST6 or the bonus state transitioned from the ART state ST6, and the ART state ST6 ends when the advantageous section SC2 ends, the advantageous end effect is executed without executing the ART end effect, and during this advantageous end effect, a display is displayed on the image display device 63 to notify the user that the ART state ST6 has ended.

After executing the response process at the end of game play in step S8111, the external output setting process is executed (step S8112). Then, it is determined whether the standby setting flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S8113). If the standby setting flag is set to "1" (step S8113: YES), the determination process of step S8113 is repeatedly executed until the second display period in the bonus start effect, bonus end effect, advantageous start effect, advantageous end effect, ART start effect, or ART end effect ends and the standby setting flag is cleared to "0."

If a negative determination is made in step S8113, steps S8114 and S8115 execute the same processing as steps S313 and S314 in the normal processing (FIG. 16) in the first embodiment described above. Specifically, the in-game flag in the second calculation target area 111 is cleared to "0" (step S8114), acceptance permission processing is executed (step S8115), and the process returns to step S8101.

In this way, when a bonus start effect, bonus end effect, advantageous start effect, advantageous end effect, ART start effect, or ART end effect is executed, a positive determination is made in step S8113, and the end of the game is postponed until the end of the second effect period for that effect. On the other hand, in games in which a bonus start effect, bonus end effect, advantageous start effect, advantageous end effect, ART start effect, or ART end effect is not executed, no delay occurs, and a positive determination is made in step S8113, and the game ends.

Next, referring to the time chart in Figure 126, we will explain how output control of the payout signal, deposit signal, and first-state signal is performed when the bonus state ends. Figure 126(a) shows the period during which output control of the payout signal is executed, Figure 126(b) shows the period during which output control of the deposit signal is executed, Figure 126(c) shows the state of the first-state signal, Figure 126(d) shows the first effect period (first half 2 seconds) of the bonus end effect, Figure 126(e) shows the second effect period (second half 2 seconds) of the bonus end effect, Figure 126(f) shows the timing when the final game in the bonus state starts, Figure 126(g) shows the rotation period of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, Figure 126(h) shows the timing when the first game starts after the bonus state ends, and Figure 126(i) shows the period during which a game can be started by operating the start lever 41 with gaming media betted.

As shown in Figure 126(i), at timing t1 when the game can be started, the start lever 41 is operated with gaming media betted, and the final game in the bonus state begins as shown in Figure 126(f). At timing t1, the state in which the game can be started ends as shown in Figure 126(i), and reels 32L, 32M, and 32R begin to rotate as shown in Figure 126(g).

After that, at timing t2, as shown in Figure 126(g), a stop command for the third stop is issued and all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, and payout signal output control begins as shown in Figure 126(a). Then, as shown in Figure 126(d), the bonus state ends at timing t3, triggering the start of the first performance period (the first 2 seconds) of the bonus end performance. Then, at timing t4, midway through the first performance period, payout signal output control ends as shown in Figure 126(a).

In this way, payout signal output control begins before the first presentation period of the bonus end effect. Furthermore, even when the maximum number of gaming media awarded is reached (specifically, 11), the execution period of payout signal output control (maximum of approximately 156 milliseconds) is shorter than the first presentation period of the bonus end effect (specifically, 2 seconds). Therefore, payout signal output control ends midway through the first presentation period of the bonus end effect. Although not shown, as already explained, the first presentation period of the advantageous end effect and the ART end effect is also the same 2 seconds as the first presentation period of the bonus end effect, and payout signal output control begins before the first presentation period of these effects. Therefore, in games where advantageous end effectors are executed, payout signal output control ends midway through the first presentation period of the advantageous end effect, and in games where ART end effectors are executed, payout signal output control ends midway through the first presentation period of the ART end effect.

After that, at timing t5, when the first presentation period (first 2 seconds) of the bonus end presentation ends as shown in Figure 126(d), the second presentation period (last 2 seconds) of the bonus end presentation begins as shown in Figure 126(e). Also, at timing t5 when the first presentation period ends, the first state in progress signal falls from HI to LOW as shown in Figure 126(c).

As described above, the first presentation period of the bonus end presentation effect ends after the output control of the payout signal ends, and the first state signal falls when the first presentation period ends. Therefore, after the data counter DC determines the number of gaming media awarded based on the payout signal, the main MPU 72 can fall the first state signal. This allows the data counter DC to accurately determine the net increase in the number of gaming media during the bonus state. Furthermore, although not shown in the figure, the first presentation period of the advantageous end presentation effect ends after the output control of the payout signal ends, and the second state signal falls when the first presentation period ends. Therefore, after the data counter DC determines the number of gaming media awarded based on the payout signal, the main MPU 72 can fall the second state signal. This allows the data counter DC to accurately determine the net increase in the number of gaming media in the advantageous section SC2. Furthermore, the first effect period of the ART end effect ends after the output control of the payout signal ends, and the third state signal falls when the first effect period ends. Therefore, after the data counter DC determines the number of gaming media awarded based on the payout signal, the main MPU 72 can cause the third state signal to fall. This allows the data counter DC to accurately determine the net increase in the number of gaming media in ART state ST6.

After that, at timing t6, as shown in Figure 126(e), the second presentation period in the bonus end presentation ends, and the game can be started by operating the start lever 41 with gaming media betted, as shown in Figure 126(i). Then, as shown in Figure 126(h), at timing t7, the start lever 41 is operated with gaming media betted, and the first game after the bonus state ends is started. At timing t7, as shown in Figure 126(g), reels 32L, 32M, and 32R begin to spin, and the state in which the game can be started ends, as shown in Figure 126(i). Also, at timing t7, output control of the throw-in signal begins, as shown in Figure 126(b).

In this way, when the bonus state ends, after the first state signal falls at the end of the first presentation period (the first two seconds) of the bonus end presentation, the game cannot be started until the second presentation period (the last two seconds) of the bonus end presentation ends. This prevents a new game from starting and prevents the start of output control of the throw-in signal until the second presentation period (the last two seconds) of the bonus end presentation ends. This ensures an interval of the second presentation period (specifically, two seconds) between the fall of the first state signal and the start of output control of the throw-in signal. Therefore, the main MPU 72 can start output control of the throw-in signal after the data counter DC performs processing to detect the fall of the first state signal. This allows the data counter DC to accurately detect the net increase in the number of gaming media during the bonus state.

Although not shown, when the advantageous section SC2 ends, after the second state signal falls at the end of the first presentation period (the first two seconds) of the advantageous end presentation, the game cannot be started until the second presentation period (the last two seconds) of the advantageous end presentation ends. Therefore, a new game is prevented from starting until the second presentation period (the last two seconds) of the advantageous end presentation ends, and output control of the input signal is prevented from starting. This ensures an interval of the second presentation period (specifically, two seconds) between the falling of the second state signal and the start of output control of the input signal. Therefore, the main MPU 72 can start output control of the input signal after the data counter DC performs processing to grasp the falling edge of the second state signal. This allows the data counter DC to accurately grasp the net increase in the number of gaming media in the advantageous section SC2. Furthermore, when ART state ST6 ends, after the third state signal falls at the end of the first presentation period (the first two seconds) of the ART end presentation, the game cannot be started until the second presentation period (the last two seconds) of the ART end presentation ends. Therefore, a new game cannot be started until the second presentation period (the last two seconds) of the ART end presentation ends, and the start of the input signal output control is also prevented. This ensures an interval of the second presentation period (specifically, two seconds) between the fall of the third state signal and the start of the input signal output control. Therefore, the main MPU 72 can start the input signal output control after the data counter DC performs processing to detect the fall of the third state signal. This allows the data counter DC to accurately detect the net increase in the number of gaming media in ART state ST6.

Next, referring to the time chart in Figure 127, we will explain how output control of the payout signal, deposit signal, and first-state signal is performed when the bonus state is initiated. Figure 127(a) shows the period during which output control of the payout signal is executed, Figure 127(b) shows the period during which output control of the deposit signal is executed, Figure 127(c) shows the state of the first-state signal, Figure 127(d) shows the first effect period (first half 2 seconds) of the bonus start effect, Figure 127(e) shows the second effect period (second half 2 seconds) of the bonus start effect, Figure 127(f) shows the timing when a game in which a bonus win is achieved starts, Figure 127(g) shows the rotation period of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, Figure 127(h) shows the timing when the first game starts after transitioning to the bonus state, and Figure 127(i) shows the period during which a game can be started by operating the start lever 41 with gaming media betted.

As shown in Figure 127(i), at timing t1 when the game can be started, if the start lever 41 is operated with gaming media betted, a game in which a bonus win is achieved will begin as shown in Figure 127(f). At timing t1, the state in which the game can be started ends as shown in Figure 127(i), and reels 32L, 32M, and 32R begin to spin as shown in Figure 127(g).

After that, at timing t2, as shown in Figure 127(g), a stop command for the third stop is issued and all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, and payout signal output control begins as shown in Figure 127(a). Then, as shown in Figure 127(d), at timing t3, a bonus win is achieved, triggering the start of the first performance period (the first 2 seconds) of the bonus start performance. Then, at timing t4, halfway through the first performance period, payout signal output control ends as shown in Figure 127(a).

In this way, payout signal output control begins before the first presentation period of the bonus start effect. Furthermore, even when the maximum number of gaming media awarded is reached (specifically, 11), the execution period of payout signal output control (maximum of approximately 156 milliseconds) is shorter than the first presentation period of the bonus start effect (specifically, 2 seconds). Therefore, payout signal output control ends midway through the first presentation period of the bonus start effect. Although not shown, as already explained, the first presentation period of the advantageous start effect and the ART start effect is also the same 2 seconds as the first presentation period of the bonus start effect, and payout signal output control begins before the first presentation period of these effects. Therefore, in games where advantageous start effects are executed, payout signal output control ends midway through the first presentation period of the advantageous start effect, and in games where ART start effects are executed, payout signal output control ends midway through the first presentation period of the ART start effect.

After that, at timing t5, as shown in Figure 127(d), the first performance period (first 2 seconds) of the bonus start performance ends, and the second performance period (last 2 seconds) of the bonus start performance begins, as shown in Figure 127(e). Also, at timing t5 when the first performance period ends, the first state in progress signal is raised from LOW to HIGH, as shown in Figure 127(c).

As described above, the first performance period of the bonus start performance ends after the output control of the payout signal ends, and the first state signal is raised at the end of the first performance period. Therefore, after the data counter DC determines the number of gaming media awarded based on the payout signal, the main MPU 72 can raise the first state signal. This allows the data counter DC to accurately determine the net increase in gaming media during the bonus state. Also, although not shown in the figure, the first performance period of the advantageous start performance ends after the output control of the payout signal ends, and the second state signal is raised at the end of the first performance period. Therefore, after the data counter DC determines the number of gaming media awarded based on the payout signal, the main MPU 72 can raise the second state signal. This allows the data counter DC to accurately determine the net increase in gaming media in the advantageous zone SC2. Furthermore, the first effect period of the ART start effect ends after the output control of the payout signal ends, and the third state signal is raised at the end of the first effect period. Therefore, after the data counter DC determines the number of gaming media awarded based on the payout signal, the main MPU 72 can raise the third state signal. This allows the data counter DC to accurately determine the net increase in the number of gaming media in ART state ST6.

After that, at timing t6, as shown in Figure 127(e), the second performance period in the bonus start performance ends, and the game can be started by operating the start lever 41 with gaming media betted, as shown in Figure 127(i). Then, as shown in Figure 127(h), at timing t7, the start lever 41 is operated with gaming media betted, and the first game after the transition to the bonus state begins. At timing t7, as shown in Figure 127(g), reels 32L, 32M, and 32R begin to spin, and the state in which the game can be started ends, as shown in Figure 127(i). Also, at timing t7, output control of the throw-in signal begins, as shown in Figure 127(b).

In this way, when a bonus win is achieved, after the first state signal is raised at the end of the first presentation period (the first two seconds) of the bonus start presentation, the game cannot be started until the second presentation period (the last two seconds) of the bonus start presentation ends. This prevents a new game from starting and prevents the start of output control of the throw-in signal until the second presentation period (the last two seconds) of the bonus start presentation ends. This ensures an interval of the second presentation period (specifically, two seconds) between the rise of the first state signal and the start of output control of the throw-in signal. Therefore, the main MPU 72 can start output control of the throw-in signal after the data counter DC executes processing to determine the rise of the first state signal. This allows the data counter DC to accurately determine the net increase in the number of gaming media during the bonus state.

Although not shown, when transitioning to the favorable zone SC2, after the second state signal is raised at the end of the first presentation period (the first two seconds) of the favorable start presentation, the game cannot be started until the second presentation period (the last two seconds) of the favorable start presentation ends. Therefore, a new game is prevented from starting until the second presentation period (the last two seconds) of the favorable start presentation ends, and the output control of the input signal is prevented from starting. This ensures an interval of the second presentation period (specifically, two seconds) between the raising of the second state signal and the start of the output control of the input signal. Therefore, the main MPU 72 can start the output control of the input signal after the data counter DC executes processing to grasp the rising of the second state signal. This enables the data counter DC to accurately grasp the net increase in the number of gaming media in the favorable zone SC2. Furthermore, when transitioning to ART state ST6, after the third state signal is raised at the end of the first presentation period (the first two seconds) of the ART start presentation, the game cannot be started until the second presentation period (the last two seconds) of the ART start presentation ends. Therefore, a new game cannot be started until the second presentation period (the last two seconds) of the ART start presentation ends, and the start of the input signal output control is also prevented. This ensures an interval of the second presentation period (specifically, two seconds) between the rise of the third state signal and the start of the input signal output control. Therefore, the main MPU 72 can start the input signal output control after the data counter DC executes processing to grasp the rise of the third state signal. This allows the data counter DC to accurately grasp the net increase in the number of gaming media in ART state ST6.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

Payout signal output control is initiated when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop and a small win or replay win is achieved. Bonus start effects, bonus end effects, advantageous start effects, advantageous end effects, ART start effects, and ART end effects are initiated after payout signal output control begins. The first to third state signals are raised or lowered at the end of the first effect period for these effects. Therefore, a time equivalent to the first effect period (specifically, 2 seconds) for these effects can be secured between the start of payout signal output control and the rise or fall of the first to third state signals. Payout signal output control ends midway through the first effect period for these effects, even when the maximum number of gaming media awarded (specifically, "11") has been reached. Therefore, the main MPU 72 can be configured to raise or lower the first to third state signals after the external data counter DC has finished receiving the payout signal. This makes it possible to accurately grasp the net increase in gaming media in the bonus state, advantageous zone SC2, and ART state ST6 using the data counter DC.

In games in which a bonus start effect, bonus end effect, advantageous start effect, advantageous end effect, ART start effect, or ART end effect is executed, a waiting period corresponding to the total duration of the first and second effect periods for that effect is set at the start of that effect. Until that waiting period has elapsed, the player cannot proceed with the game even if they operate the start lever 41 or stop buttons 42-44, and the end of that game is postponed until the waiting period has elapsed. After the waiting period has elapsed, the game enters a waiting state in which it is possible to start the next game. Output control of the throw-in signal is initiated when the start lever 41 is operated to start a game. The first to third state signals are raised or lowered at the end of the first effect period for that effect. Therefore, a time equivalent to the second effect period (specifically, two seconds) for that effect can be secured between the rise or fall of the first to third state signals and the start of throw-in signal output control. This allows the main MPU 72 to start output control of the input signal after the external data counter DC detects the rising or falling edge of the first to third state signals. This allows the data counter DC to accurately detect the net increase in the number of gaming media in the bonus state, advantageous zone SC2, and ART state ST6.

<Other Embodiments>
The present invention is not limited to the contents of the above-described embodiments, and various modifications and improvements are possible within the scope of the spirit of the present invention. For example, the following changes may be made. The configurations of the following alternative embodiments may be applied individually to the configurations of the above-described embodiments, or may be applied in combination. The configurations of the above-described embodiments may be applied in combination with each other, and the configurations of the following alternative embodiments may be applied individually or in combination with a configuration obtained by combining the configurations of the above-described embodiments with each other.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, the checksum calculated before power is shut off and the checksum calculated after power is restored are not limited to 2-byte numerical information, but may be 1-byte numerical information or numerical information of 3 or more bytes. By configuring the checksum to be calculated after power is restored using the same calculation method for the same calculation range as before power was shut off, it is possible to check whether an abnormality has occurred in the data stored in the calculation range of the checksum.

(2) In each of the above embodiments, instead of the configuration in which the leading area 108, 188, 208 is set as the first three-byte memory area in the stack area 101, 181, 201 for specific control, a configuration in which the leading area is set as the first one-byte memory area in the stack area 101, 181, 201 for specific control may be adopted. Specifically, as in the first embodiment above, the stack area 101 for specific control in the main RAM 74 (stack area 181 for specific control in the fourth embodiment, stack area 201 for specific control in the fifth embodiment) includes one-byte memory areas corresponding to each address Y(1) to Y(r+1) (see Figure 13). In this configuration, a one-byte memory area corresponding to Y(1), which is the leading address of the stack area 101 for specific control, is set as the leading area. While the first area is excluded from the range of checksum calculation, the 1-byte storage areas corresponding to each address Y(2) to Y(r+1) in the specific control stack area 101, excluding the first area, are included in the range of checksum calculation. The first area is used to save data (1 byte) in the flag register of the primary MPU 72 when the backup abnormality confirmation process (FIG. 41), a non-specific control process, is started while the power recovery process (FIG. 40), a specific control process, is being executed. When the backup abnormality confirmation process ends, the information saved in the first area is restored to the flag register of the primary MPU 72. This allows the flag register of the primary MPU 72 to be used during the backup abnormality confirmation process, while the state of the flag register of the primary MPU 72 can be restored to the state it was in when the backup abnormality confirmation process ended.

In this configuration, the program for executing the backup abnormality confirmation process includes processing for setting return address information (2 bytes) in the program counter of the primary MPU 72 to return to the processing of step S1805 in the power recovery processing (FIG. 40) when the backup abnormality confirmation process is terminated. When the backup abnormality confirmation process is terminated, this processing is executed, thereby returning to the processing of step S1805 in the power recovery processing (FIG. 40). In this way, by configuring the program to set return address information when the backup abnormality confirmation process is terminated in the program counter of the primary MPU 72, it is possible to eliminate the process of writing return address information (2 bytes) to the specific control stack area 101 when the backup abnormality confirmation process starts, and the leading area can be made into a storage area of the first 1 byte in the specific control stack area 101. By making the leading area excluded from the range subject to checksum calculation a 1-byte storage area, it is possible to reduce the storage area excluded from the range subject to checksum calculation in the specific control stack area 101.

As in the first embodiment, in the power outage processing, data stored in the top area of the specific control stack area 101 is stored in a top backup area provided in the second calculation target area 111 in the specific control work area 103 (specific control work area 183 in the fourth embodiment, and specific control work area 203 in the fifth embodiment). The top backup area is a 1-byte storage area provided for saving data in the top area in the second calculation target area 111. By backing up the data stored in the top area to the top backup area during the power outage processing, the top area can be used to execute the backup abnormality confirmation processing (Figure 41), which is a non-specific control processing, after power is restored. Furthermore, if it is confirmed that no abnormality has occurred in the data stored in the checksum calculation target range, the data stored in the top backup area can be restored to the top area. This restores the data in the top area to the data stored in the top area at the start of the power outage processing, restoring the processing state before the power was shut off. Additionally, by configuring the system to calculate the checksum before power is cut off and after power is restored while the data in the leading area is being saved to the leading save area, it is possible to confirm that no abnormalities have occurred in the data saved to the leading save area by verifying that the checksum calculated after power is restored matches the checksum stored before power was cut off.

(3) In the second embodiment described above, the memory areas excluded from the checksum calculation range may be concentrated toward the first address of the main RAM 74, and the memory areas included in the checksum calculation range may be concentrated toward the last address of the main RAM 74. Specifically, the main RAM 74 has areas corresponding to consecutive addresses Y(1) to Y(u+3). The area of each consecutive address within the range of addresses Y(1) to Y(r+1) is set as a stack area for non-specific control. Furthermore, addresses Y(r+2) to Y(r+4) consecutive to addresses Y(1) to Y(r+1) are addresses in the first unused area, and the area of each consecutive address within the range of addresses Y(r+5) to Y(s+1) is set as a stack area for specific control. Furthermore, addresses Y(s+2) to Y(s+4) consecutive to addresses Y(r+5) to Y(s+1) are unused addresses in a second unused area, and the consecutive addresses within the range of addresses Y(s+5) to Y(t+1) are set as work areas for non-specific control. Furthermore, addresses Y(t+2) to Y(t+4) consecutive to addresses Y(s+5) to Y(t+1) are unused addresses in a third unused area, and the consecutive addresses within the range of addresses Y(t+5) to Y(u+3) are set as work areas for specific control.

In this configuration, the non-specific control stack area and the first unused area are excluded from the range of checksum calculations. The first 3-byte area of the specific control stack area is provided with a leading area. Like the leading area 108 in the first embodiment, the leading area is used to save data (1 byte) from the flag register of the primary MPU 72 when the backup abnormality confirmation process (FIG. 41), a non-specific control process, is started while the power recovery process (FIG. 40), a specific control process, is being executed. It is also used to store return address information (2 bytes) for returning to the power recovery process (FIG. 40) after the backup abnormality confirmation process (FIG. 41) is completed. The leading area is excluded from the range of checksum calculations. This prevents the checksum value from differing from the value before power interruption due to writing to the leading area when the backup abnormality confirmation process (FIG. 41) is started. Meanwhile, the areas of the specific control stack area other than the leading area are included in the range of checksum calculations. In addition, the second unused area, the work area for non-specific control, the third unused area, and the work area for specific control are also included in the range of checksum calculations.

In the main RAM 74, the area included in the checksum calculation range is the area corresponding to the consecutive addresses Y(r+8) to Y(u+3), and this area is concentrated on the final address side of the main RAM 74 (the Y(u+3) side). On the other hand, the area excluded from the checksum calculation range is the area corresponding to the consecutive addresses Y(1) to Y(r+7), and this area is concentrated on the first address side of the main RAM 74 (the Y(1) side). The final address of the checksum calculation range is Y(u+3), and this final address is also the final address in the main RAM 74. Therefore, when calculating the checksum before a power outage or after power restoration, it is possible to omit the process of specifying an address other than the final address in the main RAM 74 as the end address of the calculation. The checksum calculation ends when the address of the updated area to be added exceeds the final address in the main RAM 74. This simplifies the processing configuration for calculating the checksum.

(4) In the second embodiment described above, all storage areas in the stack area 101 for specific control and the work area 103 for specific control may be included in the range of checksum calculation. Specifically, all storage areas in the stack area 101 for specific control, the work area 102 for non-specific control, the work area 103 for specific control, the first unused area 105, and the second unused area 106 are included in the range of checksum calculation, while the stack area 104 for non-specific control and the third unused area 107 are excluded from the range of checksum calculation. Therefore, in the main RAM 74, the storage areas corresponding to consecutive addresses Y(1) to Y(t+3) are included in the range of checksum calculation, and the storage areas corresponding to consecutive addresses Y(t+4) to Y(u+1) are excluded from the range of checksum calculation.

In this configuration, when the backup abnormality confirmation process (FIG. 89), a process for non-specific control, is started while the power recovery process (FIG. 40), a process for specific control, is being executed, the process of saving the data (1 byte) in the flag register of the main MPU 72 and the return address information (2 bytes) for returning to step S1805 of the power recovery process (FIG. 40) after the backup abnormality confirmation process (FIG. 89) is completed to the stack area 101 for specific control is not executed. Therefore, after power is restored, the backup abnormality confirmation process (FIG. 89) can be started without changing the data stored in the stack area 101 for specific control. This allows a configuration in which all storage areas in the stack area 101 for specific control are included in the range of the checksum calculation.

In this configuration, the program for executing the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 89) includes processing for setting address information in the program counter of the primary MPU 72 to return to step S1805 of the power restoration process (Figure 40) when the backup abnormality confirmation process is terminated. This makes it possible to return to step S1805 of the power restoration process (Figure 40) when the backup abnormality confirmation process is terminated without saving the return address information in the specific control stack area 101 when the backup abnormality confirmation process is started.

In this configuration, the program for executing the power recovery process (Figure 40) includes processing for setting data for executing specific control processing in the flag register of the main MPU 72 after completing the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 89) and returning to the power recovery process. This allows the data in the flag register of the main MPU 72 to be restored to data for executing specific control processing after completing the backup abnormality confirmation process and returning to the power recovery process (Figure 40) without having to save the data in the flag register of the main MPU 72 to the stack area 101 for specific control when starting the backup abnormality confirmation process.

(5) In the second embodiment described above, all storage areas in the non-specific control stack area 104 and the non-specific control work area 102 may be included in the range of checksum calculation. Specifically, all storage areas in the specific control stack area 101, the non-specific control work area 102, the specific control work area 103, the non-specific control stack area 104, the first unused area 105, the second unused area 106, and the third unused area 107, excluding the leading area 108, are included in the range of checksum calculation, while the leading area 108 in the specific control stack area 101 is excluded from the range of checksum calculation. Therefore, in the main RAM 74, the storage areas corresponding to consecutive addresses Y(4) to Y(u+1) are included in the range of checksum calculation, and the storage areas corresponding to consecutive addresses Y(1) to Y(3) are excluded from the range of checksum calculation.

In this configuration, when the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 89), which is a process for non-specific control, starts, the process of saving the information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register, which are some of the various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers provided in the main MPU 72, to the stack area 104 for non-specific control (processing in step S5302) is not executed. Therefore, after power is restored, the checksum calculation in the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 89) can be performed without changing the data stored in the stack area 104 for non-specific control. This allows a configuration in which all storage areas in the stack area 104 for non-specific control are included in the range of the checksum calculation.

In this configuration, the program for executing the backup abnormality confirmation process (FIG. 89) includes a process for setting data for executing specific control processing in the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register, which are some of the various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers provided in the primary MPU 72, when the backup abnormality confirmation process is terminated. As already explained in the second embodiment above, these some registers are used to execute steps S5303 to S5310 of the backup abnormality confirmation process (FIG. 89). By configuring the program to set data for executing specific control processing in these some registers when the backup abnormality confirmation process is terminated, these some registers remain available for use in steps S5303 to S5310, and the system can return to step S1805 of the power recovery process (FIG. 40) with data for executing specific control processing set in these some registers.

In this configuration, the final address of the range to be calculated for the checksum is Y(u+1), which is also the final address in the main RAM 74. Therefore, when calculating the checksum before a power outage and after power is restored, it is possible to omit the process of specifying an address other than the final address in the main RAM 74 as the end address for the calculation. The checksum calculation ends when the address of the area to be added after the update exceeds the final address in the main RAM 74. This simplifies the processing configuration for calculating the checksum.

(6) In the second embodiment described above, all storage areas in the main RAM 74 may be included in the range of checksum calculation. Specifically, all storage areas in the stack area 101 for specific control, the work area 102 for non-specific control, the work area 103 for specific control, the stack area 104 for non-specific control, the first unused area 105, the second unused area 106, and the third unused area 107 are included in the range of checksum calculation. Therefore, in the main RAM 74, the storage areas corresponding to consecutive addresses Y(1) to Y(u+1) are included in the range of checksum calculation.

In this configuration, when the backup abnormality confirmation process (FIG. 89), a process for non-specific control, is started while the power recovery process (FIG. 40), a process for specific control, is being executed, the process of saving the data (1 byte) in the flag register of the main MPU 72 and the return address information (2 bytes) for returning to step S1805 of the power recovery process (FIG. 40) after the backup abnormality confirmation process (FIG. 89) is completed to the stack area 101 for specific control is not executed. Therefore, after power is restored, the backup abnormality confirmation process (FIG. 89) can be started without changing the data stored in the stack area 101 for specific control. This allows a configuration in which all storage areas in the stack area 101 for specific control are included in the range of the checksum calculation.

In this configuration, the program for executing the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 89) includes processing for setting address information in the program counter of the primary MPU 72 to return to step S1805 of the power restoration process (Figure 40) when the backup abnormality confirmation process is terminated. This makes it possible to return to step S1805 of the power restoration process (Figure 40) when the backup abnormality confirmation process is terminated without saving the return address information in the specific control stack area 101 when the backup abnormality confirmation process is started.

In this configuration, the program for executing the power recovery process (Figure 40) includes processing for setting data for executing specific control processing in the flag register of the main MPU 72 after completing the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 89) and returning to the power recovery process. This allows the data in the flag register of the main MPU 72 to be restored to data for executing specific control processing after completing the backup abnormality confirmation process and returning to the power recovery process (Figure 40) without having to save the data in the flag register of the main MPU 72 to the stack area 101 for specific control when starting the backup abnormality confirmation process.

In this configuration, when the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 89), which is a process for non-specific control, starts, the process of saving the information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register, which are some of the various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers provided in the main MPU 72, to the stack area 104 for non-specific control (processing in step S5302) is not executed. Therefore, after power is restored, the checksum calculation in the backup abnormality confirmation process (Figure 89) can be performed without changing the data stored in the stack area 104 for non-specific control. This allows a configuration in which all storage areas in the stack area 104 for non-specific control are included in the range of the checksum calculation.

In this configuration, the program for executing the backup abnormality confirmation process (FIG. 89) includes a process for setting data for executing specific control processing in the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register, which are some of the various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers provided in the primary MPU 72, when the backup abnormality confirmation process is terminated. As already explained in the second embodiment above, these some registers are used to execute steps S5303 to S5310 of the backup abnormality confirmation process (FIG. 89). By configuring the program to set data for executing specific control processing in these some registers when the backup abnormality confirmation process is terminated, these some registers remain available for use in steps S5303 to S5310, and the system can return to step S1805 of the power recovery process (FIG. 40) with data for executing specific control processing set in these some registers.

In this configuration, the final address of the range to be calculated for the checksum is Y(u+1), which is also the final address in the main RAM 74. Therefore, when calculating the checksum before a power outage and after power is restored, it is possible to omit the process of specifying an address other than the final address in the main RAM 74 as the end address for the calculation. The checksum calculation ends when the address of the area to be added after the update exceeds the final address in the main RAM 74. This simplifies the processing configuration for calculating the checksum.

(7) In the fifth embodiment described above, if an abnormality is identified in the data stored in the range of calculation of the specific checksum, initialization processing of the stack area 201 for specific control and the work area 203 for specific control may be performed without the need for operation by the amusement hall administrator, and if an abnormality is identified in the data stored in the range of calculation of the non-specific checksum, initialization processing of the stack area 204 for non-specific control and the work area 202 for non-specific control may be performed without the need for operation by the amusement hall administrator. As a result, if an abnormality is identified in the data stored in the range of calculation of the specific checksum but no abnormality is identified in the data stored in the range of calculation of the non-specific checksum, the abnormal stack area 201 for specific control and the work area 203 for specific control can be initialized while retaining the data in the non-specific control stack area 204 and the non-specific control work area 202 that are not abnormal, thereby resolving the abnormality. Furthermore, if an abnormality occurs in the data stored in the range of calculation of the non-specific checksum, while no abnormality occurs in the data stored in the range of calculation of the specific checksum, the abnormal state can be resolved by initializing the abnormal stack area 204 for non-specific control and the abnormal work area 202 for non-specific control, while retaining the data in the specific control stack area 201 and the specific control work area 203 where no abnormality occurs.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, when non-specific control processing is started while specific control processing is being executed, the data in some registers in the main MPU 72 may be saved to auxiliary registers, and when the non-specific control processing is terminated and the specific control processing is resumed, the data saved in the auxiliary registers may be restored to some of the registers in the main MPU 72. Specifically, when the main MPU 72 is executing power recovery processing (FIG. 40), which is specific control processing, and starts backup abnormality confirmation processing (FIG. 41), which is non-specific control processing, the main MPU 72 saves data in some of the registers in the main MPU 72 to auxiliary registers corresponding to those registers using a swap command. This allows the data in those registers to be saved without changing the data stored in the main RAM 74, making those registers available for use in the backup abnormality confirmation processing. When the backup abnormality confirmation process is started while the power recovery process is being performed, the data in some registers in the main MPU 72 can be saved without changing the data stored in each memory area of the main RAM 74. This allows the stack area 104 for non-specific control to be included in the range of the checksum calculation. This makes it possible to identify any abnormalities in the data stored in the stack area 104 for non-specific control. When the backup abnormality confirmation process is then terminated and the power recovery process is resumed, the main MPU 72 issues a swap command to restore the data saved in the auxiliary registers to the relevant registers in the main MPU 72. This allows the data in the registers of the main MPU 72 to be restored to the data for specific control when the power recovery process, which is a specific control process, is resumed.

(9) In each of the above embodiments, a bet notification sound is output as an effect to notify the number of gaming media bets. However, this is not limited to this. For example, the effect to notify the number of gaming media bets may be performed on the image display device 63. Specifically, while waiting for the game to start (while steps S301 to S305 of the normal processing (FIG. 16) are being repeatedly executed), the presentation-side MPU 92 controls the display of the image display device 63 so that the number of gaming media bets is displayed in the lower right corner of the image display device 63. The presentation-side MPU 92 updates the display of the number of gaming media bets displayed on the image display device 63 based on the first to third bet commands received from the main-side MPU 72. If the increase in the number of gaming media is "2" or more, the presentation-side MPU 92 controls the display of the image display device 63 so that the number of gaming media bets displayed on the image display device 63 increases by "1". In this way, even when the effect that notifies the number of gaming media bets is performed on the image display device 63, the effect-side MPU 92 can clearly notify the number of gaming media bets based on the first to third bet commands received from the main-side MPU 72.

(10) In each of the above embodiments, a different bet alert sound is output each time the number of bets on gaming media increases by "1," but this is not limited to this. For example, a common bet alert sound may be output from speaker 62 when the increased number of bets is "1" or "2." When the increased number of bets is the maximum number of bets, "3," a bet alert sound different from the common bet alert sound is output from speaker 62. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of bet alert sound data stored in presentation-side ROM 93, while clearly notifying the player that the number of bets on gaming media has reached the maximum number of bets and that the game can begin.

(11) In each of the above embodiments, a bet notification sound may be output from the speaker 62 when a medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 45 is detected, and an increase-number-corresponding bet notification sound corresponding to the increase in the number of gaming media bets may be output from the speaker 62 when the credit insertion button 47 is operated or a replay win is achieved, making the game available for replay. Specifically, the bet notification sounds output from the speaker 62 when the number of gaming media bets increases based on the detection of a medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 45 by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a include a first bet notification sound that notifies that the number of bets has increased from "0" to "1," a second bet notification sound that notifies that the number of bets has increased from "1" to "2," and a third bet notification sound that notifies that the number of bets has increased from "2" to "3." Furthermore, when the number of bets on gaming media is increased based on the operation of the credit insertion button 47, the bet notification sounds output from the speaker 62 include a first bet notification sound corresponding to an increment that notifies that the number of bets has increased from "0" to "1," a second bet notification sound corresponding to an increment that notifies that the number of bets has increased from "1" to "2," and a third bet notification sound corresponding to an increment that notifies that the number of bets has increased from "2" to "3." These first to third bet notification sounds corresponding to an increment are also output when the specified number of gaming media, "3," is set in the bet number counter 125 and the game becomes available for replay during the start waiting process (FIG. 49) that is first performed after the game in which a replay win has been achieved has ended. The production-side ROM 93 stores a first deposit bet alarm sound table, a second deposit bet alarm sound table, a third deposit bet alarm sound table, a first increment-compatible bet alarm sound table, a second increment-compatible bet alarm sound table, and a third increment-compatible bet alarm sound table for controlling the sound output of the speaker 62 so that a first deposit bet alarm sound, a second deposit bet alarm sound, a third deposit bet alarm sound, a first increment-compatible bet alarm sound, a second increment-compatible bet alarm sound, and a third increment-compatible bet alarm sound are output.

When the inserted medal detection sensor 45a detects a medal and the number of gaming media bets increases by one, the main MPU 72 sends an insertion response command to the presentation MPU 92. When the presentation MPU 92 receives the insertion response command, it references the first sound set flag 127 and the second sound set flag 128 in the presentation RAM 94 to determine the increased number of gaming media bets and controls the sound output of the speaker 62 so that an inserted bet notification sound corresponding to the increased number of bets is output. As already explained in the first embodiment above, if the first sound set flag 127 is not set to "1," this means that the number of gaming media bets before the increase was "0." If the first sound set flag 127 is set to "1" and the second sound set flag 128 is not set to "1," this means that the number of gaming media bets before the increase was "1." If the second sound set flag 128 is set to "1," this means that the number of gaming media bets before the increase was "2." When a bet insertion command is received, if the number of bets before the increase is "0", a first bet insertion alarm sound is output, if the number of bets before the increase is "1", a second bet insertion alarm sound is output, and if the number of bets before the increase is "2", a third bet insertion alarm sound is output.

When the credit insertion button 47 is operated to increase the number of gaming media bets, the main MPU 72 transmits an increase command corresponding to the increase in the number of bets to the presentation MPU 92. Specifically, if the increase in the number of bets is "1," the main MPU 72 transmits a first increase command, if the increase in the number of bets is "2," the main MPU 72 transmits a second increase command, if the increase in the number of bets is "3," the main MPU 72 transmits a third increase command to the presentation MPU 92. Furthermore, if the main MPU 72 sets the bet number counter 125 to "3," the specified number of gaming media, based on the establishment of a replay win, the main MPU 72 transmits a third increase command to the presentation MPU 92. The presentation MPU 92 determines the number of increase-number-related bet alarm sounds to be output based on the received increase command, and determines the type of increase-number-related bet alarm sound to be output by referencing the first sound set flag 127 and the second sound set flag 128 in the presentation RAM 94. When a first increment command is received, if the number of bets before the increment is "0", a first increment bet alarm sound is output; if the number of bets before the increment is "1", a second increment bet alarm sound is output; and if the number of bets before the increment is "2", a third increment bet alarm sound is output. When a second increment command is received, if the number of bets before the increment is "0", two bet alarm sounds are output consecutively in the order of the first increment bet alarm sound → the second increment bet alarm sound; and if the number of bets before the increment is "2", two bet alarm sounds are output consecutively in the order of the second increment bet alarm sound → the third increment bet alarm sound. When a third increment command is received, three bet alarm sounds are output consecutively in the order of the first increment bet alarm sound → the second increment bet alarm sound → the third increment bet alarm sound.

In this way, by configuring the device to output the first to third inserted bet alert sounds, it is possible to notify the player that the number of gaming media bets has increased based on the detection of inserted medals, and the number of gaming media bets after this increase. Furthermore, by configuring the device to output the first to third increased number corresponding bet alert sounds, it is possible to notify the player that the number of gaming media bets has increased based on the operation of the credit insertion button 47 or the establishment of a replay win, and the number of gaming media bets after this increase.

In the configuration (11) above, when the presentation-side MPU 92 receives a bet insertion command, a single bet insertion alarm sound may be output regardless of the increased number of gaming media bets. Whether the increased number of bets is "1," "2," or "3," the same bet alarm sound table is read from the presentation-side ROM 93 to the presentation-side RAM 94, and the sound output of the speaker 62 is controlled so that the same bet insertion alarm sound is output. This reduces the data capacity of the bet alarm sound table pre-stored in the presentation-side ROM 93.

(12) In each of the above embodiments, when the bet number counter 125 in the second calculation target area 111 is set based on the establishment of a replay win, a replay-compatible bet notification sound different from the first to third bet notification sounds may be output. This makes it possible to clearly notify the player that the bet number counter 125 has been set to "3," the specified number of gaming media, based on the establishment of a replay win, and that a replay is now possible.

(13) In each of the above embodiments, a saved increase notification sound may be output from the speaker 62 to notify the player that the number of saved virtual medals has increased by one. Specifically, the saved increase notification sound is output when the number of gaming media bets has reached the upper bet limit (specifically, "3") and a medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 45 is detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, increasing the number of saved virtual medals by one. When the value of the bet number counter 125 in the second calculation target area 111 has reached the upper bet limit and the inserted medal detection sensor 45a detects a medal, the main MPU 72 increments the value of the credit counter in the second calculation target area 111 by one and sends a saved increase command to the presentation MPU 92. When the presentation MPU 92 receives the saved increase command, it controls the sound output of the speaker 62 to output a saved increase notification sound. This notifies the player that the number of saved virtual medals has increased by one.

(14) In the first through fifth and seventh through thirteenth embodiments, the setting confirmation display may be configured to be initiated during the period between the establishment of a replay win and the start of a new game. Specifically, the setting confirmation display is initiated under the following conditions: no game is being played, the gaming state is not a bonus state, the front door 12 is open, and the setting key insertion hole 57 has been turned ON using the setting key; no gaming media of "1" or more have been bet; or the bet number counter 125 in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "3" based on the establishment of a replay win and there is free space in the virtual medal storage. As already explained in the first embodiment, when a replay win is established, the bet number counter 125 is set to "3," the specified number of gaming media, and the replay bet completion flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" during the start waiting process (FIG. 49) that is first performed after the replay win is established. The bet completion flag for replays is not cleared to "0" until the game starts. Therefore, by referencing the bet completion flag for replays, the main MPU 72 can determine whether the bet number counter 125 is set to "3" based on the establishment of a replay win. Furthermore, by confirming that the value of the credit counter in the second calculation target area 111 is less than the maximum number of reserved memories (specifically, "50"), the main MPU 72 can determine that there is available memory space for reserved virtual medals.

In this way, even if the bet number counter 125 is set to "3" based on the establishment of a replay win, if there is available space in the virtual medal storage, the setting confirmation display can be initiated. This makes it possible to initiate the setting confirmation display even during the period between the establishment of a replay win and the start of a new game. This increases the opportunities for the amusement hall manager to check the current setting values of the slot machine 10, making it easier to check the setting values.

(15) In the first embodiment described above, instead of the condition that the setting confirmation display is initiated when the number of gaming media bets is not "1" or greater, the condition that the setting confirmation display is initiated when the number of gaming media bets is less than the maximum bet number may be configured to be initiated when the number of gaming media bets is less than the maximum bet number. Specifically, in step S2803 of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 55(b)), it is determined whether the value of the bet number counter 125 in the second calculation target area 111 is equal to or greater than the maximum bet number (specifically, equal to or greater than the specified number of "3"). If the value of the bet number counter 125 is less than the maximum bet number, the process from step S2804 onwards is executed, and the setting confirmation display is initiated under the conditions that the bonus state is not active (step S2804: NO), the front door 12 is open (step S2805: YES), and the setting key insertion hole 57 has been turned ON (step S2806: YES). On the other hand, if the value of the bet number counter 125 is equal to or greater than the maximum bet limit, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 55(b)) is terminated without starting the setting confirmation display. By configuring the setting confirmation display to start when the number of gaming media bets is less than the maximum bet limit as part of the condition, it is possible to prevent the number of gaming media bets from exceeding the maximum bet limit when the setting confirmation display ends. This allows the selector 52 to enter an acceptance permission state without processing to check whether there are available gaming media bets (a state in which the number of gaming media bets is less than the maximum bet limit) when the setting confirmation display ends. This simplifies the processing configuration for terminating the setting confirmation display.

(16) In each of the above embodiments, instead of a configuration in which the setting confirmation display ends when either the setting key insertion hole 57 is turned OFF or the front door 12 is closed, a configuration in which the setting confirmation display ends only when the setting key insertion hole 57 is turned OFF may be used. In this configuration, if the front door 12 is closed without turning the setting key insertion hole 57 OFF while the setting confirmation display is being displayed on the credit display unit 65 (or the ratio display 85 in the tenth embodiment), the setting confirmation display remains displayed. If the front door 12 is closed without turning the setting key insertion hole 57 OFF while the setting confirmation display is being displayed, the main MPU 72 sends a setting key confirmation notification command to the performance MPU 92. When the performance MPU 92 receives the setting key confirmation notification command, it issues a setting key confirmation notification. In the setting key confirmation notification, the sound output of the speaker 62 is controlled so that a sound is output to notify the amusement hall manager that the setting key insertion hole 57 has been forgotten to be turned OFF, urging the manager to check the status of the setting key insertion hole 57. This prevents the amusement hall manager from closing the front door 12 without turning the setting key insertion hole 57 OFF, causing the setting confirmation display to be seen by players. Furthermore, in the first to ninth and eleventh to thirteenth embodiments in which the setting confirmation display is displayed on the credit display unit 65, the amusement hall manager can confirm whether the setting key insertion hole 57 has been turned OFF by checking the display on the credit display unit 65 after closing the front door 12.

(17) In each of the above embodiments, when a game is started based on the operation of the start lever 41, the stop order corresponding display on the combined display unit 66 and the stop order notification on the image display device 63 may be configured to start when the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is enabled. Also, when the game is resumed due to the resumption of the supply of operating power, the stop order corresponding display may be configured to start when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that were spinning at the time of the power outage start spinning. Specifically, in a game in which the stop order corresponding display and stop order notification are to be executed, the main MPU 72 executes processing to start the stop order corresponding display on the combined display unit 66 at the end of the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Furthermore, at the end of the acceleration period, the main MPU 72 transmits a bell winning command, a promotion replay command, or a fall replay avoidance command to the production MPU 92. This causes the stop order notification to start on the image display device 63.

If a power outage occurs while some or all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spinning, and the power restoration process (FIG. 40) is executed after power is restored, restoring the processing state prior to the power outage, the spin resumption process in step S3604 of the out-of-step response process (FIG. 64) executes processing to start the stop order display. As a result, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R resume spinning after power is restored, the stop order display in the dual-purpose display unit 66 can be resumed earlier than the timing at which the operation of the stop buttons 42-44 is enabled. Furthermore, the main MPU 72 transmits a bell winning command, a promotion replay command, or a fall replay avoidance command to the performance MPU 92 at the end of the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that were spinning when the power outage occurred. This initiates the stop order notification on the image display device 63.

In this way, even if the stop order corresponding display starts earlier than the timing at which the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is validated, by configuring the stop order notification to resume at the timing at which the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is validated, which is more likely to catch the player's eye than the stop order corresponding display, it is possible to prevent a situation from occurring where the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is validated after the player operates the stop buttons 42 to 44 after confirming the stop order notification.

In the configuration of (17) above, if a power outage occurs while some or all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spinning, and the power recovery process (FIG. 40) is executed after power is restored, restoring the processing state before the power was cut off, the power recovery process may be configured to execute processing to start the stop order corresponding display. This allows the stop order corresponding display on the dual-purpose display unit 66 to be resumed quickly after power is restored.

(18) In each of the above embodiments, instead of a stop order notification that notifies the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, a guideline pattern notification may be provided that notifies a guideline pattern that serves as a guide for the timing to perform the stop operation on reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Specifically, the first special bell win, the second special bell win, and the third special bell win are available as small winning combinations that award gaming media. The first special bell win is achieved when the combination of the stopped patterns on the left reel 32L, the center reel 32M, and the right reel 32R on the main line ML is a combination of a "red 7" symbol, a "bell" symbol, and a "bell" symbol. Furthermore, if the combination of the stopped symbols is a "white 7" symbol, a "bell" symbol, and a "bell" symbol, a second special bell win is awarded, and if the combination of the stopped symbols is a "BAR" symbol, a "bell" symbol, and a "bell" symbol, a third special bell win is awarded. When any of the first to third special bell wins is achieved, the number of game media to be awarded is "10." As already explained in the first embodiment, reel control that allows each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to slide up to four symbols after operation of stop buttons 42-44 is performed. Therefore, for the "red 7" symbol, the "white 7" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol, depending on the timing of operation of left stop button 42, the symbol may stop on the main line ML or the main line ML. On the other hand, the "bell" symbol will reliably stop on the main line ML regardless of the timing of operation of center stop button 43 and right stop button 44. For this reason, in order to achieve the first to third special bell wins, it is necessary to time the operation of the left stop button 42. If one of the first to third special bell wins is won in the role lottery process ( FIG. 17 ) while in the advantageous zone SC2 and in the ready state ST5 or the ART state ST6, a guide symbol notification is displayed on the image display device 63, and a corresponding stop order display is performed on the dual-purpose display unit 66. In the guide symbol notification, if the first special bell wins, the words "Aim for the red 7" are displayed on the left reel 32L; if the second special bell wins, the words "Aim for the white 7" are displayed on the left reel 32L; and if the third special bell wins, the words "Aim for the BAR" are displayed on the left reel 32L. Based on the target symbol notification, the player can increase the chances of achieving the first to third special bell wins by timing the operation of the left stop button 42 to coincide with the moment when the "red 7" symbol, "white 7" symbol, or "BAR" symbol stops on the main line ML.

(19) In each of the above embodiments, the timing at which the stop order corresponding display starts may be different when a game that is the target of the stop order corresponding display is executed when the gaming state is in the ready state ST5 and when a game that is the target of the stop order corresponding display is executed when the gaming state is in the ART state ST6. Specifically, when a game that is the target of the stop order corresponding display is executed when the gaming state is in the ready state ST5, the stop order corresponding display is executed on the dual-purpose display unit 66 at the timing when the acceleration period of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in that game ends. On the other hand, when a game that is the target of the stop order corresponding display is executed when the gaming state is in the ART state ST6, the stop order corresponding display is executed on the dual-purpose display unit 66 at the timing when the acceleration period of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in that game starts. This enhances the sense of exclusivity that comes from the gaming state being in the ART state ST6, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

(20) In each of the above embodiments, the timing at which the stop order corresponding display starts may be different when a game that is the subject of the stop order corresponding display is executed in a situation where the limited total net increase in the number of gaming media since the start of the advantageous zone SC2 is less than a predetermined suggestive reference number (specifically, "400"), and when a game that is the subject of the stop order corresponding display is executed in a situation where the limited total net increase in the number of gaming media since the start of the advantageous zone SC2 is equal to or greater than the predetermined suggestive reference number (specifically, "400"). Specifically, when a game that is the subject of the stop order corresponding display is executed in a situation where the limited total net increase in the number of gaming media since the start of the advantageous zone SC2 is less than the predetermined suggestive reference number, the stop order corresponding display is executed on the dual-purpose display unit 66 at the end of the acceleration period of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in that game. On the other hand, if a game that is subject to the stop order display is executed in a situation where the limited total net increase in gaming media since the start of the advantageous zone SC2 is equal to or exceeds a predetermined suggestive reference number, the stop order display is executed on the dual-purpose display unit 66 at the timing when the acceleration period of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R begins in that game. This makes it possible to determine whether the limited total net increase in gaming media since the start of the advantageous zone SC2 is equal to or exceeds the predetermined suggestive reference number, based on the timing when the stop order display is started on the dual-purpose display unit 66. Furthermore, if the limited total net increase in gaming media since the start of the advantageous zone SC2 is equal to or exceeds the predetermined suggestive reference number, the player is encouraged to expect that at least one of the suggestive actions of stopping the game or automatically settling the balance may be executed at the end of the advantageous zone SC2, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

(21) In each of the above embodiments, the timing at which the stop order corresponding display starts may be different when a game that is subject to the stop order corresponding display is executed in a situation where the number of continued games in the advantageous zone SC2 is less than a predetermined notification reference number (e.g., 100) and when a game that is subject to the stop order corresponding display is executed in a situation where the number of continued games in the advantageous zone SC2 is equal to or greater than the predetermined notification reference number (e.g., 100). Specifically, when a game that is subject to the stop order corresponding display is executed in a situation where the number of continued games in the advantageous zone SC2 is less than the predetermined notification reference number, the stop order corresponding display is executed on the dual-purpose display unit 66 at the end of the acceleration period for reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in that game. On the other hand, when a game that is subject to the stop order corresponding display is executed in a situation where the number of continued games in the advantageous zone SC2 is equal to or greater than the predetermined notification reference number, the stop order corresponding display is executed on the dual-purpose display unit 66 at the start of the acceleration period for reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in that game. This makes it possible to determine whether the number of continuing games in the advantageous zone SC2 is equal to or exceeds a predetermined notification standard number (for example, "100") based on the timing at which the stop order display begins on the dual-purpose display unit 66.

(22) In each of the above embodiments, the timing at which the stop order corresponding display starts may be different when a game that is the subject of the stop order corresponding display is executed in a situation where none of the ending flags in the second calculation target area 111 are set to "1" and when a game that is the subject of the stop order corresponding display is executed in a situation where one or more of the ending flags in the second calculation target area 111 are set to "1." Specifically, when a game that is the subject of the stop order corresponding display is executed in a situation where none of the ending flags in the second calculation target area 111 are set to "1," the stop order corresponding display is executed on the dual-purpose display unit 66 at the end of the acceleration period for reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in that game. On the other hand, when a game that is the subject of the stop order corresponding display is executed in a situation where one or more of the ending flags in the second calculation target area 111 are set to "1," the stop order corresponding display is executed on the dual-purpose display unit 66 at the start of the acceleration period for reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in that game. This makes it possible to know whether or not one or more ending flags in the second calculation target area 111 have been set to "1" based on the timing at which the stop order corresponding display begins on the dual-purpose display unit 66. If one or more ending flags in the second calculation target area 111 have been set to "1", the player is made to expect that at least one of the suggested actions of stopping the game and automatic settlement may be executed at the end of the advantageous zone SC2, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

(23) In each of the above embodiments, if a power outage occurs while some of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spinning, and the power restoration process (FIG. 40) is executed after power is restored to restore the processing state before the power was cut off, the image display device 63 may be configured to provide a stop order notification in a manner different from the stop order notification that is provided when a game is started based on the operation of the start lever 41. Specifically, as already explained in the first embodiment above, if a power outage occurs while some of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spinning, and the power restoration process (FIG. 40) is executed after power is restored to restore the processing state before the power was cut off, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that were spinning when the power outage occurred will resume rotation, while the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that were already stopped when the power outage occurred will remain stopped. When the stop order notification is made for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that were spinning when the power outage occurred, the word "Stopped" is displayed on the image display device 63 for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that were already stopped when the power outage occurred, indicating that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have already stopped. This makes it possible to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that should be stopped and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are already stopped.

(24) In each of the above embodiments, the setting value update process (Figure 71) may not end if the setting key insertion hole 57 is switched to the OFF state without a confirmation operation of operating the start lever 41. Specifically, in the setting value update process, if a confirmation operation (operation of the start lever 41) is not performed, even if the setting key insertion hole 57 is turned OFF, the process for ending the state in which the setting value can be updated is not executed, and the state in which the setting value can be updated is maintained. If the setting key insertion hole 57 is turned OFF without a confirmation operation being performed, the main side MPU 72 sends an unconfirmed notification command to the performance side MPU 92. When the performance side MPU 92 receives the unconfirmed notification command, it issues an unconfirmed notification. In the unconfirmed notification, sound output control of the speaker 62 is performed so that a sound is output notifying that a confirmation operation has not been performed and urging the user to perform the confirmation operation. When an unconfirmed notification is issued, the amusement hall manager can return the setting key insertion hole 57 to the ON state and perform a confirmation operation to update the setting value of the slot machine 10, the presence or absence of a suggested action, and the type of trigger for starting the suggested action to the changed information. The setting value update process can then be terminated by turning the setting key insertion hole 57 OFF.

In this way, if the setting key insertion hole 57 is switched to the OFF state without a confirmation operation being performed, the setting value update process will not end. This prevents the setting value update process from ending without updating this information to the changed information because the confirmation operation has been forgotten, even though some or all of the information regarding the setting value of the slot machine 10, the presence or absence of a suggested action, and the type of trigger for starting a suggested action has been changed.

(25) In the above embodiments, when the bonus state ends with the trigger type flag 155 of the second calculation target area 111 set to "1", a lottery for a suggested action is held regardless of the type of bonus state that ended. However, this is not limited to this. For example, when the trigger type flag 155 is set to "1" and the third BB state ST3, fourth BB state ST3, or first RB state ST4 ends, a lottery for a suggested action is held, while when the first BB state ST3, second BB state ST3, or second RB state ST4 ends, a lottery for a suggested action may not be held.

(26) In the above embodiments, the setting regarding whether or not a suggested action will be performed is configured based on the operation of the left stop button 42 while the setting value update process (Figure 71) is being executed. However, this is not limited to this. For example, when the setting value update process (Figure 71) is executed, the suggested action flag 154 may be unconditionally set to "1" and a lottery for a suggested action may be held. This eliminates the need for the amusement hall manager to configure the setting regarding whether or not a suggested action will be performed, and allows the lottery for a suggested action to be held only once after the setting value update process is executed.

(27) In each of the above embodiments, if the setting value of the slot machine 10 is "Setting 2" or lower, the suggested action may never be executed even if an opportunity to start the suggested action occurs while the suggested action flag 154 is set to "1." This allows the player to be convinced that the current setting value of the slot machine 10 is "Setting 3" or higher when the suggested action is executed.

(28) In the above embodiments, there are cases where play is stopped based on the lottery results of the suggested action and cases where automatic settlement is performed, but this is not limited to this. For example, there may be a configuration in which the amusement hall manager can select the type of suggested action by operating the middle stop button 43 while the setting value update process (Figure 71) is being executed. If the type of suggested action selected during execution of the setting value update process is play stop, then the only suggested action that can be executed after the setting value update process is completed will be play stop; and if the type of suggested action selected during execution of the setting value update process is automatic settlement, then the only suggested action that can be executed after the setting value update process is completed will be automatic settlement. This allows the amusement hall manager to know in advance the types of suggested actions that can be executed in this slot machine 10.

(29) In each of the above embodiments, if the value of the trigger type flag 155 is "0" and the advantageous zone SC2 ends while the limited total net increase in gaming media in the advantageous zone SC2 is less than a predetermined suggestion reference number (specifically, "400"), the suggested action flag 154 may be cleared to "0" without a lottery for the suggested action being drawn. In this configuration, if "the end of the advantageous zone SC2 when the limited total net increase in gaming media is equal to or greater than the predetermined suggestion reference number" is selected as the type of trigger for starting the suggested action and the advantageous zone SC2 ends while the limited total net increase in gaming media in the advantageous zone SC2 is less than the predetermined suggestion reference number (specifically, "400"), no lottery for the suggested action will be drawn even if the advantageous zone SC2 subsequently ends while the limited total net increase in gaming media in the advantageous zone SC2 is equal to or greater than the predetermined suggestion reference number (specifically, "400"). This allows players to focus on whether or not a suggested action will be performed at the end of the first advantageous period SC2 after the supply of operating power to the slot machine 10 has begun, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

(30) In each of the above embodiments, in addition to or instead of a configuration in which the presence or absence of a suggested action and the type of trigger for starting the suggested action can be set while the setting value update process is being executed, a configuration in which such settings can be set while the setting confirmation process is being executed may also be used. Specifically, when the setting confirmation process is started, a suggested action setting display is started on the dual-purpose display unit 66, similar to when the setting value update process (Figure 71) is started in the first embodiment above. In the suggested action setting display, the left segment indicator 66a of the dual-purpose display unit 66 flashes the number "0" or "1" corresponding to the value of the suggested action flag 154, and the right segment indicator 66b flashes the alphabet "A" or "C" corresponding to the value of the trigger type flag 155. By operating the left stop button 42, the arcade manager can update the number (either "0" or "1") corresponding to the suggested action flag 154 displayed on the left segment display 66a of the combined display unit 66, and by operating the right stop button 44, he can update the alphabetical identification character (the letter "A" or "C") corresponding to the trigger type flag 155 displayed on the right segment display 66b of the combined display unit 66. Then, by performing a confirmation operation (operating the start lever 41), the manager can confirm the updated settings regarding whether or not a suggested action will be performed and the type of trigger that will trigger the suggested action. If the confirmation operation sets the suggested action flag 154 to "1," processing will be executed to execute the suggested action if a trigger for starting the currently set type of suggested action occurs.

In this way, by configuring the system so that the presence or absence of a suggested action and the type of trigger for starting the suggested action can be set while the setting confirmation process is being executed, it is possible to set the process for executing the suggested action to be executed the first time a trigger for starting the suggested action occurs after the setting confirmation process has been executed. Furthermore, convenience can be enhanced by enabling the amusement hall manager to set the presence or absence of a suggested action and the type of trigger for starting the suggested action when checking the current setting values of the slot machine 10.

(31) In each of the above embodiments, instead of or in addition to the configuration in which the trigger for the suggestive action is "the end of the advantageous period SC2 when the limited total net increase in the number of gaming media is equal to or greater than a predetermined suggestive reference number," the trigger for the suggestive action may be "the end of the advantageous period SC2 when the number of continued games in the advantageous period SC2 is equal to or greater than the suggestive reference number." In this configuration, the suggestive reference number of games is set to 100, but the suggestive reference number of games may be set to a number less than 100, or may be set to a number greater than 100. As already explained in the first embodiment above, the second calculation target area 111 in the work area 103 for specific control is provided with an advantageous continuation counter that allows the main MPU 72 to determine the number of games played from the start of the advantageous period SC2 when the advantageous period SC2 is continued without an intervening normal period SC1. When the advantageous period SC2 ends while "the end of the advantageous period SC2 when the number of continuing games in the advantageous period SC2 is equal to or greater than the suggested reference number of games" is selected as the trigger for starting the suggested action, the main MPU 72 determines whether the number of continuing games from the start of the ended advantageous period SC2 is equal to or greater than the suggested reference number of games (specifically, "100") based on the value of the advantageous continuation counter. If the number of continuing games from the start of the advantageous period SC2 is equal to or greater than the suggested reference number of games, it determines that a trigger for starting the suggested action has occurred, clears the suggested action flag 154 in the second calculation target area 111 to "0", and then executes the second suggested action process (FIG. 77). On the other hand, if the number of continuing games in the advantageous period SC2 is less than the suggested reference number of games, it does not determine that a trigger for starting the suggested action has occurred. In this way, by configuring the trigger for starting the suggested action to be "the end of advantageous section SC2 when the number of continuing games in advantageous section SC2 is equal to or greater than the suggested reference number of games," processing to execute the suggested action is executed at the end of advantageous section SC2 when the number of continuing games is equal to or greater than the suggested reference number of games, while processing to execute the suggested action can be prevented from being executed at the end of advantageous section SC2 when the number of continuing games is less than the suggested reference number of games.

(32) In each of the above embodiments, instead of a configuration in which the trigger for the suggestive action is set by a limited total net increase in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone SC2, a configuration in which the trigger for the suggestive action is set by a predetermined difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone SC2 may be adopted. As already explained in the first embodiment above, the predetermined difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone SC2 is the value obtained by subtracting the total number of gaming media consumed to play games while the advantageous zone SC2 is continuing ("0" when no gaming media are being played) from the total number of gaming media awarded by games played while the advantageous zone SC2 is continuing ("0" when no gaming media are being played). In this configuration, the second calculation target area 111 is provided with an advantageous award number counter that enables the main MPU 72 to grasp the number of gaming media awarded in the advantageous zone SC2, and an advantageous consumption number counter that enables the main MPU 72 to grasp the total number of gaming media consumed to play games while the advantageous zone SC2 is continuing. The values of the advantage award number counter and advantage consumption number counter are cleared to "0" at the end of the advantageous period SC2. The predetermined difference in the number of coins in the advantageous period SC2 is calculated by "(value of the advantage award number counter) - (value of the advantage consumption number counter)." By configuring the trigger for starting the suggested action to be set by the predetermined difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous period SC2, it is possible to prevent the processing for executing the suggested action from being executed if the advantageous period SC2 ends with an extremely low number of games, just as in the case where the trigger for starting the suggested action is set by the limited total net increase in the number of gaming media in the advantageous period SC2.

(33) In the thirteenth embodiment, the timing at which the first to third state in-state signals are raised is not limited to the end of the first display period in the start display of the bonus state, advantageous section SC2, or ART state ST6, nor is it limited to the timing at which half of the display period of these start displays has ended. For example, each start display may be configured to perform a series of displays that are not divided into a first display period and a second display period, and the state in-state signal may be raised when approximately 5/8 of the display period of the start display has ended. Specifically, in the bonus start display, advantageous start display, and ART start display, a series of displays is performed over a predetermined period of time (specifically, 4 seconds). When the standby setting process (FIG. 123) is executed with one or more of the first to third launch preparation flags in the second calculation target area 111 set to "1," the main MPU 72 sets the numerical information "2684" in the standby counter 231 in the second calculation target area 111, which corresponds to the 4-second display period of the start display. As already explained in the thirteenth embodiment, the value of the standby counter 231 is updated by subtracting one in the standby setting process (FIG. 123) each time an interrupt occurs due to the timer interrupt process (FIG. 15) while the standby period is being set. When the value of the standby counter 231 becomes "1006" or less, the master MPU 72 determines that approximately 5/8 of the duration of the start effect has ended, and raises the in-state signal corresponding to the launch preparation flag set to "1" in the second calculation target area 111 from a low state to a high state. The in-state signal is raised 2.5 seconds after the start effect begins. Therefore, in a game in which one or more launch preparation flags are set to "1," a 2.5-second period can be ensured between the time all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped and the time the in-state signal is raised. This allows the master MPU 72 to raise the in-state signal after the data counter DC has completed processing to determine the number of gaming media awarded. Additionally, a period of 1.5 seconds can be ensured between the time the in-state signal is raised and the time the next game can be started. This allows the main MPU 72 to begin output control of the input signal after the data counter DC detects the rise of the in-state signal. This allows the data counter DC to accurately detect the net increase in the number of gaming media in the bonus state, the net increase in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone SC2, and the net increase in the number of gaming media in the ART state ST6.

(34) In the thirteenth embodiment, the timing at which the first to third state signals are turned off is not limited to the end of the first display period in the end effect of the bonus state, advantageous section SC2, or ART state ST6, nor is it limited to the timing at which half of the display period in these end effects has ended. For example, each end effect may be configured to involve a series of effects that are not divided into a first and a second display period, and the state signal may be turned off when approximately 5/8 of the display period in the end effect has ended. Specifically, in the bonus end effect, advantageous end effect, and ART end effect, a series of effects is performed over a predetermined period (specifically, 4 seconds). When the standby setting process (FIG. 123) is executed with one or more of the first to third turn-off preparation flags in the second calculation target area 111 set to "1," the main MPU 72 sets the numerical information "2684" in the standby counter 231 in the second calculation target area 111, which corresponds to the 4-second display period of the end effect. As already explained in the thirteenth embodiment, the value of the standby counter 231 is updated by subtracting one in the standby setting process (FIG. 123) each time an interrupt occurs due to the timer interrupt process (FIG. 15) while the standby period is being set. When the value of the standby counter 231 becomes "1006" or less, the master MPU 72 determines that approximately 5/8 of the duration of the end effect has ended, and causes the in-state signal corresponding to the drop preparation flag set to "1" in the second calculation target area 111 to drop from HI to LOW. The in-state signal is dropped 2.5 seconds after the end effect begins. Therefore, in a game in which one or more drop preparation flags are set to "1," a 2.5-second period can be ensured between the time all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped and the time the in-state signal is dropped. This allows the master MPU 72 to drop the in-state signal after the data counter DC has completed processing to determine the number of awarded gaming media. Additionally, a period of 1.5 seconds can be ensured between the falling edge of the in-state signal and the time when the next game can be started. This allows the main MPU 72 to begin output control of the input signal after the data counter DC detects the falling edge of the in-state signal. This allows the data counter DC to accurately detect the net increase in gaming media in the bonus state, the net increase in gaming media in the advantageous zone SC2, and the net increase in gaming media in the ART state ST6.

(35) In the above thirteenth embodiment, the presentation side MPU 92 may be configured to execute processing to switch the presentation content of the bonus start presentation, bonus end presentation, advantageous start presentation, advantageous end presentation, ART start presentation, or ART end presentation based on a command sent from the main side MPU 72 to the presentation side MPU 92. Specifically, when a bonus start presentation, bonus end presentation, advantageous start presentation, advantageous end presentation, ART start presentation, or ART end presentation is being executed, the main side MPU 72 determines that the first presentation period for the start presentation or the end presentation has ended when the value of the standby counter 231 in the second calculation target area 111 becomes "1342" or less. Thereafter, if one or more launch preparation flags are set to "1" in the second calculation target area 111, the state-in-state signal corresponding to the launch preparation flag is launched from a LOW state to a HIGH state, and if one or more fall preparation flags are set to "1" in the second calculation target area 111, the state-in-state signal corresponding to the fall preparation flag is launched from a HIGH state to a LOW state. Then, a performance switching command is transmitted to the performance-side MPU 92. When the performance-side MPU 92 receives the performance switching command, it executes processing to switch the performance content of the currently executing start performance or end performance from the performance content of the first performance period to the performance content of the second performance period. In this way, by configuring the presentation side MPU 92 to execute processing to switch the presentation content (bonus start presentation, bonus end presentation, advantageous start presentation, advantageous end presentation, ART start presentation, or ART end presentation) based on a presentation switching command sent from the main side MPU 72 to the presentation side MPU 92, it is possible to omit processing in the presentation side MPU 92 to determine the end timing of the first presentation period. This reduces the processing load on the presentation side MPU 92.

(36) In each of the above embodiments, a first state start signal, a second state start signal, and a third state start signal may be externally output, which enable the data counter DC to grasp the start of the bonus state, the advantageous zone SC2, and the ART state ST6, and a first state end signal, a second state end signal, and a third state end signal may be externally output, which enable the data counter DC to grasp the end of the bonus state, the advantageous zone SC2, and the ART state ST6. As already explained with reference to FIG. 80 in the first embodiment, a first state signal line 159, a second state signal line 161, and a third state signal line 162 are provided as signal lines electrically connecting the main MPU 72 and the external terminal board 95. The external output of the first state start signal is performed in place of the rising edge of the first state signal in each of the above embodiments, and the external output of the first state end signal is performed in place of the falling edge of the first state signal in each of the above embodiments. When the first state start signal is externally output, a one-pulse signal is output to the first state signal line 159, and when the first state end signal is externally output, a two-pulse signal is output to the first state signal line 159. When the one-pulse signal is output, the first state signal transmitted from the first state signal line 159 rises from a low state to a high state, maintains the high state for 7.45 milliseconds, and then falls to the low state. When the two-pulse signal is output, the first state signal rises from a low state to a high state, maintains the high state for 7.45 milliseconds, and then falls to the low state. Then, 7.45 milliseconds after the fall, the first state signal rises from a low state to a high state, maintains the high state for 7.45 milliseconds, and then falls to the low state. The data counter DC determines that the bonus state has started if it detects one rising edge of the first state signal within a predetermined time (e.g., within 25 milliseconds), and determines that the bonus state has ended if it detects two rising edges of the first state signal within a predetermined time (e.g., within 25 milliseconds).

The external output of the second state start signal is performed in place of the rising edge of the second state signal in each of the above embodiments, and the external output of the second state end signal is performed in place of the falling edge of the second state signal in each of the above embodiments. The external output of the second state start signal involves outputting one signal pulse to the second state signal line 161, and the external output of the second state end signal involves outputting two signal pulses to the second state signal line 161. The data counter DC determines that the favorable section SC2 has started when it detects one rising edge of the second state signal within a predetermined time (e.g., within 25 milliseconds), and determines that the favorable section SC2 has ended when it detects two rising edges of the second state signal within a predetermined time (e.g., within 25 milliseconds). The external output of the third state start signal is performed in place of the rising edge of the third state signal in each of the above embodiments, and the external output of the third state end signal is performed in place of the falling edge of the third state signal in each of the above embodiments. When the third state start signal is externally output, one pulse signal is output to the third state signal line 162, and when the third state end signal is externally output, two pulse signal is output to the third state signal line 162. The data counter DC determines that the ART state ST6 has started if it detects one rising edge of the third state signal within a predetermined time (for example, within 25 milliseconds), and determines that the ART state ST6 has ended if it detects two rising edges of the third state signal within the predetermined time (for example, within 25 milliseconds).

(37) In the first to twelfth embodiments, the in-state signal may be lowered at the start of a game, similar to the raising of the in-state signal. Specifically, when at least one of the first to third lowering preparation flags in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1," the in-state signal corresponding to the lowering preparation flag is lowered when the game for which the lowering preparation flag was set to "1" ends and the next game begins. When payout signal output control is performed in a game for which the lowering preparation flag is set to "1," the end of the game is postponed until a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) has elapsed since the end of payout signal output control. By ensuring a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) between the end of payout signal output control and the lowering of the in-state signal, it is possible to prevent the main MPU 72 from lowering the in-state signal before the data counter DC has finished determining the number of gaming media awarded. This makes it possible to accurately determine the number of gaming media awarded in the bonus state, the number of gaming media awarded in the advantageous zone SC2, and the number of gaming media awarded in the ART state ST6 using the data counter DC.

If one or more in-state signals are raised or lowered at the start of a game, output control of the input signal will begin a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) after the in-state signal is raised or lowered. By ensuring a predetermined time (specifically, 500 milliseconds) between the in-state signal being raised or lowered and output control of the input signal being started, it is possible to prevent the main MPU 72 from starting output control of the input signal before the data counter DC has finished processing to grasp the in-state signal being raised or lowered. This allows the data counter DC to accurately grasp the number of gaming media inserted in the bonus state, the number of gaming media inserted in the advantageous zone SC2, and the number of gaming media inserted in the ART state ST6.

(38) In each of the above embodiments, in addition to a state where the number of gaming media bets required to start a game is "3," a configuration may exist where the number of gaming media bets required to start a game is "2" or "1," or a configuration may exist where the number of gaming media bets required to start a game is "4" or more. When a game is started, the main MPU 72 raises the input signal from a LOW state to a HIGH state a number of times corresponding to the number of gaming media bets in that game. Therefore, even in a configuration where multiple numbers of gaming media are required to start a game depending on the state, the number of gaming media bets can be determined using the data counter DC.

(39) When the ART state ST6 ends, the advantageous zone SC2 may always end without the advantageous maintenance lottery process (step S1007 of the ART state process (FIG. 32)) being executed. By aligning the timing at which the ART state ST6 ends with the timing at which the advantageous zone SC2 ends, the timing at which the advantageous zone SC2 ends can be made easy to understand. This draws attention to whether or not a suggestive action will be performed at the end of the advantageous zone SC2, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

(40) In each of the above embodiments, when an advantage maintenance win is achieved, the gaming zone is maintained in the advantageous zone SC2, an upper limit on the number of games for maintaining the advantage (e.g., 100 games) is set, and when the upper limit on the number of games for maintaining the advantage is exhausted in the normal gaming state ST1, the condition for transitioning to the ART state ST6 is satisfied. Specifically, as already explained with reference to FIG. 32 in the first embodiment, a game is executed in the ART state ST6, and the value of the ART game number counter in the second calculation target area 111 is decremented by 1 (step S1002). If the value of the ART game number counter after the decrement becomes "0" (step S1003: YES), the advantage maintenance lottery process (step S1007) is executed, provided that neither the first ending flag nor the second ending flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1" (step S1006: NO). In this configuration, if an advantage maintenance win is obtained in the advantage maintenance lottery process (step S1007), the game state transitions to the normal game state ST1, while the game zone remains in the advantageous zone SC2. An advantage maintenance continuation game number counter provided in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "100," which is the upper limit number of games for maintaining an advantage. The value of the advantage maintenance continuation game number counter is decremented by one each time a game is played in the normal game state ST1. When the value of the advantage maintenance continuation game number counter after decrementing by one becomes "0," i.e., when the upper limit number of games for maintaining an advantage is consumed in the normal game state ST1 without transitioning to the ART state ST6, the transition condition to the ART state ST6 is met, and the game transitions to the preparation state ST5, which is the stage preceding the ART state ST6. In this way, by configuring the condition for transitioning to ART state ST6 to be met when the upper limit number of games for maintaining an advantage has been played in normal gaming state ST1 after an advantage maintenance win has been achieved, attention to the advantage maintenance lottery can be increased, and the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

(41) In each of the above embodiments, instead of performing stop control and acceleration control for re-acceleration on all rotating reels when a step-out occurs on one of the left reel 32L, center reel 32M, and right reel 32R, a configuration may be adopted in which stop control and acceleration control for re-acceleration are performed only on the reel where the step-out occurred. In this configuration, the reels that were rotating when the step-out occurred and that did not experience step-out continue to rotate, but stop operations for all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are disabled until the stop control and acceleration control for re-acceleration on the reel where the step-out occurred ends and constant-speed rotation control begins. This makes it easier for the player to understand that when stop control is performed on the reel where the step-out occurred, the stop control was not triggered by a stop operation.

(42) In each of the above embodiments, if the ending condition for the advantageous section SC2 is met during the bonus state, the bonus state may be configured to continue until the ending condition for the bonus state is met, regardless of the total number of gaming media awarded during the bonus state. As already explained in the first embodiment above, the ending condition for the BB state ST3 is that the total number of gaming media awarded since the start of the BB state ST3 is equal to or greater than the BB ending reference number (specifically, "350"). The ending condition for the RB state ST4 is that the total number of gaming media awarded since the start of the RB state ST4 is equal to or greater than the RB ending reference number (specifically, "150"). If the ending condition for the advantageous section SC2 is met during the bonus state, the advantageous section SC2 ends. Then, the first suggested operation process ( FIG. 75 ) is executed based on the end of the advantageous section SC2. This makes it possible to create a state in which a suggested operation can be executed based on the end of the advantageous section SC2, even if the advantageous section SC2 ends during the bonus state.

By configuring BB state ST3 to continue even after the end of advantageous section SC2 when advantageous section SC2 ends in the middle of BB state ST3, it is possible to prevent BB state ST3 from ending before the total number of gaming media granted since BB state ST3 began reaches the BB end reference number (specifically, "350"). Furthermore, by configuring RB state ST4 to continue even after the end of advantageous section SC2 when advantageous section SC2 ends in the middle of RB state ST4, it is possible to prevent RB state ST4 from ending before the total number of gaming media granted since RB state ST4 began reaches the RB end reference number (specifically, "150").

In this way, if the ending conditions for the advantageous section SC2 are met during the bonus state, only the advantageous section SC2 is ended and the bonus state continues. This allows a state in which a suggested action can be executed at the end of the advantageous section SC2, and prevents the bonus state from ending before the ending conditions for the bonus state are met, preventing a decrease in the number of gaming media awarded to the player.

(43) In each of the above embodiments, when the number of games played after the slot machine 10 is manufactured is less than the initial reference number of games (e.g., "3000"), and when the number of games played after the work area 102 for non-specific control (work area 182 for non-specific control in the fourth embodiment, and work area 202 for non-specific control in the fifth embodiment) is initialized is less than the initial reference number of games, the display of the advantageous zone stay ratio on the ratio display device 85 may be configured to be performed in the initial display mode. As already explained in the first embodiment above, when displaying the advantageous zone stay ratio, the identifier "7U." indicating that the value displayed on the ratio display unit 87 is the advantageous zone stay ratio is displayed on the identifier display unit 86. In the initial display, the identifier "7U." is displayed in the identifier display unit 86 in a flashing manner. In the flashing display, a lighting period in which the identifier "7U." is displayed on the identifier display unit 86 for 0.5 seconds and a lighting period in which the identifier display unit 86 is in an off state are repeated.

During the operation check of the slot machine 10 performed before shipping, checking whether the ratio display 85 displays an initial value can be used to determine whether the number of games played after the slot machine 10 was manufactured is less than the initial reference number of games (e.g., "3000"). This makes it possible to determine whether the number of games played to calculate the advantageous zone stay ratio displayed on the ratio display 85 during the operation check is sufficient. Furthermore, after the slot machine 10 is installed in an amusement hall, checking whether the ratio display 85 displays an initial value can be used to determine whether the number of games played after the initialization of the non-specific control work area 102 is less than the initial reference number of games (e.g., "3000"). This allows the amusement hall manager to determine whether the number of games played to calculate the advantageous zone stay ratio displayed on the ratio display 85 is sufficient, and can also serve as a reference when determining whether an abnormality has occurred that causes the advantageous zone stay ratio to deviate from the normal range assumed during the design phase.

(44) In each of the above embodiments, the ratio display 85 may be configured to display the occurrence ratio of BB state ST3, the occurrence ratio of RB state ST4, the occurrence ratio of ART state ST6, and the sum of these three occurrence ratios. Specifically, the non-specific control work area 102 in the main RAM 74 is provided with a BB transition count counter, an RB transition count counter, and an ART transition count counter. The BB transition count counter is a counter that allows the main MPU 72 to grasp the number of times a transition to BB state ST3 has occurred. The RB transition count counter is a counter that allows the main MPU 72 to grasp the number of times a transition to RB state ST4 has occurred. The ART transition count counter is a counter that allows the main MPU 72 to grasp the number of times a transition to ART state ST6 has occurred. These transition count counters are each 1 byte and can measure the number of times BB state ST3, RB state ST4, and ART state ST6 have occurred, with an upper limit of 255. Furthermore, as already explained in the first embodiment above, the non-specific control work area 102 is provided with a total game number counter for measuring the number of games played regardless of the game state or game zone, and an advantageous game number counter that allows the main MPU 72 to grasp the cumulative number of games played in the advantageous zone SC2.

In the calculation to calculate the occurrence rate of BB state ST3, the main MPU 72 calculates the ratio of the value of the BB transition count counter to the value of the total number of games played. This calculation is performed so that the calculation result = "value of the BB transition count counter" / "value of the total number of games played." In the calculation to calculate the occurrence rate of RB state ST4, the ratio of the value of the RB transition count counter to the value of the total number of games played is calculated. This calculation is performed so that the calculation result = "value of the RB transition count counter" / "value of the total number of games played." In the calculation to calculate the occurrence rate of ART state ST6, the ratio of the value of the ART transition count counter to the value of the total number of games played is calculated. This calculation is performed so that the calculation result = "value of the ART transition count counter" / "value of the total number of games played." In the calculation to calculate the total value of the occurrence rates of BB state ST3, RB state ST4, and ART state ST6, the ratio of the total value of the three transition count counters to the value of the total number of games played is calculated. This calculation is performed so that the calculation result = "BB transition count counter value + RB transition count counter value + ART transition count counter value" / "total game count counter value".

As already explained in the first embodiment above, an instruction to display the gaming history management results is generated when the front door 12 is open and the reset button 56 on the power supply unit 54 is pressed continuously for three seconds or more while the slot machine 10 is receiving operating power. When an instruction to display the gaming history management results is generated, the main MPU 72 sets the management display flag in the non-specific control work area 102 to "1" and executes display control on the ratio display 85 so that the ratio of stays in the advantageous zone is displayed. The display content of the ratio display 85 is switched when operation of the left stop button 42 is detected while the management display flag is set to "1." The display content of the ratio display 85 switches in the following order: favorable zone stay ratio → occurrence ratio of BB state ST3 → occurrence ratio of RB state ST4 → occurrence ratio of ART state ST6 → occurrence ratio of BB state ST3, RB state ST4, and ART state ST6, and returns to the favorable zone stay ratio when operation of the left stop button 42 is detected while the ratio display 85 is displaying the occurrence ratios of BB state ST3, RB state ST4, and ART state ST6. The display of the stay ratio and occurrence ratio on the ratio display 85 ends when operation of the start lever 41 is detected.

The process for calculating the favorable zone stay ratio, the BB state ST3 occurrence ratio, the RB state ST4 occurrence ratio, the ART state ST6 occurrence ratio, and the sum of these three occurrence ratios, as well as the process for controlling the display of the ratio display 85 so that the calculation results are displayed, is executed in the management execution process (step S1503 of the management process (Figure 37)). As already explained in the first embodiment above, the management execution process is executed using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

In this way, by making it possible to check the ratio of time spent in the favorable zone, as well as the occurrence ratio of BB state ST3, the occurrence ratio of RB state ST4, the occurrence ratio of ART state ST6, and the total value of these three occurrence ratios, on the ratio display 85, the gaming parlor manager can check the detailed gaming history of the slot machine 10 based on the display on the ratio display 85. By storing information indicating the ratio of time spent in the favorable zone, the occurrence ratio of BB state ST3, the occurrence ratio of RB state ST4, the occurrence ratio of ART state ST6, and the total value of these three occurrence ratios in the non-specific control work area 102, the data capacity of the specific control work area 103 can be more generous than in a configuration in which this information is stored in the specific control work area 103. Furthermore, by configuring the program for executing the management execution process in the main ROM 73 to be a non-specific control program, the data capacity of the memory area for storing the specific control program and specific control data in the main ROM 73 can be more generous than in a configuration in which the program for executing the management execution process is configured to be a specific control program.

In addition, the ratio display 85 may be configured so that only the ratio of staying in the favorable zone, the ratio of occurrence of BB state ST3, the ratio of occurrence of RB state ST4, the ratio of occurrence of ART state ST6, or some of these three ratios are visible.

(45) The number of active lines is not limited to one, the main line ML, and may be two, three, four, or more. In this case, the number of active lines may increase as the number of gaming media bets increases, or the maximum number of active lines may be set regardless of the number of gaming media bets.

(46) In each of the above embodiments, a bonus of paying out medals is awarded when a small winning combination is achieved, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration and may be configured in any way as long as the bonus is awarded to the player. For example, a prize other than medals may be awarded when a small winning combination is achieved. Furthermore, in slot machines that do not have the function of inserting actual medals or paying out medals, but instead manage medals owned by the player as credits, an increase in the number of credited medals corresponds to the awarding of a bonus.

(47) The present invention may be applied to so-called B-type slot machines, or to any type of slot machine, such as C-type, a combination of A-type and C-type, a combination of B-type and C-type, or even a type equipped with an RT game, CT game, or AT game. It may also be configured to have a bonus state that is advantageous to the player.

(48) The symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R are not limited to pictures, numbers, letters, etc., but may also be geometric lines, figures, etc. Furthermore, symbols may be formed using light, color, etc., or three-dimensional shapes, etc., or may be a combination of these. In other words, symbols may function as distinguishable information.

(49) In the above embodiments, specific examples were shown for a slot machine 10, but the present invention may also be applied to a pachinko machine in which games are played using gaming balls as the gaming medium, or to a gaming machine that combines a slot machine and a pachinko machine.

<Inventions extracted from the above embodiments>
The following describes the features of the inventions extracted from the above-described embodiments, while indicating, as necessary, their effects, etc. Note that, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiments are indicated in parentheses, etc. as appropriate, but the invention is not limited to the specific configurations indicated in parentheses, etc.

<Features Group A>
Feature A1. A control means (main control device 70) that executes various processes;
a predetermined storage means (main RAM 74) in which information is temporarily stored when the various processes are executed by the control means;
Equipped with
The control means
a first predetermined processing execution means for executing a first predetermined processing (processing for specific control) among the various types of processing (in the first to third and sixth to thirteenth embodiments, a function for executing processing other than the management execution processing, backup abnormality confirmation processing, and clear processing for non-specific control in the main MPU 72; in the fourth embodiment, a function for executing processing other than the management execution processing, backup abnormality confirmation processing, clear processing for non-specific control, checksum processing, and checksum calculation processing in the main MPU 72; in the fifth embodiment, a function for executing processing other than the management execution processing, backup abnormality confirmation processing, clear processing for non-specific control, checksum processing, specific checksum calculation processing, and non-specific checksum calculation processing in the main MPU 72);
a second predetermined processing execution means for executing a second predetermined processing (processing for non-specific control) among the various processing (in the first to third and sixth to thirteenth embodiments, a function for executing management execution processing, backup abnormality confirmation processing, and clear processing for non-specific control in the main MPU 72; in the fourth embodiment, a function for executing management execution processing, backup abnormality confirmation processing, clear processing for non-specific control, checksum processing, and checksum calculation processing in the main MPU 72; in the fifth embodiment, a function for executing management execution processing, backup abnormality confirmation processing, clear processing for non-specific control, checksum processing, specific checksum calculation processing, and non-specific checksum calculation processing in the main MPU 72);
Equipped with
The predetermined storage means
a first corresponding storage area (a stack area 101, 181, 201 for specific control and a work area 103, 183, 203 for specific control) into which information is written when the first predetermined process is being executed, but into which information is not written when the second predetermined process is being executed;
a second corresponding storage area (a stack area 104, 184, 204 for non-specific control and a work area 102, 182, 202 for non-specific control) into which information is written when the second predetermined process is being executed, but into which information is not written when the first predetermined process is being executed;
Equipped with
The first predetermined process is executed when a process (main process) that is executed when the supply of operating power is started is started,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second predetermined processing execution means is equipped with an abnormality identification execution means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1901 to S1912 of the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S5301 to S5312 of the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S5801 to S5807 of the main MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of steps S6201 to S6211 of the main MPU 72 in the fifth embodiment) that executes an abnormality identification process (backup abnormality confirmation process) to identify whether an information abnormality has occurred in the predetermined storage means as the second predetermined processing in the processing at the start of supply.

According to Feature A1, information is written to the first corresponding storage area when the first predetermined process is being executed, but information is not written to the first corresponding storage area when the second predetermined process is being executed. This prevents information stored in the first corresponding storage area from being accidentally erased when the second process is being executed. Furthermore, information is written to the second corresponding storage area when the second predetermined process is being executed, but information is not written to the second corresponding storage area when the first predetermined process is being executed. This prevents information stored in the second corresponding storage area from being accidentally erased when the first process is being executed.

By configuring the system to execute an abnormality identification process during the supply start process that is executed when the supply of operating power begins, it is possible to determine whether an information abnormality has occurred in the specified storage means when the supply of operating power begins. Therefore, if it is determined that an information abnormality has occurred in the specified storage means, it is possible to execute a process to prevent gameplay from continuing in that state.

In a configuration in which a first predetermined process is executed when supply start processing is initiated, the abnormality identification process executed in the supply start processing is executed as a second predetermined process. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the abnormality identification process is executed as the first predetermined process, the program for executing the first predetermined process and the data for executing the first predetermined process can be reduced.

Feature A2: The predetermined storage means includes a predetermined save area (leading area 108 in the first to third embodiments, leading area 188 in the fourth embodiment, leading area 208 in the fifth embodiment) in which predetermined save correspondence information (information in the flag register of the main MPU 72 and information on a return address for returning to the power recovery process) used to execute the first predetermined process when the situation changes from the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed to the situation where the second predetermined process is being executed is saved,
The gaming machine described in feature A1 is characterized in that, as the abnormality identification processing, the abnormality identification execution means identifies whether the content of the information in a specific target area in the specified storage means that does not include the specified save area (in the first to fourth embodiments, the checksum calculation target range, and in the fifth embodiment, the specific checksum calculation target range and the non-specific checksum calculation target range) has changed from the content at the time the supply of operating power was last stopped, and identifies that the information abnormality has occurred if the content has changed.

According to feature A2, the abnormality identification process determines whether the information content in the specific target area has changed since the content at the time of the previous power outage, and if the content has changed, it determines that an information abnormality has occurred. Therefore, if the information content in the specific target area has changed from the content at the time of the previous power outage, it is possible to prevent gameplay from continuing in that state.

The specified save area where the specified save response information is saved is excluded from the specific target area in the specified storage means. Furthermore, with the configuration of feature A1 described above, the first specified process is executed when the supply start process, which is executed when the supply of operating power starts, is initiated. Therefore, while the first specified process is being executed, the specified save response information can be saved to the specified save area while preventing the content of the information in the specific target area from changing.

Feature A3. A gaming machine according to Feature A2, wherein the predetermined save area is set as a storage area for the first address in the predetermined storage means (address Y(1) in the main RAM 74), or as a storage area for a predetermined range of consecutive addresses from the first address so as to include the first address (addresses Y(1) to Y(3) in the main RAM 74).

Feature A3 makes it possible to easily specify an address when specifying a specified save area in the specified storage means as an area to save the specified save correspondence information. It also prevents the specific target area in the specified storage means from being distributed between the start address side of the specified storage means and the end address side of the specified storage means relative to the specified save area. This simplifies the processing configuration for specifying the address range of the specific target area.

Feature A4. A gaming machine according to Feature A3, characterized in that the specific target area is set as a storage area for a specific range of consecutive addresses (addresses Y(4) to Y(t+1) in the first and fourth embodiments, addresses Y(4) to Y(t+3) in the second embodiment, and addresses Y(4) to Y(s+1) in the fifth embodiment) from the next address following the final address of the specific save area in the specific storage means.

According to Feature A4, the specific target area is set as a storage area for a specific range of consecutive addresses in the specified storage means, thereby simplifying the processing configuration for specifying the address range of the specific target area. Furthermore, the start address of the specific target area is set to the address next to the end address of the specified save area. This allows the specific storage means to secure a wide specific target area that can be used to determine whether an information anomaly has occurred during the anomaly identification process. This increases the likelihood that an anomaly can be identified if one occurs in the information stored in the specified storage means.

Feature A5: The predetermined storage means includes specific storage areas (stack areas 104, 184, 204 for non-specific control, checksum area 114 in the first embodiment, checksum area 193 in the fourth embodiment, specific checksum area 213 and non-specific checksum area 214 in the fifth embodiment) in which information is stored when the abnormality identification process is executed,
A gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A4, characterized in that the specific target area does not include the specific memory area.

Feature A5 enables information to be stored in a specific storage area when the anomaly identification process is executed, while preventing changes to the content of the information in the specific target area that is the target of the anomaly identification process for determining whether an information anomaly has occurred.

Feature A6: The anomaly identification execution means, as the anomaly identification process, identifies whether the content of information in a specific target area (a checksum calculation target range in the first to fourth embodiments, and a specific checksum calculation target range and a non-specific checksum calculation target range in the fifth embodiment) in the predetermined storage means has changed from the content at the previous time when the supply of operating power was stopped, and identifies that the information anomaly has occurred if the content has changed;
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A5, characterized in that the specific target area includes at least a portion of the first corresponding memory area and at least a portion of the second corresponding memory area.

According to Feature A6, by configuring the specific target area so that at least a portion of the first corresponding storage area is included, it is possible to determine that an information anomaly has occurred if the content of information in an area included in the specific target area in the first corresponding storage area has changed from the content at the time of the previous power outage. Furthermore, by configuring the specific target area so that at least a portion of the second corresponding storage area is included, it is possible to determine that an information anomaly has occurred if the content of information in an area included in the specific target area in the second corresponding storage area has changed from the content at the time of the previous power outage.

Feature A7. The gaming machine described in Feature A6, wherein the abnormality identification execution means identifies whether the information abnormality has occurred in the specific target area without distinguishing between the information abnormality in the area of the specific target area that corresponds to the first corresponding memory area and the information abnormality in the area of the specific target area that corresponds to the second corresponding memory area.

According to Feature A7, by executing a process to determine whether an information anomaly has occurred in a specific target area, it is possible to determine whether an information anomaly has occurred in either an area corresponding to the first corresponding storage area or an area corresponding to the second corresponding storage area. This simplifies the processing configuration for determining whether an information anomaly has occurred in the area corresponding to the first corresponding storage area and whether an information anomaly has occurred in the area corresponding to the second corresponding storage area.

Feature A8: The first predetermined process execution means includes a means for executing an information initialization process for the first corresponding storage area based on the fact that the abnormality identification execution means has identified that the information abnormality has occurred (a function for executing the processes of steps S2001 to S2004 of the main MPU 72 in the first to fourth embodiments),
The gaming machine described in feature A7 is characterized in that the second predetermined processing execution means is equipped with a means for executing information initialization processing for the second corresponding memory area based on the abnormality identification execution means identifying that an information abnormality has occurred (a function for executing the processing of steps S2101 to S2109 of the main MPU 72 in the first to fourth embodiments).

According to feature A8, when the anomaly identification execution means identifies that an information anomaly has occurred, an information initialization process can be executed on the first corresponding storage area. Therefore, if an information anomaly has occurred in the first corresponding storage area, the state in which the information anomaly has occurred can be resolved by the initialization process. Furthermore, when the anomaly identification execution means identifies that an information anomaly has occurred, an information initialization process can be executed on the second corresponding storage area. Therefore, if an information anomaly has occurred in the second corresponding storage area, the state in which the information anomaly has occurred can be resolved by the initialization process.

Feature A9. The gaming machine described in Feature A6, wherein the abnormality identification execution means distinguishes between the information abnormality in an area of the specific target area that corresponds to the first corresponding memory area and the information abnormality in an area of the specific target area that corresponds to the second corresponding memory area, and identifies whether the information abnormality has occurred in the specific target area.

According to feature A9, when an information anomaly occurs in an area of a specific target area that corresponds to the first corresponding storage area, but an information anomaly does not occur in an area that corresponds to the second corresponding storage area, it is possible to identify that an information anomaly has occurred only in the area that corresponds to the first corresponding storage area. Furthermore, when an information anomaly occurs in an area of a specific target area that corresponds to the second corresponding storage area, but an information anomaly does not occur in an area that corresponds to the first corresponding storage area, it is possible to identify that an information anomaly has occurred only in the area that corresponds to the second corresponding storage area. By being able to distinguish between areas of a specific target area where an information anomaly has occurred and areas where an information anomaly has not occurred, it is possible to respond according to the state of each area.

Feature A10: The first predetermined process execution means includes a means for executing an information initialization process for the first corresponding storage area based on the abnormality identification execution means identifying that the information abnormality has occurred in an area of the identified target area corresponding to the first corresponding storage area (a function for executing the processes of steps S2001 to S2004 of the main MPU 72 in the fifth embodiment);
The gaming machine described in feature A9 is characterized in that the second specified processing execution means is equipped with a means for executing information initialization processing for the second corresponding memory area (a function for executing processing of step S6209 of the main MPU 72 in the fifth embodiment) based on the abnormality identification execution means identifying that the information abnormality has occurred in an area of the specific target area corresponding to the second corresponding memory area.

According to Feature A10, when an information anomaly occurs in an area of a specific target area that corresponds to a first corresponding storage area, but no information anomaly occurs in an area that corresponds to a second corresponding storage area, the state in which the information anomaly has occurred can be resolved by executing an information initialization process on the first corresponding storage area. In such a case, by configuring the system so that the information initialization process is not executed on the area that corresponds to the second corresponding storage area in which no information anomaly has occurred, it is possible to resolve the state in which the information anomaly has occurred in the first corresponding storage area while retaining the information stored in the second corresponding storage area.

If an information anomaly occurs in an area of a specific target area that corresponds to a second corresponding storage area, but no information anomaly occurs in an area that corresponds to the first corresponding storage area, the state in which the information anomaly has occurred can be resolved by performing an information initialization process on the second corresponding storage area. In such a case, by configuring the system so that the information initialization process is not performed on the area that corresponds to the first corresponding storage area in which no information anomaly has occurred, it is possible to resolve the state in which the information anomaly has occurred in the second corresponding storage area while retaining the information stored in the first corresponding storage area.

Feature A11: A reference storage execution means (a function for executing the processes of steps S1704 to S1711 of the main MPU 72 in the first and third embodiments, and a function for executing the processes of steps S5204 to S5212 of the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment) is provided that executes a reference process (the processes of steps S1704 to S1711 of the main MPU 72 in the first and third embodiments, and the processes of steps S5204 to S5212 of the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment) for calculating reference information (a checksum in the first and third embodiments, and a two's complement of the checksum in the second embodiment) corresponding to information in a specific target area (a checksum calculation target range in the first to third embodiments) in the predetermined storage means when the supply of operating power is stopped, and stores the calculated reference information in the predetermined storage means,
the abnormality identification execution means, as the abnormality identification process, uses the reference information to identify whether the content of the information in the specific target area has changed from the content at the time of the previous stop of the supply of operating power, and identifies that the information abnormality has occurred if the content has changed;
The first predetermined processing execution means includes a means for executing a power outage process (power outage process) when it is determined that the supply of operating power is stopped (a function for executing the processes of steps S1701 to S1712 of the main MPU 72 in the first and third embodiments, and a function for executing the processes of steps S5201 to S5213 of the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment),
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A10, characterized in that the reference process is executed as the first predetermined process in the power outage process.

According to Feature A11, when the supply of operating power is stopped, reference information corresponding to the information in the specific target area is calculated, and the calculated reference information is stored in a specified storage means. This makes it possible to use the reference information in the abnormality identification process executed when supply starts. This simplifies the process of identifying whether an information abnormality has occurred in the specified storage means during the abnormality identification process.

The abnormality identification process determines whether the information content in the specific target area has changed since the last time the supply of operating power was stopped, and if the content has changed, it determines that an information abnormality has occurred. Therefore, if the information content in the specific target area has changed from the content at the last time the supply of operating power was stopped, it is possible to prevent gameplay from continuing in that state.

The first predetermined processing execution means for executing the first predetermined processing executes the power outage processing when it determines that the supply of operating power will be stopped. Furthermore, in the power outage processing, a reference processing is executed as the first predetermined processing. Therefore, the processing for determining that the supply of operating power will be stopped, the power outage processing, and the reference processing in the power outage processing can be consolidated into the first predetermined processing. This simplifies the processing configuration from determining that the supply of operating power will be stopped to executing the reference processing, compared to a configuration in which the processing from determining that the supply of operating power will be stopped to executing the reference processing is distributed across the first predetermined processing and the second predetermined processing, and also enables the processing from determining that the supply of operating power will be stopped to executing the reference processing to be executed quickly.

Feature A12. When the supply of operating power is stopped, reference information (checksum in the fourth embodiment, specific checksum and non-specific checksum in the fifth embodiment) corresponding to information on a specific target area (checksum calculation target range in the fourth embodiment, specific checksum calculation target range and non-specific checksum calculation target range in the fifth embodiment) in the predetermined storage means is calculated, and the calculated reference information is stored in the predetermined storage means (processing of step S5504 by the main MPU 72, processing of steps S5601 to S5603 by the main MPU 72, processing of steps S5701 to S5707 by the main MPU 72, processing of steps S5901 to S5905 by the main MPU 72, a reference memory execution means for executing steps S6001 to S6007 of the MPU 72, and steps S6101 to S6107 of the main MPU 72 (a function for executing the process of step S5504 of the main MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment, a function for executing the process of steps S5601 to S5603 of the main MPU 72, a function for executing the process of steps S5701 to S5707 of the main MPU 72, a function for executing the process of steps S5901 to S5905 of the main MPU 72 in the fifth embodiment, a function for executing the process of steps S6001 to S6007 of the main MPU 72, and a function for executing the process of steps S6101 to S6107 of the main MPU 72);
The abnormality identification execution means, as the abnormality identification process, uses the reference information to identify whether the content of the information in the specific target area has changed from the content at the time of the previous interruption of the supply of operating power, and identifies that the information abnormality has occurred if the content has changed;
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A10, wherein the reference process is executed as the second predetermined process.

According to feature A12, when the supply of operating power is stopped, reference information corresponding to the information in the specific target area is calculated, and the calculated reference information is stored in a specified storage means. This makes it possible to use the reference information in the abnormality identification process executed when the supply starts. This simplifies the process of identifying whether an information abnormality has occurred in the specified storage means during the abnormality identification process.

The abnormality identification process determines whether the information content in the specific target area has changed since the last time the supply of operating power was stopped, and if the content has changed, it determines that an information abnormality has occurred. Therefore, if the information content in the specific target area has changed from the content at the last time the supply of operating power was stopped, it is possible to prevent gameplay from continuing in that state.

The reference process is executed as a second predetermined process. Therefore, compared to when the reference process is executed as the first predetermined process, the program for executing the first predetermined process and the data for executing the first predetermined process can be reduced. In a configuration having the configuration of feature A1 above, in which the abnormality identification process is executed as the second predetermined process in the processing at the start of supply, the reference process is also executed as the second predetermined process. Therefore, it is possible to execute part of the reference process using part of the program and data for executing the abnormality identification process. This makes it possible to reduce the programs and data for executing the abnormality identification process and the reference process.

Note that any one or more of the following configurations may be applied to the configurations of Features A1 to A12: Features A1 to A12, Features B1 to B6, Features C1 to C6, Features D1 to D7, Features E1 to E6, Features F1 to F10, Features G1 to G7, Features H1 to H8, and Features I1 to I6. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved through the combined configurations.

The invention relating to the above-mentioned feature group A can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, pachinko machines have a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores gaming balls awarded to players. The gaming balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a gaming ball launcher and launched toward the gaming area in response to the player's launch operation. When a gaming ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the gaming ball is paid out from a payout device to the tray storage section. In addition, pachinko machines are also known that have a configuration in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section. In this case, gaming balls stored in the upper tray storage section are guided to the gaming ball launcher, and surplus gaming balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

In addition, in a slot machine, when medals have been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. When the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control, causing the reels to start spinning, and if the stop button is operated while the reels are spinning, the control means executes rotation stop control, causing the reels to stop spinning. If the result of the reels stopping after spinning has stopped corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to that winning combination is awarded to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, processing needs to be carried out appropriately, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature Group B>
Feature B1. A setting means (a function for executing a setting value update process in the main MPU 72) for setting a setting value to be used from among multiple setting values corresponding to the player's advantage level;
a setting value notification means (a function for executing a setting confirmation process in the main MPU 72) for executing a setting value notification (a setting confirmation display in the credit display unit 65 in the first to ninth and eleventh to thirteenth embodiments, and a setting confirmation display in the ratio display 85 in the tenth embodiment) for notifying the setting value to be used;
bet information storage means for storing information on the number of bet game values (medals and virtual medals) (bet number counter 125, a function for executing the processes of steps S2201 to S2204 and steps S2207 to S2211 in the main MPU 72, and a function for executing the processes of steps S2301 to S2305 and steps S2307 to S2313 in the main MPU 72);
A storage means for storing information on the number of stored game values (a credit counter in the second calculation target area 111, a function for executing the processing of step S2311 in the master MPU 72, and a function for executing the processing of steps S4906 to S4908 and step S4910 in the master MPU 72);
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the setting value notification means is equipped with a regulation means that prevents the setting value notification from being executed when the information stored in the bet information storage means is regulated information (numeric information of 1 or more in the first to fifth and seventh to thirteenth embodiments), or that prevents the setting value notification from being executed when the information stored in the bet information storage means is first regulated information (numeric information of 3 or more, which is the upper limit number of bets, in the sixth embodiment) and the information stored in the storage storage means is second regulated information (numeric information of 50 or more, which is the upper limit number of storage memories, in the sixth embodiment).

According to Feature B1, by executing a setting value notification, the gaming parlor manager can confirm the current setting values of the gaming machines. By not executing a setting value notification if the information stored in the bet information storage means is regulated information, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the information stored in the bet information storage means is regulated information when the setting value notification ends. Furthermore, by not executing a setting value notification if the information stored in the bet information storage means is first regulated information and the information stored in the accumulation storage means is second regulated information, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the information stored in the bet information storage means is first regulated information and the information stored in the accumulation storage means is second regulated information when the setting value notification ends.

Feature B2. A gaming machine as described in Feature B1, wherein the regulating means prevents the setting value notification from being executed if the information stored in the bet information storage means is information on the number of bets of 1 or more, which is the regulated information.

Feature B2 prevents the end of the set value notification when the number of betted game values is 1 or more. It also prevents the setting value notification from being executed by someone other than the gaming parlor manager when the number of betted game values is 1 or more, which could result in the setting value being improperly confirmed.

Feature B3. A gaming machine as described in Feature B1, wherein the regulating means prevents the setting value notification from being executed if the information stored in the bet information storage means is the regulated information, which is information on the maximum number of bets (numeric information of "3", the upper limit on the number of bets).

Feature B3 prevents the end of the set value notification when the number of betted game values is the maximum bet number. It also prevents the set value notification from being executed by someone other than the gaming parlor manager when the number of betted game values is the maximum bet number, thereby preventing the set value from being improperly confirmed.

Feature B4. A gaming machine as described in Feature B1, characterized in that the regulating means prevents the setting value notification from being executed when the information stored in the bet information storage means is the first regulated information, which is information on the maximum number of bets (numeric information of "3", which is the upper limit of the number of bets), and the information stored in the storage means is the second regulated information, which is information on the upper limit of the number of stored values (numeric information of "50", which is the upper limit of the number of stored values).

Feature B4 prevents the end of the set value notification when the number of betted game values is the maximum bet number and the number of stored and saved game values is the upper limit of saved game values. Furthermore, when the number of betted game values is the maximum bet number and the number of stored and saved game values is the upper limit of saved game values, it prevents the set value notification from being executed by someone other than the amusement hall manager, leading to the setting value being improperly confirmed.

Feature B5: Means for disabling the acceptance of the gaming value when the setting value notification is started (a function for executing the process of step S2807 of the main MPU 72 in the first to fifth, eighth, ninth and eleventh to thirteenth embodiments, a function for executing the process of step S6308 of the main MPU 72 in the sixth embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S6408 of the main MPU 72 in the seventh embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S6707 of the main MPU 72 in the tenth embodiment);
means for permitting the acceptance of the gaming value when the notification of the set value has ended (a function for executing the processing of step S2817 of the main MPU 72 in the first to fifth, eighth, ninth and eleventh to thirteenth embodiments, a function for executing the processing of step S6318 of the main MPU 72 in the sixth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S6421 of the main MPU 72 in the seventh embodiment, and a function for executing the processing of step S6714 of the main MPU 72 in the tenth embodiment);
A gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, characterized in that it is provided with:

According to feature B5, by disallowing the acceptance of gaming value when a setting value notification is initiated, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the information stored in the bet information storage means becomes regulated information while the setting value notification is being executed, or a situation in which the information stored in the bet information storage means becomes first regulated information and the information stored in the accumulation storage means becomes second regulated information. Therefore, it is possible to permit the acceptance of gaming value without omitting the process of determining whether the state is such that acceptance of gaming value can be permitted when the setting value notification is terminated. This simplifies the processing configuration for permitting the acceptance of gaming value when the setting value notification is terminated.

Feature B6. A gaming machine according to any one of Features B1 to B5, wherein the regulating means prevents the setting value notification from being executed while a game is being played.

According to feature B6, by preventing a setting value notification from being executed while a game is being played, it is possible to prevent the game from ending while a setting value notification is being executed. If a game ends while a setting value notification is being executed, there is a possibility that the information in the bet information storage means and the information on the number of game values stored in one or both of the accumulation storage means will increase at the end of the game. In contrast, by preventing a game from ending while a setting value notification is being executed, it is possible to prevent the information in the bet information storage means and the information on the number of game values stored in the accumulation storage means from increasing while a setting value notification is being executed. It is also possible to prevent the setting value from being improperly confirmed by someone other than the amusement hall manager while a game is being played.

Note that the configurations of Features B1 to B6 may also be combined with one or more of Features A1 to A12, Features B1 to B6, Features C1 to C6, Features D1 to D7, Features E1 to E6, Features F1 to F10, Features G1 to G7, Features H1 to H8, and Features I1 to I6. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved through the combined configurations.

The invention relating to Feature Group B above can solve the following problems:

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, pachinko machines have a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores gaming balls awarded to players. The gaming balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a gaming ball launcher and launched toward the gaming area in response to the player's launch operation. When a gaming ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the gaming ball is paid out from a payout device to the tray storage section. In addition, pachinko machines are also known that have a configuration in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section. In this case, gaming balls stored in the upper tray storage section are guided to the gaming ball launcher, and surplus gaming balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

In addition, in a slot machine, when medals have been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. When the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control, causing the reels to start spinning, and if the stop button is operated while the reels are spinning, the control means executes rotation stop control, causing the reels to stop spinning. If the result of the reels stopping after spinning has stopped corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to that winning combination is awarded to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, the process for notifying the setting values that determine the machine's advantageous degree must be executed appropriately, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature Group C>
Feature C1. A control means (main control device 70) that executes various processes;
a notification control means (the performance side MPU 92) for executing a notification based on information received from the control means;
a bet operation means (credit insertion button 47) operated to bet game value (medals and virtual medals);
Equipped with
The control means
bet number storage means for storing information on the number of bets, which is the number of game values betted (bet number counter 125, a function for executing the processes of steps S2201 to S2204 and steps S2207 to S2211 in the master MPU 72, and a function for executing the processes of steps S2307 to S2313 in the master MPU 72);
bet number updating means (a function for executing the processes of steps S2301 to S2305 in the master MPU 72) for updating information in the bet number storage means so that the bet number increases based on the operation of the bet operation means;
When the information in the bet number storage means is updated by the bet number update means so that the bet number increases, a bet number information transmission means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2401 to S2405 in the main MPU 72) transmits corresponding transmission information (first to third bet commands);
Equipped with
The notification control means includes a bet number notification execution means (a function for executing the processing of steps S2501 to S2518 in the production side MPU 92, a function for executing the processing of steps S2601 to S2616 in the production side MPU 92, and a function for executing the processing of steps S2701 to S2718 in the production side MPU 92) that causes the bet number notification corresponding to the transmitted information (output of first to third bet notification sounds from the speaker 62),
The bet number information transmitting means transmits the transmission information in which the corresponding information is set when the information in the bet number memory means is updated by the bet number update means so that the bet number increases by a plurality of amounts based on the operation of the bet operation means.

According to feature C1, when the information in the bet number storage means is updated so that the number of bets increases by multiple amounts based on the operation of the bet operation means, transmission information containing the corresponding information is transmitted, and a bet number notification corresponding to the transmission information is executed. This allows the player to be notified that the number of bets has increased by multiple amounts based on the operation of the bet operation means. Furthermore, compared to a configuration in which multiple pieces of transmission information are transmitted when the information in the bet number storage means is updated so that the number of bets increases by multiple amounts, the configuration for transmitting the transmission information can be simplified, and the configuration for executing a bet number notification corresponding to the received transmission information can also be simplified.

Feature C2. The gaming machine described in Feature C1, wherein when the information in the bet number storage means is updated by the bet number update means so that the number of bets increases based on operation of the bet operation means, the bet number information transmission means transmits the transmission information containing information about the number of bets after the update.

Feature C2 simplifies the processing configuration for transmitting the transmission information compared to a configuration in which transmission information containing information on the number of bets before the update and information on the number of bets after the update is transmitted.

Feature C3. The gaming machine described in Feature C2, wherein the bet number notification execution means, upon receiving the transmission information, executes the bet number notification corresponding to the increase in the bet number.

Feature C3 makes it possible to notify the player of the increase in the number of bets. With the configuration of feature C1 above, when the information in the bet number storage means is updated so that the number of bets increases by a multiple number based on the operation of the bet operation means, transmission information containing the corresponding information is transmitted. Therefore, even when the information in the bet number storage means is updated so that the number of bets increases by a multiple number based on the operation of the bet operation means, the increase in the number of transmission information transmitted can be prevented from increasing, and the player can be notified of the increase in the number of bets.

Feature C4: The notification control means includes a notification completion storage means (a first sound setting completion flag 127 and a second sound setting completion flag 128) that stores information on the number of bets for which the execution of the bet number notification by the bet number notification execution means has been completed,
The gaming machine described in feature C3 is characterized in that, when the bet number notification execution means receives the transmission information, it executes the bet number notification corresponding to the increase in the number of bets based on the information set in the received transmission information and the information stored in the notification storage means.

Feature C4 allows the notification control means to grasp information about the number of bets for which notification of the number of bets has been completed, based on information stored in the notification storage means. Therefore, when information in the bet number storage means is updated so that the number of bets increases based on operation of the bet operation means, transmission information containing information about the number of bets after the update can be transmitted, and a bet number notification corresponding to the increase in the number of bets can be executed in a manner corresponding to the number of bets before the update and the number of bets after the update. This allows the player to be notified of the number of bets before the update and the number of bets after the update.

Feature C5. The control means
A means for updating the information in the bet number storage means so that the bet number becomes "0" based on the execution of a settlement operation (operation of the settlement button 51) (a function for executing the processes of steps S2208 to S2211 and S2215 in the master MPU 72);
A means for transmitting settlement response transmission information based on the execution of the settlement operation (a function for executing the process of step S2212 in the main MPU 72);
Equipped with
The gaming machine described in feature C4 is characterized in that the notification control means is equipped with a means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2714 and S2718 in the presentation side MPU 92) for updating the information of the notified storage means so that the information corresponds to the fact that the number of bets for which the execution of the bet number notification has been completed does not exist based on the receipt of the settlement response transmission information.

According to feature C5, if a settlement operation is performed when the number of bets is "1" or greater and the information in the bet number storage means is updated so that the number of bets increases after the settlement operation is performed, a corresponding bet number notification can be performed. This prevents the correspondence between the information in the bet number storage means and the bet number notification from becoming misaligned after the settlement operation is performed.

Feature C6: The notification control means includes notification sound information storage means (sound table storage area 121) that stores notification sound information (first to third bet notification sound tables) that enables output of the same number of notification sounds as the increase in the number of bets,
A gaming machine described in any one of features C1 to C5, characterized in that when the bet number notification execution means receives the transmission information, it reads out from the alarm sound information storage means the same number of alarm sound information as the increase in the number of bets corresponding to the information set in the transmission information, and outputs, as the bet number notification, the number of alarm sounds corresponding to the increase in the number of bets based on the read alarm sound information.

According to feature C6, by outputting a number of alarm sounds corresponding to the increase in the number of bets, the increase in the number of bets can be easily notified to the player. Furthermore, the bet number notification execution means reads from the alarm sound information storage means a number of alarm sound information equal to the increase in the number of bets, and outputs a number of alarm sounds corresponding to the increase in the number of bets based on the read alarm sound information. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the information for outputting a number of alarm sounds equal to the increase in the number of bets is compiled into a single alarm sound information, and the alarm sound information is pre-stored in the same number as the number of types of increase in the number of bets, the data volume of the alarm sound information pre-stored for outputting the alarm sounds can be reduced.

Note that one or more of the following configurations may be applied to the configurations of Features C1 to C6: Features A1 to A12, Features B1 to B6, Features C1 to C6, Features D1 to D7, Features E1 to E6, Features F1 to F10, Features G1 to G7, Features H1 to H8, and Features I1 to I6. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved through the combined configurations.

The invention relating to Feature Group C above can solve the following problems:

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, pachinko machines have a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores gaming balls awarded to players. The gaming balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a gaming ball launcher and launched toward the gaming area in response to the player's launch operation. When a gaming ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the gaming ball is paid out from a payout device to the tray storage section. In addition, pachinko machines are also known that have a configuration in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section. In this case, gaming balls stored in the upper tray storage section are guided to the gaming ball launcher, and surplus gaming balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

In addition, in a slot machine, when medals have been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. When the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control, causing the reels to start spinning, and if the stop button is operated while the reels are spinning, the control means executes rotation stop control, causing the reels to stop spinning. If the result of the reels stopping after spinning has stopped corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to that winning combination is awarded to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, the process for notifying the number of bets must be executed appropriately, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature Group D>
Feature D1. A symbol display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) that displays symbols in a variable manner in each game;
A stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) that is operated to stop the variable display of the picture;
an operation mode notification control means (a function for executing the processes of steps S2901 to S2910 in the main MPU 72 and steps S3401 to S3417 in the main MPU 72) for executing an operation mode notification (stop order corresponding display on the dual-purpose display unit 66) for notifying the operation mode of the stop operation means;
Equipped with
The operation mode notification control means
a first operation mode notification control means (a function of executing the processes of step S3401 and steps S3405 to S3417 in the main MPU 72) for causing the operation mode notification to be executed at a first timing of the game (a timing at which the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 becomes effective in the first embodiment) when the game for which the operation mode notification is to be executed is executed in a first situation (a situation in which the game can be started by operating the start lever 41 in the first embodiment);
a second operation mode notification control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S1811 and S1812 in the main MPU 72, and a function of executing the processes of steps S3401 to S3404 and steps S3407 to S3417 in the main MPU 72) for causing the operation mode notification to be executed at a second timing of the game (the timing at which the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that were rotating when the power outage occurred is resumed) when the game that is the subject of the operation mode notification is executed in a second situation (a situation in which the power outage occurred while the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R were rotating and then the power was restored in the first embodiment);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature D1, the operation mode of the stop operation means can be notified to the player by executing an operation mode notification. In a configuration in which, when a game that is the subject of the operation mode notification is executed in a first situation, the operation mode notification is executed at a first timing of that game, and when a game that is the subject of the operation mode notification is executed in a second situation, the operation mode notification is executed at a second timing of that game. This allows the operation mode notification to be executed at an appropriate timing corresponding to the situation in which the game that is the subject of the operation mode notification is executed is executed.

Feature D2: One of the first timing and the second timing is a predetermined timing from a timing after the game is started to a timing when the operation of the stop operation means is validated,
A gaming machine described in feature D1, characterized in that the other of the first timing and the second timing is a timing earlier than the specified timing.

According to feature D2, by issuing an operation mode notification at a predetermined timing between after the game has started and when the operation of the stop operation means is enabled, it is possible to prevent the operation mode notification from being issued after the player has operated the stop operation means, and to allow the player to operate the stop operation means after the operation mode of the stop operation means has been notified. Furthermore, by issuing an operation mode notification at a timing prior to the predetermined timing, it is possible to create a state in which the player can confirm the operation mode of the stop operation means at an early stage, in accordance with the situation in which the game for which the operation mode notification is to be issued is being played.

Feature D3: One of the first timing and the second timing is a timing at which the operation of the stop operation means is validated after the game is started (a timing at which the stop order corresponding display start process is first executed in the main MPU 72 after the acceleration end flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to “1”),
A gaming machine described in feature D1 or D2, characterized in that the other of the first timing and the second timing is the timing when the game starts (the timing when the stop order corresponding display start processing is first executed in the main MPU 72 after the display resume flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1").

According to feature D3, by configuring the system so that the stop operation mode notification is not executed until the operation of the stop operation means is validated after the game has started, it is possible to prevent a player who has confirmed the operation mode notification from operating the stop operation means before the operation of the operation means is validated. By executing the operation mode notification at the timing when the operation of the stop operation means is validated, it is possible to allow the player to operate the stop operation means with the operation mode of the stop operation means notified. Furthermore, by executing the operation mode notification at the timing when the game is started in accordance with the situation in which the game for which the operation mode notification is executed is being played, it is possible to create a state in which the player can confirm the operation mode of the stop operation means at an early stage.

Feature D4: The first situation is a situation in which information corresponding to the supply of operating power being stopped while the variable display of the image is being executed (information of “1” in the display restart flag) is not stored in the storage means (second calculation target area 111),
A gaming machine described in any one of features D1 to D3, characterized in that the second situation is a situation in which information corresponding to the supply of operating power being stopped while the changing display of the image is being executed (information of ``1'' in the display resume flag) is stored in the memory means.

According to feature D4, when a game for which an operation mode notification is to be issued is executed in a situation where information corresponding to the supply of operating power being stopped while the display of changing images is being executed is stored in the storage means, the operation mode notification can be executed at a different timing than when a game for which an operation mode notification is to be issued is executed in a situation where information corresponding to the supply of operating power being stopped while the display of changing images is being executed is not stored in the storage means. This allows the operation mode notification to be executed at an appropriate timing corresponding to the situation in which the game for which the operation mode notification is to be issued is being executed.

Feature D5. The first timing is a predetermined timing from a timing after the game is started to a timing when the operation of the stop operation means is validated,
A gaming machine described in feature D4, characterized in that the second timing is a timing earlier than the specified timing.

According to feature D5, when a game that is subject to an operation mode notification is executed in a situation where the storage means does not store information corresponding to the interruption of the supply of operating power while the variable display of images is being executed, the operation mode notification is executed at a predetermined timing between the timing after the game starts and the timing when the operation of the stop operation means is enabled. This prevents the operation mode notification from being executed after the player operates the stop operation means, and also allows the player to operate the stop operation means after the operation mode of the stop operation means has been notified.

If a game requiring an operation mode notification is executed while information corresponding to the interruption of the supply of operating power during the execution of the variable display of images is stored in the storage means, the operation mode notification can be executed at a timing earlier than the specified timing, thereby quickly creating a state in which the player can confirm the operation mode of the stop operation means. This makes it possible to quickly resolve a state in which the player is unable to confirm the operation mode of the stop operation means after the supply of operating power has been interrupted, when the supply of operating power is resumed.

Feature D6: The first timing is a timing when the operation of the stop operation means is validated after the game is started (a timing when the stop order corresponding display start process is first executed in the main MPU 72 after the acceleration end flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to “1”),
The gaming machine described in feature D4 or D5 is characterized in that the second timing is the timing when the game starts (the timing when the stop order corresponding display start processing is first executed in the main MPU 72 after the display resume flag in the second calculation target area 111 is set to "1").

According to feature D6, when a game that requires an operation mode notification is executed in a situation where the storage means does not store information corresponding to the interruption of the supply of operating power while the variable image display is being executed, the stop operation mode notification is not executed until the operation of the stop operation means is validated after the game has started. This prevents a player who has confirmed the operation mode notification from operating the stop operation means before the operation of the operation means is validated. Then, by executing the operation mode notification at the timing when the operation of the stop operation means is validated, the player can operate the stop operation means with the operation mode of the stop operation means notified.

If a game requiring an operation mode notification is executed while information corresponding to the interruption of the supply of operating power during the execution of the variable display of images is stored in the storage means, the operation mode notification can be executed at the timing when the game starts, thereby quickly creating a state in which the player can confirm the operation mode of the stop operation means. This makes it possible to quickly resolve a state in which the player is unable to confirm the operation mode of the stop operation means after the supply of operating power has been interrupted, when the supply of operating power is resumed.

Feature D7: The picture display means includes a plurality of variable display areas (display windows 21L, 21M, 21R) that variably display the pictures,
a plurality of stop operation means are provided corresponding to the plurality of variable display areas;
A gaming machine described in feature D5 or D6, characterized in that when the supply of operating power is stopped while the image is being displayed in a variable display area among the multiple variable display areas during a specified game, and the specified game is resumed after the supply of operating power is resumed, the image begins to be displayed in the variable display area.

According to feature D7, even if the display of images in some variable display areas starts changing while some variable display areas remain stopped and the operation mode notification is executed in the same manner regardless, when the power is restored, the operation mode notification is started early, before the stop operation means is activated, thereby reducing the possibility that the player will start the stop operation means while still confused.

Note that one or more of the following configurations may be applied to the configurations of features D1 to D7: features A1 to A12, features B1 to B6, features C1 to C6, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, features H1 to H8, and features I1 to I6. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved through the combined configurations.

The invention relating to the above-mentioned feature group D can solve the following problems:

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, pachinko machines have a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores gaming balls awarded to players. The gaming balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a gaming ball launcher and launched toward the gaming area in response to the player's launch operation. When a gaming ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the gaming ball is paid out from a payout device to the tray storage section. In addition, pachinko machines are also known that have a configuration in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section. In this case, gaming balls stored in the upper tray storage section are guided to the gaming ball launcher, and surplus gaming balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

In addition, in a slot machine, when medals have been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. When the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control, causing the reels to start spinning, and if the stop button is operated while the reels are spinning, the control means executes rotation stop control, causing the reels to stop spinning. If the result of the reels stopping after spinning has stopped corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to that winning combination is awarded to the player.

Amusement machines such as those exemplified above need to deal appropriately with power outages, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature Group E>
Feature E1. A role lottery execution means (a function for executing the processing of steps S401 to S410 in the main MPU 72) for executing a role lottery process (a role lottery process),
A winning-related awarding means (a function for executing the processing of steps S1101, S1102, S1106 and S1107 in the main MPU 72, a function for executing the processing of steps S2201 to S2205 in the main MPU 72, a function for executing the processing of steps S3801 to S3809 in the main MPU 72, and a function for executing the processing of steps S4901 and S4906 to S4911 in the main MPU 72) for awarding a winning-related benefit (a game medium is awarded, a replay is allowed, a lottery mode is switched, and a game state is switched) when a winning combination corresponding to the winning combination in the winning combination lottery processing occurs;
Equipped with
As a role selected by the role lottery process, there is a winning maintenance role (bonus role) in which, if a winning is achieved, the winning state (a state in which bonus winning data is set in the second calculation target area 111) is maintained until a corresponding winning occurs,
The winning-corresponding awarding means includes a first transition means (a function of executing the processes of steps S1101, S1102, S1106, and S1107 in the main MPU 72) for transitioning the gaming state to a first gaming state (bonus state) when a predetermined winning (bonus winning) corresponding to the winning maintenance role occurs in a situation where the winning maintenance role is won,
This gaming machine is
When the winning maintenance role is won in the role lottery process and the predetermined winning does not occur in the game in which the role lottery process is executed, a second transition means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3807 to S3809 in the main MPU 72) for transitioning the game state to a second game state (internal RT state ST2);
When the supply of operating power is started, a specific transition means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3907 to S3909 in the main MPU 72) that transitions the gaming state to the second gaming state based on the fact that the winning maintenance role is in a winning state and the second gaming state is not in the winning state;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature E1, in a configuration in which a player transitions to the first gaming state when a predetermined winning combination occurs in a situation in which a winning maintenance combination has been won, if a player wins a winning maintenance combination in the combination lottery process but no predetermined winning combination occurs in the game in which the combination lottery process was executed, the player transitions to the second gaming state. Therefore, if a player wins a winning maintenance combination, the game can be run in the second gaming state until the corresponding predetermined winning combination occurs.

The specific transition means transitions the gaming state to the second gaming state when the supply of operating power begins, based on the fact that the winning maintenance role has been won and the second gaming state has not been reached. Therefore, in a game in which the winning maintenance role has been won in the role lottery process, the supply of operating power is stopped before the transition to the first gaming state or the second gaming state occurs, and then the supply of operating power is resumed, the gaming state can be transitioned to the second gaming state. This prevents the player from suffering a disadvantage due to the supply of operating power being stopped.

Feature E2. A gaming machine as described in Feature E1, wherein the specific transition means transitions the gaming state to the second gaming state after the supply of operating power begins and before the first role lottery process is executed.

According to feature E2, if the supply of operating power is stopped before the transition to the first or second gaming state occurs in a game in which a winning maintenance role has been won in the role lottery process, and the supply of operating power is then resumed, the first game can be played after the supply of operating power is resumed while the game is in the second gaming state. This prevents players from suffering disadvantages due to the supply of operating power being stopped.

Feature E3: A means for starting a process (main process) at the start of supply of operating power when the supply of operating power is started (a function for executing the processes of steps S101 to S110 in the main MPU 72) is provided,
The gaming machine described in feature E1 or E2 is characterized in that the specific transition means executes processing (processing of steps S3907 to S3909 in the main MPU 72) to transition the gaming state to the second gaming state when the processing at the start of supply is being executed.

According to feature E3, if the supply of operating power is stopped before a transition to the first gaming state or the second gaming state occurs in a game in which a winning maintenance role has been won in the role lottery process, and then the supply of operating power is resumed, processing to transition the gaming state to the second gaming state can be executed early.

Feature E4. A gaming machine described in any one of Features E1 to E3, wherein the second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (normal gaming state ST1).

According to feature E4, if the supply of operating power is stopped before a transition to the first or second gaming state occurs in a game in which a winning maintenance role has been won in the role lottery process, and then the supply of operating power is resumed, the gaming state can be transitioned to the second gaming state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. This prevents a player who has earned the right to play the game in the second gaming state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, from being disadvantaged by being unable to play the game in the second gaming state due to the supply of operating power being stopped.

Feature E5. As the role selected by the role lottery process, there are replay roles (normal replay role, 1st to 2nd RT replay role, 1st to 2nd fall replay role) that are awarded a replay privilege when a corresponding winning occurs,
A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, wherein the second gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability of winning the re-play role is higher than in the normal gaming state.

According to feature E5, if the supply of operating power is stopped before a transition to the first or second gaming state occurs in a game in which a winning maintenance role has been won in the role lottery process, and then the supply of operating power is resumed, the gaming state can be transitioned to the second gaming state, in which the probability of winning a replay role is higher than in the normal gaming state. This prevents a player who has acquired the right to play a game in the second gaming state, in which the probability of winning a replay role is higher than in the normal gaming state, from being disadvantaged by being unable to play the game in the second gaming state due to the supply of operating power being stopped.

Feature E6. Equipped with a picture display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) that variably displays pictures (designs),
The role lottery execution means executes the role lottery process before the variable display of the picture is started,
This gaming machine is provided with a means (a function of executing the processing of step S406 in the main MPU 72) for storing information corresponding to the winning maintenance role in a storage means (a second calculation target area 111) before the variable display of the picture is started when the winning maintenance role is won in the role lottery processing,
The first transition means transitions the gaming state to the first gaming state as the occurrence of the predetermined winning, based on the display of a stop result corresponding to the winning maintenance role being displayed when the variable display of the pattern has ended in a situation where information corresponding to the winning maintenance role is stored in the storage means,
A gaming machine described in any one of features E1 to E5, characterized in that the second transition means transitions the gaming state to the second gaming state by storing information corresponding to the second gaming state (information of ``1'' in internal RT state flag 153) in the storage means based on the fact that the stop result corresponding to the winning maintenance role is not displayed when the display of the changing pattern has ended in a situation where information corresponding to the winning maintenance role is stored in the storage means.

According to feature E6, rather than storing information corresponding to the second gaming state when a winning maintenance role is won, information corresponding to the second gaming state is stored when it is confirmed that the winning maintenance corresponding stop result is not displayed after the image change display. This makes it possible to prevent information corresponding to the second gaming state from being stored unnecessarily. In this case, by including the configuration of feature E1, the gaming state can be transitioned to the second gaming state based on the winning maintenance role being won and not the second gaming state when the supply of operating power is started. Therefore, in a game in which a winning maintenance role is won in the role lottery process, if the supply of operating power is stopped before the transition to the first gaming state or the second gaming state occurs, and then the supply of operating power is resumed, the gaming state can be transitioned to the second gaming state. This prevents players from suffering disadvantages due to the supply of operating power being stopped.

Note that the configurations of Features E1 to E6 may also be combined with one or more of Features A1 to A12, Features B1 to B6, Features C1 to C6, Features D1 to D7, Features E1 to E6, Features F1 to F10, Features G1 to G7, Features H1 to H8, and Features I1 to I6. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved through the combined configurations.

The invention relating to Feature Group E above can solve the following problems:

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, pachinko machines have a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores gaming balls awarded to players. The gaming balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a gaming ball launcher and launched toward the gaming area in response to the player's launch operation. When a gaming ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the gaming ball is paid out from a payout device to the tray storage section. In addition, pachinko machines are also known that have a configuration in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section. In this case, gaming balls stored in the upper tray storage section are guided to the gaming ball launcher, and surplus gaming balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

In addition, in a slot machine, when medals have been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. When the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control, causing the reels to start spinning, and if the stop button is operated while the reels are spinning, the control means executes rotation stop control, causing the reels to stop spinning. If the result of the reels stopping after spinning has stopped corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to that winning combination is awarded to the player.

Amusement machines such as those exemplified above need to deal appropriately with power outages, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature Group F>
Feature F1. A predetermined storage execution means (a function for executing the processes of steps S4003 to S4005 and S4007 in the main MPU 72) for storing predetermined setting information (information of "1" in the suggested operation flag 154) in a predetermined storage means (second calculation target area 111) based on a predetermined setting operation (operation of the left stop button 42 and start lever 41 while the setting value update process is being executed) during supply start processing (main processing, setting value update process) that is executed when the supply of operating power is started;
a predetermined operation execution means (a function of executing the processing of steps S4301 to S4318 of the main MPU 72, a function of executing the processing of steps S4601 to S4609 of the main MPU 72 in the first to eighth and tenth to thirteenth embodiments, and a function of executing the processing of steps S6601 to S6610 of the main MPU 72 in the ninth embodiment) for executing a predetermined operation (at least one of stopping playing and automatic settlement) based on the occurrence of a predetermined start trigger (the end of the advantageous zone SC2 or the end of the bonus state when the limited total net increase number of game media is equal to or greater than a predetermined suggested reference number) when the predetermined setting information is stored in the predetermined storage means after the processing at the start of supply has ended and processing for progressing the game (normal processing) has begun;
an information erasing means (a function of executing the processes of steps S4304 and S4317 in the main MPU 72) for erasing the predetermined setting information stored in the predetermined storage means when the predetermined operation is executed in a situation where the predetermined setting information is stored in the predetermined storage means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature F1, a predetermined setting operation can be performed to set a predetermined action to be executed when a predetermined start trigger occurs. This allows the player to focus on whether or not the predetermined action will be executed when the predetermined start trigger occurs, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, if a predetermined action is executed when the predetermined setting information is stored in the predetermined storage means, the predetermined setting information stored in the predetermined storage means is erased. This makes it possible to set the game so that the predetermined action will not be executed even if the next predetermined start trigger occurs. This eliminates the need for the amusement hall manager to perform an operation to erase the predetermined setting information, and allows the game to switch to a state where the predetermined action will not be executed even if a predetermined start trigger occurs after the execution of the predetermined action. This reduces the management burden on the amusement hall manager.

Feature F2: The predetermined operation execution means
A means for executing an execution lottery process (first to third suggestive action lottery) when the predetermined start trigger occurs in a situation where the predetermined setting information is stored in the predetermined storage means (a function for executing the processing of steps S4306 to S4310 in the main MPU 72, a function for executing the processing of steps S4601 to S4604 in the main MPU 72 in the first to eighth and tenth to thirteenth embodiments, and a function for executing the processing of steps S6601 to S6604 in the main MPU 72 in the ninth embodiment);
A means for executing the predetermined operation when an execution lottery is won in the execution lottery process (a function for executing the processes of steps S4401 to S4406 in the main MPU 72, and a function for executing the processes of steps S4501 to S4503 in the main MPU 72);
Equipped with
The gaming machine described in feature F1 is characterized in that the information erasing means is equipped with a means (a function to execute the processing of steps S4304 and S4317 in the main MPU 72) for erasing the specified setting information stored in the specified storage means if the execution lottery process does not result in an execution win.

According to Feature F2, the predetermined setting information stored in the predetermined storage means is erased if the execution lottery process, which is executed when a predetermined start trigger occurs while the predetermined setting information is stored in the predetermined storage means, does not result in an execution win. Furthermore, in a device having the configuration of Feature F1, the predetermined setting information stored in the predetermined storage means is also erased when a predetermined action is executed while the predetermined setting information is stored in the predetermined storage means. Therefore, the timing at which the predetermined action can be executed can be set to the timing at which the first predetermined start trigger occurs after the predetermined setting information is stored in the predetermined storage means. This draws attention to whether or not the predetermined action will be executed when the first predetermined start trigger occurs after the predetermined setting information is stored in the predetermined storage means, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Feature F3: Equipped with a setting means (a function for executing the processing of steps S4001 to S4006 in the main MPU 72) for setting a setting value to be used from among multiple setting values ("Setting 1" to "Setting 6") corresponding to the player's advantage level,
A gaming machine described in feature F1 or F2, characterized in that when the specified start trigger occurs while the specified setting information is stored in the specified storage means, information on the setting value set as the target for use is suggested using at least one of the probability that the specified action will be executed and whether or not the specified action will be executed.

According to feature F3, the player's advantage changes depending on the setting value set as the target of use, so setting value information is of great interest to players. By using at least one of the probability of a predetermined action being performed and whether or not the predetermined action is performed, information on the setting value set as the target of use is suggested, which increases attention to whether or not the predetermined action will be performed, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Feature F4. There are multiple types of events as the predetermined start trigger (an event in which the advantageous zone SC2 ends when the limited total net increase in the number of gaming media is equal to or greater than a predetermined suggestion standard number, an event in which the bonus state ends),
This gaming machine is a gaming machine described in any one of features F1 to F3, characterized in that it is equipped with a trigger change means (a function that executes the processing of steps S4003 to S4005 and step S4008 in the main MPU 72) that changes the type of the specified start trigger based on a specific setting operation (operation of the right stop button 44 and start lever 41 while the setting value update process is being executed).

Feature F4 allows the amusement hall manager to select the type of predetermined start trigger by performing a specific setting operation. This allows the amusement hall manager to know in advance the type of event that will trigger the execution of a predetermined action on the gaming machine.

Feature F5. A setting means (a function that executes the processing of steps S4001 to S4006 in the main MPU 72) that sets a setting value to be used from multiple setting values ("Setting 1" to "Setting 6") corresponding to the player's advantage level;
a means for executing a predetermined setting-related process (setting value update process) related to the setting value when the supply of operating power is started (a function for executing the setting value update process in the main MPU 72);
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features F1 to F4, characterized in that the specified storage execution means stores the specified setting information in the specified storage means based on the specified setting operation being performed while the specified setting-related processing is being executed.

Feature F5 allows the amusement hall manager to store the specified setting information in the specified storage means by performing a specified setting operation while a specified setting-related process related to a setting value is being executed. This reduces the management burden on the amusement hall manager compared to a configuration in which the period during which the specified setting-related process is executed and the period during which the specified setting information can be stored in the specified storage means by performing a specified setting operation do not overlap.

Feature F6. A gaming machine described in any one of Features F1 to F5, wherein the predetermined start trigger occurs based on the end of a favorable situation (advantageous section SC2) that is more favorable to the player than the normal situation (normal section SC1).

According to feature F6, the timing at which an advantageous situation that is more advantageous to the player than the normal situation ends is a time when the player's interest may wane. However, by configuring a predetermined start trigger to occur at this timing, the player can focus on whether or not a predetermined action will be performed when the advantageous situation ends, thereby increasing the player's interest.

Feature F7. A gaming machine as described in Feature F6, wherein the predetermined start trigger occurs when a predetermined amount of profit or more (profit resulting from the limited total net increase in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone SC2 being equal to or greater than a predetermined suggested reference number) is awarded to the player and the advantageous situation ends.

According to feature F7, a predetermined start trigger occurs when the advantageous situation ends with the player having been awarded a predetermined amount of profit or more, but the predetermined start trigger does not occur if the advantageous situation ends when the player has only been awarded a profit less than the predetermined amount. This makes it possible to prevent a predetermined action from being executed when the advantageous situation ends if the advantageous situation ends in a short period of time and the player has only been awarded a profit less than the predetermined amount. When the advantageous situation ends when the player has been awarded a profit greater than the predetermined amount, the player can be drawn to whether or not a predetermined action will be executed.

Feature F8. A gaming machine as described in Feature F7, characterized in that if the advantageous situation ends when the player has not been awarded a profit equal to or greater than the predetermined amount, the predetermined setting information remains stored in the predetermined storage means.

According to feature F8, if an advantageous situation ends when the profit awarded to the player in that advantageous situation is less than a predetermined amount, the predetermined setting information remains stored in the predetermined storage means, so that if the advantageous situation ends later when the profit awarded to the player in that advantageous situation is equal to or greater than the predetermined amount, the predetermined action can be executed. This reduces the possibility that the predetermined setting information will be erased without the predetermined action being executed, even though the amusement hall manager has performed the predetermined setting operation.

Feature F9. Equipped with a storage means (a credit counter in the second calculation target area 111, a function for executing the processing of step S2311 in the main MPU 72, and a function for executing the processing of steps S4906 to S4908 and step S4910 in the main MPU 72) for storing and storing game values (medals) as virtual game values (virtual medals),
A gaming machine described in any one of features F1 to F8, characterized in that the predetermined operation is an operation (automatic settlement) of granting to the player the same number of game values as the number of virtual game values stored in the storage means.

Feature F9 draws the player's attention to whether an action will be executed to grant the player the same number of game values as the number of game values stored when a predetermined start trigger occurs, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Feature F10. A gaming machine described in any one of Features F1 to F9, characterized in that, when the predetermined action is executed, the machine enters a state in which game play cannot be started until a predetermined release operation (operation of the reset button 56) is performed.

Feature F10 draws the player's attention to whether or not the game will be unable to start when the specified start trigger occurs, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Note that one or more of the following configurations may be applied to the configurations of Features F1 to F10: Features A1 to A12, Features B1 to B6, Features C1 to C6, Features D1 to D7, Features E1 to E6, Features F1 to F10, Features G1 to G7, Features H1 to H8, and Features I1 to I6. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved through the combined configurations.

<Feature Group G>
Feature G1. Means for generating an advantageous situation (advantageous section SC2) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal situation (normal section SC1) (function for executing the processing of steps S501 to S506 in the master MPU 72, function for executing the processing of steps S701 to S704 in the master MPU 72),
a predetermined operation execution means (a function for executing the processing of steps S4301 to S4318 in the main MPU 72, a function for executing the processing of steps S4601 to S4609 in the main MPU 72, a function for executing the processing of steps S4601 to S4609 in the main MPU 72 in the first to eighth and tenth to thirteenth embodiments, and a function for executing the processing of steps S6601 to S6610 in the main MPU 72 in the ninth embodiment) for executing a predetermined operation (at least one of stopping playing and automatic settlement) based on the fact that a profit of a predetermined amount or more (a profit in which the limited total net increase in the number of game media in the advantageous section SC2 is equal to or greater than a predetermined suggestion reference number) is awarded to the player and the advantageous situation ends;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature G1, the timing at which an advantageous situation that is more advantageous to the player than normal circumstances ends is a time when the player's interest may wane. However, by including a predetermined action execution means that executes a predetermined action when the advantageous situation ends after a predetermined amount of profit or more has been awarded to the player, the player's attention can be drawn to whether or not the predetermined action will be executed when the advantageous situation ends while the player has been awarded a predetermined amount of profit or more, thereby increasing the player's interest.

A predetermined action may be executed when the advantageous situation ends with the player receiving a profit equal to or greater than a predetermined amount, but the predetermined action may not be executed if the advantageous situation ends with the player receiving less than the predetermined amount of profit. This makes it possible to prevent the predetermined action from being executed when the advantageous situation ends in a short period of time and the player receiving less than the predetermined amount of profit.

Feature G2. A means (a function to execute the processing of steps S902 to S905 in the main MPU 72) for transitioning the game state to an advantageous game state (ART state ST6) advantageous to the player based on the occurrence of a transition opportunity (a second RT replay winning in the preparation state ST5) in the advantageous situation;
A means for ending the advantageous game state based on the occurrence of an advantageous ending trigger (the number of remaining games to be continued in the ART state ST6 becoming "0") in the advantageous game state (a function for executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004 in the main MPU 72);
Equipped with
This gaming machine is characterized by having a means (a function to execute the processing of steps S1413 and S1414 in the main MPU 72) to end the advantageous gaming state even if the advantageous ending trigger has not occurred, when the advantageous ending condition of the advantageous situation (the number of games played in the advantageous zone SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, or the limited total net increase in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone SC2 reaches the upper limit net increase) is met.

According to feature G2, when the favorable ending conditions of the advantageous situation are met, the advantageous gaming state can be ended even if the advantageous ending trigger has not occurred. If the advantageous gaming state were configured to continue until the game ending trigger occurred even when the favorable ending conditions of the advantageous situation were met, it would be necessary to postpone the end of the advantageous situation until the advantageous ending trigger occurred, even after the advantageous ending conditions were met. In contrast, by ending the advantageous gaming state when the favorable ending conditions of the advantageous situation are met even if the advantageous ending trigger has not occurred, it is possible to prevent an advantageous situation that is more favorable to the player than the normal situation from continuing for too long.

Feature G3. A gaming machine as described in Feature G1 or G2, wherein the predetermined action execution means, when the advantageous situation ends because the advantageous ending condition of the advantageous situation (the number of games played in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, or the limited total net increase in the number of gaming media in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit net increase) is met, executes the predetermined action in a different manner or with a different probability than when the advantageous situation ends without the advantageous ending condition being met even though the player has been awarded a profit equal to or greater than the predetermined amount.

According to Feature G3, if an advantageous situation continues until an advantageous end condition is met, when the advantageous situation ends, the manner in which a predetermined action is executed or the probability of executing the predetermined action is made different from when the advantageous situation ends without the advantageous end condition being met, even though the player has been awarded a profit of a predetermined amount or more. This increases the sense of specialness that the advantageous situation continued until the advantageous end condition was met, and increases the enjoyment of the game.

Feature G4: The predetermined operation execution means
A means for executing an execution lottery process (first to third suggestive action lottery) based on the fact that the player has been awarded a profit equal to or greater than the predetermined amount and the advantageous situation has ended (a function for executing the processes of steps S4306 to S4310 in the main MPU 72, and a function for executing the processes of steps S4601 to S4604 in the main MPU 72);
A means for executing the predetermined operation when an execution lottery is won in the execution lottery process (a function for executing the processes of steps S4401 to S4406 in the main MPU 72, and a function for executing the processes of steps S4501 to S4503 in the main MPU 72);
A gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to feature G4, by configuring the execution lottery process to execute a predetermined action if an execution win is achieved, it is possible to increase interest in the game by drawing attention to whether or not the predetermined action will be executed when the advantageous situation ends with the player having been awarded a predetermined amount of profit. Furthermore, the execution lottery process can be configured to be executed when the advantageous situation ends with the player having been awarded a predetermined amount of profit, but not to be executed when the advantageous situation ends with the player having been awarded less than the predetermined amount of profit. This makes it possible to prevent the predetermined action from being executed when the advantageous situation ends in a short period of time and the player having been awarded less than the predetermined amount of profit.

Feature G5: Equipped with a setting means (a function for executing the processing of steps S4001 to S4006 in the main MPU 72) for setting a setting value to be used from among multiple setting values ("Setting 1" to "Setting 6") corresponding to the player's advantage level,
A gaming machine described in any one of features G1 to G4, characterized in that when a profit of more than the predetermined amount is awarded to the player and the advantageous situation ends, information on the setting value set as the target for use is suggested using at least one of the probability of the predetermined action being executed and whether or not the predetermined action is executed.

According to feature G5, the player's advantage changes depending on the setting value set as the target of use, so setting value information is of great interest to players. By using at least one of the probability of a predetermined action being performed and whether or not the predetermined action is performed, information on the setting value set as the target of use is suggested, which increases attention to whether or not the predetermined action will be performed, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Feature G6: Equipped with a storage means (a credit counter in the second calculation target area 111, a function for executing the processing of step S2311 in the main MPU 72, a function for executing the processing of steps S4906 to S4908 and step S4910 in the main MPU 72) for storing and storing game values (medals) as virtual game values (virtual medals),
A gaming machine described in any one of features G1 to G5, characterized in that the predetermined operation is an operation (automatic settlement) of granting to the player the same number of game values as the number of virtual game values stored in the storage means.

Feature G6 draws the player's attention to whether an action will be executed to grant the player the same number of game values as the number of stored game values when a predetermined start trigger occurs, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Feature G7. A gaming machine described in any one of Features G1 to G6, characterized in that, when the predetermined action is executed, the machine enters a state in which game play cannot be started until a predetermined release operation (operation of the reset button 56) is performed.

Feature G7 draws the player's attention to whether or not the game will be unable to start when the specified start trigger occurs, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Note that one or more of the following configurations may be applied to the configurations of Features G1 to G7: Features A1 to A12, Features B1 to B6, Features C1 to C6, Features D1 to D7, Features E1 to E6, Features F1 to F10, Features G1 to G7, Features H1 to H8, and Features I1 to I6. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved through the combined configurations.

The invention relating to the above feature groups F and G can solve the following problems:

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, pachinko machines have a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores gaming balls awarded to players. The gaming balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a gaming ball launcher and launched toward the gaming area in response to the player's launch operation. When a gaming ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the gaming ball is paid out from a payout device to the tray storage section. In addition, pachinko machines are also known that have a configuration in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section. In this case, gaming balls stored in the upper tray storage section are guided to the gaming ball launcher, and surplus gaming balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

In addition, in a slot machine, when medals have been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. When the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control, causing the reels to start spinning, and if the stop button is operated while the reels are spinning, the control means executes rotation stop control, causing the reels to stop spinning. If the result of the reels stopping after spinning has stopped corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to that winning combination is awarded to the player.

Here, gaming machines such as those exemplified above need to be designed to enhance the enjoyment of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1. A first output means for externally outputting a predetermined state signal (a signal during the first to third states) for enabling a device (data counter DC) outside the gaming machine to recognize that the gaming machine is in a predetermined gaming state (bonus state, advantageous zone SC2, ART state ST6) (a function for executing the processing of steps S4705 to S4710 of the main MPU 72 in the first to tenth embodiments, a function for executing the processing of steps S5101 to S5114 of the main MPU 72, a function for executing the processing of steps S7405 to S7410 of the main MPU 72 in the eleventh embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S7601 to S7609 of the main MPU 72 in the twelfth embodiment, and a function for executing the processing of steps S8001 to S8009 of the main MPU 72 in the thirteenth embodiment);
a second output means for externally outputting an event response signal (insertion signal, payout signal) based on the occurrence of a target event (either consumption of gaming media or provision of gaming media), which is either the use of gaming value (medals and virtual medals) owned by the player or provision of said gaming value to the player (a function for executing the processing of steps S4801 to S4819 of the main MPU 72 in the first to eleventh embodiments, a function for executing the processing of steps S5001 to S5017 of the main MPU 72, a function for executing the processing of steps S7501 to S7517 of the main MPU 72 in the twelfth embodiment, and a function for executing the processing of steps S7802 to S7818 of the main MPU 72 in the thirteenth embodiment);
A period adjustment means (the interval adjustment timer counter 164 in the first to twelfth embodiments, the standby counter 231 in the thirteenth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S4713 of the main MPU 72 in the first to tenth embodiments, steps S4806, S4817 and S4818 of the main MPU 72 in the first to tenth embodiments) for causing the output period of the event response signal to be shifted by a predetermined period or more (500 milliseconds or more in the first to twelfth embodiments, and 2 seconds or more in the thirteenth embodiment) with respect to the timing at which the state of the external output of the predetermined state signal changes (the timing at which the state-in-state signal rises, the timing at which the state-in-state signal falls). a function to execute the processing of steps S4811 and S4818 by the main MPU 72, a function to execute the processing of steps S5101 to S5114 by the main MPU 72, a function to execute the processing of step S7412 by the main MPU 72 in the eleventh embodiment, a function to execute the processing of steps S7505 and S7517 by the main MPU 72 in the twelfth embodiment, a function to execute the processing of steps S7602 and S7603 by the main MPU 72, a function to execute the processing of steps S7901 to S7912 by the main MPU 72 in the thirteenth embodiment, and a function to execute the processing of step S8113 by the main MPU 72);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to Feature H1, by outputting an event response signal externally, it is possible to detect the occurrence of a target event in a device external to the gaming machine. By delaying the output period of the event response signal by a predetermined period or more from the timing at which the state of the external output of the predetermined state signal changes, it is possible to accurately detect either the use of game value in a predetermined game state or the granting of game value to a player in a device external to the gaming machine.

Feature H2: The second output means outputs the event response signal to the outside based on the fact that the game value owned by the player is used to start a game,
The gaming machine described in Feature H1 is characterized in that the period adjustment means executes a predetermined delay process (processing of step S4713 of the main MPU 72 in the first to tenth and twelfth embodiments, processing of steps S4801 to S4806, step S4817 and step S4818 of the main MPU 72, processing of step S7412 of the main MPU 72 in the eleventh embodiment, processing of steps S7901 to S7904 of the main MPU 72 in the thirteenth embodiment, processing of step S8113 of the main MPU 72) to delay the output period of the event response signal by more than the predetermined period relative to the timing when the state of the external output of the predetermined state signal switches to a state corresponding to the start of the predetermined gaming state.

According to Feature H2, by outputting an event response signal externally, it is possible to determine that gaming value has been used in a device external to the gaming machine. By ensuring a predetermined period from when the state of the external output of the predetermined state signal is switched to a state corresponding to the start of a predetermined gaming state until the output period of the event response signal begins, it is possible to ensure that the output period of the event response signal begins after the device external to the gaming machine completes processing to determine that the state of the external output of the predetermined state signal has been switched to a state corresponding to the start of a predetermined gaming state. This makes it possible for the device external to the gaming machine to accurately determine the use of gaming value in a predetermined gaming state.

Feature H3. The gaming machine described in Feature H2, wherein the period adjustment means does not execute the predetermined delay process when the state of the external output of the predetermined state signal does not switch to a state corresponding to the start of the predetermined gaming state.

According to Feature H3, in a situation where the state of the external output of the predetermined state signal does not switch to a state corresponding to the start of a predetermined gaming state, the output period of the event response signal can be started early. This makes it possible to quickly grasp that a target event has occurred in a device external to the gaming machine, which involves either the use of gaming value owned by the player or the granting of gaming value to the player.

Feature H4. A symbol display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) that displays symbols in a variable manner in each game;
A means for starting the variable display of the image even when the output period of the event response signal has not yet ended (a function for executing the process of step S3001 in the main MPU 72);
The gaming machine according to feature H2 or H3, characterized in that it is provided with:

Feature H4 allows the display of changing patterns to begin regardless of whether the output period of the event response signal has ended. Therefore, the display of changing patterns can begin earlier than in a configuration in which the start of the display of changing patterns is postponed until the output period of the event response signal has ended.

Feature H5. The second output means outputs the event response signal to the outside based on the fact that the game value has been awarded to the player as a result of the game,
A gaming machine described in any one of features H1 to H4, characterized in that the period adjustment means executes specific delay processing (processing of step S5017 of the main MPU 72 in the first to eleventh embodiments, processing of steps S5102 to S5108 of the main MPU 72, processing of steps S7505 and S7517 of the main MPU 72 in the twelfth embodiment, processing of steps S7602 and S7603 of the main MPU 72, processing of steps S7905 to S7907 of the main MPU 72 in the thirteenth embodiment, processing of step S8113 of the main MPU 72) to delay the timing at which the state of the external output of the predetermined state signal switches to a state corresponding to the end of the predetermined gaming state by more than the predetermined period with respect to the output period of the event response signal.

According to Feature H5, by externally outputting an event response signal, it is possible to know that a game value has been awarded to a player as a result of the game. By ensuring a predetermined period from the end of the output period of the event response signal until the state of the external output of the predetermined state signal is switched to a state corresponding to the end of the predetermined game state, it is possible to switch the state of the external output of the predetermined state signal to a state corresponding to the end of the predetermined game state after the process of determining that the event response signal has been output in a device external to the gaming machine is completed. This makes it possible to accurately determine the awarding of game value in a predetermined game state in a device external to the gaming machine.

Feature H6. The gaming machine described in Feature H5, wherein the period adjustment means does not execute the specific delay processing when the state of the external output of the predetermined state signal does not switch to a state corresponding to the end of the predetermined gaming state.

According to Feature H6, in a situation where the state of the external output of the predetermined state signal does not switch to a state corresponding to the end of the predetermined game state, it is possible to omit processing to delay the timing at which the state of the external output of the predetermined state signal switches to a state corresponding to the end of the predetermined game state by a predetermined period or more relative to the output period of the event response signal.

Feature H7. A gaming machine as described in Feature H5 or H6, wherein, in a situation where the state of the external output of the predetermined state signal switches to a state corresponding to the end of the predetermined game state, the game ends after the state of the external output of the predetermined state signal switches to a state corresponding to the end of the predetermined game state.

According to Feature H7, in a situation where the state of the external output of the predetermined state signal switches to a state corresponding to the end of a predetermined game state, the end of the game can be postponed until the state of the external output of the predetermined state signal switches to a state corresponding to the end of the predetermined game state, and the start of a new game after the end of the game can be postponed. This prevents a new game from starting before the state of the external output of the predetermined state signal switches to a state corresponding to the end of the predetermined game state. Therefore, it is possible to accurately grasp the award of game value in a predetermined game state using a device external to the gaming machine.

Feature H8. A gaming machine as described in Feature H7, characterized in that, in a situation where the state of the external output of the predetermined state signal does not switch to a state corresponding to the end of the predetermined gaming state, a new game can be started even if the output period of the event response signal has not ended.

According to Feature H8, in a configuration having the configuration of Feature H7 above, in which the state of the external output of the predetermined state signal switches to a state corresponding to the end of the predetermined game state, the game ends after the state of the external output of the predetermined state signal switches to a state corresponding to the end of the predetermined game state, but in a situation in which the state of the external output of the predetermined state signal does not switch to a state corresponding to the end of the predetermined game state, a new game can be started even if the output period of the event response signal has not ended. This makes it possible to start a new game early in a situation in which the state of the external output of the predetermined state signal does not switch to a state corresponding to the end of the predetermined game state. This prevents players from having to wait.

Note that one or more of the following configurations may be applied to the configurations of Features H1 to H8: Features A1 to A12, Features B1 to B6, Features C1 to C6, Features D1 to D7, Features E1 to E6, Features F1 to F10, Features G1 to G7, Features H1 to H8, and Features I1 to I6. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved through the combined configurations.

<Feature Group I>
Feature I1. A standby means (a function for executing the processing of steps S7901 to S7912 of the main MPU 72 in the thirteenth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S8113 of the main MPU 72) that causes the progress of the game based on the player's operation to wait for a predetermined standby period (the performance period of the bonus start performance, the bonus end performance, the advantageous start performance, the advantageous end performance, the ART start performance, or the ART end performance) based on the occurrence of a predetermined trigger (the start of the bonus state, the start of the advantageous zone SC2, the start of the ART state ST6, the end of the bonus state, the end of the advantageous zone SC2, or the end of the ART state ST6), which is one of the cases when a predetermined game state (bonus state, advantageous zone SC2, ART state ST6) starts or ends,
A state switching means (a standby counter 231, a function for executing the processing of steps S7909 to S7912 of the main MPU 72 in the thirteenth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S8001 to S8009 of the main MPU 72) for switching the state of the external output of a predetermined state signal (a signal during the first to third states) used to enable a device (a data counter DC) external to the gaming machine to recognize that the predetermined gaming state is being reached at a timing during the predetermined standby period;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to Feature I1, in a configuration in which, upon the occurrence of a predetermined trigger, game progress based on player operation is put on hold for a predetermined standby period, the state of the external output of the predetermined status signal is switched at a timing midway through the predetermined standby period. This ensures time between the occurrence of the predetermined trigger and the timing at which the state of the external output of the predetermined status signal is switched, as well as time from the timing at which the state of the external output of the predetermined status signal is switched to the end of the predetermined standby period, when the standby state for game progress ends.

Feature I2: A first signal output means (a function of executing the processes of steps S7802 to S7817 of the main MPU 72 in the thirteenth embodiment) that outputs a first event response signal (insertion signal) to the outside based on the fact that the game value (medals and virtual medals) owned by the player is used to start the game;
A second signal output means (a function of executing the process of step S7818 of the main MPU 72 in the thirteenth embodiment) for externally outputting a second event response signal (payout signal) based on the fact that the game value has been awarded to the player as a result of the game;
It is equipped with
A gaming machine as described in feature I1, characterized in that by setting the specified waiting period, the timing at which the state of the external output of the specified state signal is switched by the state switching means is after the output period of the second event response signal and before the output period of the first event response signal.

According to Feature I2, by externally outputting the first event response signal, it is possible to make it possible for a device external to the gaming machine to recognize that a game value owned by the player has been used to start a game, and by externally outputting the second event response signal, it is possible to make it possible for a device external to the gaming machine to recognize that a game value has been awarded to the player as a result of the game. By switching the state of the external output of the predetermined state signal at a timing later than the output period of the second event response signal, it is possible to configure the state of the external output of the predetermined state signal to be switched after the output period of the second event response signal has ended. This makes it possible for the state of the external output of the predetermined state signal to be switched after the device external to the gaming machine has completed processing to recognize that a game value has been awarded to the player as a result of the game. Therefore, it is possible for a device external to the gaming machine to accurately recognize the game value awarded in a predetermined game state.

By switching the state of the external output of the predetermined state signal before the output period of the first event response signal, the output period of the first event response signal can be made to start after the state of the external output of the predetermined state signal is switched. This allows the output period of the first event response signal to start after processing for determining that the state of the external output of the predetermined state signal has been switched is completed in a device external to the gaming machine. This makes it possible to accurately determine the gaming value used in the predetermined gaming state in a device external to the gaming machine.

Feature I3: The standby means causes the progress of the game based on the player's operation to wait for the predetermined standby period when the predetermined game state starts,
The gaming machine described in feature I1 or I2 is characterized in that the state switching means switches the state of the external output of the specified state signal to a state corresponding to the start of the specified gaming state at a timing during the specified waiting period.

According to Feature I3, even after the state of the external output of the predetermined state signal is switched to a state corresponding to the start of a predetermined game state during a predetermined waiting period, game progress can continue to be put on hold until the end of the predetermined waiting period, and the start of a new game can be postponed until the end of the predetermined waiting period. By ensuring time between when the state of the external output of the predetermined state signal is switched to a state corresponding to the start of a predetermined game state and when a new game can be started, it is possible for a device external to the gaming machine to accurately grasp the use of game value in the predetermined game state.

Feature I4. Equipped with second signal output means (a function of executing the process of step S7818 of the main MPU 72 in the thirteenth embodiment) that outputs a second event response signal (payout signal) to the outside based on the fact that game value (medals and virtual medals) has been awarded to the player as a result of the game,
A gaming machine described in feature I3, characterized in that the output period of the second event response signal is shorter than the period from the start of the specified waiting period to the time when the state of the external output of the specified state signal is switched by the state switching means to a state corresponding to the start of the specified gaming state.

According to Feature I4, by externally outputting the second event response signal, it is possible to know that a game value has been awarded to a player as a result of the game. The output period of the second event response signal is shorter than the period from the start of the predetermined waiting period to the timing when the state of the external output of the predetermined state signal is switched by the state switching means to a state corresponding to the start of the predetermined game state. Therefore, the output period of the second event response signal can end before the state of the external output of the predetermined state signal is switched to a state corresponding to the start of the predetermined game state. This makes it possible to accurately know the game value awarded to a player in a predetermined game state in a device external to the gaming machine.

Feature I5: The standby means causes the progress of the game based on the player's operation to wait for the predetermined standby period when the predetermined game state ends,
A gaming machine described in any one of features I1 to I4, characterized in that the state switching means switches the state of the external output of the specified state signal to a state corresponding to the end of the specified gaming state at a timing during the specified waiting period.

According to Feature I5, even after the state of the external output of the predetermined state signal is switched to a state corresponding to the start of a predetermined game state during a predetermined standby period, game progress can continue to be put on hold until the end of the predetermined standby period, and the start of a new game can be postponed until the end of the predetermined standby period. By ensuring time between when the state of the external output of the predetermined state signal is switched to a state corresponding to the start of a predetermined game state and when a new game can be started, it is possible for a device external to the gaming machine to accurately grasp the use of game value in the predetermined game state.

Feature I6. Equipped with second signal output means (a function of executing the process of step S7818 of the main MPU 72 in the thirteenth embodiment) that outputs a second event response signal (payout signal) to the outside based on the fact that game value (medals and virtual medals) has been awarded to the player as a result of the game,
A gaming machine described in feature I5, characterized in that the output period of the second event response signal is shorter than the period from the start of the specified waiting period to the time when the state of the external output of the specified state signal is switched by the state switching means to a state corresponding to the end of the specified gaming state.

According to Feature I6, by externally outputting the second event response signal, it is possible to know that a game value has been awarded to a player as a result of the game. The output period of the second event response signal is shorter than the period from the start of the predetermined waiting period to the timing when the state of the external output of the predetermined state signal is switched by the state switching means to a state corresponding to the start of the predetermined game state. Therefore, the output period of the second event response signal can end before the state of the external output of the predetermined state signal is switched to a state corresponding to the start of the predetermined game state. This makes it possible to accurately know the game value awarded to a player in a predetermined game state in a device external to the gaming machine.

Note that one or more of the following configurations may be applied to the configurations of Features I1 to I6: Features A1 to A12, Features B1 to B6, Features C1 to C6, Features D1 to D7, Features E1 to E6, Features F1 to F10, Features G1 to G7, Features H1 to H8, and Features I1 to I6. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved through the combined configurations.

The invention relating to the above feature groups H and I can solve the following problems:

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, pachinko machines have a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores gaming balls awarded to players. The gaming balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a gaming ball launcher and launched toward the gaming area in response to the player's launch operation. When a gaming ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the gaming ball is paid out from a payout device to the tray storage section. In addition, pachinko machines are also known that have a configuration in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section. In this case, gaming balls stored in the upper tray storage section are guided to the gaming ball launcher, and surplus gaming balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

In addition, in a slot machine, when medals have been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. When the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control, causing the reels to start spinning, and if the stop button is operated while the reels are spinning, the control means executes rotation stop control, causing the reels to stop spinning. If the result of the reels stopping after spinning has stopped corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to that winning combination is awarded to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, signals related to game results need to be output appropriately, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

Below is the basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above features can be applied.

Pachinko gaming machine: A gaming machine that has an operating means operated by the player, a gaming ball launching means that launches gaming balls based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage that guides the launched gaming balls to a specified gaming area, and various gaming components arranged within the gaming area, and that awards a bonus to the player when the gaming ball passes through a specified passage section of each of the gaming components.

Slot machines and other reel-type gaming machines: A gaming machine that starts the rotation of a rotating body based on the operation of a start operation means, stops the rotation of the rotating body based on the operation of a stop operation means, and awards a bonus to the player based on the image that appears after the rotation has stopped.

10...slot machine, 21L, 21M, 21R...display window, 32L, 32M, 32R...reels, 41...start lever, 42...left stop button, 43...middle stop button, 44...right stop button, 47...credit insertion button, 51...settlement button, 56...reset button, 65...credit display section, 66...multipurpose display section, 72...main MPU, 74...main RAM, 85...ratio display, 92...performance MPU, 101...stack area for specific control, 102...work area for non-specific control, 103...work area for specific control, 104...stack area for non-specific control, 108...top area, 111...second calculation target area, 114...checksum area, 121...sound table storage area, 125...bet number counter, 127...first sound set flag, 128...second sound set flag, 153...internal RT state flag, 154...suggested operation flag, 164...interval adjustment timer counter, 171...area for checksum, 181...stack area for specific control, 182...work area for non-specific control, 183...work area for specific control, 184...stack area for non-specific control, 188...top area, 193...area for checksum, 201...stack area for specific control, 202...work area for non-specific control, 203...work area for specific control, 204...stack area for non-specific control, 208...top area, 213...area for specific checksum, 214...area for non-specific checksum, 231...waiting counter, DC...data counter, SC1...normal interval, SC2...advantageous interval, ST1...normal game state, ST2...internal RT state, ST6...ART state.

Claims (1)

A control means for executing various processes;
a predetermined storage means for temporarily storing information when the various processes are executed by the control means;
Equipped with
The control means
a first predetermined process execution means for executing a first predetermined process among the various processes;
a second predetermined process execution means for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes;
Equipped with
The predetermined storage means
a first corresponding storage area into which information is written when the first predetermined process is being executed, but into which information is not written when the second predetermined process is being executed;
a second corresponding storage area into which information is written when the second predetermined process is being executed, but into which information is not written when the first predetermined process is being executed;
a predetermined save area in which predetermined save correspondence information used to execute the first predetermined process is saved when a situation in which the first predetermined process is being executed changes to a situation in which the second predetermined process is being executed;
Equipped with
The first predetermined process is executed when a process at the start of supply of operating power is started, the process being executed when the supply of operating power is started;
the second predetermined processing execution means includes an abnormality identification execution means that executes, as the second predetermined processing in the processing at the start of supply, an abnormality identification processing for identifying whether or not the content of information in a specific target area in the specific storage means that does not include the specific save area has changed from the content at the time of the previous stop of supply of operating power, and identifying that an information abnormality has occurred if the content has changed;
the predetermined save area is set as a storage area of a first address in the predetermined storage means, or as a storage area of a predetermined range of consecutive addresses from the first address so as to include the first address,
the specific target area is set as a storage area of a specific range of consecutive addresses from the next address to the final address of the specific save area in the specific storage means,
the predetermined storage means includes a predetermined corresponding storage area that is used in the abnormality identification process to identify whether the content of the information in the identified target area has changed from the content at the previous time when the supply of operating power was stopped,
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific target area does not include the predetermined corresponding memory area.